Replace TRUE/FALSE with boolean values true/false - part 3

Signed-off-by: Michele Calgaro <michele.calgaro@yahoo.it>

276 files changed, 2555 insertions, 2555 deletions

diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqaccel.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqaccel.3qt
index 7373921e7..fa8ad6aef 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqaccel.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqaccel.3qt
@@ -224,11 +224,11 @@ If \fIid\fR is negative, then the item will be assigned a unique negative identi
 .PP
 Example: t14/gamebrd.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQAccel::isEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the accelerator is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the accelerator is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setEnabled() and isItemEnabled().
 .SH "bool TQAccel::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the accelerator item with the identifier \fIid\fR is enabled. Returns FALSE if the item is disabled or cannot be found.
+Returns true if the accelerator item with the identifier \fIid\fR is enabled. Returns false if the item is disabled or cannot be found.
 .PP
 See also setItemEnabled() and isEnabled().
 .SH "TQKeySequence TQAccel::key ( int id )"
@@ -244,13 +244,13 @@ Removes the accelerator item with the identifier \fIid\fR.
 .SH "void TQAccel::repairEventFilter ()"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. serves no purpose anymore
 .SH "void TQAccel::setEnabled ( bool enable )"
-Enables the accelerator if \fIenable\fR is TRUE, or disables it if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Enables the accelerator if \fIenable\fR is true, or disables it if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 Individual keys can also be enabled or disabled using setItemEnabled(). To work, a key must be an enabled item in an enabled TQAccel.
 .PP
 See also isEnabled() and setItemEnabled().
 .SH "void TQAccel::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )"
-Enables the accelerator item with the identifier \fIid\fR if \fIenable\fR is TRUE, and disables item \fIid\fR if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Enables the accelerator item with the identifier \fIid\fR if \fIenable\fR is true, and disables item \fIid\fR if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 To work, an item must be enabled and be in an enabled TQAccel.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqaccessible.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqaccessible.3qt
index a928e625d..cb8aee35f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqaccessible.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqaccessible.3qt
@@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ This enum specifies string information that an accessible object returns.
 \fCTQAccessible::Accelerator\fR - The keyboard shortcut that executes the default action
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "bool TQAccessible::isActive ()\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if an accessibility implementation has been requested, during the runtime of the application, otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if an accessibility implementation has been requested, during the runtime of the application, otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Use this function to prevent potentially expensive notifications via updateAccessibility().
 .SH "QRESULT TQAccessible::queryAccessibleInterface ( TQObject * object, TQAccessibleInterface ** iface )\fC [static]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqaccessibleinterface.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqaccessibleinterface.3qt
index b5e5c71d5..c218bb38c 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqaccessibleinterface.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqaccessibleinterface.3qt
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ All visual objects provide this information.
 .SH "bool TQAccessibleInterface::doDefaultAction ( int control )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 Calling this function performs the default action of the child object specified by \fIcontrol\fR, or the default action of the object itself if \fIcontrol\fR is 0.
 .SH "bool TQAccessibleInterface::isValid () const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if all the data necessary to use this interface implementation is valid (e.g. all pointers are non-null), otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if all the data necessary to use this interface implementation is valid (e.g. all pointers are non-null), otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int TQAccessibleInterface::navigate ( NavDirection direction, int startControl ) const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 This function traverses to another object, or to a sub-element of the current object. \fIdirection\fR specifies in which direction to navigate, and \fIstartControl\fR specifies the start point of the navigation, which is either 0 if the navigation starts at the object itself, or an ID of one of the object's sub-elements.
 .PP
@@ -122,11 +122,11 @@ See also text(), role(), and state().
 .SH "bool TQAccessibleInterface::setFocus ( int control )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 Gives the focus to the child object specified by \fIcontrol\fR, or to the object itself if \fIcontrol\fR is 0.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the focus could be set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the focus could be set; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQAccessibleInterface::setSelected ( int control, bool on, bool extend )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-Sets the selection of the child object with ID \fIcontrol\fR to \fIon\fR. If \fIextend\fR is TRUE, all child elements between the focused item and the specified child object have their selection set to \fIon\fR.
+Sets the selection of the child object with ID \fIcontrol\fR to \fIon\fR. If \fIextend\fR is true, all child elements between the focused item and the specified child object have their selection set to \fIon\fR.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the selection could be set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the selection could be set; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setFocus() and clearSelection().
 .SH "void TQAccessibleInterface::setText ( Text t, int control, const TQString & text )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqaction.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqaction.3qt
index 6d1f6bdbf..9339b5017 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqaction.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqaction.3qt
@@ -27,10 +27,10 @@ Inherited by TQActionGroup.
 .BI "\fBTQAction\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = false )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = false )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQAction ( TQObject * parent, const char * name, bool toggle )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
@@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ In GUI applications many commands can be invoked via a menu option, a toolbar bu
 .PP
 A TQAction may contain an icon, a menu text, an accelerator, a status text, a whats this text and a tool tip. Most of these can be set in the constructor. They can also be set independently with setIconSet(), setText(), setMenuText(), setToolTip(), setStatusTip(), setWhatsThis() and setAccel().
 .PP
-An action may be a toggle action e.g. a Bold toolbar button, or a command action, e.g. 'Open File' to invoke an open file dialog. Toggle actions emit the toggled() signal when their state changes. Both command and toggle actions emit the activated() signal when they are invoked. Use setToggleAction() to set an action's toggled status. To see if an action is a toggle action use isToggleAction(). A toggle action may be "on", isOn() returns TRUE, or "off", isOn() returns FALSE.
+An action may be a toggle action e.g. a Bold toolbar button, or a command action, e.g. 'Open File' to invoke an open file dialog. Toggle actions emit the toggled() signal when their state changes. Both command and toggle actions emit the activated() signal when they are invoked. Use setToggleAction() to set an action's toggled status. To see if an action is a toggle action use isToggleAction(). A toggle action may be "on", isOn() returns true, or "off", isOn() returns false.
 .PP
 Actions are added to widgets (menus or toolbars) using addTo(), and removed using removeFrom().
 .PP
@@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ For accelerators and status tips to work, \fIparent\fR must either be a widget,
 .PP
 The action uses a stripped version of \fImenuText\fR (e.g. "&Menu Option..." becomes "Menu Option") as descriptive text for toolbuttons. You can override this by setting a specific description with setText(). The same text and \fIaccel\fR will be used for tool tips and status tips unless you provide text for these using setToolTip() and setStatusTip().
 .PP
-Call setToggleAction(TRUE) to make the action a toggle action.
+Call setToggleAction(true) to make the action a toggle action.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child of a widget that the action is later added to.
 .SH "TQAction::TQAction ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
@@ -260,23 +260,23 @@ For accelerators and status tips to work, \fIparent\fR must either be a widget,
 .PP
 The action uses a stripped version of \fImenuText\fR (e.g. "&Menu Option..." becomes "Menu Option") as descriptive text for toolbuttons. You can override this by setting a specific description with setText(). The same text and \fIaccel\fR will be used for tool tips and status tips unless you provide text for these using setToolTip() and setStatusTip().
 .PP
-Call setToggleAction(TRUE) to make the action a toggle action.
+Call setToggleAction(true) to make the action a toggle action.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child of a widget that the action is later added to.
-.SH "TQAction::TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQAction::TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = false )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-This constructor creates an action with the following properties: the description \fItext\fR, the icon or iconset \fIicon\fR, the menu text \fImenuText\fR and keyboard accelerator \fIaccel\fR. It is a child of \fIparent\fR and called \fIname\fR. If \fItoggle\fR is TRUE the action will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action.
+This constructor creates an action with the following properties: the description \fItext\fR, the icon or iconset \fIicon\fR, the menu text \fImenuText\fR and keyboard accelerator \fIaccel\fR. It is a child of \fIparent\fR and called \fIname\fR. If \fItoggle\fR is true the action will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action.
 .PP
 If \fIparent\fR is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes a member of it.
 .PP
 For accelerators and status tips to work, \fIparent\fR must either be a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
 .PP
 The \fItext\fR and \fIaccel\fR will be used for tool tips and status tips unless you provide specific text for these using setToolTip() and setStatusTip().
-.SH "TQAction::TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQAction::TQAction ( const TQString & text, const TQString & menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0, bool toggle = false )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-This constructor results in an icon-less action with the description \fItext\fR, the menu text \fImenuText\fR and the keyboard accelerator \fIaccel\fR. Its parent is \fIparent\fR and it is called \fIname\fR. If \fItoggle\fR is TRUE the action will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action.
+This constructor results in an icon-less action with the description \fItext\fR, the menu text \fImenuText\fR and the keyboard accelerator \fIaccel\fR. Its parent is \fIparent\fR and it is called \fIname\fR. If \fItoggle\fR is true the action will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action.
 .PP
 The action automatically becomes a member of \fIparent\fR if \fIparent\fR is a TQActionGroup.
 .PP
@@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ The \fItext\fR and \fIaccel\fR will be used for tool tips and status tips unless
 .PP
 Constructs an action called \fIname\fR with parent \fIparent\fR.
 .PP
-If \fItoggle\fR is TRUE the action will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action.
+If \fItoggle\fR is true the action will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action.
 .PP
 If \fIparent\fR is a TQActionGroup, the new action inserts itself into \fIparent\fR.
 .PP
@@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Currently actions may be added to TQToolBar and TQPopupMenu widgets.
 .PP
 An action added to a tool bar is automatically displayed as a tool button; an action added to a pop up menu appears as a menu option.
 .PP
-addTo() returns TRUE if the action was added successfully and FALSE otherwise. (If \fIw\fR is not a TQToolBar or TQPopupMenu the action will not be added and FALSE will be returned.)
+addTo() returns true if the action was added successfully and false otherwise. (If \fIw\fR is not a TQToolBar or TQPopupMenu the action will not be added and false will be returned.)
 .PP
 See also removeFrom().
 .PP
@@ -332,25 +332,25 @@ This function is called from the addTo() function when it has created a menu ite
 .SH "TQIconSet TQAction::iconSet () const"
 Returns the action's icon. See the "iconSet" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQAction::isEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the action is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "enabled" property for details.
+Returns true if the action is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "enabled" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQAction::isOn () const"
-Returns TRUE if a toggle action is on; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "on" property for details.
+Returns true if a toggle action is on; otherwise returns false. See the "on" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQAction::isToggleAction () const"
-Returns TRUE if the action is a toggle action; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "toggleAction" property for details.
+Returns true if the action is a toggle action; otherwise returns false. See the "toggleAction" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQAction::isVisible () const"
-Returns TRUE if the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars); otherwise returns FALSE. See the "visible" property for details.
+Returns true if the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars); otherwise returns false. See the "visible" property for details.
 .SH "TQString TQAction::menuText () const"
 Returns the action's menu text. See the "menuText" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQAction::removeFrom ( TQWidget * w )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Removes the action from widget \fIw\fR.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the action was removed successfully; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the action was removed successfully; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also addTo().
 .SH "void TQAction::setAccel ( const TQKeySequence & key )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the action's accelerator key to \fIkey\fR. See the "accel" property for details.
 .SH "void TQAction::setDisabled ( bool disable )\fC [slot]\fR"
-Disables the action if \fIdisable\fR is TRUE; otherwise enables the action.
+Disables the action if \fIdisable\fR is true; otherwise enables the action.
 .PP
 See the enabled documentation for more information.
 .SH "void TQAction::setEnabled ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ See also on, activate(), toggled(), and toggleAction.
 .SH "void TQAction::toggled ( bool on )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when a toggle action changes state; command actions and TQActionGroups don't emit toggled().
 .PP
-The \fIon\fR argument denotes the new state: If \fIon\fR is TRUE the toggle action is switched on, and if \fIon\fR is FALSE the toggle action is switched off.
+The \fIon\fR argument denotes the new state: If \fIon\fR is true the toggle action is switched on, and if \fIon\fR is false the toggle action is switched off.
 .PP
 To trigger a user command depending on whether a toggle action has been switched on or off connect it to a slot that takes a bool to indicate the state, e.g.
 .PP
@@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ Set this property's value with setMenuText() and get this property's value with
 .SH "bool on"
 This property holds whether a toggle action is on.
 .PP
-This property is always on (TRUE) for command actions and TQActionGroups; setOn() has no effect on them. For action's where isToggleAction() is TRUE, this property's default value is off (FALSE).
+This property is always on (true) for command actions and TQActionGroups; setOn() has no effect on them. For action's where isToggleAction() is true, this property's default value is off (false).
 .PP
 See also toggleAction.
 .PP
@@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ Set this property's value with setStatusTip() and get this property's value with
 .SH "TQString text"
 This property holds the action's descriptive text.
 .PP
-If TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel is TRUE, the text appears as a label in the relevant tool button. It also serves as the default text in menus and tool tips if these have not been specifically defined. There is no default text.
+If TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel is true, the text appears as a label in the relevant tool button. It also serves as the default text in menus and tool tips if these have not been specifically defined. There is no default text.
 .PP
 See also menuText, toolTip, and statusTip.
 .PP
@@ -476,9 +476,9 @@ Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text
 .SH "bool toggleAction"
 This property holds whether the action is a toggle action.
 .PP
-A toggle action is one which has an on/off state. For example a Bold toolbar button is either on or off. An action which is not a toggle action is a command action; a command action is simply executed, e.g. file save. This property's default is FALSE.
+A toggle action is one which has an on/off state. For example a Bold toolbar button is either on or off. An action which is not a toggle action is a command action; a command action is simply executed, e.g. file save. This property's default is false.
 .PP
-In some situations, the state of one toggle action should depend on the state of others. For example, "Left Align", "Center" and" Right Align" toggle actions are mutually exclusive. To achieve exclusive toggling, add the relevant toggle actions to a TQActionGroup with the TQActionGroup::exclusive property set to TRUE.
+In some situations, the state of one toggle action should depend on the state of others. For example, "Left Align", "Center" and" Right Align" toggle actions are mutually exclusive. To achieve exclusive toggling, add the relevant toggle actions to a TQActionGroup with the TQActionGroup::exclusive property set to true.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setToggleAction() and get this property's value with isToggleAction().
 .SH "TQString toolTip"
@@ -496,7 +496,7 @@ Set this property's value with setToolTip() and get this property's value with t
 .SH "bool visible"
 This property holds whether the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars).
 .PP
-If \fIvisible\fR is TRUE the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars) and chosen by the user; if \fIvisible\fR is FALSE the action cannot be seen or chosen by the user.
+If \fIvisible\fR is true the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars) and chosen by the user; if \fIvisible\fR is false the action cannot be seen or chosen by the user.
 .PP
 Actions which are not visible are \fInot\fR grayed out; they do not appear at all.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqactiongroup.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqactiongroup.3qt
index 11074297a..c99f9af11 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqactiongroup.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqactiongroup.3qt
@@ -86,14 +86,14 @@ Here we create a new action group. Since the action group is exclusive by defaul
 .br
         actionAlignLeft = new TQAction( TQPixmap::fromMimeSource( "textleft.xpm" ), tr( "&Left" ), CTRL + Key_L, grp, "textLeft" );
 .br
-        actionAlignLeft->setToggleAction( TRUE );
+        actionAlignLeft->setToggleAction( true );
 .fi
 .PP
 We create a left align action, add it to the toolbar and the menu and make it a toggle action. We create center and right align actions in exactly the same way.
 .PP
 The actions in an action group emit their activated() (and for toggle actions, toggled()) signals as usual.
 .PP
-The setExclusive() function is used to ensure that only one action is active at any one time: it should be used with actions which have their toggleAction set to TRUE.
+The setExclusive() function is used to ensure that only one action is active at any one time: it should be used with actions which have their toggleAction set to true.
 .PP
 Action group actions appear as individual menu options and toolbar buttons. For exclusive action groups use setUsesDropDown() to display the actions in a subwidget of any widget the action group is added to. For example, the actions would appear in a combobox in a toolbar or as a submenu in a menu.
 .PP
@@ -104,11 +104,11 @@ See also Main Window and Related Classes and Basic Widgets.
 .SH "TQActionGroup::TQActionGroup ( TQObject * parent, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs an action group called \fIname\fR, with parent \fIparent\fR.
 .PP
-The action group is exclusive by default. Call setExclusive(FALSE) to make the action group non-exclusive.
+The action group is exclusive by default. Call setExclusive(false) to make the action group non-exclusive.
 .SH "TQActionGroup::TQActionGroup ( TQObject * parent, const char * name, bool exclusive )"
 Constructs an action group called \fIname\fR, with parent \fIparent\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIexclusive\fR is TRUE only one toggle action in the group will ever be active.
+If \fIexclusive\fR is true only one toggle action in the group will ever be active.
 .PP
 See also exclusive.
 .SH "TQActionGroup::~TQActionGroup ()"
@@ -124,9 +124,9 @@ Adds a separator to the group.
 .SH "bool TQActionGroup::addTo ( TQWidget * w )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Adds this action group to the widget \fIw\fR.
 .PP
-If isExclusive() is FALSE or usesDropDown() is FALSE, the actions within the group are added to the widget individually. For example, if the widget is a menu, the actions will appear as individual menu options, and if the widget is a toolbar, the actions will appear as toolbar buttons.
+If isExclusive() is false or usesDropDown() is false, the actions within the group are added to the widget individually. For example, if the widget is a menu, the actions will appear as individual menu options, and if the widget is a toolbar, the actions will appear as toolbar buttons.
 .PP
-If both isExclusive() and usesDropDown() are TRUE, the actions are presented either in a combobox (if \fIw\fR is a toolbar) or in a submenu (if \fIw\fR is a menu).
+If both isExclusive() and usesDropDown() are true, the actions are presented either in a combobox (if \fIw\fR is a toolbar) or in a submenu (if \fIw\fR is a menu).
 .PP
 All actions should be added to the action group \fIbefore\fR the action group is added to the widget. If actions are added to the action group \fIafter\fR the action group has been added to the widget these later actions will \fInot\fR appear.
 .PP
@@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Reimplemented from TQAction.
 .PP
 Use add() instead, or better still create the action with the action group as its parent.
 .SH "bool TQActionGroup::isExclusive () const"
-Returns TRUE if the action group does exclusive toggling; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "exclusive" property for details.
+Returns true if the action group does exclusive toggling; otherwise returns false. See the "exclusive" property for details.
 .SH "void TQActionGroup::selected ( TQAction * )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted from exclusive groups when toggle actions change state.
 .PP
@@ -155,12 +155,12 @@ Sets whether the action group does exclusive toggling. See the "exclusive" prope
 .SH "void TQActionGroup::setUsesDropDown ( bool enable )"
 Sets whether the group's actions are displayed in a subwidget of the widgets the action group is added to to \fIenable\fR. See the "usesDropDown" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQActionGroup::usesDropDown () const"
-Returns TRUE if the group's actions are displayed in a subwidget of the widgets the action group is added to; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "usesDropDown" property for details.
+Returns true if the group's actions are displayed in a subwidget of the widgets the action group is added to; otherwise returns false. See the "usesDropDown" property for details.
 .SS "Property Documentation"
 .SH "bool exclusive"
 This property holds whether the action group does exclusive toggling.
 .PP
-If exclusive is TRUE only one toggle action in the action group can ever be active at any one time. If the user chooses another toggle action in the group the one they chose becomes active and the one that was active becomes inactive.
+If exclusive is true only one toggle action in the action group can ever be active at any one time. If the user chooses another toggle action in the group the one they chose becomes active and the one that was active becomes inactive.
 .PP
 See also TQAction::toggleAction.
 .PP
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Changing usesDropDown only affects \fIsubsequent\fR calls to addTo().
 .PP
 Note that setting this property for actions in a combobox causes calls to their TQAction::setVisible(), TQAction::setEnabled(), and TQAction::setDisabled() functions to have no effect.
 .PP
-This property's default is FALSE.
+This property's default is false.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setUsesDropDown() and get this property's value with usesDropDown().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqapplication.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqapplication.3qt
index 1355111ac..1e452f941 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqapplication.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqapplication.3qt
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Inherits TQObject.
 .BI "void \fBlock\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBunlock\fR ( bool wakeUpCore = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBunlock\fR ( bool wakeUpCore = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "bool \fBlocked\fR ()"
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Inherits TQObject.
 .BI "TQCursor * \fBoverrideCursor\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetOverrideCursor\fR ( const TQCursor & cursor, bool replace = FALSE )"
+.BI "void \fBsetOverrideCursor\fR ( const TQCursor & cursor, bool replace = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBrestoreOverrideCursor\fR ()"
@@ -220,13 +220,13 @@ Inherits TQObject.
 .BI "TQPalette \fBpalette\fR ( const TQWidget * w = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetPalette\fR ( const TQPalette & palette, bool informWidgets = FALSE, const char * className = 0 )"
+.BI "void \fBsetPalette\fR ( const TQPalette & palette, bool informWidgets = false, const char * className = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQFont \fBfont\fR ( const TQWidget * w = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetFont\fR ( const TQFont & font, bool informWidgets = FALSE, const char * className = 0 )"
+.BI "void \fBsetFont\fR ( const TQFont & font, bool informWidgets = false, const char * className = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQFontMetrics \fBfontMetrics\fR ()"
@@ -250,10 +250,10 @@ Inherits TQObject.
 .BI "TQClipboard * \fBclipboard\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQWidget * \fBwidgetAt\fR ( int x, int y, bool child = FALSE )"
+.BI "TQWidget * \fBwidgetAt\fR ( int x, int y, bool child = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQWidget * \fBwidgetAt\fR ( const TQPoint & pos, bool child = FALSE )"
+.BI "TQWidget * \fBwidgetAt\fR ( const TQPoint & pos, bool child = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQEventLoop * \fBeventLoop\fR ()"
@@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ Inherits TQObject.
 .BI "bool \fBisEffectEnabled\fR ( TQt::UIEffect effect )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetEffectEnabled\fR ( TQt::UIEffect effect, bool enable = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBsetEffectEnabled\fR ( TQt::UIEffect effect, bool enable = true )"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH RELATED FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
@@ -547,11 +547,11 @@ The X11 version of TQt also supports some traditional X11 command line options:
 .PP
 See also argc() and argv().
 .SH "TQApplication::TQApplication ( int & argc, char ** argv, bool GUIenabled )"
-Constructs an application object with \fIargc\fR command line arguments in \fIargv\fR. If \fIGUIenabled\fR is TRUE, a GUI application is constructed, otherwise a non-GUI (console) application is created.
+Constructs an application object with \fIargc\fR command line arguments in \fIargv\fR. If \fIGUIenabled\fR is true, a GUI application is constructed, otherwise a non-GUI (console) application is created.
 .PP
-Set \fIGUIenabled\fR to FALSE for programs without a graphical user interface that should be able to run without a window system.
+Set \fIGUIenabled\fR to false for programs without a graphical user interface that should be able to run without a window system.
 .PP
-On X11, the window system is initialized if \fIGUIenabled\fR is TRUE. If \fIGUIenabled\fR is FALSE, the application does not connect to the X-server. On Windows and Macintosh, currently the window system is always initialized, regardless of the value of GUIenabled. This may change in future versions of Qt.
+On X11, the window system is initialized if \fIGUIenabled\fR is true. If \fIGUIenabled\fR is false, the application does not connect to the X-server. On Windows and Macintosh, currently the window system is always initialized, regardless of the value of GUIenabled. This may change in future versions of Qt.
 .PP
 The following example shows how to create an application that uses a graphical interface when available.
 .PP
@@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ The following example shows how to create an application that uses a graphical i
 .br
 #else
 .br
-    bool useGUI = TRUE;
+    bool useGUI = true;
 .br
 #endif
 .br
@@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ See also quit().
 .SH "TQWidget * TQApplication::activeModalWidget ()\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns the active modal widget.
 .PP
-A modal widget is a special top level widget which is a subclass of TQDialog that specifies the modal parameter of the constructor as TRUE. A modal widget must be closed before the user can continue with other parts of the program.
+A modal widget is a special top level widget which is a subclass of TQDialog that specifies the modal parameter of the constructor as true. A modal widget must be closed before the user can continue with other parts of the program.
 .PP
 Modal widgets are organized in a stack. This function returns the active modal widget at the top of the stack.
 .PP
@@ -794,7 +794,7 @@ See also TQWidget::close(), TQWidget::closeEvent(), lastWindowClosed(), quit(),
 Examples:
 .)l action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQApplication::closingDown ()\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the application objects are being destroyed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the application objects are being destroyed; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also startingUp().
 .SH "int TQApplication::colorSpec ()\fC [static]\fR"
@@ -845,7 +845,7 @@ The desktop widget is useful for obtaining the size of the screen. It may also b
 Examples:
 .)l canvas/main.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, helpviewer/main.cpp, i18n/main.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, qwerty/main.cpp, and scribble/main.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQApplication::desktopSettingsAware ()\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns the value set by setDesktopSettingsAware(); by default TRUE.
+Returns the value set by setDesktopSettingsAware(); by default true.
 .PP
 See also setDesktopSettingsAware().
 .SH "int TQApplication::doubleClickInterval ()\fC [static]\fR"
@@ -938,11 +938,11 @@ This signal is emitted after the event loop returns from a function that could b
 .PP
 See also wakeUpCoreThread().
 .SH "bool TQApplication::hasGlobalMouseTracking ()\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if global mouse tracking is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if global mouse tracking is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setGlobalMouseTracking().
 .SH "bool TQApplication::hasPendingEvents ()"
-This function returns TRUE if there are pending events; otherwise returns FALSE. Pending events can be either from the window system or posted events using TQApplication::postEvent().
+This function returns true if there are pending events; otherwise returns false. Pending events can be either from the window system or posted events using TQApplication::postEvent().
 .SH "int TQApplication::horizontalAlignment ( int align )\fC [static]\fR"
 Strips out vertical alignment flags and transforms an alignment \fIalign\fR of AlignAuto into AlignLeft or AlignRight according to the language used. The other horizontal alignment flags are left untouched.
 .SH "void TQApplication::installTranslator ( TQTranslator * mf )"
@@ -954,15 +954,15 @@ See also removeTranslator(), translate(), and TQTranslator::load().
 .PP
 Example: i18n/main.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQApplication::isEffectEnabled ( TQt::UIEffect effect )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if \fIeffect\fR is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIeffect\fR is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-By default, TQt will try to use the desktop settings. Call setDesktopSettingsAware(FALSE) to prevent this.
+By default, TQt will try to use the desktop settings. Call setDesktopSettingsAware(false) to prevent this.
 .PP
 Note: All effects are disabled on screens running at less than 16-bit color depth.
 .PP
 See also setEffectEnabled() and TQt::UIEffect.
 .SH "bool TQApplication::isSessionRestored () const"
-Returns TRUE if the application has been restored from an earlier session; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the application has been restored from an earlier session; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also sessionId(), commitData(), and saveState().
 .SH "void TQApplication::lastWindowClosed ()\fC [signal]\fR"
@@ -1005,7 +1005,7 @@ Lock the TQt Library Mutex. If another thread has already locked the mutex, the
 .PP
 See also unlock(), locked(), and Thread Support in Qt.
 .SH "bool TQApplication::locked ()"
-Returns TRUE if the TQt Library Mutex is locked by a different thread; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the TQt Library Mutex is locked by a different thread; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR Due to different implementations of recursive mutexes on the supported platforms, calling this function from the same thread that previously locked the mutex will give undefined results.
 .PP
@@ -1021,7 +1021,7 @@ This virtual function is only implemented under Macintosh.
 .PP
 If you create an application that inherits TQApplication and reimplement this function, you get direct access to all Carbon Events that are received from the MacOS.
 .PP
-Return TRUE if you want to stop the event from being processed. Return FALSE for normal event dispatching.
+Return true if you want to stop the event from being processed. Return false for normal event dispatching.
 .SH "TQWidget * TQApplication::mainWidget () const"
 Returns the main application widget, or 0 if there is no main widget.
 .PP
@@ -1029,7 +1029,7 @@ See also setMainWidget().
 .SH "bool TQApplication::notify ( TQObject * receiver, TQEvent * e )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sends event \fIe\fR to \fIreceiver\fR: \fIreceiver\fR->event(\fIe\fR). Returns the value that is returned from the receiver's event handler.
 .PP
-For certain types of events (e.g. mouse and key events), the event will be propagated to the receiver's parent and so on up to the top-level object if the receiver is not interested in the event (i.e., it returns FALSE).
+For certain types of events (e.g. mouse and key events), the event will be propagated to the receiver's parent and so on up to the top-level object if the receiver is not interested in the event (i.e., it returns false).
 .PP
 There are five different ways that events can be processed; reimplementing this virtual function is just one of them. All five approaches are listed below: <ol type=1>
 .TP
@@ -1149,7 +1149,7 @@ See also setOverrideCursor() and overrideCursor().
 Examples:
 .)l distributor/distributor.ui.h, network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQApplication::reverseLayout ()\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if all dialogs and widgets will be laid out in a mirrored (right to left) fashion. Returns FALSE if dialogs and widgets will be laid out left to right.
+Returns true if all dialogs and widgets will be laid out in a mirrored (right to left) fashion. Returns false if dialogs and widgets will be laid out left to right.
 .PP
 See also setReverseLayout().
 .SH "void TQApplication::saveState ( TQSessionManager & sm )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -1265,7 +1265,7 @@ See also cursorFlashTime().
 .PP
 This is the same as TQTextCodec::setCodecForTr().
 .SH "void TQApplication::setDesktopSettingsAware ( bool on )\fC [static]\fR"
-By default, TQt will try to use the current standard colors, fonts etc., from the underlying window system's desktop settings, and use them for all relevant widgets. This behavior can be switched off by calling this function with \fIon\fR set to FALSE.
+By default, TQt will try to use the current standard colors, fonts etc., from the underlying window system's desktop settings, and use them for all relevant widgets. This behavior can be switched off by calling this function with \fIon\fR set to false.
 .PP
 This static function must be called before creating the TQApplication object, like this:
 .PP
@@ -1273,7 +1273,7 @@ This static function must be called before creating the TQApplication object, li
 .br
   int main( int argc, char** argv ) {
 .br
-    TQApplication::setDesktopSettingsAware( FALSE ); // I know better than the user
+    TQApplication::setDesktopSettingsAware( false ); // I know better than the user
 .br
     TQApplication myApp( argc, argv ); // Use default fonts & colors
 .br
@@ -1290,14 +1290,14 @@ Sets the time limit that distinguishes a double click from two consecutive mouse
 Note that on Microsoft Windows, calling this function sets the double click interval for all windows.
 .PP
 See also doubleClickInterval().
-.SH "void TQApplication::setEffectEnabled ( TQt::UIEffect effect, bool enable = TRUE )\fC [static]\fR"
-Enables the UI effect \fIeffect\fR if \fIenable\fR is TRUE, otherwise the effect will not be used.
+.SH "void TQApplication::setEffectEnabled ( TQt::UIEffect effect, bool enable = true )\fC [static]\fR"
+Enables the UI effect \fIeffect\fR if \fIenable\fR is true, otherwise the effect will not be used.
 .PP
 Note: All effects are disabled on screens running at less than 16-bit color depth.
 .PP
 See also isEffectEnabled(), TQt::UIEffect, and setDesktopSettingsAware().
-.SH "void TQApplication::setFont ( const TQFont & font, bool informWidgets = FALSE, const char * className = 0 )\fC [static]\fR"
-Changes the default application font to \fIfont\fR. If \fIinformWidgets\fR is TRUE, then existing widgets are informed about the change and may adjust themselves to the new application setting. If \fIinformWidgets\fR is FALSE, the change only affects newly created widgets. If \fIclassName\fR is passed, the change applies only to classes that inherit \fIclassName\fR (as reported by TQObject::inherits()).
+.SH "void TQApplication::setFont ( const TQFont & font, bool informWidgets = false, const char * className = 0 )\fC [static]\fR"
+Changes the default application font to \fIfont\fR. If \fIinformWidgets\fR is true, then existing widgets are informed about the change and may adjust themselves to the new application setting. If \fIinformWidgets\fR is false, the change only affects newly created widgets. If \fIclassName\fR is passed, the change applies only to classes that inherit \fIclassName\fR (as reported by TQObject::inherits()).
 .PP
 On application start-up, the default font depends on the window system. It can vary depending on both the window system version and the locale. This function lets you override the default font; but overriding may be a bad idea because, for example, some locales need extra-large fonts to support their special characters.
 .PP
@@ -1306,27 +1306,27 @@ See also font(), fontMetrics(), and TQWidget::font.
 Examples:
 .)l desktop/desktop.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/themes.cpp.
 .SH "void TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking ( bool enable )\fC [static]\fR"
-Enables global mouse tracking if \fIenable\fR is TRUE, or disables it if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Enables global mouse tracking if \fIenable\fR is true, or disables it if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 Enabling global mouse tracking makes it possible for widget event filters or application event filters to get all mouse move events, even when no button is depressed. This is useful for special GUI elements, e.g. tooltips.
 .PP
-Global mouse tracking does not affect widgets and their mouseMoveEvent(). For a widget to get mouse move events when no button is depressed, it must do TQWidget::setMouseTracking(TRUE).
+Global mouse tracking does not affect widgets and their mouseMoveEvent(). For a widget to get mouse move events when no button is depressed, it must do TQWidget::setMouseTracking(true).
 .PP
-This function uses an internal counter. Each setGlobalMouseTracking(TRUE) must have a corresponding setGlobalMouseTracking(FALSE):
+This function uses an internal counter. Each setGlobalMouseTracking(true) must have a corresponding setGlobalMouseTracking(false):
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
         // at this point global mouse tracking is off
 .br
-        TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( TRUE );
+        TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( true );
 .br
-        TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( TRUE );
+        TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( true );
 .br
-        TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( FALSE );
+        TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( false );
 .br
         // at this point it's still on
 .br
-        TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( FALSE );
+        TQApplication::setGlobalMouseTracking( false );
 .br
         // but now it's off
 .br
@@ -1372,7 +1372,7 @@ See also mainWidget(), exec(), and quit().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l chart/main.cpp, helpsystem/main.cpp, life/main.cpp, network/ftpclient/main.cpp, opengl/main.cpp, t1/main.cpp, and t4/main.cpp.
-.SH "void TQApplication::setOverrideCursor ( const TQCursor & cursor, bool replace = FALSE )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "void TQApplication::setOverrideCursor ( const TQCursor & cursor, bool replace = false )\fC [static]\fR"
 Sets the application override cursor to \fIcursor\fR.
 .PP
 Application override cursors are intended for showing the user that the application is in a special state, for example during an operation that might take some time.
@@ -1381,7 +1381,7 @@ This cursor will be displayed in all the application's widgets until restoreOver
 .PP
 Application cursors are stored on an internal stack. setOverrideCursor() pushes the cursor onto the stack, and restoreOverrideCursor() pops the active cursor off the stack. Every setOverrideCursor() must eventually be followed by a corresponding restoreOverrideCursor(), otherwise the stack will never be emptied.
 .PP
-If \fIreplace\fR is TRUE, the new cursor will replace the last override cursor (the stack keeps its depth). If \fIreplace\fR is FALSE, the new stack is pushed onto the top of the stack.
+If \fIreplace\fR is true, the new cursor will replace the last override cursor (the stack keeps its depth). If \fIreplace\fR is false, the new stack is pushed onto the top of the stack.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
@@ -1399,8 +1399,8 @@ See also overrideCursor(), restoreOverrideCursor(), and TQWidget::cursor.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l distributor/distributor.ui.h, network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-.SH "void TQApplication::setPalette ( const TQPalette & palette, bool informWidgets = FALSE, const char * className = 0 )\fC [static]\fR"
-Changes the default application palette to \fIpalette\fR. If \fIinformWidgets\fR is TRUE, then existing widgets are informed about the change and may adjust themselves to the new application setting. If \fIinformWidgets\fR is FALSE, the change only affects newly created widgets.
+.SH "void TQApplication::setPalette ( const TQPalette & palette, bool informWidgets = false, const char * className = 0 )\fC [static]\fR"
+Changes the default application palette to \fIpalette\fR. If \fIinformWidgets\fR is true, then existing widgets are informed about the change and may adjust themselves to the new application setting. If \fIinformWidgets\fR is false, the change only affects newly created widgets.
 .PP
 If \fIclassName\fR is passed, the change applies only to widgets that inherit \fIclassName\fR (as reported by TQObject::inherits()). If \fIclassName\fR is left 0, the change affects all widgets, thus overriding any previously set class specific palettes.
 .PP
@@ -1411,7 +1411,7 @@ See also TQWidget::palette, palette(), and TQStyle::polish().
 Examples:
 .)l i18n/main.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, themes/themes.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
 .SH "void TQApplication::setReverseLayout ( bool b )\fC [static]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE, all dialogs and widgets will be laid out in a mirrored fashion, as required by right to left languages such as Arabic and Hebrew. If \fIb\fR is FALSE, dialogs and widgets are laid out left to right.
+If \fIb\fR is true, all dialogs and widgets will be laid out in a mirrored fashion, as required by right to left languages such as Arabic and Hebrew. If \fIb\fR is false, dialogs and widgets are laid out left to right.
 .PP
 Changing this flag in runtime does not cause a relayout of already instantiated widgets.
 .PP
@@ -1493,7 +1493,7 @@ The default value is 500 ms.
 .PP
 See also setStartDragTime() and startDragDistance().
 .SH "bool TQApplication::startingUp ()\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if an application object has not been created yet; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if an application object has not been created yet; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also closingDown().
 .SH "TQStyle & TQApplication::style ()\fC [static]\fR"
@@ -1561,15 +1561,15 @@ This function is not virtual. You can use alternative translation techniques by
 .PP
 See also TQObject::tr(), installTranslator(), and defaultCodec().
 .SH "bool TQApplication::tryLock ()"
-Attempts to lock the TQt Library Mutex, and returns immediately. If the lock was obtained, this function returns TRUE. If another thread has locked the mutex, this function returns FALSE, instead of waiting for the lock to become available.
+Attempts to lock the TQt Library Mutex, and returns immediately. If the lock was obtained, this function returns true. If another thread has locked the mutex, this function returns false, instead of waiting for the lock to become available.
 .PP
 The mutex must be unlocked with unlock() before another thread can successfully lock it.
 .PP
 See also lock(), unlock(), and Thread Support in Qt.
 .SH "Type TQApplication::type () const"
 Returns the type of application, Tty, GuiClient or GuiServer.
-.SH "void TQApplication::unlock ( bool wakeUpCore = TRUE )"
-Unlock the TQt Library Mutex. If \fIwakeUpCore\fR is TRUE (the default), then the core application thread will be woken with TQApplication::wakeUpCoreThread().
+.SH "void TQApplication::unlock ( bool wakeUpCore = true )"
+Unlock the TQt Library Mutex. If \fIwakeUpCore\fR is true (the default), then the core application thread will be woken with TQApplication::wakeUpCoreThread().
 .PP
 See also lock(), locked(), and Thread Support in Qt.
 .SH "void TQApplication::wakeUpCoreThread ()"
@@ -1580,28 +1580,28 @@ See also coreThreadAwake() and Thread Support in Qt.
 Returns the number of lines to scroll when the mouse wheel is rotated.
 .PP
 See also setWheelScrollLines().
-.SH "TQWidget * TQApplication::widgetAt ( int x, int y, bool child = FALSE )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "TQWidget * TQApplication::widgetAt ( int x, int y, bool child = false )\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns a pointer to the widget at global screen position \fI(x, y)\fR, or 0 if there is no TQt widget there.
 .PP
-If \fIchild\fR is FALSE and there is a child widget at position \fI(x, y)\fR, the top-level widget containing it is returned. If \fIchild\fR is TRUE the child widget at position \fI(x, y)\fR is returned.
+If \fIchild\fR is false and there is a child widget at position \fI(x, y)\fR, the top-level widget containing it is returned. If \fIchild\fR is true the child widget at position \fI(x, y)\fR is returned.
 .PP
 This function is normally rather slow.
 .PP
 See also TQCursor::pos(), TQWidget::grabMouse(), and TQWidget::grabKeyboard().
-.SH "TQWidget * TQApplication::widgetAt ( const TQPoint & pos, bool child = FALSE )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "TQWidget * TQApplication::widgetAt ( const TQPoint & pos, bool child = false )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Returns a pointer to the widget at global screen position \fIpos\fR, or 0 if there is no TQt widget there.
 .PP
-If \fIchild\fR is FALSE and there is a child widget at position \fIpos\fR, the top-level widget containing it is returned. If \fIchild\fR is TRUE the child widget at position \fIpos\fR is returned.
+If \fIchild\fR is false and there is a child widget at position \fIpos\fR, the top-level widget containing it is returned. If \fIchild\fR is true the child widget at position \fIpos\fR is returned.
 .SH "bool TQApplication::winEventFilter ( MSG * )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This virtual function is only implemented under Windows.
 .PP
-The message procedure calls this function for every message received. Reimplement this function if you want to process window messages that are not processed by Qt. If you don't want the event to be processed by Qt, then return TRUE; otherwise return FALSE.
+The message procedure calls this function for every message received. Reimplement this function if you want to process window messages that are not processed by Qt. If you don't want the event to be processed by Qt, then return true; otherwise return false.
 .SH "void TQApplication::winFocus ( TQWidget * widget, bool gotFocus )"
 This function is available only on Windows.
 .PP
-If \fIgotFocus\fR is TRUE, \fIwidget\fR will become the active window. Otherwise the active window is reset to NULL.
+If \fIgotFocus\fR is true, \fIwidget\fR will become the active window. Otherwise the active window is reset to NULL.
 .SH "const TQColor & TQApplication::winStyleHighlightColor ()\fC [static]\fR"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
@@ -1613,7 +1613,7 @@ This virtual function is only implemented under X11.
 .PP
 If you create an application that inherits TQApplication and reimplement this function, you get direct access to all X events that the are received from the X server.
 .PP
-Return TRUE if you want to stop the event from being processed. Return FALSE for normal event dispatching.
+Return true if you want to stop the event from being processed. Return false for normal event dispatching.
 .PP
 See also x11ProcessEvent().
 .SH "int TQApplication::x11ProcessEvent ( XEvent * event )"
@@ -1624,7 +1624,7 @@ It returns 1 if the event was consumed by special handling, 0 if the \fIevent\fR
 See also x11EventFilter().
 .SH RELATED FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "void Q_ASSERT ( bool test )"
-Prints a warning message containing the source code file name and line number if \fItest\fR is FALSE.
+Prints a warning message containing the source code file name and line number if \fItest\fR is false.
 .PP
 This is really a macro defined in tqglobal.h.
 .PP
@@ -1884,9 +1884,9 @@ See also tqDebug(), tqWarning(), tqFatal(), and Debugging.
 .SH "bool tqSysInfo ( int * wordSize, bool * bigEndian )"
 Obtains information about the system.
 .PP
-The system's word size in bits (typically 32) is returned in \fI*wordSize\fR. The \fI*bigEndian\fR is set to TRUE if this is a big-endian machine, or to FALSE if this is a little-endian machine.
+The system's word size in bits (typically 32) is returned in \fI*wordSize\fR. The \fI*bigEndian\fR is set to true if this is a big-endian machine, or to false if this is a little-endian machine.
 .PP
-In debug mode, this function calls tqFatal() with a message if the computer is truly weird (i.e. different endianness for 16 bit and 32 bit integers); in release mode it returns FALSE.
+In debug mode, this function calls tqFatal() with a message if the computer is truly weird (i.e. different endianness for 16 bit and 32 bit integers); in release mode it returns false.
 .SH "void tqSystemWarning ( const char * msg, int code )"
 Prints the message \fImsg\fR and uses \fIcode\fR to get a system specific error message. When \fIcode\fR is -1 (the default), the system's last error code will be used if possible. Use this method to handle failures in platform specific API calls.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqasciicache.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqasciicache.3qt
index c03f1e74a..0022d1a86 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqasciicache.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqasciicache.3qt
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Inherits TQPtrCollection.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQAsciiCache\fR ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool copyKeys = TRUE )"
+.BI "\fBTQAsciiCache\fR ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = true, bool copyKeys = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fB~TQAsciiCache\fR ()"
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ Inherits TQPtrCollection.
 .BI "type * \fBtake\fR ( const char * k )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "type * \fBfind\fR ( const char * k, bool ref = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "type * \fBfind\fR ( const char * k, bool ref = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "type * \fBoperator[]\fR ( const char * k ) const"
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Each cache item has a cost. The sum of item costs, totalCost(), will not exceed
 .PP
 Apart from insert(), by far the most important function is find() (which also exists as operator[]()). This function looks up an item, returns it, and by default marks it as being the most recently used item.
 .PP
-There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the cache. Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) tells the cache to delete items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when then are removed (i.e., remove() and take() are equivalent).
+There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the cache. Calling setAutoDelete(true) tells the cache to delete items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when then are removed (i.e., remove() and take() are equivalent).
 .PP
 When inserting an item into the cache, only the pointer is copied, not the item itself. This is called a shallow copy. It is possible to make the cache copy all of the item's data (known as a deep copy) when an item is inserted. insert() calls the virtual function TQPtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted. Inherit a cache and reimplement newItem() if you want deep copies.
 .PP
@@ -82,14 +82,14 @@ There is a TQAsciiCacheIterator which may be used to traverse the items in the c
 .PP
 See also TQAsciiCacheIterator, TQCache, TQIntCache, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQAsciiCache::TQAsciiCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool copyKeys = TRUE )"
+.SH "TQAsciiCache::TQAsciiCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = true, bool copyKeys = true )"
 Constructs a cache whose contents will never have a total cost greater than \fImaxCost\fR and which is expected to contain less than \fIsize\fR items.
 .PP
 \fIsize\fR is actually the size of an internal hash array; it's usually best to make it prime and at least 50% bigger than the largest expected number of items in the cache.
 .PP
 Each inserted item has an associated cost. When inserting a new item, if the total cost of all items in the cache will exceed \fImaxCost\fR, the cache will start throwing out the older (least recently used) items until there is enough room for the new item to be inserted.
 .PP
-If \fIcaseSensitive\fR is TRUE (the default), the cache keys are case sensitive; if it is FALSE, they are case-insensitive. Case-insensitive comparison only affects the 26 letters in US-ASCII. If \fIcopyKeys\fR is TRUE (the default), TQAsciiCache makes a copy of the cache keys, otherwise it copies just the const char * pointer - slightly faster if you can guarantee that the keys will never change, but very risky.
+If \fIcaseSensitive\fR is true (the default), the cache keys are case sensitive; if it is false, they are case-insensitive. Case-insensitive comparison only affects the 26 letters in US-ASCII. If \fIcopyKeys\fR is true (the default), TQAsciiCache makes a copy of the cache keys, otherwise it copies just the const char * pointer - slightly faster if you can guarantee that the keys will never change, but very risky.
 .SH "TQAsciiCache::~TQAsciiCache ()"
 Removes all items from the cache and destroys it. All iterators that access this cache will be reset.
 .SH "void TQAsciiCache::clear ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -106,12 +106,12 @@ Returns the number of items in the cache.
 See also totalCost() and size().
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-.SH "type * TQAsciiCache::find ( const char * k, bool ref = TRUE ) const"
-Returns the item with key \fIk\fR, or 0 if the key does not exist in the cache. If \fIref\fR is TRUE (the default), the item is moved to the front of the least recently used list.
+.SH "type * TQAsciiCache::find ( const char * k, bool ref = true ) const"
+Returns the item with key \fIk\fR, or 0 if the key does not exist in the cache. If \fIref\fR is true (the default), the item is moved to the front of the least recently used list.
 .PP
 If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted last is returned.
 .SH "bool TQAsciiCache::insert ( const char * k, const type * d, int c = 1, int p = 0 )"
-Inserts the item \fId\fR into the cache using key \fIk\fR, and with an associated cost of \fIc\fR. Returns TRUE if the item is successfully inserted. Returns FALSE if the item is not inserted, for example, if the cost of the item exceeds maxCost().
+Inserts the item \fId\fR into the cache using key \fIk\fR, and with an associated cost of \fIc\fR. Returns true if the item is successfully inserted. Returns false if the item is not inserted, for example, if the cost of the item exceeds maxCost().
 .PP
 The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high, TQAsciiCache will remove old, least recently used items until there is room for this new item.
 .PP
@@ -119,9 +119,9 @@ Items with duplicate keys can be inserted.
 .PP
 The parameter \fIp\fR is internal and should be left at the default value (0).
 .PP
-\fBWarning:\fR If this function returns FALSE, you must delete \fId\fR yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using \fId\fR after calling this function, because any other insertions into the cache, from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could cause the object to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to become invalid.
+\fBWarning:\fR If this function returns false, you must delete \fId\fR yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using \fId\fR after calling this function, because any other insertions into the cache, from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could cause the object to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to become invalid.
 .SH "bool TQAsciiCache::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the cache is empty; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int TQAsciiCache::maxCost () const"
 Returns the maximum allowed total cost of the cache.
 .PP
@@ -131,13 +131,13 @@ Returns the item with key \fIk\fR, or 0 if \fIk\fR does not exist in the cache,
 .PP
 If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted last is returned.
 .PP
-This is the same as find( k, TRUE ).
+This is the same as find( k, true ).
 .PP
 See also find().
 .SH "bool TQAsciiCache::remove ( const char * k )"
-Removes the item with key \fIk\fR and returns TRUE if the item was present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Removes the item with key \fIk\fR and returns true if the item was present in the cache; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e., if you have called setAutoDelete(TRUE).
+The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e., if you have called setAutoDelete(true).
 .PP
 If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted last is removed.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqasciicacheiterator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqasciicacheiterator.3qt
index a0ab8dc29..520bde0a4 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqasciicacheiterator.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqasciicacheiterator.3qt
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Note that the traversal order is arbitrary; you are not guaranteed any particula
 .PP
 Multiple iterators are completely independent, even when they operate on the same TQAsciiCache. TQAsciiCache updates all iterators that refer an item when that item is removed.
 .PP
-TQAsciiCacheIterator provides an operator++() and an operator+=() to traverse the cache; current() and currentKey() to access the current cache item and its key. It also provides atFirst() and atLast(), which return TRUE if the iterator points to the first or last item in the cache respectively. The isEmpty() function returns TRUE if the cache is empty; and count() returns the number of items in the cache.
+TQAsciiCacheIterator provides an operator++() and an operator+=() to traverse the cache; current() and currentKey() to access the current cache item and its key. It also provides atFirst() and atLast(), which return true if the iterator points to the first or last item in the cache respectively. The isEmpty() function returns true if the cache is empty; and count() returns the number of items in the cache.
 .PP
 Note that atFirst() and atLast() refer to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
 .PP
@@ -83,11 +83,11 @@ Constructs an iterator for \fIcache\fR. The current iterator item is set to poin
 .SH "TQAsciiCacheIterator::TQAsciiCacheIterator ( const TQAsciiCacheIterator<type> & ci )"
 Constructs an iterator for the same cache as \fIci\fR. The new iterator starts at the same item as ci.current() but moves independently from there on.
 .SH "bool TQAsciiCacheIterator::atFirst () const"
-Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the first item in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
+Returns true if the iterator points to the first item in the cache; otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
 .PP
 See also toFirst() and atLast().
 .SH "bool TQAsciiCacheIterator::atLast () const"
-Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
+Returns true if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
 .PP
 See also toLast() and atFirst().
 .SH "uint TQAsciiCacheIterator::count () const"
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Returns a pointer to the current iterator item.
 .SH "const char * TQAsciiCacheIterator::currentKey () const"
 Returns the key for the current iterator item.
 .SH "bool TQAsciiCacheIterator::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the cache is empty, i.e. count() == 0; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the cache is empty, i.e. count() == 0; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also count().
 .SH "TQAsciiCacheIterator::operator type * () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqasciidict.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqasciidict.3qt
index f82b7a39d..59ed1e9d0 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqasciidict.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqasciidict.3qt
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Inherits TQPtrCollection.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQAsciiDict\fR ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool copyKeys = TRUE )"
+.BI "\fBTQAsciiDict\fR ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = true, bool copyKeys = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fBTQAsciiDict\fR ( const TQAsciiDict<type> & dict )"
@@ -137,14 +137,14 @@ See TQDict for full details, including the choice of dictionary size, and how de
 .PP
 See also TQAsciiDictIterator, TQDict, TQIntDict, TQPtrDict, Collection Classes, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQAsciiDict::TQAsciiDict ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool copyKeys = TRUE )"
+.SH "TQAsciiDict::TQAsciiDict ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = true, bool copyKeys = true )"
 Constructs a dictionary optimized for less than \fIsize\fR entries.
 .PP
 We recommend setting \fIsize\fR to a suitably large prime number (a bit larger than the expected number of entries). This makes the hash distribution better and will improve lookup performance.
 .PP
-When \fIcaseSensitive\fR is TRUE (the default) TQAsciiDict treats" abc" and "Abc" as different keys; when it is FALSE "abc" and" Abc" are the same. Case-insensitive comparison only considers the 26 letters in US-ASCII.
+When \fIcaseSensitive\fR is true (the default) TQAsciiDict treats" abc" and "Abc" as different keys; when it is false "abc" and" Abc" are the same. Case-insensitive comparison only considers the 26 letters in US-ASCII.
 .PP
-If \fIcopyKeys\fR is TRUE (the default), the dictionary copies keys using strcpy(); if it is FALSE, the dictionary just copies the pointers.
+If \fIcopyKeys\fR is true (the default), the dictionary copies keys using strcpy(); if it is false, the dictionary just copies the pointers.
 .SH "TQAsciiDict::TQAsciiDict ( const TQAsciiDict<type> & dict )"
 Constructs a copy of \fIdict\fR.
 .PP
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ All iterators that access this dictionary will be reset.
 .PP
 See also setAutoDelete().
 .SH "bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const"
-Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
+Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is false.
 .PP
 See also setAutoDelete().
 .SH "void TQAsciiDict::clear ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Multiple items can have the same key, in which case only the last item will be a
 .PP
 See also replace().
 .SH "bool TQAsciiDict::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0; otherwise it returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0; otherwise it returns false.
 .PP
 See also count().
 .SH "TQAsciiDict<type> & TQAsciiDict::operator= ( const TQAsciiDict<type> & dict )"
@@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ The default implementation sets \fIitem\fR to 0.
 .PP
 See also write().
 .SH "bool TQAsciiDict::remove ( const char * key )"
-Removes the item associated with \fIkey\fR from the dictionary. Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the key existed in the dictionary; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Removes the item associated with \fIkey\fR from the dictionary. Returns true if successful, i.e. if the key existed in the dictionary; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most recently inserted item will be removed.
 .PP
@@ -258,11 +258,11 @@ See also insert().
 .SH "void TQAsciiDict::resize ( uint newsize )"
 Changes the size of the hashtable to \fInewsize\fR. The contents of the dictionary are preserved but all iterators on the dictionary become invalid.
 .SH "void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )"
-Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is TRUE and to never delete them if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is true and to never delete them if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
 .PP
-The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items.
+The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items.
 .PP
 Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove() function will remove the item from its data structure, and if auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqasciidictiterator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqasciidictiterator.3qt
index 2c4e9569b..077d1f0ae 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqasciidictiterator.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqasciidictiterator.3qt
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Returns a pointer to the current iterator item.
 .SH "const char * TQAsciiDictIterator::currentKey () const"
 Returns a pointer to the key for the current iterator item.
 .SH "bool TQAsciiDictIterator::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0, otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0, otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also count().
 .SH "TQAsciiDictIterator::operator type * () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqassistantclient.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqassistantclient.3qt
index 279b51d9d..e67a0b80f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqassistantclient.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqassistantclient.3qt
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ The TQAssistantClient class provides a means of using TQt Assistant as an applic
 .PP
 Using TQt Assistant is simple: Create a TQAssistantClient instance, then call showPage() as often as necessary to show your help pages. When you call showPage(), TQt Assistant will be launched if it isn't already running.
 .PP
-The TQAssistantClient instance can open (openAssistant()) or close (closeAssistant()) TQt Assistant whenever required. If TQt Assistant is open, isOpen() returns TRUE.
+The TQAssistantClient instance can open (openAssistant()) or close (closeAssistant()) TQt Assistant whenever required. If TQt Assistant is open, isOpen() returns true.
 .PP
 One TQAssistantClient instance interacts with one TQt Assistant instance, so every time you call openAssistant(), showPage() or closeAssistant() they are applied to the particular TQt Assistant instance associated with the TQAssistantClient.
 .PP
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ See also assistantClosed().
 .SH "void TQAssistantClient::error ( const TQString & msg )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted if TQt Assistant cannot be started or if an error occurs during the initialization of the connection between TQt Assistant and the calling application. The \fImsg\fR provides an explanation of the error.
 .SH "bool TQAssistantClient::isOpen () const"
-Returns TRUE if TQt Assistant is open; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "open" property for details.
+Returns true if TQt Assistant is open; otherwise returns false. See the "open" property for details.
 .SH "void TQAssistantClient::openAssistant ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 This function opens TQt Assistant and sets up the client-server communiction between the application and TQt Assistant. If it is already open, this function does nothing. If an error occurs, error() is emitted.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqbitarray.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqbitarray.3qt
index 1c3bbb462..3db8d9410 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqbitarray.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqbitarray.3qt
@@ -171,11 +171,11 @@ See also copy().
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQMemArray.
 .SH "bool TQBitArray::fill ( bool v, int size = -1 )"
-Fills the bit array with \fIv\fR (1's if \fIv\fR is TRUE, or 0's if \fIv\fR is FALSE).
+Fills the bit array with \fIv\fR (1's if \fIv\fR is true, or 0's if \fIv\fR is false).
 .PP
 fill() resizes the bit array to \fIsize\fR bits if \fIsize\fR is nonnegative.
 .PP
-Returns FALSE if a nonnegative \fIsize\fR was specified and the bit array could not be resized; otherwise returns TRUE.
+Returns false if a nonnegative \fIsize\fR was specified and the bit array could not be resized; otherwise returns true.
 .PP
 See also resize().
 .SH "TQBitArray & TQBitArray::operator&= ( const TQBitArray & a )"
@@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ Example:
 .br
 .fi
 .SH "bool TQBitArray::resize ( uint size )"
-Resizes the bit array to \fIsize\fR bits and returns TRUE if the bit array could be resized; otherwise returns FALSE. The array becomes a null array if \fIsize\fR == 0.
+Resizes the bit array to \fIsize\fR bits and returns true if the bit array could be resized; otherwise returns false. The array becomes a null array if \fIsize\fR == 0.
 .PP
 If the array is expanded, the new bits are set to 0.
 .PP
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ Returns the bit array's size (number of bits).
 .PP
 See also resize().
 .SH "bool TQBitArray::testBit ( uint index ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the bit at position \fIindex\fR is set, i.e. is 1; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the bit at position \fIindex\fR is set, i.e. is 1; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setBit() and clearBit().
 .SH "bool TQBitArray::toggleBit ( uint index )"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqbitmap.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqbitmap.3qt
index f0477b2f2..db982debd 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqbitmap.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqbitmap.3qt
@@ -19,16 +19,16 @@ Inherits TQPixmap.
 .BI "\fBTQBitmap\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQBitmap\fR ( int w, int h, bool clear = FALSE, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )"
+.BI "\fBTQBitmap\fR ( int w, int h, bool clear = false, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQBitmap\fR ( const TQSize & size, bool clear = FALSE, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )"
+.BI "\fBTQBitmap\fR ( const TQSize & size, bool clear = false, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQBitmap\fR ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQBitmap\fR ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQBitmap\fR ( const TQSize & size, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQBitmap\fR ( const TQSize & size, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fBTQBitmap\fR ( const TQBitmap & bitmap )"
@@ -68,26 +68,26 @@ See also TQPixmap, TQPainter::drawPixmap(), bitBlt(), Shared Classes, Graphics C
 Constructs a null bitmap.
 .PP
 See also TQPixmap::isNull().
-.SH "TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( int w, int h, bool clear = FALSE, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )"
+.SH "TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( int w, int h, bool clear = false, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )"
 Constructs a bitmap with width \fIw\fR and height \fIh\fR.
 .PP
-The contents of the bitmap is uninitialized if \fIclear\fR is FALSE; otherwise it is filled with pixel value 0 (the TQColor \fCQt::color0\fR).
+The contents of the bitmap is uninitialized if \fIclear\fR is false; otherwise it is filled with pixel value 0 (the TQColor \fCQt::color0\fR).
 .PP
 The optional \fIoptimization\fR argument specifies the optimization setting for the bitmap. The default optimization should be used in most cases. Games and other pixmap-intensive applications may benefit from setting this argument; see TQPixmap::Optimization.
 .PP
 See also TQPixmap::setOptimization() and TQPixmap::setDefaultOptimization().
-.SH "TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const TQSize & size, bool clear = FALSE, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )"
+.SH "TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const TQSize & size, bool clear = false, TQPixmap::Optimization optimization = TQPixmap::DefaultOptim )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Constructs a bitmap with the size \fIsize\fR.
 .PP
-The contents of the bitmap is uninitialized if \fIclear\fR is FALSE; otherwise it is filled with pixel value 0 (the TQColor \fCQt::color0\fR).
+The contents of the bitmap is uninitialized if \fIclear\fR is false; otherwise it is filled with pixel value 0 (the TQColor \fCQt::color0\fR).
 .PP
 The optional \fIoptimization\fR argument specifies the optimization setting for the bitmap. The default optimization should be used in most cases. Games and other pixmap-intensive applications may benefit from setting this argument; see TQPixmap::Optimization.
-.SH "TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = false )"
 Constructs a bitmap with width \fIw\fR and height \fIh\fR and sets the contents to \fIbits\fR.
 .PP
-The \fIisXbitmap\fR flag should be TRUE if \fIbits\fR was generated by the X11 bitmap program. The X bitmap bit order is little endian. The TQImage documentation discusses bit order of monochrome images.
+The \fIisXbitmap\fR flag should be true if \fIbits\fR was generated by the X11 bitmap program. The X bitmap bit order is little endian. The TQImage documentation discusses bit order of monochrome images.
 .PP
 Example (creates an arrow bitmap):
 .PP
@@ -95,15 +95,15 @@ Example (creates an arrow bitmap):
 .br
         uchar arrow_bits[] = { 0x3f, 0x1f, 0x0f, 0x1f, 0x3b, 0x71, 0xe0, 0xc0 };
 .br
-        TQBitmap bm( 8, 8, arrow_bits, TRUE );
+        TQBitmap bm( 8, 8, arrow_bits, true );
 .br
 .fi
-.SH "TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const TQSize & size, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const TQSize & size, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap = false )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Constructs a bitmap with the size \fIsize\fR and sets the contents to \fIbits\fR.
 .PP
-The \fIisXbitmap\fR flag should be TRUE if \fIbits\fR was generated by the X11 bitmap program. The X bitmap bit order is little endian. The TQImage documentation discusses bit order of monochrome images.
+The \fIisXbitmap\fR flag should be true if \fIbits\fR was generated by the X11 bitmap program. The X bitmap bit order is little endian. The TQImage documentation discusses bit order of monochrome images.
 .SH "TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const TQBitmap & bitmap )"
 Constructs a bitmap that is a copy of \fIbitmap\fR.
 .SH "TQBitmap::TQBitmap ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqboxlayout.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqboxlayout.3qt
index af4ecc960..11ddb63f1 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqboxlayout.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqboxlayout.3qt
@@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Searches for widget \fIw\fR in this layout (not including child layouts).
 .PP
 Returns the index of \fIw\fR, or -1 if \fIw\fR is not found.
 .SH "bool TQBoxLayout::hasHeightForWidth () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if this layout's preferred height depends on its width; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this layout's preferred height depends on its width; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
 .SH "int TQBoxLayout::heightForWidth ( int w ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -318,11 +318,11 @@ Resizes managed widgets within the rectangle \fIr\fR.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQLayout.
 .SH "bool TQBoxLayout::setStretchFactor ( TQWidget * w, int stretch )"
-Sets the stretch factor for widget \fIw\fR to \fIstretch\fR and returns TRUE if \fIw\fR is found in this layout (not including child layouts); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Sets the stretch factor for widget \fIw\fR to \fIstretch\fR and returns true if \fIw\fR is found in this layout (not including child layouts); otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQBoxLayout::setStretchFactor ( TQLayout * l, int stretch )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Sets the stretch factor for the layout \fIl\fR to \fIstretch\fR and returns TRUE if \fIl\fR is found in this layout (not including child layouts); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Sets the stretch factor for the layout \fIl\fR to \fIstretch\fR and returns true if \fIl\fR is found in this layout (not including child layouts); otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQSize TQBoxLayout::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the preferred size of this box layout.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqbrush.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqbrush.3qt
index 0b1b10933..3e0b380f8 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqbrush.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqbrush.3qt
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Returns the brush color.
 .PP
 See also setColor().
 .SH "bool TQBrush::operator!= ( const TQBrush & b ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the brush is different from \fIb\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the brush is different from \fIb\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Two brushes are different if they have different styles, colors or pixmaps.
 .PP
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ See also operator==().
 .SH "TQBrush & TQBrush::operator= ( const TQBrush & b )"
 Assigns \fIb\fR to this brush and returns a reference to this brush.
 .SH "bool TQBrush::operator== ( const TQBrush & b ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the brush is equal to \fIb\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the brush is equal to \fIb\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Two brushes are equal if they have equal styles, colors and pixmaps.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqbuffer.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqbuffer.3qt
index 4eeaee57d..a7c318835 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqbuffer.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqbuffer.3qt
@@ -91,9 +91,9 @@ Returns this buffer's byte array.
 .PP
 See also setBuffer().
 .SH "bool TQBuffer::setBuffer ( TQByteArray buf )"
-Replaces the buffer's contents with \fIbuf\fR and returns TRUE.
+Replaces the buffer's contents with \fIbuf\fR and returns true.
 .PP
-Does nothing (and returns FALSE) if isOpen() is TRUE.
+Does nothing (and returns false) if isOpen() is true.
 .PP
 Note that if you open the buffer in write mode (<a href="tqfile.html#open">IO_WriteOnly</a> or IO_ReadWrite) and write something into the buffer, \fIbuf\fR is also modified because TQByteArray is an explicitly shared class.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqbutton.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqbutton.3qt
index 15a644e08..a23a86510 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqbutton.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqbutton.3qt
@@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ setAutoRepeat() sets whether the button will auto-repeat if the user holds it do
 .TP
 setToggleButton() sets whether the button is a toggle button or not.
 .PP
-The difference between isDown() and isOn() is as follows: When the user clicks a toggle button to toggle it on, the button is first \fIpressed\fR and then released into the \fIon\fR state. When the user clicks it again (to toggle it off), the button moves first to the \fIpressed\fR state, then to the \fIoff\fR state (isOn() and isDown() are both FALSE).
+The difference between isDown() and isOn() is as follows: When the user clicks a toggle button to toggle it on, the button is first \fIpressed\fR and then released into the \fIon\fR state. When the user clicks it again (to toggle it off), the button moves first to the \fIpressed\fR state, then to the \fIoff\fR state (isOn() and isDown() are both false).
 .PP
 Default buttons (as used in many dialogs) are provided by TQPushButton::setDefault() and TQPushButton::setAutoDefault().
 .PP
@@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ This function does nothing if the button is disabled.
 .PP
 See also accel.
 .SH "bool TQButton::autoRepeat () const"
-Returns TRUE if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
+Returns true if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
 .SH "void TQButton::clicked ()\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e. first pressed down and then released when the mouse cursor is inside the button), when the accelerator key is typed or when animateClick() is called. This signal is \fInot\fR emitted if you call setDown().
 .PP
@@ -297,17 +297,17 @@ If the button is not a member of any TQButtonGroup, this function returns 0.
 .PP
 See also TQButtonGroup.
 .SH "bool TQButton::hitButton ( const TQPoint & pos ) const\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if \fIpos\fR is inside the clickable button rectangle; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIpos\fR is inside the clickable button rectangle; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 By default, the clickable area is the entire widget. Subclasses may reimplement it, though.
 .SH "bool TQButton::isDown () const"
-Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "down" property for details.
+Returns true if the button is pressed; otherwise returns false. See the "down" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::isExclusiveToggle () const"
-Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "exclusiveToggle" property for details.
+Returns true if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns false. See the "exclusiveToggle" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::isOn () const"
-Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "on" property for details.
+Returns true if the button is toggled; otherwise returns false. See the "on" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::isToggleButton () const"
-Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "toggleButton" property for details.
+Returns true if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns false. See the "toggleButton" property for details.
 .SH "void TQButton::paintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Handles paint events for buttons. Small and typically complex buttons are painted double-buffered to reduce flicker. The actually drawing is done in the virtual functions drawButton() and drawButtonLabel().
 .PP
@@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ Sets whether autoRepeat is enabled. See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
 .SH "void TQButton::setDown ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets whether the button is pressed. See the "down" property for details.
 .SH "void TQButton::setOn ( bool on )\fC [protected]\fR"
-Sets the state of this button to On if \fIon\fR is TRUE; otherwise to Off.
+Sets the state of this button to On if \fIon\fR is true; otherwise to Off.
 .PP
 See also toggleState.
 .SH "void TQButton::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ Sets the toggle state of the button to \fIs\fR. \fIs\fR can be Off, NoChange or
 .SH "void TQButton::setText ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the text shown on the button. See the "text" property for details.
 .SH "void TQButton::setToggleButton ( bool b )\fC [protected]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE, this button becomes a toggle button; if \fIb\fR is FALSE, this button becomes a command button.
+If \fIb\fR is true, this button becomes a toggle button; if \fIb\fR is false, this button becomes a command button.
 .PP
 See also toggleButton.
 .SH "void TQButton::setToggleType ( ToggleType type )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ See also on, setOn(), toggled(), and toggleButton.
 .SH "ToggleType TQButton::toggleType () const"
 Returns the type of toggle on the button. See the "toggleType" property for details.
 .SH "void TQButton::toggled ( bool on )\fC [signal]\fR"
-This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. \fIon\fR is TRUE if the button is on, or FALSE if the button is off.
+This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. \fIon\fR is true if the button is on, or false if the button is off.
 .PP
 This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation, or because setOn() was called.
 .PP
@@ -391,13 +391,13 @@ Set this property's value with setAutoRepeat() and get this property's value wit
 .SH "bool down"
 This property holds whether the button is pressed.
 .PP
-If this property is TRUE, the button is pressed down. The signals pressed() and clicked() are not emitted if you set this property to TRUE. The default is FALSE.
+If this property is true, the button is pressed down. The signals pressed() and clicked() are not emitted if you set this property to true. The default is false.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setDown() and get this property's value with isDown().
 .SH "bool exclusiveToggle"
 This property holds whether the button is an exclusive toggle.
 .PP
-If this property is TRUE and the button is in a TQButtonGroup, the button can only be toggled off by another one being toggled on. The default is FALSE.
+If this property is true and the button is in a TQButtonGroup, the button can only be toggled off by another one being toggled on. The default is false.
 .PP
 Get this property's value with isExclusiveToggle().
 .SH "bool on"
@@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text
 .SH "bool toggleButton"
 This property holds whether the button is a toggle button.
 .PP
-The default value is FALSE.
+The default value is false.
 .PP
 Get this property's value with isToggleButton().
 .SH "ToggleState toggleState"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqbuttongroup.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqbuttongroup.3qt
index ae606e01d..2a8bfdf9b 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqbuttongroup.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqbuttongroup.3qt
@@ -160,9 +160,9 @@ See also find(), remove(), and exclusive.
 Examples:
 .)l listbox/listbox.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQButtonGroup::isExclusive () const"
-Returns TRUE if the button group is exclusive; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "exclusive" property for details.
+Returns true if the button group is exclusive; otherwise returns false. See the "exclusive" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButtonGroup::isRadioButtonExclusive () const"
-Returns TRUE if the radio buttons in the group are exclusive; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "radioButtonExclusive" property for details.
+Returns true if the radio buttons in the group are exclusive; otherwise returns false. See the "radioButtonExclusive" property for details.
 .SH "void TQButtonGroup::moveFocus ( int key )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Moves the keyboard focus according to \fIkey\fR, and if appropriate checks the new focus item.
 .PP
@@ -195,13 +195,13 @@ Sets whether the radio buttons in the group are exclusive. See the "radioButtonE
 .SH "bool exclusive"
 This property holds whether the button group is exclusive.
 .PP
-If this property is TRUE, then the buttons in the group are toggled, and to untoggle a button you must click on another button in the group. The default value is FALSE.
+If this property is true, then the buttons in the group are toggled, and to untoggle a button you must click on another button in the group. The default value is false.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setExclusive() and get this property's value with isExclusive().
 .SH "bool radioButtonExclusive"
 This property holds whether the radio buttons in the group are exclusive.
 .PP
-If this property is TRUE (the default), the radiobuttons in the group are treated exclusively.
+If this property is true (the default), the radiobuttons in the group are treated exclusively.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setRadioButtonExclusive() and get this property's value with isRadioButtonExclusive().
 .SH "int selectedId"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcache.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcache.3qt
index a879d3027..e7714ce68 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcache.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcache.3qt
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Inherits TQPtrCollection.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQCache\fR ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE )"
+.BI "\fBTQCache\fR ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fB~TQCache\fR ()"
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ Inherits TQPtrCollection.
 .BI "type * \fBtake\fR ( const TQString & k )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "type * \fBfind\fR ( const TQString & k, bool ref = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "type * \fBfind\fR ( const TQString & k, bool ref = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "type * \fBoperator[]\fR ( const TQString & k ) const"
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ TQCache is a template class. TQCache<X> defines a cache that operates on pointer
 .PP
 Apart from insert(), by far the most important function is find() (which also exists as operator[]()). This function looks up an item, returns it, and by default marks it as being the most recently used item.
 .PP
-There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the cache. Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) for a cache tells it to delete items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when they are removed (i.e., remove() and take() are equivalent).
+There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the cache. Calling setAutoDelete(true) for a cache tells it to delete items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when they are removed (i.e., remove() and take() are equivalent).
 .PP
 When inserting an item into the cache, only the pointer is copied, not the item itself. This is called a shallow copy. It is possible to make the cache copy all of the item's data (known as a deep copy) when an item is inserted. insert() calls the virtual function TQPtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted. Inherit a cache and reimplement newItem() if you want deep copies.
 .PP
@@ -91,18 +91,18 @@ In TQCache, the cache items are accessed via TQString keys, which are Unicode st
 .PP
 See also TQCacheIterator, TQAsciiCache, TQIntCache, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQCache::TQCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE )"
+.SH "TQCache::TQCache ( int maxCost = 100, int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = true )"
 Constructs a cache whose contents will never have a total cost greater than \fImaxCost\fR and which is expected to contain less than \fIsize\fR items.
 .PP
 \fIsize\fR is actually the size of an internal hash array; it's usually best to make it a prime number and at least 50% bigger than the largest expected number of items in the cache.
 .PP
 Each inserted item has an associated cost. When inserting a new item, if the total cost of all items in the cache will exceed \fImaxCost\fR, the cache will start throwing out the older (least recently used) items until there is enough room for the new item to be inserted.
 .PP
-If \fIcaseSensitive\fR is TRUE (the default), the cache keys are case sensitive; if it is FALSE, they are case-insensitive. Case-insensitive comparison considers all Unicode letters.
+If \fIcaseSensitive\fR is true (the default), the cache keys are case sensitive; if it is false, they are case-insensitive. Case-insensitive comparison considers all Unicode letters.
 .SH "TQCache::~TQCache ()"
 Removes all items from the cache and destroys it. All iterators that access this cache will be reset.
 .SH "bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const"
-Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
+Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is false.
 .PP
 See also setAutoDelete().
 .SH "void TQCache::clear ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -119,20 +119,20 @@ Returns the number of items in the cache.
 See also totalCost().
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-.SH "type * TQCache::find ( const TQString & k, bool ref = TRUE ) const"
-Returns the item associated with key \fIk\fR, or 0 if the key does not exist in the cache. If \fIref\fR is TRUE (the default), the item is moved to the front of the least recently used list.
+.SH "type * TQCache::find ( const TQString & k, bool ref = true ) const"
+Returns the item associated with key \fIk\fR, or 0 if the key does not exist in the cache. If \fIref\fR is true (the default), the item is moved to the front of the least recently used list.
 .PP
 If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted last is returned.
 .SH "bool TQCache::insert ( const TQString & k, const type * d, int c = 1, int p = 0 )"
-Inserts the item \fId\fR into the cache with key \fIk\fR and associated cost, \fIc\fR. Returns TRUE if it is successfully inserted; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Inserts the item \fId\fR into the cache with key \fIk\fR and associated cost, \fIc\fR. Returns true if it is successfully inserted; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high, TQCache will remove old, least recently used items until there is room for this new item.
 .PP
 The parameter \fIp\fR is internal and should be left at the default value (0).
 .PP
-\fBWarning:\fR If this function returns FALSE (which could happen, e.g. if the cost of this item alone exceeds maxCost()) you must delete \fId\fR yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using \fId\fR after calling this function because any other insertions into the cache, from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could cause the object to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to become invalid.
+\fBWarning:\fR If this function returns false (which could happen, e.g. if the cost of this item alone exceeds maxCost()) you must delete \fId\fR yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using \fId\fR after calling this function because any other insertions into the cache, from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could cause the object to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to become invalid.
 .SH "bool TQCache::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the cache is empty; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int TQCache::maxCost () const"
 Returns the maximum allowed total cost of the cache.
 .PP
@@ -142,13 +142,13 @@ Returns the item associated with key \fIk\fR, or 0 if \fIk\fR does not exist in
 .PP
 If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted last is returned.
 .PP
-This is the same as find( k, TRUE ).
+This is the same as find( k, true ).
 .PP
 See also find().
 .SH "bool TQCache::remove ( const TQString & k )"
-Removes the item associated with \fIk\fR, and returns TRUE if the item was present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Removes the item associated with \fIk\fR, and returns true if the item was present in the cache; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e., if you have called setAutoDelete(TRUE).
+The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e., if you have called setAutoDelete(true).
 .PP
 If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted last is removed.
 .PP
@@ -156,11 +156,11 @@ All iterators that refer to the removed item are set to point to the next item i
 .PP
 See also take() and clear().
 .SH "void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )"
-Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is TRUE and to never delete them if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is true and to never delete them if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
 .PP
-The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items.
+The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items.
 .PP
 Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove() function will remove the item from its data structure, and if auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcacheiterator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcacheiterator.3qt
index e44911883..967cfbaff 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcacheiterator.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcacheiterator.3qt
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Note that the traversal order is arbitrary; you are not guaranteed any particula
 .PP
 Multiple iterators are completely independent, even when they operate on the same TQCache. TQCache updates all iterators that refer an item when that item is removed.
 .PP
-TQCacheIterator provides an operator++(), and an operator+=() to traverse the cache. The current() and currentKey() functions are used to access the current cache item and its key. The atFirst() and atLast() return TRUE if the iterator points to the first or last item in the cache respectively. The isEmpty() function returns TRUE if the cache is empty, and count() returns the number of items in the cache.
+TQCacheIterator provides an operator++(), and an operator+=() to traverse the cache. The current() and currentKey() functions are used to access the current cache item and its key. The atFirst() and atLast() return true if the iterator points to the first or last item in the cache respectively. The isEmpty() function returns true if the cache is empty, and count() returns the number of items in the cache.
 .PP
 Note that atFirst() and atLast() refer to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
 .PP
@@ -83,11 +83,11 @@ Constructs an iterator for \fIcache\fR. The current iterator item is set to poin
 .SH "TQCacheIterator::TQCacheIterator ( const TQCacheIterator<type> & ci )"
 Constructs an iterator for the same cache as \fIci\fR. The new iterator starts at the same item as ci.current(), but moves independently from there on.
 .SH "bool TQCacheIterator::atFirst () const"
-Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the first item in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
+Returns true if the iterator points to the first item in the cache; otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
 .PP
 See also toFirst() and atLast().
 .SH "bool TQCacheIterator::atLast () const"
-Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
+Returns true if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
 .PP
 See also toLast() and atFirst().
 .SH "uint TQCacheIterator::count () const"
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Returns a pointer to the current iterator item.
 .SH "TQString TQCacheIterator::currentKey () const"
 Returns the key for the current iterator item.
 .SH "bool TQCacheIterator::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the cache is empty, i.e. count() == 0; otherwise it returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the cache is empty, i.e. count() == 0; otherwise it returns false.
 .PP
 See also count().
 .SH "TQCacheIterator::operator type * () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvas.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvas.3qt
index 2a44079d3..8eb287d15 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvas.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvas.3qt
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Inherits TQObject.
 .BI "TQCanvasItemList \fBcollisions\fR ( const TQPointArray & chunklist, const TQCanvasItem * item, bool exact ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBdrawArea\fR ( const TQRect & clip, TQPainter * painter, bool dbuf = FALSE )"
+.BI "void \fBdrawArea\fR ( const TQRect & clip, TQPainter * painter, bool dbuf = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetAdvancePeriod\fR ( int ms )"
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ The canvas is optimized for large numbers of items, particularly where only a sm
 .PP
 Qt provides a rich set of canvas item classes, e.g. TQCanvasEllipse, TQCanvasLine, TQCanvasPolygon, TQCanvasPolygonalItem, TQCanvasRectangle, TQCanvasSpline, TQCanvasSprite and TQCanvasText. You can subclass to create your own canvas items; TQCanvasPolygonalItem is the most common base class used for this purpose.
 .PP
-Items appear on the canvas after their show() function has been called (or setVisible(TRUE)), and \fIafter\fR update() has been called. The canvas only shows items that are visible, and then only if update() is called. (By default the canvas is white and so are canvas items, so if nothing appears try changing colors.)
+Items appear on the canvas after their show() function has been called (or setVisible(true)), and \fIafter\fR update() has been called. The canvas only shows items that are visible, and then only if update() is called. (By default the canvas is white and so are canvas items, so if nothing appears try changing colors.)
 .PP
 If you created the canvas without passing a width and height to the constructor you must also call resize().
 .PP
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Note that TQCanvas does not inherit from TQWidget, even though it has some funct
 .PP
 Canvas items are added to a canvas by constructing them and passing the canvas to the canvas item's constructor. An item can be moved to a different canvas using TQCanvasItem::setCanvas().
 .PP
-Canvas items are movable (and in the case of TQCanvasSprites, animated) objects that inherit TQCanvasItem. Each canvas item has a position on the canvas (x, y coordinates) and a height (z coordinate), all of which are held as floating-point numbers. Moving canvas items also have x and y velocities. It's possible for a canvas item to be outside the canvas (for example TQCanvasItem::x() is greater than width()). When a canvas item is off the canvas, onCanvas() returns FALSE and the canvas disregards the item. (Canvas items off the canvas do not slow down any of the common operations on the canvas.)
+Canvas items are movable (and in the case of TQCanvasSprites, animated) objects that inherit TQCanvasItem. Each canvas item has a position on the canvas (x, y coordinates) and a height (z coordinate), all of which are held as floating-point numbers. Moving canvas items also have x and y velocities. It's possible for a canvas item to be outside the canvas (for example TQCanvasItem::x() is greater than width()). When a canvas item is off the canvas, onCanvas() returns false and the canvas disregards the item. (Canvas items off the canvas do not slow down any of the common operations on the canvas.)
 .PP
 Canvas items can be moved with TQCanvasItem::move(). The advance() function moves all TQCanvasItem::animated() canvas items and setAdvancePeriod() makes TQCanvas move them automatically on a periodic basis. In the context of the TQCanvas classes, to `animate' a canvas item is to set it in motion, i.e. using TQCanvasItem::setVelocity(). Animation of a canvas item itself, i.e. items which change over time, is enabled by calling TQCanvasSprite::setFrameAnimation(), or more generally by subclassing and reimplementing TQCanvasItem::advance(). To detect collisions use one of the TQCanvasItem::collisions() functions.
 .PP
@@ -270,11 +270,11 @@ Returns a list of items which collide with the rectangle \fIr\fR. The list is or
 .SH "TQCanvasItemList TQCanvas::collisions ( const TQPointArray & chunklist, const TQCanvasItem * item, bool exact ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns a list of canvas items which intersect with the chunks listed in \fIchunklist\fR, excluding \fIitem\fR. If \fIexact\fR is TRUE, only those which actually collide with \fIitem\fR are returned; otherwise canvas items are included just for being in the chunks.
+Returns a list of canvas items which intersect with the chunks listed in \fIchunklist\fR, excluding \fIitem\fR. If \fIexact\fR is true, only those which actually collide with \fIitem\fR are returned; otherwise canvas items are included just for being in the chunks.
 .PP
 This is a utility function mainly used to implement the simpler TQCanvasItem::collisions() function.
-.SH "void TQCanvas::drawArea ( const TQRect & clip, TQPainter * painter, bool dbuf = FALSE )"
-Paints all canvas items that are in the area \fIclip\fR to \fIpainter\fR, using double-buffering if \fIdbuf\fR is TRUE.
+.SH "void TQCanvas::drawArea ( const TQRect & clip, TQPainter * painter, bool dbuf = false )"
+Paints all canvas items that are in the area \fIclip\fR to \fIpainter\fR, using double-buffering if \fIdbuf\fR is true.
 .PP
 e.g. to print the canvas to a printer:
 .PP
@@ -310,13 +310,13 @@ Returns the height of the canvas, in pixels.
 .PP
 Example: canvas/canvas.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQCanvas::onCanvas ( int x, int y ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the pixel position (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR) is on the canvas; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the pixel position (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR) is on the canvas; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also validChunk().
 .SH "bool TQCanvas::onCanvas ( const TQPoint & p ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the pixel position \fIp\fR is on the canvas; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the pixel position \fIp\fR is on the canvas; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also validChunk().
 .SH "TQRect TQCanvas::rect () const"
@@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ See also backgroundPixmap(), setBackgroundColor(), and setTiles().
 .SH "void TQCanvas::setChanged ( const TQRect & area )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Marks \fIarea\fR as changed. This \fIarea\fR will be redrawn in all views that are showing it when update() is called next.
 .SH "void TQCanvas::setDoubleBuffering ( bool y )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIy\fR is TRUE (the default) double-buffering is switched on; otherwise double-buffering is switched off.
+If \fIy\fR is true (the default) double-buffering is switched on; otherwise double-buffering is switched off.
 .PP
 Turning off double-buffering causes the redrawn areas to flicker a little and also gives a (usually small) performance improvement.
 .PP
@@ -417,13 +417,13 @@ Repaints changed areas in all views of the canvas.
 .PP
 See also advance().
 .SH "bool TQCanvas::validChunk ( int x, int y ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the chunk position (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR) is on the canvas; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the chunk position (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR) is on the canvas; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also onCanvas().
 .SH "bool TQCanvas::validChunk ( const TQPoint & p ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the chunk position \fIp\fR is on the canvas; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the chunk position \fIp\fR is on the canvas; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also onCanvas().
 .SH "int TQCanvas::width () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasitem.3qt
index c54d0704a..64321e2db 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasitem.3qt
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ A variety of TQCanvasItem subclasses provide immediately usable behaviour. This
 .PP
 Canvas items are added to a canvas by constructing them and passing the canvas to the canvas item's constructor. An item can be moved to a different canvas using setCanvas().
 .PP
-Items appear on the canvas after their show() function has been called (or setVisible(TRUE)), and \fIafter\fR update() has been called. The canvas only shows items that are visible, and then only if update() is called. If you created the canvas without passing a width and height to the constructor you'll also need to call resize(). Since the canvas background defaults to white and canvas items default to white, you may need to change colors to see your items.
+Items appear on the canvas after their show() function has been called (or setVisible(true)), and \fIafter\fR update() has been called. The canvas only shows items that are visible, and then only if update() is called. If you created the canvas without passing a width and height to the constructor you'll also need to call resize(). Since the canvas background defaults to white and canvas items default to white, you may need to change colors to see your items.
 .PP
 A TQCanvasItem object can be moved in the x(), y() and z() dimensions using functions such as move(), moveBy(), setX(), setY() and setZ(). A canvas item can be set in motion, `animated', using setAnimated() and given a velocity in the x and y directions with setXVelocity() and setYVelocity() -- the same effect can be achieved by calling setVelocity(). Use the collidesWith() function to see if the canvas item will collide on the \fInext\fR advance(1) and use collisions() to see what collisions have occurred.
 .PP
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Example: canvas/canvas.cpp.
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQCanvasSprite.
 .SH "bool TQCanvasItem::animated () const"
-Returns TRUE if the canvas item is in motion; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the canvas item is in motion; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setVelocity() and setAnimated().
 .SH "TQRect TQCanvasItem::boundingRect () const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
@@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ See also boundingRect().
 .SH "TQCanvas * TQCanvasItem::canvas () const"
 Returns the canvas containing the canvas item.
 .SH "bool TQCanvasItem::collidesWith ( const TQCanvasItem * other ) const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the canvas item will collide with the \fIother\fR item \fIafter\fR they have moved by their current velocities; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the canvas item will collide with the \fIother\fR item \fIafter\fR they have moved by their current velocities; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also collisions().
 .PP
@@ -241,9 +241,9 @@ Returns the list of canvas items that this canvas item has collided with.
 .PP
 A collision is generally defined as occurring when the pixels of one item draw on the pixels of another item, but not all subclasses are so precise. Also, since pixel-wise collision detection can be slow, this function works in either exact or inexact mode, according to the \fIexact\fR parameter.
 .PP
-If \fIexact\fR is TRUE, the canvas items returned have been accurately tested for collision with the canvas item.
+If \fIexact\fR is true, the canvas items returned have been accurately tested for collision with the canvas item.
 .PP
-If \fIexact\fR is FALSE, the canvas items returned are \fInear\fR the canvas item. You can test the canvas items returned using collidesWith() if any are interesting collision candidates. By using this approach, you can ignore some canvas items for which collisions are not relevant.
+If \fIexact\fR is false, the canvas items returned are \fInear\fR the canvas item. You can test the canvas items returned using collidesWith() if any are interesting collision candidates. By using this approach, you can ignore some canvas items for which collisions are not relevant.
 .PP
 The returned list is a list of TQCanvasItems, but often you will need to cast the items to their subclass types. The safe way to do this is to use rtti() before casting. This provides some of the functionality of the standard C++ dynamic cast operation even on compilers where dynamic casts are not available.
 .PP
@@ -261,17 +261,17 @@ Reimplemented in TQCanvasSprite, TQCanvasPolygonalItem, and TQCanvasText.
 .PP
 Use isEnabled() instead.
 .SH "void TQCanvasItem::hide ()"
-Shorthand for setVisible(FALSE).
+Shorthand for setVisible(false).
 .SH "bool TQCanvasItem::isActive () const"
-Returns TRUE if the TQCanvasItem is active; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the TQCanvasItem is active; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQCanvasItem::isEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the TQCanvasItem is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the TQCanvasItem is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQCanvasItem::isSelected () const"
-Returns TRUE if the canvas item is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the canvas item is selected; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQCanvasItem::isVisible () const"
-Returns TRUE if the canvas item is visible; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the canvas item is visible; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-Note that in this context TRUE does \fInot\fR mean that the canvas item is currently in a view, merely that if a view is showing the area where the canvas item is positioned, and the item is not obscured by items with higher z values, and the view is not obscured by overlaying windows, it would be visible.
+Note that in this context true does \fInot\fR mean that the canvas item is currently in a view, merely that if a view is showing the area where the canvas item is positioned, and the item is not obscured by items with higher z values, and the view is not obscured by overlaying windows, it would be visible.
 .PP
 See also setVisible() and z().
 .SH "void TQCanvasItem::move ( double x, double y )"
@@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Sets the active flag of the item to \fIyes\fR. If this changes the item's active
 .PP
 The TQCanvas, TQCanvasItem and the Qt-supplied TQCanvasItem subclasses do not make use of this value. The setActive() function is supplied because many applications need it, but it is up to you how you use the isActive() value.
 .SH "void TQCanvasItem::setAnimated ( bool y )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sets the canvas item to be in motion if \fIy\fR is TRUE, or not if \fIy\fR is FALSE. The speed and direction of the motion is set with setVelocity(), or with setXVelocity() and setYVelocity().
+Sets the canvas item to be in motion if \fIy\fR is true, or not if \fIy\fR is false. The speed and direction of the motion is set with setVelocity(), or with setXVelocity() and setYVelocity().
 .PP
 See also advance() and TQCanvas::advance().
 .SH "void TQCanvasItem::setCanvas ( TQCanvas * c )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Sets the canvas item to be in motion, moving by \fIvx\fR and \fIvy\fR pixels in
 .PP
 See also advance(), setXVelocity(), and setYVelocity().
 .SH "void TQCanvasItem::setVisible ( bool yes )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Makes the canvas item visible if \fIyes\fR is TRUE, or invisible if \fIyes\fR is FALSE. The change takes effect when TQCanvas::update() is next called.
+Makes the canvas item visible if \fIyes\fR is true, or invisible if \fIyes\fR is false. The change takes effect when TQCanvas::update() is next called.
 .SH "void TQCanvasItem::setX ( double x )"
 Moves the canvas item so that its x-position is \fIx\fR.
 .PP
@@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ See also z() and move().
 Examples:
 .)l canvas/canvas.cpp and chart/chartform_canvas.cpp.
 .SH "void TQCanvasItem::show ()"
-Shorthand for setVisible(TRUE).
+Shorthand for setVisible(true).
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l canvas/canvas.cpp and chart/chartform_canvas.cpp.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvaspixmaparray.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvaspixmaparray.3qt
index f7bd41879..4195eb4c4 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvaspixmaparray.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvaspixmaparray.3qt
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ TQCanvasSprite uses an image's mask for collision detection. You can change this
 See also Graphics Classes and Image Processing Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray ()"
-Constructs an invalid array (i.e. isValid() will return FALSE). You must call readPixmaps() before being able to use this TQCanvasPixmapArray.
+Constructs an invalid array (i.e. isValid() will return false). You must call readPixmaps() before being able to use this TQCanvasPixmapArray.
 .SH "TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray ( const TQString & datafilenamepattern, int fc = 0 )"
 Constructs a TQCanvasPixmapArray from files.
 .PP
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ If \fIfc\fR is not 0, \fIdatafilenamepattern\fR should contain "%1", e.g. "foo%1
 .PP
 If \fIfc\fR is 0, \fIdatafilenamepattern\fR is asssumed to be a filename, and the image contained in this file will be loaded as the first (and only) frame.
 .PP
-If \fIdatafilenamepattern\fR does not exist, is not readable, isn't an image, or some other error occurs, the array ends up empty and isValid() returns FALSE.
+If \fIdatafilenamepattern\fR does not exist, is not readable, isn't an image, or some other error occurs, the array ends up empty and isValid() returns false.
 .SH "TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray ( TQPtrList<TQPixmap> list, TQPtrList<TQPoint> hotspots )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Constructs a TQCanvasPixmapArray from the list of TQPixmaps \fIlist\fR. The \fIh
 .SH "TQCanvasPixmapArray::TQCanvasPixmapArray ( TQValueList<TQPixmap> list, TQPointArray hotspots = TQPointArray ( ) )"
 Constructs a TQCanvasPixmapArray from the list of TQPixmaps in the \fIlist\fR. Each pixmap will get a hotspot according to the \fIhotspots\fR array. If no hotspots are specified, each one is set to be at position (0, 0).
 .PP
-If an error occurs, isValid() will return FALSE.
+If an error occurs, isValid() will return false.
 .SH "TQCanvasPixmapArray::~TQCanvasPixmapArray ()"
 Destroys the pixmap array and all the pixmaps it contains.
 .SH "uint TQCanvasPixmapArray::count () const"
@@ -92,13 +92,13 @@ Returns the number of pixmaps in the array.
 .SH "TQCanvasPixmap * TQCanvasPixmapArray::image ( int i ) const"
 Returns pixmap \fIi\fR in the array, if \fIi\fR is non-negative and less than than count(), and returns an unspecified value otherwise.
 .SH "bool TQCanvasPixmapArray::isValid () const"
-Returns TRUE if the pixmap array is valid; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the pixmap array is valid; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQCanvasPixmapArray::operator! ()"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 Use isValid() instead.
 .PP
-This returns FALSE if the array is valid, and TRUE if it is not.
+This returns false if the array is valid, and true if it is not.
 .SH "bool TQCanvasPixmapArray::readCollisionMasks ( const TQString & filename )"
 Reads new collision masks for the array.
 .PP
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ If count() is 1 \fIfilename\fR must specify a real filename to read the mask fro
 .PP
 All collision masks must be 1-bit images or this function call will fail.
 .PP
-If the file isn't readable, contains the wrong number of images, or there is some other error, this function will return FALSE, and the array will be flagged as invalid; otherwise this function returns TRUE.
+If the file isn't readable, contains the wrong number of images, or there is some other error, this function will return false, and the array will be flagged as invalid; otherwise this function returns true.
 .PP
 See also isValid().
 .SH "bool TQCanvasPixmapArray::readPixmaps ( const TQString & filenamepattern, int fc = 0 )"
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ If \fIfc\fR is not 0, \fIfilenamepattern\fR should contain "%1", e.g." foo%1.png
 .PP
 If \fIfc\fR is 0, \fIfilenamepattern\fR is asssumed to be a filename, and the image contained in this file will be loaded as the first (and only) frame.
 .PP
-If \fIfilenamepattern\fR does not exist, is not readable, isn't an image, or some other error occurs, this function will return FALSE, and isValid() will return FALSE; otherwise this function will return TRUE.
+If \fIfilenamepattern\fR does not exist, is not readable, isn't an image, or some other error occurs, this function will return false, and isValid() will return false; otherwise this function will return true.
 .PP
 See also isValid().
 .SH "void TQCanvasPixmapArray::setImage ( int i, TQCanvasPixmap * p )"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvaspolygonalitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvaspolygonalitem.3qt
index cdb562cb2..7f6fbca10 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvaspolygonalitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvaspolygonalitem.3qt
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Reimplemented in TQCanvasRectangle, TQCanvasPolygon, and TQCanvasEllipse.
 .SH "void TQCanvasPolygonalItem::invalidate ()\fC [protected]\fR"
 Invalidates all information about the area covered by the canvas item. The item will be updated automatically on the next call that changes the item's status, for example, move() or update(). Call this function if you are going to change the shape of the item (as returned by areaPoints()) while the item is visible.
 .SH "bool TQCanvasPolygonalItem::isValid () const\fC [protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the polygonal item's area information has not been invalidated; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the polygonal item's area information has not been invalidated; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also invalidate().
 .SH "TQPen TQCanvasPolygonalItem::pen () const"
@@ -155,13 +155,13 @@ See also setBrush(), pen(), and drawShape().
 Examples:
 .)l canvas/canvas.cpp and chart/chartform_canvas.cpp.
 .SH "void TQCanvasPolygonalItem::setWinding ( bool enable )\fC [protected]\fR"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, the polygonal item will use the winding algorithm to determine the "inside" of the polygon; otherwise the odd-even algorithm will be used.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, the polygonal item will use the winding algorithm to determine the "inside" of the polygon; otherwise the odd-even algorithm will be used.
 .PP
 The default is to use the odd-even algorithm.
 .PP
 See also winding().
 .SH "bool TQCanvasPolygonalItem::winding () const\fC [protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the polygonal item uses the winding algorithm to determine the "inside" of the polygon. Returns FALSE if it uses the odd-even algorithm.
+Returns true if the polygonal item uses the winding algorithm to determine the "inside" of the polygon. Returns false if it uses the odd-even algorithm.
 .PP
 The default is to use the odd-even algorithm.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasspline.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasspline.3qt
index 700d376ed..db9cbc396 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasspline.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasspline.3qt
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Inherits TQCanvasPolygon.
 .BI "\fB~TQCanvasSpline\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetControlPoints\fR ( TQPointArray ctrl, bool close = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBsetControlPoints\fR ( TQPointArray ctrl, bool close = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQPointArray \fBcontrolPoints\fR () const"
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ See also setControlPoints().
 .SH "TQCanvasSpline::~TQCanvasSpline ()"
 Destroy the spline.
 .SH "bool TQCanvasSpline::closed () const"
-Returns TRUE if the control points are a closed set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the control points are a closed set; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQPointArray TQCanvasSpline::controlPoints () const"
 Returns the current set of control points.
 .PP
@@ -67,10 +67,10 @@ Returns 8 (TQCanvasItem::Rtti_Spline).
 See also TQCanvasItem::rtti().
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQCanvasPolygon.
-.SH "void TQCanvasSpline::setControlPoints ( TQPointArray ctrl, bool close = TRUE )"
+.SH "void TQCanvasSpline::setControlPoints ( TQPointArray ctrl, bool close = true )"
 Set the spline control points to \fIctrl\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIclose\fR is TRUE, then the first point in \fIctrl\fR will be re-used as the last point, and the number of control points must be a multiple of 3. If \fIclose\fR is FALSE, one additional control point is required, and the number of control points must be one of (4, 7, 10, 13, ...).
+If \fIclose\fR is true, then the first point in \fIctrl\fR will be re-used as the last point, and the number of control points must be a multiple of 3. If \fIclose\fR is false, one additional control point is required, and the number of control points must be one of (4, 7, 10, 13, ...).
 .PP
 If the number of control points doesn't meet the above conditions, the number of points will be truncated to the largest number of points that do meet the requirement.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasview.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasview.3qt
index f01a9d1da..ce8984be9 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasview.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasview.3qt
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Sets the transformation matrix of the TQCanvasView to \fIwm\fR. The matrix must
 .PP
 When you use this, you should note that the performance of the TQCanvasView will decrease considerably.
 .PP
-Returns FALSE if \fIwm\fR is not invertable; otherwise returns TRUE.
+Returns false if \fIwm\fR is not invertable; otherwise returns true.
 .PP
 See also worldMatrix(), inverseWorldMatrix(), and TQWMatrix::isInvertible().
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcdestyle.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcdestyle.3qt
index 217a2edce..b01e3fe78 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcdestyle.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcdestyle.3qt
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Inherits TQMotifStyle.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQCDEStyle\fR ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQCDEStyle\fR ( bool useHighlightCols = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual \fB~TQCDEStyle\fR ()"
@@ -31,10 +31,10 @@ Note that the functions provided by TQCDEStyle are reimplementations of TQStyle
 .PP
 See also Widget Appearance and Style.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQCDEStyle::TQCDEStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQCDEStyle::TQCDEStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = false )"
 Constructs a TQCDEStyle.
 .PP
-If \fIuseHighlightCols\fR is FALSE (the default), then the style will polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the text color.
+If \fIuseHighlightCols\fR is false (the default), then the style will polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the text color.
 .SH "TQCDEStyle::~TQCDEStyle ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Destroys the style.
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqchar.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqchar.3qt
index 032b30141..ca8f15cac 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqchar.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqchar.3qt
@@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Unicode characters are (so far) 16-bit entities without any markup or structure.
 .PP
 TQChar provides a full complement of testing/classification functions, converting to and from other formats, converting from composed to decomposed Unicode, and trying to compare and case-convert if you ask it to.
 .PP
-The classification functions include functions like those in ctype.h, but operating on the full range of Unicode characters. They all return TRUE if the character is a certain type of character; otherwise they return FALSE. These classification functions are isNull() (returns TRUE if the character is U+0000), isPrint() (TRUE if the character is any sort of printable character, including whitespace), isPunct() (any sort of punctation), isMark() (Unicode Mark), isLetter (a letter), isNumber() (any sort of numeric character), isLetterOrNumber(), and isDigit() (decimal digits). All of these are wrappers around category() which return the Unicode-defined category of each character.
+The classification functions include functions like those in ctype.h, but operating on the full range of Unicode characters. They all return true if the character is a certain type of character; otherwise they return false. These classification functions are isNull() (returns true if the character is U+0000), isPrint() (true if the character is any sort of printable character, including whitespace), isPunct() (any sort of punctation), isMark() (Unicode Mark), isLetter (a letter), isNumber() (any sort of numeric character), isLetterOrNumber(), and isDigit() (decimal digits). All of these are wrappers around category() which return the Unicode-defined category of each character.
 .PP
 TQChar further provides direction(), which indicates the "natural" writing direction of this character. The joining() function indicates how the character joins with its neighbors (needed mostly for Arabic) and finally mirrored(), which indicates whether the character needs to be mirrored when it is printed in its" unnatural" writing direction.
 .PP
@@ -347,29 +347,29 @@ Returns the character's direction.
 .PP
 See also Direction.
 .SH "bool TQChar::isDigit () const"
-Returns TRUE if the character is a decimal digit (Number_DecimalDigit); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the character is a decimal digit (Number_DecimalDigit); otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQChar::isLetter () const"
-Returns TRUE if the character is a letter (Letter_* categories); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the character is a letter (Letter_* categories); otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQChar::isLetterOrNumber () const"
-Returns TRUE if the character is a letter or number (Letter_* or Number_* categories); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the character is a letter or number (Letter_* or Number_* categories); otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQChar::isMark () const"
-Returns TRUE if the character is a mark (Mark_* categories); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the character is a mark (Mark_* categories); otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQChar::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if the character is the Unicode character 0x0000 (ASCII NUL); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the character is the Unicode character 0x0000 (ASCII NUL); otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQChar::isNumber () const"
-Returns TRUE if the character is a number (of any sort - Number_* categories); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the character is a number (of any sort - Number_* categories); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isDigit().
 .SH "bool TQChar::isPrint () const"
-Returns TRUE if the character is a printable character; otherwise returns FALSE. This is any character not of category Cc or Cn.
+Returns true if the character is a printable character; otherwise returns false. This is any character not of category Cc or Cn.
 .PP
 Note that this gives no indication of whether the character is available in a particular font.
 .SH "bool TQChar::isPunct () const"
-Returns TRUE if the character is a punctuation mark (Punctuation_* categories); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the character is a punctuation mark (Punctuation_* categories); otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQChar::isSpace () const"
-Returns TRUE if the character is a separator character (Separator_* categories); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the character is a separator character (Separator_* categories); otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQChar::isSymbol () const"
-Returns TRUE if the character is a symbol (Symbol_* categories); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the character is a symbol (Symbol_* categories); otherwise returns false.
 .SH "Joining TQChar::joining () const"
 \fBWarning:\fR This function is not supported (it may change to use Unicode character classes).
 .PP
@@ -379,13 +379,13 @@ Returns the Latin-1 value of this character, or 0 if it cannot be represented in
 .SH "TQChar TQChar::lower () const"
 Returns the lowercase equivalent if the character is uppercase; otherwise returns the character itself.
 .SH "bool TQChar::mirrored () const"
-Returns TRUE if the character is a mirrored character (one that should be reversed if the text direction is reversed); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the character is a mirrored character (one that should be reversed if the text direction is reversed); otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQChar TQChar::mirroredChar () const"
 Returns the mirrored character if this character is a mirrored character, otherwise returns the character itself.
 .SH "bool TQChar::networkOrdered ()\fC [static]\fR"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if this character is in network byte order (MSB first); otherwise returns FALSE. This is platform dependent.
+Returns true if this character is in network byte order (MSB first); otherwise returns false. This is platform dependent.
 .SH "TQChar::operator char () const"
 Returns the Latin-1 character equivalent to the TQChar, or 0. This is mainly useful for non-internationalized software.
 .PP
@@ -402,67 +402,67 @@ Returns a reference to the numeric Unicode value equal to the TQChar.
 Returns the uppercase equivalent if the character is lowercase; otherwise returns the character itself.
 .SH RELATED FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "int operator!= ( TQChar c1, TQChar c2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIc1\fR and \fIc2\fR are not the same Unicode character; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIc1\fR and \fIc2\fR are not the same Unicode character; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int operator!= ( char ch, TQChar c )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIc\fR is not the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIc\fR is not the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int operator!= ( TQChar c, char ch )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIc\fR is not the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIc\fR is not the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int operator< ( TQChar c1, TQChar c2 )"
-Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of \fIc1\fR is less than that of \fIc2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of \fIc1\fR is less than that of \fIc2\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int operator< ( TQChar c, char ch )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of \fIc\fR is less than that of the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of \fIc\fR is less than that of the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int operator< ( char ch, TQChar c )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR is less than that of \fIc\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR is less than that of \fIc\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int operator<= ( TQChar c1, TQChar c2 )"
-Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of \fIc1\fR is less than that of \fIc2\fR, or they are the same Unicode character; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of \fIc1\fR is less than that of \fIc2\fR, or they are the same Unicode character; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int operator<= ( TQChar c, char ch )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of \fIc\fR is less than or equal to that of the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of \fIc\fR is less than or equal to that of the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int operator<= ( char ch, TQChar c )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR is less than or equal to that of \fIc\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR is less than or equal to that of \fIc\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool operator== ( TQChar c1, TQChar c2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIc1\fR and \fIc2\fR are the same Unicode character; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIc1\fR and \fIc2\fR are the same Unicode character; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool operator== ( char ch, TQChar c )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIc\fR is the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIc\fR is the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool operator== ( TQChar c, char ch )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIc\fR is the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIc\fR is the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int operator> ( TQChar c1, TQChar c2 )"
-Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of \fIc1\fR is greater than that of \fIc2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of \fIc1\fR is greater than that of \fIc2\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int operator> ( TQChar c, char ch )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of \fIc\fR is greater than that of the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of \fIc\fR is greater than that of the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int operator> ( char ch, TQChar c )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR is greater than that of \fIc\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR is greater than that of \fIc\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int operator>= ( TQChar c1, TQChar c2 )"
-Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of \fIc1\fR is greater than that of \fIc2\fR, or they are the same Unicode character; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of \fIc1\fR is greater than that of \fIc2\fR, or they are the same Unicode character; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int operator>= ( TQChar c, char ch )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of \fIc\fR is greater than or equal to that of the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of \fIc\fR is greater than or equal to that of the ASCII/Latin-1 character \fIch\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int operator>= ( char ch, TQChar c )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the numeric Unicode value of the ASCII/Latin-1
+Returns true if the numeric Unicode value of the ASCII/Latin-1
 character \fIch\fR is greater than or equal to that of \fIc\fR;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
+otherwise returns false.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 .BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqchar.html
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcheckbox.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcheckbox.3qt
index 37170c0a3..c8517490f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcheckbox.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcheckbox.3qt
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Inherits TQButton.
 .BI "void \fBsetNoChange\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetTristate\fR ( bool y = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBsetTristate\fR ( bool y = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "bool \fBisTristate\fR () const"
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor.
 .SH "TQKeySequence TQButton::accel () const"
 Returns the accelerator associated with the button. See the "accel" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::autoRepeat () const"
-Returns TRUE if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
+Returns true if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
 .SH "void TQButton::clicked ()\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e. first pressed down and then released when the mouse cursor is inside the button), when the accelerator key is typed or when animateClick() is called. This signal is \fInot\fR emitted if you call setDown().
 .PP
@@ -172,17 +172,17 @@ If the button is not a member of any TQButtonGroup, this function returns 0.
 .PP
 See also TQButtonGroup.
 .SH "bool TQCheckBox::isChecked () const"
-Returns TRUE if the checkbox is checked; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "checked" property for details.
+Returns true if the checkbox is checked; otherwise returns false. See the "checked" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::isDown () const"
-Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "down" property for details.
+Returns true if the button is pressed; otherwise returns false. See the "down" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::isExclusiveToggle () const"
-Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "exclusiveToggle" property for details.
+Returns true if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns false. See the "exclusiveToggle" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::isOn () const"
-Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "on" property for details.
+Returns true if the button is toggled; otherwise returns false. See the "on" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::isToggleButton () const"
-Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "toggleButton" property for details.
+Returns true if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns false. See the "toggleButton" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQCheckBox::isTristate () const"
-Returns TRUE if the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "tristate" property for details.
+Returns true if the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox; otherwise returns false. See the "tristate" property for details.
 .SH "const TQPixmap * TQButton::pixmap () const"
 Returns the pixmap shown on the button. See the "pixmap" property for details.
 .SH "void TQButton::pressed ()\fC [signal]\fR"
@@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ See also tristate.
 Sets the pixmap shown on the button. See the "pixmap" property for details.
 .SH "void TQButton::setText ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the text shown on the button. See the "text" property for details.
-.SH "void TQCheckBox::setTristate ( bool y = TRUE )"
+.SH "void TQCheckBox::setTristate ( bool y = true )"
 Sets whether the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox to \fIy\fR. See the "tristate" property for details.
 .SH "ToggleState TQButton::state () const"
 Returns the state of the toggle button. See the "toggleState" property for details.
@@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Toggles the state of a toggle button.
 .PP
 See also on, setOn(), toggled(), and toggleButton.
 .SH "void TQButton::toggled ( bool on )\fC [signal]\fR"
-This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. \fIon\fR is TRUE if the button is on, or FALSE if the button is off.
+This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. \fIon\fR is true if the button is on, or false if the button is off.
 .PP
 This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation, or because setOn() was called.
 .PP
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Set this property's value with setAutoRepeat() and get this property's value wit
 .SH "bool checked"
 This property holds whether the checkbox is checked.
 .PP
-The default is unchecked, i.e. FALSE.
+The default is unchecked, i.e. false.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setChecked() and get this property's value with isChecked().
 .SH "TQPixmap pixmap"
@@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text
 .SH "bool tristate"
 This property holds whether the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox.
 .PP
-The default is two-state, i.e. tri-state is FALSE.
+The default is two-state, i.e. tri-state is false.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setTristate() and get this property's value with isTristate().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqchecklistitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqchecklistitem.3qt
index 9afbc0eed..785149609 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqchecklistitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqchecklistitem.3qt
@@ -155,9 +155,9 @@ Toggle check box or set radio button to on.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQListViewItem.
 .SH "bool TQCheckListItem::isOn () const"
-Returns TRUE if the item is toggled on; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the item is toggled on; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQCheckListItem::isTristate () const"
-Returns TRUE if the item is tristate; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the item is tristate; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setTristate().
 .SH "void TQCheckListItem::paintCell ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, int column, int width, int align )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Make your derived classes return their own values for rtti(), and you can distin
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQListViewItem.
 .SH "void TQCheckListItem::setOn ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sets the button on if \fIb\fR is TRUE, otherwise sets it off. Maintains radio button exclusivity.
+Sets the button on if \fIb\fR is true, otherwise sets it off. Maintains radio button exclusivity.
 .SH "void TQCheckListItem::setState ( ToggleState s )"
 Sets the toggle state of the checklistitem to \fIs\fR. \fIs\fR can be Off, NoChange or On.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqchecktableitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqchecktableitem.3qt
index 3321a20d9..1007a314c 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqchecktableitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqchecktableitem.3qt
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ See also rtti(), EditType, TQComboTableItem, TQTableItem, TQCheckBox, and Advanc
 .SH "TQCheckTableItem::TQCheckTableItem ( TQTable * table, const TQString & txt )"
 Creates a TQCheckTableItem with an EditType of WhenCurrent as a child of \fItable\fR. The checkbox is initially unchecked and its label is set to the string \fItxt\fR.
 .SH "bool TQCheckTableItem::isChecked () const"
-Returns TRUE if the checkbox table item is checked; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the checkbox table item is checked; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setChecked().
 .SH "int TQCheckTableItem::rtti () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ See also TQTableItem::rtti().
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQTableItem.
 .SH "void TQCheckTableItem::setChecked ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE the checkbox is checked; if \fIb\fR is FALSE the checkbox is unchecked.
+If \fIb\fR is true the checkbox is checked; if \fIb\fR is false the checkbox is unchecked.
 .PP
 See also isChecked().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqchildevent.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqchildevent.3qt
index 6f2c6d923..fbcdefede 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqchildevent.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqchildevent.3qt
@@ -48,9 +48,9 @@ The \fItype\fR parameter must be either TQEvent::ChildInserted or TQEvent::Child
 .SH "TQObject * TQChildEvent::child () const"
 Returns the child widget that was inserted or removed.
 .SH "bool TQChildEvent::inserted () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget received a new child; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the widget received a new child; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQChildEvent::removed () const"
-Returns TRUE if the object lost a child; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the object lost a child; otherwise returns false.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 .BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqchildevent.html
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqclipboard.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqclipboard.3qt
index 844594131..2c024abd2 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqclipboard.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqclipboard.3qt
@@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ See also TQClipboard::Mode and supportsSelection().
 .SH "void TQClipboard::clear ()"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-This function uses the TQClipboard::clear() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+This function uses the TQClipboard::clear() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
 .SH "TQMimeSource * TQClipboard::data ( Mode mode ) const"
 Returns a reference to a TQMimeSource representation of the current clipboard data.
 .PP
@@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ See also setData().
 .SH "TQMimeSource * TQClipboard::data () const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-This function uses the TQClipboard::data() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+This function uses the TQClipboard::data() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
 .SH "void TQClipboard::dataChanged ()\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when the clipboard data is changed.
 .SH "TQImage TQClipboard::image ( Mode mode ) const"
@@ -209,11 +209,11 @@ See also setImage(), pixmap(), data(), and TQImage::isNull().
 .SH "TQImage TQClipboard::image () const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-This function uses the TQClipboard::image() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+This function uses the TQClipboard::image() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
 .SH "bool TQClipboard::ownsClipboard () const"
-Returns TRUE if this clipboard object owns the clipboard data; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this clipboard object owns the clipboard data; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQClipboard::ownsSelection () const"
-Returns TRUE if this clipboard object owns the mouse selection data; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this clipboard object owns the mouse selection data; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQPixmap TQClipboard::pixmap ( Mode mode ) const"
 Returns the clipboard pixmap, or null if the clipboard does not contain a pixmap. Note that this can lose information. For example, if the image is 24-bit and the display is 8-bit, the result is converted to 8 bits, and if the image has an alpha channel, the result just has a mask.
 .PP
@@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ See also setPixmap(), image(), data(), and TQPixmap::convertFromImage().
 .SH "TQPixmap TQClipboard::pixmap () const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-This function uses the TQClipboard::pixmap() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+This function uses the TQClipboard::pixmap() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
 .SH "void TQClipboard::selectionChanged ()\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when the selection is changed. This only applies to windowing systems that support selections, e.g. X11. Windows doesn't support selections.
 .SH "bool TQClipboard::selectionModeEnabled () const"
@@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ See also data().
 .SH "void TQClipboard::setData ( TQMimeSource * src )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-This function uses the TQClipboard::setData() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+This function uses the TQClipboard::setData() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
 .SH "void TQClipboard::setImage ( const TQImage & image, Mode mode )"
 Copies \fIimage\fR into the clipboard.
 .PP
@@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ See also image(), setPixmap(), and setData().
 .SH "void TQClipboard::setImage ( const TQImage & image )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-This function uses the TQClipboard::setImage() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+This function uses the TQClipboard::setImage() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
 .SH "void TQClipboard::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, Mode mode )"
 Copies \fIpixmap\fR into the clipboard. Note that this is slower than setImage() because it needs to convert the TQPixmap to a TQImage first.
 .PP
@@ -275,13 +275,13 @@ See also pixmap(), setImage(), and setData().
 .SH "void TQClipboard::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-This function uses the TQClipboard::setPixmap() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+This function uses the TQClipboard::setPixmap() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
 .SH "void TQClipboard::setSelectionMode ( bool enable )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 Use the TQClipboard::data(), TQClipboard::setData() and related functions which take a TQClipboard::Mode argument.
 .PP
-Sets the clipboard selection mode. If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, then subsequent calls to TQClipboard::setData() and other functions which put data into the clipboard will put the data into the mouse selection, otherwise the data will be put into the clipboard.
+Sets the clipboard selection mode. If \fIenable\fR is true, then subsequent calls to TQClipboard::setData() and other functions which put data into the clipboard will put the data into the mouse selection, otherwise the data will be put into the clipboard.
 .PP
 See also supportsSelection() and selectionModeEnabled().
 .SH "void TQClipboard::setText ( const TQString & text, Mode mode )"
@@ -295,9 +295,9 @@ Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
 .SH "void TQClipboard::setText ( const TQString & text )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-This function uses the TQClipboard::setText() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+This function uses the TQClipboard::setText() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
 .SH "bool TQClipboard::supportsSelection () const"
-Returns TRUE if the clipboard supports mouse selection; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the clipboard supports mouse selection; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
 .SH "TQString TQClipboard::text ( Mode mode ) const"
@@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ See also setText(), data(), and TQString::operator!().
 .SH "TQString TQClipboard::text () const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-This function uses the TQClipboard::text() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns TRUE, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
+This function uses the TQClipboard::text() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode argument. The value of the mode argument is determined by the return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled() returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection, otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
 .SH "TQString TQClipboard::text ( TQCString & subtype ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
@@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ if the clipboard does not contain any text. This function uses the
 TQClipboard::text() function which takes a TQClipboard::Mode
 argument.  The value of the mode argument is determined by the
 return value of selectionModeEnabled(). If selectionModeEnabled()
-returns TRUE, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection,
+returns true, the mode argument is TQClipboard::Selection,
 otherwise the mode argument is TQClipboard::Clipboard.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcloseevent.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcloseevent.3qt
index 47f01da1e..39994dfb7 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcloseevent.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcloseevent.3qt
@@ -47,12 +47,12 @@ TQObjects emits the destroyed() signal when they are deleted.
 .PP
 If the last top-level window is closed, the TQApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is emitted.
 .PP
-The isAccepted() function returns TRUE if the event's receiver has agreed to close the widget; call accept() to agree to close the widget and call ignore() if the receiver of this event does not want the widget to be closed.
+The isAccepted() function returns true if the event's receiver has agreed to close the widget; call accept() to agree to close the widget and call ignore() if the receiver of this event does not want the widget to be closed.
 .PP
 See also TQWidget::close(), TQWidget::hide(), TQObject::destroyed(), TQApplication::setMainWidget(), TQApplication::lastWindowClosed(), TQApplication::exec(), TQApplication::quit(), and Event Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "TQCloseEvent::TQCloseEvent ()"
-Constructs a close event object with the accept parameter flag set to FALSE.
+Constructs a close event object with the accept parameter flag set to false.
 .PP
 See also accept().
 .SH "void TQCloseEvent::accept ()"
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ See also accept().
 Examples:
 .)l action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQCloseEvent::isAccepted () const"
-Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event has agreed to close the widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the receiver of the event has agreed to close the widget; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also accept() and ignore().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcolor.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcolor.3qt
index 3d5c89b91..db078b79f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcolor.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcolor.3qt
@@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ Internal initialization required for TQColor. This function is called from the T
 .PP
 See also cleanup().
 .SH "bool TQColor::isValid () const"
-Returns FALSE if the color is invalid, i.e. it was constructed using the default constructor; otherwise returns TRUE.
+Returns false if the color is invalid, i.e. it was constructed using the default constructor; otherwise returns true.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l chart/element.cpp, chart/setdataform.cpp, and scribble/scribble.cpp.
@@ -454,11 +454,11 @@ The returned value is equal to the default pixmap depth.
 .PP
 See also TQPixmap::defaultDepth().
 .SH "bool TQColor::operator!= ( const TQColor & c ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this color has a different RGB value from \fIc\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this color has a different RGB value from \fIc\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQColor & TQColor::operator= ( const TQColor & c )"
 Assigns a copy of the color \fIc\fR and returns a reference to this color.
 .SH "bool TQColor::operator== ( const TQColor & c ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this color has the same RGB value as \fIc\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this color has the same RGB value as \fIc\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "uint TQColor::pixel () const"
 Returns the pixel value.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcolordialog.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcolordialog.3qt
index 15fb0bba0..6a9fc6900 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcolordialog.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcolordialog.3qt
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ Examples:
 .SH "TQRgb TQColorDialog::getRgba ( TQRgb initial, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )\fC [static]\fR"
 Pops up a modal color dialog to allow the user to choose a color and an alpha channel (transparency) value. The color+alpha is initially set to \fIinitial\fR. The dialog is a child of \fIparent\fR and called \fIname\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is non-null, \fI*\fR\fIok\fR is set to TRUE if the user clicked OK, and to FALSE if the user clicked Cancel.
+If \fIok\fR is non-null, \fI*\fR\fIok\fR is set to true if the user clicked OK, and to false if the user clicked Cancel.
 .PP
 If the user clicks Cancel, the \fIinitial\fR value is returned.
 .SH "void TQColorDialog::setCustomColor ( int i, TQRgb c )\fC [static]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcolordrag.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcolordrag.3qt
index 57cd961a7..ee7324382 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcolordrag.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcolordrag.3qt
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ Constructs a color drag object with the color \fIcol\fR. Passes \fIdragsource\fR
 .SH "TQColorDrag::TQColorDrag ( TQWidget * dragsource = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs a color drag object with a white color. Passes \fIdragsource\fR and \fIname\fR to the TQStoredDrag constructor.
 .SH "bool TQColorDrag::canDecode ( TQMimeSource * e )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the color drag object can decode the mime source \fIe\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the color drag object can decode the mime source \fIe\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQColorDrag::decode ( TQMimeSource * e, TQColor & col )\fC [static]\fR"
 Decodes the mime source \fIe\fR and sets the decoded values to \fIcol\fR.
 .SH "void TQColorDrag::setColor ( const TQColor & col )"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcolorgroup.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcolorgroup.3qt
index 9f2197441..476a7562d 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcolorgroup.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcolorgroup.3qt
@@ -294,13 +294,13 @@ Returns the midlight color of the color group.
 .PP
 See also ColorRole.
 .SH "bool TQColorGroup::operator!= ( const TQColorGroup & g ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this color group is different from \fIg\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this color group is different from \fIg\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also
 .SH "TQColorGroup & TQColorGroup::operator= ( const TQColorGroup & other )"
 Copies the colors of \fIother\fR to this color group.
 .SH "bool TQColorGroup::operator== ( const TQColorGroup & g ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this color group is equal to \fIg\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this color group is equal to \fIg\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also
 .SH "void TQColorGroup::setBrush ( ColorRole r, const TQBrush & b )"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcombobox.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcombobox.3qt
index 083dd60d5..f4ebe0d89 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcombobox.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcombobox.3qt
@@ -241,9 +241,9 @@ The other constructor creates a new-style combobox in Motif style, and can creat
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        TQComboBox *c1 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, this, "read-only combobox" );
+        TQComboBox *c1 = new TQComboBox( false, this, "read-only combobox" );
 .br
-        TQComboBox *c2 = new TQComboBox( TRUE, this, "editable combobox" );
+        TQComboBox *c2 = new TQComboBox( true, this, "editable combobox" );
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ Note: If you use this constructor to create your TQComboBox, then the pixmap() f
 .SH "TQComboBox::TQComboBox ( bool rw, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs a combobox with a maximum size and either Motif 2.0 or Windows look and feel.
 .PP
-The input field can be edited if \fIrw\fR is TRUE, otherwise the user may only choose one of the items in the combobox.
+The input field can be edited if \fIrw\fR is true, otherwise the user may only choose one of the items in the combobox.
 .PP
 The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are passed on to the TQWidget constructor.
 .SH "TQComboBox::~TQComboBox ()"
@@ -334,9 +334,9 @@ This signal is emitted when a new item has been activated (selected). \fIstring\
 .PP
 You can also use the activated(int) signal, but be aware that its argument is meaningful only for selected strings, not for user entered strings.
 .SH "bool TQComboBox::autoCompletion () const"
-Returns TRUE if auto-completion is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoCompletion" property for details.
+Returns true if auto-completion is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "autoCompletion" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQComboBox::autoResize () const"
-Returns TRUE if auto resize is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoResize" property for details.
+Returns true if auto resize is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "autoResize" property for details.
 .SH "void TQComboBox::changeItem ( const TQString & t, int index )"
 Replaces the item at position \fIindex\fR with the text \fIt\fR.
 .SH "void TQComboBox::changeItem ( const TQPixmap & im, int index )"
@@ -368,9 +368,9 @@ Returns the index of the current item in the combobox. See the "currentItem" pro
 .SH "TQString TQComboBox::currentText () const"
 Returns the text of the combobox's current item. See the "currentText" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQComboBox::duplicatesEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if duplicates are allowed; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "duplicatesEnabled" property for details.
+Returns true if duplicates are allowed; otherwise returns false. See the "duplicatesEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQComboBox::editable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the combobox is editable; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "editable" property for details.
+Returns true if the combobox is editable; otherwise returns false. See the "editable" property for details.
 .SH "void TQComboBox::highlighted ( int index )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when a new item has been set to be the current item. The \fIindex\fR is the position of the item in the combobox.
 .PP
@@ -511,7 +511,7 @@ See also setValidator(), clearValidator(), and TQValidator.
 .SH "bool autoCompletion"
 This property holds whether auto-completion is enabled.
 .PP
-This property can only be set for editable comboboxes, for non-editable comboboxes it has no effect. It is FALSE by default.
+This property can only be set for editable comboboxes, for non-editable comboboxes it has no effect. It is false by default.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setAutoCompletion() and get this property's value with autoCompletion().
 .SH "bool autoMask"
@@ -523,7 +523,7 @@ This property holds whether auto resize is enabled.
 .PP
 \fBThis property is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-If this property is set to TRUE then the combobox will resize itself whenever its contents change. The default is FALSE.
+If this property is set to true then the combobox will resize itself whenever its contents change. The default is false.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setAutoResize() and get this property's value with autoResize().
 .SH "int count"
@@ -547,9 +547,9 @@ If the combobox is editable and the user enters some text in the combobox's line
 .TP
 If the text is not already in the list, the text is inserted.
 .TP
-If the text is in the list and this property is TRUE (the default), the text is inserted.
+If the text is in the list and this property is true (the default), the text is inserted.
 .TP
-If the text is in the list and this property is FALSE, the text is \fInot\fR inserted; instead the item which has matching text becomes the current item.
+If the text is in the list and this property is false, the text is \fInot\fR inserted; instead the item which has matching text becomes the current item.
 .PP
 This property only affects user-interaction. You can use insertItem() to insert duplicates if you wish regardless of this setting.
 .PP
@@ -557,7 +557,7 @@ Set this property's value with setDuplicatesEnabled() and get this property's va
 .SH "bool editable"
 This property holds whether the combobox is editable.
 .PP
-This property's default is FALSE. Note that the combobox will be cleared if this property is set to TRUE for a 1.x Motif style combobox. To avoid this, use setEditable() before inserting any items. Also note that the 1.x version of Motif didn't have any editable comboboxes, so the combobox will change it's appearance to a 2.0 style Motif combobox is it is set to be editable.
+This property's default is false. Note that the combobox will be cleared if this property is set to true for a 1.x Motif style combobox. To avoid this, use setEditable() before inserting any items. Also note that the 1.x version of Motif didn't have any editable comboboxes, so the combobox will change it's appearance to a 2.0 style Motif combobox is it is set to be editable.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setEditable() and get this property's value with editable().
 .SH "Policy insertionPolicy"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcombotableitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcombotableitem.3qt
index b372bc095..a71edec0c 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcombotableitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcombotableitem.3qt
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Inherits TQTableItem.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQComboTableItem\fR ( TQTable * table, const TQStringList & list, bool editable = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQComboTableItem\fR ( TQTable * table, const TQStringList & list, bool editable = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fB~TQComboTableItem\fR ()"
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ TQComboTableItem items have the edit type WhenCurrent (see EditType). The TQComb
 .PP
 The list of items may be changed using setStringList(). The current item can be set with setCurrentItem() and retrieved with currentItem(). The text of the current item can be obtained with currentText(), and the text of a particular item can be retrieved with text().
 .PP
-If isEditable() is TRUE the TQComboTableItem will permit the user to either choose an existing list item, or create a new list item by entering their own text; otherwise the user may only choose one of the existing list items.
+If isEditable() is true the TQComboTableItem will permit the user to either choose an existing list item, or create a new list item by entering their own text; otherwise the user may only choose one of the existing list items.
 .PP
 To populate a table cell with a TQComboTableItem use TQTable::setItem().
 .PP
@@ -77,10 +77,10 @@ TQComboTableItems can be distinguished from TQTableItems and TQCheckTableItems u
 .PP
 See also TQCheckTableItem, TQTableItem, TQComboBox, and Advanced Widgets.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQComboTableItem::TQComboTableItem ( TQTable * table, const TQStringList & list, bool editable = FALSE )"
-Creates a combo table item for the table \fItable\fR. The combobox's list of items is passed in the \fIlist\fR argument. If \fIeditable\fR is TRUE the user may type in new list items; if \fIeditable\fR is FALSE the user may only select from the list of items provided.
+.SH "TQComboTableItem::TQComboTableItem ( TQTable * table, const TQStringList & list, bool editable = false )"
+Creates a combo table item for the table \fItable\fR. The combobox's list of items is passed in the \fIlist\fR argument. If \fIeditable\fR is true the user may type in new list items; if \fIeditable\fR is false the user may only select from the list of items provided.
 .PP
-By default TQComboTableItems cannot be replaced by other table items since isReplaceable() returns FALSE by default.
+By default TQComboTableItems cannot be replaced by other table items since isReplaceable() returns false by default.
 .PP
 See also TQTable::clearCell() and EditType.
 .SH "TQComboTableItem::~TQComboTableItem ()"
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Returns the text of the combo table item's current list item.
 .PP
 See also currentItem() and text().
 .SH "bool TQComboTableItem::isEditable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the user can add their own list items to the combobox's list of items; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the user can add their own list items to the combobox's list of items; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setEditable().
 .SH "int TQComboTableItem::rtti () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Sets the list item whose text is \fIs\fR to be the combo table item's current li
 .PP
 See also currentItem().
 .SH "void TQComboTableItem::setEditable ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE the combo table item can be edited, i.e. the user may enter a new text item themselves. If \fIb\fR is FALSE the user may may only choose one of the existing items.
+If \fIb\fR is true the combo table item can be edited, i.e. the user may enter a new text item themselves. If \fIb\fR is false the user may may only choose one of the existing items.
 .PP
 See also isEditable().
 .SH "void TQComboTableItem::setStringList ( const TQStringList & l )\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcontextmenuevent.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcontextmenuevent.3qt
index b47060845..56c9b9b36 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcontextmenuevent.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcontextmenuevent.3qt
@@ -85,13 +85,13 @@ This enum describes the reason the ContextMenuEvent was sent. The values are:
 \fCTQContextMenuEvent::Other\fR - The event was sent by some other means (i.e. not by the mouse or keyboard).
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "TQContextMenuEvent::TQContextMenuEvent ( Reason reason, const TQPoint & pos, const TQPoint & globalPos, int state )"
-Constructs a context menu event object with the accept parameter flag set to FALSE.
+Constructs a context menu event object with the accept parameter flag set to false.
 .PP
 The \fIreason\fR parameter must be TQContextMenuEvent::Mouse or TQContextMenuEvent::Keyboard.
 .PP
 The \fIpos\fR parameter specifies the mouse position relative to the receiving widget. \fIglobalPos\fR is the mouse position in absolute coordinates. \fIstate\fR is the ButtonState at the time of the event.
 .SH "TQContextMenuEvent::TQContextMenuEvent ( Reason reason, const TQPoint & pos, int state )"
-Constructs a context menu event object with the accept parameter flag set to FALSE.
+Constructs a context menu event object with the accept parameter flag set to false.
 .PP
 The \fIreason\fR parameter must be TQContextMenuEvent::Mouse or TQContextMenuEvent::Keyboard.
 .PP
@@ -135,11 +135,11 @@ The accept flag is not set by default.
 .PP
 See also accept() and consume().
 .SH "bool TQContextMenuEvent::isAccepted () const"
-Returns TRUE if the receiver has processed the event; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the receiver has processed the event; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also accept(), ignore(), and consume().
 .SH "bool TQContextMenuEvent::isConsumed () const"
-Returns TRUE (which stops propagation of the event) if the receiver has blocked the event; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true (which stops propagation of the event) if the receiver has blocked the event; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also accept(), ignore(), and consume().
 .SH "const TQPoint & TQContextMenuEvent::pos () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcstring.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcstring.3qt
index 4013c5165..0178b9fa3 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcstring.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcstring.3qt
@@ -63,28 +63,28 @@ Inherits TQByteArray.
 .BI "TQCString & \fBsprintf\fR ( const char * format, ... )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBfind\fR ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBfind\fR ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBfind\fR ( const char * str, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBfind\fR ( const char * str, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBfind\fR ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = 0 ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBfindRev\fR ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBfindRev\fR ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBfindRev\fR ( const char * str, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBfindRev\fR ( const char * str, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBfindRev\fR ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = -1 ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBcontains\fR ( char c, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBcontains\fR ( char c, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBcontains\fR ( const char * str, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBcontains\fR ( const char * str, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBcontains\fR ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const"
@@ -99,10 +99,10 @@ Inherits TQByteArray.
 .BI "TQCString \fBmid\fR ( uint index, uint len = 0xffffffff ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQCString \fBleftJustify\fR ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "TQCString \fBleftJustify\fR ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQCString \fBrightJustify\fR ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "TQCString \fBrightJustify\fR ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQCString \fBlower\fR () const"
@@ -370,18 +370,18 @@ If \fIstr\fR contains a 0 byte within the first \fImaxsize\fR bytes, the resulti
 See also isNull().
 .SH "TQCString & TQCString::append ( const char * str )"
 Appends string \fIstr\fR to the string and returns a reference to the string. Equivalent to operator+=().
-.SH "int TQCString::contains ( char c, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "int TQCString::contains ( char c, bool cs = true ) const"
 Returns the number of times the character \fIc\fR occurs in the string.
 .PP
-The match is case sensitive if \fIcs\fR is TRUE, or case insensitive if \fIcs\fR if FALSE.
+The match is case sensitive if \fIcs\fR is true, or case insensitive if \fIcs\fR if false.
 .PP
 See also Note on character comparisons.
-.SH "int TQCString::contains ( const char * str, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "int TQCString::contains ( const char * str, bool cs = true ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Returns the number of times \fIstr\fR occurs in the string.
 .PP
-The match is case sensitive if \fIcs\fR is TRUE, or case insensitive if \fIcs\fR if FALSE.
+The match is case sensitive if \fIcs\fR is true, or case insensitive if \fIcs\fR if false.
 .PP
 This function counts overlapping substrings, for example, "banana" contains two occurrences of "ana".
 .PP
@@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ Example:
 .br
     TQString s = "banana and panama";
 .br
-    TQRegExp r = TQRegExp( "a[nm]a", TRUE, FALSE );
+    TQRegExp r = TQRegExp( "a[nm]a", true, false );
 .br
     s.contains( r ); // 4 matches
 .br
@@ -415,23 +415,23 @@ Fills the string with \fIlen\fR bytes of character \fIc\fR, followed by a '&#92;
 .PP
 If \fIlen\fR is negative, then the current string length is used.
 .PP
-Returns FALSE is \fIlen\fR is nonnegative and there is not enough memory to resize the string; otherwise returns TRUE.
-.SH "int TQCString::find ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+Returns false is \fIlen\fR is nonnegative and there is not enough memory to resize the string; otherwise returns true.
+.SH "int TQCString::find ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const"
 Finds the first occurrence of the character \fIc\fR, starting at position \fIindex\fR.
 .PP
-The search is case sensitive if \fIcs\fR is TRUE, or case insensitive if \fIcs\fR is FALSE.
+The search is case sensitive if \fIcs\fR is true, or case insensitive if \fIcs\fR is false.
 .PP
 Returns the position of \fIc\fR, or -1 if \fIc\fR could not be found.
 .PP
 See also Note on character comparisons.
 .PP
 Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-.SH "int TQCString::find ( const char * str, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "int TQCString::find ( const char * str, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Finds the first occurrence of the string \fIstr\fR, starting at position \fIindex\fR.
 .PP
-The search is case sensitive if \fIcs\fR is TRUE, or case insensitive if \fIcs\fR is FALSE.
+The search is case sensitive if \fIcs\fR is true, or case insensitive if \fIcs\fR is false.
 .PP
 Returns the position of \fIstr\fR, or -1 if \fIstr\fR could not be found.
 .PP
@@ -444,20 +444,20 @@ Finds the first occurrence of the regular expression \fIrx\fR, starting at posit
 Returns the position of the next match, or -1 if \fIrx\fR was not found.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR If you want to apply this function repeatedly to the same string it is more efficient to convert the string to a TQString and apply the function to that.
-.SH "int TQCString::findRev ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "int TQCString::findRev ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const"
 Finds the first occurrence of the character \fIc\fR, starting at position \fIindex\fR and searching backwards.
 .PP
-The search is case sensitive if \fIcs\fR is TRUE, or case insensitive if \fIcs\fR is FALSE.
+The search is case sensitive if \fIcs\fR is true, or case insensitive if \fIcs\fR is false.
 .PP
 Returns the position of \fIc\fR, or -1 if \fIc\fR could not be found.
 .PP
 See also Note on character comparisons.
-.SH "int TQCString::findRev ( const char * str, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "int TQCString::findRev ( const char * str, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Finds the first occurrence of the string \fIstr\fR, starting at position \fIindex\fR and searching backwards.
 .PP
-The search is case sensitive if \fIcs\fR is TRUE, or case insensitive if \fIcs\fR is FALSE.
+The search is case sensitive if \fIcs\fR is true, or case insensitive if \fIcs\fR is false.
 .PP
 Returns the position of \fIstr\fR, or -1 if \fIstr\fR could not be found.
 .PP
@@ -506,13 +506,13 @@ If \fIindex\fR is beyond the end of the string, the string is padded with spaces
 .br
 .fi
 .SH "bool TQCString::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the string is empty, i.e. if length() == 0; otherwise returns FALSE. An empty string is not always a null string.
+Returns true if the string is empty, i.e. if length() == 0; otherwise returns false. An empty string is not always a null string.
 .PP
 See example in isNull().
 .PP
 See also isNull(), length(), and size().
 .SH "bool TQCString::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if the string is null, i.e. if data() == 0; otherwise returns FALSE. A null string is also an empty string.
+Returns true if the string is null, i.e. if data() == 0; otherwise returns false. A null string is also an empty string.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
@@ -522,13 +522,13 @@ Example:
 .br
     TQCString b == "";   // b.data() == "", b.size() == 1, b.length() == 0
 .br
-    a.isNull();         // TRUE  because a.data() == 0
+    a.isNull();         // true  because a.data() == 0
 .br
-    a.isEmpty();        // TRUE  because a.length() == 0
+    a.isEmpty();        // true  because a.length() == 0
 .br
-    b.isNull();         // FALSE because b.data() == ""
+    b.isNull();         // false because b.data() == ""
 .br
-    b.isEmpty();        // TRUE  because b.length() == 0
+    b.isEmpty();        // true  because b.length() == 0
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -551,10 +551,10 @@ Example:
 See also right() and mid().
 .PP
 Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-.SH "TQCString TQCString::leftJustify ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const"
+.SH "TQCString TQCString::leftJustify ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = false ) const"
 Returns a string of length \fIwidth\fR (plus one for the terminating '&#92;0') that contains this string padded with the \fIfill\fR character.
 .PP
-If the length of the string exceeds \fIwidth\fR and \fItruncate\fR is FALSE (the default), then the returned string is a copy of the string. If the length of the string exceeds \fIwidth\fR and \fItruncate\fR is TRUE, then the returned string is a left(\fIwidth\fR).
+If the length of the string exceeds \fIwidth\fR and \fItruncate\fR is false (the default), then the returned string is a copy of the string. If the length of the string exceeds \fIwidth\fR and \fItruncate\fR is true, then the returned string is a left(\fIwidth\fR).
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
@@ -757,10 +757,10 @@ Example:
 See also left() and mid().
 .PP
 Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
-.SH "TQCString TQCString::rightJustify ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const"
+.SH "TQCString TQCString::rightJustify ( uint width, char fill = ' ', bool truncate = false ) const"
 Returns a string of length \fIwidth\fR (plus one for the terminating '&#92;0') that contains zero or more of the \fIfill\fR character followed by this string.
 .PP
-If the length of the string exceeds \fIwidth\fR and \fItruncate\fR is FALSE (the default), then the returned string is a copy of the string. If the length of the string exceeds \fIwidth\fR and \fItruncate\fR is TRUE, then the returned string is a left(\fIwidth\fR).
+If the length of the string exceeds \fIwidth\fR and \fItruncate\fR is false (the default), then the returned string is a copy of the string. If the length of the string exceeds \fIwidth\fR and \fItruncate\fR is true, then the returned string is a left(\fIwidth\fR).
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
@@ -776,7 +776,7 @@ See also leftJustify().
 .SH "bool TQCString::setExpand ( uint index, char c )"
 Sets the character at position \fIindex\fR to \fIc\fR and expands the string if necessary, padding with spaces.
 .PP
-Returns FALSE if \fIindex\fR was out of range and the string could not be expanded; otherwise returns TRUE.
+Returns false if \fIindex\fR was out of range and the string could not be expanded; otherwise returns true.
 .SH "TQCString & TQCString::setNum ( double n, char f = 'g', int prec = 6 )"
 Sets the string to the string representation of the number \fIn\fR and returns a reference to the string.
 .PP
@@ -867,35 +867,35 @@ See also simplifyWhiteSpace().
 .SH "double TQCString::toDouble ( bool * ok = 0 ) const"
 Returns the string converted to a \fCdouble\fR value.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to false if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .SH "float TQCString::toFloat ( bool * ok = 0 ) const"
 Returns the string converted to a \fCfloat\fR value.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to false if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .SH "int TQCString::toInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const"
 Returns the string converted to a \fCint\fR value.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to false if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .SH "long TQCString::toLong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const"
 Returns the string converted to a \fClong\fR value.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to false if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .SH "short TQCString::toShort ( bool * ok = 0 ) const"
 Returns the string converted to a \fCshort\fR value.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE if the string is not a number, is out of range, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to false if the string is not a number, is out of range, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .SH "uint TQCString::toUInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const"
 Returns the string converted to an \fCunsigned int\fR value.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to false if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .SH "ulong TQCString::toULong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const"
 Returns the string converted to an \fCunsigned long\fR value.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to false if the string is not a number, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .SH "ushort TQCString::toUShort ( bool * ok = 0 ) const"
 Returns the string converted to an \fCunsigned short\fR value.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE if the string is not a number, is out of range, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to false if the string is not a number, is out of range, or if it has trailing garbage; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .SH "bool TQCString::truncate ( uint pos )"
 Truncates the string at position \fIpos\fR.
 .PP
@@ -928,19 +928,19 @@ Example:
 See also lower() and Note on character comparisons.
 .SH RELATED FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "bool operator!= ( const TQCString & s1, const TQCString & s2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are different; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are different; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Equivalent to qstrcmp(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) != 0.
 .SH "bool operator!= ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are different; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are different; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Equivalent to qstrcmp(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) != 0.
 .SH "bool operator!= ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are different; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are different; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Equivalent to qstrcmp(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) != 0.
 .SH "const TQCString operator+ ( const TQCString & s1, const TQCString & s2 )"
@@ -962,7 +962,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Returns a string which consists of the concatenation of \fIc\fR and \fIs\fR.
 .SH "bool operator< ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is less than \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is less than \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Equivalent to qstrcmp(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) < 0.
 .PP
@@ -970,7 +970,7 @@ See also Note on character comparisons.
 .SH "bool operator< ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is less than \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is less than \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Equivalent to qstrcmp(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) < 0.
 .PP
@@ -980,7 +980,7 @@ Writes string \fIstr\fR to the stream \fIs\fR.
 .PP
 See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
 .SH "bool operator<= ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is less than or equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is less than or equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Equivalent to qstrcmp(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) <= 0.
 .PP
@@ -988,29 +988,29 @@ See also Note on character comparisons.
 .SH "bool operator<= ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is less than or equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is less than or equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Equivalent to qstrcmp(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) <= 0.
 .PP
 See also Note on character comparisons.
 .SH "bool operator== ( const TQCString & s1, const TQCString & s2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are equal; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Equivalent to qstrcmp(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) == 0.
 .SH "bool operator== ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are equal; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Equivalent to qstrcmp(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) == 0.
 .SH "bool operator== ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are equal; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Equivalent to qstrcmp(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) == 0.
 .SH "bool operator> ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is greater than \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is greater than \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Equivalent to qstrcmp(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) > 0.
 .PP
@@ -1018,13 +1018,13 @@ See also Note on character comparisons.
 .SH "bool operator> ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is greater than \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is greater than \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Equivalent to qstrcmp(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) > 0.
 .PP
 See also Note on character comparisons.
 .SH "bool operator>= ( const TQCString & s1, const char * s2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is greater than or equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is greater than or equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Equivalent to qstrcmp(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) >= 0.
 .PP
@@ -1032,7 +1032,7 @@ See also Note on character comparisons.
 .SH "bool operator>= ( const char * s1, const TQCString & s2 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is greater than or equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is greater than or equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Equivalent to qstrcmp(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) >= 0.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcustommenuitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcustommenuitem.3qt
index 0c65e1c8a..6efd5b1bd 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqcustommenuitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcustommenuitem.3qt
@@ -46,9 +46,9 @@ This simple mechanism allows you to create all kinds of application specific men
 .PP
 A custom item is inserted into a popup menu with TQPopupMenu::insertItem().
 .PP
-By default, a custom item can also have an icon and a keyboard accelerator. You can reimplement fullSpan() to return TRUE if you want the item to span the entire popup menu width. This is particularly useful for labels.
+By default, a custom item can also have an icon and a keyboard accelerator. You can reimplement fullSpan() to return true if you want the item to span the entire popup menu width. This is particularly useful for labels.
 .PP
-If you want the custom item to be treated just as a separator, reimplement isSeparator() to return TRUE.
+If you want the custom item to be treated just as a separator, reimplement isSeparator() to return true.
 .PP
 Note that you can insert pixmaps or bitmaps as items into a popup menu without needing to create a TQCustomMenuItem. However, custom menu items offer more flexibility, and -- especially important with Windows style -- provide the possibility of drawing the item with a different color when it is highlighted.
 .PP
@@ -66,11 +66,11 @@ Constructs a TQCustomMenuItem
 .SH "TQCustomMenuItem::~TQCustomMenuItem ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Destroys a TQCustomMenuItem
 .SH "bool TQCustomMenuItem::fullSpan () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if this item wants to span the entire popup menu width; otherwise returns FALSE. The default is FALSE, meaning that the menu may show an icon and an accelerator key for this item as well.
+Returns true if this item wants to span the entire popup menu width; otherwise returns false. The default is false, meaning that the menu may show an icon and an accelerator key for this item as well.
 .SH "bool TQCustomMenuItem::isSeparator () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if this item is just a separator; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this item is just a separator; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "void TQCustomMenuItem::paint ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, bool act, bool enabled, int x, int y, int w, int h )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-Paints this item. When this function is invoked, the painter \fIp\fR is set to a font and foreground color suitable for a menu item text using color group \fIcg\fR. The item is active if \fIact\fR is TRUE and enabled if \fIenabled\fR is TRUE. The geometry values \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIw\fR and \fIh\fR specify where to draw the item.
+Paints this item. When this function is invoked, the painter \fIp\fR is set to a font and foreground color suitable for a menu item text using color group \fIcg\fR. The item is active if \fIact\fR is true and enabled if \fIenabled\fR is true. The geometry values \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIw\fR and \fIh\fR specify where to draw the item.
 .PP
 Do not draw any background, this has already been done by the popup menu according to the current GUI style.
 .SH "void TQCustomMenuItem::setFont ( const TQFont & font )\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdatabrowser.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdatabrowser.3qt
index d3a8d11d0..3bc586809 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdatabrowser.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdatabrowser.3qt
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .BI "TQString \fBfilter\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBsetSqlCursor\fR ( TQSqlCursor * cursor, bool autoDelete = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBsetSqlCursor\fR ( TQSqlCursor * cursor, bool autoDelete = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQSqlCursor * \fBsqlCursor\fR () const"
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .BI "bool \fBautoEdit\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual bool \fBseek\fR ( int i, bool relative = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual bool \fBseek\fR ( int i, bool relative = false )"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SS "Public Slots"
@@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Constructs a data browser which is a child of \fIparent\fR, with the name \fInam
 .SH "TQDataBrowser::~TQDataBrowser ()"
 Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
 .SH "bool TQDataBrowser::autoEdit () const"
-Returns TRUE if the browser automatically applies edits; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoEdit" property for details.
+Returns true if the browser automatically applies edits; otherwise returns false. See the "autoEdit" property for details.
 .SH "void TQDataBrowser::beforeDelete ( TQSqlRecord * buf )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted just before the cursor's edit buffer is deleted from the database. The \fIbuf\fR parameter points to the edit buffer being deleted. You might connect to this signal to capture some auditing information about the deletion.
 .SH "void TQDataBrowser::beforeInsert ( TQSqlRecord * buf )\fC [signal]\fR"
@@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ This is achieved by moving the default cursor and checking the position, however
 .PP
 See also Boundary.
 .SH "bool TQDataBrowser::boundaryChecking () const"
-Returns TRUE if boundary checking is active; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "boundaryChecking" property for details.
+Returns true if boundary checking is active; otherwise returns false. See the "boundaryChecking" property for details.
 .SH "void TQDataBrowser::clearValues ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Clears all the values in the form.
 .PP
@@ -310,21 +310,21 @@ All the edit buffer field values are set to their 'zero state', e.g. 0 for numer
 .SH "TQSql::Confirm TQDataBrowser::confirmCancel ( TQSql::Op m )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Protected virtual function which returns a confirmation for cancelling an edit mode \fIm\fR. Derived classes can reimplement this function and provide their own confirmation dialog. The default implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to confirm the edit action.
 .SH "bool TQDataBrowser::confirmCancels () const"
-Returns TRUE if the browser confirms cancel operations; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "confirmCancels" property for details.
+Returns true if the browser confirms cancel operations; otherwise returns false. See the "confirmCancels" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQDataBrowser::confirmDelete () const"
-Returns TRUE if the browser confirms deletions; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "confirmDelete" property for details.
+Returns true if the browser confirms deletions; otherwise returns false. See the "confirmDelete" property for details.
 .SH "TQSql::Confirm TQDataBrowser::confirmEdit ( TQSql::Op m )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Protected virtual function which returns a confirmation for an edit of mode \fIm\fR. Derived classes can reimplement this function and provide their own confirmation dialog. The default implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to confirm the edit action.
 .SH "bool TQDataBrowser::confirmEdits () const"
-Returns TRUE if the browser confirms edits; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "confirmEdits" property for details.
+Returns true if the browser confirms edits; otherwise returns false. See the "confirmEdits" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQDataBrowser::confirmInsert () const"
-Returns TRUE if the data browser confirms insertions; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "confirmInsert" property for details.
+Returns true if the data browser confirms insertions; otherwise returns false. See the "confirmInsert" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQDataBrowser::confirmUpdate () const"
-Returns TRUE if the browser confirms updates; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "confirmUpdate" property for details.
+Returns true if the browser confirms updates; otherwise returns false. See the "confirmUpdate" property for details.
 .SH "void TQDataBrowser::currentChanged ( const TQSqlRecord * record )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted whenever the current cursor position changes. The \fIrecord\fR parameter points to the contents of the current cursor's record.
 .SH "bool TQDataBrowser::currentEdited ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the form's edit buffer differs from the current cursor buffer; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the form's edit buffer differs from the current cursor buffer; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "void TQDataBrowser::cursorChanged ( TQSqlCursor::Mode mode )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted whenever the cursor record was changed due to navigation. The \fImode\fR parameter is the edit that just took place, e.g. Insert, Update or Delete. See TQSqlCursor::Mode.
 .SH "void TQDataBrowser::del ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ Otherwise, the following happens:
 .PP
 The current form's record is deleted from the database, providing that the data browser is not in insert mode. If the data browser is actively inserting a record (see insert()), the insert action is canceled, and the browser navigates to the last valid record that was current. If there is an error, handleError() is called.
 .SH "bool TQDataBrowser::deleteCurrent ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-Performs a delete on the default cursor using the values from the default form and updates the default form. If there is no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If the deletion was successful, the cursor is repositioned to the nearest record and TRUE is returned. The nearest record is the next record if there is one otherwise the previous record if there is one. If an error occurred during the deletion from the database, handleError() is called and FALSE is returned.
+Performs a delete on the default cursor using the values from the default form and updates the default form. If there is no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If the deletion was successful, the cursor is repositioned to the nearest record and true is returned. The nearest record is the next record if there is one otherwise the previous record if there is one. If an error occurred during the deletion from the database, handleError() is called and false is returned.
 .PP
 See also cursor, form(), and handleError().
 .SH "TQString TQDataBrowser::filter () const"
@@ -368,11 +368,11 @@ The primeInsert() signal is emitted.
 .TP
 The form is updated with the values in the default cursor's. edit buffer so that the user can fill in the values to be inserted.
 .SH "bool TQDataBrowser::insertCurrent ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-Reads the fields from the default form into the default cursor and performs an insert on the default cursor. If there is no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If an error occurred during the insert into the database, handleError() is called and FALSE is returned. If the insert was successfull, the cursor is refreshed and relocated to the newly inserted record, the cursorChanged() signal is emitted, and TRUE is returned.
+Reads the fields from the default form into the default cursor and performs an insert on the default cursor. If there is no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If an error occurred during the insert into the database, handleError() is called and false is returned. If the insert was successfull, the cursor is refreshed and relocated to the newly inserted record, the cursorChanged() signal is emitted, and true is returned.
 .PP
 See also cursorChanged(), sqlCursor(), form(), and handleError().
 .SH "bool TQDataBrowser::isReadOnly () const"
-Returns TRUE if the browser is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "readOnly" property for details.
+Returns true if the browser is read-only; otherwise returns false. See the "readOnly" property for details.
 .SH "void TQDataBrowser::last ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Moves the default cursor to the last record and refreshes the default form to display this record. If there is no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If the data browser successfully navigated to the last record, the default cursor is primed for update and the primeUpdate() signal is emitted.
 .PP
@@ -409,8 +409,8 @@ Reads the fields from the default cursor's edit buffer and displays them in the
 Refreshes the data browser's data using the default cursor. The browser's current filter and sort are applied if they have been set.
 .PP
 See also filter and sort.
-.SH "bool TQDataBrowser::seek ( int i, bool relative = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Moves the default cursor to the record specified by the index \fIi\fR and refreshes the default form to display this record. If there is no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If \fIrelative\fR is TRUE (the default is FALSE), the cursor is moved relative to its current position. If the data browser successfully navigated to the desired record, the default cursor is primed for update and the primeUpdate() signal is emitted.
+.SH "bool TQDataBrowser::seek ( int i, bool relative = false )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Moves the default cursor to the record specified by the index \fIi\fR and refreshes the default form to display this record. If there is no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If \fIrelative\fR is true (the default is false), the cursor is moved relative to its current position. If the data browser successfully navigated to the desired record, the default cursor is primed for update and the primeUpdate() signal is emitted.
 .PP
 If the browser is already positioned on the desired record nothing happens.
 .SH "void TQDataBrowser::setAutoEdit ( bool autoEdit )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -439,8 +439,8 @@ Sets the data browser's sort to \fIsort\fR. See the "sort" property for details.
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Sets the data browser's sort to the TQSqlIndex \fIsort\fR. To apply the new sort, use refresh().
-.SH "void TQDataBrowser::setSqlCursor ( TQSqlCursor * cursor, bool autoDelete = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sets the default cursor used by the data browser to \fIcursor\fR. If \fIautoDelete\fR is TRUE (the default is FALSE), the data browser takes ownership of the \fIcursor\fR pointer, which will be deleted when the browser is destroyed, or when setSqlCursor() is called again. To activate the \fIcursor\fR use refresh(). The cursor's edit buffer is used in the default form to browse and edit records.
+.SH "void TQDataBrowser::setSqlCursor ( TQSqlCursor * cursor, bool autoDelete = false )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Sets the default cursor used by the data browser to \fIcursor\fR. If \fIautoDelete\fR is true (the default is false), the data browser takes ownership of the \fIcursor\fR pointer, which will be deleted when the browser is destroyed, or when setSqlCursor() is called again. To activate the \fIcursor\fR use refresh(). The cursor's edit buffer is used in the default form to browse and edit records.
 .PP
 See also sqlCursor(), form(), and setForm().
 .SH "TQStringList TQDataBrowser::sort () const"
@@ -456,9 +456,9 @@ If there is no default cursor or no default form, nothing happens. Otherwise, th
 .PP
 If the data browser is actively inserting a record (see insert()), that record is inserted into the database using insertCurrent(). Otherwise, the database is updated with the current form's data using updateCurrent(). If there is an error handling either action, handleError() is called.
 .SH "void TQDataBrowser::updateBoundary ()\fC [slot]\fR"
-If boundaryChecking() is TRUE, checks the boundary of the current default cursor and emits signals which indicate the position of the cursor.
+If boundaryChecking() is true, checks the boundary of the current default cursor and emits signals which indicate the position of the cursor.
 .SH "bool TQDataBrowser::updateCurrent ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-Reads the fields from the default form into the default cursor and performs an update on the default cursor. If there is no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If an error occurred during the update on the database, handleError() is called and FALSE is returned. If the update was successfull, the cursor is refreshed and relocated to the updated record, the cursorChanged() signal is emitted, and TRUE is returned.
+Reads the fields from the default form into the default cursor and performs an update on the default cursor. If there is no default form or no default cursor, nothing happens. If an error occurred during the update on the database, handleError() is called and false is returned. If the update was successfull, the cursor is refreshed and relocated to the updated record, the cursorChanged() signal is emitted, and true is returned.
 .PP
 See also cursor, form(), and handleError().
 .SH "void TQDataBrowser::writeFields ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -467,11 +467,11 @@ Writes the form's data to the default cursor's edit buffer. If there is no defau
 .SH "bool autoEdit"
 This property holds whether the browser automatically applies edits.
 .PP
-The default value for this property is TRUE. When the user begins an insertion or an update on a form there are two possible outcomes when they navigate to another record:
+The default value for this property is true. When the user begins an insertion or an update on a form there are two possible outcomes when they navigate to another record:
 .TP
-the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is TRUE
+the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is true
 .TP
-the insert or update is discarded -- this occurs if autoEdit is FALSE
+the insert or update is discarded -- this occurs if autoEdit is false
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setAutoEdit() and get this property's value with autoEdit().
 .SH "bool boundaryChecking"
@@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ Set this property's value with setBoundaryChecking() and get this property's val
 .SH "bool confirmCancels"
 This property holds whether the browser confirms cancel operations.
 .PP
-If this property is TRUE, all cancels must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behavior can be changed by overriding the confirmCancel() function), otherwise all cancels occur immediately. The default is FALSE.
+If this property is true, all cancels must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behavior can be changed by overriding the confirmCancel() function), otherwise all cancels occur immediately. The default is false.
 .PP
 See also confirmEdits and confirmCancel().
 .PP
@@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ Set this property's value with setConfirmCancels() and get this property's value
 .SH "bool confirmDelete"
 This property holds whether the browser confirms deletions.
 .PP
-If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms deletions, otherwise deletions happen immediately.
+If this property is true, the browser confirms deletions, otherwise deletions happen immediately.
 .PP
 See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmUpdate, confirmInsert, and confirmEdit().
 .PP
@@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ Set this property's value with setConfirmDelete() and get this property's value
 .SH "bool confirmEdits"
 This property holds whether the browser confirms edits.
 .PP
-If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms all edit operations (insertions, updates and deletions), otherwise all edit operations happen immediately. Confirmation is achieved by presenting the user with a message box -- this behavior can be changed by reimplementing the confirmEdit() function,
+If this property is true, the browser confirms all edit operations (insertions, updates and deletions), otherwise all edit operations happen immediately. Confirmation is achieved by presenting the user with a message box -- this behavior can be changed by reimplementing the confirmEdit() function,
 .PP
 See also confirmEdit(), confirmCancels, confirmInsert, confirmUpdate, and confirmDelete.
 .PP
@@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ Set this property's value with setConfirmEdits() and get this property's value w
 .SH "bool confirmInsert"
 This property holds whether the data browser confirms insertions.
 .PP
-If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms insertions, otherwise insertions happen immediately.
+If this property is true, the browser confirms insertions, otherwise insertions happen immediately.
 .PP
 See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmUpdate, confirmDelete, and confirmEdit().
 .PP
@@ -517,7 +517,7 @@ Set this property's value with setConfirmInsert() and get this property's value
 .SH "bool confirmUpdate"
 This property holds whether the browser confirms updates.
 .PP
-If this property is TRUE, the browser confirms updates, otherwise updates happen immediately.
+If this property is true, the browser confirms updates, otherwise updates happen immediately.
 .PP
 See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmInsert, confirmDelete, and confirmEdit().
 .PP
@@ -535,7 +535,7 @@ Set this property's value with setFilter() and get this property's value with fi
 .SH "bool readOnly"
 This property holds whether the browser is read-only.
 .PP
-The default is FALSE, i.e. data can be edited. If the data browser is read-only, no database edits will be allowed.
+The default is false, i.e. data can be edited. If the data browser is read-only, no database edits will be allowed.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setReadOnly() and get this property's value with isReadOnly().
 .SH "TQStringList sort"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdatastream.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdatastream.3qt
index b67fae99d..3267c50c2 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdatastream.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdatastream.3qt
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ For integers it is best to always cast to a TQt integer type for writing, and to
 .PP
 To take one example, a \fCchar*\fR string is written as a 32-bit integer equal to the length of the string including the NUL byte ('&#92;0'), followed by all the characters of the string including the NUL byte. When reading a \fCchar*\fR string, 4 bytes are read to create the 32-bit length value, then that many characters for the \fCchar*\fR string including the NUL are read.
 .PP
-The initial IODevice is usually set in the constructor, but can be changed with setDevice(). If you've reached the end of the data (or if there is no IODevice set) atEnd() will return TRUE.
+The initial IODevice is usually set in the constructor, but can be changed with setDevice(). If you've reached the end of the data (or if there is no IODevice set) atEnd() will return true.
 .PP
 If you want the data to be compatible with an earlier version of TQt use setVersion().
 .PP
@@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ Destroys the data stream.
 .PP
 The destructor will not affect the current IO device, unless it is an internal IO device processing a TQByteArray passed in the \fIconstructor\fR, in which case the internal IO device is destroyed.
 .SH "bool TQDataStream::atEnd () const"
-Returns TRUE if the IO device has reached the end position (end of the stream or file) or if there is no IO device set; otherwise returns FALSE, i.e. if the current position of the IO device is before the end position.
+Returns true if the IO device has reached the end position (end of the stream or file) or if there is no IO device set; otherwise returns false, i.e. if the current position of the IO device is before the end position.
 .PP
 See also TQIODevice::atEnd().
 .SH "int TQDataStream::byteOrder () const"
@@ -354,13 +354,13 @@ See also setDevice() and unsetDevice().
 .SH "bool TQDataStream::eof () const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the IO device has reached the end position (end of stream or file) or if there is no IO device set.
+Returns true if the IO device has reached the end position (end of stream or file) or if there is no IO device set.
 .PP
-Returns FALSE if the current position of the read/write head of the IO device is somewhere before the end position.
+Returns false if the current position of the read/write head of the IO device is somewhere before the end position.
 .PP
 See also TQIODevice::atEnd().
 .SH "bool TQDataStream::isPrintableData () const"
-Returns TRUE if the printable data flag has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the printable data flag has been set; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setPrintableData().
 .SH "TQDataStream & TQDataStream::operator<< ( TQ_INT8 i )"
@@ -498,9 +498,9 @@ Sets the IO device to \fId\fR.
 .PP
 See also device() and unsetDevice().
 .SH "void TQDataStream::setPrintableData ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, data will be output in a human readable format. If \fIenable\fR is FALSE, data will be output in a binary format.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, data will be output in a human readable format. If \fIenable\fR is false, data will be output in a binary format.
 .PP
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, the write functions will generate output that consists of printable characters (7 bit ASCII). This output will typically be a lot larger than the default binary output, and consequently slower to write.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, the write functions will generate output that consists of printable characters (7 bit ASCII). This output will typically be a lot larger than the default binary output, and consequently slower to write.
 .PP
 We recommend only enabling printable data for debugging purposes.
 .SH "void TQDataStream::setVersion ( int v )"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdatatable.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdatatable.3qt
index 73cc7cd1b..52bae0acc 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdatatable.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdatatable.3qt
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Inherits TQTable.
 .BI "\fBTQDataTable\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQDataTable\fR ( TQSqlCursor * cursor, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQDataTable\fR ( TQSqlCursor * cursor, bool autoPopulate = false, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fB~TQDataTable\fR ()"
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Inherits TQTable.
 .BI "TQStringList \fBsort\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBsetSqlCursor\fR ( TQSqlCursor * cursor = 0, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, bool autoDelete = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBsetSqlCursor\fR ( TQSqlCursor * cursor = 0, bool autoPopulate = false, bool autoDelete = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQSqlCursor * \fBsqlCursor\fR () const"
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Inherits TQTable.
 .BI "void \fBrefresh\fR ( Refresh mode )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBsortColumn\fR ( int col, bool ascending = TRUE, bool wholeRows = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBsortColumn\fR ( int col, bool ascending = true, bool wholeRows = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual TQString \fBtext\fR ( int row, int col ) const"
@@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ When displaying data, TQDataTable only retrieves data for visible rows. If the d
 .PP
 TQDataTable inherits TQTable's API and extends it with functions to sort and filter the data and sort columns. See setSqlCursor(), setFilter(), setSort(), setSorting(), sortColumn() and refresh().
 .PP
-When displaying editable cursors, cell editing will be enabled. (For more information on editable cursors, see TQSqlCursor). TQDataTable can be used to modify existing data and to add new records. When a user makes changes to a field in the table, the cursor's edit buffer is used. The table will not send changes in the edit buffer to the database until the user moves to a different record in the grid or presses Enter. Cell editing is initiated by pressing F2 (or right clicking and then clicking the appropriate popup menu item) and canceled by pressing Esc. If there is a problem updating or adding data, errors are handled automatically (see handleError() to change this behavior). Note that if autoEdit() is FALSE navigating to another record will cancel the insert or update.
+When displaying editable cursors, cell editing will be enabled. (For more information on editable cursors, see TQSqlCursor). TQDataTable can be used to modify existing data and to add new records. When a user makes changes to a field in the table, the cursor's edit buffer is used. The table will not send changes in the edit buffer to the database until the user moves to a different record in the grid or presses Enter. Cell editing is initiated by pressing F2 (or right clicking and then clicking the appropriate popup menu item) and canceled by pressing Esc. If there is a problem updating or adding data, errors are handled automatically (see handleError() to change this behavior). Note that if autoEdit() is false navigating to another record will cancel the insert or update.
 .PP
 The user can be asked to confirm all edits with setConfirmEdits(). For more precise control use setConfirmInsert(), setConfirmUpdate(), setConfirmDelete() and setConfirmCancels(). Use setAutoEdit() to control the behaviour of the table when the user edits a record and then navigates. (Note that setAutoDelete() is unrelated; it is used to set whether the TQSqlCursor is deleted when the table is deleted.)
 .PP
@@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ Columns in the table can be created automatically based on the cursor (see setSq
 .PP
 The table automatically copies many of the properties of the cursor to format the display of data within cells (alignment, visibility, etc.). The cursor can be changed with setSqlCursor(). The filter (see setFilter()) and sort defined within the table are used instead of the filter and sort set on the cursor. For sorting options see setSort(), sortColumn(), sortAscending() and sortDescending(). Note that sorting operations will not behave as expected if you are using a TQSqlSelectCursor because it uses user-defined SQL queries to obtain data.
 .PP
-The text used to represent NULL, TRUE and FALSE values can be changed with setNullText(), setTrueText() and setFalseText() respectively. You can change the appearance of cells by reimplementing paintField().
+The text used to represent NULL, true and false values can be changed with setNullText(), setTrueText() and setFalseText() respectively. You can change the appearance of cells by reimplementing paintField().
 .PP
 Whenever a new row is selected in the table the currentChanged() signal is emitted. The primeInsert() signal is emitted when an insert is initiated. The primeUpdate() and primeDelete() signals are emitted when update and deletion are initiated respectively. Just before the database is updated a signal is emitted; beforeInsert(), beforeUpdate() or beforeDelete() as appropriate.
 .PP
@@ -330,10 +330,10 @@ This enum describes the refresh options.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "TQDataTable::TQDataTable ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs a data table which is a child of \fIparent\fR, called name \fIname\fR.
-.SH "TQDataTable::TQDataTable ( TQSqlCursor * cursor, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
+.SH "TQDataTable::TQDataTable ( TQSqlCursor * cursor, bool autoPopulate = false, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
 Constructs a data table which is a child of \fIparent\fR, called name \fIname\fR using the cursor \fIcursor\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIautoPopulate\fR is TRUE (the default is FALSE), columns are automatically created based upon the fields in the \fIcursor\fR record. Note that \fIautoPopulate\fR only governs the creation of columns; to load the cursor's data into the table use refresh().
+If \fIautoPopulate\fR is true (the default is false), columns are automatically created based upon the fields in the \fIcursor\fR record. Note that \fIautoPopulate\fR only governs the creation of columns; to load the cursor's data into the table use refresh().
 .PP
 If the \fIcursor\fR is read-only, the table also becomes read-only. In addition, the table adopts the cursor's driver's definition for representing NULL values as strings.
 .SH "TQDataTable::~TQDataTable ()"
@@ -352,9 +352,9 @@ Resizes column \fIcol\fR so that the column width is wide enough to display the
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQTable.
 .SH "bool TQDataTable::autoDelete () const"
-Returns TRUE if the table will automatically delete the cursor specified by setSqlCursor(); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the table will automatically delete the cursor specified by setSqlCursor(); otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQDataTable::autoEdit () const"
-Returns TRUE if the data table automatically applies edits; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoEdit" property for details.
+Returns true if the data table automatically applies edits; otherwise returns false. See the "autoEdit" property for details.
 .SH "void TQDataTable::beforeDelete ( TQSqlRecord * buf )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted just before the currently selected record is deleted from the database. The \fIbuf\fR parameter points to the edit buffer being deleted. Connect to this signal to, for example, copy some of the fields for later use.
 .SH "void TQDataTable::beforeInsert ( TQSqlRecord * buf )\fC [signal]\fR"
@@ -378,17 +378,17 @@ Editing takes place using the cursor's edit buffer (see TQSqlCursor::editBuffer(
 .SH "TQSql::Confirm TQDataTable::confirmCancel ( TQSql::Op m )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Protected virtual function which returns a confirmation for cancelling an edit mode of \fIm\fR. Derived classes can reimplement this function to provide their own cancel dialog. The default implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to confirm the cancel.
 .SH "bool TQDataTable::confirmCancels () const"
-Returns TRUE if the data table confirms cancel operations; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "confirmCancels" property for details.
+Returns true if the data table confirms cancel operations; otherwise returns false. See the "confirmCancels" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQDataTable::confirmDelete () const"
-Returns TRUE if the data table confirms delete operations; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "confirmDelete" property for details.
+Returns true if the data table confirms delete operations; otherwise returns false. See the "confirmDelete" property for details.
 .SH "TQSql::Confirm TQDataTable::confirmEdit ( TQSql::Op m )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Protected virtual function which returns a confirmation for an edit of mode \fIm\fR. Derived classes can reimplement this function to provide their own confirmation dialog. The default implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to confirm the edit action.
 .SH "bool TQDataTable::confirmEdits () const"
-Returns TRUE if the data table confirms edit operations; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "confirmEdits" property for details.
+Returns true if the data table confirms edit operations; otherwise returns false. See the "confirmEdits" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQDataTable::confirmInsert () const"
-Returns TRUE if the data table confirms insert operations; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "confirmInsert" property for details.
+Returns true if the data table confirms insert operations; otherwise returns false. See the "confirmInsert" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQDataTable::confirmUpdate () const"
-Returns TRUE if the data table confirms update operations; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "confirmUpdate" property for details.
+Returns true if the data table confirms update operations; otherwise returns false. See the "confirmUpdate" property for details.
 .SH "void TQDataTable::currentChanged ( TQSqlRecord * record )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted whenever a new row is selected in the table. The \fIrecord\fR parameter points to the contents of the newly selected record.
 .SH "TQSqlRecord * TQDataTable::currentRecord () const"
@@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ This signal is emitted whenever the cursor record was changed due to an edit. Th
 .SH "DateFormat TQDataTable::dateFormat () const"
 Returns the format used for displaying date/time values. See the "dateFormat" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQDataTable::deleteCurrent ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-For an editable table, issues a delete on the current cursor's primary index using the values of the currently selected row. If there is no current cursor or there is no current selection, nothing happens. If confirmEdits() or confirmDelete() is TRUE, confirmEdit() is called to confirm the delete. Returns TRUE if the delete succeeded; otherwise FALSE.
+For an editable table, issues a delete on the current cursor's primary index using the values of the currently selected row. If there is no current cursor or there is no current selection, nothing happens. If confirmEdits() or confirmDelete() is true, confirmEdit() is called to confirm the delete. Returns true if the delete succeeded; otherwise false.
 .PP
 The underlying cursor must have a valid primary index to ensure that a unique record is deleted within the database otherwise the database may be changed to an inconsistent state.
 .SH "TQString TQDataTable::falseText () const"
@@ -408,15 +408,15 @@ Returns the alignment for \fIfield\fR.
 .SH "TQString TQDataTable::filter () const"
 Returns the data filter for the data table. See the "filter" property for details.
 .SH "void TQDataTable::find ( const TQString & str, bool caseSensitive, bool backwards )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-Searches the current cursor for a cell containing the string \fIstr\fR starting at the current cell and working forwards (or backwards if \fIbackwards\fR is TRUE). If the string is found, the cell containing the string is set as the current cell. If \fIcaseSensitive\fR is FALSE the case of \fIstr\fR will be ignored.
+Searches the current cursor for a cell containing the string \fIstr\fR starting at the current cell and working forwards (or backwards if \fIbackwards\fR is true). If the string is found, the cell containing the string is set as the current cell. If \fIcaseSensitive\fR is false the case of \fIstr\fR will be ignored.
 .PP
-The search will wrap, i.e. if the first (or if backwards is TRUE, last) cell is reached without finding \fIstr\fR the search will continue until it reaches the starting cell. If \fIstr\fR is not found the search will fail and the current cell will remain unchanged.
+The search will wrap, i.e. if the first (or if backwards is true, last) cell is reached without finding \fIstr\fR the search will continue until it reaches the starting cell. If \fIstr\fR is not found the search will fail and the current cell will remain unchanged.
 .SH "void TQDataTable::handleError ( const TQSqlError & e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Protected virtual function which is called when an error \fIe\fR has occurred on the current cursor(). The default implementation displays a warning message to the user with information about the error.
 .SH "int TQDataTable::indexOf ( uint i ) const\fC [protected]\fR"
 Returns the index of the field within the current SQL query that is displayed in column \fIi\fR.
 .SH "bool TQDataTable::insertCurrent ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-For an editable table, issues an insert on the current cursor using the values in the cursor's edit buffer. If there is no current cursor or there is no current "insert" row, nothing happens. If confirmEdits() or confirmInsert() is TRUE, confirmEdit() is called to confirm the insert. Returns TRUE if the insert succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+For an editable table, issues an insert on the current cursor using the values in the cursor's edit buffer. If there is no current cursor or there is no current "insert" row, nothing happens. If confirmEdits() or confirmInsert() is true, confirmEdit() is called to confirm the insert. Returns true if the insert succeeded; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The underlying cursor must have a valid primary index to ensure that a unique record is inserted within the database otherwise the database may be changed to an inconsistent state.
 .SH "void TQDataTable::installEditorFactory ( TQSqlEditorFactory * f )"
@@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Resets the table so that it displays no data.
 .PP
 See also setSqlCursor().
 .SH "void TQDataTable::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sets the cursor auto-delete flag to \fIenable\fR. If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, the table will automatically delete the cursor specified by setSqlCursor(). If \fIenable\fR is FALSE (the default), the cursor will not be deleted.
+Sets the cursor auto-delete flag to \fIenable\fR. If \fIenable\fR is true, the table will automatically delete the cursor specified by setSqlCursor(). If \fIenable\fR is false (the default), the cursor will not be deleted.
 .SH "void TQDataTable::setAutoEdit ( bool autoEdit )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets whether the data table automatically applies edits to \fIautoEdit\fR. See the "autoEdit" property for details.
 .SH "void TQDataTable::setColumn ( uint col, const TQString & fieldName, const TQString & label = TQString::null, int width = -1, const TQIconSet & iconset = TQIconSet ( ) )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -512,8 +512,8 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 Sets the sort to be applied to the displayed data to \fIsort\fR. If there is no current cursor, nothing happens. A TQSqlIndex contains field names and their ordering (ASC or DESC); these are used to compose the ORDER BY clause.
 .PP
 See also sort.
-.SH "void TQDataTable::setSqlCursor ( TQSqlCursor * cursor = 0, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, bool autoDelete = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sets \fIcursor\fR as the data source for the table. To force the display of the data from \fIcursor\fR, use refresh(). If \fIautoPopulate\fR is TRUE, columns are automatically created based upon the fields in the \fIcursor\fR record. If \fIautoDelete\fR is TRUE (the default is FALSE), the table will take ownership of the \fIcursor\fR and delete it when appropriate. If the \fIcursor\fR is read-only, the table becomes read-only. The table adopts the cursor's driver's definition for representing NULL values as strings.
+.SH "void TQDataTable::setSqlCursor ( TQSqlCursor * cursor = 0, bool autoPopulate = false, bool autoDelete = false )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Sets \fIcursor\fR as the data source for the table. To force the display of the data from \fIcursor\fR, use refresh(). If \fIautoPopulate\fR is true, columns are automatically created based upon the fields in the \fIcursor\fR record. If \fIautoDelete\fR is true (the default is false), the table will take ownership of the \fIcursor\fR and delete it when appropriate. If the \fIcursor\fR is read-only, the table becomes read-only. The table adopts the cursor's driver's definition for representing NULL values as strings.
 .PP
 See also refresh(), readOnly, setAutoDelete(), and TQSqlDriver::nullText().
 .SH "void TQDataTable::setTrueText ( const TQString & trueText )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -524,8 +524,8 @@ Returns the data table's sort. See the "sort" property for details.
 Sorts column \fIcol\fR in ascending order.
 .PP
 See also sorting.
-.SH "void TQDataTable::sortColumn ( int col, bool ascending = TRUE, bool wholeRows = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sorts column \fIcol\fR in ascending order if \fIascending\fR is TRUE (the default); otherwise sorts in descending order.
+.SH "void TQDataTable::sortColumn ( int col, bool ascending = true, bool wholeRows = false )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Sorts column \fIcol\fR in ascending order if \fIascending\fR is true (the default); otherwise sorts in descending order.
 .PP
 The \fIwholeRows\fR parameter is ignored; TQDataTable always sorts whole rows by the specified column.
 .PP
@@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ Reimplemented from TQTable.
 .SH "TQString TQDataTable::trueText () const"
 Returns the text used to represent true values. See the "trueText" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQDataTable::updateCurrent ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-For an editable table, issues an update using the cursor's edit buffer. If there is no current cursor or there is no current selection, nothing happens. If confirmEdits() or confirmUpdate() is TRUE, confirmEdit() is called to confirm the update. Returns TRUE if the update succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+For an editable table, issues an update using the cursor's edit buffer. If there is no current cursor or there is no current selection, nothing happens. If confirmEdits() or confirmUpdate() is true, confirmEdit() is called to confirm the update. Returns true if the update succeeded; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The underlying cursor must have a valid primary index to ensure that a unique record is updated within the database otherwise the database may be changed to an inconsistent state.
 .SH "TQVariant TQDataTable::value ( int row, int col ) const"
@@ -552,19 +552,19 @@ Returns the value in cell \fIrow\fR, \fIcol\fR, or an invalid value if the cell
 .SH "bool autoEdit"
 This property holds whether the data table automatically applies edits.
 .PP
-The default value for this property is TRUE. When the user begins an insert or update in the table there are two possible outcomes when they navigate to another record:
+The default value for this property is true. When the user begins an insert or update in the table there are two possible outcomes when they navigate to another record:
 .PP
 <ol type=1>
 .TP
-the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is TRUE
+the insert or update is is performed -- this occurs if autoEdit is true
 .TP
-the insert or update is abandoned -- this occurs if autoEdit is FALSE
+the insert or update is abandoned -- this occurs if autoEdit is false
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setAutoEdit() and get this property's value with autoEdit().
 .SH "bool confirmCancels"
 This property holds whether the data table confirms cancel operations.
 .PP
-If the confirmCancel property is TRUE, all cancels must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behavior can be changed by overriding the confirmCancel() function), otherwise all cancels occur immediately. The default is FALSE.
+If the confirmCancel property is true, all cancels must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behavior can be changed by overriding the confirmCancel() function), otherwise all cancels occur immediately. The default is false.
 .PP
 See also confirmEdits and confirmCancel().
 .PP
@@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ Set this property's value with setConfirmCancels() and get this property's value
 .SH "bool confirmDelete"
 This property holds whether the data table confirms delete operations.
 .PP
-If the confirmDelete property is TRUE, all deletions must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be changed by overriding the confirmEdit() function), otherwise all delete operations occur immediately.
+If the confirmDelete property is true, all deletions must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be changed by overriding the confirmEdit() function), otherwise all delete operations occur immediately.
 .PP
 See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmUpdate, and confirmInsert.
 .PP
@@ -580,7 +580,7 @@ Set this property's value with setConfirmDelete() and get this property's value
 .SH "bool confirmEdits"
 This property holds whether the data table confirms edit operations.
 .PP
-If the confirmEdits property is TRUE, the data table confirms all edit operations (inserts, updates and deletes). Finer control of edit confirmation can be achieved using confirmCancels, confirmInsert, confirmUpdate and confirmDelete.
+If the confirmEdits property is true, the data table confirms all edit operations (inserts, updates and deletes). Finer control of edit confirmation can be achieved using confirmCancels, confirmInsert, confirmUpdate and confirmDelete.
 .PP
 See also confirmCancels, confirmInsert, confirmUpdate, and confirmDelete.
 .PP
@@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ Set this property's value with setConfirmEdits() and get this property's value w
 .SH "bool confirmInsert"
 This property holds whether the data table confirms insert operations.
 .PP
-If the confirmInsert property is TRUE, all insertions must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be changed by overriding the confirmEdit() function), otherwise all insert operations occur immediately.
+If the confirmInsert property is true, all insertions must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be changed by overriding the confirmEdit() function), otherwise all insert operations occur immediately.
 .PP
 See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmUpdate, and confirmDelete.
 .PP
@@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ Set this property's value with setConfirmInsert() and get this property's value
 .SH "bool confirmUpdate"
 This property holds whether the data table confirms update operations.
 .PP
-If the confirmUpdate property is TRUE, all updates must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be changed by overriding the confirmEdit() function), otherwise all update operations occur immediately.
+If the confirmUpdate property is true, all updates must be confirmed by the user through a message box (this behaviour can be changed by overriding the confirmEdit() function), otherwise all update operations occur immediately.
 .PP
 See also confirmCancels, confirmEdits, confirmInsert, and confirmDelete.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdate.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdate.3qt
index 4dd499798..155234e1d 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdate.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdate.3qt
@@ -244,29 +244,29 @@ Note for TQt::TextDate: It is recommended that you use the English short month n
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR TQt::LocalDate cannot be used here.
 .SH "bool TQDate::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if the date is null; otherwise returns FALSE. A null date is invalid.
+Returns true if the date is null; otherwise returns false. A null date is invalid.
 .PP
 See also isValid().
 .SH "bool TQDate::isValid () const"
-Returns TRUE if this date is valid; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this date is valid; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isNull().
 .SH "bool TQDate::isValid ( int y, int m, int d )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the specified date (year \fIy\fR, month \fIm\fR and day \fId\fR) is valid; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the specified date (year \fIy\fR, month \fIm\fR and day \fId\fR) is valid; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-    TQDate::isValid( 2002, 5, 17 );  // TRUE   May 17th 2002 is valid
+    TQDate::isValid( 2002, 5, 17 );  // true   May 17th 2002 is valid
 .br
-    TQDate::isValid( 2002, 2, 30 );  // FALSE  Feb 30th does not exist
+    TQDate::isValid( 2002, 2, 30 );  // false  Feb 30th does not exist
 .br
-    TQDate::isValid( 2004, 2, 29 );  // TRUE   2004 is a leap year
+    TQDate::isValid( 2004, 2, 29 );  // true   2004 is a leap year
 .br
-    TQDate::isValid( 1202, 6, 6 );   // FALSE  1202 is pre-Gregorian
+    TQDate::isValid( 1202, 6, 6 );   // false  1202 is pre-Gregorian
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ Example:
 .PP
 See also isNull() and setYMD().
 .SH "bool TQDate::leapYear ( int y )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the specified year \fIy\fR is a leap year; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the specified year \fIy\fR is a leap year; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQString TQDate::longDayName ( int weekday )\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns the long name of the \fIweekday\fR.
 .PP
@@ -302,17 +302,17 @@ Example: dclock/dclock.cpp.
 .PP
 Use shortMonthName() instead.
 .SH "bool TQDate::operator!= ( const TQDate & d ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this date is different from \fId\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this date is different from \fId\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQDate::operator< ( const TQDate & d ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this date is earlier than \fId\fR, otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this date is earlier than \fId\fR, otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQDate::operator<= ( const TQDate & d ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this date is earlier than or equal to \fId\fR, otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this date is earlier than or equal to \fId\fR, otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQDate::operator== ( const TQDate & d ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this date is equal to \fId\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this date is equal to \fId\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQDate::operator> ( const TQDate & d ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this date is later than \fId\fR, otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this date is later than \fId\fR, otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQDate::operator>= ( const TQDate & d ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this date is later than or equal to \fId\fR, otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this date is later than or equal to \fId\fR, otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQDate::setYMD ( int y, int m, int d )"
 Sets the date's year \fIy\fR, month \fIm\fR and day \fId\fR.
 .PP
@@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Sets the date's year \fIy\fR, month \fIm\fR and day \fId\fR.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR If \fIy\fR is in the range 0..99, it is interpreted as 1900..1999.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the date is valid; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the date is valid; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQString TQDate::shortDayName ( int weekday )\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns the name of the \fIweekday\fR.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdateedit.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdateedit.3qt
index 46196005d..4ec068a9c 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdateedit.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdateedit.3qt
@@ -133,11 +133,11 @@ TQDateEdit allows the user to edit dates by using the keyboard or the arrow keys
 .br
     dateEdit->setOrder( TQDateEdit::MDY );
 .br
-    dateEdit->setAutoAdvance( TRUE );
+    dateEdit->setAutoAdvance( true );
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-Here we've created a new TQDateEdit object initialised with today's date and restricted the valid date range to today plus or minus 365 days. We've set the order to month, day, year. If the auto advance property is TRUE (as we've set it here) when the user completes a section of the date, e.g. enters two digits for the month, they are automatically taken to the next section.
+Here we've created a new TQDateEdit object initialised with today's date and restricted the valid date range to today plus or minus 365 days. We've set the order to month, day, year. If the auto advance property is true (as we've set it here) when the user completes a section of the date, e.g. enters two digits for the month, they are automatically taken to the next section.
 .PP
 The maximum and minimum values for a date value in the date editor default to the maximum and minimum values for a TQDate. You can change this by calling setMinValue(), setMaxValue() or setRange().
 .PP
@@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ The date editor is initialized with \fIdate\fR.
 .SH "TQDateEdit::~TQDateEdit ()"
 Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
 .SH "bool TQDateEdit::autoAdvance () const"
-Returns TRUE if the editor automatically advances to the next section; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoAdvance" property for details.
+Returns true if the editor automatically advances to the next section; otherwise returns false. See the "autoAdvance" property for details.
 .SH "TQDate TQDateEdit::date () const"
 Returns the editor's date value. See the "date" property for details.
 .SH "void TQDateEdit::fix ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ This signal is emitted whenever the editor's value changes. The \fIdate\fR param
 .SH "bool autoAdvance"
 This property holds whether the editor automatically advances to the next section.
 .PP
-If autoAdvance is TRUE, the editor will automatically advance focus to the next date section if a user has completed a section. The default is FALSE.
+If autoAdvance is true, the editor will automatically advance focus to the next date section if a user has completed a section. The default is false.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setAutoAdvance() and get this property's value with autoAdvance().
 .SH "TQDate date"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdatetime.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdatetime.3qt
index 52fd1696e..edf2215ae 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdatetime.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdatetime.3qt
@@ -185,29 +185,29 @@ Note for TQt::TextDate: It is recommended that you use the English short month n
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR Note that TQt::LocalDate cannot be used here.
 .SH "bool TQDateTime::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if both the date and the time are null; otherwise returns FALSE. A null datetime is invalid.
+Returns true if both the date and the time are null; otherwise returns false. A null datetime is invalid.
 .PP
 See also TQDate::isNull() and TQTime::isNull().
 .SH "bool TQDateTime::isValid () const"
-Returns TRUE if both the date and the time are valid; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if both the date and the time are valid; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQDate::isValid() and TQTime::isValid().
 .SH "bool TQDateTime::operator!= ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this datetime is different from \fIdt\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this datetime is different from \fIdt\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also operator==().
 .SH "bool TQDateTime::operator< ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this datetime is earlier than \fIdt\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this datetime is earlier than \fIdt\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQDateTime::operator<= ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this datetime is earlier than or equal to \fIdt\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this datetime is earlier than or equal to \fIdt\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQDateTime::operator== ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this datetime is equal to \fIdt\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this datetime is equal to \fIdt\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also operator!=().
 .SH "bool TQDateTime::operator> ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this datetime is later than \fIdt\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this datetime is later than \fIdt\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQDateTime::operator>= ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this datetime is later than or equal to \fIdt\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this datetime is later than or equal to \fIdt\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int TQDateTime::secsTo ( const TQDateTime & dt ) const"
 Returns the number of seconds from this datetime to \fIdt\fR (which is negative if \fIdt\fR is earlier than this datetime).
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdatetimeedit.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdatetimeedit.3qt
index 2eaaa4bb8..db03c2656 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdatetimeedit.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdatetimeedit.3qt
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Constructs a datetime edit with the initial value \fIdatetime\fR, parent \fIpare
 .SH "TQDateTimeEdit::~TQDateTimeEdit ()"
 Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
 .SH "bool TQDateTimeEdit::autoAdvance () const"
-Returns TRUE if auto-advance is enabled, otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if auto-advance is enabled, otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setAutoAdvance().
 .SH "TQDateEdit * TQDateTimeEdit::dateEdit ()"
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Returns the internal widget used for editing the date part of the datetime.
 .SH "TQDateTime TQDateTimeEdit::dateTime () const"
 Returns the editor's datetime value. See the "dateTime" property for details.
 .SH "void TQDateTimeEdit::setAutoAdvance ( bool advance )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sets the auto advance property of the editor to \fIadvance\fR. If set to TRUE, the editor will automatically advance focus to the next date or time section if the user has completed a section.
+Sets the auto advance property of the editor to \fIadvance\fR. If set to true, the editor will automatically advance focus to the next date or time section if the user has completed a section.
 .SH "void TQDateTimeEdit::setDateTime ( const TQDateTime & dt )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets the editor's datetime value to \fIdt\fR. See the "dateTime" property for details.
 .SH "TQTimeEdit * TQDateTimeEdit::timeEdit ()"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdesktopwidget.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdesktopwidget.3qt
index 6e8003a6f..6a54ceaa5 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdesktopwidget.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdesktopwidget.3qt
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Returns the available geometry of the screen which contains \fIp\fR.
 .PP
 See also screenGeometry().
 .SH "bool TQDesktopWidget::isVirtualDesktop () const"
-Returns TRUE if the system manages the available screens in a virtual desktop; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the system manages the available screens in a virtual desktop; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 For virtual desktops, screen() will always return the same widget. The size of the virtual desktop is the size of this desktop widget.
 .SH "int TQDesktopWidget::numScreens () const"
@@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Returns a widget that represents the screen with index \fIscreen\fR. This widget
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-    TQPainter paint( TQApplication::desktop()->screen( 0 ), TRUE );
+    TQPainter paint( TQApplication::desktop()->screen( 0 ), true );
 .br
     paint.draw...
 .br
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdial.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdial.3qt
index 3b13d980c..b43c61623 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdial.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdial.3qt
@@ -162,9 +162,9 @@ The TQDial class provides a rounded range control (like a speedometer or potenti
 .PP
 TQDial is used when the user needs to control a value within a program-definable range, and the range either wraps around (typically, 0..359 degrees) or the dialog layout needs a square widget.
 .PP
-Both API- and UI-wise, the dial is very similar to a slider. Indeed, when wrapping() is FALSE (the default) there is no real difference between a slider and a dial. They have the same signals, slots and member functions, all of which do the same things. Which one you use depends only on your taste and on the application.
+Both API- and UI-wise, the dial is very similar to a slider. Indeed, when wrapping() is false (the default) there is no real difference between a slider and a dial. They have the same signals, slots and member functions, all of which do the same things. Which one you use depends only on your taste and on the application.
 .PP
-The dial initially emits valueChanged() signals continuously while the slider is being moved; you can make it emit the signal less often by calling setTracking(FALSE). dialMoved() is emitted continuously even when tracking() is FALSE.
+The dial initially emits valueChanged() signals continuously while the slider is being moved; you can make it emit the signal less often by calling setTracking(false). dialMoved() is emitted continuously even when tracking() is false.
 .PP
 The slider also emits dialPressed() and dialReleased() signals when the mouse button is pressed and released. But note that the dial's value can change without these signals being emitted; the keyboard and wheel can be used to change the value.
 .PP
@@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ Returns the current notch size. See the "notchSize" property for details.
 .SH "double TQDial::notchTarget () const"
 Returns the target number of pixels between notches. See the "notchTarget" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQDial::notchesVisible () const"
-Returns TRUE if the notches are shown; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "notchesVisible" property for details.
+Returns true if the notches are shown; otherwise returns false. See the "notchesVisible" property for details.
 .SH "int TQDial::pageStep () const"
 Returns the current page step. See the "pageStep" property for details.
 .SH "void TQDial::rangeChange ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ Decrements the dial's value() by one lineStep().
 .SH "void TQDial::subtractPage ()\fC [slot]\fR"
 Decrements the dial's value() by one pageStep() of steps.
 .SH "bool TQDial::tracking () const"
-Returns TRUE if tracking is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "tracking" property for details.
+Returns true if tracking is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "tracking" property for details.
 .SH "int TQDial::value () const"
 Returns the current dial value. See the "value" property for details.
 .SH "void TQDial::valueChange ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ Reimplemented from TQRangeControl.
 .SH "void TQDial::valueChanged ( int value )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted whenever the dial's \fIvalue\fR changes. The frequency of this signal is influenced by setTracking().
 .SH "bool TQDial::wrapping () const"
-Returns TRUE if wrapping is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "wrapping" property for details.
+Returns true if wrapping is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "wrapping" property for details.
 .SS "Property Documentation"
 .SH "int lineStep"
 This property holds the current line step.
@@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ Set this property's value with setNotchTarget() and get this property's value wi
 .SH "bool notchesVisible"
 This property holds whether the notches are shown.
 .PP
-If TRUE, the notches are shown. If FALSE (the default) notches are not shown.
+If true, the notches are shown. If false (the default) notches are not shown.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setNotchesVisible() and get this property's value with notchesVisible().
 .SH "int pageStep"
@@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Set this property's value with setPageStep() and get this property's value with
 .SH "bool tracking"
 This property holds whether tracking is enabled.
 .PP
-If TRUE (the default), tracking is enabled. This means that the arrow can be moved using the mouse; otherwise the arrow cannot be moved with the mouse.
+If true (the default), tracking is enabled. This means that the arrow can be moved using the mouse; otherwise the arrow cannot be moved with the mouse.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setTracking() and get this property's value with tracking().
 .SH "int value"
@@ -333,9 +333,9 @@ Set this property's value with setValue() and get this property's value with val
 .SH "bool wrapping"
 This property holds whether wrapping is enabled.
 .PP
-If TRUE, wrapping is enabled. This means that the arrow can be turned around 360°. Otherwise there is some space at the bottom of the dial which is skipped by the arrow.
+If true, wrapping is enabled. This means that the arrow can be turned around 360°. Otherwise there is some space at the bottom of the dial which is skipped by the arrow.
 .PP
-This property's default is FALSE.
+This property's default is false.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setWrapping() and get this property's value with wrapping().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdialog.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdialog.3qt
index c6fa8d468..77cd1e928 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdialog.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdialog.3qt
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Inherited by TQColorDialog, TQErrorMessage, TQFileDialog, TQFontDialog, TQInputD
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "explicit \fBTQDialog\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )"
+.BI "explicit \fBTQDialog\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fB~TQDialog\fR ()"
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ A \fBmodal\fR dialog is a dialog that blocks input to other visible windows in t
 .PP
 The most common way to display a modal dialog is to call its exec() function. When the user closes the dialog, exec() will provide a useful return value. Typically we connect a default button, e.g. "OK", to the accept() slot and a" Cancel" button to the reject() slot, to get the dialog to close and return the appropriate value. Alternatively you can connect to the done() slot, passing it Accepted or Rejected.
 .PP
-An alternative is to call setModal(TRUE), then show(). Unlike exec(), show() returns control to the caller immediately. Calling setModal(TRUE) is especially useful for progress dialogs, where the user must have the ability to interact with the dialog, e.g. to cancel a long running operation. If you use show() and setModal(TRUE) together you must call TQApplication::processEvents() periodically during processing to enable the user to interact with the dialog. (See TQProgressDialog.)
+An alternative is to call setModal(true), then show(). Unlike exec(), show() returns control to the caller immediately. Calling setModal(true) is especially useful for progress dialogs, where the user must have the ability to interact with the dialog, e.g. to cancel a long running operation. If you use show() and setModal(true) together you must call TQApplication::processEvents() periodically during processing to enable the user to interact with the dialog. (See TQProgressDialog.)
 .SH "Modeless Dialogs"
 A \fBmodeless\fR dialog is a dialog that operates independently of other windows in the same application. Find and replace dialogs in word-processors are often modeless to allow the user to interact with both the application's main window and with the dialog.
 .PP
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ A modal dialog.
 .br
         TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( workingDirectory,
 .br
-                TQString::null, 0, 0, TRUE );
+                TQString::null, 0, 0, true );
 .br
         dlg->setCaption( TQFileDialog::tr( "Open" ) );
 .br
@@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ The value returned by a modal dialog.
 \fCTQDialog::Rejected\fR
 .PP
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "explicit TQDialog::TQDialog ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )"
+.SH "explicit TQDialog::TQDialog ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 )"
 Constructs a dialog called \fIname\fR, with parent \fIparent\fR.
 .PP
 A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if it has a parent, its default location is centered on top of the parent. It will also share the parent's taskbar entry.
@@ -228,9 +228,9 @@ Returns the dialog's extension or 0 if no extension has been defined.
 .PP
 See also setExtension().
 .SH "bool TQDialog::isModal () const"
-Returns TRUE if show() should pop up the dialog as modal or modeless; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "modal" property for details.
+Returns true if show() should pop up the dialog as modal or modeless; otherwise returns false. See the "modal" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQDialog::isSizeGripEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the size grip is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details.
+Returns true if the size grip is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "Orientation TQDialog::orientation () const"
 Returns the dialog's extension orientation.
 .PP
@@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Examples:
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQWidget.
 .SH "void TQDialog::showExtension ( bool showIt )\fC [protected slot]\fR"
-If \fIshowIt\fR is TRUE, the dialog's extension is shown; otherwise the extension is hidden.
+If \fIshowIt\fR is true, the dialog's extension is shown; otherwise the extension is hidden.
 .PP
 This slot is usually connected to the TQButton::toggled() signal of a TQPushButton.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdict.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdict.3qt
index 5bd827e94..987e871d2 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdict.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdict.3qt
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Inherits TQPtrCollection.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQDict\fR ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE )"
+.BI "\fBTQDict\fR ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fBTQDict\fR ( const TQDict<type> & dict )"
@@ -95,9 +95,9 @@ If you want to use non-Unicode, plain 8-bit \fCchar*\fR keys, use the TQAsciiDic
 .PP
 The size() of the dictionary is very important. In order to get good performance, you should use a suitably large prime number. Suitable means equal to or larger than the maximum expected number of dictionary items. Size is set in the constructor but may be changed with resize().
 .PP
-Items are inserted with insert(); 0 pointers cannot be inserted. Items are removed with remove(). All the items in a dictionary can be removed with clear(). The number of items in the dictionary is returned by count(). If the dictionary contains no items isEmpty() returns TRUE. You can change an item's value with replace(). Items are looked up with operator[](), or with find() which return a pointer to the value or 0 if the given key does not exist. You can take an item out of the dictionary with take().
+Items are inserted with insert(); 0 pointers cannot be inserted. Items are removed with remove(). All the items in a dictionary can be removed with clear(). The number of items in the dictionary is returned by count(). If the dictionary contains no items isEmpty() returns true. You can change an item's value with replace(). Items are looked up with operator[](), or with find() which return a pointer to the value or 0 if the given key does not exist. You can take an item out of the dictionary with take().
 .PP
-Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) for a dictionary tells it to delete items that are removed. The default behaviour is not to delete items when they are removed.
+Calling setAutoDelete(true) for a dictionary tells it to delete items that are removed. The default behaviour is not to delete items when they are removed.
 .PP
 When an item is inserted, the key is converted (hashed) to an integer index into an internal hash array. This makes lookup very fast.
 .PP
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Example #2:
 .br
     styleList.sort();
 .br
-    TQDict<int> letterDict( 17, FALSE );
+    TQDict<int> letterDict( 17, false );
 .br
     for ( TQStringList::Iterator it = styleList.begin(); it != styleList.end(); ++it ) {
 .br
@@ -202,22 +202,22 @@ We first obtain the list of available styles, then sort them so that the menu it
 .PP
 See also TQDictIterator, TQAsciiDict, TQIntDict, TQPtrDict, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQDict::TQDict ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = TRUE )"
+.SH "TQDict::TQDict ( int size = 17, bool caseSensitive = true )"
 Constructs a dictionary optimized for less than \fIsize\fR entries.
 .PP
 We recommend setting \fIsize\fR to a suitably large prime number (e.g. a prime that's slightly larger than the expected number of entries). This makes the hash distribution better which will lead to faster lookup.
 .PP
-If \fIcaseSensitive\fR is TRUE (the default), keys which differ only by case are considered different.
+If \fIcaseSensitive\fR is true (the default), keys which differ only by case are considered different.
 .SH "TQDict::TQDict ( const TQDict<type> & dict )"
 Constructs a copy of \fIdict\fR.
 .PP
 Each item in \fIdict\fR is inserted into this dictionary. Only the pointers are copied (shallow copy).
 .SH "TQDict::~TQDict ()"
-Removes all items from the dictionary and destroys it. If setAutoDelete() is TRUE, each value is deleted. All iterators that access this dictionary will be reset.
+Removes all items from the dictionary and destroys it. If setAutoDelete() is true, each value is deleted. All iterators that access this dictionary will be reset.
 .PP
 See also setAutoDelete().
 .SH "bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const"
-Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
+Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is false.
 .PP
 See also setAutoDelete().
 .SH "void TQDict::clear ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ See also replace().
 .PP
 Example: themes/themes.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQDict::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also count().
 .SH "TQDict<type> & TQDict::operator= ( const TQDict<type> & dict )"
@@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ The default implementation sets \fIitem\fR to 0.
 .PP
 See also write().
 .SH "bool TQDict::remove ( const TQString & key )"
-Removes the item with \fIkey\fR from the dictionary. Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the item is in the dictionary; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Removes the item with \fIkey\fR from the dictionary. Returns true if successful, i.e. if the item is in the dictionary; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the last item that was inserted will be removed.
 .PP
@@ -315,11 +315,11 @@ See also insert().
 .SH "void TQDict::resize ( uint newsize )"
 Changes the size of the hash table to \fInewsize\fR. The contents of the dictionary are preserved, but all iterators on the dictionary become invalid.
 .SH "void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )"
-Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is TRUE and to never delete them if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is true and to never delete them if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
 .PP
-The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items.
+The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items.
 .PP
 Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove() function will remove the item from its data structure, and if auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdictiterator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdictiterator.3qt
index 495e01e41..a875dead2 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdictiterator.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdictiterator.3qt
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Returns a pointer to the current iterator item's value.
 .SH "TQString TQDictIterator::currentKey () const"
 Returns the current iterator item's key.
 .SH "bool TQDictIterator::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the dictionary is empty, i.e. count() == 0; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also count().
 .SH "TQDictIterator::operator type * () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdir.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdir.3qt
index 1cf380043..25733d332 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdir.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdir.3qt
@@ -55,13 +55,13 @@ All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread supp
 .BI "virtual TQString \fBdirName\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual TQString \fBfilePath\fR ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "virtual TQString \fBfilePath\fR ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual TQString \fBabsFilePath\fR ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "virtual TQString \fBabsFilePath\fR ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual bool \fBcd\fR ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual bool \fBcd\fR ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual bool \fBcdUp\fR ()"
@@ -115,10 +115,10 @@ All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread supp
 .BI "virtual const TQFileInfoList * \fBentryInfoList\fR ( const TQString & nameFilter, int filterSpec = DefaultFilter, int sortSpec = DefaultSort ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual bool \fBmkdir\fR ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "virtual bool \fBmkdir\fR ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual bool \fBrmdir\fR ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "virtual bool \fBrmdir\fR ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual bool \fBisReadable\fR () const"
@@ -142,13 +142,13 @@ All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread supp
 .BI "virtual bool \fBoperator!=\fR ( const TQDir & d ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual bool \fBremove\fR ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual bool \fBremove\fR ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual bool \fBrename\fR ( const TQString & oldName, const TQString & newName, bool acceptAbsPaths = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual bool \fBrename\fR ( const TQString & oldName, const TQString & newName, bool acceptAbsPaths = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual bool \fBexists\fR ( const TQString & name, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual bool \fBexists\fR ( const TQString & name, bool acceptAbsPath = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBrefresh\fR () const"
@@ -401,10 +401,10 @@ Constructs a TQDir that is a copy of the directory \fId\fR.
 See also operator=().
 .SH "TQDir::~TQDir ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Destroys the TQDir frees up its resources.
-.SH "TQString TQDir::absFilePath ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQString TQDir::absFilePath ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the absolute path name of a file in the directory. Does \fInot\fR check if the file actually exists in the directory. Redundant multiple separators or "." and ".." directories in \fIfileName\fR will not be removed (see cleanDirPath()).
 .PP
-If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is TRUE a \fIfileName\fR starting with a separator "/" will be returned without change. If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is FALSE an absolute path will be prepended to the fileName and the resultant string returned.
+If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is true a \fIfileName\fR starting with a separator "/" will be returned without change. If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is false an absolute path will be prepended to the fileName and the resultant string returned.
 .PP
 See also filePath().
 .SH "TQString TQDir::absPath () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -419,12 +419,12 @@ Returns the canonical path, i.e. a path without symbolic links or redundant "."
 On systems that do not have symbolic links this function will always return the same string that absPath() returns. If the canonical path does not exist (normally due to dangling symbolic links) canonicalPath() returns TQString::null.
 .PP
 See also path(), absPath(), exists(), cleanDirPath(), dirName(), absFilePath(), and TQString::isNull().
-.SH "bool TQDir::cd ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "bool TQDir::cd ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = true )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Changes the TQDir's directory to \fIdirName\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is TRUE a path starting with separator "/" will cause the function to change to the absolute directory. If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is FALSE any number of separators at the beginning of \fIdirName\fR will be removed and the function will descend into \fIdirName\fR.
+If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is true a path starting with separator "/" will cause the function to change to the absolute directory. If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is false any number of separators at the beginning of \fIdirName\fR will be removed and the function will descend into \fIdirName\fR.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the new directory exists and is readable; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that the logical cd() operation is not performed if the new directory does not exist.
+Returns true if the new directory exists and is readable; otherwise returns false. Note that the logical cd() operation is not performed if the new directory does not exist.
 .PP
 Calling cd( ".." ) is equivalent to calling cdUp().
 .PP
@@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ Example: fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQDir::cdUp ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Changes directory by moving one directory up from the TQDir's current directory.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the new directory exists and is readable; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that the logical cdUp() operation is not performed if the new directory does not exist.
+Returns true if the new directory exists and is readable; otherwise returns false. Note that the logical cdUp() operation is not performed if the new directory does not exist.
 .PP
 See also cd(), isReadable(), exists(), and path().
 .SH "TQString TQDir::cleanDirPath ( const TQString & filePath )\fC [static]\fR"
@@ -551,24 +551,24 @@ The filter and sorting specifications can be overridden using the \fIfilterSpec\
 Returns an empty list if the directory is unreadable or does not exist.
 .PP
 See also entryInfoList(), setNameFilter(), setSorting(), and setFilter().
-.SH "bool TQDir::exists ( const TQString & name, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "bool TQDir::exists ( const TQString & name, bool acceptAbsPath = true )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Checks for the existence of the file \fIname\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is TRUE a path starting with separator "/" will check the file with the absolute path. If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is FALSE any number of separators at the beginning of \fIname\fR will be removed and the resultant file name will be checked.
+If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is true a path starting with separator "/" will check the file with the absolute path. If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is false any number of separators at the beginning of \fIname\fR will be removed and the resultant file name will be checked.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the file exists; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the file exists; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQFileInfo::exists() and TQFile::exists().
 .SH "bool TQDir::exists () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the \fIdirectory\fR exists; otherwise returns FALSE. (If a file with the same name is found this function will return FALSE).
+Returns true if the \fIdirectory\fR exists; otherwise returns false. (If a file with the same name is found this function will return false).
 .PP
 See also TQFileInfo::exists() and TQFile::exists().
-.SH "TQString TQDir::filePath ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQString TQDir::filePath ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the path name of a file in the directory. Does \fInot\fR check if the file actually exists in the directory. If the TQDir is relative the returned path name will also be relative. Redundant multiple separators or "." and ".." directories in \fIfileName\fR will not be removed (see cleanDirPath()).
 .PP
-If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is TRUE a \fIfileName\fR starting with a separator "/" will be returned without change. If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is FALSE an absolute path will be prepended to the fileName and the resultant string returned.
+If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is true a \fIfileName\fR starting with a separator "/" will be returned without change. If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is false an absolute path will be prepended to the fileName and the resultant string returned.
 .PP
 See also absFilePath(), isRelative(), and canonicalPath().
 .SH "FilterSpec TQDir::filter () const"
@@ -586,26 +586,26 @@ Returns the absolute path of the user's home directory.
 .PP
 See also home().
 .SH "bool TQDir::isReadable () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the directory is readable \fIand\fR we can open files by name; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the directory is readable \fIand\fR we can open files by name; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-\fBWarning:\fR A FALSE value from this function is not a guarantee that files in the directory are not accessible.
+\fBWarning:\fR A false value from this function is not a guarantee that files in the directory are not accessible.
 .PP
 See also TQFileInfo::isReadable().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l dirview/dirview.cpp and fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQDir::isRelative () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the directory path is relative to the current directory and returns FALSE if the path is absolute (e.g. under UNIX a path is relative if it does not start with a "/").
+Returns true if the directory path is relative to the current directory and returns false if the path is absolute (e.g. under UNIX a path is relative if it does not start with a "/").
 .PP
 See also convertToAbs().
 .SH "bool TQDir::isRelativePath ( const TQString & path )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if \fIpath\fR is relative; returns FALSE if it is absolute.
+Returns true if \fIpath\fR is relative; returns false if it is absolute.
 .PP
 See also isRelative().
 .SH "bool TQDir::isRoot () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the directory is the root directory; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the directory is the root directory; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-Note: If the directory is a symbolic link to the root directory this function returns FALSE. If you want to test for this use canonicalPath(), e.g.
+Note: If the directory is a symbolic link to the root directory this function returns false. If you want to test for this use canonicalPath(), e.g.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -621,7 +621,7 @@ Note: If the directory is a symbolic link to the root directory this function re
 .PP
 See also root() and rootDirPath().
 .SH "bool TQDir::match ( const TQString & filter, const TQString & fileName )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the \fIfileName\fR matches the wildcard (glob) pattern \fIfilter\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. The \fIfilter\fR may contain multiple patterns separated by spaces or semicolons.
+Returns true if the \fIfileName\fR matches the wildcard (glob) pattern \fIfilter\fR; otherwise returns false. The \fIfilter\fR may contain multiple patterns separated by spaces or semicolons.
 .PP
 (See TQRegExp wildcard matching.)
 .PP
@@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ See also TQRegExp::match().
 .SH "bool TQDir::match ( const TQStringList & filters, const TQString & fileName )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the \fIfileName\fR matches any of the wildcard (glob) patterns in the list of \fIfilters\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the \fIfileName\fR matches any of the wildcard (glob) patterns in the list of \fIfilters\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 (See TQRegExp wildcard matching.)
 .PP
@@ -638,18 +638,18 @@ See also TQRegExp::match().
 Returns the value set by setMatchAllDirs()
 .PP
 See also setMatchAllDirs().
-.SH "bool TQDir::mkdir ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "bool TQDir::mkdir ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Creates a directory.
 .PP
-If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is TRUE a path starting with a separator ('/') will create the absolute directory; if \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is FALSE any number of separators at the beginning of \fIdirName\fR will be removed.
+If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is true a path starting with a separator ('/') will create the absolute directory; if \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is false any number of separators at the beginning of \fIdirName\fR will be removed.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also rmdir().
 .SH "TQString TQDir::nameFilter () const"
 Returns the string set by setNameFilter()
 .SH "bool TQDir::operator!= ( const TQDir & d ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if directory \fId\fR and this directory have different paths or different sort or filter settings; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if directory \fId\fR and this directory have different paths or different sort or filter settings; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
@@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Sets the directory path to be the given \fIpath\fR.
 .SH "bool TQDir::operator== ( const TQDir & d ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if directory \fId\fR and this directory have the same path and their sort and filter settings are the same; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if directory \fId\fR and this directory have the same path and their sort and filter settings are the same; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
@@ -706,30 +706,30 @@ The returned path can be either absolute or relative (see setPath()).
 See also setPath(), absPath(), exists(), cleanDirPath(), dirName(), absFilePath(), and convertSeparators().
 .SH "void TQDir::refresh () const"
 Refreshes the directory information.
-.SH "bool TQDir::remove ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "bool TQDir::remove ( const TQString & fileName, bool acceptAbsPath = true )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Removes the file, \fIfileName\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is TRUE a path starting with separator "/" will remove the file with the absolute path. If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is FALSE any number of separators at the beginning of \fIfileName\fR will be removed and the resultant file name will be removed.
+If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is true a path starting with separator "/" will remove the file with the absolute path. If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is false any number of separators at the beginning of \fIfileName\fR will be removed and the resultant file name will be removed.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the file is removed successfully; otherwise returns FALSE.
-.SH "bool TQDir::rename ( const TQString & oldName, const TQString & newName, bool acceptAbsPaths = TRUE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Returns true if the file is removed successfully; otherwise returns false.
+.SH "bool TQDir::rename ( const TQString & oldName, const TQString & newName, bool acceptAbsPaths = true )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Renames a file or directory.
 .PP
-If \fIacceptAbsPaths\fR is TRUE a path starting with a separator ('/') will rename the file with the absolute path; if \fIacceptAbsPaths\fR is FALSE any number of separators at the beginning of the names will be removed.
+If \fIacceptAbsPaths\fR is true a path starting with a separator ('/') will rename the file with the absolute path; if \fIacceptAbsPaths\fR is false any number of separators at the beginning of the names will be removed.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 On most file systems, rename() fails only if \fIoldName\fR does not exist or if \fInewName\fR and \fIoldName\fR are not on the same partition. On Windows, rename() will fail if \fInewName\fR already exists. However, there are also other reasons why rename() can fail. For example, on at least one file system rename() fails if \fInewName\fR points to an open file.
 .PP
 Example: fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
-.SH "bool TQDir::rmdir ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = TRUE ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "bool TQDir::rmdir ( const TQString & dirName, bool acceptAbsPath = true ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Removes a directory.
 .PP
-If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is TRUE a path starting with a separator ('/') will remove the absolute directory; if \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is FALSE any number of separators at the beginning of \fIdirName\fR will be removed.
+If \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is true a path starting with a separator ('/') will remove the absolute directory; if \fIacceptAbsPath\fR is false any number of separators at the beginning of \fIdirName\fR will be removed.
 .PP
 The directory must be empty for rmdir() to succeed.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also mkdir().
 .SH "TQDir TQDir::root ()\fC [static]\fR"
@@ -747,13 +747,13 @@ Returns the native directory separator; "/" under UNIX (including Mac OS X) and
 .PP
 You do not need to use this function to build file paths. If you always use "/", TQt will translate your paths to conform to the underlying operating system.
 .SH "bool TQDir::setCurrent ( const TQString & path )\fC [static]\fR"
-Sets the application's current working directory to \fIpath\fR. Returns TRUE if the directory was successfully changed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Sets the application's current working directory to \fIpath\fR. Returns true if the directory was successfully changed; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "void TQDir::setFilter ( int filterSpec )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the filter used by entryList() and entryInfoList() to \fIfilterSpec\fR. The filter is used to specify the kind of files that should be returned by entryList() and entryInfoList(). See TQDir::FilterSpec.
 .PP
 See also filter() and setNameFilter().
 .SH "void TQDir::setMatchAllDirs ( bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE then all directories are included (e.g. in entryList()), and the nameFilter() is only applied to the files. If \fIenable\fR is FALSE then the nameFilter() is applied to both directories and files.
+If \fIenable\fR is true then all directories are included (e.g. in entryList()), and the nameFilter() is only applied to the files. If \fIenable\fR is false then the nameFilter() is applied to both directories and files.
 .PP
 See also matchAllDirs().
 .SH "void TQDir::setNameFilter ( const TQString & nameFilter )\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdns.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdns.3qt
index 01b59bc7a..3cfdcdcb0 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdns.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdns.3qt
@@ -177,9 +177,9 @@ Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a copy,
 .br
 .fi
 .SH "bool TQDns::isWorking () const"
-Returns TRUE if TQDns is doing a lookup for this object (i.e. if it does not already have the necessary information); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if TQDns is doing a lookup for this object (i.e. if it does not already have the necessary information); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-TQDns emits the resultsReady() signal when the status changes to FALSE.
+TQDns emits the resultsReady() signal when the status changes to false.
 .PP
 Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
 .SH "TQString TQDns::label () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdockarea.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdockarea.3qt
index 2d03cb651..b51e4e7a9 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdockarea.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdockarea.3qt
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .BI "void \fBmoveDockWindow\fR ( TQDockWindow * w, const TQPoint & p, const TQRect & r, bool swap )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBremoveDockWindow\fR ( TQDockWindow * w, bool makeFloating, bool swap, bool fixNewLines = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBremoveDockWindow\fR ( TQDockWindow * w, bool makeFloating, bool swap, bool fixNewLines = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBmoveDockWindow\fR ( TQDockWindow * w, int index = -1 )"
@@ -149,15 +149,15 @@ Returns a list of the dock windows in the dock area.
 .SH "HandlePosition TQDockArea::handlePosition () const"
 Returns where the dock window splitter handle is placed in the dock area. See the "handlePosition" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQDockArea::hasDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * w, int * index = 0 )"
-Returns TRUE if the dock area contains the dock window \fIw\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. If \fIindex\fR is not 0 it will be set as follows: if the dock area contains the dock window \fI*index\fR is set to \fIw\fR's index position; otherwise \fI*index\fR is set to -1.
+Returns true if the dock area contains the dock window \fIw\fR; otherwise returns false. If \fIindex\fR is not 0 it will be set as follows: if the dock area contains the dock window \fI*index\fR is set to \fIw\fR's index position; otherwise \fI*index\fR is set to -1.
 .SH "bool TQDockArea::isDockWindowAccepted ( TQDockWindow * dw )"
-Returns TRUE if dock window \fIdw\fR could be docked into the dock area; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if dock window \fIdw\fR could be docked into the dock area; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setAcceptDockWindow().
 .SH "bool TQDockArea::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dock area is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "empty" property for details.
+Returns true if the dock area is empty; otherwise returns false. See the "empty" property for details.
 .SH "void TQDockArea::lineUp ( bool keepNewLines )\fC [slot]\fR"
-Lines up the dock windows in this dock area to minimize wasted space. If \fIkeepNewLines\fR is TRUE, only space within lines is cleaned up. If \fIkeepNewLines\fR is FALSE the number of lines might be changed.
+Lines up the dock windows in this dock area to minimize wasted space. If \fIkeepNewLines\fR is true, only space within lines is cleaned up. If \fIkeepNewLines\fR is false the number of lines might be changed.
 .SH "void TQDockArea::moveDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * w, int index = -1 )"
 Moves the TQDockWindow \fIw\fR within the dock area. If \fIw\fR is not already docked in this area, \fIw\fR is docked first. If \fIindex\fR is -1 or larger than the number of docked widgets, \fIw\fR is appended at the end, otherwise it is inserted at the position \fIindex\fR.
 .SH "void TQDockArea::moveDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * w, const TQPoint & p, const TQRect & r, bool swap )"
@@ -168,12 +168,12 @@ Moves the dock window \fIw\fR inside the dock area where \fIp\fR is the new posi
 This function is used internally by TQDockWindow. You shouldn't need to call it yourself.
 .SH "Orientation TQDockArea::orientation () const"
 Returns the dock area's orientation. See the "orientation" property for details.
-.SH "void TQDockArea::removeDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * w, bool makeFloating, bool swap, bool fixNewLines = TRUE )"
-Removes the dock window \fIw\fR from the dock area. If \fImakeFloating\fR is TRUE, \fIw\fR gets floated, and if \fIswap\fR is TRUE, the orientation of \fIw\fR gets swapped. If \fIfixNewLines\fR is TRUE (the default) newlines in the area will be fixed.
+.SH "void TQDockArea::removeDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * w, bool makeFloating, bool swap, bool fixNewLines = true )"
+Removes the dock window \fIw\fR from the dock area. If \fImakeFloating\fR is true, \fIw\fR gets floated, and if \fIswap\fR is true, the orientation of \fIw\fR gets swapped. If \fIfixNewLines\fR is true (the default) newlines in the area will be fixed.
 .PP
 You should never need to call this function yourself. Use TQDockWindow::dock() and TQDockWindow::undock() instead.
 .SH "void TQDockArea::setAcceptDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dw, bool accept )"
-If \fIaccept\fR is TRUE, dock window \fIdw\fR can be docked in the dock area. If \fIaccept\fR is FALSE, dock window \fIdw\fR cannot be docked in the dock area.
+If \fIaccept\fR is true, dock window \fIdw\fR can be docked in the dock area. If \fIaccept\fR is false, dock window \fIdw\fR cannot be docked in the dock area.
 .PP
 See also isDockWindowAccepted().
 .SS "Property Documentation"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdockwindow.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdockwindow.3qt
index 140caba3b..27803e86b 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdockwindow.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdockwindow.3qt
@@ -275,29 +275,29 @@ Returns the dock window's preferred size (fixed extent).
 .PP
 See also setFixedExtentWidth() and setFixedExtentHeight().
 .SH "bool TQDockWindow::isCloseEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dock window has a close button; otherwise returns FALSE. The result depends on the dock window's Place and its CloseMode.
+Returns true if the dock window has a close button; otherwise returns false. The result depends on the dock window's Place and its CloseMode.
 .PP
 See also closeMode.
 .SH "bool TQDockWindow::isHorizontalStretchable () const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .SH "bool TQDockWindow::isHorizontallyStretchable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dock window is horizontally stretchable; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "horizontallyStretchable" property for details.
+Returns true if the dock window is horizontally stretchable; otherwise returns false. See the "horizontallyStretchable" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQDockWindow::isMovingEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the user can move the dock window within the dock area, move the dock window to another dock area, or float the dock window; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "movingEnabled" property for details.
+Returns true if the user can move the dock window within the dock area, move the dock window to another dock area, or float the dock window; otherwise returns false. See the "movingEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQDockWindow::isResizeEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dock window is resizeable; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "resizeEnabled" property for details.
+Returns true if the dock window is resizeable; otherwise returns false. See the "resizeEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQDockWindow::isStretchable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dock window is stretchable in the current orientation(); otherwise returns FALSE. See the "stretchable" property for details.
+Returns true if the dock window is stretchable in the current orientation(); otherwise returns false. See the "stretchable" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQDockWindow::isVerticalStretchable () const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .SH "bool TQDockWindow::isVerticallyStretchable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dock window is vertically stretchable; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "verticallyStretchable" property for details.
+Returns true if the dock window is vertically stretchable; otherwise returns false. See the "verticallyStretchable" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQDockWindow::newLine () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dock window prefers to start a new line in the dock area; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "newLine" property for details.
+Returns true if the dock window prefers to start a new line in the dock area; otherwise returns false. See the "newLine" property for details.
 .SH "int TQDockWindow::offset () const"
 Returns the dock window's preferred offset from the dock area's left edge (top edge for vertical dock areas). See the "offset" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQDockWindow::opaqueMoving () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is being moved; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "opaqueMoving" property for details.
+Returns true if the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is being moved; otherwise returns false. See the "opaqueMoving" property for details.
 .SH "TQt::Orientation TQDockWindow::orientation () const"
 Returns the orientation of the dock window.
 .PP
@@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Undocks the TQDockWindow from its current dock area if it is docked; otherwise d
 .PP
 See also dock(), TQDockArea::moveDockWindow(), TQDockArea::removeDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), and TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow().
 .SH "void TQDockWindow::visibilityChanged ( bool visible )\fC [signal]\fR"
-This signal is emitted when the visibility of the dock window relatively to its dock area is changed. If \fIvisible\fR is TRUE, the TQDockWindow is now visible to the dock area, otherwise it has been hidden.
+This signal is emitted when the visibility of the dock window relatively to its dock area is changed. If \fIvisible\fR is true, the TQDockWindow is now visible to the dock area, otherwise it has been hidden.
 .PP
 A dock window can be hidden if it has a close button which the user has clicked. In the case of a TQMainWindow a dock window can have its visibility changed (hidden or shown) by clicking its name in the dock window menu that lists the TQMainWindow's dock windows.
 .SH "TQWidget * TQDockWindow::widget () const"
@@ -372,25 +372,25 @@ Set this property's value with setCloseMode() and get this property's value with
 .SH "bool horizontallyStretchable"
 This property holds whether the dock window is horizontally stretchable.
 .PP
-A dock window is horizontally stretchable if you call setHorizontallyStretchable(TRUE) or setResizeEnabled(TRUE).
+A dock window is horizontally stretchable if you call setHorizontallyStretchable(true) or setResizeEnabled(true).
 .PP
 See also resizeEnabled.
 .PP
 Bugs and limitations:
 .TP
-Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
+Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(true) to get proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setHorizontallyStretchable() and get this property's value with isHorizontallyStretchable().
 .SH "bool movingEnabled"
 This property holds whether the user can move the dock window within the dock area, move the dock window to another dock area, or float the dock window.
 .PP
-This property is TRUE by default.
+This property is true by default.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setMovingEnabled() and get this property's value with isMovingEnabled().
 .SH "bool newLine"
 This property holds whether the dock window prefers to start a new line in the dock area.
 .PP
-The default is FALSE, i.e. the dock window doesn't require a new line in the dock area.
+The default is false, i.e. the dock window doesn't require a new line in the dock area.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setNewLine() and get this property's value with newLine().
 .SH "int offset"
@@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ Set this property's value with setOffset() and get this property's value with of
 .SH "bool opaqueMoving"
 This property holds whether the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is being moved.
 .PP
-If this property is FALSE, (the default), the dock window will be represented by an outline rectangle whilst it is being moved.
+If this property is false, (the default), the dock window will be represented by an outline rectangle whilst it is being moved.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR Currently opaque moving has some problems and we do not recommend using it at this time. We expect to fix these problems in a future release.
 .PP
@@ -412,9 +412,9 @@ This property holds whether the dock window is resizeable.
 .PP
 A resizeable dock window can be resized using splitter-like handles inside a dock area and like every other top level window when floating.
 .PP
-A dock window is both horizontally and vertically stretchable if you call setResizeEnabled(TRUE).
+A dock window is both horizontally and vertically stretchable if you call setResizeEnabled(true).
 .PP
-This property is FALSE by default.
+This property is false by default.
 .PP
 See also verticallyStretchable and horizontallyStretchable.
 .PP
@@ -428,19 +428,19 @@ See also resizeEnabled.
 .PP
 Bugs and limitations:
 .TP
-Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
+Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(true) to get proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
 .PP
 Get this property's value with isStretchable().
 .SH "bool verticallyStretchable"
 This property holds whether the dock window is vertically stretchable.
 .PP
-A dock window is vertically stretchable if you call setVerticallyStretchable(TRUE) or setResizeEnabled(TRUE).
+A dock window is vertically stretchable if you call setVerticallyStretchable(true) or setResizeEnabled(true).
 .PP
 See also resizeEnabled.
 .PP
 Bugs and limitations:
 .TP
-Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
+Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(true) to get proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setVerticallyStretchable() and get this property's value with isVerticallyStretchable().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdomattr.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdomattr.3qt
index 63b1eca34..8e7a235af 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdomattr.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdomattr.3qt
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ You can access the attributes of an element with code like this:
 .PP
 This example also shows that changing an attribute received from an element changes the attribute of the element. If you do not want to change the value of the element's attribute you must use cloneNode() to get an independent copy of the attribute.
 .PP
-TQDomAttr can return the name() and value() of an attribute. An attribute's value is set with setValue(). If specified() returns TRUE the value was either set in the document or set with setValue(); otherwise the value hasn't been set. The node this attribute is attached to (if any) is returned by ownerElement().
+TQDomAttr can return the name() and value() of an attribute. An attribute's value is set with setValue(). If specified() returns true the value was either set in the document or set with setValue(); otherwise the value hasn't been set. The node this attribute is attached to (if any) is returned by ownerElement().
 .PP
 For further information about the Document Object Model see http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-DOM-Level-1/ and http://www.w3.org/TR/DOM-Level-2-Core/. For a more general introduction of the DOM implementation see the TQDomDocument documentation.
 .PP
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ The data of the copy is shared (shallow copy): modifying one node will also chan
 .SH "TQDomAttr::~TQDomAttr ()"
 Destroys the object and frees its resources.
 .SH "bool TQDomAttr::isAttr () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE.
+Returns true.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQDomNode.
 .SH "TQString TQDomAttr::name () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Sets the attribute's value to \fIv\fR.
 .PP
 See also value().
 .SH "bool TQDomAttr::specified () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the attribute has either been expicitly specified in the XML document or was set by the user with setValue(). Returns FALSE if the value hasn't been specified or set.
+Returns true if the attribute has either been expicitly specified in the XML document or was set by the user with setValue(). Returns false if the value hasn't been specified or set.
 .PP
 See also setValue().
 .SH "TQString TQDomAttr::value () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdomcdatasection.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdomcdatasection.3qt
index 87bae8ce6..2942b3496 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdomcdatasection.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdomcdatasection.3qt
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ The data of the copy is shared (shallow copy): modifying one node will also chan
 .SH "TQDomCDATASection::~TQDomCDATASection ()"
 Destroys the object and frees its resources.
 .SH "bool TQDomCDATASection::isCDATASection () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE.
+Returns true.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQDomNode.
 .SH "TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomCDATASection::nodeType () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdomcharacterdata.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdomcharacterdata.3qt
index 40511624b..b2938a5f0 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdomcharacterdata.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdomcharacterdata.3qt
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Deletes a substring of length \fIcount\fR from position \fIoffset\fR.
 .SH "void TQDomCharacterData::insertData ( unsigned long offset, const TQString & arg )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Inserts the string \fIarg\fR into the stored string at position \fIoffset\fR.
 .SH "bool TQDomCharacterData::isCharacterData () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE.
+Returns true.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQDomNode.
 .SH "uint TQDomCharacterData::length () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdomcomment.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdomcomment.3qt
index ca1a3dc0c..3b9004e70 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdomcomment.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdomcomment.3qt
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ The data of the copy is shared (shallow copy): modifying one node will also chan
 .SH "TQDomComment::~TQDomComment ()"
 Destroys the object and frees its resources.
 .SH "bool TQDomComment::isComment () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE.
+Returns true.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQDomNode.
 .SH "TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomComment::nodeType () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdomdocument.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdomdocument.3qt
index 33813c7b5..6dad6fc06 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdomdocument.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdomdocument.3qt
@@ -322,18 +322,18 @@ Imports the node \fIimportedNode\fR from another document to this document. \fIi
 .PP
 This function returns the imported node that belongs to this document. The returned node has no parent. It is not possible to import TQDomDocument and TQDomDocumentType nodes. In those cases this function returns a null node.
 .PP
-If \fIdeep\fR is TRUE, this function imports not only the node \fIimportedNode\fR but its whole subtree; if it is FALSE, only the \fIimportedNode\fR is imported. The argument \fIdeep\fR has no effect on TQDomAttr and TQDomEntityReference nodes, since the descendents of TQDomAttr nodes are always imported and those of TQDomEntityReference nodes are never imported.
+If \fIdeep\fR is true, this function imports not only the node \fIimportedNode\fR but its whole subtree; if it is false, only the \fIimportedNode\fR is imported. The argument \fIdeep\fR has no effect on TQDomAttr and TQDomEntityReference nodes, since the descendents of TQDomAttr nodes are always imported and those of TQDomEntityReference nodes are never imported.
 .PP
 The behavior of this function is slightly different depending on the node types: <center>.nf
 .TS
-l - l. Node Type Behaviour TQDomAttr The owner element is set to 0 and the specified flag is set to TRUE in the generated attribute. The whole subtree of \fIimportedNode\fR is always imported for attribute nodes: \fIdeep\fR has no effect. TQDomDocument Document nodes cannot be imported. TQDomDocumentFragment If \fIdeep\fR is TRUE, this function imports the whole document fragment; otherwise it only generates an empty document fragment. TQDomDocumentType Document type nodes cannot be imported. TQDomElement Attributes for which TQDomAttr::specified() is TRUE are also imported, other attributes are not imported. If \fIdeep\fR is TRUE, this function also imports the subtree of \fIimportedNode\fR; otherwise it imports only the element node (and some attributes, see above). TQDomEntity Entity nodes can be imported, but at the moment there is no way to use them since the document type is read-only in DOM level 2. TQDomEntityReference Descendents of entity reference nodes are never imported: \fIdeep\fR has no effect. TQDomNotation Notation nodes can be imported, but at the moment there is no way to use them since the document type is read-only in DOM level 2. TQDomProcessingInstruction The target and value of the processing instruction is copied to the new node. TQDomText The text is copied to the new node. TQDomCDATASection The text is copied to the new node. TQDomComment
+l - l. Node Type Behaviour TQDomAttr The owner element is set to 0 and the specified flag is set to true in the generated attribute. The whole subtree of \fIimportedNode\fR is always imported for attribute nodes: \fIdeep\fR has no effect. TQDomDocument Document nodes cannot be imported. TQDomDocumentFragment If \fIdeep\fR is true, this function imports the whole document fragment; otherwise it only generates an empty document fragment. TQDomDocumentType Document type nodes cannot be imported. TQDomElement Attributes for which TQDomAttr::specified() is true are also imported, other attributes are not imported. If \fIdeep\fR is true, this function also imports the subtree of \fIimportedNode\fR; otherwise it imports only the element node (and some attributes, see above). TQDomEntity Entity nodes can be imported, but at the moment there is no way to use them since the document type is read-only in DOM level 2. TQDomEntityReference Descendents of entity reference nodes are never imported: \fIdeep\fR has no effect. TQDomNotation Notation nodes can be imported, but at the moment there is no way to use them since the document type is read-only in DOM level 2. TQDomProcessingInstruction The target and value of the processing instruction is copied to the new node. TQDomText The text is copied to the new node. TQDomCDATASection The text is copied to the new node. TQDomComment
 .TE
 .fi
 </center>
 .PP
 See also TQDomElement::setAttribute(), TQDomNode::insertBefore(), TQDomNode::insertAfter(), TQDomNode::replaceChild(), TQDomNode::removeChild(), and TQDomNode::appendChild().
 .SH "bool TQDomDocument::isDocument () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE.
+Returns true.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQDomNode.
 .SH "TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomDocument::nodeType () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -347,13 +347,13 @@ The data of the copy is shared (shallow copy): modifying one node will also chan
 .SH "bool TQDomDocument::setContent ( const TQByteArray & buffer, bool namespaceProcessing, TQString * errorMsg = 0, int * errorLine = 0, int * errorColumn = 0 )"
 This function parses the XML document from the byte array \fIbuffer\fR and sets it as the content of the document. It tries to detect the encoding of the document as required by the XML specification.
 .PP
-If \fInamespaceProcessing\fR is TRUE, the parser recognizes namespaces in the XML file and sets the prefix name, local name and namespace URI to appropriate values. If \fInamespaceProcessing\fR is FALSE, the parser does no namespace processing when it reads the XML file.
+If \fInamespaceProcessing\fR is true, the parser recognizes namespaces in the XML file and sets the prefix name, local name and namespace URI to appropriate values. If \fInamespaceProcessing\fR is false, the parser does no namespace processing when it reads the XML file.
 .PP
-If a parse error occurs, the function returns FALSE; otherwise it returns TRUE. If a parse error occurs and \fIerrorMsg\fR, \fIerrorLine\fR and \fIerrorColumn\fR are not 0, the error message is placed in \fI*errorMsg\fR, the line number \fI*errorLine\fR and the column number in \fI*errorColumn\fR.
+If a parse error occurs, the function returns false; otherwise it returns true. If a parse error occurs and \fIerrorMsg\fR, \fIerrorLine\fR and \fIerrorColumn\fR are not 0, the error message is placed in \fI*errorMsg\fR, the line number \fI*errorLine\fR and the column number in \fI*errorColumn\fR.
 .PP
-If \fInamespaceProcessing\fR is TRUE, the function TQDomNode::prefix() returns a string for all elements and attributes. It returns an empty string if the element or attribute has no prefix.
+If \fInamespaceProcessing\fR is true, the function TQDomNode::prefix() returns a string for all elements and attributes. It returns an empty string if the element or attribute has no prefix.
 .PP
-If \fInamespaceProcessing\fR is FALSE, the functions TQDomNode::prefix(), TQDomNode::localName() and TQDomNode::namespaceURI() return TQString::null.
+If \fInamespaceProcessing\fR is false, the functions TQDomNode::prefix(), TQDomNode::localName() and TQDomNode::namespaceURI() return TQString::null.
 .PP
 See also TQDomNode::namespaceURI(), TQDomNode::localName(), TQDomNode::prefix(), TQString::isNull(), and TQString::isEmpty().
 .SH "bool TQDomDocument::setContent ( const TQCString & buffer, bool namespaceProcessing, TQString * errorMsg = 0, int * errorLine = 0, int * errorColumn = 0 )"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdomelement.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdomelement.3qt
index e65d140e2..30695aea4 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdomelement.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdomelement.3qt
@@ -209,11 +209,11 @@ Returns a TQDomNodeList containing all the descendent elements of this element w
 .PP
 See also elementsByTagName() and TQDomDocument::elementsByTagNameNS().
 .SH "bool TQDomElement::hasAttribute ( const TQString & name ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this element has an attribute called \fIname\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this element has an attribute called \fIname\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQDomElement::hasAttributeNS ( const TQString & nsURI, const TQString & localName ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this element has an attribute with the local name \fIlocalName\fR and the namespace URI \fInsURI\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this element has an attribute with the local name \fIlocalName\fR and the namespace URI \fInsURI\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQDomElement::isElement () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE.
+Returns true.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQDomNode.
 .SH "TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomElement::nodeType () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdomentity.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdomentity.3qt
index 2025b8530..44d02f6f5 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdomentity.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdomentity.3qt
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ The data of the copy is shared (shallow copy): modifying one node will also chan
 .SH "TQDomEntity::~TQDomEntity ()"
 Destroys the object and frees its resources.
 .SH "bool TQDomEntity::isEntity () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE.
+Returns true.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQDomNode.
 .SH "TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomEntity::nodeType () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdomentityreference.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdomentityreference.3qt
index 1052ebd22..c8ed28d8b 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdomentityreference.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdomentityreference.3qt
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ The data of the copy is shared (shallow copy): modifying one node will also chan
 .SH "TQDomEntityReference::~TQDomEntityReference ()"
 Destroys the object and frees its resources.
 .SH "bool TQDomEntityReference::isEntityReference () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE.
+Returns true.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQDomNode.
 .SH "TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomEntityReference::nodeType () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdomimplementation.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdomimplementation.3qt
index 0e4bdb612..abe7f4a18 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdomimplementation.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdomimplementation.3qt
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ The only way you can use a document type that was created this way, is in combin
 .PP
 See also createDocument().
 .SH "bool TQDomImplementation::hasFeature ( const TQString & feature, const TQString & version )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-The function returns TRUE if TQDom implements the requested \fIversion\fR of a \fIfeature\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+The function returns true if TQDom implements the requested \fIversion\fR of a \fIfeature\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The currently supported features and their versions: <center>.nf
 .TS
@@ -91,14 +91,14 @@ l - l. Feature Version XML
 .fi
 </center>
 .SH "bool TQDomImplementation::isNull ()"
-Returns FALSE if the object was created by TQDomDocument::implementation(); otherwise returns TRUE.
+Returns false if the object was created by TQDomDocument::implementation(); otherwise returns true.
 .SH "bool TQDomImplementation::operator!= ( const TQDomImplementation & x ) const"
-Returns TRUE if \fIx\fR and this DOM implementation object were created from different TQDomDocuments; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIx\fR and this DOM implementation object were created from different TQDomDocuments; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQDomImplementation & TQDomImplementation::operator= ( const TQDomImplementation & x )"
 Assigns \fIx\fR to this DOM implementation.
 .SH "bool TQDomImplementation::operator== ( const TQDomImplementation & x ) const"
-Returns TRUE if \fIx\fR and this DOM implementation object were
-created from the same TQDomDocument; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIx\fR and this DOM implementation object were
+created from the same TQDomDocument; otherwise returns false.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 .BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqdomimplementation.html
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdomnamednodemap.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdomnamednodemap.3qt
index a9473f1e6..c09efaca3 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdomnamednodemap.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdomnamednodemap.3qt
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Constructs a copy of \fIn\fR.
 .SH "TQDomNamedNodeMap::~TQDomNamedNodeMap ()"
 Destroys the object and frees its resources.
 .SH "bool TQDomNamedNodeMap::contains ( const TQString & name ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the map contains a node called \fIname\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the map contains a node called \fIname\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "uint TQDomNamedNodeMap::count () const"
 Returns the number of nodes in the map.
 .PP
@@ -118,11 +118,11 @@ If the map does not contain such a node, a null node is returned.
 .PP
 See also setNamedItemNS() and namedItem().
 .SH "bool TQDomNamedNodeMap::operator!= ( const TQDomNamedNodeMap & n ) const"
-Returns TRUE if \fIn\fR and this named node map are not equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIn\fR and this named node map are not equal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQDomNamedNodeMap & TQDomNamedNodeMap::operator= ( const TQDomNamedNodeMap & n )"
 Assigns \fIn\fR to this named node map.
 .SH "bool TQDomNamedNodeMap::operator== ( const TQDomNamedNodeMap & n ) const"
-Returns TRUE if \fIn\fR and this named node map are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIn\fR and this named node map are equal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQDomNode TQDomNamedNodeMap::removeNamedItem ( const TQString & name )"
 Removes the node called \fIname\fR from the map.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdomnode.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdomnode.3qt
index cf59170eb..89c245d91 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdomnode.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdomnode.3qt
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Inherited by TQDomDocumentType, TQDomDocument, TQDomDocumentFragment, TQDomChara
 .BI "virtual bool \fBhasChildNodes\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual TQDomNode \fBcloneNode\fR ( bool deep = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "virtual TQDomNode \fBcloneNode\fR ( bool deep = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBnormalize\fR ()"
@@ -356,10 +356,10 @@ See also firstChild() and lastChild().
 Converts the node into a null node; if it was not a null node before, its type and contents are deleted.
 .PP
 See also isNull().
-.SH "TQDomNode TQDomNode::cloneNode ( bool deep = TRUE ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQDomNode TQDomNode::cloneNode ( bool deep = true ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Creates a deep (not shallow) copy of the TQDomNode.
 .PP
-If \fIdeep\fR is TRUE, then the cloning is done recursively which means that all the node's children are deep copied too. If \fIdeep\fR is FALSE only the node itself is copied and the copy will have no child nodes.
+If \fIdeep\fR is true, then the cloning is done recursively which means that all the node's children are deep copied too. If \fIdeep\fR is false only the node itself is copied and the copy will have no child nodes.
 .SH "TQDomNode TQDomNode::firstChild () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the first child of the node. If there is no child node, a null node is returned. Changing the returned node will also change the node in the document tree.
 .PP
@@ -367,11 +367,11 @@ See also lastChild() and childNodes().
 .PP
 Example: xml/outliner/outlinetree.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::hasAttributes () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the node has attributes; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the node has attributes; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also attributes().
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::hasChildNodes () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the node has one or more children; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the node has one or more children; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQDomNode TQDomNode::insertAfter ( const TQDomNode & newChild, const TQDomNode & refChild )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Inserts the node \fInewChild\fR after the child node \fIrefChild\fR. \fIrefChild\fR must be a direct child of this node. If \fIrefChild\fR is null then \fInewChild\fR is appended as this node's last child.
 .PP
@@ -393,65 +393,65 @@ Returns a new reference to \fInewChild\fR on success or a null node on failure.
 .PP
 See also insertAfter(), replaceChild(), removeChild(), and appendChild().
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::isAttr () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the node is an attribute; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the node is an attribute; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomAttribute; you can get the TQDomAttribute with toAttribute().
+If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomAttribute; you can get the TQDomAttribute with toAttribute().
 .PP
 See also toAttr().
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQDomAttr.
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::isCDATASection () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the node is a CDATA section; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the node is a CDATA section; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomCDATASection; you can get the TQDomCDATASection with toCDATASection().
+If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomCDATASection; you can get the TQDomCDATASection with toCDATASection().
 .PP
 See also toCDATASection().
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQDomCDATASection.
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::isCharacterData () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the node is a character data node; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the node is a character data node; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomCharacterData; you can get the TQDomCharacterData with toCharacterData().
+If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomCharacterData; you can get the TQDomCharacterData with toCharacterData().
 .PP
 See also toCharacterData().
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQDomCharacterData.
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::isComment () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the node is a comment; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the node is a comment; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomComment; you can get the TQDomComment with toComment().
+If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomComment; you can get the TQDomComment with toComment().
 .PP
 See also toComment().
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQDomComment.
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::isDocument () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the node is a document; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the node is a document; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomDocument; you can get the TQDomDocument with toDocument().
+If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomDocument; you can get the TQDomDocument with toDocument().
 .PP
 See also toDocument().
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQDomDocument.
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::isDocumentFragment () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the node is a document fragment; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the node is a document fragment; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomDocumentFragment; you can get the TQDomDocumentFragment with toDocumentFragment().
+If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomDocumentFragment; you can get the TQDomDocumentFragment with toDocumentFragment().
 .PP
 See also toDocumentFragment().
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQDomDocumentFragment.
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::isDocumentType () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the node is a document type; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the node is a document type; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomDocumentType; you can get the TQDomDocumentType with toDocumentType().
+If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomDocumentType; you can get the TQDomDocumentType with toDocumentType().
 .PP
 See also toDocumentType().
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQDomDocumentType.
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::isElement () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the node is an element; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the node is an element; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomElement; you can get the TQDomElement with toElement().
+If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomElement; you can get the TQDomElement with toElement().
 .PP
 See also toElement().
 .PP
@@ -459,49 +459,49 @@ Example: xml/outliner/outlinetree.cpp.
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQDomElement.
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::isEntity () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the node is an entity; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the node is an entity; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomEntity; you can get the TQDomEntity with toEntity().
+If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomEntity; you can get the TQDomEntity with toEntity().
 .PP
 See also toEntity().
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQDomEntity.
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::isEntityReference () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the node is an entity reference; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the node is an entity reference; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomEntityReference; you can get the TQDomEntityReference with toEntityReference().
+If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomEntityReference; you can get the TQDomEntityReference with toEntityReference().
 .PP
 See also toEntityReference().
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQDomEntityReference.
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::isNotation () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the node is a notation; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the node is a notation; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomNotation; you can get the TQDomNotation with toNotation().
+If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomNotation; you can get the TQDomNotation with toNotation().
 .PP
 See also toNotation().
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQDomNotation.
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if this node is null (i.e. if it has no type or contents); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this node is null (i.e. if it has no type or contents); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Example: xml/outliner/outlinetree.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::isProcessingInstruction () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the node is a processing instruction; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the node is a processing instruction; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomProcessingInstruction; you can get the TQProcessingInstruction with toProcessingInstruction().
+If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomProcessingInstruction; you can get the TQProcessingInstruction with toProcessingInstruction().
 .PP
 See also toProcessingInstruction().
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQDomProcessingInstruction.
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::isSupported ( const TQString & feature, const TQString & version ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the DOM implementation implements the feature \fIfeature\fR and this feature is supported by this node in the version \fIversion\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the DOM implementation implements the feature \fIfeature\fR and this feature is supported by this node in the version \fIversion\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQDomImplementation::hasFeature().
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::isText () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the node is a text node; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the node is a text node; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If this function returns TRUE, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomText; you can get the TQDomText with toText().
+If this function returns true, it does not imply that this object is a TQDomText; you can get the TQDomText with toText().
 .PP
 See also toText().
 .PP
@@ -584,17 +584,17 @@ Example: xml/outliner/outlinetree.cpp.
 .SH "void TQDomNode::normalize ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Calling normalize() on an element converts all its children into a standard form. This means that adjacent TQDomText objects will be merged into a single text object (TQDomCDATASection nodes are not merged).
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::operator!= ( const TQDomNode & n ) const"
-Returns TRUE if \fIn\fR and this DOM node are not equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIn\fR and this DOM node are not equal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQDomNode & TQDomNode::operator= ( const TQDomNode & n )"
 Assigns a copy of \fIn\fR to this DOM node.
 .PP
 The data of the copy is shared (shallow copy): modifying one node will also change the other. If you want to make a deep copy, use cloneNode().
 .SH "bool TQDomNode::operator== ( const TQDomNode & n ) const"
-Returns TRUE if \fIn\fR and this DOM node are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIn\fR and this DOM node are equal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQDomDocument TQDomNode::ownerDocument () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the document to which this node belongs.
 .SH "TQDomNode TQDomNode::parentNode () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns the parent node. If this node has no parent, a null node is returned (i.e. a node for which isNull() returns TRUE).
+Returns the parent node. If this node has no parent, a null node is returned (i.e. a node for which isNull() returns true).
 .SH "TQString TQDomNode::prefix () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the namespace prefix of the node or TQString::null if the node has no namespace prefix.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdomnodelist.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdomnodelist.3qt
index 8eabffdef..48c29da4f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdomnodelist.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdomnodelist.3qt
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ This function is the same as length().
 .SH "TQDomNode TQDomNodeList::item ( int index ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the node at position \fIindex\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIindex\fR is negative or if \fIindex\fR >= length() then a null node is returned (i.e. a node for which TQDomNode::isNull() returns TRUE).
+If \fIindex\fR is negative or if \fIindex\fR >= length() then a null node is returned (i.e. a node for which TQDomNode::isNull() returns true).
 .PP
 See also count().
 .SH "uint TQDomNodeList::length () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -75,12 +75,12 @@ Returns the number of nodes in the list.
 .PP
 This function is the same as count().
 .SH "bool TQDomNodeList::operator!= ( const TQDomNodeList & n ) const"
-Returns TRUE the node list \fIn\fR and this node list are not equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true the node list \fIn\fR and this node list are not equal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQDomNodeList & TQDomNodeList::operator= ( const TQDomNodeList & n )"
 Assigns \fIn\fR to this node list.
 .SH "bool TQDomNodeList::operator== ( const TQDomNodeList & n ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the node list \fIn\fR and this node list are equal;
-otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the node list \fIn\fR and this node list are equal;
+otherwise returns false.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 .BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqdomnodelist.html
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdomnotation.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdomnotation.3qt
index 1364b0fca..28d088893 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdomnotation.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdomnotation.3qt
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ The data of the copy is shared (shallow copy): modifying one node will also chan
 .SH "TQDomNotation::~TQDomNotation ()"
 Destroys the object and frees its resources.
 .SH "bool TQDomNotation::isNotation () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE.
+Returns true.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQDomNode.
 .SH "TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomNotation::nodeType () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdomprocessinginstruction.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdomprocessinginstruction.3qt
index ae5920c41..2570696db 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdomprocessinginstruction.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdomprocessinginstruction.3qt
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Returns the content of this processing instruction.
 .PP
 See also setData() and target().
 .SH "bool TQDomProcessingInstruction::isProcessingInstruction () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE.
+Returns true.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQDomNode.
 .SH "TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomProcessingInstruction::nodeType () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdomtext.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdomtext.3qt
index ace765c51..c0b19672b 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdomtext.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdomtext.3qt
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ The data of the copy is shared (shallow copy): modifying one node will also chan
 .SH "TQDomText::~TQDomText ()"
 Destroys the object and frees its resources.
 .SH "bool TQDomText::isText () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE.
+Returns true.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQDomNode.
 .SH "TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomText::nodeType () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdragobject.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdragobject.3qt
index 4dc6db558..fcb891a8e 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdragobject.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdragobject.3qt
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ Destroys the drag object, canceling any drag and drop operation in which it is i
 .SH "bool TQDragObject::drag ()"
 Starts a drag operation using the contents of this object, using DragDefault mode.
 .PP
-The function returns TRUE if the caller should delete the original copy of the dragged data (but see target()); otherwise returns FALSE.
+The function returns true if the caller should delete the original copy of the dragged data (but see target()); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If the drag contains \fIreferences\fR to information (e.g. file names in a TQUriDrag are references) then the return value should always be ignored, as the target is expected to manipulate the referred-to content directly. On X11 the return value should always be correct anyway, but on Windows this is not necessarily the case (e.g. the file manager starts a background process to move files, so the source \fImust not\fR delete the files!)
 .PP
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Starts a drag operation using the contents of this object.
 .PP
 At this point, the object becomes owned by Qt, not the application. You should not delete the drag object or anything it references. The actual transfer of data to the target application will be done during future event processing - after that time the drag object will be deleted.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the dragged data was dragged as a \fImove\fR, indicating that the caller should remove the original source of the data (the drag object must continue to have a copy); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the dragged data was dragged as a \fImove\fR, indicating that the caller should remove the original source of the data (the drag object must continue to have a copy); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The \fImode\fR specifies the drag mode (see TQDragObject::DragMode.) Normally one of the simpler drag(), dragMove(), or dragCopy() functions would be used instead.
 .SH "void TQDragObject::dragCopy ()"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdropevent.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdropevent.3qt
index 081050287..1de54c20b 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqdropevent.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdropevent.3qt
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Inherited by TQDragMoveEvent.
 .BI "bool \fBisAccepted\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBaccept\fR ( bool y = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBaccept\fR ( bool y = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBignore\fR ()"
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ Inherited by TQDragMoveEvent.
 .BI "bool \fBisActionAccepted\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBacceptAction\fR ( bool y = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBacceptAction\fR ( bool y = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "enum \fBAction\fR { Copy, Link, Move, Private, UserAction = 100 }"
@@ -92,14 +92,14 @@ The Link and Move actions only makes sense if the data is a reference, for examp
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "TQDropEvent::TQDropEvent ( const TQPoint & pos, Type typ = Drop )"
 Constructs a drop event that drops a drop of type \fItyp\fR on point \fIpos\fR.
-.SH "void TQDropEvent::accept ( bool y = TRUE )"
-Call this function to indicate whether the event provided data which your widget processed. Set \fIy\fR to TRUE (the default) if your widget could process the data, otherwise set \fIy\fR to FALSE. To get the data, use encodedData(), or preferably, the decode() methods of existing TQDragObject subclasses, such as TQTextDrag::decode(), or your own subclasses.
+.SH "void TQDropEvent::accept ( bool y = true )"
+Call this function to indicate whether the event provided data which your widget processed. Set \fIy\fR to true (the default) if your widget could process the data, otherwise set \fIy\fR to false. To get the data, use encodedData(), or preferably, the decode() methods of existing TQDragObject subclasses, such as TQTextDrag::decode(), or your own subclasses.
 .PP
 See also acceptAction().
 .PP
 Example: iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
-.SH "void TQDropEvent::acceptAction ( bool y = TRUE )"
-Call this to indicate that the action described by action() is accepted (i.e. if \fIy\fR is TRUE, which is the default), not merely the default copy action. If you call acceptAction(TRUE), there is no need to also call accept(TRUE).
+.SH "void TQDropEvent::acceptAction ( bool y = true )"
+Call this to indicate that the action described by action() is accepted (i.e. if \fIy\fR is true, which is the default), not merely the default copy action. If you call acceptAction(true), there is no need to also call accept(true).
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l dirview/dirview.cpp and fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
@@ -137,15 +137,15 @@ The opposite of accept(), i.e. you have ignored the drop event.
 .PP
 Example: fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQDropEvent::isAccepted () const"
-Returns TRUE if the drop target accepts the event; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the drop target accepts the event; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQDropEvent::isActionAccepted () const"
-Returns TRUE if the drop action was accepted by the drop site; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the drop action was accepted by the drop site; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "const TQPoint & TQDropEvent::pos () const"
 Returns the position where the drop was made.
 .PP
 Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQDropEvent::provides ( const char * mimeType ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if this event provides format \fImimeType\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this event provides format \fImimeType\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also data().
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqevent.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqevent.3qt
index ba1272dab..5b78c53a5 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqevent.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqevent.3qt
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ The TQEvent class is the base class of all event classes. Event objects contain
 .PP
 Qt's main event loop (TQApplication::exec()) fetches native window system events from the event queue, translates them into TQEvents and sends the translated events to TQObjects.
 .PP
-In general, events come from the underlying window system (spontaneous() returns TRUE) but it is also possible to manually send events using TQApplication::sendEvent() and TQApplication::postEvent() (spontaneous() returns FALSE).
+In general, events come from the underlying window system (spontaneous() returns true) but it is also possible to manually send events using TQApplication::sendEvent() and TQApplication::postEvent() (spontaneous() returns false).
 .PP
 TQObjects receive events by having their TQObject::event() function called. The function can be reimplemented in subclasses to customize event handling and add additional event types; TQWidget::event() is a notable example. By default, events are dispatched to event handlers like TQObject::timerEvent() and TQWidget::mouseMoveEvent(). TQObject::installEventFilter() allows an object to intercept events destined for another object.
 .PP
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ Contructs an event object of type \fItype\fR.
 .SH "TQEvent::~TQEvent ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Destroys the event. If it was posted, it will be removed from the list of events to be posted.
 .SH "bool TQEvent::spontaneous () const"
-Returns TRUE if the event originated outside the application, i.e. it is a system event; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the event originated outside the application, i.e. it is a system event; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "Type TQEvent::type () const"
 Returns the event type.
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqeventloop.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqeventloop.3qt
index 37e9e878d..763dab96e 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqeventloop.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqeventloop.3qt
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ See also TQApplication::quit() and exec().
 .SH "void TQEventLoop::exitLoop ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This function exits from a recursive call to the main event loop. Do not call it unless you really know what you are doing.
 .SH "bool TQEventLoop::hasPendingEvents () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if there is an event waiting, otherwise it returns FALSE.
+Returns true if there is an event waiting, otherwise it returns false.
 .SH "int TQEventLoop::loopLevel () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the current loop level.
 .SH "void TQEventLoop::processEvents ( ProcessEventsFlags flags, int maxTime )"
@@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ If the WaitForMore flag is \fInot\fR set in \fIflags\fR, and no events are avail
 .PP
 NOTE: This function will not process events continuously; it returns after all available events are processed.
 .PP
-This function returns TRUE if an event was processed; otherwise it returns FALSE.
+This function returns true if an event was processed; otherwise it returns false.
 .PP
 See also ProcessEvents and hasPendingEvents().
 .SH "void TQEventLoop::registerSocketNotifier ( TQSocketNotifier * notifier )\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqfile.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqfile.3qt
index c18c09573..5e3c8a710 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqfile.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqfile.3qt
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ The file name is usually passed in the constructor but can be changed with setNa
 .PP
 The file is opened with open(), closed with close() and flushed with flush(). Data is usually read and written using TQDataStream or TQTextStream, but you can read with readBlock() and readLine() and write with writeBlock(). TQFile also supports getch(), ungetch() and putch().
 .PP
-The size of the file is returned by size(). You can get the current file position or move to a new file position using the at() functions. If you've reached the end of the file, atEnd() returns TRUE. The file handle is returned by handle().
+The size of the file is returned by size(). You can get the current file position or move to a new file position using the at() functions. If you've reached the end of the file, atEnd() returns true. The file handle is returned by handle().
 .PP
 Here is a code fragment that uses TQTextStream to read a text file line by line. It prints each line with a line number.
 .PP
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ See also setName().
 .SH "TQFile::~TQFile ()"
 Destroys a TQFile. Calls close().
 .SH "bool TQFile::atEnd () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the end of file has been reached; otherwise returns FALSE. If TQFile has not been open()'d, then the behavior is undefined.
+Returns true if the end of file has been reached; otherwise returns false. If TQFile has not been open()'d, then the behavior is undefined.
 .PP
 See also size().
 .PP
@@ -270,14 +270,14 @@ The returned strings are not translated with the TQObject::tr() or TQApplication
 .PP
 See also TQIODevice::status(), TQIODevice::resetStatus(), and setErrorString().
 .SH "bool TQFile::exists ( const TQString & fileName )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the file given by \fIfileName\fR exists; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the file given by \fIfileName\fR exists; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l chart/chartform.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, and helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQFile::exists () const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if this file exists; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this file exists; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also name().
 .SH "void TQFile::flush ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Returns the name set by setName().
 .PP
 See also setName() and TQFileInfo::fileName().
 .SH "bool TQFile::open ( int m )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Opens the file specified by the file name currently set, using the mode \fIm\fR. Returns TRUE if successful, otherwise FALSE.
+Opens the file specified by the file name currently set, using the mode \fIm\fR. Returns true if successful, otherwise false.
 .PP
 
 .PP
@@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
 .SH "bool TQFile::open ( int m, FILE * f )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Opens a file in the mode \fIm\fR using an existing file handle \fIf\fR. Returns TRUE if successful, otherwise FALSE.
+Opens a file in the mode \fIm\fR using an existing file handle \fIf\fR. Returns true if successful, otherwise false.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
@@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ See also close().
 .SH "bool TQFile::open ( int m, int f )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Opens a file in the mode \fIm\fR using an existing file descriptor \fIf\fR. Returns TRUE if successful, otherwise FALSE.
+Opens a file in the mode \fIm\fR using an existing file descriptor \fIf\fR. Returns true if successful, otherwise false.
 .PP
 When a TQFile is opened using this function, close() does not actually close the file.
 .PP
@@ -430,13 +430,13 @@ Note that the string is read as plain Latin1 bytes, not Unicode.
 .PP
 See also readBlock() and TQTextStream::readLine().
 .SH "bool TQFile::remove ()"
-Removes the file specified by the file name currently set. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Removes the file specified by the file name currently set. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The file is closed before it is removed.
 .SH "bool TQFile::remove ( const TQString & fileName )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Removes the file \fIfileName\fR. Returns TRUE if successful, otherwise FALSE.
+Removes the file \fIfileName\fR. Returns true if successful, otherwise false.
 .SH "void TQFile::setDecodingFunction ( DecoderFn f )\fC [static]\fR"
 \fBWarning:\fR This function is \fInot\fR reentrant.</p>
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqfiledialog.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqfiledialog.3qt
index 1ea10a2db..104c3bae7 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqfiledialog.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqfiledialog.3qt
@@ -16,10 +16,10 @@ Inherits TQDialog.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQFileDialog\fR ( const TQString & dirName, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQFileDialog\fR ( const TQString & dirName, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQFileDialog\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQFileDialog\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fB~TQFileDialog\fR ()"
@@ -160,16 +160,16 @@ Inherits TQDialog.
 .SS "Static Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQString \fBgetOpenFileName\fR ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )"
+.BI "TQString \fBgetOpenFileName\fR ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQString \fBgetSaveFileName\fR ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )"
+.BI "TQString \fBgetSaveFileName\fR ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQString \fBgetExistingDirectory\fR ( const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, bool dirOnly = TRUE, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )"
+.BI "TQString \fBgetExistingDirectory\fR ( const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, bool dirOnly = true, bool resolveSymlinks = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQStringList \fBgetOpenFileNames\fR ( const TQString & filter = TQString::null, const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )"
+.BI "TQStringList \fBgetOpenFileNames\fR ( const TQString & filter = TQString::null, const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBsetIconProvider\fR ( TQFileIconProvider * provider )"
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Inherits TQDialog.
 .BI "void \fBaddWidgets\fR ( TQLabel * l, TQWidget * w, TQPushButton * b )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBaddToolButton\fR ( TQButton * b, bool separator = FALSE )"
+.BI "void \fBaddToolButton\fR ( TQButton * b, bool separator = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBaddLeftWidget\fR ( TQWidget * w )"
@@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ You can create your own TQFileDialog without using the static functions. By call
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-    TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this, "file dialog", TRUE );
+    TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this, "file dialog", true );
 .br
     fd->setMode( TQFileDialog::AnyFile );
 .br
@@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Inside the class we reimplement TQFilePreview::previewUrl(), this is where we de
 .br
     TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this );
 .br
-    fd->setContentsPreviewEnabled( TRUE );
+    fd->setContentsPreviewEnabled( true );
 .br
     fd->setContentsPreview( p, p );
 .br
@@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ Inside the class we reimplement TQFilePreview::previewUrl(), this is where we de
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-The first line creates an instance of our preview widget. We then create our file dialog and call setContentsPreviewEnabled( TRUE ), this tell the file dialog to preview the contents of the currently selected file. We then call setContentsPreview() -- note that we pass the same preview widget twice. Finally, before showing the file dialog, we call setPreviewMode() setting the mode to \fIContents\fR which will show the contents preview of the file that the user has selected.
+The first line creates an instance of our preview widget. We then create our file dialog and call setContentsPreviewEnabled( true ), this tell the file dialog to preview the contents of the currently selected file. We then call setContentsPreview() -- note that we pass the same preview widget twice. Finally, before showing the file dialog, we call setPreviewMode() setting the mode to \fIContents\fR which will show the contents preview of the file that the user has selected.
 .PP
 If you create another preview widget that is used for displaying information about a file, create it in the same way as the contents preview widget and call setInfoPreviewEnabled(), and setInfoPreview(). Then the user will be able to switch between the two preview modes.
 .PP
@@ -411,12 +411,12 @@ This enum describes the view mode of the file dialog, i.e. what information abou
 .PP
 See setViewMode().
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog ( const TQString & dirName, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE )"
-Constructs a file dialog called \fIname\fR with the parent, \fIparent\fR. If \fImodal\fR is TRUE then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is modeless.
+.SH "TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog ( const TQString & dirName, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false )"
+Constructs a file dialog called \fIname\fR with the parent, \fIparent\fR. If \fImodal\fR is true then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is modeless.
 .PP
 If \fIdirName\fR is specified then it will be used as the dialog's working directory, i.e. it will be the directory that is shown when the dialog appears. If \fIfilter\fR is specified it will be used as the dialog's file filter.
-.SH "TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE )"
-Constructs a file dialog called \fIname\fR, with the parent, \fIparent\fR. If \fImodal\fR is TRUE then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is modeless.
+.SH "TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false )"
+Constructs a file dialog called \fIname\fR, with the parent, \fIparent\fR. If \fImodal\fR is true then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is modeless.
 .SH "TQFileDialog::~TQFileDialog ()"
 Destroys the file dialog.
 .SH "void TQFileDialog::addFilter ( const TQString & filter )"
@@ -443,8 +443,8 @@ See also addRightWidget(), addWidgets(), and addToolButton().
 Adds the widget \fIw\fR to the right-hand side of the file dialog.
 .PP
 See also addLeftWidget(), addWidgets(), and addToolButton().
-.SH "void TQFileDialog::addToolButton ( TQButton * b, bool separator = FALSE )\fC [protected]\fR"
-Adds the tool button \fIb\fR to the row of tool buttons at the top of the file dialog. The button is appended to the right of this row. If \fIseparator\fR is TRUE, a small space is inserted between the last button of the row and the new button \fIb\fR.
+.SH "void TQFileDialog::addToolButton ( TQButton * b, bool separator = false )\fC [protected]\fR"
+Adds the tool button \fIb\fR to the row of tool buttons at the top of the file dialog. The button is appended to the right of this row. If \fIseparator\fR is true, a small space is inserted between the last button of the row and the new button \fIb\fR.
 .PP
 See also addWidgets(), addLeftWidget(), and addRightWidget().
 .SH "void TQFileDialog::addWidgets ( TQLabel * l, TQWidget * w, TQPushButton * b )\fC [protected]\fR"
@@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ See also fileSelected(), fileHighlighted(), and selectedFiles.
 This signal is emitted when the user selects a filter.
 .PP
 See also selectedFilter.
-.SH "TQString TQFileDialog::getExistingDirectory ( const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, bool dirOnly = TRUE, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "TQString TQFileDialog::getExistingDirectory ( const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, bool dirOnly = true, bool resolveSymlinks = true )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is a convenience static function that will return an existing directory selected by the user.
 .PP
 .nf
@@ -519,7 +519,7 @@ This is a convenience static function that will return an existing directory sel
 .br
                     "Choose a directory",
 .br
-                    TRUE );
+                    true );
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -529,14 +529,14 @@ The dialog's working directory is set to \fIdir\fR, and the caption is set to \f
 .PP
 Note on Windows that if \fIdir\fR is TQString::null then the dialog's working directory will be set to the user's My Documents directory.
 .PP
-If \fIdirOnly\fR is TRUE, then only directories will be shown in the file dialog; otherwise both directories and files will be shown.
+If \fIdirOnly\fR is true, then only directories will be shown in the file dialog; otherwise both directories and files will be shown.
 .PP
-Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If \fIresolveSymlinks\fR is FALSE, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.
+Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If \fIresolveSymlinks\fR is false, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.
 .PP
 Under Windows and Mac OS X, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a TQFileDialog, unless the style of the application is set to something other than the native style. (Note that on Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any TQTimers and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under the parent's titlebar).
 .PP
 See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getSaveFileName().
-.SH "TQString TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "TQString TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = true )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is a convenience static function that returns an existing file selected by the user. If the user pressed Cancel, it returns a null string.
 .PP
 .nf
@@ -563,13 +563,13 @@ The dialog's caption is set to \fIcaption\fR. If \fIcaption\fR is not specified
 .PP
 Under Windows and Mac OS X, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a TQFileDialog, unless the style of the application is set to something other than the native style (Note that on Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any TQTimers and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under the parent's titlebar).
 .PP
-Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If \fIresolveSymlinks\fR is FALSE, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.
+Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If \fIresolveSymlinks\fR is false, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.
 .PP
 See also getOpenFileNames(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l action/application.cpp, addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, application/application.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
-.SH "TQStringList TQFileDialog::getOpenFileNames ( const TQString & filter = TQString::null, const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "TQStringList TQFileDialog::getOpenFileNames ( const TQString & filter = TQString::null, const TQString & dir = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = true )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is a convenience static function that will return one or more existing files selected by the user.
 .PP
 .nf
@@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ The dialog's caption is set to \fIcaption\fR. If \fIcaption\fR is not specified
 .PP
 Under Windows and Mac OS X, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a TQFileDialog, unless the style of the application is set to something other than the native style. (Note that on Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any TQTimers and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under the parent's titlebar).
 .PP
-Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If \fIresolveSymlinks\fR is FALSE, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.
+Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If \fIresolveSymlinks\fR is false, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.
 .PP
 Note that if you want to iterate over the list of files, you should iterate over a copy, e.g.
 .PP
@@ -617,7 +617,7 @@ Note that if you want to iterate over the list of files, you should iterate over
 .fi
 .PP
 See also getOpenFileName(), getSaveFileName(), and getExistingDirectory().
-.SH "TQString TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "TQString TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName ( const TQString & startWith = TQString::null, const TQString & filter = TQString::null, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, const TQString & caption = TQString::null, TQString * selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = true )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is a convenience static function that will return a file name selected by the user. The file does not have to exist.
 .PP
 It creates a modal file dialog called \fIname\fR, with parent, \fIparent\fR. If a parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the parent.
@@ -644,7 +644,7 @@ The dialog's caption is set to \fIcaption\fR. If \fIcaption\fR is not specified
 .PP
 Under Windows and Mac OS X, this static function will use the native file dialog and not a TQFileDialog, unless the style of the application is set to something other than the native style. (Note that on Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any TQTimers and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under the parent's titlebar.
 .PP
-Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If \fIresolveSymlinks\fR is FALSE, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.
+Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, the file dialog will change to /var/tmp after entering /usr/tmp. If \fIresolveSymlinks\fR is false, the file dialog will treat symlinks as regular directories.
 .PP
 See also getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), and getExistingDirectory().
 .PP
@@ -655,9 +655,9 @@ Returns a pointer to the icon provider currently set on the file dialog. By defa
 .PP
 See also setIconProvider() and TQFileIconProvider.
 .SH "bool TQFileDialog::isContentsPreviewEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the file dialog can provide a contents preview of the currently selected file; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "contentsPreview" property for details.
+Returns true if the file dialog can provide a contents preview of the currently selected file; otherwise returns false. See the "contentsPreview" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQFileDialog::isInfoPreviewEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the file dialog can provide preview information about the currently selected file; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "infoPreview" property for details.
+Returns true if the file dialog can provide preview information about the currently selected file; otherwise returns false. See the "infoPreview" property for details.
 .SH "Mode TQFileDialog::mode () const"
 Returns the file dialog's mode. See the "mode" property for details.
 .SH "PreviewMode TQFileDialog::previewMode () const"
@@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ Re-sorts the displayed directory.
 .PP
 See also rereadDir().
 .SH "void TQFileDialog::selectAll ( bool b )"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE then all the files in the current directory are selected; otherwise, they are deselected.
+If \fIb\fR is true then all the files in the current directory are selected; otherwise, they are deselected.
 .SH "TQString TQFileDialog::selectedFile () const"
 Returns the name of the selected file. See the "selectedFile" property for details.
 .SH "TQStringList TQFileDialog::selectedFiles () const"
@@ -729,7 +729,7 @@ Normally you would create a preview widget that derives from both TQWidget and T
 .br
     TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this );
 .br
-    fd->setContentsPreviewEnabled( TRUE );
+    fd->setContentsPreviewEnabled( true );
 .br
     fd->setContentsPreview( p, p );
 .br
@@ -855,7 +855,7 @@ Normally you would create a preview widget that derives from both TQWidget and T
 .br
     TQFileDialog* fd = new TQFileDialog( this );
 .br
-    fd->setInfoPreviewEnabled( TRUE );
+    fd->setInfoPreviewEnabled( true );
 .br
     fd->setInfoPreview( p, p );
 .br
@@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ See also url().
 .SH "void TQFileDialog::setViewMode ( ViewMode m )"
 Sets the file dialog's view mode to \fIm\fR. See the "viewMode" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQFileDialog::showHiddenFiles () const"
-Returns TRUE if hidden files are shown in the file dialog; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "showHiddenFiles" property for details.
+Returns true if hidden files are shown in the file dialog; otherwise returns false. See the "showHiddenFiles" property for details.
 .SH "TQUrl TQFileDialog::url () const"
 Returns the URL of the current working directory in the file dialog.
 .PP
@@ -909,7 +909,7 @@ Returns the file dialog's view mode. See the "viewMode" property for details.
 .SH "bool contentsPreview"
 This property holds whether the file dialog can provide a contents preview of the currently selected file.
 .PP
-The default is FALSE.
+The default is false.
 .PP
 See also setContentsPreview() and infoPreview.
 .PP
@@ -923,7 +923,7 @@ See also dir() and setDir().
 .SH "bool infoPreview"
 This property holds whether the file dialog can provide preview information about the currently selected file.
 .PP
-The default is FALSE.
+The default is false.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setInfoPreviewEnabled() and get this property's value with isInfoPreviewEnabled().
 .SH "Mode mode"
@@ -985,7 +985,7 @@ See also filterSelected(), selectedFiles, and selectedFile.
 .SH "bool showHiddenFiles"
 This property holds whether hidden files are shown in the file dialog.
 .PP
-The default is FALSE, i.e. don't show hidden files.
+The default is false, i.e. don't show hidden files.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setShowHiddenFiles() and get this property's value with showHiddenFiles().
 .SH "ViewMode viewMode"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqfileinfo.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqfileinfo.3qt
index 7be7afdb6..c4ede6446 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqfileinfo.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqfileinfo.3qt
@@ -70,16 +70,16 @@ All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread supp
 .BI "TQString \fBabsFilePath\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQString \fBbaseName\fR ( bool complete = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "TQString \fBbaseName\fR ( bool complete = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQString \fBextension\fR ( bool complete = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "TQString \fBextension\fR ( bool complete = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQString \fBdirPath\fR ( bool absPath = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "TQString \fBdirPath\fR ( bool absPath = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQDir \fBdir\fR ( bool absPath = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "TQDir \fBdir\fR ( bool absPath = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "bool \fBisReadable\fR () const"
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ A TQFileInfo can point to a file with either a relative or an absolute file path
 .PP
 The file that the TQFileInfo works on is set in the constructor or later with setFile(). Use exists() to see if the file exists and size() to get its size.
 .PP
-To speed up performance, TQFileInfo caches information about the file. Because files can be changed by other users or programs, or even by other parts of the same program, there is a function that refreshes the file information: refresh(). If you want to switch off a TQFileInfo's caching and force it to access the file system every time you request information from it call setCaching(FALSE).
+To speed up performance, TQFileInfo caches information about the file. Because files can be changed by other users or programs, or even by other parts of the same program, there is a function that refreshes the file information: refresh(). If you want to switch off a TQFileInfo's caching and force it to access the file system every time you request information from it call setCaching(false).
 .PP
 The file's type is obtained with isFile(), isDir() and isSymLink(). The readLink() function provides the name of the file the symlink points to.
 .PP
@@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ Returns the absolute path including the file name.
 .PP
 The absolute path name consists of the full path and the file name. On Unix this will always begin with the root, '/', directory. On Windows this will always begin 'D:/' where D is a drive letter, except for network shares that are not mapped to a drive letter, in which case the path will begin '//sharename/'.
 .PP
-This function returns the same as filePath(), unless isRelative() is TRUE.
+This function returns the same as filePath(), unless isRelative() is true.
 .PP
 If the TQFileInfo is empty it returns TQDir::currentDirPath().
 .PP
@@ -228,12 +228,12 @@ See also isRelative() and filePath().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l biff/biff.cpp and fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
-.SH "TQString TQFileInfo::baseName ( bool complete = FALSE ) const"
+.SH "TQString TQFileInfo::baseName ( bool complete = false ) const"
 Returns the base name of the file.
 .PP
-If \fIcomplete\fR is FALSE (the default) the base name consists of all characters in the file name up to (but not including) the \fIfirst\fR '.' character.
+If \fIcomplete\fR is false (the default) the base name consists of all characters in the file name up to (but not including) the \fIfirst\fR '.' character.
 .PP
-If \fIcomplete\fR is TRUE the base name consists of all characters in the file up to (but not including) the \fIlast\fR '.' character.
+If \fIcomplete\fR is true the base name consists of all characters in the file up to (but not including) the \fIlast\fR '.' character.
 .PP
 The path is not included in either case.
 .PP
@@ -245,13 +245,13 @@ Example:
 .br
         TQString base = fi.baseName();  // base = "archive"
 .br
-        base = fi.baseName( TRUE );    // base = "archive.tar"
+        base = fi.baseName( true );    // base = "archive.tar"
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
 See also fileName() and extension().
 .SH "bool TQFileInfo::caching () const"
-Returns TRUE if caching is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if caching is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setCaching() and refresh().
 .SH "bool TQFileInfo::convertToAbs ()"
@@ -266,33 +266,33 @@ Returns the date and time when the file was created.
 On platforms where this information is not available, returns the same as lastModified().
 .PP
 See also lastModified() and lastRead().
-.SH "TQDir TQFileInfo::dir ( bool absPath = FALSE ) const"
+.SH "TQDir TQFileInfo::dir ( bool absPath = false ) const"
 Returns the file's path as a TQDir object.
 .PP
-If the TQFileInfo is relative and \fIabsPath\fR is FALSE, the TQDir will be relative; otherwise it will be absolute.
+If the TQFileInfo is relative and \fIabsPath\fR is false, the TQDir will be relative; otherwise it will be absolute.
 .PP
 See also dirPath(), filePath(), fileName(), and isRelative().
 .PP
 Example: fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
-.SH "TQString TQFileInfo::dirPath ( bool absPath = FALSE ) const"
+.SH "TQString TQFileInfo::dirPath ( bool absPath = false ) const"
 Returns the file's path.
 .PP
-If \fIabsPath\fR is TRUE an absolute path is returned.
+If \fIabsPath\fR is true an absolute path is returned.
 .PP
 See also dir(), filePath(), fileName(), and isRelative().
 .PP
 Example: fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQFileInfo::exists () const"
-Returns TRUE if the file exists; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the file exists; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l biff/biff.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, and i18n/main.cpp.
-.SH "TQString TQFileInfo::extension ( bool complete = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "TQString TQFileInfo::extension ( bool complete = true ) const"
 Returns the file's extension name.
 .PP
-If \fIcomplete\fR is TRUE (the default), extension() returns the string of all characters in the file name after (but not including) the first '.' character.
+If \fIcomplete\fR is true (the default), extension() returns the string of all characters in the file name after (but not including) the first '.' character.
 .PP
-If \fIcomplete\fR is FALSE, extension() returns the string of all characters in the file name after (but not including) the last '.' character.
+If \fIcomplete\fR is false, extension() returns the string of all characters in the file name after (but not including) the last '.' character.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
@@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Example:
 .br
         TQString ext = fi.extension();  // ext = "tar.gz"
 .br
-        ext = fi.extension( FALSE );   // ext = "gz"
+        ext = fi.extension( false );   // ext = "gz"
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -346,44 +346,44 @@ On Windows and on systems where files do not have groups this function always re
 .PP
 See also group(), owner(), and ownerId().
 .SH "bool TQFileInfo::isDir () const"
-Returns TRUE if this object points to a directory or to a symbolic link to a directory; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this object points to a directory or to a symbolic link to a directory; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isFile() and isSymLink().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l dirview/dirview.cpp and fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQFileInfo::isExecutable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the file is executable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the file is executable; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isReadable(), isWritable(), and permission().
 .SH "bool TQFileInfo::isFile () const"
-Returns TRUE if this object points to a file. Returns FALSE if the object points to something which isn't a file, e.g. a directory or a symlink.
+Returns true if this object points to a file. Returns false if the object points to something which isn't a file, e.g. a directory or a symlink.
 .PP
 See also isDir() and isSymLink().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l dirview/dirview.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp, and tqdir/tqdir.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQFileInfo::isHidden () const"
-Returns TRUE if the file is hidden; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the file is hidden; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 On Unix-like operating systems, including Mac OS X, a file is hidden if its name begins with ".". On Windows a file is hidden if its hidden attribute is set.
 .SH "bool TQFileInfo::isReadable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the file is readable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the file is readable; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isWritable(), isExecutable(), and permission().
 .PP
 Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
 .SH "bool TQFileInfo::isRelative () const"
-Returns TRUE if the file path name is relative. Returns FALSE if the path is absolute (e.g. under Unix a path is absolute if it begins with a "/").
+Returns true if the file path name is relative. Returns false if the path is absolute (e.g. under Unix a path is absolute if it begins with a "/").
 .SH "bool TQFileInfo::isSymLink () const"
-Returns TRUE if this object points to a symbolic link (or to a shortcut on Windows, or an alias on Mac OS X); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this object points to a symbolic link (or to a shortcut on Windows, or an alias on Mac OS X); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isFile(), isDir(), and readLink().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l dirview/dirview.cpp, distributor/distributor.ui.h, and fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQFileInfo::isWritable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the file is writable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the file is writable; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isReadable(), isExecutable(), and permission().
 .PP
@@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ See also owner(), group(), and groupId().
 .SH "bool TQFileInfo::permission ( int permissionSpec ) const"
 Tests for file permissions. The \fIpermissionSpec\fR argument can be several flags of type PermissionSpec OR-ed together to check for permission combinations.
 .PP
-On systems where files do not have permissions this function always returns TRUE.
+On systems where files do not have permissions this function always returns true.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
@@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ See also isReadable(), isWritable(), and isExecutable().
 .SH "TQString TQFileInfo::readLink () const"
 Returns the name a symlink (or shortcut on Windows) points to, or a TQString::null if the object isn't a symbolic link.
 .PP
-This name may not represent an existing file; it is only a string. TQFileInfo::exists() returns TRUE if the symlink points to an existing file.
+This name may not represent an existing file; it is only a string. TQFileInfo::exists() returns true if the symlink points to an existing file.
 .PP
 See also exists(), isSymLink(), isDir(), and isFile().
 .SH "void TQFileInfo::refresh () const"
@@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ Refreshes the information about the file, i.e. reads in information from the fil
 .PP
 See also setCaching().
 .SH "void TQFileInfo::setCaching ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, enables caching of file information. If \fIenable\fR is FALSE caching is disabled.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, enables caching of file information. If \fIenable\fR is false caching is disabled.
 .PP
 When caching is enabled, TQFileInfo reads the file information from the file system the first time it's needed, but generally not later.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqfocusevent.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqfocusevent.3qt
index 795839b0a..4f88a5a6b 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqfocusevent.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqfocusevent.3qt
@@ -75,9 +75,9 @@ Constructs a focus event object.
 .PP
 The \fItype\fR parameter must be either TQEvent::FocusIn or TQEvent::FocusOut.
 .SH "bool TQFocusEvent::gotFocus () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget received the text input focus; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the widget received the text input focus; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQFocusEvent::lostFocus () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget lost the text input focus; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the widget lost the text input focus; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "Reason TQFocusEvent::reason ()\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns the reason for this focus event.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqfont.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqfont.3qt
index 799ba253c..006496267 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqfont.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqfont.3qt
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ TQFont \- Font used for drawing text
 .BI "\fBTQFont\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQFont\fR ( const TQString & family, int pointSize = 12, int weight = Normal, bool italic = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQFont\fR ( const TQString & family, int pointSize = 12, int weight = Normal, bool italic = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fBTQFont\fR ( const TQFont & font )"
@@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ TQFont \- Font used for drawing text
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The TQFont class specifies a font used for drawing text.
 .PP
-When you create a TQFont object you specify various attributes that you want the font to have. TQt will use the font with the specified attributes, or if no matching font exists, TQt will use the closest matching installed font. The attributes of the font that is actually used are retrievable from a TQFontInfo object. If the window system provides an exact match exactMatch() returns TRUE. Use TQFontMetrics to get measurements, e.g. the pixel length of a string using TQFontMetrics::width().
+When you create a TQFont object you specify various attributes that you want the font to have. TQt will use the font with the specified attributes, or if no matching font exists, TQt will use the closest matching installed font. The attributes of the font that is actually used are retrievable from a TQFontInfo object. If the window system provides an exact match exactMatch() returns true. Use TQFontMetrics to get measurements, e.g. the pixel length of a string using TQFontMetrics::width().
 .PP
 Use TQApplication::setFont() to set the application's default font.
 .PP
@@ -545,7 +545,7 @@ This enum contains the predefined font weights:
 Constructs a font object that uses the application's default font.
 .PP
 See also TQApplication::setFont() and TQApplication::font().
-.SH "TQFont::TQFont ( const TQString & family, int pointSize = 12, int weight = Normal, bool italic = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQFont::TQFont ( const TQString & family, int pointSize = 12, int weight = Normal, bool italic = false )"
 Constructs a font object with the specified \fIfamily\fR, \fIpointSize\fR, \fIweight\fR and \fIitalic\fR settings.
 .PP
 If \fIpointSize\fR is <= 0 it is set to 1.
@@ -558,7 +558,7 @@ Constructs a font that is a copy of \fIfont\fR.
 .SH "TQFont::~TQFont ()"
 Destroys the font object and frees all allocated resources.
 .SH "bool TQFont::bold () const"
-Returns TRUE if weight() is a value greater than TQFont::Normal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if weight() is a value greater than TQFont::Normal; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also weight(), setBold(), and TQFontInfo::bold().
 .PP
@@ -578,9 +578,9 @@ See also StyleHint, styleHint(), and setStyleHint().
 .PP
 Please use TQApplication::font() instead.
 .SH "bool TQFont::dirty () const\fC [protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the font attributes have been changed and the font has to be (re)loaded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the font attributes have been changed and the font has to be (re)loaded; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQFont::exactMatch () const"
-Returns TRUE if a window system font exactly matching the settings of this font is available.
+Returns true if a window system font exactly matching the settings of this font is available.
 .PP
 See also TQFontInfo.
 .SH "TQString TQFont::family () const"
@@ -591,7 +591,7 @@ See also setFamily(), substitutes(), and substitute().
 Examples:
 .)l chart/optionsform.cpp and fonts/simple-tqfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQFont::fixedPitch () const"
-Returns TRUE if fixed pitch has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if fixed pitch has been set; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setFixedPitch() and TQFontInfo::fixedPitch().
 .SH "bool TQFont::fromString ( const TQString & descrip )"
@@ -613,11 +613,11 @@ See also insertSubstitution(), removeSubstitution(), substitutions(), and substi
 .PP
 Example: fonts/simple-tqfont-demo/viewer.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQFont::isCopyOf ( const TQFont & f ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this font and \fIf\fR are copies of each other, i.e. one of them was created as a copy of the other and neither has been modified since. This is much stricter than equality.
+Returns true if this font and \fIf\fR are copies of each other, i.e. one of them was created as a copy of the other and neither has been modified since. This is much stricter than equality.
 .PP
 See also operator=() and operator==().
 .SH "bool TQFont::italic () const"
-Returns TRUE if italic has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if italic has been set; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setItalic().
 .PP
@@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ It is theoretically possible that there really isn't a lastResortFont() in which
 .PP
 See also lastResortFamily() and rawName().
 .SH "bool TQFont::operator!= ( const TQFont & f ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this font is different from \fIf\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this font is different from \fIf\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Two TQFonts are considered to be different if their font attributes are different. If rawMode() is enabled for both fonts, only the family fields are compared.
 .PP
@@ -649,13 +649,13 @@ See also operator==().
 .SH "TQFont & TQFont::operator= ( const TQFont & font )"
 Assigns \fIfont\fR to this font and returns a reference to it.
 .SH "bool TQFont::operator== ( const TQFont & f ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this font is equal to \fIf\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this font is equal to \fIf\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Two TQFonts are considered equal if their font attributes are equal. If rawMode() is enabled for both fonts, only the family fields are compared.
 .PP
 See also operator!=() and isCopyOf().
 .SH "bool TQFont::overline () const"
-Returns TRUE if overline has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if overline has been set; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setOverline().
 .SH "int TQFont::pixelSize () const"
@@ -674,7 +674,7 @@ Returns the point size of the font. Returns -1 if the font size was specified in
 .PP
 See also pointSize(), setPointSizeFloat(), pixelSize(), TQFontInfo::pointSize(), and TQFontInfo::pixelSize().
 .SH "bool TQFont::rawMode () const"
-Returns TRUE if raw mode is used for font name matching; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if raw mode is used for font name matching; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setRawMode() and rawName().
 .SH "TQString TQFont::rawName () const"
@@ -713,18 +713,18 @@ The \fIfamily\fR name may optionally also include a foundry name, e.g. "Helvetic
 .PP
 See also family(), setStyleHint(), and TQFontInfo.
 .SH "void TQFont::setFixedPitch ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, sets fixed pitch on; otherwise sets fixed pitch off.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, sets fixed pitch on; otherwise sets fixed pitch off.
 .PP
 See also fixedPitch() and TQFontInfo.
 .SH "void TQFont::setItalic ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, italic is set on; otherwise italic is set off.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, italic is set on; otherwise italic is set off.
 .PP
 See also italic() and TQFontInfo.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp, fonts/simple-tqfont-demo/viewer.cpp, and themes/metal.cpp.
 .SH "void TQFont::setOverline ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, sets overline on; otherwise sets overline off.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, sets overline on; otherwise sets overline off.
 .PP
 See also overline() and TQFontInfo.
 .SH "void TQFont::setPixelSize ( int pixelSize )"
@@ -750,7 +750,7 @@ Sets the point size to \fIpointSize\fR. The point size must be greater than zero
 .PP
 See also pointSizeFloat(), setPointSize(), and setPixelSize().
 .SH "void TQFont::setRawMode ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, turns raw mode on; otherwise turns raw mode off. This function only has an effect under X11.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, turns raw mode on; otherwise turns raw mode off. This function only has an effect under X11.
 .PP
 If raw mode is enabled, TQt will search for an X font with a complete font name matching the family name, ignoring all other values set for the TQFont. If the font name matches several fonts, TQt will use the first font returned by X. TQFontInfo \fIcannot\fR be used to fetch information about a TQFont using raw mode (it will return the values set in the TQFont for all parameters, including the family name).
 .PP
@@ -778,7 +778,7 @@ NOTE: TQFont cannot stretch XLFD fonts. When loading XLFD fonts on X11, the stre
 .PP
 See also stretch() and TQFont::StyleStrategy.
 .SH "void TQFont::setStrikeOut ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, sets strikeout on; otherwise sets strikeout off.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, sets strikeout on; otherwise sets strikeout off.
 .PP
 See also strikeOut() and TQFontInfo.
 .SH "void TQFont::setStyleHint ( StyleHint hint, StyleStrategy strategy = PreferDefault )"
@@ -797,7 +797,7 @@ Sets the style strategy for the font to \fIs\fR.
 .PP
 See also TQFont::StyleStrategy.
 .SH "void TQFont::setUnderline ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, sets underline on; otherwise sets underline off.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, sets underline on; otherwise sets underline off.
 .PP
 See also underline() and TQFontInfo.
 .PP
@@ -814,7 +814,7 @@ Returns the stretch factor for the font.
 .PP
 See also setStretch().
 .SH "bool TQFont::strikeOut () const"
-Returns TRUE if strikeout has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if strikeout has been set; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setStrikeOut().
 .SH "StyleHint TQFont::styleHint () const"
@@ -854,7 +854,7 @@ Returns a description of the font. The description is a comma-separated list of
 .PP
 See also fromString() and operator<<().
 .SH "bool TQFont::underline () const"
-Returns TRUE if underline has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if underline has been set; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setUnderline().
 .SH "int TQFont::weight () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqfontdatabase.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqfontdatabase.3qt
index 28101cf1a..a7fb74015 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqfontdatabase.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqfontdatabase.3qt
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ See also Environment Classes and Graphics Classes.
 .SH "TQFontDatabase::TQFontDatabase ()"
 Creates a font database object.
 .SH "bool TQFontDatabase::bold ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the font that has family \fIfamily\fR and style \fIstyle\fR is bold; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the font that has family \fIfamily\fR and style \fIstyle\fR is bold; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also italic() and weight().
 .SH "bool TQFontDatabase::bold ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const"
@@ -212,29 +212,29 @@ Returns a TQFont object that has family \fIfamily\fR, style \fIstyle\fR and poin
 .SH "TQFont TQFontDatabase::font ( const TQString & familyName, const TQString & style, int pointSize, const TQString & )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .SH "bool TQFontDatabase::isBitmapScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the font that has family \fIfamily\fR and style \fIstyle\fR is a scalable bitmap font; otherwise returns FALSE. Scaling a bitmap font usually produces an unattractive hardly readable result, because the pixels of the font are scaled. If you need to scale a bitmap font it is better to scale it to one of the fixed sizes returned by smoothSizes().
+Returns true if the font that has family \fIfamily\fR and style \fIstyle\fR is a scalable bitmap font; otherwise returns false. Scaling a bitmap font usually produces an unattractive hardly readable result, because the pixels of the font are scaled. If you need to scale a bitmap font it is better to scale it to one of the fixed sizes returned by smoothSizes().
 .PP
 See also isScalable() and isSmoothlyScalable().
 .SH "bool TQFontDatabase::isBitmapScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .SH "bool TQFontDatabase::isFixedPitch ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the font that has family \fIfamily\fR and style \fIstyle\fR is fixed pitch; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the font that has family \fIfamily\fR and style \fIstyle\fR is fixed pitch; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQFontDatabase::isFixedPitch ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .SH "bool TQFontDatabase::isScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the font that has family \fIfamily\fR and style \fIstyle\fR is scalable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the font that has family \fIfamily\fR and style \fIstyle\fR is scalable; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isBitmapScalable() and isSmoothlyScalable().
 .SH "bool TQFontDatabase::isScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .SH "bool TQFontDatabase::isSmoothlyScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style = TQString::null ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the font that has family \fIfamily\fR and style \fIstyle\fR is smoothly scalable; otherwise returns FALSE. If this function returns TRUE, it's safe to scale this font to any size, and the result will always look attractive.
+Returns true if the font that has family \fIfamily\fR and style \fIstyle\fR is smoothly scalable; otherwise returns false. If this function returns true, it's safe to scale this font to any size, and the result will always look attractive.
 .PP
 See also isScalable() and isBitmapScalable().
 .SH "bool TQFontDatabase::isSmoothlyScalable ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .SH "bool TQFontDatabase::italic ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the font that has family \fIfamily\fR and style \fIstyle\fR is italic; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the font that has family \fIfamily\fR and style \fIstyle\fR is italic; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also weight() and bold().
 .SH "bool TQFontDatabase::italic ( const TQString & family, const TQString & style, const TQString & ) const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqfontdialog.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqfontdialog.3qt
index 41500d1ba..a42498403 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqfontdialog.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqfontdialog.3qt
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Executes a modal font dialog and returns a font.
 .PP
 If the user clicks OK, the selected font is returned. If the user clicks Cancel, the \fIinitial\fR font is returned.
 .PP
-The dialog is called \fIname\fR, with the parent \fIparent\fR. \fIinitial\fR is the initially selected font. If the \fIok\fR parameter is not-null, \fI*\fR\fIok\fR is set to TRUE if the user clicked OK, and set to FALSE if the user clicked Cancel.
+The dialog is called \fIname\fR, with the parent \fIparent\fR. \fIinitial\fR is the initially selected font. If the \fIok\fR parameter is not-null, \fI*\fR\fIok\fR is set to true if the user clicked OK, and set to false if the user clicked Cancel.
 .PP
 This static function is less flexible than the full TQFontDialog object, but is convenient and easy to use.
 .PP
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Executes a modal font dialog and returns a font.
 .PP
 If the user clicks OK, the selected font is returned. If the user clicks Cancel, the TQt default font is returned.
 .PP
-The dialog is called \fIname\fR, with parent \fIparent\fR. If the \fIok\fR parameter is not-null, \fI*\fR\fIok\fR is set to TRUE if the user clicked OK, and FALSE if the user clicked Cancel.
+The dialog is called \fIname\fR, with parent \fIparent\fR. If the \fIok\fR parameter is not-null, \fI*\fR\fIok\fR is set to true if the user clicked OK, and false if the user clicked Cancel.
 .PP
 This static function is less functional than the full TQFontDialog object, but is convenient and easy to use.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqfontinfo.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqfontinfo.3qt
index 81497095d..147624737 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqfontinfo.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqfontinfo.3qt
@@ -93,13 +93,13 @@ Constructs a copy of \fIfi\fR.
 .SH "TQFontInfo::~TQFontInfo ()"
 Destroys the font info object.
 .SH "bool TQFontInfo::bold () const"
-Returns TRUE if weight() would return a value greater than TQFont::Normal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if weight() would return a value greater than TQFont::Normal; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also weight() and TQFont::bold().
 .PP
 Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQFontInfo::exactMatch () const"
-Returns TRUE if the matched window system font is exactly the same as the one specified by the font; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the matched window system font is exactly the same as the one specified by the font; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQFont::exactMatch().
 .SH "TQString TQFontInfo::family () const"
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ See also TQFont::pointSize().
 Examples:
 .)l fonts/simple-tqfont-demo/viewer.cpp and qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQFontInfo::rawMode () const"
-Returns TRUE if the font is a raw mode font; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the font is a raw mode font; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If it is a raw mode font, all other functions in TQFontInfo will return the same values set in the TQFont, regardless of the font actually used.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqfontmetrics.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqfontmetrics.3qt
index c737f79e3..d242a772e 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqfontmetrics.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqfontmetrics.3qt
@@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ See also leading() and lineSpacing().
 Examples:
 .)l hello/hello.cpp and qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQFontMetrics::inFont ( TQChar ch ) const"
-Returns TRUE if character \fIch\fR is a valid character in the font; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if character \fIch\fR is a valid character in the font; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Example: qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp.
 .SH "int TQFontMetrics::leading () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqftp.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqftp.3qt
index b09cac641..d11610054 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqftp.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqftp.3qt
@@ -212,19 +212,19 @@ For this example the following sequence of signals is emitted (with small variat
 .br
     stateChanged( Connected )
 .br
-    finished( 1, FALSE )
+    finished( 1, false )
 .br
 .br
     start( 2 )
 .br
     stateChanged( LoggedIn )
 .br
-    finished( 2, FALSE )
+    finished( 2, false )
 .br
 .br
     start( 3 )
 .br
-    finished( 3, FALSE )
+    finished( 3, false )
 .br
 .br
     start( 4 )
@@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ For this example the following sequence of signals is emitted (with small variat
 .br
     readyRead()
 .br
-    finished( 4, FALSE )
+    finished( 4, false )
 .br
 .br
     start( 5 )
@@ -248,10 +248,10 @@ For this example the following sequence of signals is emitted (with small variat
 .br
     stateChanged( Unconnected )
 .br
-    finished( 5, FALSE )
+    finished( 5, false )
 .br
 .br
-    done( FALSE )
+    done( false )
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -269,15 +269,15 @@ If the login fails for the above example, the signals would look like this:
 .br
     stateChanged( Connected )
 .br
-    finished( 1, FALSE )
+    finished( 1, false )
 .br
 .br
     start( 2 )
 .br
-    finished( 2, TRUE )
+    finished( 2, true )
 .br
 .br
-    done( TRUE )
+    done( true )
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ See also stateChanged(), commandStarted(), and commandFinished().
 .PP
 Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
 .SH "void TQFtp::commandFinished ( int id, bool error )\fC [signal]\fR"
-This signal is emitted when processing the command identified by \fIid\fR has finished. \fIerror\fR is TRUE if an error occurred during the processing; otherwise \fIerror\fR is FALSE.
+This signal is emitted when processing the command identified by \fIid\fR has finished. \fIerror\fR is true if an error occurred during the processing; otherwise \fIerror\fR is false.
 .PP
 See also commandStarted(), done(), error(), and errorString().
 .PP
@@ -455,7 +455,7 @@ See also get(), put(), and TQProgressBar::progress.
 .PP
 Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
 .SH "void TQFtp::done ( bool error )\fC [signal]\fR"
-This signal is emitted when the last pending command has finished; (it is emitted after the last command's commandFinished() signal). \fIerror\fR is TRUE if an error occurred during the processing; otherwise \fIerror\fR is FALSE.
+This signal is emitted when the last pending command has finished; (it is emitted after the last command's commandFinished() signal). \fIerror\fR is true if an error occurred during the processing; otherwise \fIerror\fR is false.
 .PP
 See also commandFinished(), error(), and errorString().
 .PP
@@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ See also readyRead(), dataTransferProgress(), commandStarted(), and commandFinis
 .PP
 Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
 .SH "bool TQFtp::hasPendingCommands () const"
-Returns TRUE if there are any commands scheduled that have not yet been executed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if there are any commands scheduled that have not yet been executed; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The command that is being executed is \fInot\fR considered as a scheduled command.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqglcolormap.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqglcolormap.3qt
index 1a5d7624e..0cdc4a872 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqglcolormap.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqglcolormap.3qt
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Returns the index of the color \fIcolor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR is not in the map, -1
 .SH "int TQGLColormap::findNearest ( TQRgb color ) const"
 Returns the index of the color that is the closest match to color \fIcolor\fR.
 .SH "bool TQGLColormap::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the colormap is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. A colormap with no color values set is considered to be empty.
+Returns true if the colormap is empty; otherwise returns false. A colormap with no color values set is considered to be empty.
 .SH "TQGLColormap & TQGLColormap::operator= ( const TQGLColormap & map )"
 Assign a shallow copy of \fImap\fR to this TQGLColormap.
 .SH "void TQGLColormap::setEntries ( int count, const TQRgb * colors, int base = 0 )"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqglcontext.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqglcontext.3qt
index 3a584619f..e48ad5b37 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqglcontext.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqglcontext.3qt
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ The algorithm for reducing the demands of the format is quite simple-minded, so
 .PP
 See also chooseContext().
 .SH "bool TQGLContext::create ( const TQGLContext * shareContext = 0 )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Creates the GL context. Returns TRUE if it was successful in creating a valid GL rendering context on the paint device specified in the constructor; otherwise returns FALSE (i.e. the context is invalid).
+Creates the GL context. Returns true if it was successful in creating a valid GL rendering context on the paint device specified in the constructor; otherwise returns false (i.e. the context is invalid).
 .PP
 After successful creation, format() returns the set of features of the created GL rendering context.
 .PP
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ Returns the paint device set for this context.
 .PP
 See also TQGLContext::TQGLContext().
 .SH "bool TQGLContext::deviceIsPixmap () const\fC [protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the paint device of this context is a pixmap; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the paint device of this context is a pixmap; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "void TQGLContext::doneCurrent ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Makes no GL context the current context. Normally, you do not need to call this function; TQGLContext calls it as necessary.
 .SH "TQGLFormat TQGLContext::format () const"
@@ -177,13 +177,13 @@ Generates a set of 256 display lists for the 256 first characters in the font \f
 .PP
 See also TQGLWidget::renderText().
 .SH "bool TQGLContext::initialized () const\fC [protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if this context has been initialized, i.e. if TQGLWidget::initializeGL() has been performed on it; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this context has been initialized, i.e. if TQGLWidget::initializeGL() has been performed on it; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setInitialized().
 .SH "bool TQGLContext::isSharing () const"
-Returns TRUE if display list sharing with another context was requested in the create() call and the GL system was able to fulfill this request; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that display list sharing might not be supported between contexts with different formats.
+Returns true if display list sharing with another context was requested in the create() call and the GL system was able to fulfill this request; otherwise returns false. Note that display list sharing might not be supported between contexts with different formats.
 .SH "bool TQGLContext::isValid () const"
-Returns TRUE if a GL rendering context has been successfully created; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if a GL rendering context has been successfully created; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "void TQGLContext::makeCurrent ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Makes this context the current OpenGL rendering context. All GL functions you call operate on this context until another context is made current.
 .PP
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Call create() to create a new GL context that tries to match the new format.
 .br
     TQGLFormat f;
 .br
-    f.setStereo( TRUE );
+    f.setStereo( true );
 .br
     cx->setFormat( f );
 .br
@@ -231,11 +231,11 @@ Call create() to create a new GL context that tries to match the new format.
 .PP
 See also format(), reset(), and create().
 .SH "void TQGLContext::setInitialized ( bool on )\fC [protected]\fR"
-If \fIon\fR is TRUE the context has been initialized, i.e. TQGLContext::setInitialized() has been called on it. If \fIon\fR is FALSE the context has not been initialized.
+If \fIon\fR is true the context has been initialized, i.e. TQGLContext::setInitialized() has been called on it. If \fIon\fR is false the context has not been initialized.
 .PP
 See also initialized().
 .SH "void TQGLContext::setWindowCreated ( bool on )\fC [protected]\fR"
-If \fIon\fR is TRUE the context has had a window created for it. If \fIon\fR is FALSE no window has been created for the context.
+If \fIon\fR is true the context has had a window created for it. If \fIon\fR is false no window has been created for the context.
 .PP
 See also windowCreated().
 .SH "void TQGLContext::swapBuffers () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Swaps the screen contents with an off-screen buffer. Only works if the context i
 .PP
 See also TQGLFormat::setDoubleBuffer().
 .SH "bool TQGLContext::windowCreated () const\fC [protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if a window has been created for this context; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if a window has been created for this context; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setWindowCreated().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqglformat.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqglformat.3qt
index 7e13cc141..5b88995f2 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqglformat.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqglformat.3qt
@@ -144,9 +144,9 @@ There are different ways to define the display characteristics of a rendering co
 .br
     TQGLFormat f;
 .br
-    f.setAlpha( TRUE );
+    f.setAlpha( true );
 .br
-    f.setStereo( TRUE );
+    f.setStereo( true );
 .br
     TQGLFormat::setDefaultFormat( f );
 .br
@@ -158,9 +158,9 @@ Or you can specify the desired format when creating an object of your TQGLWidget
 .br
     TQGLFormat f;
 .br
-    f.setDoubleBuffer( FALSE );                 // single buffer
+    f.setDoubleBuffer( false );                 // single buffer
 .br
-    f.setDirectRendering( FALSE );              // software rendering
+    f.setDirectRendering( false );              // software rendering
 .br
     MyGLWidget* myWidget = new MyGLWidget( f, ... );
 .br
@@ -172,9 +172,9 @@ After the widget has been created, you can find out which of the requested featu
 .br
     TQGLFormat f;
 .br
-    f.setOverlay( TRUE );
+    f.setOverlay( true );
 .br
-    f.setStereo( TRUE );
+    f.setStereo( true );
 .br
     MyGLWidget* myWidget = new MyGLWidget( f, ... );
 .br
@@ -257,11 +257,11 @@ The \fIplane\fR parameter defaults to 0 and is the plane which this format shoul
 .PP
 See also defaultFormat() and setOption().
 .SH "bool TQGLFormat::accum () const"
-Returns TRUE if the accumulation buffer is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. The accumulation buffer is disabled by default.
+Returns true if the accumulation buffer is enabled; otherwise returns false. The accumulation buffer is disabled by default.
 .PP
 See also setAccum().
 .SH "bool TQGLFormat::alpha () const"
-Returns TRUE if the alpha channel of the framebuffer is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. The alpha channel is disabled by default.
+Returns true if the alpha channel of the framebuffer is enabled; otherwise returns false. The alpha channel is disabled by default.
 .PP
 See also setAlpha().
 .SH "TQGLFormat TQGLFormat::defaultFormat ()\fC [static]\fR"
@@ -297,29 +297,29 @@ Plane: 1 (i.e., first overlay plane).
 .PP
 See also setDefaultFormat().
 .SH "bool TQGLFormat::depth () const"
-Returns TRUE if the depth buffer is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. The depth buffer is enabled by default.
+Returns true if the depth buffer is enabled; otherwise returns false. The depth buffer is enabled by default.
 .PP
 See also setDepth().
 .SH "bool TQGLFormat::directRendering () const"
-Returns TRUE if direct rendering is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if direct rendering is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Direct rendering is enabled by default.
 .PP
 See also setDirectRendering().
 .SH "bool TQGLFormat::doubleBuffer () const"
-Returns TRUE if double buffering is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. Double buffering is enabled by default.
+Returns true if double buffering is enabled; otherwise returns false. Double buffering is enabled by default.
 .PP
 See also setDoubleBuffer().
 .SH "bool TQGLFormat::hasOpenGL ()\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the window system has any OpenGL support; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the window system has any OpenGL support; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR This function must not be called until the TQApplication object has been created.
 .SH "bool TQGLFormat::hasOpenGLOverlays ()\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the window system supports OpenGL overlays; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the window system supports OpenGL overlays; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR This function must not be called until the TQApplication object has been created.
 .SH "bool TQGLFormat::hasOverlay () const"
-Returns TRUE if overlay plane is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if overlay plane is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Overlay is disabled by default.
 .PP
@@ -329,11 +329,11 @@ Returns the plane of this format. The default for normal formats is 0, which mea
 .PP
 See also setPlane().
 .SH "bool TQGLFormat::rgba () const"
-Returns TRUE if RGBA color mode is set. Returns FALSE if color index mode is set. The default color mode is RGBA.
+Returns true if RGBA color mode is set. Returns false if color index mode is set. The default color mode is RGBA.
 .PP
 See also setRgba().
 .SH "void TQGLFormat::setAccum ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE enables the accumulation buffer; otherwise disables the accumulation buffer.
+If \fIenable\fR is true enables the accumulation buffer; otherwise disables the accumulation buffer.
 .PP
 The accumulation buffer is disabled by default.
 .PP
@@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ The accumulation buffer is used to create blur effects and multiple exposures.
 .PP
 See also accum().
 .SH "void TQGLFormat::setAlpha ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE enables the alpha channel; otherwise disables the alpha channel.
+If \fIenable\fR is true enables the alpha channel; otherwise disables the alpha channel.
 .PP
 The alpha buffer is disabled by default.
 .PP
@@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ Sets a new default TQGLFormat for the application to \fIf\fR. For example, to se
 .br
     TQGLFormat f;
 .br
-    f.setDoubleBuffer( FALSE );
+    f.setDoubleBuffer( false );
 .br
     TQGLFormat::setDefaultFormat( f );
 .br
@@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ For example, to get a double buffered overlay context (if available), use code l
 .br
     TQGLFormat f = TQGLFormat::defaultOverlayFormat();
 .br
-    f.setDoubleBuffer( TRUE );
+    f.setDoubleBuffer( true );
 .br
     TQGLFormat::setDefaultOverlayFormat( f );
 .br
@@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ As usual, you can find out after widget creation whether the underlying OpenGL s
 .PP
 See also defaultOverlayFormat().
 .SH "void TQGLFormat::setDepth ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE enables the depth buffer; otherwise disables the depth buffer.
+If \fIenable\fR is true enables the depth buffer; otherwise disables the depth buffer.
 .PP
 The depth buffer is enabled by default.
 .PP
@@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ The purpose of a depth buffer (or Z-buffering) is to remove hidden surfaces. Pix
 .PP
 See also depth().
 .SH "void TQGLFormat::setDirectRendering ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE enables direct rendering; otherwise disables direct rendering.
+If \fIenable\fR is true enables direct rendering; otherwise disables direct rendering.
 .PP
 Direct rendering is enabled by default.
 .PP
@@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ Enabling this option will make OpenGL bypass the underlying window system and re
 .PP
 See also directRendering().
 .SH "void TQGLFormat::setDoubleBuffer ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE sets double buffering; otherwise sets single buffering.
+If \fIenable\fR is true sets double buffering; otherwise sets single buffering.
 .PP
 Double buffering is enabled by default.
 .PP
@@ -435,7 +435,7 @@ Sets the format option to \fIopt\fR.
 .PP
 See also testOption().
 .SH "void TQGLFormat::setOverlay ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE enables an overlay plane; otherwise disables the overlay plane.
+If \fIenable\fR is true enables an overlay plane; otherwise disables the overlay plane.
 .PP
 Enabling the overlay plane will cause TQGLWidget to create an additional context in an overlay plane. See the TQGLWidget documentation for further information.
 .PP
@@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Note that in contrast to other format specifications, the plane specifications w
 .PP
 See also plane().
 .SH "void TQGLFormat::setRgba ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE sets RGBA mode. If \fIenable\fR is FALSE sets color index mode.
+If \fIenable\fR is true sets RGBA mode. If \fIenable\fR is false sets color index mode.
 .PP
 The default color mode is RGBA.
 .PP
@@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ In color index mode you specify an index into a color lookup table.
 .PP
 See also rgba().
 .SH "void TQGLFormat::setStencil ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE enables the stencil buffer; otherwise disables the stencil buffer.
+If \fIenable\fR is true enables the stencil buffer; otherwise disables the stencil buffer.
 .PP
 The stencil buffer is disabled by default.
 .PP
@@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ The stencil buffer masks certain parts of the drawing area so that masked parts
 .PP
 See also stencil().
 .SH "void TQGLFormat::setStereo ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE enables stereo buffering; otherwise disables stereo buffering.
+If \fIenable\fR is true enables stereo buffering; otherwise disables stereo buffering.
 .PP
 Stereo buffering is disabled by default.
 .PP
@@ -473,15 +473,15 @@ Stereo buffering provides extra color buffers to generate left-eye and right-eye
 .PP
 See also stereo().
 .SH "bool TQGLFormat::stencil () const"
-Returns TRUE if the stencil buffer is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. The stencil buffer is disabled by default.
+Returns true if the stencil buffer is enabled; otherwise returns false. The stencil buffer is disabled by default.
 .PP
 See also setStencil().
 .SH "bool TQGLFormat::stereo () const"
-Returns TRUE if stereo buffering is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. Stereo buffering is disabled by default.
+Returns true if stereo buffering is enabled; otherwise returns false. Stereo buffering is disabled by default.
 .PP
 See also setStereo().
 .SH "bool TQGLFormat::testOption ( FormatOption opt ) const"
-Returns TRUE if format option \fIopt\fR is set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if format option \fIopt\fR is set; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setOption().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqglwidget.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqglwidget.3qt
index 3184766d3..e78f0e12b 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqglwidget.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqglwidget.3qt
@@ -58,10 +58,10 @@ Inherits TQWidget and TQGL.
 .BI "const TQGLContext * \fBcontext\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual TQPixmap \fBrenderPixmap\fR ( int w = 0, int h = 0, bool useContext = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual TQPixmap \fBrenderPixmap\fR ( int w = 0, int h = 0, bool useContext = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual TQImage \fBgrabFrameBuffer\fR ( bool withAlpha = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual TQImage \fBgrabFrameBuffer\fR ( bool withAlpha = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBmakeOverlayCurrent\fR ()"
@@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ See also TQGLFormat::defaultFormat() and isValid().
 .SH "TQGLWidget::~TQGLWidget ()"
 Destroys the widget.
 .SH "bool TQGLWidget::autoBufferSwap () const\fC [protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the widget is doing automatic GL buffer swapping; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the widget is doing automatic GL buffer swapping; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setAutoBufferSwap().
 .SH "const TQGLColormap & TQGLWidget::colormap () const"
@@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Example: opengl/texture/gltexobj.cpp.
 .SH "void TQGLWidget::doneCurrent ()"
 Makes no GL context the current context. Normally, you do not need to call this function; TQGLContext calls it as necessary. However, it may be useful in multithreaded environments.
 .SH "bool TQGLWidget::doubleBuffer () const"
-Returns TRUE if the contained GL rendering context has double buffering; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the contained GL rendering context has double buffering; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQGLFormat::doubleBuffer().
 .SH "TQGLFormat TQGLWidget::format () const"
@@ -364,8 +364,8 @@ Executes the virtual function paintGL().
 The widget's rendering context will become the current context and initializeGL() will be called if it hasn't already been called.
 .SH "void TQGLWidget::glInit ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Initializes OpenGL for this widget's context. Calls the virtual function initializeGL().
-.SH "TQImage TQGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer ( bool withAlpha = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns an image of the frame buffer. If \fIwithAlpha\fR is TRUE the alpha channel is included.
+.SH "TQImage TQGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer ( bool withAlpha = false )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Returns an image of the frame buffer. If \fIwithAlpha\fR is true the alpha channel is included.
 .PP
 Depending on your hardware, you can explicitly select which color buffer to grab with a glReadBuffer() call before calling this function.
 .SH "void TQGLWidget::initializeGL ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -381,11 +381,11 @@ This function should set up any required OpenGL context rendering flags, definin
 .PP
 There is no need to call makeOverlayCurrent() because this has already been done when this function is called.
 .SH "bool TQGLWidget::isSharing () const"
-Returns TRUE if display list sharing with another TQGLWidget was requested in the constructor, and the GL system was able to provide it; otherwise returns FALSE. The GL system may fail to provide display list sharing if the two TQGLWidgets use different formats.
+Returns true if display list sharing with another TQGLWidget was requested in the constructor, and the GL system was able to provide it; otherwise returns false. The GL system may fail to provide display list sharing if the two TQGLWidgets use different formats.
 .PP
 See also format().
 .SH "bool TQGLWidget::isValid () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget has a valid GL rendering context; otherwise returns FALSE. A widget will be invalid if the system has no OpenGL support.
+Returns true if the widget has a valid GL rendering context; otherwise returns false. A widget will be invalid if the system has no OpenGL support.
 .SH "void TQGLWidget::makeCurrent ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Makes this widget the current widget for OpenGL operations, i.e. makes the widget's rendering context the current OpenGL rendering context.
 .SH "void TQGLWidget::makeOverlayCurrent ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ See also qglColor(), TQGLContext::currentContext(), and TQColor.
 Convenience function for specifying a drawing color to OpenGL. Calls glColor3 (in RGBA mode) or glIndex (in color-index mode) with the color \fIc\fR. Applies to the current GL context.
 .PP
 See also qglClearColor(), TQGLContext::currentContext(), and TQColor.
-.SH "TQPixmap TQGLWidget::renderPixmap ( int w = 0, int h = 0, bool useContext = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQPixmap TQGLWidget::renderPixmap ( int w = 0, int h = 0, bool useContext = false )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Renders the current scene on a pixmap and returns the pixmap.
 .PP
 You can use this method on both visible and invisible TQGLWidgets.
@@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ This method will create a pixmap and a temporary TQGLContext to render on the pi
 .PP
 The size of the pixmap will be \fIw\fR pixels wide and \fIh\fR pixels high unless one of these parameters is 0 (the default), in which case the pixmap will have the same size as the widget.
 .PP
-If \fIuseContext\fR is TRUE, this method will try to be more efficient by using the existing GL context to render the pixmap. The default is FALSE. Only use TRUE if you understand the risks.
+If \fIuseContext\fR is true, this method will try to be more efficient by using the existing GL context to render the pixmap. The default is false. Only use true if you understand the risks.
 .PP
 Overlays are not rendered onto the pixmap.
 .PP
@@ -461,9 +461,9 @@ This virtual function is used in the same manner as paintGL() except that it ope
 .PP
 There is no need to call makeOverlayCurrent() because this has already been done when this function is called.
 .SH "void TQGLWidget::setAutoBufferSwap ( bool on )\fC [protected]\fR"
-If \fIon\fR is TRUE automatic GL buffer swapping is switched on; otherwise it is switched off.
+If \fIon\fR is true automatic GL buffer swapping is switched on; otherwise it is switched off.
 .PP
-If \fIon\fR is TRUE and the widget is using a double-buffered format, the background and foreground GL buffers will automatically be swapped after each paintGL() call.
+If \fIon\fR is true and the widget is using a double-buffered format, the background and foreground GL buffers will automatically be swapped after each paintGL() call.
 .PP
 The buffer auto-swapping is on by default.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqgridlayout.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqgridlayout.3qt
index 6a1f93c78..369c535ce 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqgridlayout.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqgridlayout.3qt
@@ -286,11 +286,11 @@ Returns whether this layout can make use of more space than sizeHint(). A value
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQLayout.
 .SH "bool TQGridLayout::findWidget ( TQWidget * w, int * row, int * col )\fC [protected]\fR"
-Searches for widget \fIw\fR in this layout (not including child layouts). If \fIw\fR is found, it sets \fC<em>row</em>\fR and \fC<em>col</em>\fR to the row and column and returns TRUE; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Searches for widget \fIw\fR in this layout (not including child layouts). If \fIw\fR is found, it sets \fC<em>row</em>\fR and \fC<em>col</em>\fR to the row and column and returns true; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Note: if a widget spans multiple rows/columns, the top-left cell is returned.
 .SH "bool TQGridLayout::hasHeightForWidth () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if this layout's preferred height depends on its width; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this layout's preferred height depends on its width; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
 .SH "int TQGridLayout::heightForWidth ( int w ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqgridview.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqgridview.3qt
index 821d08551..f65ef87d1 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqgridview.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqgridview.3qt
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Inherits TQScrollView.
 .BI "int \fBcolumnAt\fR ( int x ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBrepaintCell\fR ( int row, int column, bool erase = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBrepaintCell\fR ( int row, int column, bool erase = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBupdateCell\fR ( int row, int column )"
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ The painter is not clipped by default in order to get maximum efficiency. If you
 .br
     //... your drawing code
 .br
-    p->setClipping( FALSE );
+    p->setClipping( false );
 .br
 .br
 .fi
@@ -167,10 +167,10 @@ The painter is not clipped by default in order to get maximum efficiency. If you
 This function fills the \fIcw\fR pixels wide and \fIch\fR pixels high rectangle starting at position (\fIcx\fR, \fIcy\fR) with the background color using the painter \fIp\fR.
 .PP
 paintEmptyArea() is invoked by drawContents() to erase or fill unused areas.
-.SH "void TQGridView::repaintCell ( int row, int column, bool erase = TRUE )"
+.SH "void TQGridView::repaintCell ( int row, int column, bool erase = true )"
 Repaints cell (\fIrow\fR, \fIcolumn\fR).
 .PP
-If \fIerase\fR is TRUE, TQt erases the area of the cell before the paintCell() call; otherwise no erasing takes place.
+If \fIerase\fR is true, TQt erases the area of the cell before the paintCell() call; otherwise no erasing takes place.
 .PP
 See also TQWidget::repaint().
 .SH "int TQGridView::rowAt ( int y ) const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqgroupbox.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqgroupbox.3qt
index 55865e69b..4bbb442ad 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqgroupbox.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqgroupbox.3qt
@@ -191,11 +191,11 @@ The default is usually 5, by may vary depending on the platform and style.
 .PP
 See also setInsideSpacing() and orientation.
 .SH "bool TQGroupBox::isCheckable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the group box has a checkbox in its title; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "checkable" property for details.
+Returns true if the group box has a checkbox in its title; otherwise returns false. See the "checkable" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQGroupBox::isChecked () const"
-Returns TRUE if the group box's checkbox is checked; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "checked" property for details.
+Returns true if the group box's checkbox is checked; otherwise returns false. See the "checked" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQGroupBox::isFlat () const"
-Returns TRUE if the group box is painted flat or has a frame; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "flat" property for details.
+Returns true if the group box is painted flat or has a frame; otherwise returns false. See the "flat" property for details.
 .SH "Orientation TQGroupBox::orientation () const"
 Returns the group box's orientation. See the "orientation" property for details.
 .SH "void TQGroupBox::setAlignment ( int )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Sets the group box title text. See the "title" property for details.
 .SH "TQString TQGroupBox::title () const"
 Returns the group box title text. See the "title" property for details.
 .SH "void TQGroupBox::toggled ( bool on )\fC [signal]\fR"
-If the group box has a check box (see isCheckable()) this signal is emitted when the check box is toggled. \fIon\fR is TRUE if the check box is checked; otherwise it is FALSE.
+If the group box has a check box (see isCheckable()) this signal is emitted when the check box is toggled. \fIon\fR is true if the check box is checked; otherwise it is false.
 .SS "Property Documentation"
 .SH "Alignment alignment"
 This property holds the alignment of the group box title.
@@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ Set this property's value with setAlignment() and get this property's value with
 .SH "bool checkable"
 This property holds whether the group box has a checkbox in its title.
 .PP
-If this property is TRUE, the group box has a checkbox. If the checkbox is checked (which is the default), the group box's children are enabled.
+If this property is true, the group box has a checkbox. If the checkbox is checked (which is the default), the group box's children are enabled.
 .PP
 setCheckable() controls whether or not the group box has a checkbox, and isCheckable() controls whether the checkbox is checked or not.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqguardedptr.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqguardedptr.3qt
index c2823a27b..4d874c93c 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqguardedptr.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqguardedptr.3qt
@@ -102,11 +102,11 @@ Copy one guarded pointer from another. The constructed guarded pointer points to
 .SH "TQGuardedPtr::~TQGuardedPtr ()"
 Destroys the guarded pointer. Just like a normal pointer, destroying a guarded pointer does \fInot\fR destroy the object being pointed to.
 .SH "bool TQGuardedPtr::isNull () const"
-Returns \fCTRUE\fR if the referenced object has been destroyed or if there is no referenced object; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns \fCTRUE\fR if the referenced object has been destroyed or if there is no referenced object; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQGuardedPtr::operator T * () const"
 Cast operator; implements pointer semantics. Because of this function you can pass a TQGuardedPtr<X> to a function where an X* is required.
 .SH "bool TQGuardedPtr::operator!= ( const TQGuardedPtr<T> & p ) const"
-Inequality operator; implements pointer semantics, the negation of operator==(). Returns TRUE if \fIp\fR and this guarded pointer are not pointing to the same object; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Inequality operator; implements pointer semantics, the negation of operator==(). Returns true if \fIp\fR and this guarded pointer are not pointing to the same object; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "T & TQGuardedPtr::operator* () const"
 Dereference operator; implements pointer semantics. Just use this operator as you would with a normal C++ pointer.
 .SH "T * TQGuardedPtr::operator-> () const"
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Assignment operator. This guarded pointer then points to the same object as \fIp\fR points to.
 .SH "bool TQGuardedPtr::operator== ( const TQGuardedPtr<T> & p ) const"
-Equality operator; implements traditional pointer semantics. Returns TRUE if both \fIp\fR and this guarded pointer are 0, or if both \fIp\fR and this pointer point to the same object; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Equality operator; implements traditional pointer semantics. Returns true if both \fIp\fR and this guarded pointer are 0, or if both \fIp\fR and this pointer point to the same object; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also operator!=().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqhbox.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqhbox.3qt
index f9be12b49..2acf0ad2b 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqhbox.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqhbox.3qt
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ See also TQHBoxLayout, TQVBox, TQGrid, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Manag
 .SH "TQHBox::TQHBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )"
 Constructs an hbox widget with parent \fIparent\fR, called \fIname\fR. The parent, name and widget flags, \fIf\fR, are passed to the TQFrame constructor.
 .SH "TQHBox::TQHBox ( bool horizontal, TQWidget * parent, const char * name, WFlags f = 0 )\fC [protected]\fR"
-Constructs a horizontal hbox if \fIhorizontal\fR is TRUE, otherwise constructs a vertical hbox (also known as a vbox).
+Constructs a horizontal hbox if \fIhorizontal\fR is true, otherwise constructs a vertical hbox (also known as a vbox).
 .PP
 This constructor is provided for the TQVBox class. You should never need to use it directly.
 .PP
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ Sets the spacing between the child widgets to \fIspace\fR.
 Examples:
 .)l i18n/mywidget.cpp, listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp, tqdir/tqdir.cpp, tabdialog/tabdialog.cpp, wizard/wizard.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQHBox::setStretchFactor ( TQWidget * w, int stretch )"
-Sets the stretch factor of widget \fIw\fR to \fIstretch\fR. Returns TRUE if \fIw\fR is found. Otherwise returns FALSE.
+Sets the stretch factor of widget \fIw\fR to \fIstretch\fR. Returns true if \fIw\fR is found. Otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQBoxLayout::setStretchFactor() and Layouts.
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqhboxlayout.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqhboxlayout.3qt
index 52e3bc3dc..2113d706f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqhboxlayout.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqhboxlayout.3qt
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ The simplest use of the class is like this:
 .br
         TQBoxLayout * l = new TQHBoxLayout( widget );
 .br
-        l->setAutoAdd( TRUE );
+        l->setAutoAdd( true );
 .br
         new QSomeWidget( widget );
 .br
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqheader.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqheader.3qt
index 3c9a7d65b..69b0b0198 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqheader.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqheader.3qt
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .BI "virtual void moveCell ( int fromIdx, int toIdx )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void setSortIndicator ( int section, bool ascending = TRUE )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "void setSortIndicator ( int section, bool ascending = true )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBsetSortIndicator\fR ( int section, SortOrder order )"
@@ -232,9 +232,9 @@ A header is composed of one or more \fIsections\fR, each of which can display a
 .PP
 Sections are added with addLabel() and removed with removeLabel(). The label and iconset are set in addLabel() and can be changed later with setLabel(). Use count() to retrieve the number of sections in the header.
 .PP
-The orientation of the header is set with setOrientation(). If setStretchEnabled() is TRUE, the sections will expand to take up the full width (height for vertical headers) of the header. The user can resize the sections manually if setResizeEnabled() is TRUE. Call adjustHeaderSize() to have the sections resize to occupy the full width (or height).
+The orientation of the header is set with setOrientation(). If setStretchEnabled() is true, the sections will expand to take up the full width (height for vertical headers) of the header. The user can resize the sections manually if setResizeEnabled() is true. Call adjustHeaderSize() to have the sections resize to occupy the full width (or height).
 .PP
-A section can be moved with moveSection(). If setMovingEnabled() is TRUE (the default)the user may drag a section from one position to another. If a section is moved, the index positions at which sections were added (with addLabel()), may not be the same after the move. You don't have to worry about this in practice because the TQHeader API works in terms of section numbers, so it doesn't matter where a particular section has been moved to.
+A section can be moved with moveSection(). If setMovingEnabled() is true (the default)the user may drag a section from one position to another. If a section is moved, the index positions at which sections were added (with addLabel()), may not be the same after the move. You don't have to worry about this in practice because the TQHeader API works in terms of section numbers, so it doesn't matter where a particular section has been moved to.
 .PP
 If you want the current index position of a section call mapToIndex() giving it the section number. (This is the number returned by the addLabel() call which created the section.) If you want to get the section number of a section at a particular index position call mapToSection() giving it the index number.
 .PP
@@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Adds a new section with iconset \fIiconset\fR and label text \fIs\fR. Returns the index position where the section was added (at the right for horizontal headers, at the bottom for vertical headers). The section's width is set to \fIsize\fR, unless size is negative in which case the size is calculated taking account of the size of the text.
 .SH "void TQHeader::adjustHeaderSize ()"
-Adjusts the size of the sections to fit the size of the header as completely as possible. Only sections for which isStretchEnabled() is TRUE will be resized.
+Adjusts the size of the sections to fit the size of the header as completely as possible. Only sections for which isStretchEnabled() is true will be resized.
 .SH "int TQHeader::cellAt ( int pos ) const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
@@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ Use sectionSize() instead.
 .PP
 Returns the size in pixels of the section that is displayed at the index \fIi\fR.
 .SH "void TQHeader::clicked ( int section )\fC [signal]\fR"
-If isClickEnabled() is TRUE, this signal is emitted when the user clicks section \fIsection\fR.
+If isClickEnabled() is true, this signal is emitted when the user clicks section \fIsection\fR.
 .PP
 See also pressed() and released().
 .SH "int TQHeader::count () const"
@@ -312,25 +312,25 @@ Returns the icon set for section \fIsection\fR. If the section does not exist, 0
 .SH "void TQHeader::indexChange ( int section, int fromIndex, int toIndex )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when the user moves section \fIsection\fR from index position \fIfromIndex\fR, to index position \fItoIndex\fR.
 .SH "bool TQHeader::isClickEnabled ( int section = -1 ) const"
-Returns TRUE if section \fIsection\fR is clickable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if section \fIsection\fR is clickable; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If \fIsection\fR is out of range (negative or larger than count() - 1): returns TRUE if all sections are clickable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+If \fIsection\fR is out of range (negative or larger than count() - 1): returns true if all sections are clickable; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setClickEnabled().
 .SH "bool TQHeader::isMovingEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the header sections can be moved; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "moving" property for details.
+Returns true if the header sections can be moved; otherwise returns false. See the "moving" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQHeader::isResizeEnabled ( int section = -1 ) const"
-Returns TRUE if section \fIsection\fR is resizeable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if section \fIsection\fR is resizeable; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If \fIsection\fR is -1 then this function applies to all sections, i.e. returns TRUE if all sections are resizeable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+If \fIsection\fR is -1 then this function applies to all sections, i.e. returns true if all sections are resizeable; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setResizeEnabled().
 .SH "bool TQHeader::isStretchEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the header sections always take up the full width (or height) of the header; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "stretching" property for details.
+Returns true if the header sections always take up the full width (or height) of the header; otherwise returns false. See the "stretching" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQHeader::isStretchEnabled ( int section ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if section \fIsection\fR will resize to take up the full width (or height) of the header; otherwise returns FALSE. If at least one section has stretch enabled the sections will always take up the full width of the header.
+Returns true if section \fIsection\fR will resize to take up the full width (or height) of the header; otherwise returns false. If at least one section has stretch enabled the sections will always take up the full width of the header.
 .PP
 See also setStretchEnabled().
 .SH "TQString TQHeader::label ( int section ) const"
@@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ Sets the size of the section \fIsection\fR to \fIs\fR pixels.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR does not repaint or send out signals
 .SH "void TQHeader::setClickEnabled ( bool enable, int section = -1 )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, any clicks on section \fIsection\fR will result in clicked() signals being emitted; otherwise the section will ignore clicks.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, any clicks on section \fIsection\fR will result in clicked() signals being emitted; otherwise the section will ignore clicks.
 .PP
 If \fIsection\fR is -1 (the default) then the \fIenable\fR value is set for all existing sections and will be applied to any new sections that are added.
 .PP
@@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ Sets the header's left-most (or top-most) visible pixel to \fIpos\fR. See the "o
 .SH "void TQHeader::setOrientation ( Orientation )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the header's orientation. See the "orientation" property for details.
 .SH "void TQHeader::setResizeEnabled ( bool enable, int section = -1 )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE the user may resize section \fIsection\fR; otherwise the section may not be manually resized.
+If \fIenable\fR is true the user may resize section \fIsection\fR; otherwise the section may not be manually resized.
 .PP
 If \fIsection\fR is negative (the default) then the \fIenable\fR value is set for all existing sections and will be applied to any new sections that are added. Example:
 .PP
@@ -473,11 +473,11 @@ If \fIsection\fR is negative (the default) then the \fIenable\fR value is set fo
 .br
     // Allow resizing of all current and future sections
 .br
-    header->setResizeEnabled(TRUE);
+    header->setResizeEnabled(true);
 .br
     // Disable resizing of section 3, (the fourth section added)
 .br
-    header->setResizeEnabled(FALSE, 3);
+    header->setResizeEnabled(false, 3);
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -490,16 +490,16 @@ Sets a sort indicator onto the specified \fIsection\fR. The indicator's \fIorder
 Only one section can show a sort indicator at any one time. If you don't want any section to show a sort indicator pass a \fIsection\fR number of -1.
 .PP
 See also sortIndicatorSection() and sortIndicatorOrder().
-.SH "void TQHeader::setSortIndicator ( int section, bool ascending = TRUE )"
+.SH "void TQHeader::setSortIndicator ( int section, bool ascending = true )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 Use the other overload instead.
 .SH "void TQHeader::setStretchEnabled ( bool b, int section )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE, section \fIsection\fR will be resized when the header is resized, so that the sections take up the full width (or height for vertical headers) of the header; otherwise section \fIsection\fR will be set to be unstretchable and will not resize when the header is resized.
+If \fIb\fR is true, section \fIsection\fR will be resized when the header is resized, so that the sections take up the full width (or height for vertical headers) of the header; otherwise section \fIsection\fR will be set to be unstretchable and will not resize when the header is resized.
 .PP
-If \fIsection\fR is -1, and if \fIb\fR is TRUE, then all sections will be resized equally when the header is resized so that they take up the full width (or height for vertical headers) of the header; otherwise all the sections will be set to be unstretchable and will not resize when the header is resized.
+If \fIsection\fR is -1, and if \fIb\fR is true, then all sections will be resized equally when the header is resized so that they take up the full width (or height for vertical headers) of the header; otherwise all the sections will be set to be unstretchable and will not resize when the header is resized.
 .PP
 See also adjustHeaderSize().
 .SH "void TQHeader::setStretchEnabled ( bool b )"
@@ -517,7 +517,7 @@ Returns the section showing the sort indicator or -1 if there is no sort indicat
 .PP
 See also setSortIndicator() and sortIndicatorOrder().
 .SH "bool TQHeader::tracking () const"
-Returns TRUE if the sizeChange() signal is emitted continuously; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "tracking" property for details.
+Returns true if the sizeChange() signal is emitted continuously; otherwise returns false. See the "tracking" property for details.
 .SS "Property Documentation"
 .SH "int count"
 This property holds the number of sections in the header.
@@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ Get this property's value with count().
 .SH "bool moving"
 This property holds whether the header sections can be moved.
 .PP
-If this property is TRUE (the default) the user can move sections. If the user moves a section the indexChange() signal is emitted.
+If this property is true (the default) the user can move sections. If the user moves a section the indexChange() signal is emitted.
 .PP
 See also setClickEnabled() and setResizeEnabled().
 .PP
@@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ This property holds whether the sizeChange() signal is emitted continuously.
 .PP
 If tracking is on, the sizeChange() signal is emitted continuously while the mouse is moved (i.e. when the header is resized), otherwise it is only emitted when the mouse button is released at the end of resizing.
 .PP
-Tracking defaults to FALSE.
+Tracking defaults to false.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setTracking() and get this property's value with tracking().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqhideevent.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqhideevent.3qt
index ea197d44a..d2f27d002 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqhideevent.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqhideevent.3qt
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ The TQHideEvent class provides an event which is sent after a widget is hidden.
 .PP
 This event is sent just before TQWidget::hide() returns, and also when a top-level window has been hidden (iconified) by the user.
 .PP
-If spontaneous() is TRUE the event originated outside the application, i.e. the user hid the window using the window manager controls, either by iconifying the window or by switching to another virtual desktop where the window isn't visible. The window will become hidden but not withdrawn. If the window was iconified, TQWidget::isMinimized() returns TRUE.
+If spontaneous() is true the event originated outside the application, i.e. the user hid the window using the window manager controls, either by iconifying the window or by switching to another virtual desktop where the window isn't visible. The window will become hidden but not withdrawn. If the window was iconified, TQWidget::isMinimized() returns true.
 .PP
 See also TQShowEvent and Event Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqhostaddress.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqhostaddress.3qt
index 49f2f5ad3..c9b64d7d9 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqhostaddress.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqhostaddress.3qt
@@ -101,19 +101,19 @@ Destroys the host address object.
 .PP
 Use toIPv4Address() instead.
 .SH "bool TQHostAddress::isIPv4Address () const"
-Returns TRUE if the host address represents an IPv4 address; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the host address represents an IPv4 address; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQHostAddress::isIPv6Address () const"
-Returns TRUE if the host address represents an IPv6 address; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the host address represents an IPv6 address; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQHostAddress::isIp4Addr () const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 Use isIPv4Address() instead.
 .SH "bool TQHostAddress::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if this host address is null (INADDR_ANY or in6addr_any). The default constructor creates a null address, and that address isn't valid for any particular host or interface.
+Returns true if this host address is null (INADDR_ANY or in6addr_any). The default constructor creates a null address, and that address isn't valid for any particular host or interface.
 .SH "TQHostAddress & TQHostAddress::operator= ( const TQHostAddress & address )"
 Assigns another host address object \fIaddress\fR to this object and returns a reference to this object.
 .SH "bool TQHostAddress::operator== ( const TQHostAddress & other ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this host address is the same as \fIother\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this host address is the same as \fIother\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "void TQHostAddress::setAddress ( TQ_UINT32 ip4Addr )"
 Set the IPv4 address specified by \fIip4Addr\fR.
 .SH "void TQHostAddress::setAddress ( TQ_UINT8 * ip6Addr )"
@@ -125,13 +125,13 @@ Set the IPv6 address specified by \fIip6Addr\fR.
 .SH "bool TQHostAddress::setAddress ( const TQString & address )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Sets the IPv4 or IPv6 address specified by the string representation \fIaddress\fR (e.g. "127.0.0.1"). Returns TRUE and sets the address if the address was successfully parsed; otherwise returns FALSE and leaves the address unchanged.
+Sets the IPv4 or IPv6 address specified by the string representation \fIaddress\fR (e.g. "127.0.0.1"). Returns true and sets the address if the address was successfully parsed; otherwise returns false and leaves the address unchanged.
 .SH "TQ_UINT32 TQHostAddress::toIPv4Address () const"
 Returns the IPv4 address as a number.
 .PP
 For example, if the address is 127.0.0.1, the returned value is 2130706433 (i.e. 0x7f000001).
 .PP
-This value is only valid when isIp4Addr() returns TRUE.
+This value is only valid when isIp4Addr() returns true.
 .PP
 See also toString().
 .SH "Q_IPV6ADDR TQHostAddress::toIPv6Address () const"
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Returns the IPv6 address as a Q_IPV6ADDR structure. The structure consists of 16
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-This value is only valid when isIPv6Address() returns TRUE.
+This value is only valid when isIPv6Address() returns true.
 .PP
 See also toString().
 .SH "TQString TQHostAddress::toString () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqhttp.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqhttp.3qt
index 6ae453c17..e5663caf2 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqhttp.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqhttp.3qt
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ For this example the following sequence of signals is emitted (with small variat
 .br
     requestStarted( 1 )
 .br
-    requestFinished( 1, FALSE )
+    requestFinished( 1, false )
 .br
 .br
     requestStarted( 2 )
@@ -211,10 +211,10 @@ For this example the following sequence of signals is emitted (with small variat
 .br
     stateChanged( Connected )
 .br
-    requestFinished( 2, FALSE )
+    requestFinished( 2, false )
 .br
 .br
-    done( FALSE )
+    done( false )
 .br
 .br
     stateChanged( Closing )
@@ -249,17 +249,17 @@ and the get() request fails because the host lookup fails, then the post() reque
 .br
     requestStarted( 1 )
 .br
-    requestFinished( 1, FALSE )
+    requestFinished( 1, false )
 .br
 .br
     requestStarted( 2 )
 .br
     stateChanged( HostLookup )
 .br
-    requestFinished( 2, TRUE )
+    requestFinished( 2, true )
 .br
 .br
-    done( TRUE )
+    done( true )
 .br
 .br
     stateChanged( Unconnected )
@@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ Returns the identifier of the HTTP request being executed or 0 if there is no re
 .PP
 See also currentRequest().
 .SH "TQHttpRequestHeader TQHttp::currentRequest () const"
-Returns the request header of the HTTP request being executed. If the request is one issued by setHost() or closeConnection(), it returns an invalid request header, i.e. TQHttpRequestHeader::isValid() returns FALSE.
+Returns the request header of the HTTP request being executed. If the request is one issued by setHost() or closeConnection(), it returns an invalid request header, i.e. TQHttpRequestHeader::isValid() returns false.
 .PP
 See also currentId().
 .SH "TQIODevice * TQHttp::currentSourceDevice () const"
@@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ This signal is emitted when this object sends data to a HTTP server to inform it
 .PP
 See also dataReadProgress(), post(), request(), and TQProgressBar::progress.
 .SH "void TQHttp::done ( bool error )\fC [signal]\fR"
-This signal is emitted when the last pending request has finished; (it is emitted after the last request's requestFinished() signal). \fIerror\fR is TRUE if an error occurred during the processing; otherwise \fIerror\fR is FALSE.
+This signal is emitted when the last pending request has finished; (it is emitted after the last request's requestFinished() signal). \fIerror\fR is true if an error occurred during the processing; otherwise \fIerror\fR is false.
 .PP
 See also requestFinished(), error(), and errorString().
 .SH "Error TQHttp::error () const"
@@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ When the request is started the requestStarted() signal is emitted. When it is f
 .PP
 See also setHost(), post(), head(), request(), requestStarted(), requestFinished(), and done().
 .SH "bool TQHttp::hasPendingRequests () const"
-Returns TRUE if there are any requests scheduled that have not yet been executed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if there are any requests scheduled that have not yet been executed; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The request that is being executed is \fInot\fR considered as a scheduled request.
 .PP
@@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 \fIdata\fR is used as the content data of the HTTP request.
 .SH "void TQHttp::requestFinished ( int id, bool error )\fC [signal]\fR"
-This signal is emitted when processing the request identified by \fIid\fR has finished. \fIerror\fR is TRUE if an error occurred during the processing; otherwise \fIerror\fR is FALSE.
+This signal is emitted when processing the request identified by \fIid\fR has finished. \fIerror\fR is true if an error occurred during the processing; otherwise \fIerror\fR is false.
 .PP
 See also requestStarted(), done(), error(), and errorString().
 .SH "void TQHttp::requestStarted ( int id )\fC [signal]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqhttpheader.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqhttpheader.3qt
index eb9bf96a9..5fd524b0c 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqhttpheader.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqhttpheader.3qt
@@ -124,19 +124,19 @@ Returns the value of the special HTTP header field \fCcontent-type\fR.
 .PP
 See also setContentType() and hasContentType().
 .SH "bool TQHttpHeader::hasContentLength () const"
-Returns TRUE if the header has an entry for the special HTTP header field \fCcontent-length\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the header has an entry for the special HTTP header field \fCcontent-length\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also contentLength() and setContentLength().
 .SH "bool TQHttpHeader::hasContentType () const"
-Returns TRUE if the header has an entry for the the special HTTP header field \fCcontent-type\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the header has an entry for the the special HTTP header field \fCcontent-type\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also contentType() and setContentType().
 .SH "bool TQHttpHeader::hasKey ( const TQString & key ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the HTTP header has an entry with the given \fIkey\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the HTTP header has an entry with the given \fIkey\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also value(), setValue(), and keys().
 .SH "bool TQHttpHeader::isValid () const"
-Returns TRUE if the HTTP header is valid; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the HTTP header is valid; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 A TQHttpHeader is invalid if it was created by parsing a malformed string.
 .SH "TQStringList TQHttpHeader::keys () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqicondrag.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqicondrag.3qt
index 6fd1919db..7edc9366e 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqicondrag.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqicondrag.3qt
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ See also TQIconDragItem.
 .PP
 Example: fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQIconDrag::canDecode ( TQMimeSource * e )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if \fIe\fR can be decoded by the TQIconDrag, otherwise return FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIe\fR can be decoded by the TQIconDrag, otherwise return false.
 .PP
 Example: fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
 .SH "TQByteArray TQIconDrag::encodedData ( const char * mime ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqicondragevent.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqicondragevent.3qt
index 546266042..50e11afa1 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqicondragevent.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqicondragevent.3qt
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ Icon drag events are sent to widgets when the main icon of a window has been dra
 See also Event Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "TQIconDragEvent::TQIconDragEvent ()"
-Constructs an icon drag event object with the accept parameter flag set to FALSE.
+Constructs an icon drag event object with the accept parameter flag set to false.
 .PP
 See also accept().
 .SH "void TQIconDragEvent::accept ()"
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ The icon drag event is constructed with the accept flag cleared.
 .PP
 See also accept().
 .SH "bool TQIconDragEvent::isAccepted () const"
-Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event has started a drag and drop operation; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the receiver of the event has started a drag and drop operation; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also accept() and ignore().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqiconfactory.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqiconfactory.3qt
index 7b244ba73..8ff9206e7 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqiconfactory.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqiconfactory.3qt
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ The TQIconFactory class is used to create pixmaps for a TQIconSet.
 .PP
 By reimplementing createPixmap(), you can override TQIconSet's default algorithm for computing pixmaps not supplied by the user.
 .PP
-Call setAutoDelete(TRUE) if you want the factory to automatically delete itself when it is no longer needed by TQIconSet.
+Call setAutoDelete(true) if you want the factory to automatically delete itself when it is no longer needed by TQIconSet.
 .PP
 See also TQIconSet and Advanced Widgets.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ Constructs an icon factory.
 .SH "TQIconFactory::~TQIconFactory ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
 .SH "bool TQIconFactory::autoDelete () const"
-Returns TRUE if auto-deletion is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if auto-deletion is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setAutoDelete().
 .SH "TQPixmap * TQIconFactory::createPixmap ( const TQIconSet & iconSet, TQIconSet::Size size, TQIconSet::Mode mode, TQIconSet::State state )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ See also installDefaultFactory().
 .SH "void TQIconFactory::installDefaultFactory ( TQIconFactory * factory )\fC [static]\fR"
 Replaces the default icon factory with \fIfactory\fR.
 .SH "void TQIconFactory::setAutoDelete ( bool autoDelete )"
-If \fIautoDelete\fR is TRUE, sets the icon factory to automatically delete itself when it is no longer referenced by any TQIconSet and isn't the default factory. If \fIautoDelete\fR is FALSE (the default) auto-deletion is disabled.
+If \fIautoDelete\fR is true, sets the icon factory to automatically delete itself when it is no longer referenced by any TQIconSet and isn't the default factory. If \fIautoDelete\fR is false (the default) auto-deletion is disabled.
 .PP
 See also autoDelete() and defaultFactory().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqiconset.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqiconset.3qt
index 50b5c90e4..396e01562 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqiconset.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqiconset.3qt
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ When scaling icons, TQIconSet uses smooth scaling, which can partially blend the
 .PP
 You can use the static function setIconSize() to set the preferred size of the generated large/small icons. The default small size is 22 x 22, while the default large size is 32 x 32. These sizes only affect generated icons.
 .PP
-The isGenerated() function returns TRUE if an icon was generated by TQIconSet or by a factory; clearGenerated() clears all cached pixmaps.
+The isGenerated() function returns true if an icon was generated by TQIconSet or by a factory; clearGenerated() clears all cached pixmaps.
 .SH "Making Classes that Use TQIconSet"
 If you write your own widgets that have an option to set a small pixmap, consider allowing a TQIconSet to be set for that pixmap. The TQt class TQToolButton is an example of such a widget.
 .PP
@@ -208,11 +208,11 @@ Installs \fIfactory\fR as the icon factory for this iconset. The icon factory is
 .PP
 If no icon factory is installed, TQIconFactory::defaultFactory() is used.
 .SH "bool TQIconSet::isGenerated ( Size size, Mode mode, State state = Off ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the pixmap with size \fIsize\fR, mode \fImode\fR and state \fIstate\fR is generated from other pixmaps; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the pixmap with size \fIsize\fR, mode \fImode\fR and state \fIstate\fR is generated from other pixmaps; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 A pixmap obtained from a TQIconFactory is considered non-generated.
 .SH "bool TQIconSet::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if the icon set is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the icon set is empty; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQIconSet & TQIconSet::operator= ( const TQIconSet & other )"
 Assigns \fIother\fR to this icon set and returns a reference to this icon set.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqiconview.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqiconview.3qt
index 9f9c57157..a4b3a8937 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqiconview.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqiconview.3qt
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Inherits TQScrollView.
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetCurrentItem\fR ( TQIconViewItem * item )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBsetSelected\fR ( TQIconViewItem * item, bool s, bool cb = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBsetSelected\fR ( TQIconViewItem * item, bool s, bool cb = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "uint \fBcount\fR () const"
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Inherits TQScrollView.
 .BI "bool \fBshowToolTips\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetSorting\fR ( bool sort, bool ascending = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBsetSorting\fR ( bool sort, bool ascending = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "bool \fBsorting\fR () const"
@@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ Inherits TQScrollView.
 .BI "bool \fBwordWrapIconText\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBsort\fR ( bool ascending = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBsort\fR ( bool ascending = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "bool \fBisRenaming\fR () const"
@@ -196,10 +196,10 @@ Inherits TQScrollView.
 .SS "Public Slots"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBarrangeItemsInGrid\fR ( const TQSize & grid, bool update = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBarrangeItemsInGrid\fR ( const TQSize & grid, bool update = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBarrangeItemsInGrid\fR ( bool update = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBarrangeItemsInGrid\fR ( bool update = true )"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SS "Signals"
@@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ The simplest way to create a TQIconView is to create a TQIconView object and cre
 .PP
 The TQIconViewItem call passes a pointer to the TQIconView we wish to populate, along with the label text and a TQPixmap.
 .PP
-When an item is inserted the TQIconView allocates a position for it. Existing items are rearranged if autoArrange() is TRUE. The default arrangement is LeftToRight -- the TQIconView fills up the \fIleft-most\fR column from top to bottom, then moves one column \fIright\fR and fills that from top to bottom and so on. The arrangement can be modified with any of the following approaches:
+When an item is inserted the TQIconView allocates a position for it. Existing items are rearranged if autoArrange() is true. The default arrangement is LeftToRight -- the TQIconView fills up the \fIleft-most\fR column from top to bottom, then moves one column \fIright\fR and fills that from top to bottom and so on. The arrangement can be modified with any of the following approaches:
 .TP
 Call setArrangement(), e.g. with TopToBottom which will fill the \fItop-most\fR row from left to right, then moves one row \fIdown\fR and fills that row from left to right and so on.
 .TP
@@ -441,9 +441,9 @@ TQIconViews and their TQIconViewItems can also be the targets of drag and drops.
 .br
         if ( mime->provides( "text/plain" ) )
 .br
-            return TRUE;
+            return true;
 .br
-        return FALSE;
+        return false;
 .br
     }
 .br
@@ -519,26 +519,26 @@ Constructs an empty icon view called \fIname\fR, with parent \fIparent\fR and us
 Destroys the icon view and deletes all items.
 .SH "void TQIconView::adjustItems ()\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR"
 Adjusts the positions of the items to the geometry of the icon view.
-.SH "void TQIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid ( const TQSize & grid, bool update = TRUE )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid ( const TQSize & grid, bool update = true )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 This variant uses \fIgrid\fR instead of (gridX(), gridY()). If \fIgrid\fR is invalid (see TQSize::isValid()), arrangeItemsInGrid() calculates a valid grid itself and uses that.
 .PP
-If \fIupdate\fR is TRUE (the default) the viewport is repainted.
+If \fIupdate\fR is true (the default) the viewport is repainted.
 .PP
 Example: fileiconview/tqfileiconview.h.
-.SH "void TQIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid ( bool update = TRUE )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQIconView::arrangeItemsInGrid ( bool update = true )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Arranges all the items in the grid given by gridX() and gridY().
 .PP
 Even if sorting() is enabled, the items are not sorted by this function. If you want to sort or rearrange the items, use iconview->sort(iconview->sortDirection()).
 .PP
-If \fIupdate\fR is TRUE (the default), the viewport is repainted as well.
+If \fIupdate\fR is true (the default), the viewport is repainted as well.
 .PP
 See also TQIconView::gridX, TQIconView::gridY, and TQIconView::sort().
 .SH "Arrangement TQIconView::arrangement () const"
 Returns the arrangement mode of the icon view. See the "arrangement" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQIconView::autoArrange () const"
-Returns TRUE if the icon view rearranges its items when a new item is inserted; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoArrange" property for details.
+Returns true if the icon view rearranges its items when a new item is inserted; otherwise returns false. See the "autoArrange" property for details.
 .SH "void TQIconView::clear ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Clears the icon view. All items are deleted.
 .SH "void TQIconView::clearSelection ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -646,7 +646,7 @@ Inserts the icon view item \fIitem\fR after \fIafter\fR. If \fIafter\fR is 0, \f
 .SH "void TQIconView::invertSelection ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Inverts the selection. Works only in Multi and Extended selection mode.
 .SH "bool TQIconView::isRenaming () const"
-Returns TRUE if an iconview item is being renamed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if an iconview item is being renamed; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "void TQIconView::itemRenamed ( TQIconViewItem * item, const TQString & name )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when \fIitem\fR has been renamed to \fIname\fR, usually by in-place renaming.
 .PP
@@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ Returns the brush to use when drawing the background of an item's text. See the
 .SH "ItemTextPos TQIconView::itemTextPos () const"
 Returns the position where the text of each item is drawn. See the "itemTextPos" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQIconView::itemsMovable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the user is allowed to move items around in the icon view; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "itemsMovable" property for details.
+Returns true if the user is allowed to move items around in the icon view; otherwise returns false. See the "itemsMovable" property for details.
 .SH "TQIconViewItem * TQIconView::lastItem () const"
 Returns a pointer to the last item of the icon view, or 0 if there are no items in the icon view.
 .PP
@@ -728,7 +728,7 @@ This signal is emitted when the user presses the right mouse button. If \fIitem\
 .PP
 \fIpos\fR is the position of the mouse cursor in the global coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()).
 .SH "void TQIconView::selectAll ( bool select )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-In Multi and Extended modes, this function sets all items to be selected if \fIselect\fR is TRUE, and to be unselected if \fIselect\fR is FALSE.
+In Multi and Extended modes, this function sets all items to be selected if \fIselect\fR is true, and to be unselected if \fIselect\fR is false.
 .PP
 In Single and NoSelection modes, this function only changes the selection status of currentItem().
 .SH "void TQIconView::selectionChanged ()\fC [signal]\fR"
@@ -761,30 +761,30 @@ Sets the maximum length (in characters) that an item's text may have to \fIw\fR.
 Sets the maximum width that an item may have to \fIw\fR. See the "maxItemWidth" property for details.
 .SH "void TQIconView::setResizeMode ( ResizeMode am )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the resize mode of the icon view to \fIam\fR. See the "resizeMode" property for details.
-.SH "void TQIconView::setSelected ( TQIconViewItem * item, bool s, bool cb = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQIconView::setSelected ( TQIconViewItem * item, bool s, bool cb = false )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Selects or unselects \fIitem\fR depending on \fIs\fR, and may also unselect other items, depending on TQIconView::selectionMode() and \fIcb\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIs\fR is FALSE, \fIitem\fR is unselected.
+If \fIs\fR is false, \fIitem\fR is unselected.
 .PP
-If \fIs\fR is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is Single, \fIitem\fR is selected, and the item which was selected is unselected.
+If \fIs\fR is true and TQIconView::selectionMode() is Single, \fIitem\fR is selected, and the item which was selected is unselected.
 .PP
-If \fIs\fR is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is Extended, \fIitem\fR is selected. If \fIcb\fR is TRUE, the selection state of the icon view's other items is left unchanged. If \fIcb\fR is FALSE (the default) all other items are unselected.
+If \fIs\fR is true and TQIconView::selectionMode() is Extended, \fIitem\fR is selected. If \fIcb\fR is true, the selection state of the icon view's other items is left unchanged. If \fIcb\fR is false (the default) all other items are unselected.
 .PP
-If \fIs\fR is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is Multi \fIitem\fR is selected.
+If \fIs\fR is true and TQIconView::selectionMode() is Multi \fIitem\fR is selected.
 .PP
-Note that \fIcb\fR is used only if TQIconView::selectionMode() is Extended. \fIcb\fR defaults to FALSE.
+Note that \fIcb\fR is used only if TQIconView::selectionMode() is Extended. \fIcb\fR defaults to false.
 .PP
 All items whose selection status is changed repaint themselves.
 .SH "void TQIconView::setSelectionMode ( SelectionMode m )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the selection mode of the icon view to \fIm\fR. See the "selectionMode" property for details.
 .SH "void TQIconView::setShowToolTips ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets whether the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text to \fIb\fR. See the "showToolTips" property for details.
-.SH "void TQIconView::setSorting ( bool sort, bool ascending = TRUE )"
-If \fIsort\fR is TRUE, this function sets the icon view to sort items when a new item is inserted. If \fIsort\fR is FALSE, the icon view will not be sorted.
+.SH "void TQIconView::setSorting ( bool sort, bool ascending = true )"
+If \fIsort\fR is true, this function sets the icon view to sort items when a new item is inserted. If \fIsort\fR is false, the icon view will not be sorted.
 .PP
-Note that autoArrange() must be TRUE for sorting to take place.
+Note that autoArrange() must be true for sorting to take place.
 .PP
-If \fIascending\fR is TRUE (the default), items are sorted in ascending order. If \fIascending\fR is FALSE, items are sorted in descending order.
+If \fIascending\fR is true (the default), items are sorted in ascending order. If \fIascending\fR is false, items are sorted in descending order.
 .PP
 TQIconViewItem::compare() is used to compare pairs of items. The sorting is based on the items' keys; these default to the items' text unless specifically set to something else.
 .PP
@@ -794,13 +794,13 @@ Sets the space in pixels between icon view items to \fIsp\fR. See the "spacing"
 .SH "void TQIconView::setWordWrapIconText ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets whether the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long to \fIb\fR. See the "wordWrapIconText" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQIconView::showToolTips () const"
-Returns TRUE if the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "showToolTips" property for details.
+Returns true if the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text; otherwise returns false. See the "showToolTips" property for details.
 .SH "void TQIconView::slotUpdate ()\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR"
 This slot is used for a slightly-delayed update.
 .PP
 The icon view is not redrawn immediately after inserting a new item but after a very small delay using a TQTimer. This means that when many items are inserted in a loop the icon view is probably redrawn only once at the end of the loop. This makes the insertions both flicker-free and faster.
-.SH "void TQIconView::sort ( bool ascending = TRUE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sorts and rearranges all the items in the icon view. If \fIascending\fR is TRUE, the items are sorted in increasing order, otherwise they are sorted in decreasing order.
+.SH "void TQIconView::sort ( bool ascending = true )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Sorts and rearranges all the items in the icon view. If \fIascending\fR is true, the items are sorted in increasing order, otherwise they are sorted in decreasing order.
 .PP
 TQIconViewItem::compare() is used to compare pairs of items. The sorting is based on the items' keys; these default to the items' text unless specifically set to something else.
 .PP
@@ -808,9 +808,9 @@ Note that this function sets the sort order to \fIascending\fR.
 .PP
 See also TQIconViewItem::key(), TQIconViewItem::setKey(), TQIconViewItem::compare(), TQIconView::setSorting(), and TQIconView::sortDirection.
 .SH "bool TQIconView::sortDirection () const"
-Returns TRUE if the sort direction for inserting new items is ascending;; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "sortDirection" property for details.
+Returns true if the sort direction for inserting new items is ascending;; otherwise returns false. See the "sortDirection" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQIconView::sorting () const"
-Returns TRUE if the icon view sorts on insertion; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "sorting" property for details.
+Returns true if the icon view sorts on insertion; otherwise returns false. See the "sorting" property for details.
 .SH "int TQIconView::spacing () const"
 Returns the space in pixels between icon view items. See the "spacing" property for details.
 .SH "void TQIconView::startDrag ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -818,7 +818,7 @@ Starts a drag.
 .SH "void TQIconView::takeItem ( TQIconViewItem * item )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Takes the icon view item \fIitem\fR out of the icon view and causes an update of the screen display. The item is not deleted. You should normally not need to call this function because TQIconViewItem::~TQIconViewItem() calls it. The normal way to delete an item is to delete it.
 .SH "bool TQIconView::wordWrapIconText () const"
-Returns TRUE if the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "wordWrapIconText" property for details.
+Returns true if the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long; otherwise returns false. See the "wordWrapIconText" property for details.
 .SS "Property Documentation"
 .SH "Arrangement arrangement"
 This property holds the arrangement mode of the icon view.
@@ -829,7 +829,7 @@ Set this property's value with setArrangement() and get this property's value wi
 .SH "bool autoArrange"
 This property holds whether the icon view rearranges its items when a new item is inserted.
 .PP
-The default is TRUE.
+The default is true.
 .PP
 Note that if the icon view is not visible at the time of insertion, TQIconView defers all position-related work until it is shown and then calls arrangeItemsInGrid().
 .PP
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ Set this property's value with setItemTextPos() and get this property's value wi
 .SH "bool itemsMovable"
 This property holds whether the user is allowed to move items around in the icon view.
 .PP
-The default is TRUE.
+The default is true.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setItemsMovable() and get this property's value with itemsMovable().
 .SH "int maxItemTextLength"
@@ -899,13 +899,13 @@ Set this property's value with setSelectionMode() and get this property's value
 .SH "bool showToolTips"
 This property holds whether the icon view will display a tool tip with the complete text for any truncated item text.
 .PP
-The default is TRUE. Note that this has no effect if setWordWrapIconText() is TRUE, as it is by default.
+The default is true. Note that this has no effect if setWordWrapIconText() is true, as it is by default.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setShowToolTips() and get this property's value with showToolTips().
 .SH "bool sortDirection"
 This property holds whether the sort direction for inserting new items is ascending;.
 .PP
-The default is TRUE (i.e. ascending). This sort direction is only meaningful if both sorting() and autoArrange() are TRUE.
+The default is true (i.e. ascending). This sort direction is only meaningful if both sorting() and autoArrange() are true.
 .PP
 To set the sort direction, use setSorting()
 .PP
@@ -913,7 +913,7 @@ Get this property's value with sortDirection().
 .SH "bool sorting"
 This property holds whether the icon view sorts on insertion.
 .PP
-The default is FALSE, i.e. no sorting on insertion.
+The default is false, i.e. no sorting on insertion.
 .PP
 To set the sorting, use setSorting().
 .PP
@@ -929,9 +929,9 @@ Set this property's value with setSpacing() and get this property's value with s
 .SH "bool wordWrapIconText"
 This property holds whether the item text will be word-wrapped if it is too long.
 .PP
-The default is TRUE.
+The default is true.
 .PP
-If this property is FALSE, icon text that is too long is truncated, and an ellipsis (...) appended to indicate that truncation has occurred. The full text can still be seen by the user if they hover the mouse because the full text is shown in a tooltip; see setShowToolTips().
+If this property is false, icon text that is too long is truncated, and an ellipsis (...) appended to indicate that truncation has occurred. The full text can still be seen by the user if they hover the mouse because the full text is shown in a tooltip; see setShowToolTips().
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setWordWrapIconText() and get this property's value with wordWrapIconText().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqiconviewitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqiconviewitem.3qt
index ec7933a6e..ab0278ec2 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqiconviewitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqiconviewitem.3qt
@@ -136,10 +136,10 @@ Inherits Qt.
 .BI "TQPoint \fBpos\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQRect \fBtextRect\fR ( bool relative = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "TQRect \fBtextRect\fR ( bool relative = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQRect \fBpixmapRect\fR ( bool relative = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "TQRect \fBpixmapRect\fR ( bool relative = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "bool \fBcontains\fR ( const TQPoint & pnt ) const"
@@ -166,10 +166,10 @@ Inherits Qt.
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetPicture\fR ( const TQPicture & icon )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBsetText\fR ( const TQString & text, bool recalc, bool redraw = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBsetText\fR ( const TQString & text, bool recalc, bool redraw = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBsetPixmap\fR ( const TQPixmap & icon, bool recalc, bool redraw = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBsetPixmap\fR ( const TQPixmap & icon, bool recalc, bool redraw = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetKey\fR ( const TQString & k )"
@@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ The simplest way to create a TQIconViewItem and insert it into a TQIconView is t
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-By default the text of an icon view item may not be edited by the user but calling setRenameEnabled(TRUE) will allow the user to perform in-place editing of the item's text.
+By default the text of an icon view item may not be edited by the user but calling setRenameEnabled(true) will allow the user to perform in-place editing of the item's text.
 .PP
 When the icon view is deleted all items in it are deleted automatically.
 .PP
@@ -283,9 +283,9 @@ Constructs an icon view item and inserts it into the icon view \fIparent\fR usin
 .SH "TQIconViewItem::~TQIconViewItem ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Destroys the icon view item and tells the parent icon view that the item has been destroyed.
 .SH "bool TQIconViewItem::acceptDrop ( const TQMimeSource * mime ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if you can drop things with a TQMimeSource of \fImime\fR onto this item; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if you can drop things with a TQMimeSource of \fImime\fR onto this item; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-The default implementation always returns FALSE. You must subclass TQIconViewItem and reimplement acceptDrop() to accept drops.
+The default implementation always returns false. You must subclass TQIconViewItem and reimplement acceptDrop() to accept drops.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp and iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
@@ -312,9 +312,9 @@ The default implementation compares the item keys (key()) using TQString::locale
 .PP
 See also key(), TQString::localeAwareCompare(), and TQString::compare().
 .SH "bool TQIconViewItem::contains ( const TQPoint & pnt ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the item contains the point \fIpnt\fR (in contents coordinates); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the item contains the point \fIpnt\fR (in contents coordinates); otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQIconViewItem::dragEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the user is allowed to drag the icon view item; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the user is allowed to drag the icon view item; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setDragEnabled().
 .SH "void TQIconViewItem::dragEntered ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ The default implementation does nothing; subclasses may reimplement this functio
 .PP
 Example: fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQIconViewItem::dropEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the user is allowed to drop something onto the item; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the user is allowed to drop something onto the item; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setDropEnabled().
 .SH "void TQIconViewItem::dropped ( TQDropEvent * e, const TQValueList<TQIconDragItem> & lst )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -347,13 +347,13 @@ Returns a pointer to this item's icon view parent.
 .SH "int TQIconViewItem::index () const"
 Returns the index of this item in the icon view, or -1 if an error occurred.
 .SH "bool TQIconViewItem::intersects ( const TQRect & r ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the item intersects the rectangle \fIr\fR (in contents coordinates); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the item intersects the rectangle \fIr\fR (in contents coordinates); otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQIconViewItem::isSelectable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the item is selectable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the item is selectable; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setSelectable().
 .SH "bool TQIconViewItem::isSelected () const"
-Returns TRUE if the item is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the item is selected; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setSelected().
 .PP
@@ -410,10 +410,10 @@ Returns the icon of the icon view item if it is a pixmap, or 0 if it is a pictur
 See also setPixmap().
 .PP
 Example: fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
-.SH "TQRect TQIconViewItem::pixmapRect ( bool relative = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "TQRect TQIconViewItem::pixmapRect ( bool relative = true ) const"
 Returns the bounding rectangle of the item's icon.
 .PP
-If \fIrelative\fR is TRUE, (the default), the rectangle is relative to the origin of the item's rectangle. If \fIrelative\fR is FALSE, the returned rectangle is relative to the origin of the icon view's contents coordinate system.
+If \fIrelative\fR is true, (the default), the rectangle is relative to the origin of the item's rectangle. If \fIrelative\fR is false, the returned rectangle is relative to the origin of the icon view's contents coordinate system.
 .PP
 Example: fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
 .SH "TQPoint TQIconViewItem::pos () const"
@@ -435,7 +435,7 @@ See also setRenameEnabled().
 .PP
 Example: fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQIconViewItem::renameEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the item can be renamed by the user with in-place renaming; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the item can be renamed by the user with in-place renaming; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setRenameEnabled().
 .PP
@@ -447,9 +447,9 @@ Returns 0.
 .PP
 Make your derived classes return their own values for rtti(), so that you can distinguish between icon view item types. You should use values greater than 1000, preferably a large random number, to allow for extensions to this class.
 .SH "void TQIconViewItem::setDragEnabled ( bool allow )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIallow\fR is TRUE, the icon view permits the user to drag the icon view item either to another position within the icon view or to somewhere outside of it. If \fIallow\fR is FALSE, the item cannot be dragged.
+If \fIallow\fR is true, the icon view permits the user to drag the icon view item either to another position within the icon view or to somewhere outside of it. If \fIallow\fR is false, the item cannot be dragged.
 .SH "void TQIconViewItem::setDropEnabled ( bool allow )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIallow\fR is TRUE, the icon view lets the user drop something on this icon view item.
+If \fIallow\fR is true, the icon view lets the user drop something on this icon view item.
 .SH "void TQIconViewItem::setItemRect ( const TQRect & r )\fC [protected]\fR"
 Sets the bounding rectangle of the whole item to \fIr\fR. This function is provided for subclasses which reimplement calcRect(), so that they can set the calculated rectangle. \fIAny other use is discouraged.\fR
 .PP
@@ -470,10 +470,10 @@ Sets \fIicon\fR as the item's icon in the icon view. This function might be a no
 \fBNote:\fR Pixmaps with individual dimensions larger than 300 pixels may not be displayed properly, depending on the arrangement in use. See the main class documentation for details.
 .PP
 See also pixmap().
-.SH "void TQIconViewItem::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & icon, bool recalc, bool redraw = TRUE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQIconViewItem::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & icon, bool recalc, bool redraw = true )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Sets \fIicon\fR as the item's icon in the icon view. If \fIrecalc\fR is TRUE, the icon view's layout is recalculated. If \fIredraw\fR is TRUE (the default), the icon view is repainted.
+Sets \fIicon\fR as the item's icon in the icon view. If \fIrecalc\fR is true, the icon view's layout is recalculated. If \fIredraw\fR is true (the default), the icon view is repainted.
 .PP
 \fBNote:\fR Pixmaps with individual dimensions larger than 300 pixels may not be displayed properly, depending on the arrangement in use. See the main class documentation for details.
 .PP
@@ -483,12 +483,12 @@ Sets the bounding rectangle of the item's icon to \fIr\fR. This function is prov
 .PP
 See also calcRect(), pixmapRect(), setItemRect(), and setTextRect().
 .SH "void TQIconViewItem::setRenameEnabled ( bool allow )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIallow\fR is TRUE, the user can rename the icon view item by clicking on the text (or pressing F2) while the item is selected (in-place renaming). If \fIallow\fR is FALSE, in-place renaming is not possible.
+If \fIallow\fR is true, the user can rename the icon view item by clicking on the text (or pressing F2) while the item is selected (in-place renaming). If \fIallow\fR is false, in-place renaming is not possible.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp, iconview/main.cpp, and iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
 .SH "void TQIconViewItem::setSelectable ( bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sets this item to be selectable if \fIenable\fR is TRUE (the default) or unselectable if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Sets this item to be selectable if \fIenable\fR is true (the default) or unselectable if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 The user is unable to select a non-selectable item using either the keyboard or the mouse. (The application programmer can select an item in code regardless of this setting.)
 .PP
@@ -496,15 +496,15 @@ See also isSelectable().
 .SH "void TQIconViewItem::setSelected ( bool s, bool cb )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Selects or unselects the item, depending on \fIs\fR; it may also unselect other items, depending on TQIconView::selectionMode() and \fIcb\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIs\fR is FALSE, the item is unselected.
+If \fIs\fR is false, the item is unselected.
 .PP
-If \fIs\fR is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is \fCSingle\fR, the item is selected and the item previously selected is unselected.
+If \fIs\fR is true and TQIconView::selectionMode() is \fCSingle\fR, the item is selected and the item previously selected is unselected.
 .PP
-If \fIs\fR is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is \fCExtended\fR, the item is selected. If \fIcb\fR is TRUE, the selection state of the other items is left unchanged. If \fIcb\fR is FALSE (the default) all other items are unselected.
+If \fIs\fR is true and TQIconView::selectionMode() is \fCExtended\fR, the item is selected. If \fIcb\fR is true, the selection state of the other items is left unchanged. If \fIcb\fR is false (the default) all other items are unselected.
 .PP
-If \fIs\fR is TRUE and TQIconView::selectionMode() is \fCMulti\fR, the item is selected.
+If \fIs\fR is true and TQIconView::selectionMode() is \fCMulti\fR, the item is selected.
 .PP
-Note that \fIcb\fR is used only if TQIconView::selectionMode() is \fCExtended\fR; cb defaults to FALSE.
+Note that \fIcb\fR is used only if TQIconView::selectionMode() is \fCExtended\fR; cb defaults to false.
 .PP
 All items whose selection status changes repaint themselves.
 .PP
@@ -512,17 +512,17 @@ Example: fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
 .SH "void TQIconViewItem::setSelected ( bool s )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-This variant is equivalent to calling the other variant with \fIcb\fR set to FALSE.
+This variant is equivalent to calling the other variant with \fIcb\fR set to false.
 .SH "void TQIconViewItem::setText ( const TQString & text )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets \fItext\fR as the text of the icon view item. This function might be a no-op if you reimplement text().
 .PP
 See also text().
 .PP
 Example: fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
-.SH "void TQIconViewItem::setText ( const TQString & text, bool recalc, bool redraw = TRUE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQIconViewItem::setText ( const TQString & text, bool recalc, bool redraw = true )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Sets \fItext\fR as the text of the icon view item. If \fIrecalc\fR is TRUE, the icon view's layout is recalculated. If \fIredraw\fR is TRUE (the default), the icon view is repainted.
+Sets \fItext\fR as the text of the icon view item. If \fIrecalc\fR is true, the icon view's layout is recalculated. If \fIredraw\fR is true (the default), the icon view is repainted.
 .PP
 See also text().
 .SH "void TQIconViewItem::setTextRect ( const TQRect & r )\fC [protected]\fR"
@@ -537,10 +537,10 @@ Returns the text of the icon view item. Normally you set the text of the item wi
 See also setText().
 .PP
 Example: fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
-.SH "TQRect TQIconViewItem::textRect ( bool relative = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "TQRect TQIconViewItem::textRect ( bool relative = true ) const"
 Returns the bounding rectangle of the item's text.
 .PP
-If \fIrelative\fR is TRUE, (the default), the returned rectangle is relative to the origin of the item's rectangle. If \fIrelative\fR is FALSE, the returned rectangle is relative to the origin of the icon view's contents coordinate system.
+If \fIrelative\fR is true, (the default), the returned rectangle is relative to the origin of the item's rectangle. If \fIrelative\fR is false, the returned rectangle is relative to the origin of the icon view's contents coordinate system.
 .PP
 Example: fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
 .SH "int TQIconViewItem::width () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqimage.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqimage.3qt
index 2db8e6b9c..448e20cf3 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqimage.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqimage.3qt
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ TQImage \- Hardware-independent pixmap representation with direct access to the
 .BI "void \fBfill\fR ( uint pixel )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBinvertPixels\fR ( bool invertAlpha = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBinvertPixels\fR ( bool invertAlpha = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQImage \fBconvertDepth\fR ( int depth ) const"
@@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ TQImage \- Hardware-independent pixmap representation with direct access to the
 .BI "TQImage \fBcreateAlphaMask\fR ( int conversion_flags = 0 ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQImage \fBcreateHeuristicMask\fR ( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "TQImage \fBcreateHeuristicMask\fR ( bool clipTight = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQImage \fBmirror\fR () const"
@@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ Constructs a shallow copy of \fIimage\fR.
 .SH "TQImage::~TQImage ()"
 Destroys the image and cleans up.
 .SH "bool TQImage::allGray () const"
-Returns TRUE if all the colors in the image are shades of gray (i.e. their red, green and blue components are equal); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if all the colors in the image are shades of gray (i.e. their red, green and blue components are equal); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 This function is slow for 32-bit images.
 .PP
@@ -551,7 +551,7 @@ Returns a deep copy of a sub-area of the image.
 .PP
 The returned image always has the size of the rectangle \fIr\fR. In areas beyond this image pixels are filled with pixel 0.
 .SH "bool TQImage::create ( int width, int height, int depth, int numColors = 0, Endian bitOrder = IgnoreEndian )"
-Sets the image \fIwidth\fR, \fIheight\fR, \fIdepth\fR, its number of colors (in \fInumColors\fR), and bit order. Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the parameters are incorrect or if memory cannot be allocated.
+Sets the image \fIwidth\fR, \fIheight\fR, \fIdepth\fR, its number of colors (in \fInumColors\fR), and bit order. Returns true if successful, or false if the parameters are incorrect or if memory cannot be allocated.
 .PP
 The \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR is limited to 32767. \fIdepth\fR must be 1, 8, or 32. If \fIdepth\fR is 1, \fIbitOrder\fR must be set to either TQImage::LittleEndian or TQImage::BigEndian. For other depths \fIbitOrder\fR must be TQImage::IgnoreEndian.
 .PP
@@ -570,14 +570,14 @@ See TQPixmap::convertFromImage() for a description of the \fIconversion_flags\fR
 The returned image has little-endian bit order, which you can convert to big-endianness using convertBitOrder().
 .PP
 See also createHeuristicMask(), hasAlphaBuffer(), and setAlphaBuffer().
-.SH "TQImage TQImage::createHeuristicMask ( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "TQImage TQImage::createHeuristicMask ( bool clipTight = true ) const"
 Creates and returns a 1-bpp heuristic mask for this image. It works by selecting a color from one of the corners, then chipping away pixels of that color starting at all the edges.
 .PP
 The four corners vote for which color is to be masked away. In case of a draw (this generally means that this function is not applicable to the image), the result is arbitrary.
 .PP
 The returned image has little-endian bit order, which you can convert to big-endianness using convertBitOrder().
 .PP
-If \fIclipTight\fR is TRUE the mask is just large enough to cover the pixels; otherwise, the mask is larger than the data pixels.
+If \fIclipTight\fR is true the mask is just large enough to cover the pixels; otherwise, the mask is larger than the data pixels.
 .PP
 This function disregards the alpha buffer.
 .PP
@@ -621,7 +621,7 @@ Convenience function. Gets the data associated with the absolute name \fIabs_nam
 .PP
 See also TQMimeSourceFactory, TQImage::fromMimeSource(), and TQImageDrag::decode().
 .SH "bool TQImage::hasAlphaBuffer () const"
-Returns TRUE if alpha buffer mode is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if alpha buffer mode is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setAlphaBuffer().
 .SH "int TQImage::height () const"
@@ -665,10 +665,10 @@ Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
 Returns a list of image formats that are supported for image input.
 .PP
 See also outputFormats(), inputFormatList(), and TQImageIO.
-.SH "void TQImage::invertPixels ( bool invertAlpha = TRUE )"
+.SH "void TQImage::invertPixels ( bool invertAlpha = true )"
 Inverts all pixel values in the image.
 .PP
-If the depth is 32: if \fIinvertAlpha\fR is TRUE, the alpha bits are also inverted, otherwise they are left unchanged.
+If the depth is 32: if \fIinvertAlpha\fR is true, the alpha bits are also inverted, otherwise they are left unchanged.
 .PP
 If the depth is not 32, the argument \fIinvertAlpha\fR has no meaning.
 .PP
@@ -678,11 +678,11 @@ See also fill(), depth(), and hasAlphaBuffer().
 .SH "bool TQImage::isGrayscale () const"
 For 32-bit images, this function is equivalent to allGray().
 .PP
-For 8-bpp images, this function returns TRUE if color(i) is TQRgb(i,i,i) for all indices of the color table; otherwise returns FALSE.
+For 8-bpp images, this function returns true if color(i) is TQRgb(i,i,i) for all indices of the color table; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also allGray() and depth().
 .SH "bool TQImage::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if it is a null image; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if it is a null image; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 A null image has all parameters set to zero and no allocated data.
 .PP
@@ -694,7 +694,7 @@ This is the beginning of the data block for the image.
 .PP
 See also bits() and scanLine().
 .SH "bool TQImage::load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )"
-Loads an image from the file \fIfileName\fR. Returns TRUE if the image was successfully loaded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Loads an image from the file \fIfileName\fR. Returns true if the image was successfully loaded; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If \fIformat\fR is specified, the loader attempts to read the image using the specified format. If \fIformat\fR is not specified (which is the default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to guess the file format.
 .PP
@@ -702,7 +702,7 @@ The TQImageIO documentation lists the supported image formats and explains how t
 .PP
 See also loadFromData(), save(), imageFormat(), TQPixmap::load(), and TQImageIO.
 .SH "bool TQImage::loadFromData ( const uchar * buf, uint len, const char * format = 0 )"
-Loads an image from the first \fIlen\fR bytes of binary data in \fIbuf\fR. Returns TRUE if the image was successfully loaded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Loads an image from the first \fIlen\fR bytes of binary data in \fIbuf\fR. Returns true if the image was successfully loaded; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If \fIformat\fR is specified, the loader attempts to read the image using the specified format. If \fIformat\fR is not specified (which is the default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to guess the file format.
 .PP
@@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ Returns a TQImage which is a vertically mirrored copy of this image. The origina
 .SH "TQImage TQImage::mirror ( bool horizontal, bool vertical ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns a mirror of the image, mirrored in the horizontal and/or the vertical direction depending on whether \fIhorizontal\fR and \fIvertical\fR are set to TRUE or FALSE. The original image is not changed.
+Returns a mirror of the image, mirrored in the horizontal and/or the vertical direction depending on whether \fIhorizontal\fR and \fIvertical\fR are set to true or false. The original image is not changed.
 .PP
 See also smoothScale().
 .SH "int TQImage::numBytes () const"
@@ -736,7 +736,7 @@ Example: themes/wood.cpp.
 .SH "TQPoint TQImage::offset () const"
 Returns the number of pixels by which the image is intended to be offset by when positioning relative to other images.
 .SH "bool TQImage::operator!= ( const TQImage & i ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this image and image \fIi\fR have different contents; otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison can be slow, unless there is some obvious difference, such as different widths, in which case the function will return quickly.
+Returns true if this image and image \fIi\fR have different contents; otherwise returns false. The comparison can be slow, unless there is some obvious difference, such as different widths, in which case the function will return quickly.
 .PP
 See also operator=().
 .SH "TQImage & TQImage::operator= ( const TQImage & image )"
@@ -752,7 +752,7 @@ If the image shares data with other images, it will first dereference the shared
 .PP
 Makes a call to TQPixmap::convertToImage().
 .SH "bool TQImage::operator== ( const TQImage & i ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this image and image \fIi\fR have the same contents; otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison can be slow, unless there is some obvious difference, such as different widths, in which case the function will return quickly.
+Returns true if this image and image \fIi\fR have the same contents; otherwise returns false. The comparison can be slow, unless there is some obvious difference, such as different widths, in which case the function will return quickly.
 .PP
 See also operator=().
 .SH "TQStringList TQImage::outputFormatList ()\fC [static]\fR"
@@ -807,7 +807,7 @@ Resets all image parameters and deallocates the image data.
 .SH "bool TQImage::save ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const"
 Saves the image to the file \fIfileName\fR, using the image file format \fIformat\fR and a quality factor of \fIquality\fR. \fIquality\fR must be in the range 0..100 or -1. Specify 0 to obtain small compressed files, 100 for large uncompressed files, and -1 (the default) to use the default settings.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the image was successfully saved; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the image was successfully saved; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also load(), loadFromData(), imageFormat(), TQPixmap::save(), and TQImageIO.
 .SH "bool TQImage::save ( TQIODevice * device, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const"
@@ -871,7 +871,7 @@ See also bytesPerLine(), bits(), and jumpTable().
 .PP
 Example: desktop/desktop.cpp.
 .SH "void TQImage::setAlphaBuffer ( bool enable )"
-Enables alpha buffer mode if \fIenable\fR is TRUE, otherwise disables it. The default setting is disabled.
+Enables alpha buffer mode if \fIenable\fR is true, otherwise disables it. The default setting is disabled.
 .PP
 An 8-bpp image has 8-bit pixels. A pixel is an index into the color table, which contains 32-bit color values. In a 32-bpp image, the 32-bit pixels are the color values.
 .PP
@@ -1016,7 +1016,7 @@ Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a copy,
 .br
 .fi
 .SH "bool TQImage::valid ( int x, int y ) const"
-Returns TRUE if ( \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR ) is a valid coordinate in the image; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if ( \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR ) is a valid coordinate in the image; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also width(), height(), and pixelIndex().
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqimagedecoder.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqimagedecoder.3qt
index 33ef1393b..5ba7a8e3c 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqimagedecoder.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqimagedecoder.3qt
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Constructs a TQImageDecoder that will send change information to the TQImageCons
 .SH "TQImageDecoder::~TQImageDecoder ()"
 Destroys a TQImageDecoder. The image it built is destroyed. The decoder built by the factory for the file format is destroyed. The consumer for which it decoded the image is \fInot\fR destroyed.
 .SH "int TQImageDecoder::decode ( const uchar * buffer, int length )"
-Call this function to decode some data into image changes. The data in \fIbuffer\fR will be decoded, sending change information to the TQImageConsumer of this TQImageDecoder until one of the change functions of the consumer returns FALSE. The length of the data is given in \fIlength\fR.
+Call this function to decode some data into image changes. The data in \fIbuffer\fR will be decoded, sending change information to the TQImageConsumer of this TQImageDecoder until one of the change functions of the consumer returns false. The length of the data is given in \fIlength\fR.
 .PP
 Returns the number of bytes consumed: 0 if consumption is complete, and -1 if decoding fails due to invalid data.
 .SH "TQImageFormatType * TQImageDecoder::format ( const char * name )\fC [static]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqimagedrag.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqimagedrag.3qt
index 30d3953ec..64729c221 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqimagedrag.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqimagedrag.3qt
@@ -56,13 +56,13 @@ Constructs a default image drag object. \fIdragSource\fR must be the drag source
 .SH "TQImageDrag::~TQImageDrag ()"
 Destroys the image drag object and frees up all allocated resources.
 .SH "bool TQImageDrag::canDecode ( const TQMimeSource * e )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the information in mime source \fIe\fR can be decoded into an image; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the information in mime source \fIe\fR can be decoded into an image; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also decode().
 .PP
 Example: desktop/desktop.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQImageDrag::decode ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQImage & img )\fC [static]\fR"
-Attempts to decode the dropped information in mime source \fIe\fR into \fIimg\fR. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Attempts to decode the dropped information in mime source \fIe\fR into \fIimg\fR. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also canDecode().
 .PP
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Example: desktop/desktop.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQImageDrag::decode ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQPixmap & pm )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Attempts to decode the dropped information in mime source \fIe\fR into pixmap \fIpm\fR. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Attempts to decode the dropped information in mime source \fIe\fR into pixmap \fIpm\fR. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 This is a convenience function that converts to a TQPixmap via a TQImage.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqimageio.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqimageio.3qt
index e19963090..7c6b46915 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqimageio.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqimageio.3qt
@@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Returns the quality of the written image, related to the compression ratio.
 .PP
 See also setQuality() and TQImage::save().
 .SH "bool TQImageIO::read ()"
-Reads an image into memory and returns TRUE if the image was successfully read; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Reads an image into memory and returns true if the image was successfully read; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Before reading an image you must set an IO device or a file name. If both an IO device and a file name have been set, the IO device will be used.
 .PP
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ Returns the image's IO status. A non-zero value indicates an error, whereas 0 me
 .PP
 See also setStatus().
 .SH "bool TQImageIO::write ()"
-Writes an image to an IO device and returns TRUE if the image was successfully written; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Writes an image to an IO device and returns true if the image was successfully written; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Before writing an image you must set an IO device or a file name. If both an IO device and a file name have been set, the IO device will be used.
 .PP
@@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ Example:
 .br
         if ( iio.write() )
 .br
-            // returned TRUE if written successfully
+            // returned true if written successfully
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqimevent.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqimevent.3qt
index 49593eaf3..396e8bdf1 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqimevent.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqimevent.3qt
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ If the user clicks another widget, taking the focus out of the widget where the
 See also Event Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "TQIMEvent::TQIMEvent ( Type type, const TQString & text, int cursorPosition )"
-Constructs a new TQIMEvent with the accept flag set to FALSE. \fItype\fR can be one of TQEvent::IMStartEvent, TQEvent::IMComposeEvent or TQEvent::IMEndEvent. \fItext\fR contains the current compostion string and \fIcursorPosition\fR the current position of the cursor inside \fItext\fR.
+Constructs a new TQIMEvent with the accept flag set to false. \fItype\fR can be one of TQEvent::IMStartEvent, TQEvent::IMComposeEvent or TQEvent::IMEndEvent. \fItext\fR contains the current compostion string and \fIcursorPosition\fR the current position of the cursor inside \fItext\fR.
 .SH "void TQIMEvent::accept ()"
 Sets the accept flag of the input method event object.
 .PP
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ The accept flag is cleared by default.
 .PP
 See also accept().
 .SH "bool TQIMEvent::isAccepted () const"
-Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event processed the event; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the receiver of the event processed the event; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int TQIMEvent::selectionLength () const"
 Returns the number of characters in the composition string ( starting at cursorPos() ) that should be marked as selected by the input widget receiving the event. Will return 0 for IMStartEvent and IMEndEvent.
 .SH "const TQString & TQIMEvent::text () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqinputdialog.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqinputdialog.3qt
index aa59f35cb..82dc541f5 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqinputdialog.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqinputdialog.3qt
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ TQInputDialog \- Simple convenience dialog to get a single value from the user
 Inherits TQDialog.
 .PP
 .SS "Static Public Members"
-<li class=fn>TQString \fBgetText\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, TQLineEdit::EchoMode mode = TQLineEdit::Normal, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) <li class=fn>int \fBgetInteger\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, int value = 0, int minValue = -2147483647, int maxValue = 2147483647, int step = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) <li class=fn>double \fBgetDouble\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, double value = 0, double minValue = -2147483647, double maxValue = 2147483647, int decimals = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) <li class=fn>TQString \fBgetItem\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, const TQStringList & list, int current = 0, bool editable = TRUE, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
+<li class=fn>TQString \fBgetText\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, TQLineEdit::EchoMode mode = TQLineEdit::Normal, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) <li class=fn>int \fBgetInteger\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, int value = 0, int minValue = -2147483647, int maxValue = 2147483647, int step = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) <li class=fn>double \fBgetDouble\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, double value = 0, double minValue = -2147483647, double maxValue = 2147483647, int decimals = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) <li class=fn>TQString \fBgetItem\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, const TQStringList & list, int current = 0, bool editable = true, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The TQInputDialog class provides a simple convenience dialog to get a single value from the user.
 .PP
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ See also Dialog Classes.
 .SH "double TQInputDialog::getDouble ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, double value = 0, double minValue = -2147483647, double maxValue = 2147483647, int decimals = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )\fC [static]\fR"
 Static convenience function to get a floating point number from the user. \fIcaption\fR is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. \fIlabel\fR is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). \fIvalue\fR is the default floating point number that the line edit will be set to. \fIminValue\fR and \fImaxValue\fR are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose, and \fIdecimals\fR is the maximum number of decimal places the number may have.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not-null \fI*\fR\fIok\fR will be set to TRUE if the user pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is \fIparent\fR; the dialog is called \fIname\fR. The dialog will be modal.
+If \fIok\fR is not-null \fI*\fR\fIok\fR will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is \fIparent\fR; the dialog is called \fIname\fR. The dialog will be modal.
 .PP
 This function returns the floating point number which has been entered by the user.
 .PP
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Use this static function like this:
 .SH "int TQInputDialog::getInteger ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, int value = 0, int minValue = -2147483647, int maxValue = 2147483647, int step = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )\fC [static]\fR"
 Static convenience function to get an integer input from the user. \fIcaption\fR is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. \fIlabel\fR is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). \fIvalue\fR is the default integer which the spinbox will be set to. \fIminValue\fR and \fImaxValue\fR are the minimum and maximum values the user may choose, and \fIstep\fR is the amount by which the values change as the user presses the arrow buttons to increment or decrement the value.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not-null *\fIok\fR will be set to TRUE if the user pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is \fIparent\fR; the dialog is called \fIname\fR. The dialog will be modal.
+If \fIok\fR is not-null *\fIok\fR will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is \fIparent\fR; the dialog is called \fIname\fR. The dialog will be modal.
 .PP
 This function returns the integer which has been entered by the user.
 .PP
@@ -112,12 +112,12 @@ Use this static function like this:
     }
 .br
 .fi
-.SH "TQString TQInputDialog::getItem ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, const TQStringList & list, int current = 0, bool editable = TRUE, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )\fC [static]\fR"
-Static convenience function to let the user select an item from a string list. \fIcaption\fR is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. \fIlabel\fR is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). \fIlist\fR is the string list which is inserted into the combobox, and \fIcurrent\fR is the number of the item which should be the current item. If \fIeditable\fR is TRUE the user can enter their own text; if \fIeditable\fR is FALSE the user may only select one of the existing items.
+.SH "TQString TQInputDialog::getItem ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, const TQStringList & list, int current = 0, bool editable = true, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )\fC [static]\fR"
+Static convenience function to let the user select an item from a string list. \fIcaption\fR is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. \fIlabel\fR is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). \fIlist\fR is the string list which is inserted into the combobox, and \fIcurrent\fR is the number of the item which should be the current item. If \fIeditable\fR is true the user can enter their own text; if \fIeditable\fR is false the user may only select one of the existing items.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not-null \fI*\fR\fIok\fR will be set to TRUE if the user pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is \fIparent\fR; the dialog is called \fIname\fR. The dialog will be modal.
+If \fIok\fR is not-null \fI*\fR\fIok\fR will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is \fIparent\fR; the dialog is called \fIname\fR. The dialog will be modal.
 .PP
-This function returns the text of the current item, or if \fIeditable\fR is TRUE, the current text of the combobox.
+This function returns the text of the current item, or if \fIeditable\fR is true, the current text of the combobox.
 .PP
 Use this static function like this:
 .PP
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Use this static function like this:
 .br
     TQString res = TQInputDialog::getItem(
 .br
-            "MyApp 3000", "Select an item:", lst, 1, TRUE, &ok,
+            "MyApp 3000", "Select an item:", lst, 1, true, &ok,
 .br
             this );
 .br
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Use this static function like this:
 .br
 .fi
 .SH "TQString TQInputDialog::getText ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, TQLineEdit::EchoMode mode = TQLineEdit::Normal, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )\fC [static]\fR"
-Static convenience function to get a string from the user. \fIcaption\fR is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. \fIlabel\fR is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). \fItext\fR is the default text which is placed in the line edit. The \fImode\fR is the echo mode the line edit will use. If \fIok\fR is not-null \fI*\fR\fIok\fR will be set to TRUE if the user pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is \fIparent\fR; the dialog is called \fIname\fR. The dialog will be modal.
+Static convenience function to get a string from the user. \fIcaption\fR is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. \fIlabel\fR is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). \fItext\fR is the default text which is placed in the line edit. The \fImode\fR is the echo mode the line edit will use. If \fIok\fR is not-null \fI*\fR\fIok\fR will be set to true if the user pressed OK and to false if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is \fIparent\fR; the dialog is called \fIname\fR. The dialog will be modal.
 .PP
 This function returns the text which has been entered in the line edit. It will not return an empty string.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqintcache.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqintcache.3qt
index f49d9274e..20d8a80ee 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqintcache.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqintcache.3qt
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ Inherits TQPtrCollection.
 .BI "virtual void \fBclear\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "type * \fBfind\fR ( long k, bool ref = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "type * \fBfind\fR ( long k, bool ref = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "type * \fBoperator[]\fR ( long k ) const"
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ A cache is a least recently used (LRU) list of cache items, accessed via \fClong
 .PP
 Apart from insert(), by far the most important function is find() (which also exists as operator[]). This function looks up an item, returns it, and by default marks it as being the most recently used item.
 .PP
-There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the cache. Calling setAutoDelete(TRUE) for a cache tells it to delete items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when they are removed (i.e. remove() and take() are equivalent).
+There are also methods to remove() or take() an object from the cache. Calling setAutoDelete(true) for a cache tells it to delete items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when they are removed (i.e. remove() and take() are equivalent).
 .PP
 When inserting an item into the cache, only the pointer is copied, not the item itself. This is called a shallow copy. It is possible to make the cache copy all of the item's data (known as a deep copy) when an item is inserted. insert() calls the virtual function TQPtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted. Inherit a dictionary and reimplement newItem() if you want deep copies.
 .PP
@@ -102,20 +102,20 @@ Returns the number of items in the cache.
 See also totalCost().
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQPtrCollection.
-.SH "type * TQIntCache::find ( long k, bool ref = TRUE ) const"
-Returns the item associated with \fIk\fR, or 0 if the key does not exist in the cache. If \fIref\fR is TRUE (the default), the item is moved to the front of the least recently used list.
+.SH "type * TQIntCache::find ( long k, bool ref = true ) const"
+Returns the item associated with \fIk\fR, or 0 if the key does not exist in the cache. If \fIref\fR is true (the default), the item is moved to the front of the least recently used list.
 .PP
 If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted most recently is returned.
 .SH "bool TQIntCache::insert ( long k, const type * d, int c = 1, int p = 0 )"
-Inserts the item \fId\fR into the cache with key \fIk\fR and assigns it a cost of \fIc\fR (default 1). Returns TRUE if it succeeds; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Inserts the item \fId\fR into the cache with key \fIk\fR and assigns it a cost of \fIc\fR (default 1). Returns true if it succeeds; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The cache's size is limited, and if the total cost is too high, TQIntCache will remove old, least-used items until there is room for this new item.
 .PP
 The parameter \fIp\fR is internal and should be left at the default value (0).
 .PP
-\fBWarning:\fR If this function returns FALSE (for example, the cost \fC,\fR exceeds maxCost()), you must delete \fId\fR yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using \fId\fR after calling this function. Any other insertions into the cache, from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could cause the object to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to become invalid.
+\fBWarning:\fR If this function returns false (for example, the cost \fC,\fR exceeds maxCost()), you must delete \fId\fR yourself. Additionally, be very careful about using \fId\fR after calling this function. Any other insertions into the cache, from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could cause the object to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to become invalid.
 .SH "bool TQIntCache::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the cache is empty; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int TQIntCache::maxCost () const"
 Returns the maximum allowed total cost of the cache.
 .PP
@@ -125,13 +125,13 @@ Returns the item associated with \fIk\fR, or 0 if \fIk\fR does not exist in the
 .PP
 If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted most recently is returned.
 .PP
-This is the same as find( k, TRUE ).
+This is the same as find( k, true ).
 .PP
 See also find().
 .SH "bool TQIntCache::remove ( long k )"
-Removes the item associated with \fIk\fR, and returns TRUE if the item was present in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Removes the item associated with \fIk\fR, and returns true if the item was present in the cache; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e. if you have called setAutoDelete(TRUE).
+The item is deleted if auto-deletion has been enabled, i.e. if you have called setAutoDelete(true).
 .PP
 If there are two or more items with equal keys, the one that was inserted most recently is removed.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqintcacheiterator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqintcacheiterator.3qt
index 4f241cde3..5d2d07455 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqintcacheiterator.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqintcacheiterator.3qt
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Note that the traversal order is arbitrary; you are not guaranteed any particula
 .PP
 Multiple iterators are completely independent, even when they operate on the same TQIntCache. TQIntCache updates all iterators that refer an item when that item is removed.
 .PP
-TQIntCacheIterator provides an operator++(), and an operator+=() to traverse the cache; current() and currentKey() to access the current cache item and its key; atFirst() atLast(), which return TRUE if the iterator points to the first/last item in the cache; isEmpty(), which returns TRUE if the cache is empty; and count(), which returns the number of items in the cache.
+TQIntCacheIterator provides an operator++(), and an operator+=() to traverse the cache; current() and currentKey() to access the current cache item and its key; atFirst() atLast(), which return true if the iterator points to the first/last item in the cache; isEmpty(), which returns true if the cache is empty; and count(), which returns the number of items in the cache.
 .PP
 Note that atFirst() and atLast() refer to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
 .PP
@@ -83,11 +83,11 @@ Constructs an iterator for \fIcache\fR. The current iterator item is set to poin
 .SH "TQIntCacheIterator::TQIntCacheIterator ( const TQIntCacheIterator<type> & ci )"
 Constructs an iterator for the same cache as \fIci\fR. The new iterator starts at the same item as ci.current(), but moves independently from there on.
 .SH "bool TQIntCacheIterator::atFirst () const"
-Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the first item in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
+Returns true if the iterator points to the first item in the cache; otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
 .PP
 See also toFirst() and atLast().
 .SH "bool TQIntCacheIterator::atLast () const"
-Returns TRUE if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
+Returns true if the iterator points to the last item in the cache; otherwise returns false. Note that this refers to the iterator's arbitrary ordering, not to the cache's internal least recently used list.
 .PP
 See also toLast() and atFirst().
 .SH "uint TQIntCacheIterator::count () const"
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Returns a pointer to the current iterator item.
 .SH "long TQIntCacheIterator::currentKey () const"
 Returns the key for the current iterator item.
 .SH "bool TQIntCacheIterator::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the cache is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the cache is empty; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also count().
 .SH "TQIntCacheIterator::operator type * () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqintdict.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqintdict.3qt
index c754c1d8a..02fa0a2d6 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqintdict.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqintdict.3qt
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ All iterators that access this dictionary will be reset.
 .PP
 See also setAutoDelete().
 .SH "bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const"
-Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
+Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is false.
 .PP
 See also setAutoDelete().
 .SH "void TQIntDict::clear ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ See also replace().
 .PP
 Example: scribble/scribble.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQIntDict::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also count().
 .SH "TQIntDict<type> & TQIntDict::operator= ( const TQIntDict<type> & dict )"
@@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ The default implementation sets \fIitem\fR to 0.
 .PP
 See also write().
 .SH "bool TQIntDict::remove ( long key )"
-Removes the item associated with \fIkey\fR from the dictionary. Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the \fIkey\fR is in the dictionary; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Removes the item associated with \fIkey\fR from the dictionary. Returns true if successful, i.e. if the \fIkey\fR is in the dictionary; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most recently inserted item will be removed.
 .PP
@@ -254,11 +254,11 @@ Example: table/bigtable/main.cpp.
 .SH "void TQIntDict::resize ( uint newsize )"
 Changes the size of the hashtable to \fInewsize\fR. The contents of the dictionary are preserved, but all iterators on the dictionary become invalid.
 .SH "void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )"
-Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is TRUE and to never delete them if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is true and to never delete them if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
 .PP
-The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items.
+The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items.
 .PP
 Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove() function will remove the item from its data structure, and if auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqintdictiterator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqintdictiterator.3qt
index 89720ceb7..1cdf48cc5 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqintdictiterator.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqintdictiterator.3qt
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Returns a pointer to the current iterator item.
 .SH "long TQIntDictIterator::currentKey () const"
 Returns the key for the current iterator item.
 .SH "bool TQIntDictIterator::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise eturns FALSE.
+Returns true if the dictionary is empty; otherwise eturns false.
 .PP
 See also count().
 .SH "TQIntDictIterator::operator type * () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqiodevice.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqiodevice.3qt
index 4a581aa46..189adeca6 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqiodevice.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqiodevice.3qt
@@ -211,13 +211,13 @@ Buffering. Some devices are accessed in raw mode, whereas others are buffered. B
 Synchronicity. Synchronous devices work immediately (for example, files). When you read from a file, the file delivers its data straight away. Other kinds of device, such as a socket connected to a HTTP server, may not deliver the data until seconds after you ask to read it. isSynchronous() and isAsynchronous() tell the user how this device operates.
 .IP
 .TP
-CR/LF translation. For simplicity, applications often like to see just a single CR/LF style, and TQIODevice subclasses can provide this. isTranslated() returns TRUE if this object translates CR/LF to just LF. (This can often be set by the application in the call to open().)
+CR/LF translation. For simplicity, applications often like to see just a single CR/LF style, and TQIODevice subclasses can provide this. isTranslated() returns true if this object translates CR/LF to just LF. (This can often be set by the application in the call to open().)
 .IP
 .TP
 Permissions. Some files cannot be written. For example, isReadable(), isWritable() and isReadWrite() tell the application whether it can read from and write to a given device. (This can often be set by the application in the call to open().)
 .IP
 .TP
-Finally, isOpen() returns TRUE if the device is open, i.e. after an open() call.
+Finally, isOpen() returns true if the device is open, i.e. after an open() call.
 .IP
 .PP
 TQIODevice provides numerous pure virtual functions that you need to implement when subclassing it. Here is a skeleton subclass with all the members you are sure to need and some that you will probably need:
@@ -290,13 +290,13 @@ Example: distributor/distributor.ui.h.
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQSocket.
 .SH "bool TQIODevice::at ( Offset pos )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Virtual function that sets the I/O device position to \fIpos\fR. Returns TRUE if the position was successfully set, i.e. \fIpos\fR is within range and the seek was successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Virtual function that sets the I/O device position to \fIpos\fR. Returns true if the position was successfully set, i.e. \fIpos\fR is within range and the seek was successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also size().
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQSocket.
 .SH "bool TQIODevice::atEnd () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Virtual function that returns TRUE if the I/O device position is at the end of the input; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Virtual function that returns true if the I/O device position is at the end of the input; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
 .SH "void TQIODevice::close ()\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
@@ -330,61 +330,61 @@ See also putch() and ungetch().
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQFile and TQSocket.
 .SH "bool TQIODevice::isAsynchronous () const"
-Returns TRUE if the device is an asynchronous device; otherwise returns FALSE, i.e. if the device is a synchronous device.
+Returns true if the device is an asynchronous device; otherwise returns false, i.e. if the device is a synchronous device.
 .PP
 This mode is currently not in use.
 .PP
 See also isSynchronous().
 .SH "bool TQIODevice::isBuffered () const"
-Returns TRUE if the I/O device is a buffered device; otherwise returns FALSE, i.e. the device is a raw device.
+Returns true if the I/O device is a buffered device; otherwise returns false, i.e. the device is a raw device.
 .PP
 See also isRaw().
 .SH "bool TQIODevice::isCombinedAccess () const"
-Returns TRUE if the I/O device is a combined access (both direct and sequential) device; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the I/O device is a combined access (both direct and sequential) device; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 This access method is currently not in use.
 .SH "bool TQIODevice::isDirectAccess () const"
-Returns TRUE if the I/O device is a direct access device; otherwise returns FALSE, i.e. if the device is a sequential access device.
+Returns true if the I/O device is a direct access device; otherwise returns false, i.e. if the device is a sequential access device.
 .PP
 See also isSequentialAccess().
 .SH "bool TQIODevice::isInactive () const"
-Returns TRUE if the I/O device state is 0, i.e. the device is not open; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the I/O device state is 0, i.e. the device is not open; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isOpen().
 .SH "bool TQIODevice::isOpen () const"
-Returns TRUE if the I/O device has been opened; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the I/O device has been opened; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isInactive().
 .PP
 Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQIODevice::isRaw () const"
-Returns TRUE if the device is a raw device; otherwise returns FALSE, i.e. if the device is a buffered device.
+Returns true if the device is a raw device; otherwise returns false, i.e. if the device is a buffered device.
 .PP
 See also isBuffered().
 .SH "bool TQIODevice::isReadWrite () const"
-Returns TRUE if the I/O device was opened using IO_ReadWrite mode; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the I/O device was opened using IO_ReadWrite mode; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isReadable() and isWritable().
 .SH "bool TQIODevice::isReadable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the I/O device was opened using IO_ReadOnly or IO_ReadWrite mode; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the I/O device was opened using IO_ReadOnly or IO_ReadWrite mode; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isWritable() and isReadWrite().
 .SH "bool TQIODevice::isSequentialAccess () const"
-Returns TRUE if the device is a sequential access device; otherwise returns FALSE, i.e. if the device is a direct access device.
+Returns true if the device is a sequential access device; otherwise returns false, i.e. if the device is a direct access device.
 .PP
 Operations involving size() and at(int) are not valid on sequential devices.
 .PP
 See also isDirectAccess().
 .SH "bool TQIODevice::isSynchronous () const"
-Returns TRUE if the I/O device is a synchronous device; otherwise returns FALSE, i.e. the device is an asynchronous device.
+Returns true if the I/O device is a synchronous device; otherwise returns false, i.e. the device is an asynchronous device.
 .PP
 See also isAsynchronous().
 .SH "bool TQIODevice::isTranslated () const"
-Returns TRUE if the I/O device translates carriage-return and linefeed characters; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the I/O device translates carriage-return and linefeed characters; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 A TQFile is translated if it is opened with the IO_Translate mode flag.
 .SH "bool TQIODevice::isWritable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the I/O device was opened using IO_WriteOnly or IO_ReadWrite mode; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the I/O device was opened using IO_WriteOnly or IO_ReadWrite mode; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isReadable() and isReadWrite().
 .SH "int TQIODevice::mode () const"
@@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ These are the flags that were given to the open() function.
 .PP
 The flags are IO_ReadOnly, IO_WriteOnly, IO_ReadWrite, IO_Append, IO_Truncate and IO_Translate.
 .SH "bool TQIODevice::open ( int mode )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-Opens the I/O device using the specified \fImode\fR. Returns TRUE if the device was successfully opened; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Opens the I/O device using the specified \fImode\fR. Returns true if the device was successfully opened; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The mode parameter \fImode\fR must be an OR'ed combination of the following flags. <center>.nf
 .TS
@@ -477,7 +477,7 @@ Subclasses may define additional flags.
 .SH "int TQIODevice::status () const"
 Returns the I/O device status.
 .PP
-The I/O device status returns an error code. If open() returns FALSE or readBlock() or writeBlock() return -1, this function can be called to find out the reason why the operation failed.
+The I/O device status returns an error code. If open() returns false or readBlock() or writeBlock() return -1, this function can be called to find out the reason why the operation failed.
 .PP
 
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqkeyevent.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqkeyevent.3qt
index 2d203de58..52c567353 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqkeyevent.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqkeyevent.3qt
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Inherits TQEvent.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQKeyEvent\fR ( Type type, int key, int ascii, int state, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool autorep = FALSE, ushort count = 1 )"
+.BI "\fBTQKeyEvent\fR ( Type type, int key, int ascii, int state, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool autorep = false, ushort count = 1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBkey\fR () const"
@@ -62,12 +62,12 @@ The event handlers TQWidget::keyPressEvent() and TQWidget::keyReleaseEvent() rec
 .PP
 See also TQFocusEvent, TQWidget::grabKeyboard(), and Event Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQKeyEvent::TQKeyEvent ( Type type, int key, int ascii, int state, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool autorep = FALSE, ushort count = 1 )"
+.SH "TQKeyEvent::TQKeyEvent ( Type type, int key, int ascii, int state, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool autorep = false, ushort count = 1 )"
 Constructs a key event object.
 .PP
-The \fItype\fR parameter must be TQEvent::KeyPress or TQEvent::KeyRelease. If \fIkey\fR is 0 the event is not a result of a known key (e.g. it may be the result of a compose sequence or keyboard macro). \fIascii\fR is the ASCII code of the key that was pressed or released. \fIstate\fR holds the keyboard modifiers. \fItext\fR is the Unicode text that the key generated. If \fIautorep\fR is TRUE, isAutoRepeat() will be TRUE. \fIcount\fR is the number of single keys.
+The \fItype\fR parameter must be TQEvent::KeyPress or TQEvent::KeyRelease. If \fIkey\fR is 0 the event is not a result of a known key (e.g. it may be the result of a compose sequence or keyboard macro). \fIascii\fR is the ASCII code of the key that was pressed or released. \fIstate\fR holds the keyboard modifiers. \fItext\fR is the Unicode text that the key generated. If \fIautorep\fR is true, isAutoRepeat() will be true. \fIcount\fR is the number of single keys.
 .PP
-The accept flag is set to TRUE.
+The accept flag is set to true.
 .SH "void TQKeyEvent::accept ()"
 Sets the accept flag of the key event object.
 .PP
@@ -95,11 +95,11 @@ The accept flag is set by default.
 .PP
 See also accept().
 .SH "bool TQKeyEvent::isAccepted () const"
-Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event wants to keep the key; otherwise returns FALSE
+Returns true if the receiver of the event wants to keep the key; otherwise returns false
 .SH "bool TQKeyEvent::isAutoRepeat () const"
-Returns TRUE if this event comes from an auto-repeating key and FALSE if it comes from an initial key press.
+Returns true if this event comes from an auto-repeating key and false if it comes from an initial key press.
 .PP
-Note that if the event is a multiple-key compressed event that is partly due to auto-repeat, this function could return either TRUE or FALSE indeterminately.
+Note that if the event is a multiple-key compressed event that is partly due to auto-repeat, this function could return either true or false indeterminately.
 .SH "int TQKeyEvent::key () const"
 Returns the code of the key that was pressed or released.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqkeysequence.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqkeysequence.3qt
index d2caaf05d..c88c70b9a 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqkeysequence.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqkeysequence.3qt
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ Destroys the key sequence.
 .SH "uint TQKeySequence::count () const"
 Returns the number of keys in the key sequence. The maximum is 4.
 .SH "bool TQKeySequence::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the key sequence is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the key sequence is empty; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQt::SequenceMatch TQKeySequence::matches ( const TQKeySequence & seq ) const"
 Matches the sequence with \fIseq\fR. Returns TQt::Identical if successful, TQt::PartialMatch for matching but incomplete \fIseq\fR, and TQt::NoMatch if the sequences have nothing in common. Returns TQt::NoMatch if \fIseq\fR is shorter.
 .SH "TQKeySequence::operator TQString () const"
@@ -126,11 +126,11 @@ On Mac OS X, the string returned resembles the sequence that is shown in the men
 .PP
 For backward compatibility: returns the first keycode as integer. If the key sequence is empty, 0 is returned.
 .SH "bool TQKeySequence::operator!= ( const TQKeySequence & keysequence ) const"
-Returns TRUE if \fIkeysequence\fR is not equal to this key sequence; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIkeysequence\fR is not equal to this key sequence; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQKeySequence & TQKeySequence::operator= ( const TQKeySequence & keysequence )"
 Assignment operator. Assigns \fIkeysequence\fR to this object.
 .SH "bool TQKeySequence::operator== ( const TQKeySequence & keysequence ) const"
-Returns TRUE if \fIkeysequence\fR is equal to this key sequence; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIkeysequence\fR is equal to this key sequence; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int TQKeySequence::operator[] ( uint index ) const"
 Returns a reference to the element at position \fIindex\fR in the key sequence. This can only be used to read an element.
 .SH RELATED FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlabel.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlabel.3qt
index e975522d2..5c0d1be79 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqlabel.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlabel.3qt
@@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Returns the alignment of the label's contents. See the "alignment" property for
 .SH "bool TQLabel::autoResize () const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if auto-resizing is enabled, or FALSE if auto-resizing is disabled.
+Returns true if auto-resizing is enabled, or false if auto-resizing is disabled.
 .PP
 Auto-resizing is disabled by default.
 .PP
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Draws the label contents using the painter \fIp\fR.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQFrame.
 .SH "bool TQLabel::hasScaledContents () const"
-Returns TRUE if the label will scale its contents to fill all available space; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "scaledContents" property for details.
+Returns true if the label will scale its contents to fill all available space; otherwise returns false. See the "scaledContents" property for details.
 .SH "int TQLabel::indent () const"
 Returns the label's text indent in pixels. See the "indent" property for details.
 .SH "TQMovie * TQLabel::movie () const"
@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ Sets the alignment of the label's contents. See the "alignment" property for det
 .SH "void TQLabel::setAutoResize ( bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-Enables auto-resizing if \fIenable\fR is TRUE, or disables it if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Enables auto-resizing if \fIenable\fR is true, or disables it if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 When auto-resizing is enabled the label will resize itself to fit the contents whenever the contents change. The top-left corner is not moved. This is useful for TQLabel widgets that are not managed by a TQLayout (e.g., top-level widgets).
 .PP
@@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ This property holds the alignment of the label's contents.
 .PP
 The alignment is a bitwise OR of TQt::AlignmentFlags and TQt::TextFlags values. The ExpandTabs, SingleLine and ShowPrefix flags apply only if the label contains plain text; otherwise they are ignored. The DontClip flag is always ignored. WordBreak applies to both rich text and plain text labels. The BreakAnywhere flag is not supported in TQLabel.
 .PP
-If the label has a buddy, the ShowPrefix flag is forced to TRUE.
+If the label has a buddy, the ShowPrefix flag is forced to true.
 .PP
 The default alignment is \fCAlignAuto | AlignVCenter | ExpandTabs\fR if the label doesn't have a buddy and \fCAlignAuto | AlignVCenter | ExpandTabs | ShowPrefix\fR if the label has a buddy. If the label contains rich text, additionally WordBreak is turned on.
 .PP
@@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ This property holds the label's pixmap.
 .PP
 If no pixmap has been set this will return an invalid pixmap.
 .PP
-Setting the pixmap clears any previous content, and resizes the label if TQLabel::autoResize() is TRUE. The buddy accelerator, if any, is disabled.
+Setting the pixmap clears any previous content, and resizes the label if TQLabel::autoResize() is true. The buddy accelerator, if any, is disabled.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setPixmap() and get this property's value with pixmap().
 .SH "bool scaledContents"
@@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ This property holds whether the label will scale its contents to fill all availa
 .PP
 When enabled and the label shows a pixmap, it will scale the pixmap to fill the available space.
 .PP
-This property's default is FALSE.
+This property's default is false.
 .PP
 See also scaledContents.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlayout.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlayout.3qt
index f849bce8b..df3191791 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqlayout.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlayout.3qt
@@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Returns the rectangle that should be covered when the geometry of this layout is
 .PP
 The result is derived from sizeHint() and expanding(). It is never larger than \fIr\fR.
 .SH "bool TQLayout::autoAdd () const"
-Returns TRUE if this layout automatically grabs all new mainWidget()'s new children and adds them as defined by addItem(); otherwise returns FALSE. This has effect only for top-level layouts, i.e. layouts that are direct children of their mainWidget().
+Returns true if this layout automatically grabs all new mainWidget()'s new children and adds them as defined by addItem(); otherwise returns false. This has effect only for top-level layouts, i.e. layouts that are direct children of their mainWidget().
 .PP
 autoAdd() is disabled by default.
 .PP
@@ -233,15 +233,15 @@ Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQGridLayout and TQBoxLayout.
 .SH "bool TQLayout::isEmpty () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if this layout is empty. The default implementation returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this layout is empty. The default implementation returns false.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
 .SH "bool TQLayout::isEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the layout is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the layout is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setEnabled().
 .SH "bool TQLayout::isTopLevel () const"
-Returns TRUE if this layout is a top-level layout, i.e. not a child of another layout; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this layout is a top-level layout, i.e. not a child of another layout; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQLayoutIterator TQLayout::iterator ()\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 Implemented in subclasses to return an iterator that iterates over this layout's children.
 .PP
@@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ See also remove() and addItem().
 .SH "ResizeMode TQLayout::resizeMode () const"
 Returns the resize mode of the layout. See the "resizeMode" property for details.
 .SH "void TQLayout::setAutoAdd ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE, auto-add is enabled; otherwise auto-add is disabled.
+If \fIb\fR is true, auto-add is enabled; otherwise auto-add is disabled.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR If auto-add is enabled, you cannot set stretch factors on the child widgets until the widgets are actually inserted in the layout (after control returned to the event loop). We therefore recommend that you avoid the auto-add feature in new programs.
 .PP
@@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ See also autoAdd().
 Examples:
 .)l hierarchy/objects.cpp and i18n/main.cpp.
 .SH "void TQLayout::setEnabled ( bool enable )"
-Enables this layout if \fIenable\fR is TRUE, otherwise disables it.
+Enables this layout if \fIenable\fR is true, otherwise disables it.
 .PP
 An enabled layout adjusts dynamically to changes; a disabled layout acts as if it did not exist.
 .PP
@@ -345,15 +345,15 @@ Sets the resize mode of the layout. See the "resizeMode" property for details.
 .SH "void TQLayout::setSpacing ( int )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the spacing between widgets inside the layout. See the "spacing" property for details.
 .SH "void TQLayout::setSupportsMargin ( bool b )\fC [protected]\fR"
-Sets the value returned by supportsMargin(). If \fIb\fR is TRUE, margin() handling is implemented by the subclass. If \fIb\fR is FALSE (the default), TQLayout will add margin() around top-level layouts.
+Sets the value returned by supportsMargin(). If \fIb\fR is true, margin() handling is implemented by the subclass. If \fIb\fR is false (the default), TQLayout will add margin() around top-level layouts.
 .PP
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE, margin handling needs to be implemented in setGeometry(), maximumSize(), minimumSize(), sizeHint() and heightForWidth().
+If \fIb\fR is true, margin handling needs to be implemented in setGeometry(), maximumSize(), minimumSize(), sizeHint() and heightForWidth().
 .PP
 See also supportsMargin().
 .SH "int TQLayout::spacing () const"
 Returns the spacing between widgets inside the layout. See the "spacing" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQLayout::supportsMargin () const"
-Returns TRUE if this layout supports TQLayout::margin on non-top-level layouts; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this layout supports TQLayout::margin on non-top-level layouts; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also margin.
 .SS "Property Documentation"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlayoutitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlayoutitem.3qt
index 0e3ae6b54..01d77c187 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqlayoutitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlayoutitem.3qt
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ Returns the rectangle covered by this layout item.
 .PP
 Example: customlayout/border.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQLayoutItem::hasHeightForWidth () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if this layout's preferred height depends on its width; otherwise returns FALSE. The default implementation returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this layout's preferred height depends on its width; otherwise returns false. The default implementation returns false.
 .PP
 Reimplement this function in layout managers that support height for width.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlcdnumber.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlcdnumber.3qt
index 36894a5fd..63d3177dd 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqlcdnumber.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlcdnumber.3qt
@@ -184,13 +184,13 @@ See also numDigits and smallDecimalPoint.
 .SH "TQLCDNumber::~TQLCDNumber ()"
 Destroys the LCD number.
 .SH "bool TQLCDNumber::checkOverflow ( double num ) const"
-Returns TRUE if \fInum\fR is too big to be displayed in its entirety; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fInum\fR is too big to be displayed in its entirety; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also display(), numDigits, and smallDecimalPoint.
 .SH "bool TQLCDNumber::checkOverflow ( int num ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fInum\fR is too big to be displayed in its entirety; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fInum\fR is too big to be displayed in its entirety; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also display(), numDigits, and smallDecimalPoint.
 .SH "void TQLCDNumber::display ( const TQString & s )\fC [slot]\fR"
@@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ Set this property's value with setMode() and get this property's value with mode
 .SH "int numDigits"
 This property holds the current number of digits displayed.
 .PP
-Corresponds to the current number of digits. If TQLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint is FALSE, the decimal point occupies one digit position.
+Corresponds to the current number of digits. If TQLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint is false, the decimal point occupies one digit position.
 .PP
 See also smallDecimalPoint.
 .PP
@@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Set this property's value with setSegmentStyle() and get this property's value w
 .SH "bool smallDecimalPoint"
 This property holds the style of the decimal point.
 .PP
-If TRUE the decimal point is drawn between two digit positions. Otherwise it occupies a digit position of its own, i.e. is drawn in a digit position. The default is FALSE.
+If true the decimal point is drawn between two digit positions. Otherwise it occupies a digit position of its own, i.e. is drawn in a digit position. The default is false.
 .PP
 The inter-digit space is made slightly wider when the decimal point is drawn between the digits.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlibrary.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlibrary.3qt
index 143cf39e4..85cebe9fd 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqlibrary.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlibrary.3qt
@@ -113,15 +113,15 @@ See also load(), unload(), and setAutoUnload().
 .SH "TQLibrary::~TQLibrary ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Deletes the TQLibrary object.
 .PP
-The library will be unloaded if autoUnload() is TRUE (the default), otherwise it stays in memory until the application exits.
+The library will be unloaded if autoUnload() is true (the default), otherwise it stays in memory until the application exits.
 .PP
 See also unload() and setAutoUnload().
 .SH "bool TQLibrary::autoUnload () const"
-Returns TRUE if the library will be automatically unloaded when this wrapper object is destructed; otherwise returns FALSE. The default is TRUE.
+Returns true if the library will be automatically unloaded when this wrapper object is destructed; otherwise returns false. The default is true.
 .PP
 See also setAutoUnload().
 .SH "bool TQLibrary::isLoaded () const"
-Returns TRUE if the library is loaded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the library is loaded; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also unload().
 .SH "TQString TQLibrary::library () const"
@@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ This function is useful only if you want to resolve a single symbol, e.g. a func
 .br
     static FunctionType *ptrFunction = 0;
 .br
-    static bool triedResolve = FALSE;
+    static bool triedResolve = false;
 .br
     if ( !ptrFunction && !triedResolve )
 .br
@@ -244,11 +244,11 @@ If you want to resolve multiple symbols, use a TQLibrary object and call the non
 .PP
 See also
 .SH "void TQLibrary::setAutoUnload ( bool enabled )"
-If \fIenabled\fR is TRUE (the default), the wrapper object is set to automatically unload the library upon destruction. If \fIenabled\fR is FALSE, the wrapper object is not unloaded unless you explicitly call unload().
+If \fIenabled\fR is true (the default), the wrapper object is set to automatically unload the library upon destruction. If \fIenabled\fR is false, the wrapper object is not unloaded unless you explicitly call unload().
 .PP
 See also autoUnload().
 .SH "bool TQLibrary::unload ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Unloads the library and returns TRUE if the library could be unloaded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Unloads the library and returns true if the library could be unloaded; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 This function is called by the destructor if autoUnload() is enabled.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlineedit.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlineedit.3qt
index 4b2e530ac..9b98a5554 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqlineedit.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlineedit.3qt
@@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ You can change the text with setText() or insert(). The text is retrieved with t
 .PP
 When the text changes the textChanged() signal is emitted; when the Return or Enter key is pressed the returnPressed() signal is emitted. Note that if there is a validator set on the line edit, the returnPressed() signal will only be emitted if the validator returns \fCAcceptable\fR.
 .PP
-By default, TQLineEdits have a frame as specified by the Windows and Motif style guides; you can turn it off by calling setFrame(FALSE).
+By default, TQLineEdits have a frame as specified by the Windows and Motif style guides; you can turn it off by calling setFrame(false).
 .PP
 The default key bindings are described below. The line edit also provides a context menu (usually invoked by a right mouse click) that presents some of these editing options. <center>.nf
 .TS
@@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ See also del().
 .SH "void TQLineEdit::clear ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Clears the contents of the line edit.
 .SH "void TQLineEdit::clearModified ()"
-Resets the modified flag to FALSE.
+Resets the modified flag to false.
 .PP
 See also modified.
 .SH "void TQLineEdit::clearValidator ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -372,21 +372,21 @@ See also cut() and paste().
 .SH "TQPopupMenu * TQLineEdit::createPopupMenu ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This function is called to create the popup menu which is shown when the user clicks on the line edit with the right mouse button. If you want to create a custom popup menu, reimplement this function and return the popup menu you create. The popup menu's ownership is transferred to the caller.
 .SH "void TQLineEdit::cursorBackward ( bool mark, int steps = 1 )"
-Moves the cursor back \fIsteps\fR characters. If \fImark\fR is TRUE each character moved over is added to the selection; if \fImark\fR is FALSE the selection is cleared.
+Moves the cursor back \fIsteps\fR characters. If \fImark\fR is true each character moved over is added to the selection; if \fImark\fR is false the selection is cleared.
 .PP
 See also cursorForward().
 .SH "void TQLineEdit::cursorForward ( bool mark, int steps = 1 )"
-Moves the cursor forward \fIsteps\fR characters. If \fImark\fR is TRUE each character moved over is added to the selection; if \fImark\fR is FALSE the selection is cleared.
+Moves the cursor forward \fIsteps\fR characters. If \fImark\fR is true each character moved over is added to the selection; if \fImark\fR is false the selection is cleared.
 .PP
 See also cursorBackward().
 .SH "int TQLineEdit::cursorPosition () const"
 Returns the current cursor position for this line edit. See the "cursorPosition" property for details.
 .SH "void TQLineEdit::cursorWordBackward ( bool mark )"
-Moves the cursor one word backward. If \fImark\fR is TRUE, the word is also selected.
+Moves the cursor one word backward. If \fImark\fR is true, the word is also selected.
 .PP
 See also cursorWordForward().
 .SH "void TQLineEdit::cursorWordForward ( bool mark )"
-Moves the cursor one word forward. If \fImark\fR is TRUE, the word is also selected.
+Moves the cursor one word forward. If \fImark\fR is true, the word is also selected.
 .PP
 See also cursorWordBackward().
 .SH "void TQLineEdit::cut ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -406,25 +406,25 @@ See also setSelection() and selectAll().
 .SH "TQString TQLineEdit::displayText () const"
 Returns the displayed text. See the "displayText" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQLineEdit::dragEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the lineedit starts a drag if the user presses and moves the mouse on some selected text; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "dragEnabled" property for details.
+Returns true if the lineedit starts a drag if the user presses and moves the mouse on some selected text; otherwise returns false. See the "dragEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "EchoMode TQLineEdit::echoMode () const"
 Returns the line edit's echo mode. See the "echoMode" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQLineEdit::edited () const"
-Returns TRUE if the line edit has been edited. Use modified instead; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "edited" property for details.
+Returns true if the line edit has been edited. Use modified instead; otherwise returns false. See the "edited" property for details.
 .SH "void TQLineEdit::end ( bool mark )"
-Moves the text cursor to the end of the line unless it is already there. If \fImark\fR is TRUE, text is selected towards the last position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the cursor is moved.
+Moves the text cursor to the end of the line unless it is already there. If \fImark\fR is true, text is selected towards the last position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the cursor is moved.
 .PP
 See also home().
 .SH "bool TQLineEdit::frame () const"
-Returns TRUE if the line edit draws itself with a frame; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "frame" property for details.
+Returns true if the line edit draws itself with a frame; otherwise returns false. See the "frame" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQLineEdit::getSelection ( int * start, int * end )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. use selectedText(), selectionStart()
 .SH "bool TQLineEdit::hasAcceptableInput () const"
-Returns TRUE if the input satisfies the inputMask and the validator; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "acceptableInput" property for details.
+Returns true if the input satisfies the inputMask and the validator; otherwise returns false. See the "acceptableInput" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQLineEdit::hasSelectedText () const"
-Returns TRUE if there is any text selected; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "hasSelectedText" property for details.
+Returns true if there is any text selected; otherwise returns false. See the "hasSelectedText" property for details.
 .SH "void TQLineEdit::home ( bool mark )"
-Moves the text cursor to the beginning of the line unless it is already there. If \fImark\fR is TRUE, text is selected towards the first position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the cursor is moved.
+Moves the text cursor to the beginning of the line unless it is already there. If \fImark\fR is true, text is selected towards the first position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the cursor is moved.
 .PP
 See also end().
 .SH "TQString TQLineEdit::inputMask () const"
@@ -432,13 +432,13 @@ Returns the validation input mask. See the "inputMask" property for details.
 .SH "void TQLineEdit::insert ( const TQString & newText )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Deletes any selected text, inserts \fInewText\fR, and validates the result. If it is valid, it sets it as the new contents of the line edit.
 .SH "bool TQLineEdit::isModified () const"
-Returns TRUE if the line edit's contents has been modified by the user; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "modified" property for details.
+Returns true if the line edit's contents has been modified by the user; otherwise returns false. See the "modified" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQLineEdit::isReadOnly () const"
-Returns TRUE if the line edit is read only; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "readOnly" property for details.
+Returns true if the line edit is read only; otherwise returns false. See the "readOnly" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQLineEdit::isRedoAvailable () const"
-Returns TRUE if redo is available; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "redoAvailable" property for details.
+Returns true if redo is available; otherwise returns false. See the "redoAvailable" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQLineEdit::isUndoAvailable () const"
-Returns TRUE if undo is available; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "undoAvailable" property for details.
+Returns true if undo is available; otherwise returns false. See the "undoAvailable" property for details.
 .SH "void TQLineEdit::keyPressEvent ( TQKeyEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Converts key press event \fIe\fR into a line edit action.
 .PP
@@ -603,7 +603,7 @@ Set this property's value with setFrame() and get this property's value with fra
 .SH "bool hasSelectedText"
 This property holds whether there is any text selected.
 .PP
-hasSelectedText() returns TRUE if some or all of the text has been selected by the user; otherwise returns FALSE.
+hasSelectedText() returns true if some or all of the text has been selected by the user; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also selectedText.
 .PP
@@ -655,11 +655,11 @@ Set this property's value with setMaxLength() and get this property's value with
 .SH "bool modified"
 This property holds whether the line edit's contents has been modified by the user.
 .PP
-The modified flag is never read by TQLineEdit; it has a default value of FALSE and is changed to TRUE whenever the user changes the line edit's contents.
+The modified flag is never read by TQLineEdit; it has a default value of false and is changed to true whenever the user changes the line edit's contents.
 .PP
-This is useful for things that need to provide a default value but do not start out knowing what the default should be (perhaps it depends on other fields on the form). Start the line edit without the best default, and when the default is known, if modified() returns FALSE (the user hasn't entered any text), insert the default value.
+This is useful for things that need to provide a default value but do not start out knowing what the default should be (perhaps it depends on other fields on the form). Start the line edit without the best default, and when the default is known, if modified() returns false (the user hasn't entered any text), insert the default value.
 .PP
-Calling clearModified() or setText() resets the modified flag to FALSE.
+Calling clearModified() or setText() resets the modified flag to false.
 .PP
 Get this property's value with isModified().
 .SH "bool readOnly"
@@ -687,7 +687,7 @@ Get this property's value with selectedText().
 .SH "TQString text"
 This property holds the line edit's text.
 .PP
-Note that setting this property clears the selection, clears the undo/redo history, moves the cursor to the end of the line and resets the modified property to FALSE. The text is not validated when inserted with setText().
+Note that setting this property clears the selection, clears the undo/redo history, moves the cursor to the end of the line and resets the modified property to false. The text is not validated when inserted with setText().
 .PP
 The text is truncated to maxLength() length.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlistbox.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlistbox.3qt
index a66dc52b9..29a57b342 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqlistbox.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlistbox.3qt
@@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ Inherits TQScrollView.
 .BI "TQListBoxItem * \fBfirstItem\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsort\fR ( bool ascending = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBsort\fR ( bool ascending = true )"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SS "Public Slots"
@@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ Because TQListBox offers multiple selection it must display keyboard focus and s
 .PP
 The list box normally arranges its items in a single column and adds a vertical scroll bar if required. It is possible to have a different fixed number of columns (setColumnMode()), or as many columns as will fit in the list box's assigned screen space (setColumnMode(FitToWidth)), or to have a fixed number of rows (setRowMode()) or as many rows as will fit in the list box's assigned screen space (setRowMode(FitToHeight)). In all these cases TQListBox will add scroll bars, as appropriate, in at least one direction.
 .PP
-If multiple rows are used, each row can be as high as necessary (the normal setting), or you can request that all items will have the same height by calling setVariableHeight(FALSE). The same applies to a column's width, see setVariableWidth().
+If multiple rows are used, each row can be as high as necessary (the normal setting), or you can request that all items will have the same height by calling setVariableHeight(false). The same applies to a column's width, see setVariableWidth().
 .PP
 The TQListBox's items are TQListBoxItem objects. TQListBox provides methods to insert new items as strings, as pixmaps, and as TQListBoxItem * (insertItem() with various arguments), and to replace an existing item with a new string, pixmap or TQListBoxItem (changeItem() with various arguments). You can also remove items singly with removeItem() or clear() the entire list box. Note that if you create a TQListBoxItem yourself and insert it, TQListBox takes ownership of the item.
 .PP
@@ -494,15 +494,15 @@ Destroys the list box. Deletes all list box items.
 .SH "bool TQListBox::autoBottomScrollBar () const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if hScrollBarMode() is Auto; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if hScrollBarMode() is Auto; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQListBox::autoScrollBar () const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if vScrollBarMode() is Auto; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if vScrollBarMode() is Auto; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQListBox::bottomScrollBar () const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-Returns FALSE if vScrollBarMode() is AlwaysOff; otherwise returns TRUE.
+Returns false if vScrollBarMode() is AlwaysOff; otherwise returns true.
 .SH "int TQListBox::cellHeight ( int i ) const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
@@ -741,15 +741,15 @@ See also insertItem() and insertStrList().
 .SH "void TQListBox::invertSelection ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Inverts the selection. Only works in Multi and Extended selection mode.
 .SH "bool TQListBox::isMultiSelection () const"
-Returns TRUE if or not the list box is in Multi selection mode; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "multiSelection" property for details.
+Returns true if or not the list box is in Multi selection mode; otherwise returns false. See the "multiSelection" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQListBox::isRubberSelecting () const\fC [protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the user is selecting items using a rubber band rectangle; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the user is selecting items using a rubber band rectangle; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQListBox::isSelected ( int i ) const"
-Returns TRUE if item \fIi\fR is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if item \fIi\fR is selected; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQListBox::isSelected ( const TQListBoxItem * i ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if item \fIi\fR is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if item \fIi\fR is selected; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQListBoxItem * TQListBox::item ( int index ) const"
 Returns a pointer to the item at position \fIindex\fR, or 0 if \fIindex\fR is out of bounds.
 .PP
@@ -767,15 +767,15 @@ If \fIindex\fR is too large, this function returns 0.
 .SH "TQRect TQListBox::itemRect ( TQListBoxItem * item ) const"
 Returns the rectangle on the screen that \fIitem\fR occupies in viewport()'s coordinates, or an invalid rectangle if \fIitem\fR is 0 or is not currently visible.
 .SH "bool TQListBox::itemVisible ( int index )"
-Returns TRUE if the item at position \fIindex\fR is at least partly visible; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the item at position \fIindex\fR is at least partly visible; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQListBox::itemVisible ( const TQListBoxItem * item )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIitem\fR is at least partly visible; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIitem\fR is at least partly visible; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQListBox::itemYPos ( int index, int * yPos ) const\fC [protected]\fR"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-Returns the vertical pixel-coordinate in \fI*yPos\fR, of the list box item at position \fIindex\fR in the list. Returns FALSE if the item is outside the visible area.
+Returns the vertical pixel-coordinate in \fI*yPos\fR, of the list box item at position \fIindex\fR in the list. Returns false if the item is outside the visible area.
 .SH "long TQListBox::maxItemWidth () const"
 Returns the width of the widest item in the list box.
 .SH "void TQListBox::mouseButtonClicked ( int button, TQListBoxItem * item, const TQPoint & pos )\fC [signal]\fR"
@@ -843,9 +843,9 @@ Returns the row layout mode for this list box. See the "rowMode" property for de
 .SH "bool TQListBox::scrollBar () const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-Returns FALSE if vScrollBarMode() is AlwaysOff; otherwise returns TRUE.
+Returns false if vScrollBarMode() is AlwaysOff; otherwise returns true.
 .SH "void TQListBox::selectAll ( bool select )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-In Multi and Extended modes, this function sets all items to be selected if \fIselect\fR is TRUE, and to be unselected if \fIselect\fR is FALSE.
+In Multi and Extended modes, this function sets all items to be selected if \fIselect\fR is true, and to be unselected if \fIselect\fR is false.
 .PP
 In Single and NoSelection modes, this function only changes the selection status of currentItem().
 .SH "void TQListBox::selected ( int index )\fC [signal]\fR"
@@ -885,11 +885,11 @@ Returns the selection mode of the list box. See the "selectionMode" property for
 .SH "void TQListBox::setAutoBottomScrollBar ( bool enable )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE sets setHScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOn; otherwise sets setHScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOff.
+If \fIenable\fR is true sets setHScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOn; otherwise sets setHScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOff.
 .SH "void TQListBox::setAutoScrollBar ( bool enable )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE sets setVScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOn; otherwise sets setVScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOff.
+If \fIenable\fR is true sets setVScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOn; otherwise sets setVScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOff.
 .SH "void TQListBox::setBottomItem ( int index )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Scrolls the list box so the item at position \fIindex\fR in the list is displayed in the bottom row of the list box.
 .PP
@@ -897,7 +897,7 @@ See also topItem.
 .SH "void TQListBox::setBottomScrollBar ( bool enable )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE sets setHScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOn; otherwise sets setHScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOff.
+If \fIenable\fR is true sets setHScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOn; otherwise sets setHScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOff.
 .SH "void TQListBox::setColumnMode ( LayoutMode )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the column layout mode for this list box. See the "columnMode" property for details.
 .SH "void TQListBox::setColumnMode ( int )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -917,19 +917,19 @@ Sets the row layout mode for this list box. See the "rowMode" property for detai
 .SH "void TQListBox::setScrollBar ( bool enable )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE sets setVScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOn; otherwise sets setVScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOff.
+If \fIenable\fR is true sets setVScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOn; otherwise sets setVScrollBarMode() to AlwaysOff.
 .SH "void TQListBox::setSelected ( TQListBoxItem * item, bool select )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Selects \fIitem\fR if \fIselect\fR is TRUE or unselects it if \fIselect\fR is FALSE, and repaints the item appropriately.
+Selects \fIitem\fR if \fIselect\fR is true or unselects it if \fIselect\fR is false, and repaints the item appropriately.
 .PP
-If the list box is a Single selection list box and \fIselect\fR is TRUE, setSelected() calls setCurrentItem().
+If the list box is a Single selection list box and \fIselect\fR is true, setSelected() calls setCurrentItem().
 .PP
-If the list box is a Single selection list box, \fIselect\fR is FALSE, setSelected() calls clearSelection().
+If the list box is a Single selection list box, \fIselect\fR is false, setSelected() calls clearSelection().
 .PP
 See also multiSelection, currentItem, clearSelection(), and currentItem.
 .SH "void TQListBox::setSelected ( int index, bool select )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-If \fIselect\fR is TRUE the item at position \fIindex\fR is selected; otherwise the item is deselected.
+If \fIselect\fR is true the item at position \fIindex\fR is selected; otherwise the item is deselected.
 .SH "void TQListBox::setSelectionMode ( SelectionMode )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the selection mode of the list box. See the "selectionMode" property for details.
 .SH "void TQListBox::setTopItem ( int index )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -938,8 +938,8 @@ Sets the index of an item at the top of the screen to \fIindex\fR. See the "topI
 Sets whether this list box has variable-height rows. See the "variableHeight" property for details.
 .SH "void TQListBox::setVariableWidth ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets whether this list box has variable-width columns. See the "variableWidth" property for details.
-.SH "void TQListBox::sort ( bool ascending = TRUE )"
-If \fIascending\fR is TRUE sorts the items in ascending order; otherwise sorts in descending order.
+.SH "void TQListBox::sort ( bool ascending = true )"
+If \fIascending\fR is true sorts the items in ascending order; otherwise sorts in descending order.
 .PP
 To compare the items, the text (TQListBoxItem::text()) of the items is used.
 .PP
@@ -967,7 +967,7 @@ Returns contentsHeight().
 .PP
 Returns contentsWidth().
 .SH "void TQListBox::triggerUpdate ( bool doLayout )"
-Ensures that a single paint event will occur at the end of the current event loop iteration. If \fIdoLayout\fR is TRUE, the layout is also redone.
+Ensures that a single paint event will occur at the end of the current event loop iteration. If \fIdoLayout\fR is true, the layout is also redone.
 .SH "void TQListBox::updateItem ( int index )\fC [protected]\fR"
 Repaints the item at position \fIindex\fR in the list.
 .SH "void TQListBox::updateItem ( TQListBoxItem * i )\fC [protected]\fR"
@@ -975,9 +975,9 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Repaints the TQListBoxItem \fIi\fR.
 .SH "bool TQListBox::variableHeight () const"
-Returns TRUE if this list box has variable-height rows; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "variableHeight" property for details.
+Returns true if this list box has variable-height rows; otherwise returns false. See the "variableHeight" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQListBox::variableWidth () const"
-Returns TRUE if this list box has variable-width columns; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "variableWidth" property for details.
+Returns true if this list box has variable-width columns; otherwise returns false. See the "variableWidth" property for details.
 .SS "Property Documentation"
 .SH "LayoutMode columnMode"
 This property holds the column layout mode for this list box.
@@ -1012,9 +1012,9 @@ This property holds whether or not the list box is in Multi selection mode.
 .PP
 Consider using the TQListBox::selectionMode property instead of this property.
 .PP
-When setting this property, Multi selection mode is used if set to TRUE and to Single selection mode if set to FALSE.
+When setting this property, Multi selection mode is used if set to true and to Single selection mode if set to false.
 .PP
-When getting this property, TRUE is returned if the list box is in Multi selection mode or Extended selection mode, and FALSE if it is in Single selection mode or NoSelection mode.
+When getting this property, true is returned if the list box is in Multi selection mode or Extended selection mode, and false if it is in Single selection mode or NoSelection mode.
 .PP
 See also selectionMode.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlistboxitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlistboxitem.3qt
index 9a3b36ffc..310a83555 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqlistboxitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlistboxitem.3qt
@@ -103,15 +103,15 @@ See also paint() and width().
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQListBoxText and TQListBoxPixmap.
 .SH "bool TQListBoxItem::isCurrent () const"
-Returns TRUE if the item is the current item; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the item is the current item; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQListBox::currentItem, TQListBox::item(), and isSelected().
 .SH "bool TQListBoxItem::isSelectable () const"
-Returns TRUE if this item is selectable (the default); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this item is selectable (the default); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setSelectable().
 .SH "bool TQListBoxItem::isSelected () const"
-Returns TRUE if the item is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the item is selected; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQListBox::isSelected() and isCurrent().
 .PP
@@ -151,11 +151,11 @@ Make your derived classes return their own values for rtti(), and you can distin
 .SH "void TQListBoxItem::setCustomHighlighting ( bool b )\fC [protected]\fR"
 Defines whether the list box item is responsible for drawing itself in a highlighted state when being selected.
 .PP
-If \fIb\fR is FALSE (the default), the list box will draw some default highlight indicator before calling paint().
+If \fIb\fR is false (the default), the list box will draw some default highlight indicator before calling paint().
 .PP
 See also selected() and paint().
 .SH "void TQListBoxItem::setSelectable ( bool b )"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE (the default) then this item can be selected by the user; otherwise this item cannot be selected by the user.
+If \fIb\fR is true (the default) then this item can be selected by the user; otherwise this item cannot be selected by the user.
 .PP
 See also isSelectable().
 .SH "void TQListBoxItem::setText ( const TQString & text )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlistview.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlistview.3qt
index 604d2eaba..8a2d6f053 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqlistview.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlistview.3qt
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Inherits TQScrollView.
 .BI "bool \fBrootIsDecorated\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBsetSorting\fR ( int column, bool ascending = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBsetSorting\fR ( int column, bool ascending = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBsortColumn\fR () const"
@@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ Further nodes can be added to the list view object (the root of the tree) or as
 .PP
 The main setup functions are: <center>.nf
 .TS
-l - l. Function Action addColumn() Adds a column with a text label and perhaps width. Columns are counted from the left starting with column 0. setColumnWidthMode() Sets the column to be resized automatically or not. setAllColumnsShowFocus() Sets whether items should show keyboard focus using all columns or just column 0. The default is to show focus just using column 0. setRootIsDecorated() Sets whether root items should show open/close decoration to their left. The default is FALSE. setTreeStepSize() Sets how many pixels an item's children are indented relative to their parent. The default is 20. This is mostly a matter of taste. setSorting()
+l - l. Function Action addColumn() Adds a column with a text label and perhaps width. Columns are counted from the left starting with column 0. setColumnWidthMode() Sets the column to be resized automatically or not. setAllColumnsShowFocus() Sets whether items should show keyboard focus using all columns or just column 0. The default is to show focus just using column 0. setRootIsDecorated() Sets whether root items should show open/close decoration to their left. The default is false. setTreeStepSize() Sets how many pixels an item's children are indented relative to their parent. The default is 20. This is mostly a matter of taste. setSorting()
 .TE
 .fi
 </center>
@@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ See also setColumnText(), setColumnWidth(), and setColumnWidthMode().
 .SH "void TQListView::adjustColumn ( int col )\fC [slot]\fR"
 Adjusts the column \fIcol\fR to its preferred width
 .SH "bool TQListView::allColumnsShowFocus () const"
-Returns TRUE if items should show keyboard focus using all columns; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "allColumnsShowFocus" property for details.
+Returns true if items should show keyboard focus using all columns; otherwise returns false. See the "allColumnsShowFocus" property for details.
 .SH "int TQListView::childCount () const"
 Returns the number of parentless (top-level) TQListViewItem objects in this TQListView. See the "childCount" property for details.
 .SH "void TQListView::clear ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -699,7 +699,7 @@ Examples:
 .SH "void TQListView::hideColumn ( int column )"
 Hides the column specified at \fIcolumn\fR. This is a convenience function that calls setColumnWidth( \fIcolumn\fR, 0 ).
 .PP
-Note: The user may still be able to resize the hidden column using the header handles. To prevent this, call setResizeEnabled(FALSE, \fIcolumn\fR) on the list views header.
+Note: The user may still be able to resize the hidden column using the header handles. To prevent this, call setResizeEnabled(false, \fIcolumn\fR) on the list views header.
 .PP
 See also setColumnWidth().
 .SH "void TQListView::insertItem ( TQListViewItem * i )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -709,15 +709,15 @@ See also TQListViewItem::takeItem() and takeItem().
 .SH "void TQListView::invertSelection ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Inverts the selection. Only works in Multi and Extended selection modes.
 .SH "bool TQListView::isMultiSelection () const"
-Returns TRUE if the list view is in multi-selection or extended-selection mode; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "multiSelection" property for details.
+Returns true if the list view is in multi-selection or extended-selection mode; otherwise returns false. See the "multiSelection" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQListView::isOpen ( const TQListViewItem * item ) const"
 Identical to \fIitem\fR->isOpen(). Provided for completeness.
 .PP
 See also setOpen().
 .SH "bool TQListView::isRenaming () const"
-Returns TRUE if an item is being renamed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if an item is being renamed; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQListView::isSelected ( const TQListViewItem * i ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the list view item \fIi\fR is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the list view item \fIi\fR is selected; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQListViewItem::isSelected().
 .SH "TQListViewItem * TQListView::itemAt ( const TQPoint & viewPos ) const"
@@ -833,7 +833,7 @@ Repaints \fIitem\fR on the screen if \fIitem\fR is currently visible. Takes care
 .SH "void TQListView::resizeEvent ( TQResizeEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Ensures that the header is correctly sized and positioned when the resize event \fIe\fR occurs.
 .SH "ResizeMode TQListView::resizeMode () const"
-Returns TRUE if all, none or the only the last column should be resized; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "resizeMode" property for details.
+Returns true if all, none or the only the last column should be resized; otherwise returns false. See the "resizeMode" property for details.
 .SH "void TQListView::returnPressed ( TQListViewItem * )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when Enter or Return is pressed. The argument is the currentItem().
 .SH "void TQListView::rightButtonClicked ( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint &, int )\fC [signal]\fR"
@@ -841,9 +841,9 @@ This signal is emitted when the right button is clicked (i.e. when it's released
 .SH "void TQListView::rightButtonPressed ( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint &, int )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when the right button is pressed. The arguments are the relevant TQListViewItem (may be 0), the point in global coordinates and the relevant column (or -1 if the click was outside the list).
 .SH "bool TQListView::rootIsDecorated () const"
-Returns TRUE if the list view shows open/close signs on root items; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "rootIsDecorated" property for details.
+Returns true if the list view shows open/close signs on root items; otherwise returns false. See the "rootIsDecorated" property for details.
 .SH "void TQListView::selectAll ( bool select )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-If \fIselect\fR is TRUE, all the items get selected; otherwise all the items get unselected. This only works in the selection modes Multi and Extended. In Single and NoSelection mode the selection of the current item is just set to \fIselect\fR.
+If \fIselect\fR is true, all the items get selected; otherwise all the items get unselected. This only works in the selection modes Multi and Extended. In Single and NoSelection mode the selection of the current item is just set to \fIselect\fR.
 .SH "TQListViewItem * TQListView::selectedItem () const"
 Returns the selected item if the list view is in Single selection mode and an item is selected.
 .PP
@@ -911,7 +911,7 @@ Sets the advisory item margin that list items may use. See the "itemMargin" prop
 .SH "void TQListView::setMultiSelection ( bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets whether the list view is in multi-selection or extended-selection mode to \fIenable\fR. See the "multiSelection" property for details.
 .SH "void TQListView::setOpen ( TQListViewItem * item, bool open )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sets \fIitem\fR to be open if \fIopen\fR is TRUE and \fIitem\fR is expandable, and to be closed if \fIopen\fR is FALSE. Repaints accordingly.
+Sets \fIitem\fR to be open if \fIopen\fR is true and \fIitem\fR is expandable, and to be closed if \fIopen\fR is false. Repaints accordingly.
 .PP
 See also TQListViewItem::setOpen() and TQListViewItem::setExpandable().
 .SH "void TQListView::setResizeMode ( ResizeMode m )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -919,9 +919,9 @@ Sets whether all, none or the only the last column should be resized to \fIm\fR.
 .SH "void TQListView::setRootIsDecorated ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets whether the list view shows open/close signs on root items. See the "rootIsDecorated" property for details.
 .SH "void TQListView::setSelected ( TQListViewItem * item, bool selected )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIselected\fR is TRUE the \fIitem\fR is selected; otherwise it is unselected.
+If \fIselected\fR is true the \fIitem\fR is selected; otherwise it is unselected.
 .PP
-If the list view is in Single selection mode and \fIselected\fR is TRUE, the currently selected item is unselected and \fIitem\fR is made current. Unlike TQListViewItem::setSelected(), this function updates the list view as necessary and emits the selectionChanged() signals.
+If the list view is in Single selection mode and \fIselected\fR is true, the currently selected item is unselected and \fIitem\fR is made current. Unlike TQListViewItem::setSelected(), this function updates the list view as necessary and emits the selectionChanged() signals.
 .PP
 See also isSelected(), multiSelection, multiSelection, setCurrentItem(), and setSelectionAnchor().
 .PP
@@ -948,16 +948,16 @@ See also setSorting().
 Sets the sort order for the items in the list view to \fIorder\fR.
 .PP
 See also setSorting().
-.SH "void TQListView::setSorting ( int column, bool ascending = TRUE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sets the list view to be sorted by column \fIcolumn\fR in ascending order if \fIascending\fR is TRUE or descending order if it is FALSE.
+.SH "void TQListView::setSorting ( int column, bool ascending = true )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Sets the list view to be sorted by column \fIcolumn\fR in ascending order if \fIascending\fR is true or descending order if it is false.
 .PP
 If \fIcolumn\fR is -1, sorting is disabled and the user cannot sort columns by clicking on the column headers. If \fIcolumn\fR is larger than the number of columns the user must click on a column header to sort the list view.
 .SH "void TQListView::setTreeStepSize ( int )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the number of pixels a child is offset from its parent. See the "treeStepSize" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQListView::showSortIndicator () const"
-Returns TRUE if the list view header should display a sort indicator; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "showSortIndicator" property for details.
+Returns true if the list view header should display a sort indicator; otherwise returns false. See the "showSortIndicator" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQListView::showToolTips () const"
-Returns TRUE if this list view should show tooltips for truncated column texts; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "showToolTips" property for details.
+Returns true if this list view should show tooltips for truncated column texts; otherwise returns false. See the "showToolTips" property for details.
 .SH "void TQListView::sort ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sorts the list view using the last sorting configuration (sort column and ascending/descending).
 .SH "int TQListView::sortColumn () const"
@@ -988,11 +988,11 @@ Updates the sizes of the viewport, header, scroll bars and so on.
 .SH "bool allColumnsShowFocus"
 This property holds whether items should show keyboard focus using all columns.
 .PP
-If this property is TRUE all columns will show focus and selection states, otherwise only column 0 will show focus.
+If this property is true all columns will show focus and selection states, otherwise only column 0 will show focus.
 .PP
-The default is FALSE.
+The default is false.
 .PP
-Setting this to TRUE if it's not necessary may cause noticeable flicker.
+Setting this to true if it's not necessary may cause noticeable flicker.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setAllColumnsShowFocus() and get this property's value with allColumnsShowFocus().
 .SH "int childCount"
@@ -1048,7 +1048,7 @@ Set this property's value with setResizeMode() and get this property's value wit
 .SH "bool rootIsDecorated"
 This property holds whether the list view shows open/close signs on root items.
 .PP
-Open/close signs are small \fB+\fR or \fB-\fR symbols in windows style, or arrows in Motif style. The default is FALSE.
+Open/close signs are small \fB+\fR or \fB-\fR symbols in windows style, or arrows in Motif style. The default is false.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setRootIsDecorated() and get this property's value with rootIsDecorated().
 .SH "SelectionMode selectionMode"
@@ -1062,7 +1062,7 @@ Set this property's value with setSelectionMode() and get this property's value
 .SH "bool showSortIndicator"
 This property holds whether the list view header should display a sort indicator.
 .PP
-If this property is TRUE, an arrow is drawn in the header of the list view to indicate the sort order of the list view contents. The arrow will be drawn in the correct column and will point up or down, depending on the current sort direction. The default is FALSE (don't show an indicator).
+If this property is true, an arrow is drawn in the header of the list view to indicate the sort order of the list view contents. The arrow will be drawn in the correct column and will point up or down, depending on the current sort direction. The default is false (don't show an indicator).
 .PP
 See also TQHeader::setSortIndicator().
 .PP
@@ -1070,7 +1070,7 @@ Set this property's value with setShowSortIndicator() and get this property's va
 .SH "bool showToolTips"
 This property holds whether this list view should show tooltips for truncated column texts.
 .PP
-The default is TRUE.
+The default is true.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setShowToolTips() and get this property's value with showToolTips().
 .SH "int treeStepSize"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlistviewitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlistviewitem.3qt
index 14d46e0dd..e393be95e 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqlistviewitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlistviewitem.3qt
@@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ l - l. Function Description text() Returns the text in a column. Many subclasses
 .fi
 </center>
 .PP
-Some subclasses call setExpandable(TRUE) even when they have no children, and populate themselves when setup() or setOpen(TRUE) is called. The dirview/dirview.cpp example program uses this technique to start up quickly: The files and subdirectories in a directory aren't inserted into the tree until they're actually needed.
+Some subclasses call setExpandable(true) even when they have no children, and populate themselves when setup() or setOpen(true) is called. The dirview/dirview.cpp example program uses this technique to start up quickly: The files and subdirectories in a directory aren't inserted into the tree until they're actually needed.
 .PP
 <center>
 .ce 1
@@ -347,9 +347,9 @@ See also setText().
 .SH "TQListViewItem::~TQListViewItem ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Destroys the item, deleting all its children and freeing up all allocated resources.
 .SH "bool TQListViewItem::acceptDrop ( const TQMimeSource * mime ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the item can accept drops of type TQMimeSource \fImime\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the item can accept drops of type TQMimeSource \fImime\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-The default implementation does nothing and returns FALSE. A subclass must reimplement this to accept drops.
+The default implementation does nothing and returns false. A subclass must reimplement this to accept drops.
 .SH "void TQListViewItem::activate ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This virtual function is called whenever the user presses the mouse on this item or presses Space on it.
 .PP
@@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ Reimplemented in TQCheckListItem.
 .SH "bool TQListViewItem::activatedPos ( TQPoint & pos )\fC [protected]\fR"
 When called from a reimplementation of activate(), this function gives information on how the item was activated. Otherwise the behavior is undefined.
 .PP
-If activate() was caused by a mouse press, the function sets \fIpos\fR to where the user clicked and returns TRUE; otherwise it returns FALSE and does not change \fIpos\fR.
+If activate() was caused by a mouse press, the function sets \fIpos\fR to where the user clicked and returns true; otherwise it returns false and does not change \fIpos\fR.
 .PP
 \fIpos\fR is relative to the top-left corner of this item.
 .PP
@@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ Returns the depth of this item.
 .PP
 Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQListViewItem::dragEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if this item can be dragged; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this item can be dragged; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setDragEnabled().
 .SH "void TQListViewItem::dragEntered ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ This function is called when a drag leaves the item's bounding rectangle.
 .PP
 The default implementation does nothing, subclasses may need to reimplement this function.
 .SH "bool TQListViewItem::dropEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if this item accepts drops; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this item accepts drops; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setDropEnabled() and acceptDrop().
 .SH "void TQListViewItem::dropped ( TQDropEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -444,27 +444,27 @@ Invalidates the cached total height of this item, including all open children.
 .PP
 See also setHeight(), height(), and totalHeight().
 .SH "bool TQListViewItem::isEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if this item is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this item is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setEnabled().
 .SH "bool TQListViewItem::isExpandable () const"
-Returns TRUE if this item is expandable even when it has no children; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this item is expandable even when it has no children; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQListViewItem::isOpen () const"
-Returns TRUE if this list view item has children \fIand\fR they are not explicitly hidden; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this list view item has children \fIand\fR they are not explicitly hidden; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setOpen().
 .SH "bool TQListViewItem::isSelectable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the item is selectable (as it is by default); otherwise returns FALSE
+Returns true if the item is selectable (as it is by default); otherwise returns false
 .PP
 See also setSelectable().
 .SH "bool TQListViewItem::isSelected () const"
-Returns TRUE if this item is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this item is selected; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setSelected(), TQListView::setSelected(), and TQListView::selectionChanged().
 .PP
 Example: listviews/listviews.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQListViewItem::isVisible () const"
-Returns TRUE if the item is visible; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the item is visible; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setVisible().
 .SH "TQListViewItem * TQListViewItem::itemAbove ()"
@@ -502,7 +502,7 @@ Move the item to be after item \fIafter\fR, which must be one of the item's sibl
 .PP
 Note that this function will have no effect if sorting is enabled in the list view.
 .SH "bool TQListViewItem::multiLinesEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the item can display multiple lines of text in its columns; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the item can display multiple lines of text in its columns; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQListViewItem * TQListViewItem::nextSibling () const"
 Returns the sibling item below this item, or 0 if there is no sibling item after this item.
 .PP
@@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
 .PP
 This function has been renamed takeItem().
 .SH "bool TQListViewItem::renameEnabled ( int col ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this item can be in-place renamed in column \fIcol\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this item can be in-place renamed in column \fIcol\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "void TQListViewItem::repaint () const"
 Repaints this item on the screen if it is currently visible.
 .PP
@@ -577,17 +577,17 @@ Make your derived classes return their own values for rtti(), so that you can di
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQCheckListItem.
 .SH "void TQListViewItem::setDragEnabled ( bool allow )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIallow\fR is TRUE, the list view starts a drag (see TQListView::dragObject()) when the user presses and moves the mouse on this item.
+If \fIallow\fR is true, the list view starts a drag (see TQListView::dragObject()) when the user presses and moves the mouse on this item.
 .SH "void TQListViewItem::setDropEnabled ( bool allow )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIallow\fR is TRUE, the list view accepts drops onto the item; otherwise drops are not allowed.
+If \fIallow\fR is true, the list view accepts drops onto the item; otherwise drops are not allowed.
 .SH "void TQListViewItem::setEnabled ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE the item is enabled; otherwise it is disabled. Disabled items are drawn differently (e.g. grayed-out) and are not accessible by the user.
+If \fIb\fR is true the item is enabled; otherwise it is disabled. Disabled items are drawn differently (e.g. grayed-out) and are not accessible by the user.
 .SH "void TQListViewItem::setExpandable ( bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sets this item to be expandable even if it has no children if \fIenable\fR is TRUE, and to be expandable only if it has children if \fIenable\fR is FALSE (the default).
+Sets this item to be expandable even if it has no children if \fIenable\fR is true, and to be expandable only if it has children if \fIenable\fR is false (the default).
 .PP
-The dirview example uses this in the canonical fashion. It checks whether the directory is empty in setup() and calls setExpandable(TRUE) if not; in setOpen() it reads the contents of the directory and inserts items accordingly. This strategy means that dirview can display the entire file system without reading very much at startup.
+The dirview example uses this in the canonical fashion. It checks whether the directory is empty in setup() and calls setExpandable(true) if not; in setOpen() it reads the contents of the directory and inserts items accordingly. This strategy means that dirview can display the entire file system without reading very much at startup.
 .PP
-Note that root items are not expandable by the user unless TQListView::setRootIsDecorated() is set to TRUE.
+Note that root items are not expandable by the user unless TQListView::setRootIsDecorated() is set to true.
 .PP
 See also setSelectable().
 .SH "void TQListViewItem::setHeight ( int height )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -599,11 +599,11 @@ For best results in Windows style we suggest using an even number of pixels.
 .PP
 See also height(), totalHeight(), and isOpen().
 .SH "void TQListViewItem::setMultiLinesEnabled ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE each of the item's columns may contain multiple lines of text; otherwise each of them may only contain a single line.
+If \fIb\fR is true each of the item's columns may contain multiple lines of text; otherwise each of them may only contain a single line.
 .SH "void TQListViewItem::setOpen ( bool o )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Opens or closes an item, i.e. shows or hides an item's children.
 .PP
-If \fIo\fR is TRUE all child items are shown initially. The user can hide them by clicking the \fB-\fR icon to the left of the item. If \fIo\fR is FALSE, the children of this item are initially hidden. The user can show them by clicking the \fB+\fR icon to the left of the item.
+If \fIo\fR is true all child items are shown initially. The user can hide them by clicking the \fB-\fR icon to the left of the item. If \fIo\fR is false, the children of this item are initially hidden. The user can show them by clicking the \fB+\fR icon to the left of the item.
 .PP
 See also height(), totalHeight(), and isOpen().
 .PP
@@ -616,15 +616,15 @@ See also pixmap() and setText().
 .PP
 Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
 .SH "void TQListViewItem::setRenameEnabled ( int col, bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE, this item can be in-place renamed in the column \fIcol\fR by the user; otherwise it cannot be renamed in-place.
+If \fIb\fR is true, this item can be in-place renamed in the column \fIcol\fR by the user; otherwise it cannot be renamed in-place.
 .SH "void TQListViewItem::setSelectable ( bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sets this item to be selectable if \fIenable\fR is TRUE (the default) or not to be selectable if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Sets this item to be selectable if \fIenable\fR is true (the default) or not to be selectable if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 The user is not able to select a non-selectable item using either the keyboard or the mouse. This also applies for the application programmer (e.g. setSelected() respects this value).
 .PP
 See also isSelectable().
 .SH "void TQListViewItem::setSelected ( bool s )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIs\fR is TRUE this item is selected; otherwise it is deselected.
+If \fIs\fR is true this item is selected; otherwise it is deselected.
 .PP
 This function does not maintain any invariants or repaint anything -- TQListView::setSelected() does that.
 .PP
@@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ See also text() and key().
 Examples:
 .)l addressbook/centralwidget.cpp, qutlook/centralwidget.cpp, and xml/outliner/outlinetree.cpp.
 .SH "void TQListViewItem::setVisible ( bool b )"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE, the item is made visible; otherwise it is hidden.
+If \fIb\fR is true, the item is made visible; otherwise it is hidden.
 .PP
 If the item is not visible, itemAbove() and itemBelow() will never return this item, although you still can reach it by using e.g. TQListViewItemIterator.
 .SH "void TQListViewItem::setup ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -655,7 +655,7 @@ Sorts all this item's child items using the current sorting configuration (sort
 .PP
 See also enforceSortOrder().
 .SH "void TQListViewItem::sortChildItems ( int column, bool ascending )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sorts this item's children using column \fIcolumn\fR. This is done in ascending order if \fIascending\fR is TRUE and in descending order if \fIascending\fR is FALSE.
+Sorts this item's children using column \fIcolumn\fR. This is done in ascending order if \fIascending\fR is true and in descending order if \fIascending\fR is false.
 .PP
 Asks some of the children to sort their children. (TQListView and TQListViewItem ensure that all on-screen objects are properly sorted but may avoid or defer sorting other objects in order to be more responsive.)
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmacmime.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmacmime.3qt
index 5d5a9440c..a92314c63 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmacmime.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmacmime.3qt
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Destroys a conversion object, removing it from the global list of available conv
 .SH "TQPtrList<TQMacMime> TQMacMime::all ( TQMacMimeType t )\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns a list of all currently defined TQMacMime objects of type \fIt\fR.
 .SH "bool TQMacMime::canConvert ( const char * mime, int flav )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the convertor can convert (both ways) between \fImime\fR and \fIflav\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the convertor can convert (both ways) between \fImime\fR and \fIflav\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 All subclasses must reimplement this pure virtual function.
 .SH "TQValueList<TQByteArray> TQMacMime::convertFromMime ( TQByteArray data, const char * mime, int flav )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmainwindow.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmainwindow.3qt
index 73ad52d19..46c1e2acd 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmainwindow.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmainwindow.3qt
@@ -55,10 +55,10 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .BI "bool \fBisDockEnabled\fR ( TQDockWindow * dw, TQDockArea * area ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBaddDockWindow\fR ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBaddDockWindow\fR ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBaddDockWindow\fR ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, const TQString & label, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBaddDockWindow\fR ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, const TQString & label, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBmoveDockWindow\fR ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop )"
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .BI "TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> \fBdockWindows\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBlineUpDockWindows\fR ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )"
+.BI "void \fBlineUpDockWindows\fR ( bool keepNewLines = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "bool \fBisDockMenuEnabled\fR () const"
@@ -103,10 +103,10 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .BI "bool \fBhasDockWindow\fR ( TQDockWindow * dw )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "void addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = false )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, const TQString & label, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "void addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, const TQString & label, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = false )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void moveToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .BI "TQPtrList<TQToolBar> \fBtoolBars\fR ( Dock dock ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void lineUpToolBars ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "void lineUpToolBars ( bool keepNewLines = false )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQDockArea * \fBleftDock\fR () const"
@@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ The Minimized edge is a hidden dock area. If this dock area is enabled the user
 .PP
 Dock windows are moved transparently by default, i.e. during the drag an outline rectangle is drawn on the screen representing the position of the dock window as it moves. If you want the dock window to be shown normally whilst it is moved use setOpaqueMoving().
 .PP
-The location of a dock window, i.e. its dock area and position within the dock area, can be determined by calling getLocation(). Movable dock windows can be lined up to minimize wasted space with lineUpDockWindows(). Pointers to the dock areas are available from topDock(), leftDock(), rightDock() and bottomDock(). A customize menu item is added to the pop up dock window menu if isCustomizable() returns TRUE; it returns FALSE by default. Reimplement isCustomizable() and customize() if you want to offer this extra menu item, for example, to allow the user to change settings relating to the main window and its toolbars and dock windows.
+The location of a dock window, i.e. its dock area and position within the dock area, can be determined by calling getLocation(). Movable dock windows can be lined up to minimize wasted space with lineUpDockWindows(). Pointers to the dock areas are available from topDock(), leftDock(), rightDock() and bottomDock(). A customize menu item is added to the pop up dock window menu if isCustomizable() returns true; it returns false by default. Reimplement isCustomizable() and customize() if you want to offer this extra menu item, for example, to allow the user to change settings relating to the main window and its toolbars and dock windows.
 .PP
 The main window's menu bar is fixed (at the top) by default. If you want a movable menu bar, create a TQMenuBar as a stretchable widget inside its own movable dock window and restrict this dock window to only live within the Top or Bottom dock:
 .PP
@@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ The main window's menu bar is fixed (at the top) by default. If you want a movab
 .br
     TQToolBar *tb = new TQToolBar( this );
 .br
-    addDockWindow( tb, tr( "Menubar" ), Top, FALSE );
+    addDockWindow( tb, tr( "Menubar" ), Top, false );
 .br
     TQMenuBar *mb = new TQMenuBar( tb );
 .br
@@ -406,9 +406,9 @@ The main window's menu bar is fixed (at the top) by default. If you want a movab
 .br
     tb->setStretchableWidget( mb );
 .br
-    setDockEnabled( tb, Left, FALSE );
+    setDockEnabled( tb, Left, false );
 .br
-    setDockEnabled( tb, Right, FALSE );
+    setDockEnabled( tb, Right, false );
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -482,28 +482,28 @@ Constructs an empty main window. The \fIparent\fR, \fIname\fR and widget flags \
 By default, the widget flags are set to WType_TopLevel rather than 0 as they are with TQWidget. If you don't want your TQMainWindow to be a top level widget then you will need to set \fIf\fR to 0.
 .SH "TQMainWindow::~TQMainWindow ()"
 Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-.SH "void TQMainWindow::addDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::addDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = false )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Adds \fIdockWindow\fR to the \fIedge\fR dock area.
 .PP
-If \fInewLine\fR is FALSE (the default) then the \fIdockWindow\fR is added at the end of the \fIedge\fR. For vertical edges the end is at the bottom, for horizontal edges (including Minimized) the end is at the right. If \fInewLine\fR is TRUE a new line of dock windows is started with \fIdockWindow\fR as the first (left-most and top-most) dock window.
+If \fInewLine\fR is false (the default) then the \fIdockWindow\fR is added at the end of the \fIedge\fR. For vertical edges the end is at the bottom, for horizontal edges (including Minimized) the end is at the right. If \fInewLine\fR is true a new line of dock windows is started with \fIdockWindow\fR as the first (left-most and top-most) dock window.
 .PP
 If \fIdockWindow\fR is managed by another main window, it is first removed from that window.
-.SH "void TQMainWindow::addDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, const TQString & label, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::addDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, const TQString & label, Dock edge = DockTop, bool newLine = false )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Adds \fIdockWindow\fR to the dock area with label \fIlabel\fR.
 .PP
-If \fInewLine\fR is FALSE (the default) the \fIdockWindow\fR is added at the end of the \fIedge\fR. For vertical edges the end is at the bottom, for horizontal edges (including Minimized) the end is at the right. If \fInewLine\fR is TRUE a new line of dock windows is started with \fIdockWindow\fR as the first (left-most and top-most) dock window.
+If \fInewLine\fR is false (the default) the \fIdockWindow\fR is added at the end of the \fIedge\fR. For vertical edges the end is at the bottom, for horizontal edges (including Minimized) the end is at the right. If \fInewLine\fR is true a new line of dock windows is started with \fIdockWindow\fR as the first (left-most and top-most) dock window.
 .PP
 If \fIdockWindow\fR is managed by another main window, it is first removed from that window.
-.SH "void TQMainWindow::addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = false )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-.SH "void TQMainWindow::addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, const TQString & label, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE )"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::addToolBar ( TQDockWindow *, const TQString & label, Dock = DockTop, bool newLine = false )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .SH "bool TQMainWindow::appropriate ( TQDockWindow * dw ) const"
-Returns TRUE if it is appropriate to include a menu item for the \fIdw\fR dock window in the dock window menu; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if it is appropriate to include a menu item for the \fIdw\fR dock window in the dock window menu; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The user is able to change the state (show or hide) a dock window that has a menu item by clicking the item.
 .PP
@@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ Reimplemented from TQObject.
 .SH "TQPopupMenu * TQMainWindow::createDockWindowMenu ( DockWindows dockWindows = AllDockWindows ) const"
 Creates the dock window menu which contains all toolbars (if \fIdockWindows\fR is OnlyToolBars ), all dock windows (if \fIdockWindows\fR is NoToolBars) or all toolbars and dock windows (if \fIdockWindows\fR is AllDockWindows - the default).
 .PP
-This function is called internally when necessary, e.g. when the user right clicks a dock area (providing isDockMenuEnabled() returns TRUE).
+This function is called internally when necessary, e.g. when the user right clicks a dock area (providing isDockMenuEnabled() returns true).
 .PP
 The menu items representing the toolbars and dock windows are checkable. The visible dock windows are checked and the hidden dock windows are unchecked. The user can click a menu item to change its state (show or hide the dock window).
 .PP
@@ -539,15 +539,15 @@ Toolbars and dock windows which are not appropriate in the current context (see
 .PP
 The menu also has a menu item for lining up the dock windows.
 .PP
-If isCustomizable() returns TRUE, a Customize menu item is added to the menu, which if clicked will call customize(). The isCustomizable() function we provide returns FALSE and customize() does nothing, so they must be reimplemented in a subclass to be useful.
+If isCustomizable() returns true, a Customize menu item is added to the menu, which if clicked will call customize(). The isCustomizable() function we provide returns false and customize() does nothing, so they must be reimplemented in a subclass to be useful.
 .SH "void TQMainWindow::customize ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 This function is called when the user clicks the Customize menu item on the dock window menu.
 .PP
-The customize menu item will only appear if isCustomizable() returns TRUE (it returns FALSE by default).
+The customize menu item will only appear if isCustomizable() returns true (it returns false by default).
 .PP
 The function is intended, for example, to provide the user with a means of telling the application that they wish to customize the main window, dock windows or dock areas.
 .PP
-The default implementation does nothing and the Customize menu item is not shown on the right-click menu by default. If you want the item to appear then reimplement isCustomizable() to return TRUE, and reimplement this function to do whatever you want.
+The default implementation does nothing and the Customize menu item is not shown on the right-click menu by default. If you want the item to appear then reimplement isCustomizable() to return true, and reimplement this function to do whatever you want.
 .PP
 See also isCustomizable().
 .SH "void TQMainWindow::dockWindowPositionChanged ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow )\fC [signal]\fR"
@@ -563,62 +563,62 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Returns the list of dock windows which belong to this main window, regardless of which dock area they are in or what their state is, (e.g. irrespective of whether they are visible or not).
 .SH "bool TQMainWindow::dockWindowsMovable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dock windows are movable; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "dockWindowsMovable" property for details.
+Returns true if the dock windows are movable; otherwise returns false. See the "dockWindowsMovable" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQMainWindow::getLocation ( TQDockWindow * dw, Dock & dock, int & index, bool & nl, int & extraOffset ) const"
 Finds the location of the dock window \fIdw\fR.
 .PP
-If the \fIdw\fR dock window is found in the main window the function returns TRUE and populates the \fIdock\fR variable with the dw's dock area and the \fIindex\fR with the dw's position within the dock area. It also sets \fInl\fR to TRUE if the \fIdw\fR begins a new line (otherwise FALSE), and \fIextraOffset\fR with the dock window's offset.
+If the \fIdw\fR dock window is found in the main window the function returns true and populates the \fIdock\fR variable with the dw's dock area and the \fIindex\fR with the dw's position within the dock area. It also sets \fInl\fR to true if the \fIdw\fR begins a new line (otherwise false), and \fIextraOffset\fR with the dock window's offset.
 .PP
-If the \fIdw\fR dock window is not found then the function returns FALSE and the state of \fIdock\fR, \fIindex\fR, \fInl\fR and \fIextraOffset\fR is undefined.
+If the \fIdw\fR dock window is not found then the function returns false and the state of \fIdock\fR, \fIindex\fR, \fInl\fR and \fIextraOffset\fR is undefined.
 .PP
 If you want to save and restore dock window positions then use operator>>() and operator<<().
 .PP
 See also operator>>() and operator<<().
 .SH "bool TQMainWindow::hasDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dw )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIdw\fR is a dock window known to the main window; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIdw\fR is a dock window known to the main window; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQMainWindow::isCustomizable () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the dock area dock window menu includes the Customize menu item (which calls customize() when clicked). Returns FALSE by default, i.e. the popup menu will not contain a Customize menu item. You will need to reimplement this function and set it to return TRUE if you wish the user to be able to see the dock window menu.
+Returns true if the dock area dock window menu includes the Customize menu item (which calls customize() when clicked). Returns false by default, i.e. the popup menu will not contain a Customize menu item. You will need to reimplement this function and set it to return true if you wish the user to be able to see the dock window menu.
 .PP
 See also customize().
 .SH "bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( Dock dock ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the \fIdock\fR dock area is enabled, i.e. it can accept user dragged dock windows; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the \fIdock\fR dock area is enabled, i.e. it can accept user dragged dock windows; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setDockEnabled().
 .SH "bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( TQDockArea * area ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if dock area \fIarea\fR is enabled, i.e. it can accept user dragged dock windows; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if dock area \fIarea\fR is enabled, i.e. it can accept user dragged dock windows; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setDockEnabled().
 .SH "bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( TQDockWindow * tb, Dock dock ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if dock area \fIdock\fR is enabled for the dock window \fItb\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if dock area \fIdock\fR is enabled for the dock window \fItb\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setDockEnabled().
 .SH "bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled ( TQDockWindow * dw, TQDockArea * area ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if dock area \fIarea\fR is enabled for the dock window \fIdw\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if dock area \fIarea\fR is enabled for the dock window \fIdw\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setDockEnabled().
 .SH "bool TQMainWindow::isDockMenuEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE, if the dock window menu is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true, if the dock window menu is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-The menu lists the (appropriate()) dock windows (which may be shown or hidden), and has a "Line Up Dock Windows" menu item. It will also have a "Customize" menu item if isCustomizable() returns TRUE.
+The menu lists the (appropriate()) dock windows (which may be shown or hidden), and has a "Line Up Dock Windows" menu item. It will also have a "Customize" menu item if isCustomizable() returns true.
 .PP
 See also setDockEnabled(), lineUpDockWindows(), appropriate(), and setAppropriate().
 .SH "TQDockArea * TQMainWindow::leftDock () const"
 Returns the Left dock area
 .PP
 See also rightDock(), topDock(), and bottomDock().
-.SH "void TQMainWindow::lineUpDockWindows ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )"
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::lineUpDockWindows ( bool keepNewLines = false )"
 This function will line up dock windows within the visible dock areas (Top, Left, Right and Bottom) as compactly as possible.
 .PP
-If \fIkeepNewLines\fR is TRUE, all dock windows stay on their original lines. If \fIkeepNewLines\fR is FALSE then newlines may be removed to achieve the most compact layout possible.
+If \fIkeepNewLines\fR is true, all dock windows stay on their original lines. If \fIkeepNewLines\fR is false then newlines may be removed to achieve the most compact layout possible.
 .PP
-The method only works if dockWindowsMovable() returns TRUE.
-.SH "void TQMainWindow::lineUpToolBars ( bool keepNewLines = FALSE )"
+The method only works if dockWindowsMovable() returns true.
+.SH "void TQMainWindow::lineUpToolBars ( bool keepNewLines = false )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .SH "void TQMainWindow::menuAboutToShow ()\fC [protected slot]\fR"
 This slot is called from the aboutToShow() signal of the default dock menu of the mainwindow. The default implementation initializes the menu with all dock windows and toolbars in this slot.
@@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ Moves \fIdockWindow\fR to position \fIindex\fR within the \fIedge\fR dock area.
 .PP
 Any dock windows with positions \fIindex\fR or higher have their position number incremented and any of these on the same line are moved right (down for vertical dock areas) to make room.
 .PP
-If \fInl\fR is TRUE, a new dock window line is created below the line in which the moved dock window appears and the moved dock window, with any others with higher positions on the same line, is moved to this new line.
+If \fInl\fR is true, a new dock window line is created below the line in which the moved dock window appears and the moved dock window, with any others with higher positions on the same line, is moved to this new line.
 .PP
 The \fIextraOffset\fR is the space to put between the left side of the dock area (top side for vertical dock areas) and the dock window. (This is mostly used for restoring dock windows to the positions the user has dragged them to.)
 .PP
@@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ If \fIdockWindow\fR is managed by another main window, it is first removed from
 .PP
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .SH "bool TQMainWindow::opaqueMoving () const"
-Returns TRUE if dock windows are moved opaquely; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "opaqueMoving" property for details.
+Returns true if dock windows are moved opaquely; otherwise returns false. See the "opaqueMoving" property for details.
 .SH "void TQMainWindow::pixmapSizeChanged ( bool )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted whenever the setUsesBigPixmaps() is called with a value different to the current setting. All widgets that should respond to such changes, e.g. toolbar buttons, must connect to this signal.
 .SH "void TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow ( TQDockWindow * dockWindow )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -665,11 +665,11 @@ Returns the Right dock area
 .PP
 See also leftDock(), topDock(), and bottomDock().
 .SH "bool TQMainWindow::rightJustification () const"
-Returns TRUE if the main window right-justifies its dock windows; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "rightJustification" property for details.
+Returns true if the main window right-justifies its dock windows; otherwise returns false. See the "rightJustification" property for details.
 .SH "void TQMainWindow::setAppropriate ( TQDockWindow * dw, bool a )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Use this function to control whether or not the \fIdw\fR dock window's caption should appear as a menu item on the dock window menu that lists the dock windows.
 .PP
-If \fIa\fR is TRUE then the \fIdw\fR will appear as a menu item on the dock window menu. The user is able to change the state (show or hide) a dock window that has a menu item by clicking the item; depending on the state of your application, this may or may not be appropriate. If \fIa\fR is FALSE the \fIdw\fR will not appear on the popup menu.
+If \fIa\fR is true then the \fIdw\fR will appear as a menu item on the dock window menu. The user is able to change the state (show or hide) a dock window that has a menu item by clicking the item; depending on the state of your application, this may or may not be appropriate. If \fIa\fR is false the \fIdw\fR will not appear on the popup menu.
 .PP
 See also showDockMenu(), isCustomizable(), and customize().
 .SH "void TQMainWindow::setCentralWidget ( TQWidget * w )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -679,19 +679,19 @@ The central widget is surrounded by the left, top, right and bottom dock areas.
 .PP
 See also centralWidget().
 .SH "void TQMainWindow::setDockEnabled ( Dock dock, bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE then users can dock windows in the \fIdock\fR area. If \fIenable\fR is FALSE users cannot dock windows in the \fIdock\fR dock area.
+If \fIenable\fR is true then users can dock windows in the \fIdock\fR area. If \fIenable\fR is false users cannot dock windows in the \fIdock\fR dock area.
 .PP
 Users can dock (drag) dock windows into any enabled dock area.
 .SH "void TQMainWindow::setDockEnabled ( TQDockWindow * dw, Dock dock, bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE then users can dock the \fIdw\fR dock window in the \fIdock\fR area. If \fIenable\fR is FALSE users cannot dock the \fIdw\fR dock window in the \fIdock\fR area.
+If \fIenable\fR is true then users can dock the \fIdw\fR dock window in the \fIdock\fR area. If \fIenable\fR is false users cannot dock the \fIdw\fR dock window in the \fIdock\fR area.
 .PP
 In general users can dock (drag) dock windows into any enabled dock area. Using this function particular dock areas can be enabled (or disabled) as docking points for particular dock windows.
 .SH "void TQMainWindow::setDockMenuEnabled ( bool b )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE, then right clicking on a dock window or dock area will pop up the dock window menu. If \fIb\fR is FALSE, right clicking a dock window or dock area will not pop up the menu.
+If \fIb\fR is true, then right clicking on a dock window or dock area will pop up the dock window menu. If \fIb\fR is false, right clicking a dock window or dock area will not pop up the menu.
 .PP
-The menu lists the (appropriate()) dock windows (which may be shown or hidden), and has a "Line Up Dock Windows" item. It will also have a "Customize" menu item if isCustomizable() returns TRUE.
+The menu lists the (appropriate()) dock windows (which may be shown or hidden), and has a "Line Up Dock Windows" item. It will also have a "Customize" menu item if isCustomizable() returns true.
 .PP
 See also lineUpDockWindows() and isDockMenuEnabled().
 .SH "void TQMainWindow::setDockWindowsMovable ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -709,7 +709,7 @@ Sets whether big pixmaps are enabled. See the "usesBigPixmaps" property for deta
 .SH "void TQMainWindow::setUsesTextLabel ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets whether text labels for toolbar buttons are enabled. See the "usesTextLabel" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQMainWindow::showDockMenu ( const TQPoint & globalPos )\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR"
-Shows the dock menu at the position \fIglobalPos\fR. The menu lists the dock windows so that they can be shown (or hidden), lined up, and possibly customized. Returns TRUE if the menu is shown; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Shows the dock menu at the position \fIglobalPos\fR. The menu lists the dock windows so that they can be shown (or hidden), lined up, and possibly customized. Returns true if the menu is shown; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If you want a custom menu, reimplement this function. You can create the menu from scratch or call createDockWindowMenu() and modify the result.
 .SH "TQStatusBar * TQMainWindow::statusBar () const"
@@ -737,9 +737,9 @@ Returns the Top dock area
 .PP
 See also bottomDock(), leftDock(), and rightDock().
 .SH "bool TQMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps () const"
-Returns TRUE if big pixmaps are enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "usesBigPixmaps" property for details.
+Returns true if big pixmaps are enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "usesBigPixmaps" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel () const"
-Returns TRUE if text labels for toolbar buttons are enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "usesTextLabel" property for details.
+Returns true if text labels for toolbar buttons are enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "usesTextLabel" property for details.
 .SH "void TQMainWindow::usesTextLabelChanged ( bool )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted whenever the setUsesTextLabel() is called with a value different to the current setting. All widgets that should respond to such changes, e.g. toolbar buttons, must connect to this signal.
 .SH "void TQMainWindow::whatsThis ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -760,9 +760,9 @@ See also TQWhatsThis::enterWhatsThisMode().
 .SH "bool dockWindowsMovable"
 This property holds whether the dock windows are movable.
 .PP
-If TRUE (the default), the user will be able to move movable dock windows from one TQMainWindow dock area to another, including the \fCTearOff\fR area (i.e. where the dock window floats freely as a window in its own right), and the Minimized area (where only the dock window's handle is shown below the menu bar). Moveable dock windows can also be moved within TQMainWindow dock areas, i.e. to rearrange them within a dock area.
+If true (the default), the user will be able to move movable dock windows from one TQMainWindow dock area to another, including the \fCTearOff\fR area (i.e. where the dock window floats freely as a window in its own right), and the Minimized area (where only the dock window's handle is shown below the menu bar). Moveable dock windows can also be moved within TQMainWindow dock areas, i.e. to rearrange them within a dock area.
 .PP
-If FALSE the user will not be able to move any dock windows.
+If false the user will not be able to move any dock windows.
 .PP
 By default dock windows are moved transparently (i.e. only an outline rectangle is shown during the drag), but this setting can be changed with setOpaqueMoving().
 .PP
@@ -772,7 +772,7 @@ Set this property's value with setDockWindowsMovable() and get this property's v
 .SH "bool opaqueMoving"
 This property holds whether dock windows are moved opaquely.
 .PP
-If TRUE the dock windows of the main window are shown opaquely (i.e. it shows the toolbar as it looks when docked) whilst it is being moved. If FALSE (the default) they are shown transparently, (i.e. as an outline rectangle).
+If true the dock windows of the main window are shown opaquely (i.e. it shows the toolbar as it looks when docked) whilst it is being moved. If false (the default) they are shown transparently, (i.e. as an outline rectangle).
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR Opaque moving of toolbars and dockwindows is known to have several problems. We recommend avoiding the use of this feature for the time being. We intend fixing the problems in a future release.
 .PP
@@ -790,7 +790,7 @@ Set this property's value with setRightJustification() and get this property's v
 .SH "bool usesBigPixmaps"
 This property holds whether big pixmaps are enabled.
 .PP
-If FALSE (the default), the tool buttons will use small pixmaps; otherwise big pixmaps will be used.
+If false (the default), the tool buttons will use small pixmaps; otherwise big pixmaps will be used.
 .PP
 Tool buttons and other widgets that wish to respond to this setting are responsible for reading the correct state on startup, and for connecting to the main window's widget's pixmapSizeChanged() signal.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmap.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmap.3qt
index e3c5ee9a7..00909cbc6 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmap.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmap.3qt
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ TQMap \- Value-based template class that provides a dictionary
 .BI "bool \fBisEmpty\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "iterator \fBinsert\fR ( const Key & key, const T & value, bool overwrite = TRUE )"
+.BI "iterator \fBinsert\fR ( const Key & key, const T & value, bool overwrite = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBremove\fR ( iterator it )"
@@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ This iterator equals constBegin() if the map is empty.
 .PP
 See also constBegin() and TQMapConstIterator.
 .SH "bool TQMap::contains ( const Key & k ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the map contains an item with key \fIk\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the map contains an item with key \fIk\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "size_type TQMap::count ( const key_type & k ) const"
 Returns the number of items whose key is \fIk\fR. Since TQMap does not allow duplicate keys, the return value is always 0 or 1.
 .PP
@@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ See also isEmpty().
 .SH "void TQMap::detach ()\fC [protected]\fR"
 If the map does not share its data with another TQMap instance, nothing happens; otherwise the function creates a new copy of this map and detaches from the shared one. This function is called whenever the map is modified. The implicit sharing mechanism is implemented this way.
 .SH "bool TQMap::empty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the map contains no items; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the map contains no items; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent to isEmpty().
 .PP
@@ -457,16 +457,16 @@ Returns an iterator pointing to the element with key \fIk\fR in the map.
 Returns end() if no key matched.
 .PP
 See also TQMapConstIterator.
-.SH "iterator TQMap::insert ( const Key & key, const T & value, bool overwrite = TRUE )"
-Inserts a new item with the key, \fIkey\fR, and a value of \fIvalue\fR. If there is already an item whose key is \fIkey\fR, that item's value is replaced with \fIvalue\fR, unless \fIoverwrite\fR is FALSE (it is TRUE by default). In this case an iterator to this item is returned, else an iterator to the new item is returned.
+.SH "iterator TQMap::insert ( const Key & key, const T & value, bool overwrite = true )"
+Inserts a new item with the key, \fIkey\fR, and a value of \fIvalue\fR. If there is already an item whose key is \fIkey\fR, that item's value is replaced with \fIvalue\fR, unless \fIoverwrite\fR is false (it is true by default). In this case an iterator to this item is returned, else an iterator to the new item is returned.
 .SH "TQPair<iterator, bool> TQMap::insert ( const value_type & x )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Inserts the (key, value) pair \fIx\fR into the map. \fIx\fR is a TQPair whose \fCfirst\fR element is a key to be inserted and whose \fCsecond\fR element is the associated value to be inserted. Returns a pair whose \fCfirst\fR element is an iterator pointing to the inserted item and whose \fCsecond\fR element is a bool indicating TRUE if \fIx\fR was inserted and FALSE if it was not inserted, e.g. because it was already present.
+Inserts the (key, value) pair \fIx\fR into the map. \fIx\fR is a TQPair whose \fCfirst\fR element is a key to be inserted and whose \fCsecond\fR element is the associated value to be inserted. Returns a pair whose \fCfirst\fR element is an iterator pointing to the inserted item and whose \fCsecond\fR element is a bool indicating true if \fIx\fR was inserted and false if it was not inserted, e.g. because it was already present.
 .PP
 See also replace().
 .SH "bool TQMap::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the map contains no items; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the map contains no items; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also count().
 .SH "TQValueList<Key> TQMap::keys () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmapconstiterator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmapconstiterator.3qt
index 49596eba2..893f14e00 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmapconstiterator.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmapconstiterator.3qt
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Returns a const reference to the current item's data.
 .SH "const K & TQMapConstIterator::key () const"
 Returns a const reference to the current item's key.
 .SH "bool TQMapConstIterator::operator!= ( const TQMapConstIterator<K, T> & it ) const"
-Compares the iterator to the \fIit\fR iterator and returns FALSE if they point to the same item; otherwise returns TRUE.
+Compares the iterator to the \fIit\fR iterator and returns false if they point to the same item; otherwise returns true.
 .SH "const T & TQMapConstIterator::operator* () const"
 Dereference operator. Returns a const reference to the current item's data. The same as data().
 .SH "TQMapConstIterator<K, T> & TQMapConstIterator::operator++ ()"
@@ -112,8 +112,8 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Postfix -- makes the previous item current and returns an iterator pointing to the new current item. The iterator cannot check whether it reached the beginning of the map. Decrementing the iterator returned by begin() causes undefined results.
 .SH "bool TQMapConstIterator::operator== ( const TQMapConstIterator<K, T> & it ) const"
-Compares the iterator to the \fIit\fR iterator and returns TRUE if
-they point to the same item; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Compares the iterator to the \fIit\fR iterator and returns true if
+they point to the same item; otherwise returns false.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 .BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqmapconstiterator.html
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmapiterator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmapiterator.3qt
index f7b7ee8ab..da4dd9f4f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmapiterator.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmapiterator.3qt
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Returns a const reference to the current item's data.
 .SH "const K & TQMapIterator::key () const"
 Returns a const reference to the current item's key.
 .SH "bool TQMapIterator::operator!= ( const TQMapIterator<K, T> & it ) const"
-Compares the iterator to the \fIit\fR iterator and returns FALSE if they point to the same item; otherwise returns TRUE.
+Compares the iterator to the \fIit\fR iterator and returns false if they point to the same item; otherwise returns true.
 .SH "T & TQMapIterator::operator* ()"
 Dereference operator. Returns a reference to the current item's data. The same as data().
 .SH "const T & TQMapIterator::operator* () const"
@@ -123,8 +123,8 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Postfix -- makes the previous item current and returns an iterator pointing to the new current item. The iterator cannot check whether it reached the beginning of the map. Decrementing the iterator returned by begin() causes undefined results.
 .SH "bool TQMapIterator::operator== ( const TQMapIterator<K, T> & it ) const"
-Compares the iterator to the \fIit\fR iterator and returns TRUE if
-they point to the same item; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Compares the iterator to the \fIit\fR iterator and returns true if
+they point to the same item; otherwise returns false.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 .BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqmapiterator.html
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmemarray.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmemarray.3qt
index ad703b5d6..aa845bbfd 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmemarray.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmemarray.3qt
@@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ Returns a const iterator pointing behind the last element of this array. This it
 .SH "bool TQMemArray::fill ( const type & v, int size = -1 )"
 Fills the array with the value \fIv\fR. If \fIsize\fR is specified as different from -1, then the array will be resized before being filled.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \fIsize\fR is -1, or \fIsize\fR is != -1 and the memory can be allocated; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if successful, i.e. if \fIsize\fR is -1, or \fIsize\fR is != -1 and the memory can be allocated; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also resize().
 .SH "int TQMemArray::find ( const type & v, uint index = 0 ) const"
@@ -400,11 +400,11 @@ Returns the position of \fIv\fR, or -1 if \fIv\fR could not be found.
 .PP
 See also contains().
 .SH "bool TQMemArray::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the array is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the array is empty; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 isEmpty() is equivalent to isNull() for TQMemArray (unlike TQString).
 .SH "bool TQMemArray::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if the array is null; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the array is null; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 A null array has size() == 0 and data() == 0.
 .SH "uint TQMemArray::nrefs () const"
@@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ Cast operator. Returns a pointer to the array.
 .PP
 See also data().
 .SH "bool TQMemArray::operator!= ( const TQMemArray<type> & a ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this array is different from \fIa\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this array is different from \fIa\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The two arrays are compared bitwise.
 .PP
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ Assigns a shallow copy of \fIa\fR to this array and returns a reference to this
 .PP
 Equivalent to assign( a ).
 .SH "bool TQMemArray::operator== ( const TQMemArray<type> & a ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this array is equal to \fIa\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this array is equal to \fIa\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The two arrays are compared bitwise.
 .PP
@@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ See also setRawData().
 .SH "bool TQMemArray::resize ( uint size, Optimization optim )"
 Resizes (expands or shrinks) the array to \fIsize\fR elements. The array becomes a null array if \fIsize\fR == 0.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the memory cannot be allocated.
+Returns true if successful, or false if the memory cannot be allocated.
 .PP
 New elements are not initialized.
 .PP
@@ -460,7 +460,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Resizes (expands or shrinks) the array to \fIsize\fR elements. The array becomes a null array if \fIsize\fR == 0.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 New elements are not initialized.
 .PP
@@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ See also bsearch().
 .SH "bool TQMemArray::truncate ( uint pos )"
 Truncates the array at position \fIpos\fR.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if successful, i.e. if the memory can be allocated; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Equivalent to resize(\fIpos\fR).
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmenubar.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmenubar.3qt
index 7269f08d0..352d2050e 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmenubar.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmenubar.3qt
@@ -496,11 +496,11 @@ Examples:
 .SH "bool TQMenuBar::isDefaultUp () const"
 Returns the popup orientation. See the "defaultUp" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the item with identifier \fIid\fR is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE
+Returns true if the item with identifier \fIid\fR is enabled; otherwise returns false
 .PP
 See also setItemEnabled() and isItemVisible().
 .SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR is visible; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR is visible; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setItemVisible().
 .SH "void TQMenuBar::menuContentsChanged ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -526,14 +526,14 @@ Returns in which cases a menubar sparator is drawn. See the "separator" property
 .SH "void TQMenuBar::setDefaultUp ( bool )"
 Sets the popup orientation. See the "defaultUp" property for details.
 .SH "void TQMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, enables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR; otherwise disables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, enables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR; otherwise disables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also isItemEnabled().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
 .SH "void TQMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )"
-If \fIvisible\fR is TRUE, shows the menu item with id \fIid\fR; otherwise hides the menu item with id \fIid\fR.
+If \fIvisible\fR is true, shows the menu item with id \fIid\fR; otherwise hides the menu item with id \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also isItemVisible() and isItemEnabled().
 .SH "void TQMenuBar::setSeparator ( Separator when )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ Reimplemented from TQWidget.
 .SH "bool defaultUp"
 This property holds the popup orientation.
 .PP
-The default popup orientation. By default, menus pop "down" the screen. By setting the property to TRUE, the menu will pop "up". You might call this for menus that are \fIbelow\fR the document to which they refer.
+The default popup orientation. By default, menus pop "down" the screen. By setting the property to true, the menu will pop "up". You might call this for menus that are \fIbelow\fR the document to which they refer.
 .PP
 If the menu would not fit on the screen, the other direction is used automatically.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmenudata.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmenudata.3qt
index 7f37b4309..5644eb250 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmenudata.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmenudata.3qt
@@ -536,20 +536,20 @@ In a popup menu a separator is rendered as a horizontal line. In a Motif menu ba
 Examples:
 .)l addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, qwerty/qwerty.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sound/sound.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemActive ( int id ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR is currently active; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR is currently active; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemChecked ( int id ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR has been checked; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR has been checked; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setItemChecked().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l canvas/canvas.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the item with identifier \fIid\fR is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE
+Returns true if the item with identifier \fIid\fR is enabled; otherwise returns false
 .PP
 See also setItemEnabled() and isItemVisible().
 .SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR is visible; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR is visible; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setItemVisible().
 .SH "int TQMenuData::itemParameter ( int id ) const"
@@ -633,14 +633,14 @@ If \fIindex\fR is out of range, the operation is ignored.
 .PP
 See also idAt().
 .SH "void TQMenuData::setItemChecked ( int id, bool check )"
-If \fIcheck\fR is TRUE, checks the menu item with id \fIid\fR; otherwise unchecks the menu item with id \fIid\fR. Calls TQPopupMenu::setCheckable( TRUE ) if necessary.
+If \fIcheck\fR is true, checks the menu item with id \fIid\fR; otherwise unchecks the menu item with id \fIid\fR. Calls TQPopupMenu::setCheckable( true ) if necessary.
 .PP
 See also isItemChecked().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l canvas/canvas.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
 .SH "void TQMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, enables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR; otherwise disables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, enables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR; otherwise disables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also isItemEnabled().
 .PP
@@ -655,7 +655,7 @@ See also connectItem(), disconnectItem(), and itemParameter().
 .PP
 Example: mdi/application.cpp.
 .SH "void TQMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )"
-If \fIvisible\fR is TRUE, shows the menu item with id \fIid\fR; otherwise hides the menu item with id \fIid\fR.
+If \fIvisible\fR is true, shows the menu item with id \fIid\fR; otherwise hides the menu item with id \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also isItemVisible() and isItemEnabled().
 .SH "void TQMenuData::setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmessagebox.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmessagebox.3qt
index 081098afe..1288d24b4 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmessagebox.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmessagebox.3qt
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Inherits TQDialog.
 .BI "\fBTQMessageBox\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQMessageBox\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, Icon icon, int button0, int button1, int button2, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = TRUE, WFlags f = WStyle_DialogBorder )"
+.BI "\fBTQMessageBox\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, Icon icon, int button0, int button1, int button2, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = true, WFlags f = WStyle_DialogBorder )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fB~TQMessageBox\fR ()"
@@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ Constructs a message box with no text and a button with the label" OK".
 If \fIparent\fR is 0, the message box becomes an application-global modal dialog box. If \fIparent\fR is a widget, the message box becomes modal relative to \fIparent\fR.
 .PP
 The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are passed to the TQDialog constructor.
-.SH "TQMessageBox::TQMessageBox ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, Icon icon, int button0, int button1, int button2, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = TRUE, WFlags f = WStyle_DialogBorder )"
+.SH "TQMessageBox::TQMessageBox ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, Icon icon, int button0, int button1, int button2, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = true, WFlags f = WStyle_DialogBorder )"
 Constructs a message box with a \fIcaption\fR, a \fItext\fR, an \fIicon\fR, and up to three buttons.
 .PP
 The \fIicon\fR must be one of the following:
@@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ Example:
 .PP
 If \fIparent\fR is 0, the message box becomes an application-global modal dialog box. If \fIparent\fR is a widget, the message box becomes modal relative to \fIparent\fR.
 .PP
-If \fImodal\fR is TRUE the message box is modal; otherwise it is modeless.
+If \fImodal\fR is true the message box is modal; otherwise it is modeless.
 .PP
 The \fIparent\fR, \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR, and \fIf\fR arguments are passed to the TQDialog constructor.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmetaobject.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmetaobject.3qt
index e56365a3b..7a045ed92 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmetaobject.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmetaobject.3qt
@@ -26,37 +26,37 @@ TQMetaObject \- Meta information about TQt objects
 .BI "bool \fBinherits\fR ( const char * clname ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBnumSlots\fR ( bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBnumSlots\fR ( bool super = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBnumSignals\fR ( bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBnumSignals\fR ( bool super = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQStrList \fBslotNames\fR ( bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "TQStrList \fBslotNames\fR ( bool super = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQStrList \fBsignalNames\fR ( bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "TQStrList \fBsignalNames\fR ( bool super = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBnumClassInfo\fR ( bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBnumClassInfo\fR ( bool super = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "const QClassInfo * \fBclassInfo\fR ( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "const QClassInfo * \fBclassInfo\fR ( int index, bool super = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "const char * \fBclassInfo\fR ( const char * name, bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "const char * \fBclassInfo\fR ( const char * name, bool super = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "const TQMetaProperty * \fBproperty\fR ( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "const TQMetaProperty * \fBproperty\fR ( int index, bool super = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBfindProperty\fR ( const char * name, bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBfindProperty\fR ( const char * name, bool super = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQStrList \fBpropertyNames\fR ( bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "TQStrList \fBpropertyNames\fR ( bool super = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBnumProperties\fR ( bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBnumProperties\fR ( bool super = false ) const"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -83,72 +83,72 @@ Classes may have a list of name-value pairs of class information. The number of
 See also tqmoc (Meta Object Compiler) and Object Model.
 .PP
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "const QClassInfo * TQMetaObject::classInfo ( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.SH "const QClassInfo * TQMetaObject::classInfo ( int index, bool super = false ) const"
 Returns the class information with index \fIindex\fR or 0 if no such information exists.
 .PP
-If \fIsuper\fR is TRUE, inherited class information is included.
-.SH "const char * TQMetaObject::classInfo ( const char * name, bool super = FALSE ) const"
+If \fIsuper\fR is true, inherited class information is included.
+.SH "const char * TQMetaObject::classInfo ( const char * name, bool super = false ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Returns the class information with name \fIname\fR or 0 if no such information exists.
 .PP
-If \fIsuper\fR is TRUE, inherited class information is included.
+If \fIsuper\fR is true, inherited class information is included.
 .SH "const char * TQMetaObject::className () const"
 Returns the class name.
 .PP
 See also TQObject::className() and superClassName().
-.SH "int TQMetaObject::findProperty ( const char * name, bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.SH "int TQMetaObject::findProperty ( const char * name, bool super = false ) const"
 Returns the index for the property with name \fIname\fR or -1 if no such property exists.
 .PP
-If \fIsuper\fR is TRUE, inherited properties are included.
+If \fIsuper\fR is true, inherited properties are included.
 .PP
 See also property() and propertyNames().
 .SH "bool TQMetaObject::inherits ( const char * clname ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this class inherits \fIclname\fR within the meta object inheritance chain; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this class inherits \fIclname\fR within the meta object inheritance chain; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 (A class is considered to inherit itself.)
-.SH "int TQMetaObject::numClassInfo ( bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.SH "int TQMetaObject::numClassInfo ( bool super = false ) const"
 Returns the number of items of class information available for this class.
 .PP
-If \fIsuper\fR is TRUE, inherited class information is included.
-.SH "int TQMetaObject::numProperties ( bool super = FALSE ) const"
+If \fIsuper\fR is true, inherited class information is included.
+.SH "int TQMetaObject::numProperties ( bool super = false ) const"
 Returns the number of properties for this class.
 .PP
-If \fIsuper\fR is TRUE, inherited properties are included.
+If \fIsuper\fR is true, inherited properties are included.
 .PP
 See also propertyNames().
-.SH "int TQMetaObject::numSignals ( bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.SH "int TQMetaObject::numSignals ( bool super = false ) const"
 Returns the number of signals for this class.
 .PP
-If \fIsuper\fR is TRUE, inherited signals are included.
+If \fIsuper\fR is true, inherited signals are included.
 .PP
 See also signalNames().
-.SH "int TQMetaObject::numSlots ( bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.SH "int TQMetaObject::numSlots ( bool super = false ) const"
 Returns the number of slots for this class.
 .PP
-If \fIsuper\fR is TRUE, inherited slots are included.
+If \fIsuper\fR is true, inherited slots are included.
 .PP
 See also slotNames().
-.SH "const TQMetaProperty * TQMetaObject::property ( int index, bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.SH "const TQMetaProperty * TQMetaObject::property ( int index, bool super = false ) const"
 Returns the property meta data for the property at index \fIindex\fR or 0 if no such property exists.
 .PP
-If \fIsuper\fR is TRUE, inherited properties are included.
+If \fIsuper\fR is true, inherited properties are included.
 .PP
 See also propertyNames().
-.SH "TQStrList TQMetaObject::propertyNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.SH "TQStrList TQMetaObject::propertyNames ( bool super = false ) const"
 Returns a list with the names of all this class's properties.
 .PP
-If \fIsuper\fR is TRUE, inherited properties are included.
+If \fIsuper\fR is true, inherited properties are included.
 .PP
 See also property().
-.SH "TQStrList TQMetaObject::signalNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const"
+.SH "TQStrList TQMetaObject::signalNames ( bool super = false ) const"
 Returns a list with the names of all this class's signals.
 .PP
-If \fIsuper\fR is TRUE, inherited signals are included.
-.SH "TQStrList TQMetaObject::slotNames ( bool super = FALSE ) const"
+If \fIsuper\fR is true, inherited signals are included.
+.SH "TQStrList TQMetaObject::slotNames ( bool super = false ) const"
 Returns a list with the names of all this class's slots.
 .PP
-If \fIsuper\fR is TRUE, inherited slots are included.
+If \fIsuper\fR is true, inherited slots are included.
 .PP
 See also numSlots().
 .SH "TQMetaObject * TQMetaObject::superClass () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmetaproperty.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmetaproperty.3qt
index 8e424980b..f5ef2170a 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmetaproperty.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmetaproperty.3qt
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ You receive meta property data through an object's meta object. See TQMetaObject
 See also Object Model.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "bool TQMetaProperty::designable ( TQObject * o = 0 ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the property is designable for object \fIo\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the property is designable for object \fIo\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If no object \fIo\fR is given, the function returns a static approximation.
 .SH "TQStrList TQMetaProperty::enumKeys () const"
@@ -78,11 +78,11 @@ Returns the possible enumeration keys if this property is an enumeration type (o
 .PP
 See also isEnumType().
 .SH "bool TQMetaProperty::isEnumType () const"
-Returns TRUE if the property's type is an enumeration value; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the property's type is an enumeration value; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isSetType() and enumKeys().
 .SH "bool TQMetaProperty::isSetType () const"
-Returns TRUE if the property's type is an enumeration value that is used as set, i.e. if the enumeration values can be OR-ed together; otherwise returns FALSE. A set type is implicitly also an enum type.
+Returns true if the property's type is an enumeration value that is used as set, i.e. if the enumeration values can be OR-ed together; otherwise returns false. A set type is implicitly also an enum type.
 .PP
 See also isEnumType() and enumKeys().
 .SH "int TQMetaProperty::keyToValue ( const char * key ) const"
@@ -98,15 +98,15 @@ See also isSetType() and valueToKey().
 .SH "const char * TQMetaProperty::name () const"
 Returns the name of the property.
 .SH "bool TQMetaProperty::reset ( TQObject * o ) const"
-Tries to reset the property for object \fIo\fR with a reset method. On success, returns TRUE; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Tries to reset the property for object \fIo\fR with a reset method. On success, returns true; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Reset methods are optional, usually only a few properties support them.
 .SH "bool TQMetaProperty::scriptable ( TQObject * o = 0 ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the property is scriptable for object \fIo\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the property is scriptable for object \fIo\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If no object \fIo\fR is given, the function returns a static approximation.
 .SH "bool TQMetaProperty::stored ( TQObject * o = 0 ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the property shall be stored for object \fIo\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the property shall be stored for object \fIo\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If no object \fIo\fR is given, the function returns a static approximation.
 .SH "const char * TQMetaProperty::type () const"
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Converts the set value \fIvalue\fR to a list of keys.
 .PP
 See also isSetType() and valueToKey().
 .SH "bool TQMetaProperty::writable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the property is writable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the property is writable; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmimesource.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmimesource.3qt
index 9875ef041..2092c7859 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmimesource.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmimesource.3qt
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Returns the \fIi\fR-th supported MIME format, or 0.
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQDropEvent.
 .SH "bool TQMimeSource::provides ( const char * mimeType ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the object can provide the data in format \fImimeType\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the object can provide the data in format \fImimeType\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If you inherit from TQMimeSource, for consistency reasons it is better to implement the more abstract canDecode() functions such as TQTextDrag::canDecode() and TQImageDrag::canDecode().
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmotifplusstyle.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmotifplusstyle.3qt
index 9f377df26..1a2f0959e 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmotifplusstyle.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmotifplusstyle.3qt
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Inherits TQMotifStyle.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQMotifPlusStyle\fR ( bool hoveringHighlight = TRUE )"
+.BI "\fBTQMotifPlusStyle\fR ( bool hoveringHighlight = true )"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -26,10 +26,10 @@ This class implements a Motif-ish look and feel with the more sophisticated beve
 .PP
 See also Widget Appearance and Style.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQMotifPlusStyle::TQMotifPlusStyle ( bool hoveringHighlight = TRUE )"
+.SH "TQMotifPlusStyle::TQMotifPlusStyle ( bool hoveringHighlight = true )"
 Constructs a TQMotifPlusStyle
 .PP
-If \fIhoveringHighlight\fR is TRUE (the default), then the style will
+If \fIhoveringHighlight\fR is true (the default), then the style will
 not highlight push buttons, checkboxes, radiobuttons, comboboxes,
 scrollbars or sliders.
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmotifstyle.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmotifstyle.3qt
index 81036289f..d4f8b4dee 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmotifstyle.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmotifstyle.3qt
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Inherited by TQCDEStyle, TQMotifPlusStyle, and TQSGIStyle.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQMotifStyle\fR ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQMotifStyle\fR ( bool useHighlightCols = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBsetUseHighlightColors\fR ( bool arg )"
@@ -34,21 +34,21 @@ This class implements the Motif look and feel. It closely resembles the original
 .PP
 See also Widget Appearance and Style.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQMotifStyle::TQMotifStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQMotifStyle::TQMotifStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = false )"
 Constructs a TQMotifStyle.
 .PP
-If \fIuseHighlightCols\fR is FALSE (the default), the style will polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the text color.
+If \fIuseHighlightCols\fR is false (the default), the style will polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the text color.
 .SH "void TQMotifStyle::setUseHighlightColors ( bool arg )"
-If \fIarg\fR is FALSE, the style will polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the text color.
+If \fIarg\fR is false, the style will polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the text color.
 .PP
 The effect will show up the next time an application palette is set via TQApplication::setPalette(). The current color palette of the application remains unchanged.
 .PP
 See also TQStyle::polish().
 .SH "bool TQMotifStyle::useHighlightColors () const"
-Returns TRUE if the style treats the highlight colors of the
+Returns true if the style treats the highlight colors of the
 palette in a Motif-like manner, which is a simple inversion
-between the base and the text color; otherwise returns FALSE. The
-default is FALSE.
+between the base and the text color; otherwise returns false. The
+default is false.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 .BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqmotifstyle.html
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmouseevent.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmouseevent.3qt
index 397a9e9ff..c8390794b 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmouseevent.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmouseevent.3qt
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ The accept flag is set by default.
 .PP
 See also accept().
 .SH "bool TQMouseEvent::isAccepted () const"
-Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event wants to keep the key; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the receiver of the event wants to keep the key; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "const TQPoint & TQMouseEvent::pos () const"
 Returns the position of the mouse pointer relative to the widget that received the event.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmovie.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmovie.3qt
index c0a9e61f9..59badb3c5 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmovie.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmovie.3qt
@@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Disconnects the \fIreceiver\fR's \fImember\fR (or all members if \fImember\fR is
 .SH "void TQMovie::disconnectUpdate ( TQObject * receiver, const char * member = 0 )"
 Disconnects the \fIreceiver\fR's \fImember\fR (or all members if \\q member is zero) that were previously connected by connectUpdate().
 .SH "bool TQMovie::finished () const"
-Returns TRUE if the image is no longer playing: this happens when all loops of all frames are complete; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the image is no longer playing: this happens when all loops of all frames are complete; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Example: movies/main.cpp.
 .SH "const TQImage & TQMovie::frameImage () const"
@@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ Example: movies/main.cpp.
 .SH "const TQRect & TQMovie::getValidRect () const"
 Returns the area of the pixmap for which pixels have been generated.
 .SH "bool TQMovie::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if the movie is null; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the movie is null; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQMovie & TQMovie::operator= ( const TQMovie & movie )"
 Makes this movie use the same data as movie \fImovie\fR. TQMovies use explicit sharing.
 .SH "void TQMovie::pause ()"
@@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ See also unpause().
 .PP
 Example: movies/main.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQMovie::paused () const"
-Returns TRUE if the image is paused; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the image is paused; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Example: movies/main.cpp.
 .SH "void TQMovie::pushData ( const uchar * data, int length )"
@@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ Rewinds the movie to the beginning. If the movie has not been paused, it begins
 .PP
 Example: movies/main.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQMovie::running () const"
-Returns TRUE if the image is not single-stepping, not paused, and not finished; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the image is not single-stepping, not paused, and not finished; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "void TQMovie::setBackgroundColor ( const TQColor & c )"
 Sets the background color of the pixmap to \fIc\fR. If the background color isValid(), the pixmap will never have a mask because the background color will be used in transparent regions of the image.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmutex.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmutex.3qt
index f685a31f4..d2ac81b77 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqmutex.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmutex.3qt
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ All the functions in this class are thread-safe when TQt is built with thread su
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQMutex\fR ( bool recursive = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQMutex\fR ( bool recursive = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual \fB~TQMutex\fR ()"
@@ -160,8 +160,8 @@ When you call lock() in a thread, other threads that try to call lock() in the s
 .PP
 See also Environment Classes and Threading.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQMutex::TQMutex ( bool recursive = FALSE )"
-Constructs a new mutex. The mutex is created in an unlocked state. A recursive mutex is created if \fIrecursive\fR is TRUE; a normal mutex is created if \fIrecursive\fR is FALSE (the default). With a recursive mutex, a thread can lock the same mutex multiple times and it will not be unlocked until a corresponding number of unlock() calls have been made.
+.SH "TQMutex::TQMutex ( bool recursive = false )"
+Constructs a new mutex. The mutex is created in an unlocked state. A recursive mutex is created if \fIrecursive\fR is true; a normal mutex is created if \fIrecursive\fR is false (the default). With a recursive mutex, a thread can lock the same mutex multiple times and it will not be unlocked until a corresponding number of unlock() calls have been made.
 .SH "TQMutex::~TQMutex ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Destroys the mutex.
 .PP
@@ -171,13 +171,13 @@ Attempt to lock the mutex. If another thread has locked the mutex then this call
 .PP
 See also unlock() and locked().
 .SH "bool TQMutex::locked ()"
-Returns TRUE if the mutex is locked by another thread; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the mutex is locked by another thread; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR Due to differing implementations of recursive mutexes on various platforms, calling this function from the same thread that previously locked the mutex will return undefined results.
 .PP
 See also lock() and unlock().
 .SH "bool TQMutex::tryLock ()"
-Attempt to lock the mutex. If the lock was obtained, this function returns TRUE. If another thread has locked the mutex, this function returns FALSE, instead of waiting for the mutex to become available, i.e. it does not block.
+Attempt to lock the mutex. If the lock was obtained, this function returns true. If another thread has locked the mutex, this function returns false, instead of waiting for the mutex to become available, i.e. it does not block.
 .PP
 If the lock was obtained, the mutex must be unlocked with unlock() before another thread can successfully lock it.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqnetworkprotocol.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqnetworkprotocol.3qt
index 3d1727a81..c0622cfa9 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqnetworkprotocol.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqnetworkprotocol.3qt
@@ -222,11 +222,11 @@ Destructor.
 .SH "void TQNetworkProtocol::addOperation ( TQNetworkOperation * op )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Adds the operation \fIop\fR to the operation queue. The operation will be processed as soon as possible. This method returns immediately.
 .SH "bool TQNetworkProtocol::autoDelete () const"
-Returns TRUE if auto-deleting is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if auto-deleting is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQNetworkProtocol::setAutoDelete().
 .SH "bool TQNetworkProtocol::checkConnection ( TQNetworkOperation * op )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-For processing operations the network protocol base class calls this method quite often. This should be reimplemented by new network protocols. It should return TRUE if the connection is OK (open); otherwise it should return FALSE. If the connection is not open the protocol should open it.
+For processing operations the network protocol base class calls this method quite often. This should be reimplemented by new network protocols. It should return true if the connection is OK (open); otherwise it should return false. If the connection is not open the protocol should open it.
 .PP
 If the connection can't be opened (e.g. because you already tried but the host couldn't be found), set the state of \fIop\fR to TQNetworkProtocol::StFailed and emit the finished() signal with this TQNetworkOperation as argument.
 .PP
@@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ Normally you should not work directly with network protocols, so you will not ne
 .PP
 See also TQUrlOperator.
 .SH "bool TQNetworkProtocol::hasOnlyLocalFileSystem ()\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the only protocol registered is for working on the local filesystem; returns FALSE if other network protocols are also registered.
+Returns true if the only protocol registered is for working on the local filesystem; returns false if other network protocols are also registered.
 .SH "void TQNetworkProtocol::itemChanged ( TQNetworkOperation * op )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted whenever a file which is a child of this URL has been changed, e.g. by successfully calling rename(). \fIop\fR holds the original and the new file names in the first and second arguments, accessible with op->arg( 0 ) and op->arg( 1 ) respectively. \fIop\fR is the pointer to the operation object which contains all the information about the operation, including the state, etc.
 .PP
@@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ This signal is emitted when remove() has been succesful and the file has been re
 .PP
 When a protocol emits this signal, TQNetworkProtocol is smart enough to let the TQUrlOperator, which is used by the network protocol, emit its corresponding signal.
 .SH "void TQNetworkProtocol::setAutoDelete ( bool b, int i = 10000 )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Because it's sometimes hard to take care of removing network protocol instances, TQNetworkProtocol provides an auto-delete mechanism. If you set \fIb\fR to TRUE, the network protocol instance is removed after it has been inactive for \fIi\fR milliseconds (i.e. \fIi\fR milliseconds after the last operation has been processed). If you set \fIb\fR to FALSE the auto-delete mechanism is switched off.
+Because it's sometimes hard to take care of removing network protocol instances, TQNetworkProtocol provides an auto-delete mechanism. If you set \fIb\fR to true, the network protocol instance is removed after it has been inactive for \fIi\fR milliseconds (i.e. \fIi\fR milliseconds after the last operation has been processed). If you set \fIb\fR to false the auto-delete mechanism is switched off.
 .PP
 If you switch on auto-delete, the TQNetworkProtocol also deletes its TQUrlOperator.
 .SH "void TQNetworkProtocol::setUrl ( TQUrlOperator * u )\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqobject.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqobject.3qt
index 1db0cf235..e5791aae7 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqobject.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqobject.3qt
@@ -74,13 +74,13 @@ Inherits Qt.
 .BI "void \fBkillTimers\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQObject * \fBchild\fR ( const char * objName, const char * inheritsClass = 0, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE )"
+.BI "TQObject * \fBchild\fR ( const char * objName, const char * inheritsClass = 0, bool recursiveSearch = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "const TQObjectList * \fBchildren\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQObjectList * \fBqueryList\fR ( const char * inheritsClass = 0, const char * objName = 0, bool regexpMatch = TRUE, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "TQObjectList * \fBqueryList\fR ( const char * inheritsClass = 0, const char * objName = 0, bool regexpMatch = true, bool recursiveSearch = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBinsertChild\fR ( TQObject * obj )"
@@ -238,20 +238,20 @@ All signals to and from the object are automatically disconnected.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR Deleting a TQObject while pending events are waiting to be delivered can cause a crash. You must not delete the TQObject directly from a thread that is not the GUI thread. Use the TQObject::deleteLater() method instead, which will cause the event loop to delete the object after all pending events have been delivered to the object.
 .SH "void TQObject::blockSignals ( bool block )"
-Blocks signals if \fIblock\fR is TRUE, or unblocks signals if \fIblock\fR is FALSE.
+Blocks signals if \fIblock\fR is true, or unblocks signals if \fIblock\fR is false.
 .PP
 Emitted signals disappear into hyperspace if signals are blocked. Note that the destroyed() signals will be emitted even if the signals for this object have been blocked.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l rot13/rot13.cpp and simple/main.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQObject::checkConnectArgs ( const char * signal, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the \fIsignal\fR and the \fImember\fR arguments are compatible; otherwise returns FALSE. (The \fIreceiver\fR argument is currently ignored.)
+Returns true if the \fIsignal\fR and the \fImember\fR arguments are compatible; otherwise returns false. (The \fIreceiver\fR argument is currently ignored.)
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR We recommend that you use the default implementation and do not reimplement this function.
-.SH "TQObject * TQObject::child ( const char * objName, const char * inheritsClass = 0, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE )"
+.SH "TQObject * TQObject::child ( const char * objName, const char * inheritsClass = 0, bool recursiveSearch = true )"
 Searches the children and optionally grandchildren of this object, and returns a child that is called \fIobjName\fR that inherits \fIinheritsClass\fR. If \fIinheritsClass\fR is 0 (the default), any class matches.
 .PP
-If \fIrecursiveSearch\fR is TRUE (the default), child() performs a depth-first search of the object's children.
+If \fIrecursiveSearch\fR is true (the default), child() performs a depth-first search of the object's children.
 .PP
 If there is no such object, this function returns 0. If there are more than one, the first one found is retured; if you need all of them, use queryList().
 .SH "void TQObject::childEvent ( TQChildEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ See also name, inherits(), isA(), and isWidgetType().
 .PP
 Example: sql/overview/custom1/main.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQObject::connect ( const TQObject * sender, const char * signal, const TQObject * receiver, const char * member )\fC [static]\fR"
-Connects \fIsignal\fR from the \fIsender\fR object to \fImember\fR in object \fIreceiver\fR, and returns TRUE if the connection succeeds; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Connects \fIsignal\fR from the \fIsender\fR object to \fImember\fR in object \fIreceiver\fR, and returns true if the connection succeeds; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 You must use the TQ_SIGNAL() and TQ_SLOT() macros when specifying the \fIsignal\fR and the \fImember\fR, for example:
 .PP
@@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ You must use the TQ_SIGNAL() and TQ_SLOT() macros when specifying the \fIsignal\
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-This example ensures that the label always displays the current scroll bar value. Note that the signal and slots parameters must not contain any variable names, only the type. E.g. the following would not work and return FALSE: TQObject::connect( scroll, TQ_SIGNAL(valueChanged(int v)), label, TQ_SLOT(setNum(int v)) );
+This example ensures that the label always displays the current scroll bar value. Note that the signal and slots parameters must not contain any variable names, only the type. E.g. the following would not work and return false: TQObject::connect( scroll, TQ_SIGNAL(valueChanged(int v)), label, TQ_SLOT(setNum(int v)) );
 .PP
 A signal can also be connected to another signal:
 .PP
@@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ A signal can be connected to many slots and signals. Many signals can be connect
 .PP
 If a signal is connected to several slots, the slots are activated in an arbitrary order when the signal is emitted.
 .PP
-The function returns TRUE if it successfully connects the signal to the slot. It will return FALSE if it cannot create the connection, for example, if TQObject is unable to verify the existence of either \fIsignal\fR or \fImember\fR, or if their signatures aren't compatible.
+The function returns true if it successfully connects the signal to the slot. It will return false if it cannot create the connection, for example, if TQObject is unable to verify the existence of either \fIsignal\fR or \fImember\fR, or if their signatures aren't compatible.
 .PP
 A signal is emitted for \fIevery\fR connection you make, so if you duplicate a connection, two signals will be emitted. You can always break a connection using disconnect().
 .PP
@@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ Dumps a tree of children to the debug output.
 .PP
 This function is useful for debugging, but does nothing if the library has been compiled in release mode (i.e. without debugging information).
 .SH "bool TQObject::event ( TQEvent * e )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-This virtual function receives events to an object and should return TRUE if the event \fIe\fR was recognized and processed.
+This virtual function receives events to an object and should return true if the event \fIe\fR was recognized and processed.
 .PP
 The event() function can be reimplemented to customize the behavior of an object.
 .PP
@@ -503,7 +503,7 @@ Reimplemented in TQWidget.
 .SH "bool TQObject::eventFilter ( TQObject * watched, TQEvent * e )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Filters events if this object has been installed as an event filter for the \fIwatched\fR object.
 .PP
-In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to filter the event \fIe\fR, out, i.e. stop it being handled further, return TRUE; otherwise return FALSE.
+In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to filter the event \fIe\fR, out, i.e. stop it being handled further, return true; otherwise return false.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
@@ -557,11 +557,11 @@ Example:
 .br
                 tqDebug( "Ate key press %d", k->key() );
 .br
-                return TRUE;
+                return true;
 .br
             } else {
 .br
-                return FALSE;
+                return false;
 .br
             }
 .br
@@ -579,17 +579,17 @@ Example:
 .PP
 Notice in the example above that unhandled events are passed to the base class's eventFilter() function, since the base class might have reimplemented eventFilter() for its own internal purposes.
 .PP
-\fBWarning:\fR If you delete the receiver object in this function, be sure to return TRUE. Otherwise, TQt will forward the event to the deleted object and the program might crash.
+\fBWarning:\fR If you delete the receiver object in this function, be sure to return true. Otherwise, TQt will forward the event to the deleted object and the program might crash.
 .PP
 See also installEventFilter().
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQAccel, TQScrollView, and TQSpinBox.
 .SH "bool TQObject::highPriority () const"
-Returns TRUE if the object is a high-priority object, or FALSE if it is a standard-priority object.
+Returns true if the object is a high-priority object, or false if it is a standard-priority object.
 .PP
 High-priority objects are placed first in TQObject's list of children on the assumption that they will be referenced very often.
 .SH "bool TQObject::inherits ( const char * clname ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this object is an instance of a class that inherits \fIclname\fR, and \fIclname\fR inherits TQObject; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this object is an instance of a class that inherits \fIclname\fR, and \fIclname\fR inherits TQObject; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 A class is considered to inherit itself.
 .PP
@@ -599,20 +599,20 @@ Example:
 .br
         TQTimer *t = new TQTimer;         // TQTimer inherits TQObject
 .br
-        t->inherits( "TQTimer" );        // returns TRUE
+        t->inherits( "TQTimer" );        // returns true
 .br
-        t->inherits( "TQObject" );       // returns TRUE
+        t->inherits( "TQObject" );       // returns true
 .br
-        t->inherits( "TQButton" );       // returns FALSE
+        t->inherits( "TQButton" );       // returns false
 .br
 .br
         // TQScrollBar inherits TQWidget and TQRangeControl
 .br
         TQScrollBar *s = new TQScrollBar( 0 );
 .br
-        s->inherits( "TQWidget" );       // returns TRUE
+        s->inherits( "TQWidget" );       // returns true
 .br
-        s->inherits( "TQRangeControl" ); // returns FALSE
+        s->inherits( "TQRangeControl" ); // returns false
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -637,7 +637,7 @@ Installs an event filter \fIfilterObj\fR on this object. For example:
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-An event filter is an object that receives all events that are sent to this object. The filter can either stop the event or forward it to this object. The event filter \fIfilterObj\fR receives events via its eventFilter() function. The eventFilter() function must return TRUE if the event should be filtered, (i.e. stopped); otherwise it must return FALSE.
+An event filter is an object that receives all events that are sent to this object. The filter can either stop the event or forward it to this object. The event filter \fIfilterObj\fR receives events via its eventFilter() function. The eventFilter() function must return true if the event should be filtered, (i.e. stopped); otherwise it must return false.
 .PP
 If multiple event filters are installed on a single object, the filter that was installed last is activated first.
 .PP
@@ -670,13 +670,13 @@ Here's a \fCKeyPressEater\fR class that eats the key presses of its monitored ob
 .br
             tqDebug( "Ate key press %d", k->key() );
 .br
-            return TRUE; // eat event
+            return true; // eat event
 .br
         } else {
 .br
             // standard event processing
 .br
-            return FALSE;
+            return false;
 .br
         }
 .br
@@ -703,11 +703,11 @@ And here's how to install it on two widgets:
 .PP
 The TQAccel class, for example, uses this technique to intercept accelerator key presses.
 .PP
-\fBWarning:\fR If you delete the receiver object in your eventFilter() function, be sure to return TRUE. If you return FALSE, TQt sends the event to the deleted object and the program will crash.
+\fBWarning:\fR If you delete the receiver object in your eventFilter() function, be sure to return true. If you return false, TQt sends the event to the deleted object and the program will crash.
 .PP
 See also removeEventFilter(), eventFilter(), and event().
 .SH "bool TQObject::isA ( const char * clname ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this object is an instance of the class \fIclname\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this object is an instance of the class \fIclname\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
@@ -715,15 +715,15 @@ Example:
 .br
     TQTimer *t = new TQTimer; // TQTimer inherits TQObject
 .br
-    t->isA( "TQTimer" );     // returns TRUE
+    t->isA( "TQTimer" );     // returns true
 .br
-    t->isA( "TQObject" );    // returns FALSE
+    t->isA( "TQObject" );    // returns false
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
 See also inherits() and metaObject().
 .SH "bool TQObject::isWidgetType () const"
-Returns TRUE if the object is a widget; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the object is a widget; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Calling this function is equivalent to calling inherits("TQWidget"), except that it is much faster.
 .SH "void TQObject::killTimer ( int id )"
@@ -774,14 +774,14 @@ Information about all available properties are provided through the metaObject()
 See also setProperty(), TQVariant::isValid(), metaObject(), TQMetaObject::propertyNames(), and TQMetaObject::property().
 .PP
 Example: qutlook/centralwidget.cpp.
-.SH "TQObjectList * TQObject::queryList ( const char * inheritsClass = 0, const char * objName = 0, bool regexpMatch = TRUE, bool recursiveSearch = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "TQObjectList * TQObject::queryList ( const char * inheritsClass = 0, const char * objName = 0, bool regexpMatch = true, bool recursiveSearch = true ) const"
 Searches the children and optionally grandchildren of this object, and returns a list of those objects that are named or that match \fIobjName\fR and inherit \fIinheritsClass\fR. If \fIinheritsClass\fR is 0 (the default), all classes match. If \fIobjName\fR is 0 (the default), all object names match.
 .PP
-If \fIregexpMatch\fR is TRUE (the default), \fIobjName\fR is a regular expression that the objects's names must match. The syntax is that of a TQRegExp. If \fIregexpMatch\fR is FALSE, \fIobjName\fR is a string and object names must match it exactly.
+If \fIregexpMatch\fR is true (the default), \fIobjName\fR is a regular expression that the objects's names must match. The syntax is that of a TQRegExp. If \fIregexpMatch\fR is false, \fIobjName\fR is a string and object names must match it exactly.
 .PP
 Note that \fIinheritsClass\fR uses single inheritance from TQObject, the way inherits() does. According to inherits(), TQMenuBar inherits TQWidget but not TQMenuData. This does not quite match reality, but is the best that can be done on the wide variety of compilers TQt supports.
 .PP
-Finally, if \fIrecursiveSearch\fR is TRUE (the default), queryList() searches \fIn\fRth-generation as well as first-generation children.
+Finally, if \fIrecursiveSearch\fR is true (the default), queryList() searches \fIn\fRth-generation as well as first-generation children.
 .PP
 If all this seems a bit complex for your needs, the simpler child() function may be what you want.
 .PP
@@ -802,7 +802,7 @@ This somewhat contrived example disables all the buttons in this window:
 .br
         ++it;
 .br
-        ((TQButton*)obj)->setEnabled( FALSE );
+        ((TQButton*)obj)->setEnabled( false );
 .br
     }
 .br
@@ -840,7 +840,7 @@ Sets the object's name to \fIname\fR.
 .SH "bool TQObject::setProperty ( const char * name, const TQVariant & value )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the value of the object's \fIname\fR property to \fIvalue\fR.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the operation was successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the operation was successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Information about all available properties is provided through the metaObject().
 .PP
@@ -848,7 +848,7 @@ See also property(), metaObject(), TQMetaObject::propertyNames(), and TQMetaObje
 .PP
 Example: qutlook/centralwidget.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQObject::signalsBlocked () const"
-Returns TRUE if signals are blocked; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if signals are blocked; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Signals are not blocked by default.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqobjectcleanuphandler.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqobjectcleanuphandler.3qt
index 91d620cd1..876767f98 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqobjectcleanuphandler.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqobjectcleanuphandler.3qt
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Example:
 .br
     {
 .br
-        return TRUE;
+        return true;
 .br
     }
 .br
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Adds \fIobject\fR to this cleanup handler and returns the pointer to the object.
 .SH "void TQObjectCleanupHandler::clear ()"
 Deletes all objects in this cleanup handler. The cleanup handler becomes empty.
 .SH "bool TQObjectCleanupHandler::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if this cleanup handler is empty or if all objects in this cleanup handler have been destroyed; otherwise return FALSE.
+Returns true if this cleanup handler is empty or if all objects in this cleanup handler have been destroyed; otherwise return false.
 .SH "void TQObjectCleanupHandler::remove ( TQObject * object )"
 Removes the \fIobject\fR from this cleanup handler. The object will
 not be destroyed.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpaintdevice.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpaintdevice.3qt
index c7ea10702..67adbf66f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqpaintdevice.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpaintdevice.3qt
@@ -208,11 +208,11 @@ The HANDLE type varies with platform; see tqpaintdevice.h and tqwindowdefs.h for
 .PP
 See also x11Display().
 .SH "bool TQPaintDevice::isExtDev () const"
-Returns TRUE if the device is an external paint device; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the device is an external paint device; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 External paint devices cannot be bitBlt()'ed from. TQPicture and TQPrinter are external paint devices.
 .SH "bool TQPaintDevice::paintingActive () const"
-Returns TRUE if the device is being painted, i.e. someone has called TQPainter::begin() but not yet called TQPainter::end() for this device; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the device is being painted, i.e. someone has called TQPainter::begin() but not yet called TQPainter::end() for this device; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQPainter::isActive().
 .SH "int TQPaintDevice::x11AppCells ()\fC [static]\fR"
@@ -246,11 +246,11 @@ Returns the default colormap for screen \fIscreen\fR of the X display global to
 .PP
 See also x11Cells().
 .SH "bool TQPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultVisual ()\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the Visual used is the default for the default screen of the X display global to the application (X11 only); otherwise returns FALSE. Using this function is not portable.
+Returns true if the Visual used is the default for the default screen of the X display global to the application (X11 only); otherwise returns false. Using this function is not portable.
 .SH "bool TQPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultVisual ( int screen )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the Visual used is the default for screen \fIscreen\fR of the X display global to the application (X11 only); otherwise returns FALSE. Using this function is not portable.
+Returns true if the Visual used is the default for screen \fIscreen\fR of the X display global to the application (X11 only); otherwise returns false. Using this function is not portable.
 .SH "int TQPaintDevice::x11AppDepth ( int screen )\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns the depth for screen \fIscreen\fR of the X display global to the application (X11 only). Using this function is not portable.
 .PP
@@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Copies a block of pixels from \fIsrc\fR to \fIdst\fR, perhaps merging each pixel
 .PP
 The most common values for \fIrop\fR are CopyROP and XorROP; the TQt::RasterOp documentation defines all the possible values.
 .PP
-If \fIignoreMask\fR is FALSE (the default) and \fIsrc\fR is a masked TQPixmap, the entire blit is masked by \fIsrc\fR->mask().
+If \fIignoreMask\fR is false (the default) and \fIsrc\fR is a masked TQPixmap, the entire blit is masked by \fIsrc\fR->mask().
 .PP
 If \fIsrc\fR, \fIdst\fR, \fIsw\fR or \fIsh\fR is 0, bitBlt() does nothing. If \fIsw\fR or \fIsh\fR is negative bitBlt() copies starting at \fIsx\fR (and respectively, \fIsy\fR) and ending at the right end (respectively, bottom) of \fIsrc\fR.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpainter.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpainter.3qt
index b223bea72..1d9444a8e 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqpainter.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpainter.3qt
@@ -22,19 +22,19 @@ Inherits Qt.
 .BI "\fBTQPainter\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQPainter\fR ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQPainter\fR ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQPainter\fR ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQPainter\fR ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fB~TQPainter\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "bool \fBbegin\fR ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = FALSE )"
+.BI "bool \fBbegin\fR ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "bool \fBbegin\fR ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = FALSE )"
+.BI "bool \fBbegin\fR ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "bool \fBend\fR ()"
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Inherits Qt.
 .BI "const TQWMatrix & \fBworldMatrix\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetWorldMatrix\fR ( const TQWMatrix & m, bool combine = FALSE )"
+.BI "void \fBsetWorldMatrix\fR ( const TQWMatrix & m, bool combine = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void saveWorldMatrix ()  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
@@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ Inherits Qt.
 .BI "void \fBdrawPolyline\fR ( const TQPointArray & a, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBdrawPolygon\fR ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = FALSE, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )"
+.BI "void \fBdrawPolygon\fR ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = false, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBdrawConvexPolygon\fR ( const TQPointArray & pa, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )"
@@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ The most common functions used are scale(), rotate(), translate() and shear(), a
 .PP
 setViewport() sets the rectangle on which TQPainter operates. The default is the entire device, which is usually fine, except on printers. setWindow() sets the coordinate system, that is, the rectangle that maps to viewport(). What's drawn inside the window() ends up being inside the viewport(). The window's default is the same as the viewport, and if you don't use the transformations, they are optimized away, gaining another little bit of speed.
 .PP
-After all the coordinate transformation is done, TQPainter can clip the drawing to an arbitrary rectangle or region. hasClipping() is TRUE if TQPainter clips, and clipRegion() returns the clip region. You can set it using either setClipRegion() or setClipRect(). Note that the clipping can be slow. It's all system-dependent, but as a rule of thumb, you can assume that drawing speed is inversely proportional to the number of rectangles in the clip region.
+After all the coordinate transformation is done, TQPainter can clip the drawing to an arbitrary rectangle or region. hasClipping() is true if TQPainter clips, and clipRegion() returns the clip region. You can set it using either setClipRegion() or setClipRect(). Note that the clipping can be slow. It's all system-dependent, but as a rule of thumb, you can assume that drawing speed is inversely proportional to the number of rectangles in the clip region.
 .PP
 After TQPainter's clipping, the paint device may also clip. For example, most widgets clip away the pixels used by child widgets, and most printers clip away an area near the edges of the paper. This additional clipping is not reflected by the return value of clipRegion() or hasClipping().
 .PP
@@ -559,8 +559,8 @@ Constructs a painter.
 Notice that all painter settings (setPen, setBrush etc.) are reset to default values when begin() is called.
 .PP
 See also begin() and end().
-.SH "TQPainter::TQPainter ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = FALSE )"
-Constructs a painter that begins painting the paint device \fIpd\fR immediately. Depending on the underlying graphic system the painter will paint over children of the paintdevice if \fIunclipped\fR is TRUE.
+.SH "TQPainter::TQPainter ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = false )"
+Constructs a painter that begins painting the paint device \fIpd\fR immediately. Depending on the underlying graphic system the painter will paint over children of the paintdevice if \fIunclipped\fR is true.
 .PP
 This constructor is convenient for short-lived painters, e.g. in a paint event and should be used only once. The constructor calls begin() for you and the TQPainter destructor automatically calls end().
 .PP
@@ -603,8 +603,8 @@ The same example using this constructor:
 Since the constructor cannot provide feedback when the initialization of the painter failed you should rather use begin() and end() to paint on external devices, e.g. printers.
 .PP
 See also begin() and end().
-.SH "TQPainter::TQPainter ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = FALSE )"
-Constructs a painter that begins painting the paint device \fIpd\fR immediately, with the default arguments taken from \fIcopyAttributes\fR. The painter will paint over children of the paint device if \fIunclipped\fR is TRUE (although this is not supported on all platforms).
+.SH "TQPainter::TQPainter ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = false )"
+Constructs a painter that begins painting the paint device \fIpd\fR immediately, with the default arguments taken from \fIcopyAttributes\fR. The painter will paint over children of the paint device if \fIunclipped\fR is true (although this is not supported on all platforms).
 .PP
 See also begin().
 .SH "TQPainter::~TQPainter ()"
@@ -617,8 +617,8 @@ See also setBackgroundColor() and TQColor.
 Returns the current background mode.
 .PP
 See also setBackgroundMode() and BGMode.
-.SH "bool TQPainter::begin ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = FALSE )"
-Begins painting the paint device \fIpd\fR and returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. If \fIunclipped\fR is TRUE, the painting will not be clipped at the paint device's boundaries, (although this is not supported by all platforms).
+.SH "bool TQPainter::begin ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, bool unclipped = false )"
+Begins painting the paint device \fIpd\fR and returns true if successful; otherwise returns false. If \fIunclipped\fR is true, the painting will not be clipped at the paint device's boundaries, (although this is not supported by all platforms).
 .PP
 The errors that can occur are serious problems, such as these:
 .PP
@@ -646,10 +646,10 @@ See also end() and flush().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l aclock/aclock.cpp, desktop/desktop.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, hello/hello.cpp, picture/picture.cpp, t10/cannon.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp.
-.SH "bool TQPainter::begin ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = FALSE )"
+.SH "bool TQPainter::begin ( const TQPaintDevice * pd, const TQWidget * copyAttributes, bool unclipped = false )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-This version opens the painter on a paint device \fIpd\fR and sets the initial pen, background color and font from \fIcopyAttributes\fR, painting over the paint device's children when \fIunclipped\fR is TRUE. This is equivalent to:
+This version opens the painter on a paint device \fIpd\fR and sets the initial pen, background color and font from \fIcopyAttributes\fR, painting over the paint device's children when \fIunclipped\fR is true. This is equivalent to:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -915,14 +915,14 @@ Draws/plots an array of points, \fIa\fR, using the current pen.
 If \fIindex\fR is non-zero (the default is zero) only points from \fIindex\fR are drawn. If \fInpoints\fR is negative (the default) the rest of the points from \fIindex\fR are drawn. If \fInpoints\fR is zero or greater, \fInpoints\fR points are drawn.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR On X11, coordinates that do not fit into 16-bit signed values are truncated. This limitation is expected to go away in TQt 4.
-.SH "void TQPainter::drawPolygon ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = FALSE, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )"
+.SH "void TQPainter::drawPolygon ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = false, int index = 0, int npoints = -1 )"
 Draws the polygon defined by the \fInpoints\fR points in \fIa\fR starting at \fIa[index]\fR. (\fIindex\fR defaults to 0.)
 .PP
 If \fInpoints\fR is -1 (the default) all points until the end of the array are used (i.e. a.size()-index line segments define the polygon).
 .PP
 The first point is always connected to the last point.
 .PP
-The polygon is filled with the current brush(). If \fIwinding\fR is TRUE, the polygon is filled using the winding fill algorithm. If \fIwinding\fR is FALSE, the polygon is filled using the even-odd (alternative) fill algorithm.
+The polygon is filled with the current brush(). If \fIwinding\fR is true, the polygon is filled using the winding fill algorithm. If \fIwinding\fR is false, the polygon is filled using the even-odd (alternative) fill algorithm.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR On X11, coordinates that do not fit into 16-bit signed values are truncated. This limitation is expected to go away in TQt 4.
 .PP
@@ -1129,21 +1129,21 @@ Examples:
 .SH "HDC TQPainter::handle () const"
 Returns the platform-dependent handle used for drawing. Using this function is not portable.
 .SH "bool TQPainter::hasClipping () const"
-Returns TRUE if clipping has been set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if clipping has been set; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setClipping().
 .PP
 Example: themes/wood.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQPainter::hasViewXForm () const"
-Returns TRUE if view transformation is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if view transformation is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setViewXForm() and xForm().
 .SH "bool TQPainter::hasWorldXForm () const"
-Returns TRUE if world transformation is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if world transformation is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setWorldXForm().
 .SH "bool TQPainter::isActive () const"
-Returns TRUE if the painter is active painting, i.e. begin() has been called and end() has not yet been called; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the painter is active painting, i.e. begin() has been called and end() has not yet been called; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQPaintDevice::paintingActive().
 .PP
@@ -1301,7 +1301,7 @@ See also setClipRect(), clipRegion(), setClipping(), and CoordinateMode.
 Examples:
 .)l qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp and themes/wood.cpp.
 .SH "void TQPainter::setClipping ( bool enable )"
-Enables clipping if \fIenable\fR is TRUE, or disables clipping if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Enables clipping if \fIenable\fR is true, or disables clipping if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 See also hasClipping(), setClipRect(), and setClipRegion().
 .PP
@@ -1355,7 +1355,7 @@ A value of 0 (the default) implies a tabstop setting of 8 times the width of the
 .PP
 See also tabStops(), setTabArray(), drawText(), and fontMetrics().
 .SH "void TQPainter::setViewXForm ( bool enable )"
-Enables view transformations if \fIenable\fR is TRUE, or disables view transformations if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Enables view transformations if \fIenable\fR is true, or disables view transformations if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 See also hasViewXForm(), setWindow(), setViewport(), setWorldMatrix(), setWorldXForm(), and xForm().
 .SH "void TQPainter::setViewport ( int x, int y, int w, int h )"
@@ -1387,12 +1387,12 @@ Examples:
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Sets the painter's window to rectangle \fIr\fR.
-.SH "void TQPainter::setWorldMatrix ( const TQWMatrix & m, bool combine = FALSE )"
+.SH "void TQPainter::setWorldMatrix ( const TQWMatrix & m, bool combine = false )"
 Sets the world transformation matrix to \fIm\fR and enables world transformation.
 .PP
-If \fIcombine\fR is TRUE, then \fIm\fR is combined with the current transformation matrix, otherwise \fIm\fR replaces the current transformation matrix.
+If \fIcombine\fR is true, then \fIm\fR is combined with the current transformation matrix, otherwise \fIm\fR replaces the current transformation matrix.
 .PP
-If \fIm\fR is the identity matrix and \fIcombine\fR is FALSE, this function calls setWorldXForm(FALSE). (The identity matrix is the matrix where TQWMatrix::m11() and TQWMatrix::m22() are 1.0 and the rest are 0.0.)
+If \fIm\fR is the identity matrix and \fIcombine\fR is false, this function calls setWorldXForm(false). (The identity matrix is the matrix where TQWMatrix::m11() and TQWMatrix::m22() are 1.0 and the rest are 0.0.)
 .PP
 World transformations are applied after the view transformations (i.e. window and viewport).
 .PP
@@ -1418,7 +1418,7 @@ They operate on the painter's worldMatrix() and are implemented like this:
 .br
             m.rotate( a );
 .br
-            setWorldMatrix( m, TRUE );
+            setWorldMatrix( m, true );
 .br
         }
 .br
@@ -1433,7 +1433,7 @@ See also worldMatrix(), setWorldXForm(), setWindow(), setViewport(), setViewXFor
 Examples:
 .)l drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp and xform/xform.cpp.
 .SH "void TQPainter::setWorldXForm ( bool enable )"
-Enables world transformations if \fIenable\fR is TRUE, or disables world transformations if \fIenable\fR is FALSE. The world transformation matrix is not changed.
+Enables world transformations if \fIenable\fR is true, or disables world transformations if \fIenable\fR is false. The world transformation matrix is not changed.
 .PP
 See also setWorldMatrix(), setWindow(), setViewport(), setViewXForm(), and xForm().
 .SH "void TQPainter::shear ( double sh, double sv )"
@@ -1597,7 +1597,7 @@ Nothing is drawn if \fIy1\fR != \fIy2\fR and \fIx1\fR != \fIx2\fR (i.e. the line
 .PP
 The color group argument \fIg\fR specifies the shading colors (light, dark and middle colors).
 .PP
-The line appears sunken if \fIsunken\fR is TRUE, or raised if \fIsunken\fR is FALSE.
+The line appears sunken if \fIsunken\fR is true, or raised if \fIsunken\fR is false.
 .PP
 The \fIlineWidth\fR argument specifies the line width for each of the lines. It is not the total line width.
 .PP
@@ -1615,7 +1615,7 @@ Draws the shaded panel specified by (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIw\fR, \fIh\fR) using t
 .PP
 The color group argument \fIg\fR specifies the shading colors (light, dark and middle colors).
 .PP
-The panel appears sunken if \fIsunken\fR is TRUE, or raised if \fIsunken\fR is FALSE.
+The panel appears sunken if \fIsunken\fR is true, or raised if \fIsunken\fR is false.
 .PP
 The \fIlineWidth\fR argument specifies the line width.
 .PP
@@ -1633,7 +1633,7 @@ Draws the shaded rectangle specified by (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIw\fR, \fIh\fR) usi
 .PP
 The color group argument \fIg\fR specifies the shading colors (light, dark and middle colors).
 .PP
-The rectangle appears sunken if \fIsunken\fR is TRUE, or raised if \fIsunken\fR is FALSE.
+The rectangle appears sunken if \fIsunken\fR is true, or raised if \fIsunken\fR is false.
 .PP
 The \fIlineWidth\fR argument specifies the line width for each of the lines. It is not the total line width.
 .PP
@@ -1653,7 +1653,7 @@ Draws the Windows-style button specified by (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIw\fR, \fIh\fR)
 .PP
 The color group argument \fIg\fR specifies the shading colors (light, dark and middle colors).
 .PP
-The button appears sunken if \fIsunken\fR is TRUE, or raised if \fIsunken\fR is FALSE.
+The button appears sunken if \fIsunken\fR is true, or raised if \fIsunken\fR is false.
 .PP
 The line width is 2 pixels.
 .PP
@@ -1669,7 +1669,7 @@ Draws the Windows-style panel specified by (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIw\fR, \fIh\fR)
 .PP
 The color group argument \fIg\fR specifies the shading colors.
 .PP
-The panel appears sunken if \fIsunken\fR is TRUE, or raised if \fIsunken\fR is FALSE.
+The panel appears sunken if \fIsunken\fR is true, or raised if \fIsunken\fR is false.
 .PP
 The line width is 2 pixels.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpaintevent.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpaintevent.3qt
index c5b579715..a11ec003e 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqpaintevent.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpaintevent.3qt
@@ -16,13 +16,13 @@ Inherits TQEvent.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQPaintEvent\fR ( const TQRegion & paintRegion, bool erased = TRUE )"
+.BI "\fBTQPaintEvent\fR ( const TQRegion & paintRegion, bool erased = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQPaintEvent\fR ( const TQRect & paintRect, bool erased = TRUE )"
+.BI "\fBTQPaintEvent\fR ( const TQRect & paintRect, bool erased = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQPaintEvent\fR ( const TQRegion & paintRegion, const TQRect & paintRect, bool erased = TRUE )"
+.BI "\fBTQPaintEvent\fR ( const TQRegion & paintRegion, const TQRect & paintRect, bool erased = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "const TQRect & \fBrect\fR () const"
@@ -41,18 +41,18 @@ Paint events are sent to widgets that need to update themselves, for instance wh
 .PP
 The event contains a region() that needs to be updated, and a rect() that is the bounding rectangle of that region. Both are provided because many widgets can't make much use of region(), and rect() can be much faster than region().boundingRect(). Painting is clipped to region() during processing of a paint event.
 .PP
-The erased() function returns TRUE if the region() has been cleared to the widget's background (see TQWidget::backgroundMode()), and FALSE if the region's contents are arbitrary.
+The erased() function returns true if the region() has been cleared to the widget's background (see TQWidget::backgroundMode()), and false if the region's contents are arbitrary.
 .PP
 See also TQPainter, TQWidget::update(), TQWidget::repaint(), TQWidget::paintEvent(), TQWidget::backgroundMode, TQRegion, and Event Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const TQRegion & paintRegion, bool erased = TRUE )"
-Constructs a paint event object with the region that should be updated. The region is given by \fIpaintRegion\fR. If \fIerased\fR is TRUE the region will be cleared before repainting.
-.SH "TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const TQRect & paintRect, bool erased = TRUE )"
-Constructs a paint event object with the rectangle that should be updated. The region is also given by \fIpaintRect\fR. If \fIerased\fR is TRUE the region will be cleared before repainting.
-.SH "TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const TQRegion & paintRegion, const TQRect & paintRect, bool erased = TRUE )"
-Constructs a paint event object with the rectangle \fIpaintRect\fR that should be updated. The region is given by \fIpaintRegion\fR. If \fIerased\fR is TRUE the region will be cleared before repainting.
+.SH "TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const TQRegion & paintRegion, bool erased = true )"
+Constructs a paint event object with the region that should be updated. The region is given by \fIpaintRegion\fR. If \fIerased\fR is true the region will be cleared before repainting.
+.SH "TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const TQRect & paintRect, bool erased = true )"
+Constructs a paint event object with the rectangle that should be updated. The region is also given by \fIpaintRect\fR. If \fIerased\fR is true the region will be cleared before repainting.
+.SH "TQPaintEvent::TQPaintEvent ( const TQRegion & paintRegion, const TQRect & paintRect, bool erased = true )"
+Constructs a paint event object with the rectangle \fIpaintRect\fR that should be updated. The region is given by \fIpaintRegion\fR. If \fIerased\fR is true the region will be cleared before repainting.
 .SH "bool TQPaintEvent::erased () const"
-Returns TRUE if the paint event region (or rectangle) has been erased with the widget's background; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the paint event region (or rectangle) has been erased with the widget's background; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "const TQRect & TQPaintEvent::rect () const"
 Returns the rectangle that should be updated.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpalette.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpalette.3qt
index b758c709a..70101aba6 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqpalette.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpalette.3qt
@@ -184,11 +184,11 @@ Returns the inactive color group of this palette.
 .PP
 See also TQColorGroup, setInactive(), active(), and disabled().
 .SH "bool TQPalette::isCopyOf ( const TQPalette & p )"
-Returns TRUE if this palette and \fIp\fR are copies of each other, i.e. one of them was created as a copy of the other and neither was subsequently modified; otherwise returns FALSE. This is much stricter than equality.
+Returns true if this palette and \fIp\fR are copies of each other, i.e. one of them was created as a copy of the other and neither was subsequently modified; otherwise returns false. This is much stricter than equality.
 .PP
 See also operator=() and operator==().
 .SH "bool TQPalette::operator!= ( const TQPalette & p ) const"
-Returns TRUE (slowly) if this palette is different from \fIp\fR; otherwise returns FALSE (usually quickly).
+Returns true (slowly) if this palette is different from \fIp\fR; otherwise returns false (usually quickly).
 .SH "TQPalette & TQPalette::operator= ( const TQPalette & p )"
 Assigns \fIp\fR to this palette and returns a reference to this palette.
 .PP
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ This is fast (it uses copy-on-write).
 .PP
 See also copy().
 .SH "bool TQPalette::operator== ( const TQPalette & p ) const"
-Returns TRUE (usually quickly) if this palette is equal to \fIp\fR; otherwise returns FALSE (slowly).
+Returns true (usually quickly) if this palette is equal to \fIp\fR; otherwise returns false (slowly).
 .SH "int TQPalette::serialNumber () const"
 Returns a number that uniquely identifies this TQPalette object. The serial number is intended for caching. Its value may not be used for anything other than equality testing.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpen.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpen.3qt
index 0bac205aa..a84294f23 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqpen.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpen.3qt
@@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Returns the pen's join style.
 .PP
 See also setJoinStyle().
 .SH "bool TQPen::operator!= ( const TQPen & p ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the pen is different from \fIp\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the pen is different from \fIp\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Two pens are different if they have different styles, widths or colors.
 .PP
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ See also operator==().
 .SH "TQPen & TQPen::operator= ( const TQPen & p )"
 Assigns \fIp\fR to this pen and returns a reference to this pen.
 .SH "bool TQPen::operator== ( const TQPen & p ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the pen is equal to \fIp\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the pen is equal to \fIp\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Two pens are equal if they have equal styles, widths and colors.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpicture.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpicture.3qt
index 841e01b5a..11288b910 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqpicture.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpicture.3qt
@@ -168,9 +168,9 @@ Detaches from shared picture data and makes sure that this picture is the only o
 .PP
 If multiple pictures share common data, this picture makes a copy of the data and detaches itself from the sharing mechanism. Nothing is done if there is just a single reference.
 .SH "bool TQPicture::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if the picture contains no data; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the picture contains no data; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQPicture::load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )"
-Loads a picture from the file specified by \fIfileName\fR and returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Loads a picture from the file specified by \fIfileName\fR and returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 By default, the file will be interpreted as being in the native TQPicture format. Specifying the \fIformat\fR string is optional and is only needed for importing picture data stored in a different format.
 .PP
@@ -195,11 +195,11 @@ A picture has the following hard-coded values: dpi=72, numcolors=16777216 and de
 .SH "TQPicture & TQPicture::operator= ( const TQPicture & p )"
 Assigns a shallow copy of \fIp\fR to this picture and returns a reference to this picture.
 .SH "bool TQPicture::play ( TQPainter * painter )"
-Replays the picture using \fIpainter\fR, and returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Replays the picture using \fIpainter\fR, and returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 This function does exactly the same as TQPainter::drawPicture() with (x, y) = (0, 0).
 .SH "bool TQPicture::save ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format = 0 )"
-Saves a picture to the file specified by \fIfileName\fR and returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Saves a picture to the file specified by \fIfileName\fR and returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Specifying the file \fIformat\fR string is optional. It's not recommended unless you intend to export the picture data for use by a third party reader. By default the data will be saved in the native TQPicture file format.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpixmap.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpixmap.3qt
index a4dd2dc4d..4c7862c7d 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqpixmap.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpixmap.3qt
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Inherited by TQBitmap and TQCanvasPixmap.
 .BI "bool \fBhasAlphaChannel\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQBitmap \fBcreateHeuristicMask\fR ( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "TQBitmap \fBcreateHeuristicMask\fR ( bool clipTight = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQPixmap \fBxForm\fR ( const TQWMatrix & matrix ) const"
@@ -349,15 +349,15 @@ See also loadFromData().
 .SH "TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( const TQPixmap & pixmap )"
 Constructs a pixmap that is a copy of \fIpixmap\fR.
 .SH "TQPixmap::TQPixmap ( int w, int h, const uchar * bits, bool isXbitmap )\fC [protected]\fR"
-Constructs a monochrome pixmap, with width \fIw\fR and height \fIh\fR, that is initialized with the data in \fIbits\fR. The \fIisXbitmap\fR indicates whether the data is an X bitmap and defaults to FALSE. This constructor is protected and used by the TQBitmap class.
+Constructs a monochrome pixmap, with width \fIw\fR and height \fIh\fR, that is initialized with the data in \fIbits\fR. The \fIisXbitmap\fR indicates whether the data is an X bitmap and defaults to false. This constructor is protected and used by the TQBitmap class.
 .SH "TQPixmap::~TQPixmap ()"
 Destroys the pixmap.
 .SH "bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage ( const TQImage & img, int conversion_flags )"
-Converts image \fIimg\fR and sets this pixmap. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Converts image \fIimg\fR and sets this pixmap. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The \fIconversion_flags\fR argument is a bitwise-OR of the TQt::ImageConversionFlags. Passing 0 for \fIconversion_flags\fR sets all the default options.
 .PP
-Note that even though a TQPixmap with depth 1 behaves much like a TQBitmap, isTQBitmap() returns FALSE.
+Note that even though a TQPixmap with depth 1 behaves much like a TQBitmap, isTQBitmap() returns false.
 .PP
 If a pixmap with depth 1 is painted with color0 and color1 and converted to an image, the pixels painted with color0 will produce pixel index 0 in the image and those painted with color1 will produce pixel index 1.
 .PP
@@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ Examples:
 .SH "bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage ( const TQImage & image, ColorMode mode = Auto )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Converts \fIimage\fR and sets this pixmap using color mode \fImode\fR. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Converts \fIimage\fR and sets this pixmap using color mode \fImode\fR. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQPixmap::ColorMode.
 .SH "TQImage TQPixmap::convertToImage () const"
@@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ Note that for the moment, alpha masks on monochrome images are ignored.
 See also convertFromImage().
 .PP
 Example: qmag/qmag.cpp.
-.SH "TQBitmap TQPixmap::createHeuristicMask ( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "TQBitmap TQPixmap::createHeuristicMask ( bool clipTight = true ) const"
 Creates and returns a heuristic mask for this pixmap. It works by selecting a color from one of the corners and then chipping away pixels of that color, starting at all the edges.
 .PP
 The mask may not be perfect but it should be reasonable, so you can do things such as the following:
@@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ The mask may not be perfect but it should be reasonable, so you can do things su
 .PP
 This function is slow because it involves transformation to a TQImage, non-trivial computations and a transformation back to a TQBitmap.
 .PP
-If \fIclipTight\fR is TRUE the mask is just large enough to cover the pixels; otherwise, the mask is larger than the data pixels.
+If \fIclipTight\fR is true the mask is just large enough to cover the pixels; otherwise, the mask is larger than the data pixels.
 .PP
 See also TQImage::createHeuristicMask().
 .SH "int TQPixmap::defaultDepth ()\fC [static]\fR"
@@ -514,13 +514,13 @@ See also grabWidget().
 .PP
 Example: qmag/qmag.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQPixmap::hasAlpha () const"
-Returns TRUE this pixmap has an alpha channel or a mask.
+Returns true this pixmap has an alpha channel or a mask.
 .PP
 See also hasAlphaChannel() and mask().
 .SH "bool TQPixmap::hasAlphaChannel () const"
-Returns TRUE if the pixmap has an alpha channel; otherwise it returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the pixmap has an alpha channel; otherwise it returns false.
 .PP
-NOTE: If the pixmap has a mask but not alpha channel, this function returns FALSE.
+NOTE: If the pixmap has a mask but not alpha channel, this function returns false.
 .PP
 See also hasAlpha() and mask().
 .SH "int TQPixmap::height () const"
@@ -537,7 +537,7 @@ The TQImageIO documentation lists the supported image formats.
 .PP
 See also load() and save().
 .SH "bool TQPixmap::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if this is a null pixmap; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this is a null pixmap; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 A null pixmap has zero width, zero height and no contents. You cannot draw in a null pixmap or bitBlt() anything to it.
 .PP
@@ -548,9 +548,9 @@ See also resize().
 Examples:
 .)l movies/main.cpp, tqdir/tqdir.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, and scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQPixmap::isTQBitmap () const"
-Returns TRUE if this is a TQBitmap; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this is a TQBitmap; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQPixmap::load ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int conversion_flags )"
-Loads a pixmap from the file \fIfileName\fR at runtime. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Loads a pixmap from the file \fIfileName\fR at runtime. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If \fIformat\fR is specified, the loader attempts to read the pixmap using the specified format. If \fIformat\fR is not specified (default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to guess the file's format.
 .PP
@@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ The \fImode\fR is used to specify the color mode of the pixmap.
 .PP
 See also TQPixmap::ColorMode.
 .SH "bool TQPixmap::loadFromData ( const uchar * buf, uint len, const char * format, int conversion_flags )"
-Loads a pixmap from the binary data in \fIbuf\fR (\fIlen\fR bytes). Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Loads a pixmap from the binary data in \fIbuf\fR (\fIlen\fR bytes). Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If \fIformat\fR is specified, the loader attempts to read the pixmap using the specified format. If \fIformat\fR is not specified (default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to guess the file's format.
 .PP
@@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ See also load(), save(), imageFormat(), TQImage::loadFromData(), and TQImageIO.
 .SH "bool TQPixmap::loadFromData ( const uchar * buf, uint len, const char * format = 0, ColorMode mode = Auto )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Loads a pixmap from the binary data in \fIbuf\fR (\fIlen\fR bytes) using color mode \fImode\fR. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Loads a pixmap from the binary data in \fIbuf\fR (\fIlen\fR bytes) using color mode \fImode\fR. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If \fIformat\fR is specified, the loader attempts to read the pixmap using the specified format. If \fIformat\fR is not specified (default), the loader reads a few bytes from the header to guess the file's format.
 .PP
@@ -636,7 +636,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Resizes the pixmap to size \fIsize\fR.
 .SH "bool TQPixmap::save ( const TQString & fileName, const char * format, int quality = -1 ) const"
-Saves the pixmap to the file \fIfileName\fR using the image file format \fIformat\fR and a quality factor \fIquality\fR. \fIquality\fR must be in the range [0,100] or -1. Specify 0 to obtain small compressed files, 100 for large uncompressed files, and -1 to use the default settings. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Saves the pixmap to the file \fIfileName\fR using the image file format \fIformat\fR and a quality factor \fIquality\fR. \fIquality\fR must be in the range [0,100] or -1. Specify 0 to obtain small compressed files, 100 for large uncompressed files, and -1 to use the default settings. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also load(), loadFromData(), imageFormat(), TQImage::save(), and TQImageIO.
 .PP
@@ -660,7 +660,7 @@ This function writes a TQPixmap to the TQIODevice, \fIdevice\fR. This can be use
 .br
 .fi
 .SH "bool TQPixmap::selfMask () const"
-Returns TRUE if the pixmap's mask is identical to the pixmap itself; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the pixmap's mask is identical to the pixmap itself; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also mask().
 .SH "int TQPixmap::serialNumber () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpixmapcache.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpixmapcache.3qt
index 7054206ec..a7d4ed5d0 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqpixmapcache.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpixmapcache.3qt
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Example:
 .SH "bool TQPixmapCache::find ( const TQString & key, TQPixmap & pm )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Looks for a cached pixmap associated with the \fIkey\fR in the cache. If a pixmap is found, the function sets \fIpm\fR to that pixmap and returns TRUE; otherwise leaves \fIpm\fR alone and returns FALSE.
+Looks for a cached pixmap associated with the \fIkey\fR in the cache. If a pixmap is found, the function sets \fIpm\fR to that pixmap and returns true; otherwise leaves \fIpm\fR alone and returns false.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
@@ -101,13 +101,13 @@ See also setCacheLimit().
 .SH "bool TQPixmapCache::insert ( const TQString & key, TQPixmap * pm )\fC [static]\fR"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-Inserts the pixmap \fIpm\fR associated with \fIkey\fR into the cache. Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the pixmap is too big for the cache.
+Inserts the pixmap \fIpm\fR associated with \fIkey\fR into the cache. Returns true if successful, or false if the pixmap is too big for the cache.
 .PP
 \fB Note: \fIpm\fR must be allocated on the heap (using \fCnew\fR).
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE, you must delete \fIpm\fR yourself.
+If this function returns false, you must delete \fIpm\fR yourself.
 .PP
-If this function returns TRUE, do not use \fIpm\fR afterwards or keep references to it because any other insertions into the cache, whether from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could cause the pixmap to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to become invalid.
+If this function returns true, do not use \fIpm\fR afterwards or keep references to it because any other insertions into the cache, whether from anywhere in the application or within TQt itself, could cause the pixmap to be discarded from the cache and the pointer to become invalid.
 .PP
 Due to these dangers, we strongly recommend that you use insert(const TQString&, const TQPixmap&) instead. \fR
 .SH "void TQPixmapCache::remove ( const TQString & key )\fC [static]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpoint.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpoint.3qt
index 3c1626738..183fb46df 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqpoint.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpoint.3qt
@@ -152,11 +152,11 @@ TQPoints can be compared for equality or inequality, and they can be written to
 See also TQPointArray, TQSize, TQRect, Graphics Classes, and Image Processing Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "TQPoint::TQPoint ()"
-Constructs a point with coordinates (0, 0) (isNull() returns TRUE).
+Constructs a point with coordinates (0, 0) (isNull() returns true).
 .SH "TQPoint::TQPoint ( int xpos, int ypos )"
 Constructs a point with x value \fIxpos\fR and y value \fIypos\fR.
 .SH "bool TQPoint::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if both the x value and the y value are 0; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if both the x value and the y value are 0; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int TQPoint::manhattanLength () const"
 Returns the sum of the absolute values of x() and y(), traditionally known as the "Manhattan length" of the vector from the origin to the point. The tradition arises because such distances apply to travelers who can only travel on a rectangular grid, like the streets of Manhattan.
 .PP
@@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ Examples:
 .)l canvas/canvas.cpp, chart/canvasview.cpp, fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp, helpsystem/tooltip.cpp, life/life.cpp, t14/cannon.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
 .SH RELATED FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "bool operator!= ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIp1\fR and \fIp2\fR are not equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIp1\fR and \fIp2\fR are not equal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "const TQPoint operator* ( const TQPoint & p, int c )"
 Returns the TQPoint formed by multiplying both components of \fIp\fR by \fIc\fR.
 .SH "const TQPoint operator* ( int c, const TQPoint & p )"
@@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Writes point \fIp\fR to the stream \fIs\fR and returns a reference to the stream
 .PP
 See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
 .SH "bool operator== ( const TQPoint & p1, const TQPoint & p2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIp1\fR and \fIp2\fR are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIp1\fR and \fIp2\fR are equal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQPoint & p )"
 Reads a TQPoint from the stream \fIs\fR into point \fIp\fR and returns a reference to the stream.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpointarray.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpointarray.3qt
index 1131431d5..2a1f26dcd 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqpointarray.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpointarray.3qt
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Inherits TQMemArray<TQPoint>.
 .BI "\fBTQPointArray\fR ( const TQPointArray & a )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQPointArray\fR ( const TQRect & r, bool closed = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQPointArray\fR ( const TQRect & r, bool closed = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQPointArray & \fBoperator=\fR ( const TQPointArray & a )"
@@ -129,12 +129,12 @@ See also resize() and isNull().
 Constructs a shallow copy of the point array \fIa\fR.
 .PP
 See also copy() and detach().
-.SH "TQPointArray::TQPointArray ( const TQRect & r, bool closed = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQPointArray::TQPointArray ( const TQRect & r, bool closed = false )"
 Constructs a point array from the rectangle \fIr\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIclosed\fR is FALSE, then the point array just contains the following four points in the listed order: r.topLeft(), r.topRight(), r.bottomRight() and r.bottomLeft().
+If \fIclosed\fR is false, then the point array just contains the following four points in the listed order: r.topLeft(), r.topRight(), r.bottomRight() and r.bottomLeft().
 .PP
-If \fIclosed\fR is TRUE, then a fifth point is set to r.topLeft().
+If \fIclosed\fR is true, then a fifth point is set to r.topLeft().
 .SH "TQPointArray::~TQPointArray ()"
 Destroys the point array.
 .SH "TQRect TQPointArray::boundingRect () const"
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Returns the point at position \fIindex\fR within the array.
 .SH "bool TQPointArray::putPoints ( int index, int nPoints, int firstx, int firsty, ... )"
 Copies \fInPoints\fR points from the variable argument list into this point array from position \fIindex\fR, and resizes the point array if \fCindex+nPoints\fR exceeds the size of the array.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if the array could not be resized (typically due to lack of memory).
+Returns true if successful, or false if the array could not be resized (typically due to lack of memory).
 .PP
 The example code creates an array with three points (4,5), (6,7) and (8,9), by expanding the array from 1 to 3 points:
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpopupmenu.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpopupmenu.3qt
index e1d8f4ddf..63cc8f7f6 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqpopupmenu.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpopupmenu.3qt
@@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ When inserting action items you usually specify a receiver and a slot. The recei
 .PP
 You clear a popup menu with clear() and remove single items with removeItem() or removeItemAt().
 .PP
-A popup menu can display check marks for certain items when enabled with setCheckable(TRUE). You check or uncheck items with setItemChecked().
+A popup menu can display check marks for certain items when enabled with setCheckable(true). You check or uncheck items with setItemChecked().
 .PP
 Items are either enabled or disabled. You toggle their state with setItemEnabled(). Just before a popup menu becomes visible, it emits the aboutToShow() signal. You can use this signal to set the correct enabled/disabled states of all menu items before the user sees it. The corresponding aboutToHide() signal is emitted when the menu hides again.
 .PP
@@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ Draws all menu items using painter \fIp\fR.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQFrame.
 .SH "void TQPopupMenu::drawItem ( TQPainter * p, int tab_, TQMenuItem * mi, bool act, int x, int y, int w, int h )\fC [protected]\fR"
-Draws menu item \fImi\fR in the area \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIw\fR, \fIh\fR, using painter \fIp\fR. The item is drawn active if \fIact\fR is TRUE or drawn inactive if \fIact\fR is FALSE. The rightmost \fItab_\fR pixels are used for accelerator text.
+Draws menu item \fImi\fR in the area \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIw\fR, \fIh\fR, using painter \fIp\fR. The item is drawn active if \fIact\fR is true or drawn inactive if \fIact\fR is false. The rightmost \fItab_\fR pixels are used for accelerator text.
 .PP
 See also TQStyle::drawControl().
 .SH "int TQPopupMenu::exec ()"
@@ -632,20 +632,20 @@ The \fIindex\fR specifies the position in the menu. The tear-off handle is appen
 .PP
 Example: menu/menu.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQPopupMenu::isCheckable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the display of check marks on menu items is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "checkable" property for details.
+Returns true if the display of check marks on menu items is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "checkable" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemChecked ( int id ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR has been checked; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR has been checked; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setItemChecked().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l canvas/canvas.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemEnabled ( int id ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the item with identifier \fIid\fR is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE
+Returns true if the item with identifier \fIid\fR is enabled; otherwise returns false
 .PP
 See also setItemEnabled() and isItemVisible().
 .SH "bool TQMenuData::isItemVisible ( int id ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR is visible; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the menu item with the id \fIid\fR is visible; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setItemVisible().
 .SH "int TQPopupMenu::itemHeight ( int row ) const\fC [protected]\fR"
@@ -727,14 +727,14 @@ Sets the currently active item to index \fIi\fR and repaints as necessary.
 .SH "void TQPopupMenu::setCheckable ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets whether the display of check marks on menu items is enabled. See the "checkable" property for details.
 .SH "void TQMenuData::setItemChecked ( int id, bool check )"
-If \fIcheck\fR is TRUE, checks the menu item with id \fIid\fR; otherwise unchecks the menu item with id \fIid\fR. Calls TQPopupMenu::setCheckable( TRUE ) if necessary.
+If \fIcheck\fR is true, checks the menu item with id \fIid\fR; otherwise unchecks the menu item with id \fIid\fR. Calls TQPopupMenu::setCheckable( true ) if necessary.
 .PP
 See also isItemChecked().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l canvas/canvas.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, progress/progress.cpp, scrollview/scrollview.cpp, and showimg/showimg.cpp.
 .SH "void TQMenuData::setItemEnabled ( int id, bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, enables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR; otherwise disables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, enables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR; otherwise disables the menu item with identifier \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also isItemEnabled().
 .PP
@@ -749,7 +749,7 @@ See also connectItem(), disconnectItem(), and itemParameter().
 .PP
 Example: mdi/application.cpp.
 .SH "void TQMenuData::setItemVisible ( int id, bool visible )"
-If \fIvisible\fR is TRUE, shows the menu item with id \fIid\fR; otherwise hides the menu item with id \fIid\fR.
+If \fIvisible\fR is true, shows the menu item with id \fIid\fR; otherwise hides the menu item with id \fIid\fR.
 .PP
 See also isItemVisible() and isItemEnabled().
 .SH "void TQMenuData::setWhatsThis ( int id, const TQString & text )"
@@ -778,7 +778,7 @@ See also setWhatsThis().
 .SH "bool checkable"
 This property holds whether the display of check marks on menu items is enabled.
 .PP
-When TRUE, the display of check marks on menu items is enabled. Checking is always enabled when in Windows-style.
+When true, the display of check marks on menu items is enabled. Checking is always enabled when in Windows-style.
 .PP
 See also TQMenuData::setItemChecked().
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqprinter.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqprinter.3qt
index 23535157a..ff574514f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqprinter.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqprinter.3qt
@@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ setPageSize() tells TQPrinter what page size to expect from the printer.
 .TP
 setResolution() tells TQPrinter what resolution you wish the printer to provide (in dpi).
 .TP
-setFullPage() tells TQPrinter whether you want to deal with the full page or just with the part the printer can draw on. The default is FALSE, so that by default you should be able to paint on (0,0). If TRUE the origin of the coordinate system will be in the top left corner of the paper and most probably the printer will not be able to paint something there due to it's physical margins.
+setFullPage() tells TQPrinter whether you want to deal with the full page or just with the part the printer can draw on. The default is false, so that by default you should be able to paint on (0,0). If true the origin of the coordinate system will be in the top left corner of the paper and most probably the printer will not be able to paint something there due to it's physical margins.
 .TP
 setNumCopies() tells TQPrinter how many copies of the document it should print.
 .TP
@@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ This enum type is used by TQPrinter to tell the application program how to print
 .SH "TQPrinter::PageSize"
 This enum type specifies what paper size TQPrinter should use. TQPrinter does not check that the paper size is available; it just uses this information, together with TQPrinter::Orientation and TQPrinter::setFullPage(), to determine the printable area (see TQPaintDeviceMetrics).
 .PP
-The defined sizes (with setFullPage(TRUE)) are:
+The defined sizes (with setFullPage(true)) are:
 .TP
 \fCTQPrinter::A0\fR - 841 x 1189 mm This value is not supported on windows.
 .TP
@@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ The defined sizes (with setFullPage(TRUE)) are:
 .TP
 \fCTQPrinter::NPageSize\fR - (internal)
 .PP
-With setFullPage(FALSE) (the default), the metrics will be a bit smaller; how much depends on the printer in use.
+With setFullPage(false) (the default), the metrics will be a bit smaller; how much depends on the printer in use.
 .SH "TQPrinter::PaperSource"
 This enum type specifies what paper source TQPrinter is to use. TQPrinter does not check that the paper source is available; it just uses this information to try and set the paper source. Whether it will set the paper source depends on whether the printer has that particular source.
 .PP
@@ -415,11 +415,11 @@ See also TQPrinter::PrinterMode.
 .SH "TQPrinter::~TQPrinter ()"
 Destroys the printer paint device and cleans up.
 .SH "bool TQPrinter::abort ()"
-Aborts the print job. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Aborts the print job. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also aborted().
 .SH "bool TQPrinter::aborted () const"
-Returns TRUE if the print job was aborted; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the print job was aborted; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also abort().
 .SH "ColorMode TQPrinter::colorMode () const"
@@ -443,21 +443,21 @@ The programmer is responsible for reading this setting and printing accordingly.
 .PP
 See also setFromTo() and toPage().
 .SH "bool TQPrinter::fullPage () const"
-Returns TRUE if the origin of the printer's coordinate system is at the corner of the sheet and FALSE if it is at the edge of the printable area.
+Returns true if the origin of the printer's coordinate system is at the corner of the sheet and false if it is at the edge of the printable area.
 .PP
 See setFullPage() for details and caveats.
 .PP
 See also setFullPage(), PageSize, and TQPaintDeviceMetrics.
 .SH "bool TQPrinter::isOptionEnabled ( PrinterOption option )"
-Returns TRUE if the printer option with identifier \fIoption\fR is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the printer option with identifier \fIoption\fR is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setOptionEnabled().
 .SH "TQSize TQPrinter::margins () const"
 Returns the width of the left margin and the height of the top margin of the printer. On Unix, this is a best-effort guess, not based on perfect knowledge.
 .PP
-If you have called setFullPage( TRUE ), margins().width() may be treated as the smallest sane left margin you can use, and margins().height() as the smallest sane top margin you can use.
+If you have called setFullPage( true ), margins().width() may be treated as the smallest sane left margin you can use, and margins().height() as the smallest sane top margin you can use.
 .PP
-If you have called setFullPage( FALSE ) (this is the default), margins() is automatically subtracted from the pageSize() by TQPrinter.
+If you have called setFullPage( false ) (this is the default), margins() is automatically subtracted from the pageSize() by TQPrinter.
 .PP
 See also setFullPage(), TQPaintDeviceMetrics, and PageSize.
 .SH "void TQPrinter::margins ( uint * top, uint * left, uint * bottom, uint * right ) const"
@@ -465,9 +465,9 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Sets \fItop\fR, \fIleft\fR, \fIbottom\fR and \fIright\fR to the margins of the printer. On Unix, this is a best-effort guess, not based on perfect knowledge.
 .PP
-If you have called setFullPage( TRUE ), the four values specify the smallest sane margins you can use.
+If you have called setFullPage( true ), the four values specify the smallest sane margins you can use.
 .PP
-If you have called setFullPage( FALSE ) (this is the default), the margins are automatically subtracted from the pageSize() by TQPrinter.
+If you have called setFullPage( false ) (this is the default), the margins are automatically subtracted from the pageSize() by TQPrinter.
 .PP
 See also setFullPage(), TQPaintDeviceMetrics, and PageSize.
 .SH "int TQPrinter::maxPage () const"
@@ -479,7 +479,7 @@ Returns the min-page setting, i.e. the lowest page number a user is allowed to c
 .PP
 See also maxPage(), setMinMax(), and setFromTo().
 .SH "bool TQPrinter::newPage ()"
-Advances to a new page on the printer. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Advances to a new page on the printer. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
@@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ Returns the name of the output file. There is no default file name.
 .PP
 See also setOutputFileName() and setOutputToFile().
 .SH "bool TQPrinter::outputToFile () const"
-Returns TRUE if the output should be written to a file, or FALSE if the output should be sent directly to the printer. The default setting is FALSE.
+Returns true if the output should be written to a file, or false if the output should be sent directly to the printer. The default setting is false.
 .PP
 This function is currently only supported under X11 and Mac OS X.
 .PP
@@ -570,11 +570,11 @@ This function is useful mostly to set a default value that the user can override
 .PP
 See also fromPage(), toPage(), setMinMax(), and setup().
 .SH "void TQPrinter::setFullPage ( bool fp )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sets TQPrinter to have the origin of the coordinate system at the top-left corner of the paper if \fIfp\fR is TRUE, or where it thinks the top-left corner of the printable area is if \fIfp\fR is FALSE.
+Sets TQPrinter to have the origin of the coordinate system at the top-left corner of the paper if \fIfp\fR is true, or where it thinks the top-left corner of the printable area is if \fIfp\fR is false.
 .PP
-The default is FALSE. You can (probably) print on (0,0), and TQPaintDeviceMetrics will report something smaller than the size indicated by PageSize. (Note that TQPrinter may be wrong on Unix systems - it does not have perfect knowledge of the physical printer.)
+The default is false. You can (probably) print on (0,0), and TQPaintDeviceMetrics will report something smaller than the size indicated by PageSize. (Note that TQPrinter may be wrong on Unix systems - it does not have perfect knowledge of the physical printer.)
 .PP
-If you set \fIfp\fR to TRUE, TQPaintDeviceMetrics will report the exact same size as indicated by PageSize, but you cannot print on all of that - you must take care of the output margins yourself.
+If you set \fIfp\fR to true, TQPaintDeviceMetrics will report the exact same size as indicated by PageSize, but you cannot print on all of that - you must take care of the output margins yourself.
 .PP
 See also PageSize, setPageSize(), TQPaintDeviceMetrics, and fullPage().
 .PP
@@ -599,7 +599,7 @@ The printer driver reads this setting and prints the specified number of copies.
 .PP
 See also numCopies() and setup().
 .SH "void TQPrinter::setOptionEnabled ( PrinterOption option, bool enable )"
-Enables the printer option with the identifier \fIoption\fR if \fIenable\fR is TRUE, and disables option \fIoption\fR if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Enables the printer option with the identifier \fIoption\fR if \fIenable\fR is true, and disables option \fIoption\fR if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 See also isOptionEnabled().
 .SH "void TQPrinter::setOrientation ( Orientation orientation )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ See also orientation().
 .SH "void TQPrinter::setOutputFileName ( const TQString & fileName )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the name of the output file to \fIfileName\fR.
 .PP
-Setting a null or empty name (0 or "") disables output to a file, i.e. calls setOutputToFile(FALSE). Setting a non-empty name enables output to a file, i.e. calls setOutputToFile(TRUE).
+Setting a null or empty name (0 or "") disables output to a file, i.e. calls setOutputToFile(false). Setting a non-empty name enables output to a file, i.e. calls setOutputToFile(true).
 .PP
 This function is currently only supported under X11.
 .PP
@@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ See also outputFileName() and setOutputToFile().
 .SH "void TQPrinter::setOutputToFile ( bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Specifies whether the output should be written to a file or sent directly to the printer.
 .PP
-Will output to a file if \fIenable\fR is TRUE, or will output directly to the printer if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Will output to a file if \fIenable\fR is true, or will output directly to the printer if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 This function is currently only supported under X11 and Mac OS X.
 .PP
@@ -691,7 +691,7 @@ Windows only, using this function is not portable! Sets the windows page size va
 .SH "bool TQPrinter::setup ( TQWidget * parent = 0 )"
 Opens a printer setup dialog, with parent \fIparent\fR, and asks the user to specify which printer they wish to use and what settings it should have.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the user pressed "OK" to print, or FALSE if the user canceled the operation.
+Returns true if the user pressed "OK" to print, or false if the user canceled the operation.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, drawdemo/drawdemo.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqprocess.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqprocess.3qt
index 43e99642c..160fdf5a9 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqprocess.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqprocess.3qt
@@ -299,11 +299,11 @@ Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a copy,
 .PP
 See also setArguments() and addArgument().
 .SH "bool TQProcess::canReadLineStderr () const"
-Returns TRUE if it's possible to read an entire line of text from standard error at this time; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if it's possible to read an entire line of text from standard error at this time; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also readLineStderr() and canReadLineStdout().
 .SH "bool TQProcess::canReadLineStdout () const"
-Returns TRUE if it's possible to read an entire line of text from standard output at this time; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if it's possible to read an entire line of text from standard output at this time; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also readLineStdout() and canReadLineStderr().
 .SH "void TQProcess::clearArguments ()"
@@ -323,11 +323,11 @@ See also setCommunication().
 .SH "int TQProcess::exitStatus () const"
 Returns the exit status of the process or 0 if the process is still running. This function returns immediately and does not wait until the process is finished.
 .PP
-If normalExit() is FALSE (e.g. if the program was killed or crashed), this function returns 0, so you should check the return value of normalExit() before relying on this value.
+If normalExit() is false (e.g. if the program was killed or crashed), this function returns 0, so you should check the return value of normalExit() before relying on this value.
 .PP
 See also normalExit() and processExited().
 .SH "bool TQProcess::isRunning () const"
-Returns TRUE if the process is running; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the process is running; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also normalExit(), exitStatus(), and processExited().
 .SH "void TQProcess::kill () const\fC [slot]\fR"
@@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ Runs the process and writes the data \fIbuf\fR to the process's standard input.
 .PP
 If \fIenv\fR is null, then the process is started with the same environment as the starting process. If \fIenv\fR is non-null, then the values in the string list are interpreted as environment setttings of the form \fCkey=value\fR and the process is started with these environment settings. For convenience, there is a small exception to this rule under Unix: if \fIenv\fR does not contain any settings for the environment variable \fCLD_LIBRARY_PATH\fR, then this variable is inherited from the starting process.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the process could be started; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the process could be started; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Note that you should not use the slots writeToStdin() and closeStdin() on processes started with launch(), since the result is not well-defined. If you need these slots, use start() instead.
 .PP
@@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ This signal is especially useful if you want to know when you can safely delete
 .PP
 See also launch() and TQObject::deleteLater().
 .SH "bool TQProcess::normalExit () const"
-Returns TRUE if the process has exited normally; otherwise returns FALSE. This implies that this function returns FALSE if the process is still running.
+Returns true if the process has exited normally; otherwise returns false. This implies that this function returns false if the process is still running.
 .PP
 See also isRunning(), exitStatus(), and processExited().
 .SH "void TQProcess::processExited ()\fC [signal]\fR"
@@ -393,13 +393,13 @@ Under Windows it is a pointer to the \fCPROCESS_INFORMATION\fR struct, or 0 if n
 .PP
 Use of this function's return value is likely to be non-portable.
 .SH "TQString TQProcess::readLineStderr ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Reads a line of text from standard error, excluding any trailing newline or carriage return characters and returns it. Returns TQString::null if canReadLineStderr() returns FALSE.
+Reads a line of text from standard error, excluding any trailing newline or carriage return characters and returns it. Returns TQString::null if canReadLineStderr() returns false.
 .PP
 By default, the text is interpreted to be in Latin-1 encoding. If you need other codecs, you can set a different codec with TQTextCodec::setCodecForCStrings().
 .PP
 See also canReadLineStderr(), readyReadStderr(), readStderr(), and readLineStdout().
 .SH "TQString TQProcess::readLineStdout ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Reads a line of text from standard output, excluding any trailing newline or carriage return characters, and returns it. Returns TQString::null if canReadLineStdout() returns FALSE.
+Reads a line of text from standard output, excluding any trailing newline or carriage return characters, and returns it. Returns TQString::null if canReadLineStdout() returns false.
 .PP
 By default, the text is interpreted to be in Latin-1 encoding. If you need other codecs, you can set a different codec with TQTextCodec::setCodecForCStrings().
 .PP
@@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ Tries to run a process for the command and arguments that were specified with se
 .PP
 If \fIenv\fR is null, then the process is started with the same environment as the starting process. If \fIenv\fR is non-null, then the values in the stringlist are interpreted as environment setttings of the form \fCkey=value\fR and the process is started in these environment settings. For convenience, there is a small exception to this rule: under Unix, if \fIenv\fR does not contain any settings for the environment variable \fCLD_LIBRARY_PATH\fR, then this variable is inherited from the starting process; under Windows the same applies for the environment variable \fCPATH\fR.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the process could be started; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the process could be started; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 You can write data to the process's standard input with writeToStdin(). You can close standard input with closeStdin() and you can terminate the process with tryTerminate(), or with kill().
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqprogressbar.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqprogressbar.3qt
index 30ffde923..9ead5bdf8 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqprogressbar.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqprogressbar.3qt
@@ -128,11 +128,11 @@ The \fIparent\fR, \fIname\fR and widget flags, \fIf\fR, are passed to the TQFram
 .PP
 See also totalSteps and progress.
 .SH "bool TQProgressBar::centerIndicator () const"
-Returns TRUE if the indicator string should be centered; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "centerIndicator" property for details.
+Returns true if the indicator string should be centered; otherwise returns false. See the "centerIndicator" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle () const"
-Returns TRUE if the display of the indicator string should follow the GUI style; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "indicatorFollowsStyle" property for details.
+Returns true if the display of the indicator string should follow the GUI style; otherwise returns false. See the "indicatorFollowsStyle" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQProgressBar::percentageVisible () const"
-Returns TRUE if the current progress value is displayed; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "percentageVisible" property for details.
+Returns true if the current progress value is displayed; otherwise returns false. See the "percentageVisible" property for details.
 .SH "int TQProgressBar::progress () const"
 Returns the current amount of progress. See the "progress" property for details.
 .SH "const TQString & TQProgressBar::progressString () const"
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ The \fIprogress\fR may be negative, indicating that the progress bar is in the "
 .PP
 The default implementation is the percentage of completion or blank in the reset state. The percentage is calculated based on the \fIprogress\fR and \fItotalSteps\fR. You can set the \fIindicator\fR text if you wish.
 .PP
-To allow efficient repainting of the progress bar, this method should return FALSE if the string is unchanged from the last call to this function.
+To allow efficient repainting of the progress bar, this method should return false if the string is unchanged from the last call to this function.
 .SH "void TQProgressBar::setIndicatorFollowsStyle ( bool )"
 Sets whether the display of the indicator string should follow the GUI style. See the "indicatorFollowsStyle" property for details.
 .SH "void TQProgressBar::setPercentageVisible ( bool )"
@@ -172,13 +172,13 @@ Returns the total number of steps. See the "totalSteps" property for details.
 .SH "bool centerIndicator"
 This property holds whether the indicator string should be centered.
 .PP
-Changing this property sets TQProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle to FALSE. The default is TRUE.
+Changing this property sets TQProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle to false. The default is true.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setCenterIndicator() and get this property's value with centerIndicator().
 .SH "bool indicatorFollowsStyle"
 This property holds whether the display of the indicator string should follow the GUI style.
 .PP
-The default is TRUE.
+The default is true.
 .PP
 See also centerIndicator.
 .PP
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Set this property's value with setIndicatorFollowsStyle() and get this property'
 .SH "bool percentageVisible"
 This property holds whether the current progress value is displayed.
 .PP
-The default is TRUE.
+The default is true.
 .PP
 See also centerIndicator and indicatorFollowsStyle.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqprogressdialog.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqprogressdialog.3qt
index aa1125a0b..d059f6246 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqprogressdialog.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqprogressdialog.3qt
@@ -16,10 +16,10 @@ Inherits TQDialog.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQProgressDialog\fR ( TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQProgressDialog\fR ( TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQProgressDialog\fR ( const TQString & labelText, const TQString & cancelButtonText, int totalSteps, TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQProgressDialog\fR ( const TQString & labelText, const TQString & cancelButtonText, int totalSteps, TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fB~TQProgressDialog\fR ()"
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Using a modal TQProgressDialog is simpler for the programmer, but you must call
 .br
 TQProgressDialog progress( "Copying files...", "Abort Copy", numFiles,
 .br
-                          this, "progress", TRUE );
+                          this, "progress", true );
 .br
 for ( int i = 0; i < numFiles; i++ ) {
 .br
@@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ In both modes the progress dialog may be customized by replacing the child widge
 .PP
 See also TQDialog, TQProgressBar, GUI Design Handbook: Progress Indicator, and Dialog Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQProgressDialog::TQProgressDialog ( TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )"
+.SH "TQProgressDialog::TQProgressDialog ( TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 )"
 Constructs a progress dialog.
 .PP
 Default settings:
@@ -250,10 +250,10 @@ The cancel button text is (translated) "Cancel".
 .TP
 The total number of steps is 100.
 .PP
-The \fIcreator\fR argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent. The \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR, and the widget flags, \fIf\fR, are passed to the TQDialog::TQDialog() constructor. If \fImodal\fR is FALSE (the default), you must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing of the dialog to occur. If \fImodal\fR is TRUE, the dialog ensures that events are processed when needed.
+The \fIcreator\fR argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent. The \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR, and the widget flags, \fIf\fR, are passed to the TQDialog::TQDialog() constructor. If \fImodal\fR is false (the default), you must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing of the dialog to occur. If \fImodal\fR is true, the dialog ensures that events are processed when needed.
 .PP
 See also labelText, setLabel(), setCancelButtonText(), setCancelButton(), and totalSteps.
-.SH "TQProgressDialog::TQProgressDialog ( const TQString & labelText, const TQString & cancelButtonText, int totalSteps, TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )"
+.SH "TQProgressDialog::TQProgressDialog ( const TQString & labelText, const TQString & cancelButtonText, int totalSteps, TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 )"
 Constructs a progress dialog.
 .PP
 The \fIlabelText\fR is text used to remind the user what is progressing.
@@ -262,17 +262,17 @@ The \fIcancelButtonText\fR is the text to display on the cancel button, or 0 if
 .PP
 The \fItotalSteps\fR is the total number of steps in the operation for which this progress dialog shows progress. For example, if the operation is to examine 50 files, this value would be 50. Before examining the first file, call setProgress(0). As each file is processed call setProgress(1), setProgress(2), etc., finally calling setProgress(50) after examining the last file.
 .PP
-The \fIcreator\fR argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent. The \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR, and widget flags, \fIf\fR, are passed to the TQDialog::TQDialog() constructor. If \fImodal\fR is FALSE (the default), you will must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing of the dialog to occur. If \fImodal\fR is TRUE, the dialog ensures that events are processed when needed.
+The \fIcreator\fR argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent. The \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR, and widget flags, \fIf\fR, are passed to the TQDialog::TQDialog() constructor. If \fImodal\fR is false (the default), you will must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing of the dialog to occur. If \fImodal\fR is true, the dialog ensures that events are processed when needed.
 .PP
 See also labelText, setLabel(), setCancelButtonText(), setCancelButton(), and totalSteps.
 .SH "TQProgressDialog::~TQProgressDialog ()"
 Destroys the progress dialog.
 .SH "bool TQProgressDialog::autoClose () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dialog gets hidden by reset(); otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoClose" property for details.
+Returns true if the dialog gets hidden by reset(); otherwise returns false. See the "autoClose" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQProgressDialog::autoReset () const"
-Returns TRUE if the progress dialog calls reset() as soon as progress() equals totalSteps(); otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoReset" property for details.
+Returns true if the progress dialog calls reset() as soon as progress() equals totalSteps(); otherwise returns false. See the "autoReset" property for details.
 .SH "void TQProgressDialog::cancel ()\fC [slot]\fR"
-Resets the progress dialog. wasCanceled() becomes TRUE until the progress dialog is reset. The progress dialog becomes hidden.
+Resets the progress dialog. wasCanceled() becomes true until the progress dialog is reset. The progress dialog becomes hidden.
 .SH "void TQProgressDialog::canceled ()\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when the cancel button is clicked. It is connected to the cancel() slot by default.
 .PP
@@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ Returns the time that must pass before the dialog appears. See the "minimumDurat
 .SH "int TQProgressDialog::progress () const"
 Returns the current amount of progress made. See the "progress" property for details.
 .SH "void TQProgressDialog::reset ()\fC [slot]\fR"
-Resets the progress dialog. The progress dialog becomes hidden if autoClose() is TRUE.
+Resets the progress dialog. The progress dialog becomes hidden if autoClose() is true.
 .PP
 See also autoClose and autoReset.
 .PP
@@ -339,14 +339,14 @@ Returns a size that fits the contents of the progress dialog. The progress dialo
 .SH "int TQProgressDialog::totalSteps () const"
 Returns the total number of steps. See the "totalSteps" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQProgressDialog::wasCanceled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dialog was canceled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "wasCanceled" property for details.
+Returns true if the dialog was canceled; otherwise returns false. See the "wasCanceled" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQProgressDialog::wasCancelled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dialog was canceled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "wasCancelled" property for details.
+Returns true if the dialog was canceled; otherwise returns false. See the "wasCancelled" property for details.
 .SS "Property Documentation"
 .SH "bool autoClose"
 This property holds whether the dialog gets hidden by reset().
 .PP
-The default is TRUE.
+The default is true.
 .PP
 See also autoReset.
 .PP
@@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Set this property's value with setAutoClose() and get this property's value with
 .SH "bool autoReset"
 This property holds whether the progress dialog calls reset() as soon as progress() equals totalSteps().
 .PP
-The default is TRUE.
+The default is true.
 .PP
 See also autoClose.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqptrcollection.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqptrcollection.3qt
index 6de2ba4c0..59a93be51 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqptrcollection.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqptrcollection.3qt
@@ -68,13 +68,13 @@ This type is the generic "item" in a TQPtrCollection.
 .SH "TQPtrCollection::TQPtrCollection ()\fC [protected]\fR"
 Constructs a collection. The constructor is protected because TQPtrCollection is an abstract class.
 .SH "TQPtrCollection::TQPtrCollection ( const TQPtrCollection & source )\fC [protected]\fR"
-Constructs a copy of \fIsource\fR with autoDelete() set to FALSE. The constructor is protected because TQPtrCollection is an abstract class.
+Constructs a copy of \fIsource\fR with autoDelete() set to false. The constructor is protected because TQPtrCollection is an abstract class.
 .PP
 Note that if \fIsource\fR has autoDelete turned on, copying it will risk memory leaks, reading freed memory, or both.
 .SH "TQPtrCollection::~TQPtrCollection ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Destroys the collection. The destructor is protected because TQPtrCollection is an abstract class.
 .SH "bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const"
-Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
+Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is false.
 .PP
 See also setAutoDelete().
 .SH "void TQPtrCollection::clear ()\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
@@ -106,11 +106,11 @@ This function is seldom reimplemented in the collection template classes. It is
 .PP
 See also deleteItem().
 .SH "void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )"
-Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is TRUE and to never delete them if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is true and to never delete them if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
 .PP
-The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items.
+The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items.
 .PP
 Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove() function will remove the item from its data structure, and if auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqptrdict.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqptrdict.3qt
index 9d1305b99..cd915018d 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqptrdict.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqptrdict.3qt
@@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ All iterators that access this dictionary will be reset.
 .PP
 See also setAutoDelete().
 .SH "bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const"
-Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
+Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is false.
 .PP
 See also setAutoDelete().
 .SH "void TQPtrDict::clear ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Multiple items can have the same key, in which case only the last item will be a
 .PP
 See also replace().
 .SH "bool TQPtrDict::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also count().
 .SH "TQPtrDict<type> & TQPtrDict::operator= ( const TQPtrDict<type> & dict )"
@@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ The default implementation sets \fIitem\fR to 0.
 .PP
 See also write().
 .SH "bool TQPtrDict::remove ( void * key )"
-Removes the item associated with \fIkey\fR from the dictionary. Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \fIkey\fR is in the dictionary; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Removes the item associated with \fIkey\fR from the dictionary. Returns true if successful, i.e. if \fIkey\fR is in the dictionary; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If there are two or more items with equal keys, then the most recently inserted item will be removed.
 .PP
@@ -256,11 +256,11 @@ See also insert().
 .SH "void TQPtrDict::resize ( uint newsize )"
 Changes the size of the hash table to \fInewsize\fR. The contents of the dictionary are preserved, but all iterators on the dictionary become invalid.
 .SH "void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )"
-Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is TRUE and to never delete them if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is true and to never delete them if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
 .PP
-The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items.
+The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items.
 .PP
 Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove() function will remove the item from its data structure, and if auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqptrdictiterator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqptrdictiterator.3qt
index 253395f8d..f24f25219 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqptrdictiterator.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqptrdictiterator.3qt
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Returns a pointer to the current iterator item's value.
 .SH "void * TQPtrDictIterator::currentKey () const"
 Returns the current iterator item's key.
 .SH "bool TQPtrDictIterator::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the dictionary is empty; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also count().
 .SH "TQPtrDictIterator::operator type * () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqptrlist.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqptrlist.3qt
index 9531a08dc..2c8b5e191 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqptrlist.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqptrlist.3qt
@@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ Example:
 .br
     TQPtrList<Employee> list;
 .br
-    list.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); // the list owns the objects
+    list.setAutoDelete( true ); // the list owns the objects
 .br
 .br
     list.append( new Employee("John", "Doe", 50000) );
@@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ The output is
 .PP
 TQPtrList has several member functions for traversing the list, but using a TQPtrListIterator can be more practical. Multiple list iterators may traverse the same list, independently of each other and of the current list item.
 .PP
-In the example above we make the call setAutoDelete(TRUE). Enabling auto-deletion tells the list to delete items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when they are removed but this would cause a memory leak in the example because there are no other references to the list items.
+In the example above we make the call setAutoDelete(true). Enabling auto-deletion tells the list to delete items that are removed. The default is to not delete items when they are removed but this would cause a memory leak in the example because there are no other references to the list items.
 .PP
 When inserting an item into a list only the pointer is copied, not the item itself, i.e. a shallow copy. It is possible to make the list copy all of the item's data (deep copy) when an item is inserted. insert(), inSort() and append() call the virtual function TQPtrCollection::newItem() for the item to be inserted. Inherit a list and reimplement newItem() to have deep copies.
 .PP
@@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ Returns the index of the current list item. The returned value is -1 if the curr
 .PP
 See also current().
 .SH "bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const"
-Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
+Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is false.
 .PP
 See also setAutoDelete().
 .SH "void TQPtrList::clear ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ See also insert(), compareItems(), current(), and sort().
 .SH "bool TQPtrList::insert ( uint index, const type * item )"
 Inserts the \fIitem\fR at position \fIindex\fR in the list.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \fIindex\fR is in range; otherwise returns FALSE. The valid range is 0 to count() (inclusively). The item is appended if \fIindex\fR == count().
+Returns true if successful, i.e. if \fIindex\fR is in range; otherwise returns false. The valid range is 0 to count() (inclusively). The item is appended if \fIindex\fR == count().
 .PP
 The inserted item becomes the current list item.
 .PP
@@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ The inserted item becomes the current list item.
 .PP
 See also append(), current(), and replace().
 .SH "bool TQPtrList::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the list is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the list is empty; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also count().
 .SH "type * TQPtrList::last ()"
@@ -490,13 +490,13 @@ See also first(), last(), prev(), and current().
 Examples:
 .)l listviews/listviews.h and showimg/showimg.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQPtrList::operator!= ( const TQPtrList<type> & list ) const"
-Compares this list with \fIlist\fR. Returns TRUE if the lists contain different data; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Compares this list with \fIlist\fR. Returns true if the lists contain different data; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQPtrList<type> & TQPtrList::operator= ( const TQPtrList<type> & list )"
 Assigns \fIlist\fR to this list and returns a reference to this list.
 .PP
 This list is first cleared and then each item in \fIlist\fR is appended to this list. Only the pointers are copied (shallow copy) unless newItem() has been reimplemented.
 .SH "bool TQPtrList::operator== ( const TQPtrList<type> & list ) const"
-Compares this list with \fIlist\fR. Returns TRUE if the lists contain the same data; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Compares this list with \fIlist\fR. Returns true if the lists contain the same data; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "void TQPtrList::prepend ( const type * item )"
 Inserts the \fIitem\fR at the start of the list.
 .PP
@@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ See also write().
 .SH "bool TQPtrList::remove ( uint index )"
 Removes the item at position \fIindex\fR in the list.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \fIindex\fR is in range; otherwise returns FALSE. The valid range is \fC0..(count() - 1)\fR inclusive.
+Returns true if successful, i.e. if \fIindex\fR is in range; otherwise returns false. The valid range is \fC0..(count() - 1)\fR inclusive.
 .PP
 The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
 .PP
@@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Removes the current list item.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the current item isn't 0; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if successful, i.e. if the current item isn't 0; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
 .PP
@@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Removes the first occurrence of \fIitem\fR from the list.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \fIitem\fR is in the list; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if successful, i.e. if \fIitem\fR is in the list; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
 .PP
@@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to point to the ne
 .PP
 See also removeRef(), take(), clear(), setAutoDelete(), compareItems(), and current().
 .SH "bool TQPtrList::removeFirst ()"
-Removes the first item from the list. Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Removes the first item from the list. Returns true if successful, i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
 .PP
@@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ All list iterators that refer to the removed item will be set to point to the ne
 .PP
 See also removeLast(), setAutoDelete(), current(), and remove().
 .SH "bool TQPtrList::removeLast ()"
-Removes the last item from the list. Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Removes the last item from the list. Returns true if successful, i.e. if the list isn't empty; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
 .PP
@@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ See also takeNode(), currentNode(), remove(), and removeRef().
 .SH "bool TQPtrList::removeRef ( const type * item )"
 Removes the first occurrence of \fIitem\fR from the list.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if \fIitem\fR is in the list; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if successful, i.e. if \fIitem\fR is in the list; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The removed item is deleted if auto-deletion is enabled.
 .PP
@@ -620,15 +620,15 @@ See also remove(), clear(), setAutoDelete(), and current().
 .SH "bool TQPtrList::replace ( uint index, const type * item )"
 Replaces the item at position \fIindex\fR with the new \fIitem\fR.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. \fIindex\fR is in the range 0 to count()-1.
+Returns true if successful, i.e. \fIindex\fR is in the range 0 to count()-1.
 .PP
 See also append(), current(), and insert().
 .SH "void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )"
-Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is TRUE and to never delete them if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is true and to never delete them if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
 .PP
-The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items.
+The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items.
 .PP
 Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove() function will remove the item from its data structure, and if auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqptrlistiterator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqptrlistiterator.3qt
index c77a3434b..d61b5002d 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqptrlistiterator.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqptrlistiterator.3qt
@@ -129,11 +129,11 @@ Constructs an iterator for \fIlist\fR. The current iterator item is set to point
 .SH "TQPtrListIterator::~TQPtrListIterator ()"
 Destroys the iterator.
 .SH "bool TQPtrListIterator::atFirst () const"
-Returns TRUE if the current iterator item is the first list item; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the current iterator item is the first list item; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also toFirst() and atLast().
 .SH "bool TQPtrListIterator::atLast () const"
-Returns TRUE if the current iterator item is the last list item; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the current iterator item is the last list item; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also toLast() and atFirst().
 .SH "uint TQPtrListIterator::count () const"
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Returns a pointer to the current iterator item. If the iterator is positioned be
 Examples:
 .)l canvas/canvas.cpp, customlayout/card.cpp, and customlayout/flow.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQPtrListIterator::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the list is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the list is empty; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also count().
 .SH "TQPtrListIterator::operator type * () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqptrqueue.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqptrqueue.3qt
index 3a772c55f..a05534ab5 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqptrqueue.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqptrqueue.3qt
@@ -84,19 +84,19 @@ For compatibility with the TQPtrCollection classes, current() and remove() are p
 See also TQPtrList, TQPtrStack, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "TQPtrQueue::TQPtrQueue ()"
-Creates an empty queue with autoDelete() set to FALSE.
+Creates an empty queue with autoDelete() set to false.
 .SH "TQPtrQueue::TQPtrQueue ( const TQPtrQueue<type> & queue )"
 Creates a queue from \fIqueue\fR.
 .PP
-Only the pointers are copied; the items are not. The autoDelete() flag is set to FALSE.
+Only the pointers are copied; the items are not. The autoDelete() flag is set to false.
 .SH "TQPtrQueue::~TQPtrQueue ()"
-Destroys the queue. Items in the queue are deleted if autoDelete() is TRUE.
+Destroys the queue. Items in the queue are deleted if autoDelete() is true.
 .SH "bool TQPtrQueue::autoDelete () const"
-Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
+Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is false.
 .PP
 See also setAutoDelete().
 .SH "void TQPtrQueue::clear ()"
-Removes all items from the queue, and deletes them if autoDelete() is TRUE.
+Removes all items from the queue, and deletes them if autoDelete() is true.
 .PP
 See also remove().
 .SH "uint TQPtrQueue::count () const"
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Returns a pointer to the head item in the queue. The queue is not changed. Retur
 .PP
 See also dequeue() and isEmpty().
 .SH "bool TQPtrQueue::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the queue is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the queue is empty; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also count(), dequeue(), and head().
 .SH "TQPtrQueue::operator type * () const"
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Assigns \fIqueue\fR to this queue and returns a reference to this queue.
 .PP
 This queue is first cleared and then each item in \fIqueue\fR is enqueued to this queue. Only the pointers are copied.
 .PP
-\fBWarning:\fR The autoDelete() flag is not modified. If it it TRUE for both \fIqueue\fR and this queue, deleting the two lists will cause \fIdouble-deletion\fR of the items.
+\fBWarning:\fR The autoDelete() flag is not modified. If it it true for both \fIqueue\fR and this queue, deleting the two lists will cause \fIdouble-deletion\fR of the items.
 .SH "TQDataStream & TQPtrQueue::read ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item & item )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Reads a queue item, \fIitem\fR, from the stream \fIs\fR and returns a reference to the stream.
 .PP
@@ -140,17 +140,17 @@ The default implementation sets \fIitem\fR to 0.
 .PP
 See also write().
 .SH "bool TQPtrQueue::remove ()"
-Removes the head item from the queue, and returns TRUE if there was an item, i.e. the queue wasn't empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Removes the head item from the queue, and returns true if there was an item, i.e. the queue wasn't empty; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-The item is deleted if autoDelete() is TRUE.
+The item is deleted if autoDelete() is true.
 .PP
 See also head(), isEmpty(), and dequeue().
 .SH "void TQPtrQueue::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )"
-Sets the queue to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is TRUE and not to delete them if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Sets the queue to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is true and not to delete them if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a queue are deleted when the queue itself is deleted. This can be quite convenient if the queue has the only pointer to the items.
 .PP
-The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the queue: you might find yourself with two queues deleting the same items.
+The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the queue: you might find yourself with two queues deleting the same items.
 .PP
 See also autoDelete().
 .SH "TQDataStream & TQPtrQueue::write ( TQDataStream & s, TQPtrCollection::Item item ) const\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqptrstack.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqptrstack.3qt
index 42633a329..305aac4af 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqptrstack.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqptrstack.3qt
@@ -88,13 +88,13 @@ Creates an empty stack.
 .SH "TQPtrStack::TQPtrStack ( const TQPtrStack<type> & s )"
 Creates a stack by making a shallow copy of another stack \fIs\fR.
 .SH "TQPtrStack::~TQPtrStack ()"
-Destroys the stack. All items will be deleted if autoDelete() is TRUE.
+Destroys the stack. All items will be deleted if autoDelete() is true.
 .SH "bool TQPtrStack::autoDelete () const"
 The same as TQPtrCollection::autoDelete().
 .PP
 See also setAutoDelete().
 .SH "void TQPtrStack::clear ()"
-Removes all items from the stack, deleting them if autoDelete() is TRUE.
+Removes all items from the stack, deleting them if autoDelete() is true.
 .PP
 See also remove().
 .SH "uint TQPtrStack::count () const"
@@ -104,11 +104,11 @@ See also isEmpty().
 .SH "type * TQPtrStack::current () const"
 Returns a pointer to the top item on the stack (most recently pushed). The stack is not changed. Returns 0 if the stack is empty.
 .SH "bool TQPtrStack::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the stack contains no elements; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the stack contains no elements; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQPtrStack::operator type * () const"
 Returns a pointer to the top item on the stack (most recently pushed). The stack is not changed. Returns 0 if the stack is empty.
 .SH "TQPtrStack<type> & TQPtrStack::operator= ( const TQPtrStack<type> & s )"
-Sets the contents of this stack by making a shallow copy of another stack \fIs\fR. Elements currently in this stack will be deleted if autoDelete() is TRUE.
+Sets the contents of this stack by making a shallow copy of another stack \fIs\fR. Elements currently in this stack will be deleted if autoDelete() is true.
 .SH "type * TQPtrStack::pop ()"
 Removes the top item from the stack and returns it. The stack must not be empty.
 .SH "void TQPtrStack::push ( const type * d )"
@@ -120,13 +120,13 @@ The default implementation sets \fIitem\fR to 0.
 .PP
 See also write().
 .SH "bool TQPtrStack::remove ()"
-Removes the top item from the stack and deletes it if autoDelete() is TRUE. Returns TRUE if there was an item to pop; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Removes the top item from the stack and deletes it if autoDelete() is true. Returns true if there was an item to pop; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also clear().
 .SH "void TQPtrStack::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )"
 Defines whether this stack auto-deletes its contents. The same as TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete().
 .PP
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE the stack auto-deletes its contents; if \fIenable\fR is FALSE the stack does not delete its contents.
+If \fIenable\fR is true the stack auto-deletes its contents; if \fIenable\fR is false the stack does not delete its contents.
 .PP
 See also autoDelete().
 .SH "type * TQPtrStack::top () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqptrvector.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqptrvector.3qt
index 4730eb3c1..9c38f3eac 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqptrvector.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqptrvector.3qt
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ See also clear().
 .SH "type * TQPtrVector::at ( uint i ) const"
 Returns the item at position \fIi\fR, or 0 if there is no item at that position. \fIi\fR must be less than size().
 .SH "bool TQPtrCollection::autoDelete () const"
-Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is FALSE.
+Returns the setting of the auto-delete option. The default is false.
 .PP
 See also setAutoDelete().
 .SH "int TQPtrVector::bsearch ( const type * d ) const"
@@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ Inserts item \fId\fR in all positions in the vector. Any existing items are remo
 .PP
 If \fIsize\fR >= 0, the vector is first resized to \fIsize\fR. By default, \fIsize\fR is -1.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. \fIsize\fR is the same as the current size, or \fIsize\fR is larger and the memory has successfully been allocated; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if successful, i.e. \fIsize\fR is the same as the current size, or \fIsize\fR is larger and the memory has successfully been allocated; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also resize(), insert(), and isEmpty().
 .SH "int TQPtrVector::find ( const type * d, uint i = 0 ) const"
@@ -244,11 +244,11 @@ Sets position \fIi\fR in the vector to contain the item \fId\fR. \fIi\fR must be
 .PP
 See also at().
 .SH "bool TQPtrVector::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the vector is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the vector is empty; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also count().
 .SH "bool TQPtrVector::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if the vector is null; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the vector is null; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 A null vector has size() == 0 and data() == 0.
 .PP
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ This vector is first cleared and then all the items from \fIv\fR are copied into
 .PP
 See also clear().
 .SH "bool TQPtrVector::operator== ( const TQPtrVector<type> & v ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this vector and \fIv\fR are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this vector and \fIv\fR are equal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "type * TQPtrVector::operator[] ( int i ) const"
 Returns the item at position \fIi\fR, or 0 if there is no item at that position. \fIi\fR must be less than size().
 .PP
@@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ See also write().
 .SH "bool TQPtrVector::remove ( uint i )"
 Removes the item at position \fIi\fR in the vector, if there is one. \fIi\fR must be less than size().
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIi\fR is within range; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIi\fR is within range; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also take() and at().
 .SH "bool TQPtrVector::resize ( uint size )"
@@ -284,15 +284,15 @@ Resizes (expands or shrinks) the vector to \fIsize\fR elements. The vector becom
 .PP
 Any items at position \fIsize\fR or beyond in the vector are removed. New positions are initialized to 0.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if successful, i.e. if the memory was successfully allocated; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if successful, i.e. if the memory was successfully allocated; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also size() and isNull().
 .SH "void TQPtrCollection::setAutoDelete ( bool enable )"
-Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is TRUE and to never delete them if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Sets the collection to auto-delete its contents if \fIenable\fR is true and to never delete them if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 If auto-deleting is turned on, all the items in a collection are deleted when the collection itself is deleted. This is convenient if the collection has the only pointer to the items.
 .PP
-The default setting is FALSE, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items.
+The default setting is false, for safety. If you turn it on, be careful about copying the collection - you might find yourself with two collections deleting the same items.
 .PP
 Note that the auto-delete setting may also affect other functions in subclasses. For example, a subclass that has a remove() function will remove the item from its data structure, and if auto-delete is enabled, will also delete the item.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpushbutton.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpushbutton.3qt
index 57f495f90..8b6e3e697 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqpushbutton.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpushbutton.3qt
@@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Push buttons can display a textual label or a pixmap, and optionally a small ico
 .PP
 A push button emits the signal clicked() when it is activated by the mouse, the Spacebar or by a keyboard accelerator. Connect to this signal to perform the button's action. Push buttons also provide less commonly used signals, for example, pressed() and released().
 .PP
-Command buttons in dialogs are by default auto-default buttons, i.e. they become the default push button automatically when they receive the keyboard input focus. A default button is a push button that is activated when the user presses the Enter or Return key in a dialog. You can change this with setAutoDefault(). Note that auto-default buttons reserve a little extra space which is necessary to draw a default-button indicator. If you do not want this space around your buttons, call setAutoDefault(FALSE).
+Command buttons in dialogs are by default auto-default buttons, i.e. they become the default push button automatically when they receive the keyboard input focus. A default button is a push button that is activated when the user presses the Enter or Return key in a dialog. You can change this with setAutoDefault(). Note that auto-default buttons reserve a little extra space which is necessary to draw a default-button indicator. If you do not want this space around your buttons, call setAutoDefault(false).
 .PP
 Being so central, the button widget has grown to accommodate a great many variations in the past decade. The Microsoft style guide now shows about ten different states of Windows push buttons and the text implies that there are dozens more when all the combinations of features are taken into consideration.
 .PP
@@ -238,9 +238,9 @@ Destroys the push button.
 .SH "TQKeySequence TQButton::accel () const"
 Returns the accelerator associated with the button. See the "accel" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQPushButton::autoDefault () const"
-Returns TRUE if the push button is the auto default button; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoDefault" property for details.
+Returns true if the push button is the auto default button; otherwise returns false. See the "autoDefault" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::autoRepeat () const"
-Returns TRUE if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
+Returns true if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
 .SH "void TQButton::clicked ()\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e. first pressed down and then released when the mouse cursor is inside the button), when the accelerator key is typed or when animateClick() is called. This signal is \fInot\fR emitted if you call setDown().
 .PP
@@ -261,19 +261,19 @@ See also TQButtonGroup.
 .SH "TQIconSet * TQPushButton::iconSet () const"
 Returns the icon set on the push button. See the "iconSet" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQPushButton::isDefault () const"
-Returns TRUE if the push button is the default button; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "default" property for details.
+Returns true if the push button is the default button; otherwise returns false. See the "default" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::isDown () const"
-Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "down" property for details.
+Returns true if the button is pressed; otherwise returns false. See the "down" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::isExclusiveToggle () const"
-Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "exclusiveToggle" property for details.
+Returns true if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns false. See the "exclusiveToggle" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQPushButton::isFlat () const"
-Returns TRUE if the border is disabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "flat" property for details.
+Returns true if the border is disabled; otherwise returns false. See the "flat" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQPushButton::isMenuButton () const"
-Returns TRUE if the push button has a menu button on it; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "menuButton" property for details.
+Returns true if the push button has a menu button on it; otherwise returns false. See the "menuButton" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::isOn () const"
-Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "on" property for details.
+Returns true if the button is toggled; otherwise returns false. See the "on" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::isToggleButton () const"
-Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "toggleButton" property for details.
+Returns true if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns false. See the "toggleButton" property for details.
 .SH "const TQPixmap * TQButton::pixmap () const"
 Returns the pixmap shown on the button. See the "pixmap" property for details.
 .SH "TQPopupMenu * TQPushButton::popup () const"
@@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ Toggles the state of a toggle button.
 .PP
 See also on, on, toggled(), and toggleButton.
 .SH "void TQButton::toggled ( bool on )\fC [signal]\fR"
-This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. \fIon\fR is TRUE if the button is on, or FALSE if the button is off.
+This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. \fIon\fR is true if the button is on, or false if the button is off.
 .PP
 This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation, or because setOn() was called.
 .PP
@@ -356,11 +356,11 @@ Set this property's value with setAccel() and get this property's value with acc
 .SH "bool autoDefault"
 This property holds whether the push button is the auto default button.
 .PP
-If this property is set to TRUE then the push button is the auto default button in a dialog.
+If this property is set to true then the push button is the auto default button in a dialog.
 .PP
 In some GUI styles a default button is drawn with an extra frame around it, up to 3 pixels or more. TQt automatically keeps this space free around auto-default buttons, i.e. auto-default buttons may have a slightly larger size hint.
 .PP
-This property's default is TRUE for buttons that have a TQDialog parent; otherwise it defaults to FALSE.
+This property's default is true for buttons that have a TQDialog parent; otherwise it defaults to false.
 .PP
 See the default property for details of how default and auto-default interact.
 .PP
@@ -378,7 +378,7 @@ Set this property's value with setAutoRepeat() and get this property's value wit
 .SH "bool default"
 This property holds whether the push button is the default button.
 .PP
-If this property is set to TRUE then the push button will be pressed if the user presses the Enter (or Return) key in a dialog.
+If this property is set to true then the push button will be pressed if the user presses the Enter (or Return) key in a dialog.
 .PP
 Regardless of focus, if the user presses Enter: If there is a default button the default button is pressed; otherwise, if there are one or more autoDefault buttons the first autoDefault button that is next in the tab order is pressed. If there are no default or autoDefault buttons only pressing Space on a button with focus, mouse clicking, or using an accelerator will press a button.
 .PP
@@ -386,13 +386,13 @@ In a dialog, only one push button at a time can be the default button. This butt
 .PP
 The default button behavior is provided only in dialogs. Buttons can always be clicked from the keyboard by pressing Enter (or Return) or the Spacebar when the button has focus.
 .PP
-This property's default is FALSE.
+This property's default is false.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setDefault() and get this property's value with isDefault().
 .SH "bool flat"
 This property holds whether the border is disabled.
 .PP
-This property's default is FALSE.
+This property's default is false.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setFlat() and get this property's value with isFlat().
 .SH "TQIconSet iconSet"
@@ -406,13 +406,13 @@ This property holds whether the push button has a menu button on it.
 .PP
 \fBThis property is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-If this property is set to TRUE, then a down arrow is drawn on the push button to indicate that a menu will pop up if the user clicks on the arrow.
+If this property is set to true, then a down arrow is drawn on the push button to indicate that a menu will pop up if the user clicks on the arrow.
 .PP
 Get this property's value with isMenuButton().
 .SH "bool on"
 This property holds whether the push button is toggled.
 .PP
-This property should only be set for toggle push buttons. The default value is FALSE.
+This property should only be set for toggle push buttons. The default value is false.
 .PP
 See also on, toggle(), toggled(), and toggleButton.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqradiobutton.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqradiobutton.3qt
index fed88c21d..ee957c8e2 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqradiobutton.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqradiobutton.3qt
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructo
 .SH "TQKeySequence TQButton::accel () const"
 Returns the accelerator associated with the button. See the "accel" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::autoRepeat () const"
-Returns TRUE if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
+Returns true if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "autoRepeat" property for details.
 .SH "void TQButton::clicked ()\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e. first pressed down and then released when the mouse cursor is inside the button), when the accelerator key is typed or when animateClick() is called. This signal is \fInot\fR emitted if you call setDown().
 .PP
@@ -156,15 +156,15 @@ If the button is not a member of any TQButtonGroup, this function returns 0.
 .PP
 See also TQButtonGroup.
 .SH "bool TQRadioButton::isChecked () const"
-Returns TRUE if the radio button is checked; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "checked" property for details.
+Returns true if the radio button is checked; otherwise returns false. See the "checked" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::isDown () const"
-Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "down" property for details.
+Returns true if the button is pressed; otherwise returns false. See the "down" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::isExclusiveToggle () const"
-Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "exclusiveToggle" property for details.
+Returns true if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns false. See the "exclusiveToggle" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::isOn () const"
-Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "on" property for details.
+Returns true if the button is toggled; otherwise returns false. See the "on" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQButton::isToggleButton () const"
-Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "toggleButton" property for details.
+Returns true if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns false. See the "toggleButton" property for details.
 .SH "const TQPixmap * TQButton::pixmap () const"
 Returns the pixmap shown on the button. See the "pixmap" property for details.
 .SH "void TQButton::pressed ()\fC [signal]\fR"
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Toggles the state of a toggle button.
 .PP
 See also on, setOn(), toggled(), and toggleButton.
 .SH "void TQButton::toggled ( bool on )\fC [signal]\fR"
-This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. \fIon\fR is TRUE if the button is on, or FALSE if the button is off.
+This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. \fIon\fR is true if the button is on, or false if the button is off.
 .PP
 This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation, or because setOn() was called.
 .PP
@@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ Set this property's value with setAutoRepeat() and get this property's value wit
 .SH "bool checked"
 This property holds whether the radio button is checked.
 .PP
-This property will not effect any other radio buttons unless they have been placed in the same TQButtonGroup. The default value is FALSE (unchecked).
+This property will not effect any other radio buttons unless they have been placed in the same TQButtonGroup. The default value is false (unchecked).
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setChecked() and get this property's value with isChecked().
 .SH "TQPixmap pixmap"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqrect.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqrect.3qt
index cfaccf0c5..41c0c7f64 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqrect.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqrect.3qt
@@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ TQRect \- Defines a rectangle in the plane
 .BI "TQRect & \fBoperator&=\fR ( const TQRect & r )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "bool \fBcontains\fR ( const TQPoint & p, bool proper = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "bool \fBcontains\fR ( const TQPoint & p, bool proper = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "bool \fBcontains\fR ( int x, int y ) const"
@@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ TQRect \- Defines a rectangle in the plane
 .BI "bool \fBcontains\fR ( int x, int y, bool proper ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "bool \fBcontains\fR ( const TQRect & r, bool proper = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "bool \fBcontains\fR ( const TQRect & r, bool proper = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQRect \fBunite\fR ( const TQRect & r ) const"
@@ -293,28 +293,28 @@ Returns the center point of the rectangle.
 See also moveCenter(), topLeft(), bottomRight(), topRight(), and bottomLeft().
 .PP
 Example: tooltip/tooltip.cpp.
-.SH "bool TQRect::contains ( const TQPoint & p, bool proper = FALSE ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the point \fIp\fR is inside or on the edge of the rectangle; otherwise returns FALSE.
+.SH "bool TQRect::contains ( const TQPoint & p, bool proper = false ) const"
+Returns true if the point \fIp\fR is inside or on the edge of the rectangle; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If \fIproper\fR is TRUE, this function returns TRUE only if \fIp\fR is inside (not on the edge).
+If \fIproper\fR is true, this function returns true only if \fIp\fR is inside (not on the edge).
 .PP
 Example: t14/cannon.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQRect::contains ( int x, int y ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the point \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR is inside this rectangle; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the point \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR is inside this rectangle; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQRect::contains ( int x, int y, bool proper ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the point \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR is inside this rectangle; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the point \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR is inside this rectangle; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If \fIproper\fR is TRUE, this function returns TRUE only if the point is entirely inside (not on the edge).
-.SH "bool TQRect::contains ( const TQRect & r, bool proper = FALSE ) const"
+If \fIproper\fR is true, this function returns true only if the point is entirely inside (not on the edge).
+.SH "bool TQRect::contains ( const TQRect & r, bool proper = false ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the rectangle \fIr\fR is inside this rectangle; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the rectangle \fIr\fR is inside this rectangle; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If \fIproper\fR is TRUE, this function returns TRUE only if \fIr\fR is entirely inside (not on the edge).
+If \fIproper\fR is true, this function returns true only if \fIr\fR is entirely inside (not on the edge).
 .PP
 See also unite(), intersect(), and intersects().
 .SH "void TQRect::coords ( int * xp1, int * yp1, int * xp2, int * yp2 ) const"
@@ -334,14 +334,14 @@ Examples:
 .SH "TQRect TQRect::intersect ( const TQRect & r ) const"
 Returns the intersection of this rectangle and rectangle \fIr\fR. \fCr.intersect(s)\fR is equivalent to \fCr&s\fR.
 .SH "bool TQRect::intersects ( const TQRect & r ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this rectangle intersects with rectangle \fIr\fR (there is at least one pixel that is within both rectangles); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this rectangle intersects with rectangle \fIr\fR (there is at least one pixel that is within both rectangles); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also intersect() and contains().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l t11/cannon.cpp, t12/cannon.cpp, t13/cannon.cpp, and t14/cannon.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQRect::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the rectangle is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the rectangle is empty; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 An empty rectangle has a left() > right() or top() > bottom().
 .PP
@@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ An empty rectangle is not valid. \fCisEmpty() == !isValid()\fR
 .PP
 See also isNull(), isValid(), and normalize().
 .SH "bool TQRect::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if the rectangle is a null rectangle; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the rectangle is a null rectangle; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 A null rectangle has both the width and the height set to 0, that is right() == left() - 1 and bottom() == top() - 1.
 .PP
@@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ A null rectangle is not valid.
 .PP
 See also isEmpty() and isValid().
 .SH "bool TQRect::isValid () const"
-Returns TRUE if the rectangle is valid; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the rectangle is valid; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 A valid rectangle has a left() <= right() and top() <= bottom().
 .PP
@@ -624,13 +624,13 @@ Examples:
 .)l desktop/desktop.cpp, movies/main.cpp, scribble/scribble.cpp, t12/cannon.cpp, t14/cannon.cpp, themes/metal.cpp, and themes/wood.cpp.
 .SH RELATED FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "bool operator!= ( const TQRect & r1, const TQRect & r2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIr1\fR and \fIr2\fR are different; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIr1\fR and \fIr2\fR are different; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQRect & r )"
 Writes the TQRect, \fIr\fR, to the stream \fIs\fR, and returns a reference to the stream.
 .PP
 See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
 .SH "bool operator== ( const TQRect & r1, const TQRect & r2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIr1\fR and \fIr2\fR are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIr1\fR and \fIr2\fR are equal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQRect & r )"
 Reads a TQRect from the stream \fIs\fR into rect \fIr\fR and returns a reference to the stream.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqregexp.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqregexp.3qt
index 09cf52cc2..7cdf54fd1 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqregexp.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqregexp.3qt
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread supp
 .BI "\fBTQRegExp\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQRegExp\fR ( const TQString & pattern, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool wildcard = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQRegExp\fR ( const TQString & pattern, bool caseSensitive = true, bool wildcard = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread supp
 .BI "bool \fBexactMatch\fR ( const TQString & str ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int match ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, int * len = 0, bool indexIsStart = TRUE ) const  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "int match ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, int * len = 0, bool indexIsStart = true ) const  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBsearch\fR ( const TQString & str, int offset = 0, CaretMode caretMode = CaretAtZero ) const"
@@ -292,11 +292,11 @@ TQRegExp's quantifiers are the same as Perl's greedy quantifiers. Non-greedy mat
 .br
     TQRegExp rx( "ro+m" );
 .br
-    rx.setMinimal( TRUE );
+    rx.setMinimal( true );
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-The equivalent of Perl's \fC/i\fR option is setCaseSensitive(FALSE).
+The equivalent of Perl's \fC/i\fR option is setCaseSensitive(false).
 .PP
 Perl's \fC/g\fR option can be emulated using a loop.
 .PP
@@ -466,13 +466,13 @@ To imitate the matching of a shell we can use wildcard mode.
 .br
     TQRegExp rx( "*.html" );         // invalid regexp: * doesn't quantify anything
 .br
-    rx.setWildcard( TRUE );         // now it's a valid wildcard regexp
+    rx.setWildcard( true );         // now it's a valid wildcard regexp
 .br
-    rx.exactMatch( "index.html" );  // returns TRUE
+    rx.exactMatch( "index.html" );  // returns true
 .br
-    rx.exactMatch( "default.htm" ); // returns FALSE
+    rx.exactMatch( "default.htm" ); // returns false
 .br
-    rx.exactMatch( "readme.txt" );  // returns FALSE
+    rx.exactMatch( "readme.txt" );  // returns false
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -496,8 +496,8 @@ The CaretMode enum defines the different meanings of the caret (\fB^\fR) in a re
 Constructs an empty regexp.
 .PP
 See also isValid() and errorString().
-.SH "TQRegExp::TQRegExp ( const TQString & pattern, bool caseSensitive = TRUE, bool wildcard = FALSE )"
-Constructs a regular expression object for the given \fIpattern\fR string. The pattern must be given using wildcard notation if \fIwildcard\fR is TRUE (default is FALSE). The pattern is case sensitive, unless \fIcaseSensitive\fR is FALSE. Matching is greedy (maximal), but can be changed by calling setMinimal().
+.SH "TQRegExp::TQRegExp ( const TQString & pattern, bool caseSensitive = true, bool wildcard = false )"
+Constructs a regular expression object for the given \fIpattern\fR string. The pattern must be given using wildcard notation if \fIwildcard\fR is true (default is false). The pattern is case sensitive, unless \fIcaseSensitive\fR is false. Matching is greedy (maximal), but can be changed by calling setMinimal().
 .PP
 See also setPattern(), setCaseSensitive(), setWildcard(), and setMinimal().
 .SH "TQRegExp::TQRegExp ( const TQRegExp & rx )"
@@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ The order of elements in the string list is as follows. The first element is the
 .PP
 See also cap(), pos(), exactMatch(), search(), and searchRev().
 .SH "bool TQRegExp::caseSensitive () const"
-Returns TRUE if case sensitivity is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. The default is TRUE.
+Returns true if case sensitivity is enabled; otherwise returns false. The default is true.
 .PP
 See also setCaseSensitive().
 .SH "TQString TQRegExp::errorString ()"
@@ -653,23 +653,23 @@ This function is useful to construct regexp patterns dynamically:
 .br
 .fi
 .SH "bool TQRegExp::exactMatch ( const TQString & str ) const"
-Returns TRUE if \fIstr\fR is matched exactly by this regular expression; otherwise returns FALSE. You can determine how much of the string was matched by calling matchedLength().
+Returns true if \fIstr\fR is matched exactly by this regular expression; otherwise returns false. You can determine how much of the string was matched by calling matchedLength().
 .PP
 For a given regexp string, R, exactMatch("R") is the equivalent of search("^R$") since exactMatch() effectively encloses the regexp in the start of string and end of string anchors, except that it sets matchedLength() differently.
 .PP
-For example, if the regular expression is \fBblue\fR, then exactMatch() returns TRUE only for input \fCblue\fR. For inputs \fCbluebell\fR, \fCblutak\fR and \fClightblue\fR, exactMatch() returns FALSE and matchedLength() will return 4, 3 and 0 respectively.
+For example, if the regular expression is \fBblue\fR, then exactMatch() returns true only for input \fCblue\fR. For inputs \fCbluebell\fR, \fCblutak\fR and \fClightblue\fR, exactMatch() returns false and matchedLength() will return 4, 3 and 0 respectively.
 .PP
 Although const, this function sets matchedLength(), capturedTexts() and pos().
 .PP
 See also search(), searchRev(), and TQRegExpValidator.
 .SH "bool TQRegExp::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the pattern string is empty; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the pattern string is empty; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If you call exactMatch() with an empty pattern on an empty string it will return TRUE; otherwise it returns FALSE since it operates over the whole string. If you call search() with an empty pattern on \fIany\fR string it will return the start offset (0 by default) because the empty pattern matches the 'emptiness' at the start of the string. In this case the length of the match returned by matchedLength() will be 0.
+If you call exactMatch() with an empty pattern on an empty string it will return true; otherwise it returns false since it operates over the whole string. If you call search() with an empty pattern on \fIany\fR string it will return the start offset (0 by default) because the empty pattern matches the 'emptiness' at the start of the string. In this case the length of the match returned by matchedLength() will be 0.
 .PP
 See TQString::isEmpty().
 .SH "bool TQRegExp::isValid () const"
-Returns TRUE if the regular expression is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. An invalid regular expression never matches.
+Returns true if the regular expression is valid; otherwise returns false. An invalid regular expression never matches.
 .PP
 The pattern \fB[a-z\fR is an example of an invalid pattern, since it lacks a closing square bracket.
 .PP
@@ -678,14 +678,14 @@ Note that the validity of a regexp may also depend on the setting of the wildcar
 See also errorString().
 .PP
 Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
-.SH "int TQRegExp::match ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, int * len = 0, bool indexIsStart = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "int TQRegExp::match ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, int * len = 0, bool indexIsStart = true ) const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 Attempts to match in \fIstr\fR, starting from position \fIindex\fR. Returns the position of the match, or -1 if there was no match.
 .PP
 The length of the match is stored in \fI*len\fR, unless \fIlen\fR is a null pointer.
 .PP
-If \fIindexIsStart\fR is TRUE (the default), the position \fIindex\fR in the string will match the start of string anchor, \fB^\fR, in the regexp, if present. Otherwise, position 0 in \fIstr\fR will match.
+If \fIindexIsStart\fR is true (the default), the position \fIindex\fR in the string will match the start of string anchor, \fB^\fR, in the regexp, if present. Otherwise, position 0 in \fIstr\fR will match.
 .PP
 Use search() and matchedLength() instead of this function.
 .PP
@@ -700,7 +700,7 @@ See also exactMatch(), search(), and searchRev().
 Examples:
 .)l network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h and regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQRegExp::minimal () const"
-Returns TRUE if minimal (non-greedy) matching is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if minimal (non-greedy) matching is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setMinimal().
 .SH "int TQRegExp::numCaptures () const"
@@ -708,13 +708,13 @@ Returns the number of captures contained in the regular expression.
 .PP
 Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQRegExp::operator!= ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this regular expression is not equal to \fIrx\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this regular expression is not equal to \fIrx\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also operator==().
 .SH "TQRegExp & TQRegExp::operator= ( const TQRegExp & rx )"
 Copies the regular expression \fIrx\fR and returns a reference to the copy. The case sensitivity, wildcard and minimal matching options are also copied.
 .SH "bool TQRegExp::operator== ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this regular expression is equal to \fIrx\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this regular expression is equal to \fIrx\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Two TQRegExp objects are equal if they have the same pattern strings and the same settings for case sensitivity, wildcard and minimal matching.
 .SH "TQString TQRegExp::pattern () const"
@@ -797,13 +797,13 @@ See also search() and exactMatch().
 .SH "void TQRegExp::setCaseSensitive ( bool sensitive )"
 Sets case sensitive matching to \fIsensitive\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIsensitive\fR is TRUE, \fB&#92;.txt$\fR matches \fCreadme.txt\fR but not \fCREADME.TXT\fR.
+If \fIsensitive\fR is true, \fB&#92;.txt$\fR matches \fCreadme.txt\fR but not \fCREADME.TXT\fR.
 .PP
 See also caseSensitive().
 .PP
 Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
 .SH "void TQRegExp::setMinimal ( bool minimal )"
-Enables or disables minimal matching. If \fIminimal\fR is FALSE, matching is greedy (maximal) which is the default.
+Enables or disables minimal matching. If \fIminimal\fR is false, matching is greedy (maximal) which is the default.
 .PP
 For example, suppose we have the input string "We must be <b>bold</b>, very <b>bold</b>!" and the pattern \fB<b>.*</b>\fR. With the default greedy (maximal) matching, the match is "We must be <u><b>bold</b>, very <b>bold</b></u>!". But with minimal (non-greedy) matching the first match is: "We must be <u><b>bold</b></u>, very <b>bold</b>!" and the second match is "We must be <b>bold</b>, very <u><b>bold</b></u>!". In practice we might use the pattern \fB<b>[^<]+</b>\fR instead, although this will still fail for nested tags.
 .PP
@@ -816,9 +816,9 @@ Sets the pattern string to \fIpattern\fR. The case sensitivity, wildcard and min
 .PP
 See also pattern().
 .SH "void TQRegExp::setWildcard ( bool wildcard )"
-Sets the wildcard mode for the regular expression. The default is FALSE.
+Sets the wildcard mode for the regular expression. The default is false.
 .PP
-Setting \fIwildcard\fR to TRUE enables simple shell-like wildcard matching. (See wildcard matching (globbing).)
+Setting \fIwildcard\fR to true enables simple shell-like wildcard matching. (See wildcard matching (globbing).)
 .PP
 For example, \fBr*.txt\fR matches the string \fCreadme.txt\fR in wildcard mode, but does not match \fCreadme\fR.
 .PP
@@ -826,7 +826,7 @@ See also wildcard().
 .PP
 Example: regexptester/regexptester.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQRegExp::wildcard () const"
-Returns TRUE if wildcard mode is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. The default is FALSE.
+Returns true if wildcard mode is enabled; otherwise returns false. The default is false.
 .PP
 See also setWildcard().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqregexpvalidator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqregexpvalidator.3qt
index 4f620be65..d7d33598a 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqregexpvalidator.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqregexpvalidator.3qt
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Below we present some examples of validators. In practice they would normally be
 .br
     rx.setPattern( "read\\\\S?me(\\.(txt|asc|1st))?" );
 .br
-    rx.setCaseSensitive( FALSE );
+    rx.setCaseSensitive( false );
 .br
     v.setRegExp( rx );
 .br
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqregion.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqregion.3qt
index c88f2760b..49fac54e4 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqregion.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqregion.3qt
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ TQRegion \- Clip region for a painter
 .BI "\fBTQRegion\fR ( const TQRect & r, RegionType t = Rectangle )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQRegion\fR ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQRegion\fR ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fBTQRegion\fR ( const TQRegion & r )"
@@ -192,10 +192,10 @@ Create a region based on the rectange \fIr\fR with region type \fIt\fR.
 If the rectangle is invalid a null region will be created.
 .PP
 See also TQRegion::RegionType.
-.SH "TQRegion::TQRegion ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQRegion::TQRegion ( const TQPointArray & a, bool winding = false )"
 Constructs a polygon region from the point array \fIa\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIwinding\fR is TRUE, the polygon region is filled using the winding algorithm, otherwise the default even-odd fill algorithm is used.
+If \fIwinding\fR is true, the polygon region is filled using the winding algorithm, otherwise the default even-odd fill algorithm is used.
 .PP
 This constructor may create complex regions that will slow down painting when used.
 .SH "TQRegion::TQRegion ( const TQRegion & r )"
@@ -211,11 +211,11 @@ Destroys the region.
 .SH "TQRect TQRegion::boundingRect () const"
 Returns the bounding rectangle of this region. An empty region gives a rectangle that is TQRect::isNull().
 .SH "bool TQRegion::contains ( const TQPoint & p ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the region contains the point \fIp\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the region contains the point \fIp\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQRegion::contains ( const TQRect & r ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the region overlaps the rectangle \fIr\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the region overlaps the rectangle \fIr\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQRegion TQRegion::eor ( const TQRegion & r ) const"
 Returns a region which is the exclusive or (XOR) of this region and \fIr\fR.
 .PP
@@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ Returns a region which is the intersection of this region and \fIr\fR.
 .PP
 The figure shows the intersection of two elliptical regions.
 .SH "bool TQRegion::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the region is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. An empty region is a region that contains no points.
+Returns true if the region is empty; otherwise returns false. An empty region is a region that contains no points.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
@@ -251,37 +251,37 @@ Example:
 .br
         TQRegion r3;
 .br
-        r1.isNull();             // FALSE
+        r1.isNull();             // false
 .br
-        r1.isEmpty();            // FALSE
+        r1.isEmpty();            // false
 .br
-        r3.isNull();             // TRUE
+        r3.isNull();             // true
 .br
-        r3.isEmpty();            // TRUE
+        r3.isEmpty();            // true
 .br
         r3 = r1.intersect( r2 ); // r3 = intersection of r1 and r2
 .br
-        r3.isNull();             // FALSE
+        r3.isNull();             // false
 .br
-        r3.isEmpty();            // TRUE
+        r3.isEmpty();            // true
 .br
         r3 = r1.unite( r2 );     // r3 = union of r1 and r2
 .br
-        r3.isNull();             // FALSE
+        r3.isNull();             // false
 .br
-        r3.isEmpty();            // FALSE
+        r3.isEmpty();            // false
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
 See also isNull().
 .SH "bool TQRegion::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if the region is a null region; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the region is a null region; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 A null region is a region that has not been initialized. A null region is always empty.
 .PP
 See also isEmpty().
 .SH "bool TQRegion::operator!= ( const TQRegion & r ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the region is different from \fIr\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the region is different from \fIr\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "const TQRegion TQRegion::operator& ( const TQRegion & r ) const"
 Applies the intersect() function to this region and \fIr\fR. \fCr1&r2\fR is equivalent to \fCr1.intersect(r2)\fR
 .PP
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ See also subtract().
 .SH "TQRegion & TQRegion::operator= ( const TQRegion & r )"
 Assigns \fIr\fR to this region and returns a reference to the region.
 .SH "bool TQRegion::operator== ( const TQRegion & r ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the region is equal to \fIr\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the region is equal to \fIr\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "const TQRegion TQRegion::operator^ ( const TQRegion & r ) const"
 Applies the eor() function to this region and \fIr\fR. \fCr1^r2\fR is equivalent to \fCr1.eor(r2)\fR
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqscrollbar.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqscrollbar.3qt
index 57a3d81a7..90a377bff 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqscrollbar.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqscrollbar.3qt
@@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructo
 .SH "TQScrollBar::~TQScrollBar ()"
 Destructor.
 .SH "bool TQScrollBar::draggingSlider () const"
-Returns TRUE if the user has clicked the mouse on the slider and is currently dragging it; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "draggingSlider" property for details.
+Returns true if the user has clicked the mouse on the slider and is currently dragging it; otherwise returns false. See the "draggingSlider" property for details.
 .SH "void TQScrollBar::hideEvent ( TQHideEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This function is called when the scrollbar is hidden.
 .PP
@@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ Returns the pixel position where the scroll bar slider starts.
 .PP
 This is equivalent to sliderRect().y() for vertical scroll bars or sliderRect().x() for horizontal scroll bars.
 .SH "bool TQScrollBar::tracking () const"
-Returns TRUE if scroll bar tracking is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "tracking" property for details.
+Returns true if scroll bar tracking is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "tracking" property for details.
 .SH "int TQScrollBar::value () const"
 Returns the scroll bar's value. See the "value" property for details.
 .SH "void TQScrollBar::valueChanged ( int value )\fC [signal]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqscrollview.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqscrollview.3qt
index 0c4c24fc4..d35c61ebf 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqscrollview.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqscrollview.3qt
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Inherited by TQCanvasView, TQTable, TQGridView, TQIconView, TQListBox, TQListVie
 .BI "bool childIsVisible ( TQWidget * child )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void showChild ( TQWidget * child, bool y = TRUE )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "void showChild ( TQWidget * child, bool y = true )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "enum \fBScrollBarMode\fR { Auto, AlwaysOff, AlwaysOn }"
@@ -114,13 +114,13 @@ Inherited by TQCanvasView, TQTable, TQGridView, TQIconView, TQListBox, TQListVie
 .BI "void \fBupdateContents\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBrepaintContents\fR ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBrepaintContents\fR ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBrepaintContents\fR ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBrepaintContents\fR ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBrepaintContents\fR ( bool erase = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBrepaintContents\fR ( bool erase = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBcontentsToViewport\fR ( int x, int y, int & vx, int & vy ) const"
@@ -381,13 +381,13 @@ Here, the TQScrollView has the same four children: the viewport(), the verticalS
 .PP
 </center>
 .PP
-The final usage of TQScrollView (depicted above) is appropriate when many widgets are on a very large scrolling area that is potentially larger than 4000 pixels in either dimension. In this usage you call resizeContents() to set the size of the area and reimplement drawContents() to paint the contents. You then call enableClipper(TRUE) and add widgets, again by making them children of the viewport(), and adding them with addChild():
+The final usage of TQScrollView (depicted above) is appropriate when many widgets are on a very large scrolling area that is potentially larger than 4000 pixels in either dimension. In this usage you call resizeContents() to set the size of the area and reimplement drawContents() to paint the contents. You then call enableClipper(true) and add widgets, again by making them children of the viewport(), and adding them with addChild():
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
         TQScrollView* sv = new TQScrollView(...);
 .br
-        sv->enableClipper(TRUE);
+        sv->enableClipper(true);
 .br
         TQLabel* child1 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
 .br
@@ -407,9 +407,9 @@ Here, the TQScrollView has four children: the clipper() (not the viewport() this
 .SH "Details Relevant for All Views"
 Normally you will use the first or third method if you want any child widgets in the view.
 .PP
-Note that the widget you see in the scrolled area is the viewport() widget, not the TQScrollView itself. So to turn mouse tracking on, for example, use viewport()->setMouseTracking(TRUE).
+Note that the widget you see in the scrolled area is the viewport() widget, not the TQScrollView itself. So to turn mouse tracking on, for example, use viewport()->setMouseTracking(true).
 .PP
-To enable drag-and-drop, you would setAcceptDrops(TRUE) on the TQScrollView (because drag-and-drop events propagate to the parent). But to work out the logical position in the view, you would need to map the drop co-ordinate from being relative to the TQScrollView to being relative to the contents; use the function viewportToContents() for this.
+To enable drag-and-drop, you would setAcceptDrops(true) on the TQScrollView (because drag-and-drop events propagate to the parent). But to work out the logical position in the view, you would need to map the drop co-ordinate from being relative to the TQScrollView to being relative to the contents; use the function viewportToContents() for this.
 .PP
 To handle mouse events on the scrolling area, subclass scrollview as you would subclass other widgets, but rather than reimplementing mousePressEvent(), reimplement contentsMousePressEvent() instead. The contents specific event handlers provide translated events in the coordinate system of the scrollview. If you reimplement mousePressEvent(), you'll get called only when part of the TQScrollView is clicked: and the only such part is the "corner" (if you don't set a cornerWidget()) and the frame; everything else is covered up by the viewport, clipper or scroll bars.
 .PP
@@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ Destroys the TQScrollView. Any children added with addChild() will be deleted.
 .SH "void TQScrollView::addChild ( TQWidget * child, int x = 0, int y = 0 )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Inserts the widget, \fIchild\fR, into the scrolled area positioned at (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR). The position defaults to (0, 0). If the child is already in the view, it is just moved.
 .PP
-You may want to call enableClipper(TRUE) if you add a large number of widgets.
+You may want to call enableClipper(true) if you add a large number of widgets.
 .PP
 Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
 .SH "int TQScrollView::bottomMargin () const\fC [protected]\fR"
@@ -502,7 +502,7 @@ Margin 1.0 ensures that (x, y) is in the center of the the visible area.
 .SH "bool TQScrollView::childIsVisible ( TQWidget * child )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIchild\fR is visible. This is equivalent to child->isVisible().
+Returns true if \fIchild\fR is visible. This is equivalent to child->isVisible().
 .SH "int TQScrollView::childX ( TQWidget * child )"
 Returns the X position of the given \fIchild\fR widget. Use this rather than TQWidget::x() for widgets added to the view.
 .PP
@@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ By default, no corner widget is present.
 .PP
 Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQScrollView::dragAutoScroll () const"
-Returns TRUE if autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "dragAutoScroll" property for details.
+Returns true if autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "dragAutoScroll" property for details.
 .SH "void TQScrollView::drawContents ( TQPainter * p, int clipx, int clipy, int clipw, int cliph )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Reimplement this function if you are viewing a drawing area rather than a widget.
 .PP
@@ -643,7 +643,7 @@ The default implementation translates the painter appropriately and calls drawCo
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQListView.
 .SH "void TQScrollView::enableClipper ( bool y )"
-When a large numbers of child widgets are in a scrollview, especially if they are close together, the scrolling performance can suffer greatly. If \fIy\fR is TRUE the scrollview will use an extra widget to group child widgets.
+When a large numbers of child widgets are in a scrollview, especially if they are close together, the scrolling performance can suffer greatly. If \fIy\fR is true the scrollview will use an extra widget to group child widgets.
 .PP
 Note that you may only call enableClipper() prior to adding widgets.
 .PP
@@ -665,7 +665,7 @@ Reimplemented in TQListView.
 .SH "ScrollBarMode TQScrollView::hScrollBarMode () const"
 Returns the mode for the horizontal scroll bar. See the "hScrollBarMode" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQScrollView::hasStaticBackground () const"
-Returns TRUE if TQScrollView uses a static background; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if TQScrollView uses a static background; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setStaticBackground().
 .SH "TQScrollBar * TQScrollView::horizontalScrollBar () const"
@@ -679,9 +679,9 @@ This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the horizontal slider.
 .SH "void TQScrollView::horizontalSliderReleased ()\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted whenever the user releases the horizontal slider.
 .SH "bool TQScrollView::isHorizontalSliderPressed ()"
-Returns TRUE if horizontal slider is pressed by user; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if horizontal slider is pressed by user; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQScrollView::isVerticalSliderPressed ()"
-Returns TRUE if vertical slider is pressed by user; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if vertical slider is pressed by user; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int TQScrollView::leftMargin () const\fC [protected]\fR"
 Returns the left margin.
 .PP
@@ -690,18 +690,18 @@ See also setMargins().
 Repositions the \fIchild\fR widget to (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR). This function is the same as addChild().
 .SH "void TQScrollView::removeChild ( TQWidget * child )"
 Removes the \fIchild\fR widget from the scrolled area. Note that this happens automatically if the \fIchild\fR is deleted.
-.SH "void TQScrollView::repaintContents ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = TRUE )"
-Calls repaint() on a rectangle defined by \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIw\fR, \fIh\fR, translated appropriately. If the rectangle is not visible, nothing is repainted. If \fIerase\fR is TRUE the background is cleared using the background color.
+.SH "void TQScrollView::repaintContents ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = true )"
+Calls repaint() on a rectangle defined by \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIw\fR, \fIh\fR, translated appropriately. If the rectangle is not visible, nothing is repainted. If \fIerase\fR is true the background is cleared using the background color.
 .PP
 See also updateContents().
-.SH "void TQScrollView::repaintContents ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = TRUE )"
+.SH "void TQScrollView::repaintContents ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = true )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Repaints the contents of rectangle \fIr\fR. If \fIerase\fR is TRUE the background is cleared using the background color.
-.SH "void TQScrollView::repaintContents ( bool erase = TRUE )"
+Repaints the contents of rectangle \fIr\fR. If \fIerase\fR is true the background is cleared using the background color.
+.SH "void TQScrollView::repaintContents ( bool erase = true )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Repaints the contents. If \fIerase\fR is TRUE the background is cleared using the background color.
+Repaints the contents. If \fIerase\fR is true the background is cleared using the background color.
 .SH "void TQScrollView::resizeContents ( int w, int h )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets the size of the contents area to \fIw\fR pixels wide and \fIh\fR pixels high and updates the viewport accordingly.
 .SH "ResizePolicy TQScrollView::resizePolicy () const"
@@ -755,7 +755,7 @@ See also frameChanged().
 .SH "void TQScrollView::setResizePolicy ( ResizePolicy )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the resize policy. See the "resizePolicy" property for details.
 .SH "void TQScrollView::setStaticBackground ( bool y )"
-Sets the scrollview to have a static background if \fIy\fR is TRUE, or a scrolling background if \fIy\fR is FALSE. By default, the background is scrolling.
+Sets the scrollview to have a static background if \fIy\fR is true, or a scrolling background if \fIy\fR is false. By default, the background is scrolling.
 .PP
 Be aware that this mode is quite slow, as a full repaint of the visible area has to be triggered on every contents move.
 .PP
@@ -768,7 +768,7 @@ The default implementation simply gives all the space to \fIvbar\fR. The new geo
 See also setHBarGeometry().
 .SH "void TQScrollView::setVScrollBarMode ( ScrollBarMode )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the mode for the vertical scroll bar. See the "vScrollBarMode" property for details.
-.SH "void TQScrollView::showChild ( TQWidget * child, bool y = TRUE )"
+.SH "void TQScrollView::showChild ( TQWidget * child, bool y = true )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 Sets the visibility of \fIchild\fR. Equivalent to TQWidget::show() or TQWidget::hide().
@@ -849,7 +849,7 @@ Get this property's value with contentsY().
 .SH "bool dragAutoScroll"
 This property holds whether autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled.
 .PP
-If this property is set to TRUE (the default), the TQScrollView automatically scrolls the contents in drag move events if the user moves the cursor close to a border of the view. Of course this works only if the viewport accepts drops. Specifying FALSE disables this autoscroll feature.
+If this property is set to true (the default), the TQScrollView automatically scrolls the contents in drag move events if the user moves the cursor close to a border of the view. Of course this works only if the viewport accepts drops. Specifying false disables this autoscroll feature.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR Enabling this property might not be enough to effectively turn on autoscrolling. If you put a custom widget in the TQScrollView, you might need to call TQDragEvent::ignore() on the event in the dragEnterEvent() and dragMoveEvent() reimplementations.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsemaphore.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsemaphore.3qt
index 59e9261aa..775d1c61a 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsemaphore.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsemaphore.3qt
@@ -80,8 +80,8 @@ Release \fIn\fR accesses to the semaphore.
 Returns the total number of accesses to the semaphore.
 .SH "bool TQSemaphore::tryAccess ( int n )"
 Try to get access to the semaphore. If available() < \fIn\fR, this
-function will return FALSE immediately. If available() >= \fIn\fR,
-this function will take \fIn\fR accesses and return TRUE. This
+function will return false immediately. If available() >= \fIn\fR,
+this function will take \fIn\fR accesses and return true. This
 function does \fInot\fR block.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqserversocket.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqserversocket.3qt
index 24c3d907f..e7b3e4279 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqserversocket.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqserversocket.3qt
@@ -90,15 +90,15 @@ This causes any backlogged connections (connections that have reached the host,
 .PP
 Existing connections continue to exist; this only affects the acceptance of new connections.
 .SH "TQHostAddress TQServerSocket::address () const"
-Returns the address on which this object listens, or 0.0.0.0 if this object listens on more than one address. ok() must be TRUE before calling this function.
+Returns the address on which this object listens, or 0.0.0.0 if this object listens on more than one address. ok() must be true before calling this function.
 .PP
 See also port() and TQSocketDevice::address().
 .SH "void TQServerSocket::newConnection ( int socket )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 This pure virtual function is responsible for setting up a new incoming connection. \fIsocket\fR is the fd (file descriptor) for the newly accepted connection.
 .SH "bool TQServerSocket::ok () const"
-Returns TRUE if the construction succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the construction succeeded; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQ_UINT16 TQServerSocket::port () const"
-Returns the port number on which this server socket listens. This is always non-zero; if you specify 0 in the constructor, TQServerSocket will pick a non-zero port itself. ok() must be TRUE before calling this function.
+Returns the port number on which this server socket listens. This is always non-zero; if you specify 0 in the constructor, TQServerSocket will pick a non-zero port itself. ok() must be true before calling this function.
 .PP
 See also address() and TQSocketDevice::port().
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsessionmanager.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsessionmanager.3qt
index 070972691..89db74cae 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsessionmanager.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsessionmanager.3qt
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ This is similar to allowsInteraction(), but also tells the session manager that
 .PP
 See also allowsInteraction(), release(), and cancel().
 .SH "bool TQSessionManager::allowsInteraction ()"
-Asks the session manager for permission to interact with the user. Returns TRUE if interaction is permitted; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Asks the session manager for permission to interact with the user. Returns true if interaction is permitted; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The rationale behind this mechanism is to make it possible to synchronize user interaction during a shutdown. Advanced session managers may ask all applications simultaneously to commit their data, resulting in a much faster shutdown.
 .PP
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ See also setDiscardCommand(), restartCommand(), and setRestartCommand().
 .SH "void * TQSessionManager::handle () const"
 X11 only: returns a handle to the current \fCSmcConnection\fR.
 .SH "bool TQSessionManager::isPhase2 () const"
-Returns TRUE if the session manager is currently performing a second session management phase; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the session manager is currently performing a second session management phase; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also requestPhase2().
 .SH "void TQSessionManager::release ()"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsettings.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsettings.3qt
index da46c8e22..5379432d0 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsettings.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsettings.3qt
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ TQSettings \- Persistent platform-independent application settings
 .BI "double \fBreadDoubleEntry\fR ( const TQString & key, double def = 0, bool * ok = 0 ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "bool \fBreadBoolEntry\fR ( const TQString & key, bool def = FALSE, bool * ok = 0 ) const"
+.BI "bool \fBreadBoolEntry\fR ( const TQString & key, bool def = false, bool * ok = 0 ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "bool \fBremoveEntry\fR ( const TQString & key )"
@@ -384,7 +384,7 @@ HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/MyApplication
 .br
   settings.insertSearchPath( TQSettings::Windows, "/MyCompany" );
 .br
-  settings.writeEntry( "/MyApplication/Tip of the day", TRUE );
+  settings.writeEntry( "/MyApplication/Tip of the day", true );
 .br
 .fi
 The code above will write the subkey "Tip of the day" into the \fIfirst\fR of the registry folders listed below that is found and for which the user has write permission. <ol type=1>
@@ -435,20 +435,20 @@ Settings under Unix are stored in files whose names are based on the first subke
 See also removeSearchPath().
 .PP
 Example: chart/chartform.cpp.
-.SH "bool TQSettings::readBoolEntry ( const TQString & key, bool def = FALSE, bool * ok = 0 ) const"
-Reads the entry specified by \fIkey\fR, and returns a bool, or the default value, \fIdef\fR, if the entry couldn't be read. If \fIok\fR is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, FALSE otherwise.
+.SH "bool TQSettings::readBoolEntry ( const TQString & key, bool def = false, bool * ok = 0 ) const"
+Reads the entry specified by \fIkey\fR, and returns a bool, or the default value, \fIdef\fR, if the entry couldn't be read. If \fIok\fR is non-null, *ok is set to true if the key was read, false otherwise.
 .PP
 See also readEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), writeEntry(), and removeEntry().
 .SH "double TQSettings::readDoubleEntry ( const TQString & key, double def = 0, bool * ok = 0 ) const"
-Reads the entry specified by \fIkey\fR, and returns a double, or the default value, \fIdef\fR, if the entry couldn't be read. If \fIok\fR is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, FALSE otherwise.
+Reads the entry specified by \fIkey\fR, and returns a double, or the default value, \fIdef\fR, if the entry couldn't be read. If \fIok\fR is non-null, *ok is set to true if the key was read, false otherwise.
 .PP
 See also readEntry(), readNumEntry(), readBoolEntry(), writeEntry(), and removeEntry().
 .SH "TQString TQSettings::readEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQString & def = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0 ) const"
-Reads the entry specified by \fIkey\fR, and returns a TQString, or the default value, \fIdef\fR, if the entry couldn't be read. If \fIok\fR is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, FALSE otherwise.
+Reads the entry specified by \fIkey\fR, and returns a TQString, or the default value, \fIdef\fR, if the entry couldn't be read. If \fIok\fR is non-null, *ok is set to true if the key was read, false otherwise.
 .PP
 See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), writeEntry(), and removeEntry().
 .SH "TQStringList TQSettings::readListEntry ( const TQString & key, bool * ok = 0 ) const"
-Reads the entry specified by \fIkey\fR as a string. If \fIok\fR is not 0, \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE if the key was read, otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE.
+Reads the entry specified by \fIkey\fR as a string. If \fIok\fR is not 0, \fI*ok\fR is set to true if the key was read, otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to false.
 .PP
 Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a copy, e.g.
 .PP
@@ -474,7 +474,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-Reads the entry specified by \fIkey\fR as a string. The \fIseparator\fR is used to create a TQStringList by calling TQStringList::split(\fIseparator\fR, entry). If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE if the key was read, otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE.
+Reads the entry specified by \fIkey\fR as a string. The \fIseparator\fR is used to create a TQStringList by calling TQStringList::split(\fIseparator\fR, entry). If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to true if the key was read, otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to false.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR As the documentation states, TQStringList::split() will omit empty strings from the list. Because of this, it is impossible to retrieve identical list data with this function. We recommend using the readListEntry() and writeEntry() overloads that do not take a \fIseparator\fR argument.
 .PP
@@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a copy,
 .PP
 See also readEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), writeEntry(), removeEntry(), and TQStringList::split().
 .SH "int TQSettings::readNumEntry ( const TQString & key, int def = 0, bool * ok = 0 ) const"
-Reads the entry specified by \fIkey\fR, and returns an integer, or the default value, \fIdef\fR, if the entry couldn't be read. If \fIok\fR is non-null, *ok is set to TRUE if the key was read, FALSE otherwise.
+Reads the entry specified by \fIkey\fR, and returns an integer, or the default value, \fIdef\fR, if the entry couldn't be read. If \fIok\fR is non-null, *ok is set to true if the key was read, false otherwise.
 .PP
 See also readEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), writeEntry(), and removeEntry().
 .SH "bool TQSettings::removeEntry ( const TQString & key )"
@@ -576,7 +576,7 @@ See also entryList().
 .SH "bool TQSettings::writeEntry ( const TQString & key, bool value )"
 Writes the boolean entry \fIvalue\fR into key \fIkey\fR. The \fIkey\fR is created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by \fIvalue\fR.
 .PP
-If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is returned; otherwise TRUE is returned.
+If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and false is returned; otherwise true is returned.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR On certain platforms, keys are required to contain at least two components (e.g., "/foo/bar"). This limitation does not apply to TQt 4.
 .PP
@@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Writes the double entry \fIvalue\fR into key \fIkey\fR. The \fIkey\fR is created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by \fIvalue\fR.
 .PP
-If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is returned; otherwise TRUE is returned.
+If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and false is returned; otherwise true is returned.
 .PP
 See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), and removeEntry().
 .SH "bool TQSettings::writeEntry ( const TQString & key, int value )"
@@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Writes the integer entry \fIvalue\fR into key \fIkey\fR. The \fIkey\fR is created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by \fIvalue\fR.
 .PP
-If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is returned; otherwise TRUE is returned.
+If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and false is returned; otherwise true is returned.
 .PP
 See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), and removeEntry().
 .SH "bool TQSettings::writeEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQString & value )"
@@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Writes the string entry \fIvalue\fR into key \fIkey\fR. The \fIkey\fR is created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by \fIvalue\fR. If \fIvalue\fR is an empty string or a null string the key's value will be an empty string.
 .PP
-If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is returned; otherwise TRUE is returned.
+If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and false is returned; otherwise true is returned.
 .PP
 See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), and removeEntry().
 .SH "bool TQSettings::writeEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQStringList & value )"
@@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Writes the string list entry \fIvalue\fR into key \fIkey\fR. The \fIkey\fR is created if it doesn't exist. Any previous value is overwritten by \fIvalue\fR.
 .PP
-If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is returned; otherwise returns TRUE.
+If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and false is returned; otherwise returns true.
 .PP
 See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), and removeEntry().
 .SH "bool TQSettings::writeEntry ( const TQString & key, const TQStringList & value, const TQChar & separator )"
@@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ Writes the string list entry \fIvalue\fR into key \fIkey\fR. The \fIkey\fR is cr
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR The list should not contain empty or null strings, as readListEntry() will use TQStringList::split() to recreate the list. As the documentation states, TQStringList::split() will omit empty strings from the list. Because of this, it is impossible to retrieve identical list data that is stored with this function. We recommend using the writeEntry() and readListEntry() overloads that do not take a \fIseparator\fR argument.
 .PP
-If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and FALSE is returned; otherwise returns TRUE.
+If an error occurs the settings are left unchanged and false is returned; otherwise returns true.
 .PP
 See also readListEntry(), readNumEntry(), readDoubleEntry(), readBoolEntry(), removeEntry(), and TQStringList::join().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsgistyle.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsgistyle.3qt
index 127b70cb4..29a24a149 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsgistyle.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsgistyle.3qt
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Inherits TQMotifStyle.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQSGIStyle\fR ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQSGIStyle\fR ( bool useHighlightCols = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual \fB~TQSGIStyle\fR ()"
@@ -29,10 +29,10 @@ This class implements the SGI look and feel. It resembles the SGI/Irix Motif GUI
 .PP
 See also Widget Appearance and Style.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQSGIStyle::TQSGIStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQSGIStyle::TQSGIStyle ( bool useHighlightCols = false )"
 Constructs a TQSGIStyle.
 .PP
-If \fIuseHighlightCols\fR is FALSE (default value), the style will polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the text color.
+If \fIuseHighlightCols\fR is false (default value), the style will polish the application's color palette to emulate the Motif way of highlighting, which is a simple inversion between the base and the text color.
 .PP
 See also TQMotifStyle::useHighlightColors().
 .SH "TQSGIStyle::~TQSGIStyle ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsimplerichtext.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsimplerichtext.3qt
index c1f02b62f..308c66354 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsimplerichtext.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsimplerichtext.3qt
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ TQSimpleRichText \- Small displayable piece of rich text
 .BI "\fBTQSimpleRichText\fR ( const TQString & text, const TQFont & fnt, const TQString & context = TQString::null, const TQStyleSheet * sheet = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQSimpleRichText\fR ( const TQString & text, const TQFont & fnt, const TQString & context, const TQStyleSheet * sheet, const TQMimeSourceFactory * factory, int pageBreak = -1, const TQColor & linkColor = TQt::blue, bool linkUnderline = TRUE )"
+.BI "\fBTQSimpleRichText\fR ( const TQString & text, const TQFont & fnt, const TQString & context, const TQStyleSheet * sheet, const TQMimeSourceFactory * factory, int pageBreak = -1, const TQColor & linkColor = TQt::blue, bool linkUnderline = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fB~TQSimpleRichText\fR ()"
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ The font is used as a basis for the text rendering. When using rich text renderi
 \fIcontext\fR is the optional context of the rich text object. This becomes important if \fItext\fR contains relative references, for example within image tags. TQSimpleRichText always uses the default mime source factory (see TQMimeSourceFactory::defaultFactory()) to resolve those references. The context will then be used to calculate the absolute path. See TQMimeSourceFactory::makeAbsolute() for details.
 .PP
 The \fIsheet\fR is an optional style sheet. If it is 0, the default style sheet will be used (see TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet()).
-.SH "TQSimpleRichText::TQSimpleRichText ( const TQString & text, const TQFont & fnt, const TQString & context, const TQStyleSheet * sheet, const TQMimeSourceFactory * factory, int pageBreak = -1, const TQColor & linkColor = TQt::blue, bool linkUnderline = TRUE )"
+.SH "TQSimpleRichText::TQSimpleRichText ( const TQString & text, const TQFont & fnt, const TQString & context, const TQStyleSheet * sheet, const TQMimeSourceFactory * factory, int pageBreak = -1, const TQColor & linkColor = TQt::blue, bool linkUnderline = true )"
 Constructs a TQSimpleRichText from the rich text string \fItext\fR and the font \fIfnt\fR.
 .PP
 This is a slightly more complex constructor for TQSimpleRichText that takes an additional mime source factory \fIfactory\fR, a page break parameter \fIpageBreak\fR and a bool \fIlinkUnderline\fR. \fIlinkColor\fR is only provided for compatibility, but has no effect, as TQColorGroup's TQColorGroup::link() color is used now.
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ See also setWidth().
 Examples:
 .)l action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, and mdi/application.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQSimpleRichText::inText ( const TQPoint & pos ) const"
-Returns TRUE if \fIpos\fR is within a text line of the rich text object; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIpos\fR is within a text line of the rich text object; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "void TQSimpleRichText::setDefaultFont ( const TQFont & f )"
 Sets the default font for the rich text object to \fIf\fR
 .SH "void TQSimpleRichText::setWidth ( TQPainter * p, int w )"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsize.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsize.3qt
index 0620dd066..deaf73399 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsize.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsize.3qt
@@ -169,11 +169,11 @@ See also width().
 Examples:
 .)l movies/main.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, and qfd/qfd.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQSize::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the width is less than or equal to 0, or the height is less than or equal to 0; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the width is less than or equal to 0, or the height is less than or equal to 0; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQSize::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if the width is 0 and the height is 0; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the width is 0 and the height is 0; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQSize::isValid () const"
-Returns TRUE if the width is equal to or greater than 0 and the height is equal to or greater than 0; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the width is equal to or greater than 0 and the height is equal to or greater than 0; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQSize & TQSize::operator*= ( int c )"
 Multiplies both the width and height by \fIc\fR and returns a reference to the size.
 .SH "TQSize & TQSize::operator*= ( double c )"
@@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ Examples:
 .)l movies/main.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, and qfd/qfd.cpp.
 .SH RELATED FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "bool operator!= ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are different; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are different; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "const TQSize operator* ( const TQSize & s, int c )"
 Multiplies \fIs\fR by \fIc\fR and returns the result.
 .SH "const TQSize operator* ( int c, const TQSize & s )"
@@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ Writes the size \fIsz\fR to the stream \fIs\fR and returns a reference to the st
 .PP
 See also Format of the TQDataStream operators.
 .SH "bool operator== ( const TQSize & s1, const TQSize & s2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR and \fIs2\fR are equal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQDataStream & operator>> ( TQDataStream & s, TQSize & sz )"
 Reads the size from the stream \fIs\fR into size \fIsz\fR and returns a reference to the stream.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsizepolicy.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsizepolicy.3qt
index 541edca7a..07a9c4b28 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsizepolicy.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsizepolicy.3qt
@@ -23,10 +23,10 @@ TQSizePolicy \- Layout attribute describing horizontal and vertical resizing pol
 .BI "\fBTQSizePolicy\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQSizePolicy\fR ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQSizePolicy\fR ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, bool hfw = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQSizePolicy\fR ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, uchar horStretch, uchar verStretch, bool hfw = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQSizePolicy\fR ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, uchar horStretch, uchar verStretch, bool hfw = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "SizeType \fBhorData\fR () const"
@@ -127,18 +127,18 @@ The per-dimension sizing types used when constructing a TQSizePolicy are:
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ()"
 Constructs a minimally initialized TQSizePolicy.
-.SH "TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, bool hfw = false )"
 This is the constructor normally used to return a value in the overridden TQWidget::sizePolicy() function of a TQWidget subclass.
 .PP
 It constructs a TQSizePolicy with independent horizontal and vertical sizing types, \fIhor\fR and \fIver\fR respectively. These sizing types affect how the widget is treated by the layout engine.
 .PP
-If \fIhfw\fR is TRUE, the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the width of the widget (for example, a TQLabel with line wrapping).
+If \fIhfw\fR is true, the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the width of the widget (for example, a TQLabel with line wrapping).
 .PP
 See also horData(), verData(), and hasHeightForWidth().
-.SH "TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, uchar horStretch, uchar verStretch, bool hfw = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQSizePolicy::TQSizePolicy ( SizeType hor, SizeType ver, uchar horStretch, uchar verStretch, bool hfw = false )"
 Constructs a TQSizePolicy with independent horizontal and vertical sizing types \fIhor\fR and \fIver\fR, and stretch factors \fIhorStretch\fR and \fIverStretch\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIhfw\fR is TRUE, the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the width of the widget.
+If \fIhfw\fR is true, the preferred height of the widget is dependent on the width of the widget.
 .PP
 See also horStretch() and verStretch().
 .SH "ExpandData TQSizePolicy::expanding () const"
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Returns whether this layout can make use of more space than sizeHint(). A value
 .PP
 See also mayShrinkHorizontally(), mayGrowHorizontally(), mayShrinkVertically(), and mayGrowVertically().
 .SH "bool TQSizePolicy::hasHeightForWidth () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget's preferred height depends on its width; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the widget's preferred height depends on its width; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setHeightForWidth().
 .SH "SizeType TQSizePolicy::horData () const"
@@ -158,27 +158,27 @@ Returns the horizontal stretch factor of the size policy.
 .PP
 See also setHorStretch() and verStretch().
 .SH "bool TQSizePolicy::mayGrowHorizontally () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be wider than its sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the widget can sensibly be wider than its sizeHint(); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also mayGrowVertically() and mayShrinkHorizontally().
 .SH "bool TQSizePolicy::mayGrowVertically () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be taller than its sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the widget can sensibly be taller than its sizeHint(); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also mayGrowHorizontally() and mayShrinkVertically().
 .SH "bool TQSizePolicy::mayShrinkHorizontally () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be narrower than its sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the widget can sensibly be narrower than its sizeHint(); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also mayShrinkVertically() and mayGrowHorizontally().
 .SH "bool TQSizePolicy::mayShrinkVertically () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget can sensibly be shorter than its sizeHint(); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the widget can sensibly be shorter than its sizeHint(); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also mayShrinkHorizontally() and mayGrowVertically().
 .SH "bool TQSizePolicy::operator!= ( const TQSizePolicy & s ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this policy is different from \fIs\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this policy is different from \fIs\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also operator==().
 .SH "bool TQSizePolicy::operator== ( const TQSizePolicy & s ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this policy is equal to \fIs\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this policy is equal to \fIs\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also operator!=().
 .SH "void TQSizePolicy::setHeightForWidth ( bool b )"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqslider.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqslider.3qt
index 13a2afd95..c7f3e23af 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqslider.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqslider.3qt
@@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ Returns the interval between tickmarks. See the "tickInterval" property for deta
 .SH "TickSetting TQSlider::tickmarks () const"
 Returns the tickmark settings for this slider. See the "tickmarks" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQSlider::tracking () const"
-Returns TRUE if slider tracking is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "tracking" property for details.
+Returns true if slider tracking is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "tracking" property for details.
 .SH "int TQSlider::value () const"
 Returns the current slider value. See the "value" property for details.
 .SH "void TQSlider::valueChange ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsocket.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsocket.3qt
index 9e440fb79..a383e8b92 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsocket.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsocket.3qt
@@ -213,11 +213,11 @@ Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
 .SH "bool TQSocket::at ( Offset index )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Moves the read index forward to \fIindex\fR and returns TRUE if the operation was successful; otherwise returns FALSE. Moving the index forward means skipping incoming data.
+Moves the read index forward to \fIindex\fR and returns true if the operation was successful; otherwise returns false. Moving the index forward means skipping incoming data.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
 .SH "bool TQSocket::atEnd () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if there is no more data to read; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if there is no more data to read; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQIODevice.
 .SH "TQ_ULONG TQSocket::bytesAvailable () const"
@@ -239,9 +239,9 @@ The bytesToWrite() function is often used in the same context; it indicates how
 .PP
 See also writeBlock() and bytesToWrite().
 .SH "bool TQSocket::canReadLine () const"
-Returns TRUE if it's possible to read an entire line of text from this socket at this time; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if it's possible to read an entire line of text from this socket at this time; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-Note that if the peer closes the connection unexpectedly, this function returns FALSE. This means that loops such as this won't work:
+Note that if the peer closes the connection unexpectedly, this function returns false. This means that loops such as this won't work:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ Returns the size of the read buffer.
 .PP
 See also setReadBufferSize().
 .SH "TQString TQSocket::readLine ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns a line of text including a terminating newline character (\\n). Returns "" if canReadLine() returns FALSE.
+Returns a line of text including a terminating newline character (\\n). Returns "" if canReadLine() returns false.
 .PP
 See also canReadLine().
 .PP
@@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ If \fImsecs\fR is -1 the call will block indefinitely.
 .PP
 Returns the number of bytes available.
 .PP
-If \fItimeout\fR is non-null and no error occurred (i.e. it does not return -1): this function sets \fI*timeout\fR to TRUE, if the reason for returning was that the timeout was reached; otherwise it sets \fI*timeout\fR to FALSE. This is useful to find out if the peer closed the connection.
+If \fItimeout\fR is non-null and no error occurred (i.e. it does not return -1): this function sets \fI*timeout\fR to true, if the reason for returning was that the timeout was reached; otherwise it sets \fI*timeout\fR to false. This is useful to find out if the peer closed the connection.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR This is a blocking call and should be avoided in event driven applications.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsocketdevice.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsocketdevice.3qt
index 99779fb98..820fe08f0 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsocketdevice.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsocketdevice.3qt
@@ -214,19 +214,19 @@ See also bind() and listen().
 .SH "TQHostAddress TQSocketDevice::address () const"
 Returns the address of this socket device. This may be 0.0.0.0 for a while, but is set to something sensible as soon as a sensible value is available.
 .SH "bool TQSocketDevice::addressReusable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the address of this socket can be used by other sockets at the same time, and FALSE if this socket claims exclusive ownership.
+Returns true if the address of this socket can be used by other sockets at the same time, and false if this socket claims exclusive ownership.
 .PP
 See also setAddressReusable().
 .SH "bool TQSocketDevice::bind ( const TQHostAddress & address, TQ_UINT16 port )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Assigns a name to an unnamed socket. The name is the host address \fIaddress\fR and the port number \fIport\fR. If the operation succeeds, bind() returns TRUE; otherwise it returns FALSE without changing what port() and address() return.
+Assigns a name to an unnamed socket. The name is the host address \fIaddress\fR and the port number \fIport\fR. If the operation succeeds, bind() returns true; otherwise it returns false without changing what port() and address() return.
 .PP
 bind() is used by servers for setting up incoming connections. Call bind() before listen().
 .SH "bool TQSocketDevice::blocking () const"
-Returns TRUE if the socket is valid and in blocking mode; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the socket is valid and in blocking mode; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Note that this function does not set error().
 .PP
-\fBWarning:\fR On Windows, this function always returns TRUE since the ioctlsocket() function is broken.
+\fBWarning:\fR On Windows, this function always returns true since the ioctlsocket() function is broken.
 .PP
 See also setBlocking() and isValid().
 .SH "TQ_LONG TQSocketDevice::bytesAvailable () const"
@@ -234,17 +234,17 @@ Returns the number of bytes available for reading, or -1 if an error occurred.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR On Microsoft Windows, we use the ioctlsocket() function to determine the number of bytes queued on the socket. According to Microsoft (KB Q125486), ioctlsocket() sometimes returns an incorrect number. The only safe way to determine the amount of data on the socket is to read it using readBlock(). TQSocket has workarounds to deal with this problem.
 .SH "bool TQSocketDevice::connect ( const TQHostAddress & addr, TQ_UINT16 port )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Connects to the IP address and port specified by \fIaddr\fR and \fIport\fR. Returns TRUE if it establishes a connection; otherwise returns FALSE. If it returns FALSE, error() explains why.
+Connects to the IP address and port specified by \fIaddr\fR and \fIport\fR. Returns true if it establishes a connection; otherwise returns false. If it returns false, error() explains why.
 .PP
 Note that error() commonly returns NoError for non-blocking sockets; this just means that you can call connect() again in a little while and it'll probably succeed.
 .SH "Error TQSocketDevice::error () const"
 Returns the first error seen.
 .SH "bool TQSocketDevice::isValid () const"
-Returns TRUE if this is a valid socket; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this is a valid socket; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also socket().
 .SH "bool TQSocketDevice::listen ( int backlog )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Specifies how many pending connections a server socket can have. Returns TRUE if the operation was successful; otherwise returns FALSE. A \fIbacklog\fR value of 50 is quite common.
+Specifies how many pending connections a server socket can have. Returns true if the operation was successful; otherwise returns false. A \fIbacklog\fR value of 50 is quite common.
 .PP
 The listen() call only applies to sockets where type() is Stream, i.e. not to Datagram sockets. listen() must not be called before bind() or after accept().
 .PP
@@ -280,13 +280,13 @@ Returns the size of the operating system send buffer.
 .PP
 See also setSendBufferSize().
 .SH "void TQSocketDevice::setAddressReusable ( bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sets the address of this socket to be usable by other sockets too if \fIenable\fR is TRUE, and to be used exclusively by this socket if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Sets the address of this socket to be usable by other sockets too if \fIenable\fR is true, and to be used exclusively by this socket if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 When a socket is reusable, other sockets can use the same port number (and IP address), which is generally useful. Of course other sockets cannot use the same (address,port,peer-address,peer-port) 4-tuple as this socket, so there is no risk of confusing the two TCP connections.
 .PP
 See also addressReusable().
 .SH "void TQSocketDevice::setBlocking ( bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Makes the socket blocking if \fIenable\fR is TRUE or nonblocking if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Makes the socket blocking if \fIenable\fR is true or nonblocking if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 Sockets are blocking by default, but we recommend using nonblocking socket operations, especially for GUI programs that need to be responsive.
 .PP
@@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ Wait up to \fImsecs\fR milliseconds for more data to be available. If \fImsecs\f
 .PP
 Returns the number of bytes available for reading, or -1 if an error occurred.
 .PP
-If \fItimeout\fR is non-null and no error occurred (i.e. it does not return -1): this function sets \fI*timeout\fR to TRUE, if the reason for returning was that the timeout was reached; otherwise it sets \fI*timeout\fR to FALSE. This is useful to find out if the peer closed the connection.
+If \fItimeout\fR is non-null and no error occurred (i.e. it does not return -1): this function sets \fI*timeout\fR to true, if the reason for returning was that the timeout was reached; otherwise it sets \fI*timeout\fR to false. This is useful to find out if the peer closed the connection.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR This is a blocking call and should be avoided in event driven applications.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsocketnotifier.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsocketnotifier.3qt
index d351b028d..11b3de4ef 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsocketnotifier.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsocketnotifier.3qt
@@ -109,11 +109,11 @@ The \fIsocket\fR argument is the socket identifier.
 .PP
 See also type() and socket().
 .SH "bool TQSocketNotifier::isEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the notifier is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the notifier is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setEnabled().
 .SH "void TQSocketNotifier::setEnabled ( bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Enables the notifier if \fIenable\fR is TRUE or disables it if \fIenable\fR is FALSE.
+Enables the notifier if \fIenable\fR is true or disables it if \fIenable\fR is false.
 .PP
 The notifier is enabled by default.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsound.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsound.3qt
index 55de15e95..f1feab396 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsound.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsound.3qt
@@ -103,17 +103,17 @@ Destroys the sound object. If the sound is not finished playing stop() is called
 .PP
 See also stop() and isFinished().
 .SH "bool TQSound::available ()\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if sound support is available; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if sound support is available; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQString TQSound::fileName () const"
 Returns the filename associated with the sound.
 .SH "bool TQSound::isAvailable ()\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if sound facilities exist on the platform; otherwise returns FALSE. An application may choose either to notify the user if sound is crucial to the application or to operate silently without bothering the user.
+Returns true if sound facilities exist on the platform; otherwise returns false. An application may choose either to notify the user if sound is crucial to the application or to operate silently without bothering the user.
 .PP
 If no sound is available, all TQSound operations work silently and quickly.
 .SH "bool TQSound::isFinished () const"
-Returns TRUE if the sound has finished playing; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the sound has finished playing; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-\fBWarning:\fR On Windows this function always returns TRUE for unlooped sounds.
+\fBWarning:\fR On Windows this function always returns true for unlooped sounds.
 .SH "int TQSound::loops () const"
 Returns the number of times the sound will play.
 .SH "int TQSound::loopsRemaining () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqspaceritem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqspaceritem.3qt
index 1f2afb569..7d931a9ed 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqspaceritem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqspaceritem.3qt
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ See also TQSizePolicy::ExpandData.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
 .SH "bool TQSpacerItem::isEmpty () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE because a spacer item never contains widgets.
+Returns true because a spacer item never contains widgets.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
 .SH "TQSize TQSpacerItem::maximumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqspinbox.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqspinbox.3qt
index 139e0d16d..654dfa526 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqspinbox.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqspinbox.3qt
@@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ See also editor().
 .SH "int TQSpinBox::lineStep () const"
 Returns the line step. See the "lineStep" property for details.
 .SH "int TQSpinBox::mapTextToValue ( bool * ok )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to interpret text entered by the user as a value. The text is available as text() and as cleanText(), and this function must parse it if possible. If \fIok\fR is not 0: if it parses the text successfully, \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE.
+This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to interpret text entered by the user as a value. The text is available as text() and as cleanText(), and this function must parse it if possible. If \fIok\fR is not 0: if it parses the text successfully, \fI*ok\fR is set to true; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to false.
 .PP
 Subclasses that need to display spin box values in a non-numeric way need to reimplement this function.
 .PP
@@ -371,11 +371,11 @@ Sets whether it is possible to step the value from the highest value to the lowe
 .SH "TQString TQSpinBox::specialValueText () const"
 Returns the special-value text. See the "specialValueText" property for details.
 .SH "void TQSpinBox::stepDown ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-Decreases the spin box's value one lineStep(), wrapping as necessary if wrapping() is TRUE. This is the same as clicking on the pointing-down button and can be used for keyboard accelerators, for example.
+Decreases the spin box's value one lineStep(), wrapping as necessary if wrapping() is true. This is the same as clicking on the pointing-down button and can be used for keyboard accelerators, for example.
 .PP
 See also stepUp(), subtractLine(), lineStep, setSteps(), value, and value.
 .SH "void TQSpinBox::stepUp ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-Increases the spin box's value by one lineStep(), wrapping as necessary if wrapping() is TRUE. This is the same as clicking on the pointing-up button and can be used for keyboard accelerators, for example.
+Increases the spin box's value by one lineStep(), wrapping as necessary if wrapping() is true. This is the same as clicking on the pointing-up button and can be used for keyboard accelerators, for example.
 .PP
 See also stepDown(), addLine(), lineStep, setSteps(), value, and value.
 .SH "TQString TQSpinBox::suffix () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ The \fIvalueText\fR parameter is the same string that is displayed in the edit f
 .PP
 See also value, prefix, suffix, and specialValueText.
 .SH "bool TQSpinBox::wrapping () const"
-Returns TRUE if it is possible to step the value from the highest value to the lowest value and vice versa; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "wrapping" property for details.
+Returns true if it is possible to step the value from the highest value to the lowest value and vice versa; otherwise returns false. See the "wrapping" property for details.
 .SS "Property Documentation"
 .SH "ButtonSymbols buttonSymbols"
 This property holds the current button symbol mode.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsplitter.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsplitter.3qt
index b5b816a85..2606d4ee3 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsplitter.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsplitter.3qt
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ Inherits TQFrame.
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetResizeMode\fR ( TQWidget * w, ResizeMode mode )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBsetOpaqueResize\fR ( bool = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBsetOpaqueResize\fR ( bool = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "bool \fBopaqueResize\fR () const"
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ TQSplitter lays out its children horizontally (side by side); you can use setOri
 .PP
 By default, all widgets can be as large or as small as the user wishes, between the minimumSizeHint() (or minimumSize()) and maximumSize() of the widgets. Use setResizeMode() to specify that a widget should keep its size when the splitter is resized, or set the stretch component of the sizePolicy.
 .PP
-Although TQSplitter normally resizes the children only at the end of a resize operation, if you call setOpaqueResize(TRUE) the widgets are resized as often as possible.
+Although TQSplitter normally resizes the children only at the end of a resize operation, if you call setOpaqueResize(true) the widgets are resized as often as possible.
 .PP
 The initial distribution of size between the widgets is determined by the initial size of each widget. You can also use setSizes() to set the sizes of all the widgets. The function sizes() returns the sizes set by the user.
 .PP
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Tells the splitter that the child widget described by \fIc\fR has been inserted
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQObject.
 .SH "bool TQSplitter::childrenCollapsible () const"
-Returns TRUE if child widgets can be resized down to size 0 by the user; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "childrenCollapsible" property for details.
+Returns true if child widgets can be resized down to size 0 by the user; otherwise returns false. See the "childrenCollapsible" property for details.
 .SH "void TQSplitter::drawSplitter ( TQPainter * p, QCOORD x, QCOORD y, QCOORD w, QCOORD h )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
@@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Example: splitter/splitter.cpp.
 .SH "void TQSplitter::moveToLast ( TQWidget * w )"
 Moves widget \fIw\fR to the rightmost/bottom position.
 .SH "bool TQSplitter::opaqueResize () const"
-Returns TRUE if resizing is opaque; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "opaqueResize" property for details.
+Returns true if resizing is opaque; otherwise returns false. See the "opaqueResize" property for details.
 .SH "Orientation TQSplitter::orientation () const"
 Returns the orientation of the splitter. See the "orientation" property for details.
 .SH "void TQSplitter::refresh ()"
@@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ By default, children are collapsible, meaning that the user can resize them down
 See also childrenCollapsible.
 .SH "void TQSplitter::setHandleWidth ( int )"
 Sets the width of the splitter handle. See the "handleWidth" property for details.
-.SH "void TQSplitter::setOpaqueResize ( bool = TRUE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQSplitter::setOpaqueResize ( bool = true )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets whether resizing is opaque. See the "opaqueResize" property for details.
 .SH "void TQSplitter::setOrientation ( Orientation )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the orientation of the splitter. See the "orientation" property for details.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlcursor.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlcursor.3qt
index 9a243f91c..6dcb1d271 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlcursor.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlcursor.3qt
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Inherited by TQSqlSelectCursor.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQSqlCursor\fR ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, bool autopopulate = TRUE, TQSqlDatabase * db = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQSqlCursor\fR ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, bool autopopulate = true, TQSqlDatabase * db = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fBTQSqlCursor\fR ( const TQSqlCursor & other )"
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Inherited by TQSqlSelectCursor.
 .BI "enum \fBMode\fR { ReadOnly = 0, Insert = 1, Update = 2, Delete = 4, Writable = 7 }"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual TQSqlIndex \fBprimaryIndex\fR ( bool setFromCursor = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "virtual TQSqlIndex \fBprimaryIndex\fR ( bool setFromCursor = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual TQSqlIndex \fBindex\fR ( const TQStringList & fieldNames ) const"
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Inherited by TQSqlSelectCursor.
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetGenerated\fR ( int i, bool generated )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual TQSqlRecord * \fBeditBuffer\fR ( bool copy = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual TQSqlRecord * \fBeditBuffer\fR ( bool copy = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual TQSqlRecord * \fBprimeInsert\fR ()"
@@ -78,13 +78,13 @@ Inherited by TQSqlSelectCursor.
 .BI "virtual TQSqlRecord * \fBprimeDelete\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual int \fBinsert\fR ( bool invalidate = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual int \fBinsert\fR ( bool invalidate = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual int \fBupdate\fR ( bool invalidate = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual int \fBupdate\fR ( bool invalidate = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual int \fBdel\fR ( bool invalidate = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual int \fBdel\fR ( bool invalidate = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetMode\fR ( int mode )"
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Inherited by TQSqlSelectCursor.
 .BI "TQString \fBfilter\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBsetName\fR ( const TQString & name, bool autopopulate = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBsetName\fR ( const TQString & name, bool autopopulate = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQString \fBname\fR () const"
@@ -159,10 +159,10 @@ Inherited by TQSqlSelectCursor.
 .BI "virtual TQVariant \fBcalculateField\fR ( const TQString & name )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual int \fBupdate\fR ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual int \fBupdate\fR ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual int \fBdel\fR ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual int \fBdel\fR ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual TQString \fBtoString\fR ( const TQString & prefix, TQSqlField * field, const TQString & fieldSep ) const"
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ A TQSqlCursor is a database record (see TQSqlRecord) that corresponds to a table
 .PP
 When positioned on a valid record, the browse buffer contains the values of the current record's fields from the database. The edit buffer is separate, and is used for editing existing records and inserting new records.
 .PP
-For browsing data, a cursor must first select() data from the database. After a successful select() the cursor is active (isActive() returns TRUE), but is initially not positioned on a valid record (isValid() returns FALSE). To position the cursor on a valid record, use one of the navigation functions, next(), prev(), first(), last(), or seek(). Once positioned on a valid record, data can be retrieved from the browse buffer using value(). If a navigation function is not successful, it returns FALSE, the cursor will no longer be positioned on a valid record and the values returned by value() are undefined.
+For browsing data, a cursor must first select() data from the database. After a successful select() the cursor is active (isActive() returns true), but is initially not positioned on a valid record (isValid() returns false). To position the cursor on a valid record, use one of the navigation functions, next(), prev(), first(), last(), or seek(). Once positioned on a valid record, data can be retrieved from the browse buffer using value(). If a navigation function is not successful, it returns false, the cursor will no longer be positioned on a valid record and the values returned by value() are undefined.
 .PP
 For example:
 .PP
@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ For example:
             }
 .fi
 .PP
-In the above example, a cursor is created specifying a table or view name in the database. Then, select() is called, which can be optionally parameterised to filter and order the records retrieved. Each record in the cursor is retrieved using next(). When next() returns FALSE, there are no more records to process, and the loop terminates.
+In the above example, a cursor is created specifying a table or view name in the database. Then, select() is called, which can be optionally parameterised to filter and order the records retrieved. Each record in the cursor is retrieved using next(). When next() returns false, there are no more records to process, and the loop terminates.
 .PP
 For editing records (rows of data), a cursor contains a separate edit buffer which is independent of the fields used when browsing. The functions insert(), update() and del() operate on the edit buffer. This allows the cursor to be repositioned to other records while simultaneously maintaining a separate buffer for edits. You can get a pointer to the edit buffer using editBuffer(). The primeInsert(), primeUpdate() and primeDelete() functions also return a pointer to the edit buffer and prepare it for insert, update and delete respectively. Edit operations only affect a single row at a time. Note that update() and del() require that the table or view contain a primaryIndex() to ensure that edit operations affect a unique record within the database.
 .PP
@@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Similarly, when deleting an existing database record, first move to the record y
 .PP
 To insert a new record, call primeInsert() to get the pointer to the edit buffer. Use this pointer to populate the edit buffer with new values and then insert() the record into the database.
 .PP
-After calling insert(), update() or del(), the cursor is no longer positioned on a valid record and can no longer be navigated (isValid() return FALSE). The reason for this is that any changes made to the database will not be visible until select() is called to refresh the cursor. You can change this behavior by passing FALSE to insert(), update() or del() which will prevent the cursor from becoming invalid. The edits will still not be visible when navigating the cursor until select() is called.
+After calling insert(), update() or del(), the cursor is no longer positioned on a valid record and can no longer be navigated (isValid() return false). The reason for this is that any changes made to the database will not be visible until select() is called to refresh the cursor. You can change this behavior by passing false to insert(), update() or del() which will prevent the cursor from becoming invalid. The edits will still not be visible when navigating the cursor until select() is called.
 .PP
 TQSqlCursor contains virtual methods which allow editing behavior to be customized by subclasses. This allows custom cursors to be created that encapsulate the editing behavior of a database table for an entire application. For example, a cursor can be customized to always auto-number primary index fields, or provide fields with suitable default values, when inserting new records. TQSqlCursor generates SQL statements which are sent to the database engine; you can control which fields are included in these statements using setGenerated().
 .PP
@@ -256,10 +256,10 @@ This enum type describes how TQSqlCursor operates on records in the database.
 .TP
 \fCTQSqlCursor::Writable\fR - the cursor can INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE records in the database.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQSqlCursor::TQSqlCursor ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, bool autopopulate = TRUE, TQSqlDatabase * db = 0 )"
+.SH "TQSqlCursor::TQSqlCursor ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, bool autopopulate = true, TQSqlDatabase * db = 0 )"
 Constructs a cursor on database \fIdb\fR using table or view \fIname\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIautopopulate\fR is TRUE (the default), the \fIname\fR of the cursor must correspond to an existing table or view name in the database so that field information can be automatically created. If the table or view does not exist, the cursor will not be functional.
+If \fIautopopulate\fR is true (the default), the \fIname\fR of the cursor must correspond to an existing table or view name in the database so that field information can be automatically created. If the table or view does not exist, the cursor will not be functional.
 .PP
 The cursor is created with an initial mode of TQSqlCursor::Writable (meaning that records can be inserted, updated or deleted using the cursor). If the cursor does not have a unique primary index, update and deletes cannot be performed.
 .PP
@@ -280,25 +280,25 @@ See also setCalculated().
 Examples:
 .)l sql/overview/subclass3/main.cpp and sql/overview/subclass4/main.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQSqlCursor::canDelete () const"
-Returns TRUE if the cursor will perform deletes; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the cursor will perform deletes; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setMode().
 .SH "bool TQSqlCursor::canInsert () const"
-Returns TRUE if the cursor will perform inserts; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the cursor will perform inserts; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setMode().
 .SH "bool TQSqlCursor::canUpdate () const"
-Returns TRUE if the cursor will perform updates; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the cursor will perform updates; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setMode().
 .SH "void TQSqlCursor::clear ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Removes all fields from the cursor. Note that all references to the cursor edit buffer become invalidated.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQSqlRecord.
-.SH "int TQSqlCursor::del ( bool invalidate = TRUE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "int TQSqlCursor::del ( bool invalidate = true )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Deletes a record from the database using the cursor's primary index and the contents of the cursor edit buffer. Returns the number of records which were deleted. For error information, use lastError().
 .PP
-Only records which meet the filter criteria specified by the cursor's primary index are deleted. If the cursor does not contain a primary index, no delete is performed and 0 is returned. If \fIinvalidate\fR is TRUE (the default), the current cursor can no longer be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move to a valid record. For example:
+Only records which meet the filter criteria specified by the cursor's primary index are deleted. If the cursor does not contain a primary index, no delete is performed and 0 is returned. If \fIinvalidate\fR is true (the default), the current cursor can no longer be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move to a valid record. For example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -320,16 +320,16 @@ In the above example, a cursor is created on the 'prices' table and positioned t
 See also primeDelete(), setMode(), and lastError().
 .PP
 Example: sql/overview/delete/main.cpp.
-.SH "int TQSqlCursor::del ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "int TQSqlCursor::del ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = true )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Deletes the current cursor record from the database using the filter \fIfilter\fR. Only records which meet the filter criteria are deleted. Returns the number of records which were deleted. If \fIinvalidate\fR is TRUE (the default), the current cursor can no longer be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move to a valid record. For error information, use lastError().
+Deletes the current cursor record from the database using the filter \fIfilter\fR. Only records which meet the filter criteria are deleted. Returns the number of records which were deleted. If \fIinvalidate\fR is true (the default), the current cursor can no longer be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move to a valid record. For error information, use lastError().
 .PP
 The \fIfilter\fR is an SQL \fCWHERE\fR clause, e.g. \fCid=500\fR.
 .PP
 See also setMode() and lastError().
-.SH "TQSqlRecord * TQSqlCursor::editBuffer ( bool copy = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns the current internal edit buffer. If \fIcopy\fR is TRUE (the default is FALSE), the current cursor field values are first copied into the edit buffer. The edit buffer is valid as long as the cursor remains valid. The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so it must not be deleted or modified.
+.SH "TQSqlRecord * TQSqlCursor::editBuffer ( bool copy = false )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Returns the current internal edit buffer. If \fIcopy\fR is true (the default is false), the current cursor field values are first copied into the edit buffer. The edit buffer is valid as long as the cursor remains valid. The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so it must not be deleted or modified.
 .PP
 See also primeInsert(), primeUpdate(), and primeDelete().
 .SH "TQString TQSqlCursor::filter () const"
@@ -354,12 +354,12 @@ Insert a copy of \fIfieldInfo\fR at position \fIpos\fR. If a field already exist
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l sql/overview/insert/main.cpp and sql/overview/insert2/main.cpp.
-.SH "int TQSqlCursor::insert ( bool invalidate = TRUE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "int TQSqlCursor::insert ( bool invalidate = true )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Inserts the current contents of the cursor's edit record buffer into the database, if the cursor allows inserts. Returns the number of rows affected by the insert. For error information, use lastError().
 .PP
-If \fIinvalidate\fR is TRUE (the default), the cursor will no longer be positioned on a valid record and can no longer be navigated. A new select() call must be made before navigating to a valid record.
+If \fIinvalidate\fR is true (the default), the cursor will no longer be positioned on a valid record and can no longer be navigated. A new select() call must be made before navigating to a valid record.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -380,25 +380,25 @@ In the above example, a cursor is created on the 'prices' table and a pointer to
 .PP
 See also setMode() and lastError().
 .SH "bool TQSqlCursor::isCalculated ( const TQString & name ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the field \fIname\fR exists and is calculated; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the field \fIname\fR exists and is calculated; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setCalculated().
 .SH "bool TQSqlCursor::isNull ( int i ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the field \fIi\fR is NULL or if there is no field at position \fIi\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the field \fIi\fR is NULL or if there is no field at position \fIi\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 This is the same as calling TQSqlRecord::isNull( \fIi\fR )
 .SH "bool TQSqlCursor::isNull ( const TQString & name ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the field called \fIname\fR is NULL or if there is no field called \fIname\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the field called \fIname\fR is NULL or if there is no field called \fIname\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 This is the same as calling TQSqlRecord::isNull( \fIname\fR )
 .SH "bool TQSqlCursor::isReadOnly () const"
-Returns TRUE if the cursor is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE. The default is FALSE. Read-only cursors cannot be edited using insert(), update() or del().
+Returns true if the cursor is read-only; otherwise returns false. The default is false. Read-only cursors cannot be edited using insert(), update() or del().
 .PP
 See also setMode().
 .SH "bool TQSqlCursor::isTrimmed ( const TQString & name ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the field \fIname\fR exists and is trimmed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the field \fIname\fR exists and is trimmed; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 When a trimmed field of type string or cstring is read from the database any trailing (right-most) spaces are removed.
 .PP
@@ -411,10 +411,10 @@ See also setMode().
 Returns the name of the cursor.
 .SH "TQSqlCursor & TQSqlCursor::operator= ( const TQSqlCursor & other )"
 Sets the cursor equal to \fIother\fR.
-.SH "TQSqlIndex TQSqlCursor::primaryIndex ( bool setFromCursor = TRUE ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns the primary index associated with the cursor as defined in the database, or an empty index if there is no primary index. If \fIsetFromCursor\fR is TRUE (the default), the index fields are populated with the corresponding values in the cursor's current record.
+.SH "TQSqlIndex TQSqlCursor::primaryIndex ( bool setFromCursor = true ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Returns the primary index associated with the cursor as defined in the database, or an empty index if there is no primary index. If \fIsetFromCursor\fR is true (the default), the index fields are populated with the corresponding values in the cursor's current record.
 .SH "TQSqlRecord * TQSqlCursor::primeDelete ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
-This function primes the edit buffer's field values for delete and returns the edit buffer. The default implementation copies the field values from the current cursor record into the edit buffer (therefore, this function is equivalent to calling editBuffer( TRUE ) ). The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so it must not be deleted or modified.
+This function primes the edit buffer's field values for delete and returns the edit buffer. The default implementation copies the field values from the current cursor record into the edit buffer (therefore, this function is equivalent to calling editBuffer( true ) ). The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so it must not be deleted or modified.
 .PP
 See also editBuffer() and del().
 .PP
@@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ See also editBuffer() and insert().
 Examples:
 .)l sql/overview/insert/main.cpp, sql/overview/insert2/main.cpp, sql/overview/subclass5/main.cpp, and sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
 .SH "TQSqlRecord * TQSqlCursor::primeUpdate ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
-This function primes the edit buffer's field values for update and returns the edit buffer. The default implementation copies the field values from the current cursor record into the edit buffer (therefore, this function is equivalent to calling editBuffer( TRUE ) ). The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so it must not be deleted or modified.
+This function primes the edit buffer's field values for update and returns the edit buffer. The default implementation copies the field values from the current cursor record into the edit buffer (therefore, this function is equivalent to calling editBuffer( true ) ). The cursor retains ownership of the returned pointer, so it must not be deleted or modified.
 .PP
 See also editBuffer() and update().
 .PP
@@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ Removes the field at \fIpos\fR. If \fIpos\fR does not exist, nothing happens. No
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQSqlRecord.
 .SH "bool TQSqlCursor::select ( const TQString & filter, const TQSqlIndex & sort = TQSqlIndex ( ) )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Selects all fields in the cursor from the database matching the filter criteria \fIfilter\fR. The data is returned in the order specified by the index \fIsort\fR. Returns TRUE if the data was successfully selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Selects all fields in the cursor from the database matching the filter criteria \fIfilter\fR. The data is returned in the order specified by the index \fIsort\fR. Returns true if the data was successfully selected; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The \fIfilter\fR is a string containing a SQL \fCWHERE\fR clause but without the 'WHERE' keyword. The cursor is initially positioned at an invalid row after this function is called. To move to a valid row, use seek(), first(), last(), prev() or next().
 .PP
@@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ Sets the current filter to \fIfilter\fR. Note that no new records are selected.
 .PP
 The filter is a SQL \fCWHERE\fR clause without the keyword 'WHERE', e.g. \fCname='Dave'\fR which will be processed by the DBMS.
 .SH "void TQSqlCursor::setGenerated ( const TQString & name, bool generated )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sets the generated flag for the field \fIname\fR to \fIgenerated\fR. If the field does not exist, nothing happens. Only fields that have \fIgenerated\fR set to TRUE are included in the SQL that is generated by insert(), update() or del().
+Sets the generated flag for the field \fIname\fR to \fIgenerated\fR. If the field does not exist, nothing happens. Only fields that have \fIgenerated\fR set to true are included in the SQL that is generated by insert(), update() or del().
 .PP
 See also isGenerated().
 .PP
@@ -561,8 +561,8 @@ Sets the cursor mode to \fImode\fR. This value can be an OR'ed combination of TQ
 .br
 .br
 .fi
-.SH "void TQSqlCursor::setName ( const TQString & name, bool autopopulate = TRUE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sets the name of the cursor to \fIname\fR. If \fIautopopulate\fR is TRUE (the default), the \fIname\fR must correspond to a valid table or view name in the database. Also, note that all references to the cursor edit buffer become invalidated when fields are auto-populated. See the TQSqlCursor constructor documentation for more information.
+.SH "void TQSqlCursor::setName ( const TQString & name, bool autopopulate = true )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Sets the name of the cursor to \fIname\fR. If \fIautopopulate\fR is true (the default), the \fIname\fR must correspond to a valid table or view name in the database. Also, note that all references to the cursor edit buffer become invalidated when fields are auto-populated. See the TQSqlCursor constructor documentation for more information.
 .SH "void TQSqlCursor::setPrimaryIndex ( const TQSqlIndex & idx )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the primary index associated with the cursor to the index \fIidx\fR. Note that this index must contain a field or set of fields which identify a unique record within the underlying database table or view so that update() and del() will execute as expected.
 .PP
@@ -580,7 +580,7 @@ Returns the current sort, or an empty index if there is no current sort.
 .SH "TQString TQSqlCursor::toString ( TQSqlRecord * rec, const TQString & prefix, const TQString & fieldSep, const TQString & sep ) const\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Returns a formatted string composed of all the fields in \fIrec\fR. Each field is composed of the \fIprefix\fR (e.g. table or view name),"
 .", the field name, the \fIfieldSep\fR and the field value. If the
-\fIprefix\fR is empty then each field will begin with the field name. The fields are then joined together separated by \fIsep\fR. Fields where isGenerated() returns FALSE are not included. This function is useful for generating SQL statements.
+\fIprefix\fR is empty then each field will begin with the field name. The fields are then joined together separated by \fIsep\fR. Fields where isGenerated() returns false are not included. This function is useful for generating SQL statements.
 .SH "TQString TQSqlCursor::toString ( const TQString & prefix, TQSqlField * field, const TQString & fieldSep ) const\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
@@ -588,13 +588,13 @@ Returns a formatted string composed of the \fIprefix\fR (e.g. table or view name
 .SH "TQString TQSqlCursor::toString ( const TQSqlIndex & i, TQSqlRecord * rec, const TQString & prefix, const TQString & fieldSep, const TQString & sep ) const\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns a formatted string composed of all the fields in the index \fIi\fR. Each field is composed of the \fIprefix\fR (e.g. table or view name), ".", the field name, the \fIfieldSep\fR and the field value. If the \fIprefix\fR is empty then each field will begin with the field name. The field values are taken from \fIrec\fR. The fields are then joined together separated by \fIsep\fR. Fields where isGenerated() returns FALSE are ignored. This function is useful for generating SQL statements.
-.SH "int TQSqlCursor::update ( bool invalidate = TRUE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Returns a formatted string composed of all the fields in the index \fIi\fR. Each field is composed of the \fIprefix\fR (e.g. table or view name), ".", the field name, the \fIfieldSep\fR and the field value. If the \fIprefix\fR is empty then each field will begin with the field name. The field values are taken from \fIrec\fR. The fields are then joined together separated by \fIsep\fR. Fields where isGenerated() returns false are ignored. This function is useful for generating SQL statements.
+.SH "int TQSqlCursor::update ( bool invalidate = true )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Updates the database with the current contents of the edit buffer. Returns the number of records which were updated. For error information, use lastError().
 .PP
 Only records which meet the filter criteria specified by the cursor's primary index are updated. If the cursor does not contain a primary index, no update is performed and 0 is returned.
 .PP
-If \fIinvalidate\fR is TRUE (the default), the current cursor can no longer be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move to a valid record. For example:
+If \fIinvalidate\fR is true (the default), the current cursor can no longer be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move to a valid record. For example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -624,14 +624,14 @@ Note that if the primary index does not uniquely distinguish records the databas
 See also setMode() and lastError().
 .PP
 Example: sql/overview/update/main.cpp.
-.SH "int TQSqlCursor::update ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = TRUE )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "int TQSqlCursor::update ( const TQString & filter, bool invalidate = true )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Updates the database with the current contents of the cursor edit buffer using the specified \fIfilter\fR. Returns the number of records which were updated. For error information, use lastError().
 .PP
 Only records which meet the filter criteria are updated, otherwise all records in the table are updated.
 .PP
-If \fIinvalidate\fR is TRUE (the default), the cursor can no longer be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move to a valid record.
+If \fIinvalidate\fR is true (the default), the cursor can no longer be navigated. A new select() call must be made before you can move to a valid record.
 .PP
 See also primeUpdate(), setMode(), and lastError().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsqldatabase.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsqldatabase.3qt
index ec9d10c66..27f1d1da7 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsqldatabase.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsqldatabase.3qt
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Inherits TQObject.
 .BI "TQSqlDatabase * \fBaddDatabase\fR ( TQSqlDriver * driver, const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQSqlDatabase * \fBdatabase\fR ( const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection, bool open = TRUE )"
+.BI "TQSqlDatabase * \fBdatabase\fR ( const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection, bool open = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBremoveDatabase\fR ( const TQString & connectionName )"
@@ -278,15 +278,15 @@ Closes the database connection, freeing any resources acquired.
 .PP
 See also removeDatabase().
 .SH "bool TQSqlDatabase::commit ()"
-Commits a transaction to the database if the driver supports transactions. Returns TRUE if the operation succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Commits a transaction to the database if the driver supports transactions. Returns true if the operation succeeded; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQSqlDriver::hasFeature() and rollback().
 .SH "TQString TQSqlDatabase::connectOptions () const"
 Returns the database connect options. See the "connectOptions" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQSqlDatabase::contains ( const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the list of database connections contains \fIconnectionName\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
-.SH "TQSqlDatabase * TQSqlDatabase::database ( const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection, bool open = TRUE )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns the database connection called \fIconnectionName\fR. The database connection must have been previously added with addDatabase(). If \fIopen\fR is TRUE (the default) and the database connection is not already open it is opened now. If no \fIconnectionName\fR is specified the default connection is used. If \fIconnectionName\fR does not exist in the list of databases, 0 is returned. The pointer returned is owned by TQSqlDatabase and should \fInot\fR be deleted.
+Returns true if the list of database connections contains \fIconnectionName\fR; otherwise returns false.
+.SH "TQSqlDatabase * TQSqlDatabase::database ( const TQString & connectionName = defaultConnection, bool open = true )\fC [static]\fR"
+Returns the database connection called \fIconnectionName\fR. The database connection must have been previously added with addDatabase(). If \fIopen\fR is true (the default) and the database connection is not already open it is opened now. If no \fIconnectionName\fR is specified the default connection is used. If \fIconnectionName\fR does not exist in the list of databases, 0 is returned. The pointer returned is owned by TQSqlDatabase and should \fInot\fR be deleted.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR There are restrictions on the use of database connections in threaded applications. Please see the Thread Support in TQt document for more information about threading and SQL databases.
 .PP
@@ -325,20 +325,20 @@ See also TQSqlQuery and lastError().
 .SH "TQString TQSqlDatabase::hostName () const"
 Returns the host name where the database resides. See the "hostName" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQSqlDatabase::isDriverAvailable ( const TQString & name )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if a driver called \fIname\fR is available; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if a driver called \fIname\fR is available; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also drivers().
 .SH "bool TQSqlDatabase::isOpen () const"
-Returns TRUE if the database connection is currently open; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the database connection is currently open; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQSqlDatabase::isOpenError () const"
-Returns TRUE if there was an error opening the database connection; otherwise returns FALSE. Error information can be retrieved using the lastError() function.
+Returns true if there was an error opening the database connection; otherwise returns false. Error information can be retrieved using the lastError() function.
 .SH "TQSqlError TQSqlDatabase::lastError () const"
 Returns information about the last error that occurred on the database. See TQSqlError for more information.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l sql/overview/connection.cpp and sql/sqltable/main.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQSqlDatabase::open ()"
-Opens the database connection using the current connection values. Returns TRUE on success; otherwise returns FALSE. Error information can be retrieved using the lastError() function.
+Opens the database connection using the current connection values. Returns true on success; otherwise returns false. Error information can be retrieved using the lastError() function.
 .PP
 See also lastError().
 .PP
@@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ Examples:
 .SH "bool TQSqlDatabase::open ( const TQString & user, const TQString & password )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Opens the database connection using the given \fIuser\fR name and \fIpassword\fR. Returns TRUE on success; otherwise returns FALSE. Error information can be retrieved using the lastError() function.
+Opens the database connection using the given \fIuser\fR name and \fIpassword\fR. Returns true on success; otherwise returns false. Error information can be retrieved using the lastError() function.
 .PP
 This function does not store the password it is given. Instead, the password is passed directly to the driver for opening a connection and is then discarded.
 .PP
@@ -405,7 +405,7 @@ Removes the database connection \fIdb\fR from the list of database connections.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR The \fIdb\fR pointer is not valid after this function has been called. There should be no open queries on the database connection when this function is called, otherwise a resource leak will occur.
 .SH "bool TQSqlDatabase::rollback ()"
-Rolls a transaction back on the database if the driver supports transactions. Returns TRUE if the operation succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Rolls a transaction back on the database if the driver supports transactions. Returns true if the operation succeeded; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQSqlDriver::hasFeature(), commit(), and transaction().
 .SH "void TQSqlDatabase::setConnectOptions ( const TQString & options = TQString::null )"
@@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a copy,
 .br
 .fi
 .SH "bool TQSqlDatabase::transaction ()"
-Begins a transaction on the database if the driver supports transactions. Returns TRUE if the operation succeeded; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Begins a transaction on the database if the driver supports transactions. Returns true if the operation succeeded; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQSqlDriver::hasFeature(), commit(), and rollback().
 .SH "TQString TQSqlDatabase::userName () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsqldriver.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsqldriver.3qt
index 49949955a..5265c4c3e 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsqldriver.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsqldriver.3qt
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Inherits TQObject.
 .BI "virtual TQString \fBnullText\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual TQString \fBformatValue\fR ( const TQSqlField * field, bool trimStrings = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "virtual TQString \fBformatValue\fR ( const TQSqlField * field, bool trimStrings = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQSqlError \fBlastError\fR () const"
@@ -127,20 +127,20 @@ Default constructor. Creates a new driver with parent \fIparent\fR, called \fIna
 .SH "TQSqlDriver::~TQSqlDriver ()"
 Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
 .SH "bool TQSqlDriver::beginTransaction ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to begin a transaction. If successful, return TRUE, otherwise return FALSE. The default implementation returns FALSE.
+Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to begin a transaction. If successful, return true, otherwise return false. The default implementation returns false.
 .PP
 See also commitTransaction() and rollbackTransaction().
 .SH "void TQSqlDriver::close ()\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-Derived classes must reimplement this abstract virtual function in order to close the database connection. Return TRUE on success, FALSE on failure.
+Derived classes must reimplement this abstract virtual function in order to close the database connection. Return true on success, false on failure.
 .PP
 See also setOpen().
 .SH "bool TQSqlDriver::commitTransaction ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to commit a transaction. If successful, return TRUE, otherwise return FALSE. The default implementation returns FALSE.
+Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to commit a transaction. If successful, return true, otherwise return false. The default implementation returns false.
 .PP
 See also beginTransaction() and rollbackTransaction().
 .SH "TQSqlQuery TQSqlDriver::createQuery () const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 Creates an empty SQL result on the database. Derived classes must reimplement this function and return a TQSqlQuery object appropriate for their database to the caller.
-.SH "TQString TQSqlDriver::formatValue ( const TQSqlField * field, bool trimStrings = FALSE ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "TQString TQSqlDriver::formatValue ( const TQSqlField * field, bool trimStrings = false ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns a string representation of the \fIfield\fR value for the database. This is used, for example, when constructing INSERT and UPDATE statements.
 .PP
 The default implementation returns the value formatted as a string according to the following rules:
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ The default implementation returns the value formatted as a string according to
 If \fIfield\fR is NULL, nullText() is returned.
 .IP
 .TP
-If \fIfield\fR is character data, the value is returned enclosed in single quotation marks, which is appropriate for many SQL databases. Any embedded single-quote characters are escaped (replaced with two single-quote characters). If \fItrimStrings\fR is TRUE (the default is FALSE), all trailing whitespace is trimmed from the field.
+If \fIfield\fR is character data, the value is returned enclosed in single quotation marks, which is appropriate for many SQL databases. Any embedded single-quote characters are escaped (replaced with two single-quote characters). If \fItrimStrings\fR is true (the default is false), all trailing whitespace is trimmed from the field.
 .IP
 .TP
 If \fIfield\fR is date/time data, the value is formatted in ISO format and enclosed in single quotation marks. If the date/time data is invalid, nullText() is returned.
@@ -163,15 +163,15 @@ For any other field type toString() will be called on its value and the result r
 .PP
 See also TQVariant::toString().
 .SH "bool TQSqlDriver::hasFeature ( DriverFeature f ) const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the driver supports feature \fIf\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the driver supports feature \fIf\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Note that some databases need to be open() before this can be determined.
 .PP
 See also DriverFeature.
 .SH "bool TQSqlDriver::isOpen () const"
-Returns TRUE if the database connection is open; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the database connection is open; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQSqlDriver::isOpenError () const"
-Returns TRUE if the there was an error opening the database connection; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the there was an error opening the database connection; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQSqlError TQSqlDriver::lastError () const"
 Returns a TQSqlError object which contains information about the last error that occurred on the database.
 .SH "TQString TQSqlDriver::nullText () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ Returns a string representation of the NULL value for the database. This is used
 .SH "bool TQSqlDriver::open ( const TQString & db, const TQString & user = TQString::null, const TQString & password = TQString::null, const TQString & host = TQString::null, int port = -1 )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 Derived classes must reimplement this abstract virtual function in order to open a database connection on database \fIdb\fR, using user name \fIuser\fR, password \fIpassword\fR, host \fIhost\fR and port \fIport\fR.
 .PP
-The function \fImust\fR return TRUE on success and FALSE on failure.
+The function \fImust\fR return true on success and false on failure.
 .PP
 See also setOpen().
 .SH "bool TQSqlDriver::open ( const TQString & db, const TQString & user, const TQString & password, const TQString & host, int port, const TQString & connOpts )"
@@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Open a database connection on database \fIdb\fR, using user name \fIuser\fR, password \fIpassword\fR, host \fIhost\fR, port \fIport\fR and connection options \fIconnOpts\fR.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE on success and FALSE on failure.
+Returns true on success and false on failure.
 .PP
 See also setOpen().
 .SH "TQSqlIndex TQSqlDriver::primaryIndex ( const TQString & tableName ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Returns a TQSqlRecordInfo object with meta data for the TQSqlQuery \fIquery\fR. Note that this overloaded function may return less information than the recordInfo() function which takes the name of a table as parameter.
 .SH "bool TQSqlDriver::rollbackTransaction ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to rollback a transaction. If successful, return TRUE, otherwise return FALSE. The default implementation returns FALSE.
+Protected function which derived classes can reimplement to rollback a transaction. If successful, return true, otherwise return false. The default implementation returns false.
 .PP
 See also beginTransaction() and commitTransaction().
 .SH "void TQSqlDriver::setLastError ( const TQSqlError & e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Protected function which sets the open state of the database to \fIo\fR. Derived
 .PP
 See also open() and setOpenError().
 .SH "void TQSqlDriver::setOpenError ( bool e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-Protected function which sets the open error state of the database to \fIe\fR. Derived classes can use this function to report the status of open(). Note that if \fIe\fR is TRUE the open state of the database is set to closed (i.e. isOpen() returns FALSE).
+Protected function which sets the open error state of the database to \fIe\fR. Derived classes can use this function to report the status of open(). Note that if \fIe\fR is true the open state of the database is set to closed (i.e. isOpen() returns false).
 .PP
 See also open().
 .SH "TQStringList TQSqlDriver::tables ( const TQString & tableType ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlfield.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlfield.3qt
index f3e34a9d3..d49d8b048 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlfield.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlfield.3qt
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ TQSqlField \- Manipulates the fields in SQL database tables and views
 .BI "bool \fBisReadOnly\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBclear\fR ( bool nullify = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBclear\fR ( bool nullify = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQVariant::Type \fBtype\fR () const"
@@ -118,12 +118,12 @@ Constructs an empty field called \fIfieldName\fR of type \fItype\fR.
 Constructs a copy of \fIother\fR.
 .SH "TQSqlField::~TQSqlField ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-.SH "void TQSqlField::clear ( bool nullify = TRUE )"
-Clears the value of the field. If the field is read-only, nothing happens. If \fInullify\fR is TRUE (the default), the field is set to NULL.
+.SH "void TQSqlField::clear ( bool nullify = true )"
+Clears the value of the field. If the field is read-only, nothing happens. If \fInullify\fR is true (the default), the field is set to NULL.
 .SH "bool TQSqlField::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if the field is currently NULL; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the field is currently NULL; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQSqlField::isReadOnly () const"
-Returns TRUE if the field's value is read only; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the field's value is read only; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQString TQSqlField::name () const"
 Returns the name of the field.
 .PP
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Example: sql/overview/table4/main.cpp.
 .SH "TQSqlField & TQSqlField::operator= ( const TQSqlField & other )"
 Sets the field equal to \fIother\fR.
 .SH "bool TQSqlField::operator== ( const TQSqlField & other ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the field is equal to \fIother\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. Fields are considered equal when the following field properties are the same:
+Returns true if the field is equal to \fIother\fR; otherwise returns false. Fields are considered equal when the following field properties are the same:
 .TP
 name()
 .TP
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Sets the read only flag of the field's value to \fIreadOnly\fR.
 .PP
 See also setValue().
 .SH "void TQSqlField::setValue ( const TQVariant & value )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sets the value of the field to \fIvalue\fR. If the field is read-only (isReadOnly() returns TRUE), nothing happens. If the data type of \fIvalue\fR differs from the field's current data type, an attempt is made to cast it to the proper type. This preserves the data type of the field in the case of assignment, e.g. a TQString to an integer data type. For example:
+Sets the value of the field to \fIvalue\fR. If the field is read-only (isReadOnly() returns true), nothing happens. If the data type of \fIvalue\fR differs from the field's current data type, an attempt is made to cast it to the proper type. This preserves the data type of the field in the case of assignment, e.g. a TQString to an integer data type. For example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlfieldinfo.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlfieldinfo.3qt
index 755ffb2fb..6c8de978b 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlfieldinfo.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlfieldinfo.3qt
@@ -14,13 +14,13 @@ TQSqlFieldInfo \- Stores meta data associated with a SQL field
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQSqlFieldInfo\fR ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, TQVariant::Type typ = TQVariant::Invalid, int required = -1, int len = -1, int prec = -1, const TQVariant & defValue = TQVariant ( ), int typeID = 0, bool generated = TRUE, bool trim = FALSE, bool calculated = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQSqlFieldInfo\fR ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, TQVariant::Type typ = TQVariant::Invalid, int required = -1, int len = -1, int prec = -1, const TQVariant & defValue = TQVariant ( ), int typeID = 0, bool generated = true, bool trim = false, bool calculated = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fBTQSqlFieldInfo\fR ( const TQSqlFieldInfo & other )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQSqlFieldInfo\fR ( const TQSqlField & other, bool generated = TRUE )"
+.BI "\fBTQSqlFieldInfo\fR ( const TQSqlField & other, bool generated = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual \fB~TQSqlFieldInfo\fR ()"
@@ -83,33 +83,33 @@ All values must be set in the constructor, and may be retrieved using isRequired
 .PP
 See also Database Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQSqlFieldInfo::TQSqlFieldInfo ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, TQVariant::Type typ = TQVariant::Invalid, int required = -1, int len = -1, int prec = -1, const TQVariant & defValue = TQVariant ( ), int typeID = 0, bool generated = TRUE, bool trim = FALSE, bool calculated = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQSqlFieldInfo::TQSqlFieldInfo ( const TQString & name = TQString::null, TQVariant::Type typ = TQVariant::Invalid, int required = -1, int len = -1, int prec = -1, const TQVariant & defValue = TQVariant ( ), int typeID = 0, bool generated = true, bool trim = false, bool calculated = false )"
 Constructs a TQSqlFieldInfo with the following parameters: <center>.nf
 .TS
-l - l. \fIname\fR the name of the field. \fItyp\fR the field's type in a TQVariant. \fIrequired\fR greater than 0 if the field is required, 0 if its value can be NULL and less than 0 if it cannot be determined whether the field is required or not. \fIlen\fR the length of the field. Note that for non-character types some databases return either the length in bytes or the number of digits. -1 signifies that the length cannot be determined. \fIprec\fR the precision of the field, or -1 if the field has no precision or it cannot be determined. \fIdefValue\fR the default value that is inserted into the table if none is specified by the user. TQVariant() if there is no default value or it cannot be determined. \fItypeID\fR the internal typeID of the database system (only useful for low-level programming). 0 if unknown. \fIgenerated\fR TRUE indicates that this field should be included in auto-generated SQL statments, e.g. in TQSqlCursor. \fItrim\fR TRUE indicates that widgets should remove trailing whitespace from character fields. This does not affect the field value but only its representation inside widgets. \fIcalculated\fR
+l - l. \fIname\fR the name of the field. \fItyp\fR the field's type in a TQVariant. \fIrequired\fR greater than 0 if the field is required, 0 if its value can be NULL and less than 0 if it cannot be determined whether the field is required or not. \fIlen\fR the length of the field. Note that for non-character types some databases return either the length in bytes or the number of digits. -1 signifies that the length cannot be determined. \fIprec\fR the precision of the field, or -1 if the field has no precision or it cannot be determined. \fIdefValue\fR the default value that is inserted into the table if none is specified by the user. TQVariant() if there is no default value or it cannot be determined. \fItypeID\fR the internal typeID of the database system (only useful for low-level programming). 0 if unknown. \fIgenerated\fR true indicates that this field should be included in auto-generated SQL statments, e.g. in TQSqlCursor. \fItrim\fR true indicates that widgets should remove trailing whitespace from character fields. This does not affect the field value but only its representation inside widgets. \fIcalculated\fR
 .TE
 .fi
 </center>
 .SH "TQSqlFieldInfo::TQSqlFieldInfo ( const TQSqlFieldInfo & other )"
 Constructs a copy of \fIother\fR.
-.SH "TQSqlFieldInfo::TQSqlFieldInfo ( const TQSqlField & other, bool generated = TRUE )"
-Creates a TQSqlFieldInfo object with the type and the name of the TQSqlField \fIother\fR. If \fIgenerated\fR is TRUE this field will be included in auto-generated SQL statments, e.g. in TQSqlCursor.
+.SH "TQSqlFieldInfo::TQSqlFieldInfo ( const TQSqlField & other, bool generated = true )"
+Creates a TQSqlFieldInfo object with the type and the name of the TQSqlField \fIother\fR. If \fIgenerated\fR is true this field will be included in auto-generated SQL statments, e.g. in TQSqlCursor.
 .SH "TQSqlFieldInfo::~TQSqlFieldInfo ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
 .SH "TQVariant TQSqlFieldInfo::defaultValue () const"
 Returns the field's default value or an empty TQVariant if the field has no default value or the value couldn't be determined. The default value is the value inserted in the database when it is not explicitly specified by the user.
 .SH "bool TQSqlFieldInfo::isCalculated () const"
-Returns TRUE if the field is calculated; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the field is calculated; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setCalculated().
 .SH "bool TQSqlFieldInfo::isGenerated () const"
-Returns TRUE if the field should be included in auto-generated SQL statments, e.g. in TQSqlCursor; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the field should be included in auto-generated SQL statments, e.g. in TQSqlCursor; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setGenerated().
 .SH "int TQSqlFieldInfo::isRequired () const"
 Returns a value greater than 0 if the field is required (NULL values are not allowed), 0 if it isn't required (NULL values are allowed) or less than 0 if it cannot be determined whether the field is required or not.
 .SH "bool TQSqlFieldInfo::isTrim () const"
-Returns TRUE if trailing whitespace should be removed from character fields; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if trailing whitespace should be removed from character fields; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setTrim().
 .SH "int TQSqlFieldInfo::length () const"
@@ -122,21 +122,21 @@ Examples:
 .SH "TQSqlFieldInfo & TQSqlFieldInfo::operator= ( const TQSqlFieldInfo & other )"
 Assigns \fIother\fR to this field info and returns a reference to it.
 .SH "bool TQSqlFieldInfo::operator== ( const TQSqlFieldInfo & f ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this fieldinfo is equal to \fIf\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this fieldinfo is equal to \fIf\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Two field infos are considered equal if all their attributes match.
 .SH "int TQSqlFieldInfo::precision () const"
 Returns the field's precision or -1 if the field has no precision or it cannot be determined.
 .SH "void TQSqlFieldInfo::setCalculated ( bool calc )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-\fIcalc\fR set to TRUE indicates that this field is a calculated field. The value of calculated fields can by modified by subclassing TQSqlCursor and overriding TQSqlCursor::calculateField().
+\fIcalc\fR set to true indicates that this field is a calculated field. The value of calculated fields can by modified by subclassing TQSqlCursor and overriding TQSqlCursor::calculateField().
 .PP
 See also isCalculated().
 .SH "void TQSqlFieldInfo::setGenerated ( bool gen )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-\fIgen\fR set to FALSE indicates that this field should not appear in auto-generated SQL statements (for example in TQSqlCursor).
+\fIgen\fR set to false indicates that this field should not appear in auto-generated SQL statements (for example in TQSqlCursor).
 .PP
 See also isGenerated().
 .SH "void TQSqlFieldInfo::setTrim ( bool trim )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fItrim\fR is TRUE widgets should remove trailing whitespace from character fields. This does not affect the field value but only its representation inside widgets.
+If \fItrim\fR is true widgets should remove trailing whitespace from character fields. This does not affect the field value but only its representation inside widgets.
 .PP
 See also isTrim().
 .SH "TQSqlField TQSqlFieldInfo::toField () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlform.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlform.3qt
index 0ec8d2987..1d17185bb 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlform.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlform.3qt
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Inherits TQObject.
 .BI "virtual void \fBclear\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBclearValues\fR ( bool nullify = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBclearValues\fR ( bool nullify = false )"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SS "Protected Members"
@@ -162,8 +162,8 @@ Constructs a TQSqlForm with parent \fIparent\fR and called \fIname\fR.
 Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
 .SH "void TQSqlForm::clear ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Removes every widget, and the fields they're mapped to, from the form.
-.SH "void TQSqlForm::clearValues ( bool nullify = FALSE )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-Clears the values in all the widgets, and the fields they are mapped to, in the form. If \fInullify\fR is TRUE (the default is FALSE), each field is also set to NULL.
+.SH "void TQSqlForm::clearValues ( bool nullify = false )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+Clears the values in all the widgets, and the fields they are mapped to, in the form. If \fInullify\fR is true (the default is false), each field is also set to NULL.
 .SH "uint TQSqlForm::count () const"
 Returns the number of widgets in the form.
 .SH "TQWidget * TQSqlForm::fieldToWidget ( TQSqlField * field ) const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlindex.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlindex.3qt
index 0b17a4469..6d0972215 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlindex.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlindex.3qt
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Reimplemented from TQSqlRecord.
 .SH "void TQSqlIndex::append ( const TQSqlField & field, bool desc )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Appends the field \fIfield\fR to the list of indexed fields. The field is appended with an ascending sort order, unless \fIdesc\fR is TRUE.
+Appends the field \fIfield\fR to the list of indexed fields. The field is appended with an ascending sort order, unless \fIdesc\fR is true.
 .SH "TQString TQSqlIndex::cursorName () const"
 Returns the name of the cursor which the index is associated with.
 .SH "TQSqlIndex TQSqlIndex::fromStringList ( const TQStringList & l, const TQSqlCursor * cursor )\fC [static]\fR"
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Returns an index based on the field descriptions in \fIl\fR and the cursor \fIcu
 .PP
 See also toStringList().
 .SH "bool TQSqlIndex::isDescending ( int i ) const"
-Returns TRUE if field \fIi\fR in the index is sorted in descending order; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if field \fIi\fR in the index is sorted in descending order; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQString TQSqlIndex::name () const"
 Returns the name of the index.
 .SH "TQSqlIndex & TQSqlIndex::operator= ( const TQSqlIndex & other )"
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Sets the index equal to \fIother\fR.
 .SH "void TQSqlIndex::setCursorName ( const TQString & cursorName )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the name of the cursor that the index is associated with to \fIcursorName\fR.
 .SH "void TQSqlIndex::setDescending ( int i, bool desc )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIdesc\fR is TRUE, field \fIi\fR is sorted in descending order. Otherwise, field \fIi\fR is sorted in ascending order (the default). If the field does not exist, nothing happens.
+If \fIdesc\fR is true, field \fIi\fR is sorted in descending order. Otherwise, field \fIi\fR is sorted in ascending order (the default). If the field does not exist, nothing happens.
 .SH "void TQSqlIndex::setName ( const TQString & name )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the name of the index to \fIname\fR.
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlquery.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlquery.3qt
index d842ee412..5bf2321c6 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlquery.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlquery.3qt
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Inherited by TQSqlCursor.
 .BI "virtual TQVariant \fBvalue\fR ( int i ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual bool \fBseek\fR ( int i, bool relative = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual bool \fBseek\fR ( int i, bool relative = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual bool \fBnext\fR ()"
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ The TQSqlQuery class provides a means of executing and manipulating SQL statemen
 .PP
 TQSqlQuery encapsulates the functionality involved in creating, navigating and retrieving data from SQL queries which are executed on a TQSqlDatabase. It can be used to execute DML (data manipulation language) statements, e.g. \fCSELECT\fR, \fCINSERT\fR, \fCUPDATE\fR and \fCDELETE\fR, and also DDL (data definition language) statements, e.g. \fCCREATE TABLE\fR. It can also be used to execute database-specific commands which are not standard SQL (e.g. \fCSET DATESTYLE=ISO\fR for PostgreSQL).
 .PP
-Successfully executed SQL statements set the query's state to active (isActive() returns TRUE); otherwise the query's state is set to inactive. In either case, when executing a new SQL statement, the query is positioned on an invalid record; an active query must be navigated to a valid record (so that isValid() returns TRUE) before values can be retrieved.
+Successfully executed SQL statements set the query's state to active (isActive() returns true); otherwise the query's state is set to inactive. In either case, when executing a new SQL statement, the query is positioned on an invalid record; an active query must be navigated to a valid record (so that isValid() returns true) before values can be retrieved.
 .PP
 Navigating records is performed with the following functions:
 .TP
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ The bound values can be examined in the following way:
 .SH "const TQSqlDriver * TQSqlQuery::driver () const"
 Returns the database driver associated with the query.
 .SH "bool TQSqlQuery::exec ( const TQString & query )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Executes the SQL in \fIquery\fR. Returns TRUE and sets the query state to active if the query was successful; otherwise returns FALSE and sets the query state to inactive. The \fIquery\fR string must use syntax appropriate for the SQL database being queried, for example, standard SQL.
+Executes the SQL in \fIquery\fR. Returns true and sets the query state to active if the query was successful; otherwise returns false and sets the query state to inactive. The \fIquery\fR string must use syntax appropriate for the SQL database being queried, for example, standard SQL.
 .PP
 After the query is executed, the query is positioned on an \fIinvalid\fR record, and must be navigated to a valid record before data values can be retrieved, e.g. using next().
 .PP
@@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ Examples:
 .SH "bool TQSqlQuery::exec ()"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Executes a previously prepared SQL query. Returns TRUE if the query executed successfully; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Executes a previously prepared SQL query. Returns true if the query executed successfully; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also prepare(), bindValue(), and addBindValue().
 .SH "TQString TQSqlQuery::executedQuery () const"
@@ -405,30 +405,30 @@ In most cases this function returns the same as lastQuery(). If a prepared query
 .PP
 See also lastQuery().
 .SH "bool TQSqlQuery::first ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Retrieves the first record in the result, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result must be in an active state and isSelect() must return TRUE before calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE. Returns TRUE if successful. If unsuccessful the query position is set to an invalid position and FALSE is returned.
+Retrieves the first record in the result, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result must be in an active state and isSelect() must return true before calling this function or it will do nothing and return false. Returns true if successful. If unsuccessful the query position is set to an invalid position and false is returned.
 .PP
 See also next(), prev(), last(), seek(), at(), isActive(), and isValid().
 .PP
 Example: sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQSqlQuery::isActive () const"
-Returns TRUE if the query is currently active; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the query is currently active; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l sql/overview/basicbrowsing/main.cpp, sql/overview/basicbrowsing2/main.cpp, sql/overview/basicdatamanip/main.cpp, sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp, and sql/overview/retrieve1/main.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQSqlQuery::isForwardOnly () const"
-Returns TRUE if you can only scroll \fIforward\fR through a result set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if you can only scroll \fIforward\fR through a result set; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setForwardOnly().
 .SH "bool TQSqlQuery::isNull ( int field ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the query is active and positioned on a valid record and the \fIfield\fR is NULL; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that for some drivers isNull() will not return accurate information until after an attempt is made to retrieve data.
+Returns true if the query is active and positioned on a valid record and the \fIfield\fR is NULL; otherwise returns false. Note that for some drivers isNull() will not return accurate information until after an attempt is made to retrieve data.
 .PP
 See also isActive(), isValid(), and value().
 .SH "bool TQSqlQuery::isSelect () const"
-Returns TRUE if the current query is a \fCSELECT\fR statement; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the current query is a \fCSELECT\fR statement; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQSqlQuery::isValid () const"
-Returns TRUE if the query is currently positioned on a valid record; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the query is currently positioned on a valid record; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQSqlQuery::last ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Retrieves the last record in the result, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result must be in an active state and isSelect() must return TRUE before calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE. Returns TRUE if successful. If unsuccessful the query position is set to an invalid position and FALSE is returned.
+Retrieves the last record in the result, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result must be in an active state and isSelect() must return true before calling this function or it will do nothing and return false. Returns true if successful. If unsuccessful the query position is set to an invalid position and false is returned.
 .PP
 See also next(), prev(), first(), seek(), at(), isActive(), and isValid().
 .PP
@@ -442,26 +442,26 @@ Returns the text of the current query being used, or TQString::null if there is
 .PP
 See also executedQuery().
 .SH "bool TQSqlQuery::next ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Retrieves the next record in the result, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result must be in an active state and isSelect() must return TRUE before calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE.
+Retrieves the next record in the result, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result must be in an active state and isSelect() must return true before calling this function or it will do nothing and return false.
 .PP
 The following rules apply:
 .TP
 If the result is currently located before the first record, e.g. immediately after a query is executed, an attempt is made to retrieve the first record.
 .IP
 .TP
-If the result is currently located after the last record, there is no change and FALSE is returned.
+If the result is currently located after the last record, there is no change and false is returned.
 .IP
 .TP
 If the result is located somewhere in the middle, an attempt is made to retrieve the next record.
 .PP
-If the record could not be retrieved, the result is positioned after the last record and FALSE is returned. If the record is successfully retrieved, TRUE is returned.
+If the record could not be retrieved, the result is positioned after the last record and false is returned. If the record is successfully retrieved, true is returned.
 .PP
 See also prev(), first(), last(), seek(), at(), isActive(), and isValid().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l sql/overview/basicbrowsing/main.cpp, sql/overview/basicbrowsing2/main.cpp, sql/overview/delete/main.cpp, sql/overview/order1/main.cpp, sql/overview/retrieve1/main.cpp, sql/overview/subclass4/main.cpp, and sql/overview/subclass5/main.cpp.
 .SH "int TQSqlQuery::numRowsAffected () const"
-Returns the number of rows affected by the result's SQL statement, or -1 if it cannot be determined. Note that for \fCSELECT\fR statements, the value is undefined; see size() instead. If the query is not active (isActive() returns FALSE), -1 is returned.
+Returns the number of rows affected by the result's SQL statement, or -1 if it cannot be determined. Note that for \fCSELECT\fR statements, the value is undefined; see size() instead. If the query is not active (isActive() returns false), -1 is returned.
 .PP
 See also size() and TQSqlDriver::hasFeature().
 .PP
@@ -474,11 +474,11 @@ Prepares the SQL query \fIquery\fR for execution. The query may contain placehol
 .PP
 See also exec(), bindValue(), and addBindValue().
 .SH "bool TQSqlQuery::prev ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Retrieves the previous record in the result, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result must be in an active state and isSelect() must return TRUE before calling this function or it will do nothing and return FALSE.
+Retrieves the previous record in the result, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. Note that the result must be in an active state and isSelect() must return true before calling this function or it will do nothing and return false.
 .PP
 The following rules apply:
 .TP
-If the result is currently located before the first record, there is no change and FALSE is returned.
+If the result is currently located before the first record, there is no change and false is returned.
 .IP
 .TP
 If the result is currently located after the last record, an attempt is made to retrieve the last record.
@@ -486,35 +486,35 @@ If the result is currently located after the last record, an attempt is made to
 .TP
 If the result is somewhere in the middle, an attempt is made to retrieve the previous record.
 .PP
-If the record could not be retrieved, the result is positioned before the first record and FALSE is returned. If the record is successfully retrieved, TRUE is returned.
+If the record could not be retrieved, the result is positioned before the first record and false is returned. If the record is successfully retrieved, true is returned.
 .PP
 See also next(), first(), last(), seek(), at(), isActive(), and isValid().
 .SH "const TQSqlResult * TQSqlQuery::result () const"
 Returns the result associated with the query.
-.SH "bool TQSqlQuery::seek ( int i, bool relative = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Retrieves the record at position (offset) \fIi\fR, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. The first record is at position 0. Note that the query must be in an active state and isSelect() must return TRUE before calling this function.
+.SH "bool TQSqlQuery::seek ( int i, bool relative = false )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Retrieves the record at position (offset) \fIi\fR, if available, and positions the query on the retrieved record. The first record is at position 0. Note that the query must be in an active state and isSelect() must return true before calling this function.
 .PP
-If \fIrelative\fR is FALSE (the default), the following rules apply:
+If \fIrelative\fR is false (the default), the following rules apply:
 .TP
-If \fIi\fR is negative, the result is positioned before the first record and FALSE is returned.
+If \fIi\fR is negative, the result is positioned before the first record and false is returned.
 .TP
-Otherwise, an attempt is made to move to the record at position \fIi\fR. If the record at position \fIi\fR could not be retrieved, the result is positioned after the last record and FALSE is returned. If the record is successfully retrieved, TRUE is returned.
+Otherwise, an attempt is made to move to the record at position \fIi\fR. If the record at position \fIi\fR could not be retrieved, the result is positioned after the last record and false is returned. If the record is successfully retrieved, true is returned.
 .PP
-If \fIrelative\fR is TRUE, the following rules apply:
+If \fIrelative\fR is true, the following rules apply:
 .TP
-If the result is currently positioned before the first record or on the first record, and \fIi\fR is negative, there is no change, and FALSE is returned.
+If the result is currently positioned before the first record or on the first record, and \fIi\fR is negative, there is no change, and false is returned.
 .TP
-If the result is currently located after the last record, and \fIi\fR is positive, there is no change, and FALSE is returned.
+If the result is currently located after the last record, and \fIi\fR is positive, there is no change, and false is returned.
 .TP
-If the result is currently located somewhere in the middle, and the relative offset \fIi\fR moves the result below zero, the result is positioned before the first record and FALSE is returned.
+If the result is currently located somewhere in the middle, and the relative offset \fIi\fR moves the result below zero, the result is positioned before the first record and false is returned.
 .TP
-Otherwise, an attempt is made to move to the record \fIi\fR records ahead of the current record (or \fIi\fR records behind the current record if \fIi\fR is negative). If the record at offset \fIi\fR could not be retrieved, the result is positioned after the last record if \fIi\fR >= 0, (or before the first record if \fIi\fR is negative), and FALSE is returned. If the record is successfully retrieved, TRUE is returned.
+Otherwise, an attempt is made to move to the record \fIi\fR records ahead of the current record (or \fIi\fR records behind the current record if \fIi\fR is negative). If the record at offset \fIi\fR could not be retrieved, the result is positioned after the last record if \fIi\fR >= 0, (or before the first record if \fIi\fR is negative), and false is returned. If the record is successfully retrieved, true is returned.
 .PP
 See also next(), prev(), first(), last(), at(), isActive(), and isValid().
 .PP
 Example: sql/overview/navigating/main.cpp.
 .SH "void TQSqlQuery::setForwardOnly ( bool forward )"
-Sets forward only mode to \fIforward\fR. If forward is TRUE only next(), and seek() with positive values, are allowed for navigating the results. Forward only mode needs far less memory since results do not need to be cached.
+Sets forward only mode to \fIforward\fR. If forward is true only next(), and seek() with positive values, are allowed for navigating the results. Forward only mode needs far less memory since results do not need to be cached.
 .PP
 Forward only mode is off by default.
 .PP
@@ -522,7 +522,7 @@ Forward only mode cannot be used with data aware widgets like TQDataTable, since
 .PP
 See also isForwardOnly(), next(), and seek().
 .SH "int TQSqlQuery::size () const"
-Returns the size of the result, (number of rows returned), or -1 if the size cannot be determined or if the database does not support reporting information about query sizes. Note that for non-\fCSELECT\fR statements (isSelect() returns FALSE), size() will return -1. If the query is not active (isActive() returns FALSE), -1 is returned.
+Returns the size of the result, (number of rows returned), or -1 if the size cannot be determined or if the database does not support reporting information about query sizes. Note that for non-\fCSELECT\fR statements (isSelect() returns false), size() will return -1. If the query is not active (isActive() returns false), -1 is returned.
 .PP
 To determine the number of rows affected by a non-SELECT statement, use numRowsAffected().
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlrecord.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlrecord.3qt
index 61f8b37c3..0df22e48f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlrecord.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlrecord.3qt
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Inherited by TQSqlCursor and TQSqlIndex.
 .BI "virtual void \fBclear\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBclearValues\fR ( bool nullify = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBclearValues\fR ( bool nullify = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "uint \fBcount\fR () const"
@@ -137,10 +137,10 @@ Removes all the record's fields.
 See also clearValues().
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQSqlCursor.
-.SH "void TQSqlRecord::clearValues ( bool nullify = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Clears the value of all fields in the record. If \fInullify\fR is TRUE, (the default is FALSE), each field is set to NULL.
+.SH "void TQSqlRecord::clearValues ( bool nullify = false )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Clears the value of all fields in the record. If \fInullify\fR is true, (the default is false), each field is set to NULL.
 .SH "bool TQSqlRecord::contains ( const TQString & name ) const"
-Returns TRUE if there is a field in the record called \fIname\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if there is a field in the record called \fIname\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "uint TQSqlRecord::count () const"
 Returns the number of fields in the record.
 .SH "TQSqlField * TQSqlRecord::field ( int i )"
@@ -160,25 +160,25 @@ Returns the name of the field at position \fIi\fR. If the field does not exist,
 .SH "void TQSqlRecord::insert ( int pos, const TQSqlField & field )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Insert a copy of \fIfield\fR at position \fIpos\fR. If a field already exists at \fIpos\fR, it is removed.
 .SH "bool TQSqlRecord::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if there are no fields in the record; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if there are no fields in the record; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQSqlRecord::isGenerated ( const TQString & name ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the record has a field called \fIname\fR and this field is to be generated (the default); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the record has a field called \fIname\fR and this field is to be generated (the default); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setGenerated().
 .SH "bool TQSqlRecord::isGenerated ( int i ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the record has a field at position \fIi\fR and this field is to be generated (the default); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the record has a field at position \fIi\fR and this field is to be generated (the default); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setGenerated().
 .SH "bool TQSqlRecord::isNull ( const TQString & name ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the field called \fIname\fR is NULL or if there is no field called \fIname\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the field called \fIname\fR is NULL or if there is no field called \fIname\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also position().
 .SH "bool TQSqlRecord::isNull ( int i ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the field \fIi\fR is NULL or if there is no field at position \fIi\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the field \fIi\fR is NULL or if there is no field at position \fIi\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also fieldName().
 .SH "TQSqlRecord & TQSqlRecord::operator= ( const TQSqlRecord & other )"
@@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Removes the field at \fIpos\fR. If \fIpos\fR does not exist, nothing happens.
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQSqlCursor.
 .SH "void TQSqlRecord::setGenerated ( const TQString & name, bool generated )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sets the generated flag for the field called \fIname\fR to \fIgenerated\fR. If the field does not exist, nothing happens. Only fields that have \fIgenerated\fR set to TRUE are included in the SQL that is generated, e.g. by TQSqlCursor.
+Sets the generated flag for the field called \fIname\fR to \fIgenerated\fR. If the field does not exist, nothing happens. Only fields that have \fIgenerated\fR set to true are included in the SQL that is generated, e.g. by TQSqlCursor.
 .PP
 See also isGenerated().
 .PP
@@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Note that fields which are not generated are \fInot\fR included (see isGenerated
 .SH "TQStringList TQSqlRecord::toStringList ( const TQString & prefix = TQString::null ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns a list of all the record's field names, each having the prefix \fIprefix\fR.
 .PP
-Note that fields which have generated set to FALSE are \fInot\fR included. (See isGenerated()). If \fIprefix\fR is supplied, e.g. a table name, all fields are prefixed in the form:
+Note that fields which have generated set to false are \fInot\fR included. (See isGenerated()). If \fIprefix\fR is supplied, e.g. a table name, all fields are prefixed in the form:
 .PP"
 \fIprefix\fR.<fieldname>"
 .SH "TQVariant TQSqlRecord::value ( int i ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlresult.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlresult.3qt
index 90f402b59..d05f15778 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlresult.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlresult.3qt
@@ -113,25 +113,25 @@ Returns the data for field \fIi\fR (zero-based) as a TQVariant. This function is
 .SH "const TQSqlDriver * TQSqlResult::driver () const\fC [protected]\fR"
 Returns the driver associated with the result.
 .SH "bool TQSqlResult::fetch ( int i )\fC [pure virtual protected]\fR"
-Positions the result to an arbitrary (zero-based) index \fIi\fR. This function is only called if the result is in an active state. Derived classes must reimplement this function and position the result to the index \fIi\fR, and call setAt() with an appropriate value. Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure.
+Positions the result to an arbitrary (zero-based) index \fIi\fR. This function is only called if the result is in an active state. Derived classes must reimplement this function and position the result to the index \fIi\fR, and call setAt() with an appropriate value. Return true to indicate success, or false to signify failure.
 .SH "bool TQSqlResult::fetchFirst ()\fC [pure virtual protected]\fR"
-Positions the result to the first record in the result. This function is only called if the result is in an active state. Derived classes must reimplement this function and position the result to the first record, and call setAt() with an appropriate value. Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure.
+Positions the result to the first record in the result. This function is only called if the result is in an active state. Derived classes must reimplement this function and position the result to the first record, and call setAt() with an appropriate value. Return true to indicate success, or false to signify failure.
 .SH "bool TQSqlResult::fetchLast ()\fC [pure virtual protected]\fR"
-Positions the result to the last record in the result. This function is only called if the result is in an active state. Derived classes must reimplement this function and position the result to the last record, and call setAt() with an appropriate value. Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure.
+Positions the result to the last record in the result. This function is only called if the result is in an active state. Derived classes must reimplement this function and position the result to the last record, and call setAt() with an appropriate value. Return true to indicate success, or false to signify failure.
 .SH "bool TQSqlResult::fetchNext ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-Positions the result to the next available record in the result. This function is only called if the result is in an active state. The default implementation calls fetch() with the next index. Derived classes can reimplement this function and position the result to the next record in some other way, and call setAt() with an appropriate value. Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure.
+Positions the result to the next available record in the result. This function is only called if the result is in an active state. The default implementation calls fetch() with the next index. Derived classes can reimplement this function and position the result to the next record in some other way, and call setAt() with an appropriate value. Return true to indicate success, or false to signify failure.
 .SH "bool TQSqlResult::fetchPrev ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-Positions the result to the previous available record in the result. This function is only called if the result is in an active state. The default implementation calls fetch() with the previous index. Derived classes can reimplement this function and position the result to the next record in some other way, and call setAt() with an appropriate value. Return TRUE to indicate success, or FALSE to signify failure.
+Positions the result to the previous available record in the result. This function is only called if the result is in an active state. The default implementation calls fetch() with the previous index. Derived classes can reimplement this function and position the result to the next record in some other way, and call setAt() with an appropriate value. Return true to indicate success, or false to signify failure.
 .SH "bool TQSqlResult::isActive () const\fC [protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the result has records to be retrieved; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the result has records to be retrieved; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQSqlResult::isForwardOnly () const\fC [protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if you can only scroll forward through a result set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if you can only scroll forward through a result set; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQSqlResult::isNull ( int i )\fC [pure virtual protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the field at position \fIi\fR is NULL; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the field at position \fIi\fR is NULL; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQSqlResult::isSelect () const\fC [protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the current result is from a SELECT statement; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the current result is from a SELECT statement; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQSqlResult::isValid () const\fC [protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the result is positioned on a valid record (that is, the result is not positioned before the first or after the last record); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the result is positioned on a valid record (that is, the result is not positioned before the first or after the last record); otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQSqlError TQSqlResult::lastError () const\fC [protected]\fR"
 Returns the last error associated with the result.
 .SH "TQString TQSqlResult::lastQuery () const\fC [protected]\fR"
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Returns the current SQL query text, or TQString::null if there is none.
 .SH "int TQSqlResult::numRowsAffected ()\fC [pure virtual protected]\fR"
 Returns the number of rows affected by the last query executed.
 .SH "bool TQSqlResult::reset ( const TQString & query )\fC [pure virtual protected]\fR"
-Sets the result to use the SQL statement \fIquery\fR for subsequent data retrieval. Derived classes must reimplement this function and apply the \fIquery\fR to the database. This function is called only after the result is set to an inactive state and is positioned before the first record of the new result. Derived classes should return TRUE if the query was successful and ready to be used, or FALSE otherwise.
+Sets the result to use the SQL statement \fIquery\fR for subsequent data retrieval. Derived classes must reimplement this function and apply the \fIquery\fR to the database. This function is called only after the result is set to an inactive state and is positioned before the first record of the new result. Derived classes should return true if the query was successful and ready to be used, or false otherwise.
 .SH "void TQSqlResult::setActive ( bool a )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Protected function provided for derived classes to set the internal active state to the value of \fIa\fR.
 .PP
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Protected function provided for derived classes to set the internal (zero-based)
 .PP
 See also at().
 .SH "void TQSqlResult::setForwardOnly ( bool forward )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-Sets forward only mode to \fIforward\fR. If forward is TRUE only fetchNext() is allowed for navigating the results. Forward only mode needs far less memory since results do not have to be cached. forward only mode is off by default.
+Sets forward only mode to \fIforward\fR. If forward is true only fetchNext() is allowed for navigating the results. Forward only mode needs far less memory since results do not have to be cached. forward only mode is off by default.
 .PP
 See also fetchNext().
 .SH "void TQSqlResult::setLastError ( const TQSqlError & e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ See also lastError().
 .SH "void TQSqlResult::setQuery ( const TQString & query )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Sets the current query for the result to \fIquery\fR. The result must be reset() in order to execute the query on the database.
 .SH "void TQSqlResult::setSelect ( bool s )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-Protected function provided for derived classes to indicate whether or not the current statement is a SQL SELECT statement. The \fIs\fR parameter should be TRUE if the statement is a SELECT statement, or FALSE otherwise.
+Protected function provided for derived classes to indicate whether or not the current statement is a SQL SELECT statement. The \fIs\fR parameter should be true if the statement is a SELECT statement, or false otherwise.
 .SH "int TQSqlResult::size ()\fC [pure virtual protected]\fR"
 Returns the size of the result or -1 if it cannot be determined.
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlselectcursor.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlselectcursor.3qt
index b9f5e9473..2496d0604 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlselectcursor.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlselectcursor.3qt
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ Example:
 .br
     TQDataTable* table = new TQDataTable( this );
 .br
-    table->setSqlCursor( cur, TRUE, TRUE );
+    table->setSqlCursor( cur, true, true );
 .br
     table->refresh();
 .br
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqstatusbar.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqstatusbar.3qt
index 8a98d420d..e91b57d6d 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqstatusbar.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqstatusbar.3qt
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Inherits TQWidget.
 .BI "virtual \fB~TQStatusBar\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBaddWidget\fR ( TQWidget * widget, int stretch = 0, bool permanent = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBaddWidget\fR ( TQWidget * widget, int stretch = 0, bool permanent = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBremoveWidget\fR ( TQWidget * widget )"
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ To display a \fItemporary\fR message, call message() (perhaps by connecting a su
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-By default TQStatusBar provides a TQSizeGrip in the lower-right corner. You can disable it with setSizeGripEnabled(FALSE);
+By default TQStatusBar provides a TQSizeGrip in the lower-right corner. You can disable it with setSizeGripEnabled(false);
 .PP
 .ce 1
 .B "[Image Omitted]"
@@ -125,12 +125,12 @@ Constructs a status bar called \fIname\fR with parent \fIparent\fR and with a si
 See also sizeGripEnabled.
 .SH "TQStatusBar::~TQStatusBar ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Destroys the status bar and frees any allocated resources and child widgets.
-.SH "void TQStatusBar::addWidget ( TQWidget * widget, int stretch = 0, bool permanent = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQStatusBar::addWidget ( TQWidget * widget, int stretch = 0, bool permanent = false )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Adds \fIwidget\fR to this status bar. \fIwidget\fR is reparented if it isn't already a child of the TQStatusBar.
 .PP
-\fIwidget\fR is permanently visible if \fIpermanent\fR is TRUE and may be obscured by temporary messages if \fIpermanent\fR is FALSE. The default is FALSE.
+\fIwidget\fR is permanently visible if \fIpermanent\fR is true and may be obscured by temporary messages if \fIpermanent\fR is false. The default is false.
 .PP
-If \fIpermanent\fR is TRUE, \fIwidget\fR is located at the far right of the status bar. If \fIpermanent\fR is FALSE (the default), \fIwidget\fR is located just to the left of the first permanent widget.
+If \fIpermanent\fR is true, \fIwidget\fR is located at the far right of the status bar. If \fIpermanent\fR is false (the default), \fIwidget\fR is located just to the left of the first permanent widget.
 .PP
 \fIstretch\fR is used to compute a suitable size for \fIwidget\fR as the status bar grows and shrinks. The default of 0 uses a minimum of space.
 .PP
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ See also message().
 .SH "void TQStatusBar::hideOrShow ()\fC [protected]\fR"
 Ensures that the right widgets are visible. Used by message() and clear().
 .SH "bool TQStatusBar::isSizeGripEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details.
+Returns true if the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "void TQStatusBar::message ( const TQString & message )\fC [slot]\fR"
 Hides the normal status indicators and displays \fImessage\fR until clear() or another message() is called.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqstrilist.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqstrilist.3qt
index 9c3edc44e..b7d4941d4 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqstrilist.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqstrilist.3qt
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Inherits TQStrList.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQStrIList\fR ( bool deepCopies = TRUE )"
+.BI "\fBTQStrIList\fR ( bool deepCopies = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fB~TQStrIList\fR ()"
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ The TQStrListIterator class works for TQStrIList.
 .PP
 See also TQStringList, Collection Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQStrIList::TQStrIList ( bool deepCopies = TRUE )"
-Constructs a list of strings. Will make deep copies of all inserted strings if \fIdeepCopies\fR is TRUE, or use shallow copies if \fIdeepCopies\fR is FALSE.
+.SH "TQStrIList::TQStrIList ( bool deepCopies = true )"
+Constructs a list of strings. Will make deep copies of all inserted strings if \fIdeepCopies\fR is true, or use shallow copies if \fIdeepCopies\fR is false.
 .SH "TQStrIList::~TQStrIList ()"
 Destroys the list. All strings are removed.
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqstring.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqstring.3qt
index 670cb7164..6ff94418a 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqstring.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqstring.3qt
@@ -124,13 +124,13 @@ All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread supp
 .BI "TQString & \fBsprintf\fR ( const char * cformat, ... )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBfind\fR ( TQChar c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBfind\fR ( TQChar c, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBfind\fR ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBfind\fR ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBfind\fR ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBfind\fR ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBfind\fR ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = 0 ) const"
@@ -139,13 +139,13 @@ All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread supp
 .BI "int \fBfind\fR ( const char * str, int index = 0 ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBfindRev\fR ( TQChar c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBfindRev\fR ( TQChar c, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBfindRev\fR ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBfindRev\fR ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBfindRev\fR ( const TQString & str, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBfindRev\fR ( const TQString & str, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBfindRev\fR ( const TQRegExp & rx, int index = -1 ) const"
@@ -154,16 +154,16 @@ All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread supp
 .BI "int \fBfindRev\fR ( const char * str, int index = -1 ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBcontains\fR ( TQChar c, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBcontains\fR ( TQChar c, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBcontains\fR ( char c, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBcontains\fR ( char c, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBcontains\fR ( const char * str, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBcontains\fR ( const char * str, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBcontains\fR ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "int \fBcontains\fR ( const TQString & str, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBcontains\fR ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const"
@@ -196,10 +196,10 @@ All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread supp
 .BI "TQString \fBmid\fR ( uint index, uint len = 0xffffffff ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQString \fBleftJustify\fR ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "TQString \fBleftJustify\fR ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQString \fBrightJustify\fR ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "TQString \fBrightJustify\fR ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQString \fBlower\fR () const"
@@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread supp
 .BI "TQString & \fBremove\fR ( uint index, uint len )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQString & \fBremove\fR ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE )"
+.BI "TQString & \fBremove\fR ( const TQString & str, bool cs = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQString & \fBremove\fR ( TQChar c )"
@@ -298,13 +298,13 @@ All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread supp
 .BI "TQString & \fBreplace\fR ( uint index, uint len, char c )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQString & \fBreplace\fR ( TQChar c, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )"
+.BI "TQString & \fBreplace\fR ( TQChar c, const TQString & after, bool cs = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQString & \fBreplace\fR ( char c, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )"
+.BI "TQString & \fBreplace\fR ( char c, const TQString & after, bool cs = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQString & \fBreplace\fR ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )"
+.BI "TQString & \fBreplace\fR ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQString & \fBreplace\fR ( const TQRegExp & rx, const TQString & after )"
@@ -463,10 +463,10 @@ All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread supp
 .BI "const char * data () const  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "bool \fBstartsWith\fR ( const TQString & s, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "bool \fBstartsWith\fR ( const TQString & s, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "bool \fBendsWith\fR ( const TQString & s, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "bool \fBendsWith\fR ( const TQString & s, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBsetLength\fR ( uint newLen )"
@@ -954,16 +954,16 @@ Returns the TQChar at index \fIi\fR by value.
 Equivalent to at(\fIi\fR).
 .PP
 See also ref().
-.SH "int TQString::contains ( TQChar c, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "int TQString::contains ( TQChar c, bool cs = true ) const"
 Returns the number of times the character \fIc\fR occurs in the string.
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+If \fIcs\fR is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
     TQString string( "Trolltech and Qt" );
 .br
-    int n = string.contains( 't', FALSE );
+    int n = string.contains( 't', false );
 .br
     // n == 3
 .br
@@ -971,20 +971,20 @@ If \fIcs\fR is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the s
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp and mdi/application.cpp.
-.SH "int TQString::contains ( char c, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "int TQString::contains ( char c, bool cs = true ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
-.SH "int TQString::contains ( const char * str, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "int TQString::contains ( const char * str, bool cs = true ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Returns the number of times the string \fIstr\fR occurs in the string.
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-.SH "int TQString::contains ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+If \fIcs\fR is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+.SH "int TQString::contains ( const TQString & str, bool cs = true ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Returns the number of times \fIstr\fR occurs in the string.
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+If \fIcs\fR is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
 .PP
 This function counts overlapping strings, so in the example below, there are two instances of "ana" in "bananas".
 .PP
@@ -1008,7 +1008,7 @@ This function counts overlapping matches, so in the example below, there are fou
 .br
         TQString str = "banana and panama";
 .br
-        TQRegExp rxp = TQRegExp( "a[nm]a", TRUE, FALSE );
+        TQRegExp rxp = TQRegExp( "a[nm]a", true, false );
 .br
         int i = str.contains( rxp );    // i == 4
 .br
@@ -1025,18 +1025,18 @@ In TQt 2.0 and later, all calls to this function are needless. Just remove them.
 Returns a pointer to a '&#92;0'-terminated classic C string.
 .PP
 In TQt 1.x, this returned a char* allowing direct manipulation of the string as a sequence of bytes. In TQt 2.x where TQString is a Unicode string, char* conversion constructs a temporary string, and hence direct character operations are meaningless.
-.SH "bool TQString::endsWith ( const TQString & s, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the string ends with \fIs\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+.SH "bool TQString::endsWith ( const TQString & s, bool cs = true ) const"
+Returns true if the string ends with \fIs\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+If \fIcs\fR is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
         TQString str( "Bananas" );
 .br
-        str.endsWith( "anas" );         // returns TRUE
+        str.endsWith( "anas" );         // returns true
 .br
-        str.endsWith( "pple" );         // returns FALSE
+        str.endsWith( "pple" );         // returns false
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -1071,26 +1071,26 @@ Returns the position of the first match of \fIrx\fR or -1 if no match was found.
 See also findRev(), replace(), and contains().
 .PP
 Example: network/mail/smtp.cpp.
-.SH "int TQString::find ( TQChar c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "int TQString::find ( TQChar c, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Finds the first occurrence of the character \fIc\fR, starting at position \fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR is -1, the search starts at the last character; if -2, at the next to last character and so on. (See findRev() for searching backwards.)
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+If \fIcs\fR is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
 .PP
 Returns the position of \fIc\fR or -1 if \fIc\fR could not be found.
-.SH "int TQString::find ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "int TQString::find ( char c, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Find character \fIc\fR starting from position \fIindex\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-.SH "int TQString::find ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+If \fIcs\fR is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+.SH "int TQString::find ( const TQString & str, int index = 0, bool cs = true ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Finds the first occurrence of the string \fIstr\fR, starting at position \fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR is -1, the search starts at the last character, if it is -2, at the next to last character and so on. (See findRev() for searching backwards.)
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+If \fIcs\fR is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
 .PP
 Returns the position of \fIstr\fR or -1 if \fIstr\fR could not be found.
 .SH "int TQString::find ( const char * str, int index = 0 ) const"
@@ -1099,14 +1099,14 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 Equivalent to find(TQString(\fIstr\fR), \fIindex\fR).
 .SH "int TQString::findRev ( const char * str, int index = -1 ) const"
 Equivalent to findRev(TQString(\fIstr\fR), \fIindex\fR).
-.SH "int TQString::findRev ( TQChar c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "int TQString::findRev ( TQChar c, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Finds the first occurrence of the character \fIc\fR, starting at position \fIindex\fR and searching backwards. If the index is -1, the search starts at the last character, if it is -2, at the next to last character and so on.
 .PP
 Returns the position of \fIc\fR or -1 if \fIc\fR could not be found.
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+If \fIcs\fR is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -1115,20 +1115,20 @@ If \fIcs\fR is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the s
         int i = string.findRev( 'a' );      // i == 5
 .br
 .fi
-.SH "int TQString::findRev ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "int TQString::findRev ( char c, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Find character \fIc\fR starting from position \fIindex\fR and working backwards.
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-.SH "int TQString::findRev ( const TQString & str, int index = -1, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+If \fIcs\fR is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+.SH "int TQString::findRev ( const TQString & str, int index = -1, bool cs = true ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Finds the first occurrence of the string \fIstr\fR, starting at position \fIindex\fR and searching backwards. If the index is -1, the search starts at the last character, if it is -2, at the next to last character and so on.
 .PP
 Returns the position of \fIstr\fR or -1 if \fIstr\fR could not be found.
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+If \fIcs\fR is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -1250,22 +1250,22 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Insert character \fIc\fR at position \fIindex\fR.
 .SH "bool TQString::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the string is empty, i.e. if length() == 0; otherwise returns FALSE. Null strings are also empty.
+Returns true if the string is empty, i.e. if length() == 0; otherwise returns false. Null strings are also empty.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
         TQString a( "" );
 .br
-        a.isEmpty();        // TRUE
+        a.isEmpty();        // true
 .br
-        a.isNull();         // FALSE
+        a.isNull();         // false
 .br
 .br
         TQString b;
 .br
-        b.isEmpty();        // TRUE
+        b.isEmpty();        // true
 .br
-        b.isNull();         // TRUE
+        b.isNull();         // true
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -1274,15 +1274,15 @@ See also isNull() and length().
 Examples:
 .)l addressbook/mainwindow.cpp, chart/chartform.cpp, chart/chartform_canvas.cpp, network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp, qmag/qmag.cpp, and qwerty/qwerty.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQString::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if the string is null; otherwise returns FALSE. A null string is always empty.
+Returns true if the string is null; otherwise returns false. A null string is always empty.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
         TQString a;          // a.unicode() == 0, a.length() == 0
 .br
-        a.isNull();         // TRUE, because a.unicode() == 0
+        a.isNull();         // true, because a.unicode() == 0
 .br
-        a.isEmpty();        // TRUE, because a.length() == 0
+        a.isEmpty();        // true, because a.length() == 0
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -1317,12 +1317,12 @@ The whole string is returned if \fIlen\fR exceeds the length of the string.
 See also right(), mid(), and isEmpty().
 .PP
 Example: themes/themes.cpp.
-.SH "TQString TQString::leftJustify ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const"
+.SH "TQString TQString::leftJustify ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = false ) const"
 Returns a string of length \fIwidth\fR that contains this string padded by the \fIfill\fR character.
 .PP
-If \fItruncate\fR is FALSE and the length of the string is more than \fIwidth\fR, then the returned string is a copy of the string.
+If \fItruncate\fR is false and the length of the string is more than \fIwidth\fR, then the returned string is a copy of the string.
 .PP
-If \fItruncate\fR is TRUE and the length of the string is more than \fIwidth\fR, then any characters in a copy of the string after length \fIwidth\fR are removed, and the copy is returned.
+If \fItruncate\fR is true and the length of the string is more than \fIwidth\fR, then any characters in a copy of the string after length \fIwidth\fR are removed, and the copy is returned.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -1462,7 +1462,7 @@ Returns ascii() as a std::string.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR The function may cause an application to crash if a static C run-time is in use. This can happen in Microsoft Visual C++ if TQt is configured as single-threaded. A safe alternative is to call ascii() directly and construct a std::string manually.
 .SH "bool TQString::operator! () const"
-Returns TRUE if this is a null string; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this is a null string; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -1643,12 +1643,12 @@ If \fIindex\fR is beyond the length of the string, nothing happens. If \fIindex\
 .fi
 .PP
 See also insert() and replace().
-.SH "TQString & TQString::remove ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE )"
+.SH "TQString & TQString::remove ( const TQString & str, bool cs = true )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Removes every occurrence of \fIstr\fR in the string. Returns a reference to the string.
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+If \fIcs\fR is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
 .PP
 This is the same as replace(\fIstr\fR, "", \fIcs\fR).
 .SH "TQString & TQString::remove ( TQChar c )"
@@ -1708,12 +1708,12 @@ This is the same as replace(\fIindex\fR, \fIlen\fR, TQString(\fIc\fR)).
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 This is the same as replace(\fIindex\fR, \fIlen\fR, TQChar(\fIc\fR)).
-.SH "TQString & TQString::replace ( TQChar c, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )"
+.SH "TQString & TQString::replace ( TQChar c, const TQString & after, bool cs = true )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Replaces every occurrence of the character \fIc\fR in the string with \fIafter\fR. Returns a reference to the string.
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+If \fIcs\fR is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
@@ -1726,18 +1726,18 @@ Example:
     // s == "a or b or c"
 .br
 .fi
-.SH "TQString & TQString::replace ( char c, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )"
+.SH "TQString & TQString::replace ( char c, const TQString & after, bool cs = true )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Replaces every occurrence of the character \fIc\fR in the string with \fIafter\fR. Returns a reference to the string.
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
-.SH "TQString & TQString::replace ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )"
+If \fIcs\fR is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+.SH "TQString & TQString::replace ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = true )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Replaces every occurrence of the string \fIbefore\fR in the string with the string \fIafter\fR. Returns a reference to the string.
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+If \fIcs\fR is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
@@ -1826,12 +1826,12 @@ If \fIlen\fR is greater than the length of the string then the whole string is r
 See also left(), mid(), and isEmpty().
 .PP
 Example: fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
-.SH "TQString TQString::rightJustify ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = FALSE ) const"
+.SH "TQString TQString::rightJustify ( uint width, TQChar fill = ' ', bool truncate = false ) const"
 Returns a string of length \fIwidth\fR that contains the \fIfill\fR character followed by the string.
 .PP
-If \fItruncate\fR is FALSE and the length of the string is more than \fIwidth\fR, then the returned string is a copy of the string.
+If \fItruncate\fR is false and the length of the string is more than \fIwidth\fR, then the returned string is a copy of the string.
 .PP
-If \fItruncate\fR is TRUE and the length of the string is more than \fIwidth\fR, then the resulting string is truncated at position \fIwidth\fR.
+If \fItruncate\fR is true and the length of the string is more than \fIwidth\fR, then the resulting string is truncated at position \fIwidth\fR.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -2042,7 +2042,7 @@ See also setLatin1() and isNull().
 .SH "TQString TQString::simplifyWhiteSpace () const"
 Returns a string that has whitespace removed from the start and the end, and which has each sequence of internal whitespace replaced with a single space.
 .PP
-Whitespace means any character for which TQChar::isSpace() returns TRUE. This includes Unicode characters with decimal values 9 (TAB), 10 (LF), 11 (VT), 12 (FF), 13 (CR), and 32 (Space).
+Whitespace means any character for which TQChar::isSpace() returns true. This includes Unicode characters with decimal values 9 (TAB), 10 (LF), 11 (VT), 12 (FF), 13 (CR), and 32 (Space).
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -2084,18 +2084,18 @@ Examples:
 Squeezes the string's capacity to the current content.
 .PP
 See also capacity() and reserve().
-.SH "bool TQString::startsWith ( const TQString & s, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the string starts with \fIs\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+.SH "bool TQString::startsWith ( const TQString & s, bool cs = true ) const"
+Returns true if the string starts with \fIs\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+If \fIcs\fR is true (the default), the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
         TQString str( "Bananas" );
 .br
-        str.startsWith( "Ban" );     // returns TRUE
+        str.startsWith( "Ban" );     // returns true
 .br
-        str.startsWith( "Car" );     // returns FALSE
+        str.startsWith( "Car" );     // returns false
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -2103,7 +2103,7 @@ See also endsWith().
 .SH "TQString TQString::stripWhiteSpace () const"
 Returns a string that has whitespace removed from the start and the end.
 .PP
-Whitespace means any character for which TQChar::isSpace() returns TRUE. This includes Unicode characters with decimal values 9 (TAB), 10 (LF), 11 (VT), 12 (FF), 13 (CR) and 32 (Space), and may also include other Unicode characters.
+Whitespace means any character for which TQChar::isSpace() returns true. This includes Unicode characters with decimal values 9 (TAB), 10 (LF), 11 (VT), 12 (FF), 13 (CR) and 32 (Space), and may also include other Unicode characters.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -2117,7 +2117,7 @@ See also simplifyWhiteSpace().
 .SH "double TQString::toDouble ( bool * ok = 0 ) const"
 Returns the string converted to a \fCdouble\fR value.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to false; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -2191,7 +2191,7 @@ Returns the string converted to a \fCfloat\fR value.
 .PP
 Returns 0.0 if the conversion fails.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to false; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .PP
 For information on how string-to-number functions in TQString handle localized input, see toDouble().
 .PP
@@ -2209,7 +2209,7 @@ Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
 .PP
 Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to false; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -2217,9 +2217,9 @@ If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE; o
 .br
         bool ok;
 .br
-        int hex = str.toInt( &ok, 16 );     // hex == 255, ok == TRUE
+        int hex = str.toInt( &ok, 16 );     // hex == 255, ok == true
 .br
-        int dec = str.toInt( &ok, 10 );     // dec == 0, ok == FALSE
+        int dec = str.toInt( &ok, 10 );     // dec == 0, ok == false
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -2239,7 +2239,7 @@ Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
 .PP
 Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to false; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .PP
 Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
 .PP
@@ -2257,7 +2257,7 @@ Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
 .PP
 Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to false; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .PP
 Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
 .PP
@@ -2275,7 +2275,7 @@ Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
 .PP
 Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to false; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .PP
 Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
 .PP
@@ -2293,7 +2293,7 @@ Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
 .PP
 Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to false; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .PP
 Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
 .PP
@@ -2311,7 +2311,7 @@ Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
 .PP
 Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to false; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .PP
 Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
 .PP
@@ -2329,7 +2329,7 @@ Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
 .PP
 Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to false; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .PP
 Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
 .PP
@@ -2347,7 +2347,7 @@ Otherwise it is assumed to be decimal.
 .PP
 Returns 0 if the conversion fails.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: if a conversion error occurs, \fI*ok\fR is set to false; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to true.
 .PP
 Leading and trailing whitespace is ignored by this function.
 .PP
@@ -2401,7 +2401,7 @@ See also fromUtf8(), ascii(), latin1(), and local8Bit().
 Example: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h.
 .SH RELATED FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "bool operator!= ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is not equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is not equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
 .PP
 Equivalent to compare(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) != 0.
 .PP
@@ -2409,7 +2409,7 @@ See also isNull() and isEmpty().
 .SH "bool operator!= ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is not equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is not equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
 .PP
 Equivalent to compare(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) != 0.
 .PP
@@ -2417,7 +2417,7 @@ See also isNull() and isEmpty().
 .SH "bool operator!= ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is not equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is not equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
 .PP
 Equivalent to compare(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) != 0.
 .PP
@@ -2449,13 +2449,13 @@ Returns a string which is the result of concatenating the character \fIc\fR and
 .PP
 Equivalent to \fIs\fR.prepend(\fIc\fR).
 .SH "bool operator< ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is lexically less than \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison is case sensitive.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is lexically less than \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false. The comparison is case sensitive.
 .PP
 Equivalent to compare(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) < 0.
 .SH "bool operator< ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is lexically less than \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison is case sensitive.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is lexically less than \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false. The comparison is case sensitive.
 .PP
 Equivalent to compare(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) < 0.
 .SH "TQDataStream & operator<< ( TQDataStream & s, const TQString & str )"
@@ -2463,7 +2463,7 @@ Writes the string \fIstr\fR to the stream \fIs\fR.
 .PP
 See also Format of the TQDataStream operators
 .SH "bool operator<= ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is lexically less than or equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison is case sensitive. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is lexically less than or equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false. The comparison is case sensitive. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
 .PP
 Equivalent to compare(\fIs1\fR,\fIs2\fR) <= 0.
 .PP
@@ -2471,13 +2471,13 @@ See also isNull() and isEmpty().
 .SH "bool operator<= ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is lexically less than or equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison is case sensitive. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is lexically less than or equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false. The comparison is case sensitive. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
 .PP
 Equivalent to compare(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) <= 0.
 .PP
 See also isNull() and isEmpty().
 .SH "bool operator== ( const TQString & s1, const TQString & s2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
 .PP
 Equivalent to compare(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) == 0.
 .PP
@@ -2485,7 +2485,7 @@ See also isNull() and isEmpty().
 .SH "bool operator== ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
 .PP
 Equivalent to compare(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) == 0.
 .PP
@@ -2493,23 +2493,23 @@ See also isNull() and isEmpty().
 .SH "bool operator== ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
 .PP
 Equivalent to compare(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) == 0.
 .PP
 See also isNull() and isEmpty().
 .SH "bool operator> ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is lexically greater than \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison is case sensitive.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is lexically greater than \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false. The comparison is case sensitive.
 .PP
 Equivalent to compare(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) > 0.
 .SH "bool operator> ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is lexically greater than \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison is case sensitive.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is lexically greater than \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false. The comparison is case sensitive.
 .PP
 Equivalent to compare(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) > 0.
 .SH "bool operator>= ( const TQString & s1, const char * s2 )"
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is lexically greater than or equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison is case sensitive. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is lexically greater than or equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false. The comparison is case sensitive. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
 .PP
 Equivalent to compare(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) >= 0.
 .PP
@@ -2517,7 +2517,7 @@ See also isNull() and isEmpty().
 .SH "bool operator>= ( const char * s1, const TQString & s2 )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIs1\fR is lexically greater than or equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. The comparison is case sensitive. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
+Returns true if \fIs1\fR is lexically greater than or equal to \fIs2\fR; otherwise returns false. The comparison is case sensitive. Note that a null string is not equal to a not-null empty string.
 .PP
 Equivalent to compare(\fIs1\fR, \fIs2\fR) >= 0.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqstringlist.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqstringlist.3qt
index 1eea14bdf..f3ac88210 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqstringlist.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqstringlist.3qt
@@ -39,13 +39,13 @@ Inherits TQValueList<TQString>.
 .BI "TQString \fBjoin\fR ( const TQString & sep ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQStringList \fBgrep\fR ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "TQStringList \fBgrep\fR ( const TQString & str, bool cs = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQStringList \fBgrep\fR ( const TQRegExp & rx ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQStringList & \fBgres\fR ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )"
+.BI "TQStringList & \fBgres\fR ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQStringList & \fBgres\fR ( const TQRegExp & rx, const TQString & after )"
@@ -57,13 +57,13 @@ Inherits TQValueList<TQString>.
 .BI "TQStringList \fBfromStrList\fR ( const TQStrList & ascii )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQStringList \fBsplit\fR ( const TQString & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )"
+.BI "TQStringList \fBsplit\fR ( const TQString & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQStringList \fBsplit\fR ( const TQChar & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )"
+.BI "TQStringList \fBsplit\fR ( const TQChar & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQStringList \fBsplit\fR ( const TQRegExp & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )"
+.BI "TQStringList \fBsplit\fR ( const TQRegExp & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = false )"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -185,10 +185,10 @@ Constructs a string list consisting of the single string \fIi\fR. Longer lists a
 Constructs a string list consisting of the single Latin-1 string \fIi\fR.
 .SH "TQStringList TQStringList::fromStrList ( const TQStrList & ascii )\fC [static]\fR"
 Converts from an ASCII-TQStrList \fIascii\fR to a TQStringList (Unicode).
-.SH "TQStringList TQStringList::grep ( const TQString & str, bool cs = TRUE ) const"
+.SH "TQStringList TQStringList::grep ( const TQString & str, bool cs = true ) const"
 Returns a list of all the strings containing the substring \fIstr\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE, the grep is done case-sensitively; otherwise case is ignored.
+If \fIcs\fR is true, the grep is done case-sensitively; otherwise case is ignored.
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -209,10 +209,10 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 Returns a list of all the strings that match the regular expression \fIrx\fR.
 .PP
 See also TQString::find().
-.SH "TQStringList & TQStringList::gres ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = TRUE )"
+.SH "TQStringList & TQStringList::gres ( const TQString & before, const TQString & after, bool cs = true )"
 Replaces every occurrence of the string \fIbefore\fR in the strings that constitute the string list with the string \fIafter\fR. Returns a reference to the string list.
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE, the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
+If \fIcs\fR is true, the search is case sensitive; otherwise the search is case insensitive.
 .PP
 Example:
 .PP
@@ -280,12 +280,12 @@ Sorting is very fast. It uses the TQt Template Library's efficient HeapSort impl
 If you want to sort your strings in an arbitrary order consider using a TQMap. For example you could use a TQMap<TQString,TQString> to create a case-insensitive ordering (e.g. mapping the lowercase text to the text), or a TQMap<int,TQString> to sort the strings by some integer index, etc.
 .PP
 Example: themes/themes.cpp.
-.SH "TQStringList TQStringList::split ( const TQRegExp & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "TQStringList TQStringList::split ( const TQRegExp & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = false )\fC [static]\fR"
 Splits the string \fIstr\fR into strings wherever the regular expression \fIsep\fR occurs, and returns the list of those strings.
 .PP
-If \fIallowEmptyEntries\fR is TRUE, a null string is inserted in the list wherever the separator matches twice without intervening text.
+If \fIallowEmptyEntries\fR is true, a null string is inserted in the list wherever the separator matches twice without intervening text.
 .PP
-For example, if you split the string "a,,b,c" on commas, split() returns the three-item list "a", "b", "c" if \fIallowEmptyEntries\fR is FALSE (the default), and the four-item list "a", "", "b", "c" if \fIallowEmptyEntries\fR is TRUE.
+For example, if you split the string "a,,b,c" on commas, split() returns the three-item list "a", "b", "c" if \fIallowEmptyEntries\fR is false (the default), and the four-item list "a", "", "b", "c" if \fIallowEmptyEntries\fR is true.
 .PP
 If \fIsep\fR does not match anywhere in \fIstr\fR, split() returns a single element list with the element containing the single string \fIstr\fR.
 .PP
@@ -293,17 +293,17 @@ See also join() and TQString::section().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l chart/element.cpp, dirview/dirview.cpp, and network/httpd/httpd.cpp.
-.SH "TQStringList TQStringList::split ( const TQString & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "TQStringList TQStringList::split ( const TQString & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = false )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 This version of the function uses a TQString as separator, rather than a regular expression.
 .PP
 If \fIsep\fR is an empty string, the return value is a list of one-character strings: split( TQString( "" ), "four" ) returns the four-item list, "f", "o", "u", "r".
 .PP
-If \fIallowEmptyEntries\fR is TRUE, a null string is inserted in the list wherever the separator matches twice without intervening text.
+If \fIallowEmptyEntries\fR is true, a null string is inserted in the list wherever the separator matches twice without intervening text.
 .PP
 See also join() and TQString::section().
-.SH "TQStringList TQStringList::split ( const TQChar & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = FALSE )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "TQStringList TQStringList::split ( const TQChar & sep, const TQString & str, bool allowEmptyEntries = false )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 This version of the function uses a TQChar as separator, rather than a regular expression.
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqstrlist.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqstrlist.3qt
index 3bae180a3..0dc5371d5 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqstrlist.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqstrlist.3qt
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Inherited by TQStrIList.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQStrList\fR ( bool deepCopies = TRUE )"
+.BI "\fBTQStrList\fR ( bool deepCopies = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fBTQStrList\fR ( const TQStrList & list )"
@@ -51,8 +51,8 @@ The TQStrListIterator class is an iterator for TQStrList.
 .PP
 See also Collection Classes, Text Related Classes, and Non-GUI Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQStrList::TQStrList ( bool deepCopies = TRUE )"
-Constructs an empty list of strings. Will make deep copies of all inserted strings if \fIdeepCopies\fR is TRUE, or use shallow copies if \fIdeepCopies\fR is FALSE.
+.SH "TQStrList::TQStrList ( bool deepCopies = true )"
+Constructs an empty list of strings. Will make deep copies of all inserted strings if \fIdeepCopies\fR is true, or use shallow copies if \fIdeepCopies\fR is false.
 .SH "TQStrList::TQStrList ( const TQStrList & list )"
 Constructs a copy of \fIlist\fR.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqstyle.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqstyle.3qt
index 194a2e6ac..a39ffa754 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqstyle.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqstyle.3qt
@@ -530,11 +530,11 @@ This enum represents a StyleHint. A StyleHint is a general look and/or feel hint
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_BackgroundMode\fR - the background mode for a TQScrollBar. Possible values are any of those in the BackgroundMode enum.
 .TP
-\fCTQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_MiddleClickAbsolutePosition\fR - a boolean value. If TRUE, middle clicking on a scrollbar causes the slider to jump to that position. If FALSE, the middle clicking is ignored.
+\fCTQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_MiddleClickAbsolutePosition\fR - a boolean value. If true, middle clicking on a scrollbar causes the slider to jump to that position. If false, the middle clicking is ignored.
 .TP
-\fCTQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_LeftClickAbsolutePosition\fR - a boolean value. If TRUE, left clicking on a scrollbar causes the slider to jump to that position. If FALSE, the left clicking will behave as appropriate for each control.
+\fCTQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_LeftClickAbsolutePosition\fR - a boolean value. If true, left clicking on a scrollbar causes the slider to jump to that position. If false, the left clicking will behave as appropriate for each control.
 .TP
-\fCTQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_ScrollWhenPointerLeavesControl\fR - a boolean value. If TRUE, when clicking a scrollbar SubControl, holding the mouse button down and moving the pointer outside the SubControl, the scrollbar continues to scroll. If FALSE, the scollbar stops scrolling when the pointer leaves the SubControl.
+\fCTQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_ScrollWhenPointerLeavesControl\fR - a boolean value. If true, when clicking a scrollbar SubControl, holding the mouse button down and moving the pointer outside the SubControl, the scrollbar continues to scroll. If false, the scollbar stops scrolling when the pointer leaves the SubControl.
 .TP
 \fCTQStyle::SH_TabBar_Alignment\fR - the alignment for tabs in a TQTabWidget. Possible values are TQt::AlignLeft, TQt::AlignCenter and TQt::AlignRight.
 .TP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqstyleoption.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqstyleoption.3qt
index 7055413ea..ac7a980c1 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqstyleoption.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqstyleoption.3qt
@@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Returns a TQFrame::Shape value if the appropriate constructor was called; otherw
 .SH "int TQStyleOption::headerSection () const"
 Returns the header section if the appropriate constructor was called; otherwise the return value is undefined.
 .SH "bool TQStyleOption::isDefault () const"
-Returns TRUE if the option was constructed with the default constructor; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the option was constructed with the default constructor; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int TQStyleOption::lineWidth () const"
 Returns the line width if the appropriate constructor was called; otherwise the return value is undefined.
 .SH "TQListViewItem * TQStyleOption::listViewItem () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqstylesheet.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqstylesheet.3qt
index 48678dc44..32e5fac0f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqstylesheet.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqstylesheet.3qt
@@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Returns the style called \fIname\fR or 0 if there is no such style (const version)
 .SH "bool TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText ( const TQString & text )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the string \fItext\fR is likely to be rich text; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the string \fItext\fR is likely to be rich text; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 This function uses a fast and therefore simple heuristic. It mainly checks whether there is something that looks like a tag before the first line break. Although the result may be correct for common cases, there is no guarantee.
 .SH "void TQStyleSheet::scaleFont ( TQFont & font, int logicalSize ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqstylesheetitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqstylesheetitem.3qt
index 48ba7a90f..b08fd8922 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqstylesheetitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqstylesheetitem.3qt
@@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ Returns the alignment of this style. Possible values are AlignAuto, AlignLeft, A
 .PP
 See also setAlignment() and TQt::AlignmentFlags.
 .SH "bool TQStyleSheetItem::allowedInContext ( const TQStyleSheetItem * s ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this style can be nested into an element of style \fIs\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this style can be nested into an element of style \fIs\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also contexts() and setContexts().
 .SH "TQColor TQStyleSheetItem::color () const"
@@ -274,15 +274,15 @@ Returns a space-separated list of names of styles that may contain elements of t
 .PP
 See also setContexts().
 .SH "bool TQStyleSheetItem::definesFontItalic () const"
-Returns TRUE if the style defines a font shape; otherwise returns FALSE. A style does not define any shape until setFontItalic() is called.
+Returns true if the style defines a font shape; otherwise returns false. A style does not define any shape until setFontItalic() is called.
 .PP
 See also setFontItalic() and fontItalic().
 .SH "bool TQStyleSheetItem::definesFontStrikeOut () const"
-Returns TRUE if the style defines a setting for the strikeOut property of the font; otherwise returns FALSE. A style does not define this until setFontStrikeOut() is called.
+Returns true if the style defines a setting for the strikeOut property of the font; otherwise returns false. A style does not define this until setFontStrikeOut() is called.
 .PP
 See also setFontStrikeOut() and fontStrikeOut().
 .SH "bool TQStyleSheetItem::definesFontUnderline () const"
-Returns TRUE if the style defines a setting for the underline property of the font; otherwise returns FALSE. A style does not define this until setFontUnderline() is called.
+Returns true if the style defines a setting for the underline property of the font; otherwise returns false. A style does not define this until setFontUnderline() is called.
 .PP
 See also setFontUnderline() and fontUnderline().
 .SH "DisplayMode TQStyleSheetItem::displayMode () const"
@@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Returns the font family setting of the style. This is either a valid font family
 .PP
 See also setFontFamily(), TQFont::family(), and TQFont::setFamily().
 .SH "bool TQStyleSheetItem::fontItalic () const"
-Returns TRUE if the style sets an italic font; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the style sets an italic font; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setFontItalic() and definesFontItalic().
 .SH "int TQStyleSheetItem::fontSize () const"
@@ -302,11 +302,11 @@ Returns the font size setting of the style. This is either a valid point size or
 .PP
 See also setFontSize(), TQFont::pointSize(), and TQFont::setPointSize().
 .SH "bool TQStyleSheetItem::fontStrikeOut () const"
-Returns TRUE if the style sets a strike out font; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the style sets a strike out font; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setFontStrikeOut() and definesFontStrikeOut().
 .SH "bool TQStyleSheetItem::fontUnderline () const"
-Returns TRUE if the style sets an underlined font; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the style sets an underlined font; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setFontUnderline() and definesFontUnderline().
 .SH "int TQStyleSheetItem::fontWeight () const"
@@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ See also setNumberOfColumns(), displayMode(), and setDisplayMode().
 .SH "TQStyleSheetItem & TQStyleSheetItem::operator= ( const TQStyleSheetItem & other )"
 Assignment. Assings a copy of \fIother\fR that is not bound to any style sheet. Unbounds first from previous style sheet.
 .SH "bool TQStyleSheetItem::selfNesting () const"
-Returns TRUE if this style has self-nesting enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this style has self-nesting enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setSelfNesting().
 .SH "void TQStyleSheetItem::setAlignment ( int f )"
@@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ Sets the alignment to \fIf\fR. This only makes sense for styles with a display m
 .PP
 See also alignment(), displayMode(), and TQt::AlignmentFlags.
 .SH "void TQStyleSheetItem::setAnchor ( bool anc )"
-If \fIanc\fR is TRUE, sets this style to be an anchor (hypertext link); otherwise sets it to not be an anchor. Elements in this style link to other documents or anchors.
+If \fIanc\fR is true, sets this style to be an anchor (hypertext link); otherwise sets it to not be an anchor. Elements in this style link to other documents or anchors.
 .PP
 See also isAnchor().
 .SH "void TQStyleSheetItem::setColor ( const TQColor & c )"
@@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ Sets the font family setting of the style to \fIfam\fR.
 .PP
 See also fontFamily(), TQFont::family(), and TQFont::setFamily().
 .SH "void TQStyleSheetItem::setFontItalic ( bool italic )"
-If \fIitalic\fR is TRUE sets italic for the style; otherwise sets upright.
+If \fIitalic\fR is true sets italic for the style; otherwise sets upright.
 .PP
 See also fontItalic() and definesFontItalic().
 .SH "void TQStyleSheetItem::setFontSize ( int s )"
@@ -388,11 +388,11 @@ Sets the font size setting of the style to \fIs\fR points.
 .PP
 See also fontSize(), TQFont::pointSize(), and TQFont::setPointSize().
 .SH "void TQStyleSheetItem::setFontStrikeOut ( bool strikeOut )"
-If \fIstrikeOut\fR is TRUE, sets strike out for the style; otherwise sets no strike out.
+If \fIstrikeOut\fR is true, sets strike out for the style; otherwise sets no strike out.
 .PP
 See also fontStrikeOut() and definesFontStrikeOut().
 .SH "void TQStyleSheetItem::setFontUnderline ( bool underline )"
-If \fIunderline\fR is TRUE, sets underline for the style; otherwise sets no underline.
+If \fIunderline\fR is true, sets underline for the style; otherwise sets no underline.
 .PP
 See also fontUnderline() and definesFontUnderline().
 .SH "void TQStyleSheetItem::setFontWeight ( int w )"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqt.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqt.3qt
index 9a8716ffe..9465c1161 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqt.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqt.3qt
@@ -1216,7 +1216,7 @@ This enum is used in widgets that can display both plain text and rich text, e.g
 .TP
 \fCQt::RichText\fR - The text string is interpreted as a rich text string using the current TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet().
 .TP
-\fCQt::AutoText\fR - The text string is interpreted as for RichText if TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText() returns TRUE, otherwise as PlainText.
+\fCQt::AutoText\fR - The text string is interpreted as for RichText if TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText() returns true, otherwise as PlainText.
 .TP
 \fCQt::LogText\fR - A special, limited text format which is only used by TQTextEdit in an optimized mode.
 .SH "TQt::TimeSpec"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtab.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtab.3qt
index dd6140fa1..df1789bce 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtab.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtab.3qt
@@ -78,11 +78,11 @@ Return the TQIconSet of the TQTab.
 .SH "int TQTab::identifier () const"
 Return the TQTab's identifier.
 .SH "bool TQTab::isEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the TQTab is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the TQTab is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQRect TQTab::rect () const"
 Return the TQRect for the TQTab.
 .SH "void TQTab::setEnabled ( bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE enable the TQTab, otherwise disable it.
+If \fIenable\fR is true enable the TQTab, otherwise disable it.
 .SH "void TQTab::setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & icon )"
 Sets the tab's iconset to \fIicon\fR
 .SH "void TQTab::setIdentifier ( int i )"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtabbar.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtabbar.3qt
index a5dfc3ab7..d909a55d5 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtabbar.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtabbar.3qt
@@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ Sets \fInewTab\fR's id to a new id. If the tab's label contains an ampersand, th
 .PP
 See also addTab().
 .SH "bool TQTabBar::isTabEnabled ( int id ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the tab with id \fIid\fR exists and is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the tab with id \fIid\fR exists and is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setTabEnabled().
 .SH "int TQTabBar::keyboardFocusTab () const"
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ TQTabBar emits the signal whenever the layout of the tab bar has been recalculat
 .SH "void TQTabBar::layoutTabs ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Lays out all existing tabs according to their label and their iconset.
 .SH "void TQTabBar::paint ( TQPainter * p, TQTab * t, bool selected ) const\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-Paints the tab \fIt\fR using painter \fIp\fR. If and only if \fIselected\fR is TRUE, \fIt\fR is drawn currently selected.
+Paints the tab \fIt\fR using painter \fIp\fR. If and only if \fIselected\fR is true, \fIt\fR is drawn currently selected.
 .PP
 This virtual function may be reimplemented to change the look of TQTabBar. If you decide to reimplement it, you may also need to reimplement sizeHint().
 .SH "void TQTabBar::paintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ See also paint().
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQWidget.
 .SH "void TQTabBar::paintLabel ( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & br, TQTab * t, bool has_focus ) const\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-Paints the label of tab \fIt\fR centered in rectangle \fIbr\fR using painter \fIp\fR. A focus indication is drawn if \fIhas_focus\fR is TRUE.
+Paints the label of tab \fIt\fR centered in rectangle \fIbr\fR using painter \fIp\fR. A focus indication is drawn if \fIhas_focus\fR is true.
 .SH "void TQTabBar::removeTab ( TQTab * t )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Removes tab \fIt\fR from the tab control, and deletes the tab.
 .SH "void TQTabBar::removeToolTip ( int index )"
@@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ See also currentTab and selected().
 .SH "void TQTabBar::setShape ( Shape )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the shape of the tabs in the tab bar. See the "shape" property for details.
 .SH "void TQTabBar::setTabEnabled ( int id, bool enabled )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Enables tab \fIid\fR if \fIenabled\fR is TRUE or disables it if \fIenabled\fR is FALSE. If \fIid\fR is currently selected, setTabEnabled(FALSE) makes another tab selected.
+Enables tab \fIid\fR if \fIenabled\fR is true or disables it if \fIenabled\fR is false. If \fIid\fR is currently selected, setTabEnabled(false) makes another tab selected.
 .PP
 setTabEnabled() updates the display if this causes a change in \fIid\fR's status.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtabdialog.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtabdialog.3qt
index 498291a12..6a2ac5eda 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtabdialog.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtabdialog.3qt
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Inherits TQDialog.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQTabDialog\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQTabDialog\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fB~TQTabDialog\fR ()"
@@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ Most of the functionality in TQTabDialog is provided by a TQTabWidget.
 .PP
 See also TQDialog and Dialog Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQTabDialog::TQTabDialog ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )"
+.SH "TQTabDialog::TQTabDialog ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 )"
 Constructs a TQTabDialog with only an OK button. The \fIparent\fR, \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR and widget flag, \fIf\fR, arguments are passed on to the TQDialog constructor.
 .SH "TQTabDialog::~TQTabDialog ()"
 Destroys the tab dialog.
@@ -262,23 +262,23 @@ The application's state should not be changed until the user clicks Apply or OK.
 .PP
 See also applyButtonPressed(), cancelButtonPressed(), and setDefaultButton().
 .SH "bool TQTabDialog::hasApplyButton () const"
-Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has an Apply button; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the tab dialog has an Apply button; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setApplyButton(), applyButtonPressed(), hasCancelButton(), and hasDefaultButton().
 .SH "bool TQTabDialog::hasCancelButton () const"
-Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has a Cancel button; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the tab dialog has a Cancel button; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setCancelButton(), cancelButtonPressed(), hasApplyButton(), and hasDefaultButton().
 .SH "bool TQTabDialog::hasDefaultButton () const"
-Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has a Defaults button; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the tab dialog has a Defaults button; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setDefaultButton(), defaultButtonPressed(), hasApplyButton(), and hasCancelButton().
 .SH "bool TQTabDialog::hasHelpButton () const"
-Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has a Help button; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the tab dialog has a Help button; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setHelpButton(), helpButtonPressed(), hasApplyButton(), and hasCancelButton().
 .SH "bool TQTabDialog::hasOkButton () const"
-Returns TRUE if the tab dialog has an OK button; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the tab dialog has an OK button; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setOkButton(), hasApplyButton(), hasCancelButton(), and hasDefaultButton().
 .SH "void TQTabDialog::helpButtonPressed ()\fC [signal]\fR"
@@ -308,15 +308,15 @@ This is a lower-level method for inserting tabs, similar to the other insertTab(
 .PP
 The \fIchild\fR is the widget to be placed on the new tab page. The \fItab\fR is the tab to display on the tab page -- normally this shows a label or an icon that identifies the tab page. The \fIindex\fR is the position where this tab page should be inserted.
 .SH "bool TQTabDialog::isTabEnabled ( TQWidget * w ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the page \fIw\fR is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the page \fIw\fR is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setTabEnabled() and TQWidget::enabled.
 .SH "bool TQTabDialog::isTabEnabled ( const char * name ) const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the page with object name \fIname\fR is enabled and FALSE if it is disabled.
+Returns true if the page with object name \fIname\fR is enabled and false if it is disabled.
 .PP
-If \fIname\fR is 0 or not the name of any of the pages, isTabEnabled() returns FALSE.
+If \fIname\fR is 0 or not the name of any of the pages, isTabEnabled() returns false.
 .PP
 See also setTabEnabled() and TQWidget::enabled.
 .SH "void TQTabDialog::removePage ( TQWidget * w )"
@@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ Replaces the TQTabBar heading the dialog by the given tab bar, \fItb\fR. Note th
 .PP
 See also tabBar().
 .SH "void TQTabDialog::setTabEnabled ( TQWidget * w, bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE the page \fIw\fR is enabled; otherwise \fIw\fR is disabled. The page's tab is redrawn appropriately.
+If \fIenable\fR is true the page \fIw\fR is enabled; otherwise \fIw\fR is disabled. The page's tab is redrawn appropriately.
 .PP
 TQTabWidget uses TQWidget::setEnabled() internally, rather than keeping a separate flag.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtable.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtable.3qt
index efb1b2dfd..77229813c 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtable.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtable.3qt
@@ -105,10 +105,10 @@ Inherited by TQDataTable.
 .BI "bool \fBisSelected\fR ( int row, int col ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "bool \fBisRowSelected\fR ( int row, bool full = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "bool \fBisRowSelected\fR ( int row, bool full = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "bool \fBisColumnSelected\fR ( int col, bool full = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "bool \fBisColumnSelected\fR ( int col, bool full = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBnumSelections\fR () const"
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Inherited by TQDataTable.
 .BI "bool \fBrowMovingEnabled\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBsortColumn\fR ( int col, bool ascending = TRUE, bool wholeRows = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBsortColumn\fR ( int col, bool ascending = true, bool wholeRows = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "bool \fBsorting\fR () const"
@@ -258,10 +258,10 @@ Inherited by TQDataTable.
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetSorting\fR ( bool b )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBswapRows\fR ( int row1, int row2, bool swapHeader = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBswapRows\fR ( int row1, int row2, bool swapHeader = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBswapColumns\fR ( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBswapColumns\fR ( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBswapCells\fR ( int row1, int col1, int row2, int col2 )"
@@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Inherited by TQDataTable.
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetCurrentCell\fR ( int row, int col )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBclearSelection\fR ( bool repaint = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBclearSelection\fR ( bool repaint = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetColumnMovingEnabled\fR ( bool b )"
@@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ Inherited by TQDataTable.
 .BI "virtual void \fBremoveColumns\fR ( const TQMemArray<int> & cols )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBeditCell\fR ( int row, int col, bool replace = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBeditCell\fR ( int row, int col, bool replace = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBsetRowLabels\fR ( const TQStringList & labels )"
@@ -491,7 +491,7 @@ TQTable is easy to use, although it does have a large API because of the compreh
 .PP
 The first line constructs the table specifying its size in rows and columns. We then insert a pixmap and some text into the \fIsame\fR cell, with the pixmap appearing to the left of the text. TQTable cells can be populated with TQTableItems, TQComboTableItems or by TQCheckTableItems. By default a vertical header appears at the left of the table showing row numbers and a horizontal header appears at the top of the table showing column numbers. (The numbers displayed start at 1, although row and column numbers within TQTable begin at 0.)
 .PP
-If you want to use mouse tracking call setMouseTracking( TRUE ) on the \fIviewport\fR; (see TQScrollView).
+If you want to use mouse tracking call setMouseTracking( true ) on the \fIviewport\fR; (see TQScrollView).
 .PP
 <center>
 .ce 1
@@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ Rows and columns can be hidden and shown with hideRow(), hideColumn(), showRow()
 .PP
 Rows and columns can be set to be moveable using rowMovingEnabled() and columnMovingEnabled(). The user can drag them to reorder them holding down the Ctrl key and dragging the mouse. For performance reasons, the default behavior of TQHeader section numbers is overridden by TQTable. Currently in TQTable, when a row or column is dragged and reordered, the section number is also changed to its new position. Therefore, there is no difference between the section and the index fields in TQHeader. The TQTable TQHeader classes do not provide a mechanism for indexing independently of the user interface ordering.
 .PP
-The table can be sorted using sortColumn(). Users can sort a column by clicking its header if setSorting() is set to TRUE. Rows can be swapped with swapRows(), columns with swapColumns() and cells with swapCells().
+The table can be sorted using sortColumn(). Users can sort a column by clicking its header if setSorting() is set to true. Rows can be swapped with swapRows(), columns with swapColumns() and cells with swapCells().
 .PP
 For editable tables (see setReadOnly()) you can set the read-only property of individual rows and columns with setRowReadOnly() and setColumnReadOnly(). (Whether a cell is editable or read-only depends on these settings and the cell's TQTableItem::EditType.)
 .PP
@@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ Resizes row \fIrow\fR so that the row height is tall enough to display the talle
 .PP
 See also adjustColumn().
 .SH "TQWidget * TQTable::beginEdit ( int row, int col, bool replace )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-This function is called to start in-place editing of the cell at \fIrow\fR, \fIcol\fR. Editing is achieved by creating an editor (createEditor() is called) and setting the cell's editor with setCellWidget() to the newly created editor. (After editing is complete endEdit() will be called to replace the cell's content with the editor's content.) If \fIreplace\fR is TRUE the editor will start empty; otherwise it will be initialized with the cell's content (if any), i.e. the user will be modifying the original cell content.
+This function is called to start in-place editing of the cell at \fIrow\fR, \fIcol\fR. Editing is achieved by creating an editor (createEditor() is called) and setting the cell's editor with setCellWidget() to the newly created editor. (After editing is complete endEdit() will be called to replace the cell's content with the editor's content.) If \fIreplace\fR is true the editor will start empty; otherwise it will be initialized with the cell's content (if any), i.e. the user will be modifying the original cell content.
 .PP
 See also endEdit().
 .SH "TQRect TQTable::cellGeometry ( int row, int col ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -659,8 +659,8 @@ If you don't use TQTableItems you may need to reimplement this function: see the
 This function deletes the widget at \fIrow\fR, \fIcol\fR. Note that the widget is not deleted immediately; instead TQObject::deleteLater() is called on the widget to avoid problems with timing issues.
 .PP
 See also cellWidget() and setCellWidget().
-.SH "void TQTable::clearSelection ( bool repaint = TRUE )\fC [slot]\fR"
-Clears all selections and repaints the appropriate regions if \fIrepaint\fR is TRUE.
+.SH "void TQTable::clearSelection ( bool repaint = true )\fC [slot]\fR"
+Clears all selections and repaints the appropriate regions if \fIrepaint\fR is true.
 .PP
 See also removeSelection().
 .SH "void TQTable::clicked ( int row, int col, int button, const TQPoint & mousePos )\fC [signal]\fR"
@@ -674,7 +674,7 @@ Returns the number of the column at position \fIx\fR. \fIx\fR must be given in c
 .PP
 See also columnPos() and rowAt().
 .SH "void TQTable::columnClicked ( int col )\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR"
-This function is called when the column \fIcol\fR has been clicked. The default implementation sorts this column if sorting() is TRUE.
+This function is called when the column \fIcol\fR has been clicked. The default implementation sorts this column if sorting() is true.
 .SH "void TQTable::columnIndexChanged ( int section, int fromIndex, int toIndex )\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR"
 This function is called when column order is to be changed, i.e. when the user moved the column header \fIsection\fR from \fIfromIndex\fR to \fItoIndex\fR.
 .PP
@@ -682,7 +682,7 @@ If you want to change the column order programmatically, call swapRows() or swap
 .PP
 See also TQHeader::indexChange() and rowIndexChanged().
 .SH "bool TQTable::columnMovingEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if columns can be moved by the user; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "columnMovingEnabled" property for details.
+Returns true if columns can be moved by the user; otherwise returns false. See the "columnMovingEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "int TQTable::columnPos ( int col ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the x-coordinate of the column \fIcol\fR in content coordinates.
 .PP
@@ -718,9 +718,9 @@ This signal is emitted when the user invokes a context menu with the right mouse
 .SH "TQWidget * TQTable::createEditor ( int row, int col, bool initFromCell ) const\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This function returns the widget which should be used as an editor for the contents of the cell at \fIrow\fR, \fIcol\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIinitFromCell\fR is TRUE, the editor is used to edit the current contents of the cell (so the editor widget should be initialized with this content). If \fIinitFromCell\fR is FALSE, the content of the cell is replaced with the new content which the user entered into the widget created by this function.
+If \fIinitFromCell\fR is true, the editor is used to edit the current contents of the cell (so the editor widget should be initialized with this content). If \fIinitFromCell\fR is false, the content of the cell is replaced with the new content which the user entered into the widget created by this function.
 .PP
-The default functionality is as follows: if \fIinitFromCell\fR is TRUE or the cell has a TQTableItem and the table item's TQTableItem::isReplaceable() is FALSE then the cell is asked to create an appropriate editor (using TQTableItem::createEditor()). Otherwise a TQLineEdit is used as the editor.
+The default functionality is as follows: if \fIinitFromCell\fR is true or the cell has a TQTableItem and the table item's TQTableItem::isReplaceable() is false then the cell is asked to create an appropriate editor (using TQTableItem::createEditor()). Otherwise a TQLineEdit is used as the editor.
 .PP
 If you want to create your own editor for certain cells, implement a custom TQTableItem subclass and reimplement TQTableItem::createEditor().
 .PP
@@ -775,11 +775,11 @@ This signal is emitted when mouse button \fIbutton\fR is double-clicked. The cel
 .PP
 See also TQt::ButtonState.
 .SH "bool TQTable::dragEnabled () const\fC [slot]\fR"
-If this function returns TRUE, the table supports dragging.
+If this function returns true, the table supports dragging.
 .PP
 See also setDragEnabled().
 .SH "TQDragObject * TQTable::dragObject ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-If the user presses the mouse on a selected cell, starts moving (i.e. dragging), and dragEnabled() is TRUE, this function is called to obtain a drag object. A drag using this object begins immediately unless dragObject() returns 0.
+If the user presses the mouse on a selected cell, starts moving (i.e. dragging), and dragEnabled() is true, this function is called to obtain a drag object. A drag using this object begins immediately unless dragObject() returns 0.
 .PP
 By default this function returns 0. You might reimplement it and create a TQDragObject depending on the selected items.
 .PP
@@ -794,10 +794,10 @@ Reimplemented from TQScrollView.
 This signal is emitted when a drop event occurred on the table.
 .PP
 \fIe\fR contains information about the drop.
-.SH "void TQTable::editCell ( int row, int col, bool replace = FALSE )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQTable::editCell ( int row, int col, bool replace = false )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Starts editing the cell at \fIrow\fR, \fIcol\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIreplace\fR is TRUE the content of this cell will be replaced by the content of the editor when editing is finished, i.e. the user will be entering new data; otherwise the current content of the cell (if any) will be modified in the editor.
+If \fIreplace\fR is true the content of this cell will be replaced by the content of the editor when editing is finished, i.e. the user will be entering new data; otherwise the current content of the cell (if any) will be modified in the editor.
 .PP
 See also beginEdit().
 .SH "EditMode TQTable::editMode () const\fC [protected]\fR"
@@ -807,9 +807,9 @@ See also TQTable::EditMode.
 .SH "void TQTable::endEdit ( int row, int col, bool accept, bool replace )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This function is called when in-place editing of the cell at \fIrow\fR, \fIcol\fR is requested to stop.
 .PP
-If the cell is not being edited or \fIaccept\fR is FALSE the function returns and the cell's contents are left unchanged.
+If the cell is not being edited or \fIaccept\fR is false the function returns and the cell's contents are left unchanged.
 .PP
-If \fIaccept\fR is TRUE the content of the editor must be transferred to the relevant cell. If \fIreplace\fR is TRUE the current content of this cell should be replaced by the content of the editor (this means removing the current TQTableItem of the cell and creating a new one for the cell). Otherwise (if possible) the content of the editor should just be set to the existing TQTableItem of this cell.
+If \fIaccept\fR is true the content of the editor must be transferred to the relevant cell. If \fIreplace\fR is true the current content of this cell should be replaced by the content of the editor (this means removing the current TQTableItem of the cell and creating a new one for the cell). Otherwise (if possible) the content of the editor should just be set to the existing TQTableItem of this cell.
 .PP
 setCellContentFromEditor() is called to replace the contents of the cell with the contents of the cell's editor.
 .PP
@@ -861,53 +861,53 @@ Inserts widget \fIw\fR at \fIrow\fR, \fIcol\fR into the internal data structure.
 .PP
 If you don't use TQTableItems you may need to reimplement this function: see the notes on large tables.
 .SH "bool TQTable::isColumnHidden ( int col ) const\fC [slot]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if column \fIcol\fR is hidden; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if column \fIcol\fR is hidden; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also hideColumn() and isRowHidden().
 .SH "bool TQTable::isColumnReadOnly ( int col ) const"
-Returns TRUE if column \fIcol\fR is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if column \fIcol\fR is read-only; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Whether a cell in this column is editable or read-only depends on the cell's EditType, and this setting: see TQTableItem::EditType.
 .PP
 See also setColumnReadOnly() and isRowReadOnly().
-.SH "bool TQTable::isColumnSelected ( int col, bool full = FALSE ) const"
-Returns TRUE if column \fIcol\fR is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
+.SH "bool TQTable::isColumnSelected ( int col, bool full = false ) const"
+Returns true if column \fIcol\fR is selected; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If \fIfull\fR is FALSE (the default), 'column is selected' means that at least one cell in the column is selected. If \fIfull\fR is TRUE, then 'column is selected' means every cell in the column is selected.
+If \fIfull\fR is false (the default), 'column is selected' means that at least one cell in the column is selected. If \fIfull\fR is true, then 'column is selected' means every cell in the column is selected.
 .PP
 See also isRowSelected() and isSelected().
 .SH "bool TQTable::isColumnStretchable ( int col ) const\fC [slot]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if column \fIcol\fR is stretchable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if column \fIcol\fR is stretchable; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setColumnStretchable() and isRowStretchable().
 .SH "bool TQTable::isEditing () const\fC [protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the EditMode is Editing or Replacing; otherwise (i.e. the EditMode is NotEditing) returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the EditMode is Editing or Replacing; otherwise (i.e. the EditMode is NotEditing) returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQTable::EditMode.
 .SH "bool TQTable::isReadOnly () const"
-Returns TRUE if the table is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "readOnly" property for details.
+Returns true if the table is read-only; otherwise returns false. See the "readOnly" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQTable::isRowHidden ( int row ) const\fC [slot]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if row \fIrow\fR is hidden; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if row \fIrow\fR is hidden; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also hideRow() and isColumnHidden().
 .SH "bool TQTable::isRowReadOnly ( int row ) const"
-Returns TRUE if row \fIrow\fR is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if row \fIrow\fR is read-only; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Whether a cell in this row is editable or read-only depends on the cell's EditType, and this setting: see TQTableItem::EditType.
 .PP
 See also setRowReadOnly() and isColumnReadOnly().
-.SH "bool TQTable::isRowSelected ( int row, bool full = FALSE ) const"
-Returns TRUE if row \fIrow\fR is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
+.SH "bool TQTable::isRowSelected ( int row, bool full = false ) const"
+Returns true if row \fIrow\fR is selected; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If \fIfull\fR is FALSE (the default), 'row is selected' means that at least one cell in the row is selected. If \fIfull\fR is TRUE, then 'row is selected' means every cell in the row is selected.
+If \fIfull\fR is false (the default), 'row is selected' means that at least one cell in the row is selected. If \fIfull\fR is true, then 'row is selected' means every cell in the row is selected.
 .PP
 See also isColumnSelected() and isSelected().
 .SH "bool TQTable::isRowStretchable ( int row ) const\fC [slot]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if row \fIrow\fR is stretchable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if row \fIrow\fR is stretchable; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setRowStretchable() and isColumnStretchable().
 .SH "bool TQTable::isSelected ( int row, int col ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the cell at \fIrow\fR, \fIcol\fR is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the cell at \fIrow\fR, \fIcol\fR is selected; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isRowSelected() and isColumnSelected().
 .SH "TQTableItem * TQTable::item ( int row, int col ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -933,7 +933,7 @@ Returns the number of selections. See the "numSelections" property for details.
 .SH "void TQTable::paintCell ( TQPainter * p, int row, int col, const TQRect & cr, bool selected, const TQColorGroup & cg )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Paints the cell at \fIrow\fR, \fIcol\fR on the painter \fIp\fR. The painter has already been translated to the cell's origin. \fIcr\fR describes the cell coordinates in the content coordinate system.
 .PP
-If \fIselected\fR is TRUE the cell is highlighted.
+If \fIselected\fR is true the cell is highlighted.
 .PP
 \fIcg\fR is the colorgroup which should be used to draw the cell content.
 .PP
@@ -949,7 +949,7 @@ Note that the painter is not clipped by default in order to get maximum efficien
 .br
     //... your drawing code
 .br
-    p->setClipping( FALSE );
+    p->setClipping( false );
 .br
 .fi
 .SH "void TQTable::paintCell ( TQPainter * p, int row, int col, const TQRect & cr, bool selected )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -1029,7 +1029,7 @@ If you want to change the order programmatically, call swapRows() or swapColumns
 .PP
 See also TQHeader::indexChange() and columnIndexChanged().
 .SH "bool TQTable::rowMovingEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if rows can be moved by the user; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "rowMovingEnabled" property for details.
+Returns true if rows can be moved by the user; otherwise returns false. See the "rowMovingEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "int TQTable::rowPos ( int row ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the y-coordinate of the row \fIrow\fR in content coordinates.
 .PP
@@ -1077,7 +1077,7 @@ Sets the section labels of the horizontalHeader() to \fIlabels\fR
 .SH "void TQTable::setColumnMovingEnabled ( bool b )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets whether columns can be moved by the user to \fIb\fR. See the "columnMovingEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "void TQTable::setColumnReadOnly ( int col, bool ro )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-If \fIro\fR is TRUE, column \fIcol\fR is set to be read-only; otherwise the column is set to be editable.
+If \fIro\fR is true, column \fIcol\fR is set to be read-only; otherwise the column is set to be editable.
 .PP
 Whether a cell in this column is editable or read-only depends on the cell's EditType, and this setting: see TQTableItem::EditType.
 .PP
@@ -1085,7 +1085,7 @@ See also isColumnReadOnly(), setRowReadOnly(), and readOnly.
 .PP
 Example: chart/setdataform.cpp.
 .SH "void TQTable::setColumnStretchable ( int col, bool stretch )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-If \fIstretch\fR is TRUE, column \fIcol\fR is set to be stretchable; otherwise column \fIcol\fR is set to be unstretchable.
+If \fIstretch\fR is true, column \fIcol\fR is set to be stretchable; otherwise column \fIcol\fR is set to be unstretchable.
 .PP
 If the table widget's width decreases or increases stretchable columns will grow narrower or wider to fit the space available as completely as possible. The user cannot manually resize stretchable columns.
 .PP
@@ -1103,7 +1103,7 @@ Moves the focus to the cell at \fIrow\fR, \fIcol\fR.
 .PP
 See also currentRow() and currentColumn().
 .SH "void TQTable::setDragEnabled ( bool b )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE, the table starts a drag (see dragObject()) when the user presses and moves the mouse on a selected cell.
+If \fIb\fR is true, the table starts a drag (see dragObject()) when the user presses and moves the mouse on a selected cell.
 .SH "void TQTable::setEditMode ( EditMode mode, int row, int col )\fC [protected]\fR"
 Sets the current edit mode to \fImode\fR, the current edit row to \fIrow\fR and the current edit column to \fIcol\fR.
 .PP
@@ -1155,13 +1155,13 @@ Sets the section labels of the verticalHeader() to \fIlabels\fR
 .SH "void TQTable::setRowMovingEnabled ( bool b )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets whether rows can be moved by the user to \fIb\fR. See the "rowMovingEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "void TQTable::setRowReadOnly ( int row, bool ro )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-If \fIro\fR is TRUE, row \fIrow\fR is set to be read-only; otherwise the row is set to be editable.
+If \fIro\fR is true, row \fIrow\fR is set to be read-only; otherwise the row is set to be editable.
 .PP
 Whether a cell in this row is editable or read-only depends on the cell's EditType, and this setting: see TQTableItem::EditType.
 .PP
 See also isRowReadOnly(), setColumnReadOnly(), and readOnly.
 .SH "void TQTable::setRowStretchable ( int row, bool stretch )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-If \fIstretch\fR is TRUE, row \fIrow\fR is set to be stretchable; otherwise row \fIrow\fR is set to be unstretchable.
+If \fIstretch\fR is true, row \fIrow\fR is set to be stretchable; otherwise row \fIrow\fR is set to be unstretchable.
 .PP
 If the table widget's height decreases or increases stretchable rows will grow shorter or taller to fit the space available as completely as possible. The user cannot manually resize stretchable rows.
 .PP
@@ -1194,15 +1194,15 @@ Shows column \fIcol\fR.
 .PP
 See also hideColumn() and showRow().
 .SH "bool TQTable::showGrid () const"
-Returns TRUE if the table's grid is displayed; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "showGrid" property for details.
+Returns true if the table's grid is displayed; otherwise returns false. See the "showGrid" property for details.
 .SH "void TQTable::showRow ( int row )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Shows row \fIrow\fR.
 .PP
 See also hideRow() and showColumn().
-.SH "void TQTable::sortColumn ( int col, bool ascending = TRUE, bool wholeRows = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Sorts column \fIcol\fR. If \fIascending\fR is TRUE the sort is in ascending order, otherwise the sort is in descending order.
+.SH "void TQTable::sortColumn ( int col, bool ascending = true, bool wholeRows = false )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Sorts column \fIcol\fR. If \fIascending\fR is true the sort is in ascending order, otherwise the sort is in descending order.
 .PP
-If \fIwholeRows\fR is TRUE, entire rows are sorted using swapRows(); otherwise only cells in the column are sorted using swapCells().
+If \fIwholeRows\fR is true, entire rows are sorted using swapRows(); otherwise only cells in the column are sorted using swapCells().
 .PP
 Note that if you are not using TQTableItems you will need to reimplement swapRows() and swapCells(). (See the notes on large tables.)
 .PP
@@ -1212,7 +1212,7 @@ Example: table/statistics/statistics.cpp.
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQDataTable.
 .SH "bool TQTable::sorting () const"
-Returns TRUE if a click on the header of a column sorts that column; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "sorting" property for details.
+Returns true if a click on the header of a column sorts that column; otherwise returns false. See the "sorting" property for details.
 .SH "void TQTable::startDrag ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Starts a drag.
 .PP
@@ -1227,24 +1227,24 @@ This function is also called when the table is sorted.
 If you don't use TQTableItems and want your users to be able to swap cells, you will need to reimplement this function. (See the notes on large tables.)
 .PP
 See also swapColumns() and swapRows().
-.SH "void TQTable::swapColumns ( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader = FALSE )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQTable::swapColumns ( int col1, int col2, bool swapHeader = false )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Swaps the data in \fIcol1\fR with \fIcol2\fR.
 .PP
 This function is used to swap the positions of two columns. It is called when the user changes the order of columns (see setColumnMovingEnabled(), and when columns are sorted.
 .PP
 If you don't use TQTableItems and want your users to be able to swap columns you will need to reimplement this function. (See the notes on large tables.)
 .PP
-If \fIswapHeader\fR is TRUE, the columns' header contents is also swapped.
+If \fIswapHeader\fR is true, the columns' header contents is also swapped.
 .PP
 See also swapCells().
-.SH "void TQTable::swapRows ( int row1, int row2, bool swapHeader = FALSE )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQTable::swapRows ( int row1, int row2, bool swapHeader = false )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Swaps the data in \fIrow1\fR and \fIrow2\fR.
 .PP
 This function is used to swap the positions of two rows. It is called when the user changes the order of rows (see setRowMovingEnabled()), and when rows are sorted.
 .PP
 If you don't use TQTableItems and want your users to be able to swap rows, e.g. for sorting, you will need to reimplement this function. (See the notes on large tables.)
 .PP
-If \fIswapHeader\fR is TRUE, the rows' header contents is also swapped.
+If \fIswapHeader\fR is true, the rows' header contents is also swapped.
 .PP
 This function will not update the TQTable, you will have to do this manually, e.g. by calling updateContents().
 .PP
@@ -1284,7 +1284,7 @@ Examples:
 .SH "bool columnMovingEnabled"
 This property holds whether columns can be moved by the user.
 .PP
-The default is FALSE. Columns are moved by dragging whilst holding down the Ctrl key.
+The default is false. Columns are moved by dragging whilst holding down the Ctrl key.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user interaction, the mapping between header indexes and section exposed by TQHeader will not reflect the order of the headers in the table; i.e., TQTable does not call TQHeader::moveSection() to move sections but handles move operations internally.
 .PP
@@ -1328,7 +1328,7 @@ Set this property's value with setReadOnly() and get this property's value with
 .SH "bool rowMovingEnabled"
 This property holds whether rows can be moved by the user.
 .PP
-The default is FALSE. Rows are moved by dragging whilst holding down the Ctrl key.
+The default is false. Rows are moved by dragging whilst holding down the Ctrl key.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user interaction, the mapping between header indexes and section exposed by TQHeader will not reflect the order of the headers in the table; i.e., TQTable does not call TQHeader::moveSection() to move sections but handles move operations internally.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtableitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtableitem.3qt
index 4de697f4d..73f445ef9 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtableitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtableitem.3qt
@@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ It is important to ensure that your custom widget can accept the keyboard focus,
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-By default, table items may be replaced by new TQTableItems during the lifetime of a TQTable. Therefore, if you create your own subclass of TQTableItem, and you want to ensure that this does not happen, you must call setReplaceable(FALSE) in the constructor of your subclass.
+By default, table items may be replaced by new TQTableItems during the lifetime of a TQTable. Therefore, if you create your own subclass of TQTableItem, and you want to ensure that this does not happen, you must call setReplaceable(false) in the constructor of your subclass.
 .PP
 <center>
 .ce 1
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ The OnTyping edit type is the default when TQTableItem objects are created by th
 .TP
 \fCTQTableItem::Never\fR - The cell is not editable.
 .PP
-The cell is actually editable only if TQTable::isRowReadOnly() is FALSE for its row, TQTable::isColumnReadOnly() is FALSE for its column, and TQTable::isReadOnly() is FALSE.
+The cell is actually editable only if TQTable::isRowReadOnly() is false for its row, TQTable::isColumnReadOnly() is false for its column, and TQTable::isReadOnly() is false.
 .PP
 TQComboTableItems have an isEditable() property. This property is used to indicate whether the user may enter their own text or are restricted to choosing one of the choices in the list. TQComboTableItems may be interacted with only if they are editable in accordance with their EditType as described above.
 .PP
@@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ This is set when the table item is constructed.
 .PP
 See also EditType and TQTableItem().
 .SH "bool TQTableItem::isEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the table item is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the table item is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setEnabled().
 .SH "bool TQTableItem::isReplaceable () const"
@@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ See also TQTable::sorting.
 .SH "void TQTableItem::paint ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQRect & cr, bool selected )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This virtual function is used to paint the contents of an item using the painter \fIp\fR in the rectangular area \fIcr\fR using the color group \fIcg\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIselected\fR is TRUE the cell is displayed in a way that indicates that it is highlighted.
+If \fIselected\fR is true the cell is displayed in a way that indicates that it is highlighted.
 .PP
 You don't usually need to use this function but if you want to draw custom content in a cell you will need to reimplement it.
 .PP
@@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Note that the painter is not clipped by default in order to get maximum efficien
 .br
     //... your drawing code
 .br
-    p->setClipping( FALSE );
+    p->setClipping( false );
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ See also TQTable::setCellContentFromEditor().
 .PP
 Example: table/statistics/statistics.cpp.
 .SH "void TQTableItem::setEnabled ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE, the table item is enabled; if \fIb\fR is FALSE the table item is disabled.
+If \fIb\fR is true, the table item is enabled; if \fIb\fR is false the table item is disabled.
 .PP
 A disabled item doesn't respond to user interaction.
 .PP
@@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ For TQComboTableItems and TQCheckTableItems this function has no visible effect.
 .PP
 See also TQTable::setPixmap(), pixmap(), and setText().
 .SH "void TQTableItem::setReplaceable ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE it is acceptable to replace the contents of the cell with the contents of another TQTableItem. If \fIb\fR is FALSE the contents of the cell may not be replaced by the contents of another table item. Table items that span more than one cell may not have their contents replaced by another table item.
+If \fIb\fR is true it is acceptable to replace the contents of the cell with the contents of another TQTableItem. If \fIb\fR is false the contents of the cell may not be replaced by the contents of another table item. Table items that span more than one cell may not have their contents replaced by another table item.
 .PP
 (This differs from EditType because EditType is concerned with whether the \fIuser\fR is able to change the contents of a cell.)
 .PP
@@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ See also TQTable::setText(), text(), setPixmap(), and TQTable::updateCell().
 .PP
 Example: table/statistics/statistics.cpp.
 .SH "void TQTableItem::setWordWrap ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE, the cell's text will be wrapped over multiple lines, when necessary, to fit the width of the cell; otherwise the text will be written as a single line.
+If \fIb\fR is true, the cell's text will be wrapped over multiple lines, when necessary, to fit the width of the cell; otherwise the text will be written as a single line.
 .PP
 See also wordWrap(), TQTable::adjustColumn(), and TQTable::setColumnStretchable().
 .SH "TQSize TQTableItem::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ This means that text() returns the original text value of the item if the editor
 .PP
 See also setText() and pixmap().
 .SH "bool TQTableItem::wordWrap () const"
-Returns TRUE if word wrap is enabled for the cell; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if word wrap is enabled for the cell; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setWordWrap().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtableselection.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtableselection.3qt
index b6c091a1f..c42eff319 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtableselection.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtableselection.3qt
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ The selection is a rectangular set of cells in a TQTable. One of the rectangle's
 .PP
 There are various access functions to find out about the area: anchorRow() and anchorCol() return the anchor's position; leftCol(), rightCol(), topRow() and bottomRow() return the rectangle's four edges. All four are part of the selection.
 .PP
-A newly created TQTableSelection is inactive -- isActive() returns FALSE. You must use init() and expandTo() to activate it.
+A newly created TQTableSelection is inactive -- isActive() returns false. You must use init() and expandTo() to activate it.
 .PP
 See also TQTable, TQTable::addSelection(), TQTable::selection(), TQTable::selectCells(), TQTable::selectRow(), TQTable::selectColumn(), and Advanced Widgets.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
@@ -120,9 +120,9 @@ Returns the number of rows in the selection.
 .PP
 See also numCols().
 .SH "bool TQTableSelection::operator!= ( const TQTableSelection & s ) const"
-Returns TRUE if \fIs\fR does not include the same cells as the selection; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs\fR does not include the same cells as the selection; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQTableSelection::operator== ( const TQTableSelection & s ) const"
-Returns TRUE if \fIs\fR includes the same cells as the selection; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIs\fR includes the same cells as the selection; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int TQTableSelection::rightCol () const"
 Returns the right column of the selection.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtabletevent.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtabletevent.3qt
index afdb5ce7a..73df57b7a 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtabletevent.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtabletevent.3qt
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ The accept flag is set by default.
 .PP
 See also accept().
 .SH "int TQTabletEvent::isAccepted () const"
-Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event handles the tablet event; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the receiver of the event handles the tablet event; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "const TQPoint & TQTabletEvent::pos () const"
 Returns the position of the device, relative to the widget that received the event.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtabwidget.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtabwidget.3qt
index 4abdbd8ad..593a7175d 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtabwidget.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtabwidget.3qt
@@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 This is a lower-level method for inserting tabs, similar to the other insertTab() method. It is useful if you are using setTabBar() to set a TQTabBar subclass with an overridden TQTabBar::paint() function for a subclass of TQTab. The \fIchild\fR is the new page, \fItab\fR is the tab to put the \fIchild\fR on and \fIindex\fR is the position in the tab bar that this page should occupy.
 .SH "bool TQTabWidget::isTabEnabled ( TQWidget * w ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the page \fIw\fR is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the page \fIw\fR is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setTabEnabled() and TQWidget::enabled.
 .SH "TQString TQTabWidget::label ( int index ) const"
@@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Replaces the dialog's TQTabBar heading with the tab bar \fItb\fR. Note that this
 .PP
 See also tabBar().
 .SH "void TQTabWidget::setTabEnabled ( TQWidget * w, bool enable )"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, page \fIw\fR is enabled; otherwise page \fIw\fR is disabled. The page's tab is redrawn appropriately.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, page \fIw\fR is enabled; otherwise page \fIw\fR is disabled. The page's tab is redrawn appropriately.
 .PP
 TQTabWidget uses TQWidget::setEnabled() internally, rather than keeping a separate flag.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtextbrowser.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtextbrowser.3qt
index 993be522b..2b69820bb 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtextbrowser.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtextbrowser.3qt
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ See also forward() and backwardAvailable().
 .PP
 Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
 .SH "void TQTextBrowser::backwardAvailable ( bool available )\fC [signal]\fR"
-This signal is emitted when the availability of backward() changes. \fIavailable\fR is FALSE when the user is at home(); otherwise it is TRUE.
+This signal is emitted when the availability of backward() changes. \fIavailable\fR is false when the user is at home(); otherwise it is true.
 .PP
 Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
 .SH "void TQTextBrowser::forward ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ See also backward() and forwardAvailable().
 .PP
 Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
 .SH "void TQTextBrowser::forwardAvailable ( bool available )\fC [signal]\fR"
-This signal is emitted when the availability of forward() changes. \fIavailable\fR is TRUE after the user navigates backward() and FALSE when the user navigates or goes forward().
+This signal is emitted when the availability of forward() changes. \fIavailable\fR is true after the user navigates backward() and false when the user navigates or goes forward().
 .PP
 Example: helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp.
 .SH "void TQTextBrowser::highlighted ( const TQString & link )\fC [signal]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtextcodec.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtextcodec.3qt
index 45311536a..a38274a20 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtextcodec.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtextcodec.3qt
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ Constructs a TQTextCodec, and gives it the highest precedence. The TQTextCodec s
 .PP
 Destroys the TQTextCodec. Note that you should not delete codecs yourself: once created they become Qt's responsibility.
 .SH "bool TQTextCodec::canEncode ( TQChar ch ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the Unicode character \fIch\fR can be fully encoded with this codec; otherwise returns FALSE. The default implementation tests if the result of toUnicode(fromUnicode(ch)) is the original \fIch\fR. Subclasses may be able to improve the efficiency.
+Returns true if the Unicode character \fIch\fR can be fully encoded with this codec; otherwise returns false. The default implementation tests if the result of toUnicode(fromUnicode(ch)) is the original \fIch\fR. Subclasses may be able to improve the efficiency.
 .SH "bool TQTextCodec::canEncode ( const TQString & s ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtextdrag.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtextdrag.3qt
index baa3d0001..0aeef6c49 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtextdrag.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtextdrag.3qt
@@ -61,13 +61,13 @@ Constructs a default text drag object. \fIdragSource\fR must be the drag source;
 .SH "TQTextDrag::~TQTextDrag ()"
 Destroys the text drag object and frees up all allocated resources.
 .SH "bool TQTextDrag::canDecode ( const TQMimeSource * e )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the information in \fIe\fR can be decoded into a TQString; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the information in \fIe\fR can be decoded into a TQString; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also decode().
 .PP
 Example: iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQTextDrag::decode ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQString & str )\fC [static]\fR"
-Attempts to decode the dropped information in \fIe\fR into \fIstr\fR. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Attempts to decode the dropped information in \fIe\fR into \fIstr\fR. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also canDecode().
 .PP
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Example: iconview/simple_dd/main.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQTextDrag::decode ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQString & str, TQCString & subtype )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Attempts to decode the dropped information in \fIe\fR into \fIstr\fR. Returns TRUE if successful; otherwise returns FALSE. If \fIsubtype\fR is null, any text subtype is accepted; otherwise only the specified \fIsubtype\fR is accepted.
+Attempts to decode the dropped information in \fIe\fR into \fIstr\fR. Returns true if successful; otherwise returns false. If \fIsubtype\fR is null, any text subtype is accepted; otherwise only the specified \fIsubtype\fR is accepted.
 .PP
 See also canDecode().
 .SH "void TQTextDrag::setSubtype ( const TQCString & st )\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtextedit.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtextedit.3qt
index deaa68ba2..148c877f4 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtextedit.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtextedit.3qt
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Inherited by TQMultiLineEdit, TQTextBrowser, and TQTextView.
 .BI "void \fBgetSelection\fR ( int * paraFrom, int * indexFrom, int * paraTo, int * indexTo, int selNum = 0 ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual bool \fBfind\fR ( const TQString & expr, bool cs, bool wo, bool forward = TRUE, int * para = 0, int * index = 0 )"
+.BI "virtual bool \fBfind\fR ( const TQString & expr, bool cs, bool wo, bool forward = true, int * para = 0, int * index = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "int \fBparagraphs\fR () const"
@@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ Inherited by TQMultiLineEdit, TQTextBrowser, and TQTextView.
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetTextFormat\fR ( TextFormat f )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBselectAll\fR ( bool select = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBselectAll\fR ( bool select = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetTabStopWidth\fR ( int ts )"
@@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Inherited by TQMultiLineEdit, TQTextBrowser, and TQTextView.
 .BI "void \fBinsert\fR ( const TQString & text, uint insertionFlags = CheckNewLines | RemoveSelected )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void insert ( const TQString & text, bool indent, bool checkNewLine = TRUE, bool removeSelected = TRUE )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "virtual void insert ( const TQString & text, bool indent, bool checkNewLine = true, bool removeSelected = true )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBinsertAt\fR ( const TQString & text, int para, int index )"
@@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ TQTextEdit is an advanced WYSIWYG viewer/editor supporting rich text formatting
 .PP
 TQTextEdit has four modes of operation: <center>.nf
 .TS
-l - l. Mode Command Notes Plain Text Editor setTextFormat(PlainText) Set text with setText(); text() returns plain text. Text attributes (e.g. colors) can be set, but plain text is always returned. Rich Text Editor setTextFormat(RichText) Set text with setText(); text() returns rich text. Rich text editing is fairly limited. You can't set margins or insert images for example (although you can read and correctly display files that have margins set and that include images). This mode is mostly useful for editing small amounts of rich text. Text Viewer setReadOnly(TRUE) Set text with setText() or append() (which has no undo history so is faster and uses less memory); text() returns plain or rich text depending on the textFormat(). This mode can correctly display a large subset of HTML tags. Log Viewer setTextFormat(LogText)
+l - l. Mode Command Notes Plain Text Editor setTextFormat(PlainText) Set text with setText(); text() returns plain text. Text attributes (e.g. colors) can be set, but plain text is always returned. Rich Text Editor setTextFormat(RichText) Set text with setText(); text() returns rich text. Rich text editing is fairly limited. You can't set margins or insert images for example (although you can read and correctly display files that have margins set and that include images). This mode is mostly useful for editing small amounts of rich text. Text Viewer setReadOnly(true) Set text with setText() or append() (which has no undo history so is faster and uses less memory); text() returns plain or rich text depending on the textFormat(). This mode can correctly display a large subset of HTML tags. Log Viewer setTextFormat(LogText)
 .TE
 .fi
 </center>
@@ -586,7 +586,7 @@ Loading and saving text is achieved using setText() and text(), for example:
 .br
         stream << textEdit->text();
 .br
-        textEdit->setModified( FALSE );
+        textEdit->setModified( false );
 .br
     }
 .br
@@ -647,7 +647,7 @@ Stylesheets can also be used in LogText mode. To create and use a custom tag, yo
 .br
     item->setFontWeight( TQFont::Bold );
 .br
-    item->setFontUnderline( TRUE );
+    item->setFontUnderline( true );
 .br
     log->append( "This is a <mytag>custom tag</mytag>!" );
 .br
@@ -670,7 +670,7 @@ Use setSelection() to select text. The setSelectionAttributes() function is used
 .PP
 Set and get the position of the cursor with setCursorPosition() and getCursorPosition() respectively. When the cursor is moved, the signals currentFontChanged(), currentColorChanged() and currentAlignmentChanged() are emitted to reflect the font, color and alignment at the new cursor position.
 .PP
-If the text changes, the textChanged() signal is emitted, and if the user inserts a new line by pressing Return or Enter, returnPressed() is emitted. The isModified() function will return TRUE if the text has been modified.
+If the text changes, the textChanged() signal is emitted, and if the user inserts a new line by pressing Return or Enter, returnPressed() is emitted. The isModified() function will return true if the text has been modified.
 .PP
 TQTextEdit provides command-based undo and redo. To set the depth of the command history use setUndoDepth() which defaults to 100 steps. To undo or redo the last operation call undo() or redo(). The signals undoAvailable() and redoAvailable() indicate whether the undo and redo operations can be executed.
 .PP
@@ -797,7 +797,7 @@ Examples:
 .SH "uint TQTextEdit::autoFormatting () const"
 Returns the enabled set of auto formatting features. See the "autoFormatting" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQTextEdit::bold () const"
-Returns TRUE if the current format is bold; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the current format is bold; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setBold().
 .SH "int TQTextEdit::charAt ( const TQPoint & pos, int * para ) const"
@@ -830,9 +830,9 @@ See also hasSelectedText and copyAvailable().
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::copyAvailable ( bool yes )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when text is selected or de-selected in the text edit.
 .PP
-When text is selected this signal will be emitted with \fIyes\fR set to TRUE. If no text has been selected or if the selected text is de-selected this signal is emitted with \fIyes\fR set to FALSE.
+When text is selected this signal will be emitted with \fIyes\fR set to true. If no text has been selected or if the selected text is de-selected this signal is emitted with \fIyes\fR set to false.
 .PP
-If \fIyes\fR is TRUE then copy() can be used to copy the selection to the clipboard. If \fIyes\fR is FALSE then copy() does nothing.
+If \fIyes\fR is true then copy() can be used to copy the selection to the clipboard. If \fIyes\fR is false then copy() does nothing.
 .PP
 See also selectionChanged().
 .SH "TQPopupMenu * TQTextEdit::createPopupMenu ( const TQPoint & pos )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -905,22 +905,22 @@ See also setCursorPosition().
 Returns the font family of the current format.
 .PP
 See also setFamily(), setCurrentFont(), and setPointSize().
-.SH "bool TQTextEdit::find ( const TQString & expr, bool cs, bool wo, bool forward = TRUE, int * para = 0, int * index = 0 )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Finds the next occurrence of the string, \fIexpr\fR. Returns TRUE if \fIexpr\fR was found; otherwise returns FALSE.
+.SH "bool TQTextEdit::find ( const TQString & expr, bool cs, bool wo, bool forward = true, int * para = 0, int * index = 0 )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Finds the next occurrence of the string, \fIexpr\fR. Returns true if \fIexpr\fR was found; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If \fIpara\fR and \fIindex\fR are both 0 the search begins from the current cursor position. If \fIpara\fR and \fIindex\fR are both not 0, the search begins from the \fI*index\fR character position in the \fI*para\fR paragraph.
 .PP
-If \fIcs\fR is TRUE the search is case sensitive, otherwise it is case insensitive. If \fIwo\fR is TRUE the search looks for whole word matches only; otherwise it searches for any matching text. If \fIforward\fR is TRUE (the default) the search works forward from the starting position to the end of the text, otherwise it works backwards to the beginning of the text.
+If \fIcs\fR is true the search is case sensitive, otherwise it is case insensitive. If \fIwo\fR is true the search looks for whole word matches only; otherwise it searches for any matching text. If \fIforward\fR is true (the default) the search works forward from the starting position to the end of the text, otherwise it works backwards to the beginning of the text.
 .PP
-If \fIexpr\fR is found the function returns TRUE. If \fIindex\fR and \fIpara\fR are not 0, the number of the paragraph in which the first character of the match was found is put into \fI*para\fR, and the index position of that character within the paragraph is put into \fI*index\fR.
+If \fIexpr\fR is found the function returns true. If \fIindex\fR and \fIpara\fR are not 0, the number of the paragraph in which the first character of the match was found is put into \fI*para\fR, and the index position of that character within the paragraph is put into \fI*index\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIexpr\fR is not found the function returns FALSE. If \fIindex\fR and \fIpara\fR are not 0 and \fIexpr\fR is not found, \fI*index\fR and \fI*para\fR are undefined.
+If \fIexpr\fR is not found the function returns false. If \fIindex\fR and \fIpara\fR are not 0 and \fIexpr\fR is not found, \fI*index\fR and \fI*para\fR are undefined.
 .PP
 Please note that this function will make the next occurrence of the string (if found) the current selection, and will thus modify the cursor position.
 .PP
 Using the \fIpara\fR and \fIindex\fR parameters will not work correctly in case the document contains tables.
 .SH "bool TQTextEdit::focusNextPrevChild ( bool n )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-Reimplemented to allow tabbing through links. If \fIn\fR is TRUE the tab moves the focus to the next child; if \fIn\fR is FALSE the tab moves the focus to the previous child. Returns TRUE if the focus was moved; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Reimplemented to allow tabbing through links. If \fIn\fR is true the tab moves the focus to the next child; if \fIn\fR is false the tab moves the focus to the previous child. Returns true if the focus was moved; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQFont TQTextEdit::font () const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
@@ -944,7 +944,7 @@ The \fIselNum\fR is the number of the selection (multiple selections are support
 .PP
 See also setSelection() and selectedText.
 .SH "bool TQTextEdit::hasSelectedText () const"
-Returns TRUE if some text is selected in selection 0; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "hasSelectedText" property for details.
+Returns true if some text is selected in selection 0; otherwise returns false. See the "hasSelectedText" property for details.
 .SH "int TQTextEdit::heightForWidth ( int w ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns how many pixels high the text edit needs to be to display all the text if the text edit is \fIw\fR pixels wide.
 .PP
@@ -959,26 +959,26 @@ The default flags are CheckNewLines | RemoveSelected.
 If the widget is in LogText mode this function will do nothing.
 .PP
 See also paste() and pasteSubType().
-.SH "void TQTextEdit::insert ( const TQString & text, bool indent, bool checkNewLine = TRUE, bool removeSelected = TRUE )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQTextEdit::insert ( const TQString & text, bool indent, bool checkNewLine = true, bool removeSelected = true )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::insertAt ( const TQString & text, int para, int index )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Inserts \fItext\fR in the paragraph \fIpara\fR at position \fIindex\fR.
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::insertParagraph ( const TQString & text, int para )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Inserts \fItext\fR as a new paragraph at position \fIpara\fR. If \fIpara\fR is -1, the text is appended. Use append() if the append operation is performance critical.
 .SH "bool TQTextEdit::isModified () const"
-Returns TRUE if the document has been modified by the user; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "modified" property for details.
+Returns true if the document has been modified by the user; otherwise returns false. See the "modified" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQTextEdit::isOverwriteMode () const"
 Returns the text edit's overwrite mode. See the "overwriteMode" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQTextEdit::isReadOnly () const"
-Returns TRUE if the text edit is read-only; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "readOnly" property for details.
+Returns true if the text edit is read-only; otherwise returns false. See the "readOnly" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQTextEdit::isRedoAvailable () const"
-Returns TRUE if redo is available; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if redo is available; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQTextEdit::isUndoAvailable () const"
-Returns TRUE if undo is available; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if undo is available; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQTextEdit::isUndoRedoEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if undo/redo is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "undoRedoEnabled" property for details.
+Returns true if undo/redo is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "undoRedoEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQTextEdit::italic () const"
-Returns TRUE if the current format is italic; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the current format is italic; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setItalic().
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::keyPressEvent ( TQKeyEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -998,7 +998,7 @@ Returns the number of lines in the text edit; this could be 0.
 .SH "int TQTextEdit::linesOfParagraph ( int para ) const"
 Returns the number of lines in paragraph \fIpara\fR, or -1 if there is no paragraph with index \fIpara\fR.
 .SH "bool TQTextEdit::linkUnderline () const"
-Returns TRUE if hypertext links will be underlined; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "linkUnderline" property for details.
+Returns true if hypertext links will be underlined; otherwise returns false. See the "linkUnderline" property for details.
 .SH "int TQTextEdit::maxLogLines ()\fC [slot]\fR"
 Returns the maximum number of lines TQTextEdit can hold in LogText mode. By default the number of lines is unlimited, which is signified by a value of -1.
 .SH "TQMimeSourceFactory * TQTextEdit::mimeSourceFactory () const"
@@ -1009,7 +1009,7 @@ See also setMimeSourceFactory().
 Examples:
 .)l action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, mdi/application.cpp, and tqdir/tqdir.cpp.
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::modificationChanged ( bool m )\fC [signal]\fR"
-This signal is emitted when the modification status of the document has changed. If \fIm\fR is TRUE, the document was modified, otherwise the modification state has been reset to unmodified.
+This signal is emitted when the modification status of the document has changed. If \fIm\fR is true, the document was modified, otherwise the modification state has been reset to unmodified.
 .PP
 See also modified.
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::moveCursor ( CursorAction action, bool select )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -1055,7 +1055,7 @@ If there is no operation to redo, i.e. there is no redo step in the undo/redo hi
 .PP
 See also redoAvailable(), undo(), and undoDepth.
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::redoAvailable ( bool yes )\fC [signal]\fR"
-This signal is emitted when the availability of redo changes. If \fIyes\fR is TRUE, then redo() will work until redoAvailable( FALSE ) is next emitted.
+This signal is emitted when the availability of redo changes. If \fIyes\fR is true, then redo() will work until redoAvailable( false ) is next emitted.
 .PP
 See also redo() and undoDepth.
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::removeParagraph ( int para )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -1078,8 +1078,8 @@ This signal is emitted if the user pressed the Return or the Enter key.
 Scrolls the text edit to make the text at the anchor called \fIname\fR visible, if it can be found in the document. If the anchor isn't found no scrolling will occur. An anchor is defined using the HTML anchor tag, e.g. \fC<a name="target">\fR.
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::scrollToBottom ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Scrolls to the bottom of the document and does formatting if required.
-.SH "void TQTextEdit::selectAll ( bool select = TRUE )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-If \fIselect\fR is TRUE (the default), all the text is selected as selection 0. If \fIselect\fR is FALSE any selected text is unselected, i.e. the default selection (selection 0) is cleared.
+.SH "void TQTextEdit::selectAll ( bool select = true )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
+If \fIselect\fR is true (the default), all the text is selected as selection 0. If \fIselect\fR is false any selected text is unselected, i.e. the default selection (selection 0) is cleared.
 .PP
 See also selectedText.
 .SH "TQString TQTextEdit::selectedText () const"
@@ -1095,7 +1095,7 @@ Reimplemented in TQMultiLineEdit.
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::setAutoFormatting ( uint features )"
 Sets the enabled set of auto formatting features to \fIfeatures\fR. See the "autoFormatting" property for details.
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::setBold ( bool b )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE sets the current format to bold; otherwise sets the current format to non-bold.
+If \fIb\fR is true sets the current format to bold; otherwise sets the current format to non-bold.
 .PP
 See also bold().
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::setColor ( const TQColor & c )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -1117,7 +1117,7 @@ Sets the font family of the current format to \fIfontFamily\fR.
 .PP
 See also family() and setCurrentFont().
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::setItalic ( bool b )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE sets the current format to italic; otherwise sets the current format to non-italic.
+If \fIb\fR is true sets the current format to italic; otherwise sets the current format to non-italic.
 .PP
 See also italic().
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::setLinkUnderline ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -1187,7 +1187,7 @@ See also text and textFormat.
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::setTextFormat ( TextFormat f )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Sets the text format: rich text, plain text, log text or auto text to \fIf\fR. See the "textFormat" property for details.
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::setUnderline ( bool b )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE sets the current format to underline; otherwise sets the current format to non-underline.
+If \fIb\fR is true sets the current format to underline; otherwise sets the current format to non-underline.
 .PP
 See also underline().
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::setUndoDepth ( int d )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -1218,7 +1218,7 @@ In some situations you may want to force the whole text to be formatted. For exa
 .SH "TQSyntaxHighlighter * TQTextEdit::syntaxHighlighter () const"
 Returns the TQSyntaxHighlighter set on this TQTextEdit. 0 is returned if no syntax highlighter is set.
 .SH "bool TQTextEdit::tabChangesFocus () const"
-Returns TRUE if TAB changes focus or is accepted as input; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "tabChangesFocus" property for details.
+Returns true if TAB changes focus or is accepted as input; otherwise returns false. See the "tabChangesFocus" property for details.
 .SH "int TQTextEdit::tabStopWidth () const"
 Returns the tab stop width in pixels. See the "tabStopWidth" property for details.
 .SH "TQString TQTextEdit::text () const"
@@ -1243,7 +1243,7 @@ Returns the text edit's text cursor.
 .SH "TextFormat TQTextEdit::textFormat () const"
 Returns the text format: rich text, plain text, log text or auto text. See the "textFormat" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQTextEdit::underline () const"
-Returns TRUE if the current format is underlined; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the current format is underlined; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setUnderline().
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::undo ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -1253,7 +1253,7 @@ If there is no operation to undo, i.e. there is no undo step in the undo/redo hi
 .PP
 See also undoAvailable(), redo(), and undoDepth.
 .SH "void TQTextEdit::undoAvailable ( bool yes )\fC [signal]\fR"
-This signal is emitted when the availability of undo changes. If \fIyes\fR is TRUE, then undo() will work until undoAvailable( FALSE ) is next emitted.
+This signal is emitted when the availability of undo changes. If \fIyes\fR is true, then undo() will work until undoAvailable( false ) is next emitted.
 .PP
 See also undo() and undoDepth.
 .SH "int TQTextEdit::undoDepth () const"
@@ -1312,7 +1312,7 @@ Get this property's value with length().
 .SH "bool linkUnderline"
 This property holds whether hypertext links will be underlined.
 .PP
-If TRUE (the default) hypertext links will be displayed underlined. If FALSE links will not be displayed underlined.
+If true (the default) hypertext links will be displayed underlined. If false links will not be displayed underlined.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setLinkUnderline() and get this property's value with linkUnderline().
 .SH "bool modified"
@@ -1322,7 +1322,7 @@ Set this property's value with setModified() and get this property's value with
 .SH "bool overwriteMode"
 This property holds the text edit's overwrite mode.
 .PP
-If FALSE (the default) characters entered by the user are inserted with any characters to the right being moved out of the way. If TRUE, the editor is in overwrite mode, i.e. characters entered by the user overwrite any characters to the right of the cursor position.
+If false (the default) characters entered by the user are inserted with any characters to the right being moved out of the way. If true, the editor is in overwrite mode, i.e. characters entered by the user overwrite any characters to the right of the cursor position.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setOverwriteMode() and get this property's value with isOverwriteMode().
 .SH "TQBrush paper"
@@ -1336,7 +1336,7 @@ This property holds whether the text edit is read-only.
 .PP
 In a read-only text edit the user can only navigate through the text and select text; modifying the text is not possible.
 .PP
-This property's default is FALSE.
+This property's default is false.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setReadOnly() and get this property's value with isReadOnly().
 .SH "TQString selectedText"
@@ -1350,7 +1350,7 @@ Get this property's value with selectedText().
 .SH "bool tabChangesFocus"
 This property holds whether TAB changes focus or is accepted as input.
 .PP
-In some occasions text edits should not allow the user to input tabulators or change indentation using the TAB key, as this breaks the focus chain. The default is FALSE.
+In some occasions text edits should not allow the user to input tabulators or change indentation using the TAB key, as this breaks the focus chain. The default is false.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setTabChangesFocus() and get this property's value with tabChangesFocus().
 .SH "int tabStopWidth"
@@ -1398,7 +1398,7 @@ This property holds whether undo/redo is enabled.
 .PP
 When changing this property, the undo/redo history is cleared.
 .PP
-The default is TRUE.
+The default is true.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setUndoRedoEnabled() and get this property's value with isUndoRedoEnabled().
 .SH "WordWrap wordWrap"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtextstream.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtextstream.3qt
index a9b92b733..8a5bce36a 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtextstream.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtextstream.3qt
@@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ The TQTextStream class reads and writes text; it is not appropriate for dealing
 .PP
 By default, output of Unicode text (i.e. TQString) is done using the local 8-bit encoding. This can be changed using the setEncoding() method. For input, the TQTextStream will auto-detect standard Unicode "byte order marked" text files; otherwise the local 8-bit encoding is used.
 .PP
-The TQIODevice is set in the constructor, or later using setDevice(). If the end of the input is reached atEnd() returns TRUE. Data can be read into variables of the appropriate type using the operator>>() overloads, or read in its entirety into a single string using read(), or read a line at a time using readLine(). Whitespace can be skipped over using skipWhiteSpace(). You can set flags for the stream using flags() or setf(). The stream also supports width(), precision() and fill(); use reset() to reset the defaults.
+The TQIODevice is set in the constructor, or later using setDevice(). If the end of the input is reached atEnd() returns true. Data can be read into variables of the appropriate type using the operator>>() overloads, or read in its entirety into a single string using read(), or read a line at a time using readLine(). Whitespace can be skipped over using skipWhiteSpace(). You can set flags for the stream using flags() or setf(). The stream also supports width(), precision() and fill(); use reset() to reset the defaults.
 .PP
 See also TQDataStream, Input/Output and Networking, and Text Related Classes.
 .SS "Member Type Documentation"
@@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Destroys the text stream.
 .PP
 The destructor does not affect the current IO device.
 .SH "bool TQTextStream::atEnd () const"
-Returns TRUE if the IO device has reached the end position (end of the stream or file) or if there is no IO device set; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the IO device has reached the end position (end of the stream or file) or if there is no IO device set; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also TQIODevice::atEnd().
 .PP
@@ -490,19 +490,19 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Reads a "word" from the stream into \fIs\fR and returns a reference to the stream.
 .PP
-A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns FALSE.
+A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns false.
 .SH "TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( TQString & str )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Reads a "word" from the stream into \fIstr\fR and returns a reference to the stream.
 .PP
-A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns FALSE.
+A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns false.
 .SH "TQTextStream & TQTextStream::operator>> ( TQCString & str )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Reads a "word" from the stream into \fIstr\fR and returns a reference to the stream.
 .PP
-A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns FALSE.
+A word consists of characters for which isspace() returns false.
 .SH "int TQTextStream::precision () const"
 Returns the precision. The default value is 6.
 .SH "int TQTextStream::precision ( int p )"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqthread.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqthread.3qt
index 64cb10828..c23309f57 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqthread.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqthread.3qt
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ If \fIstackSize\fR is greater than zero, the maximum stack size is set to \fIsta
 .SH "TQThread::~TQThread ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 TQThread destructor.
 .PP
-Note that deleting a TQThread object will not stop the execution of the thread it represents. Deleting a running TQThread (i.e. finished() returns FALSE) will probably result in a program crash. You can wait() on a thread to make sure that it has finished.
+Note that deleting a TQThread object will not stop the execution of the thread it represents. Deleting a running TQThread (i.e. finished() returns false) will probably result in a program crash. You can wait() on a thread to make sure that it has finished.
 .SH "TQt::HANDLE TQThread::currentThread ()\fC [static]\fR"
 This returns the thread handle of the currently executing thread.
 .PP
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ This returns the thread handle of the currently executing thread.
 .SH "void TQThread::exit ()\fC [static]\fR"
 Ends the execution of the calling thread and wakes up any threads waiting for its termination.
 .SH "bool TQThread::finished () const"
-Returns TRUE if the thread is finished; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the thread is finished; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "void TQThread::msleep ( unsigned long msecs )\fC [static protected]\fR"
 System independent sleep. This causes the current thread to sleep for \fImsecs\fR milliseconds
 .SH "void TQThread::run ()\fC [pure virtual protected]\fR"
@@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ This method is pure virtual, and must be implemented in derived classes in order
 .PP
 See also wait().
 .SH "bool TQThread::running () const"
-Returns TRUE if the thread is running; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the thread is running; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "void TQThread::sleep ( unsigned long secs )\fC [static protected]\fR"
 System independent sleep. This causes the current thread to sleep for \fIsecs\fR seconds.
 .SH "void TQThread::start ( Priority priority = InheritPriority )"
@@ -191,9 +191,9 @@ System independent sleep. This causes the current thread to sleep for \fIusecs\f
 .SH "bool TQThread::wait ( unsigned long time = ULONG_MAX )"
 A thread calling this function will block until either of these conditions is met:
 .TP
-The thread associated with this TQThread object has finished execution (i.e. when it returns from run()). This function will return TRUE if the thread has finished. It also returns TRUE if the thread has not been started yet.
+The thread associated with this TQThread object has finished execution (i.e. when it returns from run()). This function will return true if the thread has finished. It also returns true if the thread has not been started yet.
 .TP
-\fItime\fR milliseconds has elapsed. If \fItime\fR is ULONG_MAX (the default), then the wait will never timeout (the thread must return from run()). This function will return FALSE if the wait timed out.
+\fItime\fR milliseconds has elapsed. If \fItime\fR is ULONG_MAX (the default), then the wait will never timeout (the thread must return from run()). This function will return false if the wait timed out.
 .PP
 This provides similar functionality to the POSIX \fCpthread_join()\fR function.
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqthreadstorage.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqthreadstorage.3qt
index a56d04774..8dbcddee2 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqthreadstorage.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqthreadstorage.3qt
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Note: The per-thread data stored is \fInot\fR deleted. Any data left in TQThread
 .PP
 See also hasLocalData().
 .SH "bool TQThreadStorage::hasLocalData () const"
-Returns TRUE if the calling thread has non-zero data available; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the calling thread has non-zero data available; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also localData().
 .SH "T & TQThreadStorage::localData ()"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtime.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtime.3qt
index 606dddc6f..cc8c8790a 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtime.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtime.3qt
@@ -206,17 +206,17 @@ Returns the hour part (0..23) of the time.
 Examples:
 .)l aclock/aclock.cpp and tictac/tictac.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQTime::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if the time is equal to 00:00:00.000; otherwise returns FALSE. A null time is valid.
+Returns true if the time is equal to 00:00:00.000; otherwise returns false. A null time is valid.
 .PP
 See also isValid().
 .SH "bool TQTime::isValid () const"
-Returns TRUE if the time is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. The time 23:30:55.746 is valid, whereas 24:12:30 is invalid.
+Returns true if the time is valid; otherwise returns false. The time 23:30:55.746 is valid, whereas 24:12:30 is invalid.
 .PP
 See also isNull().
 .SH "bool TQTime::isValid ( int h, int m, int s, int ms = 0 )\fC [static]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the specified time is valid; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the specified time is valid; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The time is valid if \fIh\fR is in the range 0..23, \fIm\fR and \fIs\fR are in the range 0..59, and \fIms\fR is in the range 0..999.
 .PP
@@ -224,9 +224,9 @@ Example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-    TQTime::isValid(21, 10, 30); // returns TRUE
+    TQTime::isValid(21, 10, 30); // returns true
 .br
-    TQTime::isValid(22, 5,  62); // returns FALSE
+    TQTime::isValid(22, 5,  62); // returns false
 .br
 .fi
 .SH "int TQTime::minute () const"
@@ -243,17 +243,17 @@ Because TQTime measures time within a day and there are 86400 seconds in a day,
 .PP
 See also secsTo().
 .SH "bool TQTime::operator!= ( const TQTime & t ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this time is different from \fIt\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this time is different from \fIt\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQTime::operator< ( const TQTime & t ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this time is earlier than \fIt\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this time is earlier than \fIt\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQTime::operator<= ( const TQTime & t ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this time is earlier than or equal to \fIt\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this time is earlier than or equal to \fIt\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQTime::operator== ( const TQTime & t ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this time is equal to \fIt\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this time is equal to \fIt\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQTime::operator> ( const TQTime & t ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this time is later than \fIt\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this time is later than \fIt\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQTime::operator>= ( const TQTime & t ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this time is later than or equal to \fIt\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this time is later than or equal to \fIt\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "int TQTime::restart ()"
 Sets this time to the current time and returns the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since the last time start() or restart() was called.
 .PP
@@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Example: t12/cannon.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQTime::setHMS ( int h, int m, int s, int ms = 0 )"
 Sets the time to hour \fIh\fR, minute \fIm\fR, seconds \fIs\fR and milliseconds \fIms\fR.
 .PP
-\fIh\fR must be in the range 0..23, \fIm\fR and \fIs\fR must be in the range 0..59, and \fIms\fR must be in the range 0..999. Returns TRUE if the set time is valid; otherwise returns FALSE.
+\fIh\fR must be in the range 0..23, \fIm\fR and \fIs\fR must be in the range 0..59, and \fIms\fR must be in the range 0..999. Returns true if the set time is valid; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isValid().
 .SH "void TQTime::start ()"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtimeedit.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtimeedit.3qt
index 2f57919fa..154b420bd 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtimeedit.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtimeedit.3qt
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Constructs a time edit with the initial time value, \fItime\fR, parent \fIparent
 .SH "TQTimeEdit::~TQTimeEdit ()"
 Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
 .SH "bool TQTimeEdit::autoAdvance () const"
-Returns TRUE if the editor automatically advances to the next section; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoAdvance" property for details.
+Returns true if the editor automatically advances to the next section; otherwise returns false. See the "autoAdvance" property for details.
 .SH "uint TQTimeEdit::display () const"
 Returns the sections that are displayed in the time edit. See the "display" property for details.
 .SH "TQTime TQTimeEdit::maxValue () const"
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ This signal is emitted whenever the editor's value changes. The \fItime\fR param
 .SH "bool autoAdvance"
 This property holds whether the editor automatically advances to the next section.
 .PP
-If autoAdvance is TRUE, the editor will automatically advance focus to the next time section if a user has completed a section. The default is FALSE.
+If autoAdvance is true, the editor will automatically advance focus to the next time section if a user has completed a section. The default is false.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setAutoAdvance() and get this property's value with autoAdvance().
 .SH "Display display"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtimer.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtimer.3qt
index e62c1308a..c39ea7c9f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtimer.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtimer.3qt
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ Inherits TQObject.
 .BI "bool \fBisActive\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "int \fBstart\fR ( int msec, bool sshot = FALSE )"
+.BI "int \fBstart\fR ( int msec, bool sshot = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBchangeInterval\fR ( int msec )"
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Example:
 .br
         connect( timer, TQ_SIGNAL(timeout()), myObject, TQ_SLOT(timerDone()) );
 .br
-        timer->start( 2000, TRUE ); // 2 seconds single-shot timer
+        timer->start( 2000, true ); // 2 seconds single-shot timer
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ This can be used to do heavy work while providing a snappy user interface:
 .br
         connect( t, TQ_SIGNAL(timeout()), TQ_SLOT(processOneThing()) );
 .br
-        t->start( 0, FALSE );
+        t->start( 0, false );
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ If the timer signal is pending, it will be stopped and restarted; otherwise it w
 .PP
 See also start() and isActive().
 .SH "bool TQTimer::isActive () const"
-Returns TRUE if the timer is running (pending); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the timer is running (pending); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Example: t11/cannon.cpp.
 .SH "void TQTimer::singleShot ( int msec, TQObject * receiver, const char * member )\fC [static]\fR"
@@ -143,10 +143,10 @@ Example:
 This sample program automatically terminates after 10 minutes (i.e. 600000 milliseconds).
 .PP
 The \fIreceiver\fR is the receiving object and the \fImember\fR is the slot. The time interval is \fImsec\fR.
-.SH "int TQTimer::start ( int msec, bool sshot = FALSE )"
+.SH "int TQTimer::start ( int msec, bool sshot = false )"
 Starts the timer with a \fImsec\fR milliseconds timeout, and returns the ID of the timer, or zero when starting the timer failed.
 .PP
-If \fIsshot\fR is TRUE, the timer will be activated only once; otherwise it will continue until it is stopped.
+If \fIsshot\fR is true, the timer will be activated only once; otherwise it will continue until it is stopped.
 .PP
 Any pending timer will be stopped.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbar.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbar.3qt
index 5fe26530b..bebf40785 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbar.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbar.3qt
@@ -16,10 +16,10 @@ Inherits TQDockWindow.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0 )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = false, const char * name = 0 )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQToolBar\fR ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow * mainWindow, TQWidget * parent, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQToolBar\fR ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow * mainWindow, TQWidget * parent, bool newLine = false, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fBTQToolBar\fR ( TQMainWindow * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )"
@@ -93,9 +93,9 @@ You can use the clear() method to remove all items from a toolbar.
 .PP
 See also TQToolButton, TQMainWindow, Parts of Isys on Visual Design, GUI Design Handbook: Tool Bar, and Main Window and Related Classes.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQToolBar::TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0 )"
+.SH "TQToolBar::TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = DockTop, bool newLine = false, const char * name = 0 )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
-.SH "TQToolBar::TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow * mainWindow, TQWidget * parent, bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )"
+.SH "TQToolBar::TQToolBar ( const TQString & label, TQMainWindow * mainWindow, TQWidget * parent, bool newLine = false, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )"
 Constructs an empty horizontal toolbar.
 .PP
 The toolbar is called \fIname\fR and is a child of \fIparent\fR and is managed by \fImainWindow\fR. The \fIlabel\fR and \fInewLine\fR parameters are passed straight to TQMainWindow::addDockWindow(). \fIname\fR and the widget flags \fIf\fR are passed on to the TQDockWindow constructor.
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Sets the toolbar's label. See the "label" property for details.
 .SH "void TQToolBar::setStretchableWidget ( TQWidget * w )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the widget \fIw\fR to be expanded if this toolbar is requested to stretch.
 .PP
-The request to stretch might occur because TQMainWindow right-justifies the dock area the toolbar is in, or because this toolbar's isVerticalStretchable() or isHorizontalStretchable() is set to TRUE.
+The request to stretch might occur because TQMainWindow right-justifies the dock area the toolbar is in, or because this toolbar's isVerticalStretchable() or isHorizontalStretchable() is set to true.
 .PP
 If you call this function and the toolbar is not yet stretchable, setStretchable() is called.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbox.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbox.3qt
index 51e96a3fa..e62b43174 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbox.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbox.3qt
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Inserts the widget \fIitem\fR at position \fIindex\fR, or at the bottom of the toolbox if \fIindex\fR is out of range. The new item's label is set to \fIlabel\fR. Returns the new item's index.
 .SH "bool TQToolBox::isItemEnabled ( int index ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the item at position \fIindex\fR is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the item at position \fIindex\fR is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQWidget * TQToolBox::item ( int index ) const"
 Returns the item at position \fIindex\fR, or 0 if there is no such item.
 .SH "TQIconSet TQToolBox::itemIconSet ( int index ) const"
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Sets the index of the current item, or -1 if the toolbox is empty to \fIindex\fR
 .SH "void TQToolBox::setCurrentItem ( TQWidget * item )"
 Sets the current item to be \fIitem\fR.
 .SH "void TQToolBox::setItemEnabled ( int index, bool enabled )"
-If \fIenabled\fR is TRUE then the item at position \fIindex\fR is enabled; otherwise item \fIindex\fR is disabled.
+If \fIenabled\fR is true then the item at position \fIindex\fR is enabled; otherwise item \fIindex\fR is disabled.
 .SH "void TQToolBox::setItemIconSet ( int index, const TQIconSet & iconSet )"
 Sets the icon of the item at position \fIindex\fR to \fIiconSet\fR.
 .SH "void TQToolBox::setItemLabel ( int index, const TQString & label )"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbutton.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbutton.3qt
index 0d576882f..072ffd3bb 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbutton.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbutton.3qt
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ TQToolButton supports auto-raising. In auto-raise mode, the button draws a 3D fr
 .PP
 A tool button's icon is set as TQIconSet. This makes it possible to specify different pixmaps for the disabled and active state. The disabled pixmap is used when the button's functionality is not available. The active pixmap is displayed when the button is auto-raised because the mouse pointer is hovering over it.
 .PP
-The button's look and dimension is adjustable with setUsesBigPixmap() and setUsesTextLabel(). When used inside a TQToolBar in a TQMainWindow, the button automatically adjusts to TQMainWindow's settings (see TQMainWindow::setUsesTextLabel() and TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps()). The pixmap set on a TQToolButton will be set to 22x22 if it is bigger than this size. If usesBigPixmap() is TRUE, then the pixmap will be set to 32x32.
+The button's look and dimension is adjustable with setUsesBigPixmap() and setUsesTextLabel(). When used inside a TQToolBar in a TQMainWindow, the button automatically adjusts to TQMainWindow's settings (see TQMainWindow::setUsesTextLabel() and TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps()). The pixmap set on a TQToolButton will be set to 22x22 if it is bigger than this size. If usesBigPixmap() is true, then the pixmap will be set to 32x32.
 .PP
 A tool button can offer additional choices in a popup menu. The feature is sometimes used with the "Back" button in a web browser. After pressing and holding the button down for a while, a menu pops up showing a list of possible pages to jump to. With TQToolButton you can set a popup menu using setPopup(). The default delay is 600ms; you can adjust it with setPopupDelay().
 .PP
@@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor.
 .SH "TQToolButton::~TQToolButton ()"
 Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
 .SH "bool TQToolButton::autoRaise () const"
-Returns TRUE if auto-raising is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoRaise" property for details.
+Returns true if auto-raising is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "autoRaise" property for details.
 .SH "TQIconSet TQToolButton::iconSet () const"
 Returns the icon set providing the icon shown on the button. See the "iconSet" property for details.
 .SH "void TQToolButton::openPopup ()"
@@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Sets the label of this button. See the "textLabel" property for details.
 .SH "void TQToolButton::setTextLabel ( const TQString & newLabel, bool tipToo )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Sets the label of this button to \fInewLabel\fR and automatically sets it as a tool tip if \fItipToo\fR is TRUE.
+Sets the label of this button to \fInewLabel\fR and automatically sets it as a tool tip if \fItipToo\fR is true.
 .SH "void TQToolButton::setTextPosition ( TextPosition pos )\fC [slot]\fR"
 Sets the position of the text label of this button to \fIpos\fR. See the "textPosition" property for details.
 .SH "void TQToolButton::setToggleButton ( bool enable )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -234,18 +234,18 @@ This function has no effect on non-toggling buttons.
 .PP
 See also toggleButton and toggled().
 .SH "bool TQToolButton::uses3D () const\fC [protected]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if this button should be drawn using raised edges; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this button should be drawn using raised edges; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also drawButton().
 .SH "bool TQToolButton::usesBigPixmap () const"
-Returns TRUE if this toolbutton uses big pixmaps; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "usesBigPixmap" property for details.
+Returns true if this toolbutton uses big pixmaps; otherwise returns false. See the "usesBigPixmap" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQToolButton::usesTextLabel () const"
-Returns TRUE if the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "usesTextLabel" property for details.
+Returns true if the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap; otherwise returns false. See the "usesTextLabel" property for details.
 .SS "Property Documentation"
 .SH "bool autoRaise"
 This property holds whether auto-raising is enabled.
 .PP
-The default is disabled (i.e. FALSE).
+The default is disabled (i.e. false).
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setAutoRaise() and get this property's value with autoRaise().
 .SH "BackgroundMode backgroundMode"
@@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ Set this property's value with setIconSet() and get this property's value with i
 .SH "bool on"
 This property holds whether this tool button is on.
 .PP
-This property has no effect on non-toggling buttons. The default is FALSE (i.e. off).
+This property has no effect on non-toggling buttons. The default is false (i.e. off).
 .PP
 See also toggleButton and toggle().
 .PP
@@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ This property holds whether this toolbutton uses big pixmaps.
 .PP
 TQToolButton automatically connects this property to the relevant signal in the TQMainWindow in which it resides. We strongly recommend that you use TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps() instead.
 .PP
-This property's default is TRUE.
+This property's default is true.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR If you set some buttons (in a TQMainWindow) to have big pixmaps and others to have small pixmaps, TQMainWindow may not get the geometry right.
 .PP
@@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ Set this property's value with setUsesBigPixmap() and get this property's value
 .SH "bool usesTextLabel"
 This property holds whether the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap.
 .PP
-The default is FALSE.
+The default is false.
 .PP
 TQToolButton automatically connects this slot to the relevant signal in the TQMainWindow in which is resides.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtooltip.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtooltip.3qt
index 5c1756001..90bf712ea 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtooltip.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtooltip.3qt
@@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Sets the font for all tool tips to \fIfont\fR.
 .PP
 See also font().
 .SH "void TQToolTip::setGloballyEnabled ( bool enable )\fC [static]\fR"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE sets all tool tips to be enabled (shown when needed); if \fIenable\fR is FALSE sets all tool tips to be disabled (never shown).
+If \fIenable\fR is true sets all tool tips to be enabled (shown when needed); if \fIenable\fR is false sets all tool tips to be disabled (never shown).
 .PP
 By default, tool tips are enabled. Note that this function affects all tool tips in the entire application.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtooltipgroup.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtooltipgroup.3qt
index e42763240..469cd8fc9 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtooltipgroup.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtooltipgroup.3qt
@@ -95,9 +95,9 @@ Constructs a tool tip group called \fIname\fR, with parent \fIparent\fR.
 .SH "TQToolTipGroup::~TQToolTipGroup ()"
 Destroys this tool tip group and all tool tips in it.
 .SH "bool TQToolTipGroup::delay () const"
-Returns TRUE if the display of the group text is delayed; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "delay" property for details.
+Returns true if the display of the group text is delayed; otherwise returns false. See the "delay" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQToolTipGroup::enabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if tool tips in the group are enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "enabled" property for details.
+Returns true if tool tips in the group are enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "enabled" property for details.
 .SH "void TQToolTipGroup::removeTip ()\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when a tool tip in this group is hidden. See the TQToolTipGroup documentation for an example of use.
 .PP
@@ -118,13 +118,13 @@ Example: helpsystem/mainwindow.cpp.
 .SH "bool delay"
 This property holds whether the display of the group text is delayed.
 .PP
-If set to TRUE (the default), the group text is displayed at the same time as the tool tip. Otherwise, the group text is displayed immediately when the cursor enters the widget.
+If set to true (the default), the group text is displayed at the same time as the tool tip. Otherwise, the group text is displayed immediately when the cursor enters the widget.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setDelay() and get this property's value with delay().
 .SH "bool enabled"
 This property holds whether tool tips in the group are enabled.
 .PP
-This property's default is TRUE.
+This property's default is true.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setEnabled() and get this property's value with enabled().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtranslator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtranslator.3qt
index 18217c245..0e310cc0f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtranslator.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtranslator.3qt
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Empties this translator of all contents.
 .PP
 This function works with stripped translator files.
 .SH "bool TQTranslator::contains ( const char * context, const char * sourceText, const char * comment = 0 ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this message file contains a message with the key (\fIcontext\fR, \fIsourceText\fR, \fIcomment\fR); otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this message file contains a message with the key (\fIcontext\fR, \fIsourceText\fR, \fIcomment\fR); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 This function works with stripped translator files.
 .PP
@@ -181,9 +181,9 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .SH "bool TQTranslator::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if this translator is empty, otherwise returns FALSE. This function works with stripped and unstripped translation files.
+Returns true if this translator is empty, otherwise returns false. This function works with stripped and unstripped translation files.
 .SH "bool TQTranslator::load ( const TQString & filename, const TQString & directory = TQString::null, const TQString & search_delimiters = TQString::null, const TQString & suffix = TQString::null )"
-Loads \fIfilename\fR, which may be an absolute file name or relative to \fIdirectory\fR. The previous contents of this translator object is discarded. Returns TRUE if the file is loaded successfully; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Loads \fIfilename\fR, which may be an absolute file name or relative to \fIdirectory\fR. The previous contents of this translator object is discarded. Returns true if the file is loaded successfully; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 If the full file name does not exist, other file names are tried in the following order:
 .PP
@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ Example: i18n/main.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQTranslator::load ( const uchar * data, int len )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Loads the .qm file data \fIdata\fR of length \fIlen\fR into the translator. Returns TRUE if the data is loaded successfully; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Loads the .qm file data \fIdata\fR of length \fIlen\fR into the translator. Returns true if the data is loaded successfully; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 The data is not copied. The caller must be able to guarantee that \fIdata\fR will not be deleted or modified.
 .SH "TQValueList<TQTranslatorMessage> TQTranslator::messages () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtranslatormessage.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtranslatormessage.3qt
index db1067515..46b793126 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqtranslatormessage.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtranslatormessage.3qt
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ TQTranslatorMessage \- Translator message and its properties
 .BI "enum \fBPrefix\fR { NoPrefix, Hash, HashContext, HashContextSourceText, HashContextSourceTextComment }"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBwrite\fR ( TQDataStream & stream, bool strip = FALSE, Prefix prefix = HashContextSourceTextComment ) const"
+.BI "void \fBwrite\fR ( TQDataStream & stream, bool strip = false, Prefix prefix = HashContextSourceTextComment ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "Prefix \fBcommonPrefix\fR ( const TQTranslatorMessage & m ) const"
@@ -129,19 +129,19 @@ Returns the hash value used internally to represent the lookup key. This value i
 .PP
 The hashing function is unspecified, but it will remain unchanged in future versions of Qt.
 .SH "bool TQTranslatorMessage::operator!= ( const TQTranslatorMessage & m ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is different from that of \fIm\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the extended key of this object is different from that of \fIm\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQTranslatorMessage::operator< ( const TQTranslatorMessage & m ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is lexicographically before than that of \fIm\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the extended key of this object is lexicographically before than that of \fIm\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQTranslatorMessage::operator<= ( const TQTranslatorMessage & m ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is lexicographically before that of \fIm\fR or if they are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the extended key of this object is lexicographically before that of \fIm\fR or if they are equal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQTranslatorMessage & TQTranslatorMessage::operator= ( const TQTranslatorMessage & m )"
 Assigns message \fIm\fR to this translator message and returns a reference to this translator message.
 .SH "bool TQTranslatorMessage::operator== ( const TQTranslatorMessage & m ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is equal to that of \fIm\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the extended key of this object is equal to that of \fIm\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQTranslatorMessage::operator> ( const TQTranslatorMessage & m ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is lexicographically after that of \fIm\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the extended key of this object is lexicographically after that of \fIm\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQTranslatorMessage::operator>= ( const TQTranslatorMessage & m ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the extended key of this object is lexicographically after that of \fIm\fR or if they are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the extended key of this object is lexicographically after that of \fIm\fR or if they are equal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "void TQTranslatorMessage::setTranslation ( const TQString & translation )"
 Sets the translation of the source text to \fItranslation\fR.
 .PP
@@ -154,8 +154,8 @@ Returns the source text of this message (e.g. "&Save").
 Returns the translation of the source text (e.g., "&Sauvegarder").
 .PP
 See also setTranslation().
-.SH "void TQTranslatorMessage::write ( TQDataStream & stream, bool strip = FALSE, Prefix prefix = HashContextSourceTextComment ) const"
-Writes this translator message to the \fIstream\fR. If \fIstrip\fR is FALSE (the default), all the information in the message is written. If \fIstrip\fR is TRUE, only the part of the extended key specified by \fIprefix\fR is written with the translation (HashContextSourceTextComment by default).
+.SH "void TQTranslatorMessage::write ( TQDataStream & stream, bool strip = false, Prefix prefix = HashContextSourceTextComment ) const"
+Writes this translator message to the \fIstream\fR. If \fIstrip\fR is false (the default), all the information in the message is written. If \fIstrip\fR is true, only the part of the extended key specified by \fIprefix\fR is written with the translation (HashContextSourceTextComment by default).
 .PP
 See also commonPrefix().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tquridrag.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tquridrag.3qt
index 38de28a97..a5f3fe70d 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tquridrag.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tquridrag.3qt
@@ -84,23 +84,23 @@ Constructs an object to drag. You must call setUris() before you start the drag(
 .SH "TQUriDrag::~TQUriDrag ()"
 Destroys the object.
 .SH "bool TQUriDrag::canDecode ( const TQMimeSource * e )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if decode() would be able to decode \fIe\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if decode() would be able to decode \fIe\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQUriDrag::decode ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQStrList & l )\fC [static]\fR"
 Decodes URIs from \fIe\fR, placing the result in \fIl\fR (which is first cleared).
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIe\fR contained a valid list of URIs; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIe\fR contained a valid list of URIs; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Example: dirview/dirview.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQUriDrag::decodeLocalFiles ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQStringList & l )\fC [static]\fR"
 Decodes URIs from the mime source event \fIe\fR, converts them to local files if they refer to local files, and places them in \fIl\fR (which is first cleared).
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIcontained\fR a valid list of URIs; otherwise returns FALSE. The list will be empty if no URIs were local files.
+Returns true if \fIcontained\fR a valid list of URIs; otherwise returns false. The list will be empty if no URIs were local files.
 .PP
 Example: fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQUriDrag::decodeToUnicodeUris ( const TQMimeSource * e, TQStringList & l )\fC [static]\fR"
 Decodes URIs from the mime source event \fIe\fR, converts them to Unicode URIs (only useful for displaying to humans), placing them in \fIl\fR (which is first cleared).
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if \fIcontained\fR a valid list of URIs; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIcontained\fR a valid list of URIs; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQCString TQUriDrag::localFileToUri ( const TQString & filename )\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns the URI equivalent to the absolute local file \fIfilename\fR.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqurl.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqurl.3qt
index d00df24c2..f6ae5a416 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqurl.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqurl.3qt
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ Inherited by TQUrlOperator.
 .BI "\fBTQUrl\fR ( const TQUrl & url )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQUrl\fR ( const TQUrl & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQUrl\fR ( const TQUrl & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual \fB~TQUrl\fR ()"
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Inherited by TQUrlOperator.
 .BI "bool \fBhasPort\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQString \fBpath\fR ( bool correct = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "TQString \fBpath\fR ( bool correct = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetPath\fR ( const TQString & path )"
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Inherited by TQUrlOperator.
 .BI "\fBoperator TQString\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual TQString \fBtoString\fR ( bool encodedPath = FALSE, bool forcePrependProtocol = TRUE ) const"
+.BI "virtual TQString \fBtoString\fR ( bool encodedPath = false, bool forcePrependProtocol = true ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual bool \fBcdUp\fR ()"
@@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ To make it easy to work with TQUrls and TQStrings, TQUrl implements the necessar
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
-Use the static functions, encode() and decode() to encode or decode a URL in a string. (They operate on the string in-place.) The isRelativeUrl() static function returns TRUE if the given string is a relative URL.
+Use the static functions, encode() and decode() to encode or decode a URL in a string. (They operate on the string in-place.) The isRelativeUrl() static function returns true if the given string is a relative URL.
 .PP
 If you want to use a URL to work on a hierarchical structure (e.g. a local or remote filesystem), you might want to use the subclass TQUrlOperator.
 .PP
@@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Constructs a URL by parsing the string \fIurl\fR.
 If you pass a string like "/home/qt", the "file" protocol is assumed.
 .SH "TQUrl::TQUrl ( const TQUrl & url )"
 Copy constructor. Copies the data of \fIurl\fR.
-.SH "TQUrl::TQUrl ( const TQUrl & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQUrl::TQUrl ( const TQUrl & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = false )"
 Constructs an URL taking \fIurl\fR as the base (context) and \fIrelUrl\fR as a relative URL to \fIurl\fR. If \fIrelUrl\fR is not relative, \fIrelUrl\fR is taken as the new URL.
 .PP
 For example, the path of
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ Similarly,
 .fi
 will result in a new URL, with "/usr/local" as the path and "file" as the protocol.
 .PP
-Normally it is expected that the path of \fIurl\fR points to a directory, even if the path has no slash at the end. But if you want the constructor to handle the last part of the path as a file name if there is no slash at the end, and to let it be replaced by the file name of \fIrelUrl\fR (if it contains one), set \fIcheckSlash\fR to TRUE.
+Normally it is expected that the path of \fIurl\fR points to a directory, even if the path has no slash at the end. But if you want the constructor to handle the last part of the path as a file name if there is no slash at the end, and to let it be replaced by the file name of \fIrelUrl\fR (if it contains one), set \fIcheckSlash\fR to true.
 .SH "TQUrl::~TQUrl ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Destructor.
 .SH "void TQUrl::addPath ( const TQString & pa )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -328,29 +328,29 @@ See also setFileName().
 .PP
 Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQUrl::hasHost () const"
-Returns TRUE if the URL contains a hostname; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the URL contains a hostname; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setHost().
 .SH "bool TQUrl::hasPassword () const"
-Returns TRUE if the URL contains a password; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the URL contains a password; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR Passwords passed in URLs are normally \fIinsecure\fR; this is due to the mechanism, not because of Qt.
 .PP
 See also setPassword() and setUser().
 .SH "bool TQUrl::hasPath () const"
-Returns TRUE if the URL contains a path; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the URL contains a path; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also path() and setPath().
 .SH "bool TQUrl::hasPort () const"
-Returns TRUE if the URL contains a port; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the URL contains a port; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setPort().
 .SH "bool TQUrl::hasRef () const"
-Returns TRUE if the URL has a reference; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the URL has a reference; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setRef().
 .SH "bool TQUrl::hasUser () const"
-Returns TRUE if the URL contains a username; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the URL contains a username; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also setUser() and setPassword().
 .SH "TQString TQUrl::host () const"
@@ -360,13 +360,13 @@ See also setHost() and hasHost().
 .PP
 Example: network/archivesearch/archivedialog.ui.h.
 .SH "bool TQUrl::isLocalFile () const"
-Returns TRUE if the URL is a local file; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the URL is a local file; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Example: tqdir/tqdir.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQUrl::isRelativeUrl ( const TQString & url )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if \fIurl\fR is relative; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if \fIurl\fR is relative; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQUrl::isValid () const"
-Returns TRUE if the URL is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. A URL is invalid if it cannot be parsed, for example.
+Returns true if the URL is valid; otherwise returns false. A URL is invalid if it cannot be parsed, for example.
 .SH "TQUrl::operator TQString () const"
 Composes a string version of the URL and returns it.
 .PP
@@ -380,11 +380,11 @@ Parses \fIurl\fR and assigns the resulting data to this class.
 .PP
 If you pass a string like "/home/qt" the "file" protocol will be assumed.
 .SH "bool TQUrl::operator== ( const TQUrl & url ) const"
-Compares this URL with \fIurl\fR and returns TRUE if they are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Compares this URL with \fIurl\fR and returns true if they are equal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQUrl::operator== ( const TQString & url ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Compares this URL with \fIurl\fR. \fIurl\fR is parsed first. Returns TRUE if \fIurl\fR is equal to this url; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Compares this URL with \fIurl\fR. \fIurl\fR is parsed first. Returns true if \fIurl\fR is equal to this url; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQUrl::parse ( const TQString & url )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Parses the \fIurl\fR.
 .SH "TQString TQUrl::password () const"
@@ -393,8 +393,8 @@ Returns the password of the URL.
 \fBWarning:\fR Passwords passed in URLs are normally \fIinsecure\fR; this is due to the mechanism, not because of Qt.
 .PP
 See also setPassword() and setUser().
-.SH "TQString TQUrl::path ( bool correct = TRUE ) const"
-Returns the path of the URL. If \fIcorrect\fR is TRUE, the path is cleaned (deals with too many or too few slashes, cleans things like "/../..", etc). Otherwise path() returns exactly the path that was parsed or set.
+.SH "TQString TQUrl::path ( bool correct = true ) const"
+Returns the path of the URL. If \fIcorrect\fR is true, the path is cleaned (deals with too many or too few slashes, cleans things like "/../..", etc). Otherwise path() returns exactly the path that was parsed or set.
 .PP
 See also setPath() and hasPath().
 .PP
@@ -461,8 +461,8 @@ See also ref(), hasRef(), and encode().
 Sets the username of the URL to \fIuser\fR.
 .PP
 See also user() and setPassword().
-.SH "TQString TQUrl::toString ( bool encodedPath = FALSE, bool forcePrependProtocol = TRUE ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Composes a string version of the URL and returns it. If \fIencodedPath\fR is TRUE the path in the returned string is encoded. If \fIforcePrependProtocol\fR is TRUE and \fIencodedPath\fR looks like a local filename, the "file:/" protocol is also prepended.
+.SH "TQString TQUrl::toString ( bool encodedPath = false, bool forcePrependProtocol = true ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Composes a string version of the URL and returns it. If \fIencodedPath\fR is true the path in the returned string is encoded. If \fIforcePrependProtocol\fR is true and \fIencodedPath\fR looks like a local filename, the "file:/" protocol is also prepended.
 .PP
 See also encode() and decode().
 .SH "TQString TQUrl::user () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqurlinfo.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqurlinfo.3qt
index 5f191c023..f629f8b6f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqurlinfo.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqurlinfo.3qt
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ See also isValid().
 .SH "TQUrlInfo::TQUrlInfo ( const TQUrlOperator & path, const TQString & file )"
 Constructs a TQUrlInfo object with information about the file \fIfile\fR in the \fIpath\fR. It tries to find the information about the \fIfile\fR in the TQUrlOperator \fIpath\fR.
 .PP
-If the information is not found, this constructor creates an invalid TQUrlInfo, i.e. isValid() returns FALSE. You should always check if the URL info is valid before relying on the return values of any getter functions.
+If the information is not found, this constructor creates an invalid TQUrlInfo, i.e. isValid() returns false. You should always check if the URL info is valid before relying on the return values of any getter functions.
 .PP
 If \fIfile\fR is empty, it defaults to the TQUrlOperator \fIpath\fR, i.e. to the directory.
 .PP
@@ -187,42 +187,42 @@ Destroys the URL info object.
 .PP
 The TQUrlOperator object to which this URL referred (if any) is not affected.
 .SH "bool TQUrlInfo::equal ( const TQUrlInfo & i1, const TQUrlInfo & i2, int sortBy )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if \fIi1\fR equals to \fIi2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. The objects are compared by the value, which is specified by \fIsortBy\fR. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or TQDir::Size.
+Returns true if \fIi1\fR equals to \fIi2\fR; otherwise returns false. The objects are compared by the value, which is specified by \fIsortBy\fR. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or TQDir::Size.
 .SH "bool TQUrlInfo::greaterThan ( const TQUrlInfo & i1, const TQUrlInfo & i2, int sortBy )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if \fIi1\fR is greater than \fIi2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. The objects are compared by the value, which is specified by \fIsortBy\fR. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or TQDir::Size.
+Returns true if \fIi1\fR is greater than \fIi2\fR; otherwise returns false. The objects are compared by the value, which is specified by \fIsortBy\fR. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or TQDir::Size.
 .SH "TQString TQUrlInfo::group () const"
 Returns the group of the URL.
 .PP
 See also isValid().
 .SH "bool TQUrlInfo::isDir () const"
-Returns TRUE if the URL is a directory; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the URL is a directory; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isValid().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h and network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQUrlInfo::isExecutable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the URL is executable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the URL is executable; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isValid().
 .SH "bool TQUrlInfo::isFile () const"
-Returns TRUE if the URL is a file; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the URL is a file; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isValid().
 .SH "bool TQUrlInfo::isReadable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the URL is readable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the URL is readable; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isValid().
 .SH "bool TQUrlInfo::isSymLink () const"
-Returns TRUE if the URL is a symbolic link; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the URL is a symbolic link; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isValid().
 .SH "bool TQUrlInfo::isValid () const"
-Returns TRUE if the URL info is valid; otherwise returns FALSE. Valid means that the TQUrlInfo contains real information. For example, a call to TQUrlOperator::info() might return a an invalid TQUrlInfo, if no information about the requested entry is available.
+Returns true if the URL info is valid; otherwise returns false. Valid means that the TQUrlInfo contains real information. For example, a call to TQUrlOperator::info() might return a an invalid TQUrlInfo, if no information about the requested entry is available.
 .PP
 You should always check if the URL info is valid before relying on the values.
 .SH "bool TQUrlInfo::isWritable () const"
-Returns TRUE if the URL is writable; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the URL is writable; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also isValid().
 .SH "TQDateTime TQUrlInfo::lastModified () const"
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ Returns the date when the URL was last read.
 .PP
 See also isValid().
 .SH "bool TQUrlInfo::lessThan ( const TQUrlInfo & i1, const TQUrlInfo & i2, int sortBy )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if \fIi1\fR is less than \fIi2\fR; otherwise returns FALSE. The objects are compared by the value, which is specified by \fIsortBy\fR. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or TQDir::Size.
+Returns true if \fIi1\fR is less than \fIi2\fR; otherwise returns false. The objects are compared by the value, which is specified by \fIsortBy\fR. This must be one of TQDir::Name, TQDir::Time or TQDir::Size.
 .SH "TQString TQUrlInfo::name () const"
 Returns the file name of the URL.
 .PP
@@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Example: network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h.
 .SH "TQUrlInfo & TQUrlInfo::operator= ( const TQUrlInfo & ui )"
 Assigns the values of \fIui\fR to this TQUrlInfo object.
 .SH "bool TQUrlInfo::operator== ( const TQUrlInfo & i ) const"
-Compares this TQUrlInfo with \fIi\fR and returns TRUE if they are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Compares this TQUrlInfo with \fIi\fR and returns true if they are equal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQString TQUrlInfo::owner () const"
 Returns the owner of the URL.
 .PP
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ Returns the permissions of the URL. You can use the PermissionSpec flags to test
 .PP
 See also isValid().
 .SH "void TQUrlInfo::setDir ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE then the URL is set to be a directory; if \\b is FALSE then the URL is set not to be a directory (which normally means it is a file). (Note that a URL can refer to both a file and a directory even though most file systems do not support this.)
+If \fIb\fR is true then the URL is set to be a directory; if \\b is false then the URL is set not to be a directory (which normally means it is a file). (Note that a URL can refer to both a file and a directory even though most file systems do not support this.)
 .PP
 If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function turns it into a valid one.
 .PP
@@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ See also isValid().
 .PP
 Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
 .SH "void TQUrlInfo::setFile ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIb\fR is TRUE then the URL is set to be a file; if \\b is FALSE then the URL is set not to be a file (which normally means it is a directory). (Note that a URL can refer to both a file and a directory even though most file systems do not support this.)
+If \fIb\fR is true then the URL is set to be a file; if \\b is false then the URL is set not to be a file (which normally means it is a directory). (Note that a URL can refer to both a file and a directory even though most file systems do not support this.)
 .PP
 If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function turns it into a valid one.
 .PP
@@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function turns it into a
 .PP
 See also isValid().
 .SH "void TQUrlInfo::setReadable ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Specifies that the URL is readable if \fIb\fR is TRUE and not readable if \fIb\fR is FALSE.
+Specifies that the URL is readable if \fIb\fR is true and not readable if \fIb\fR is false.
 .PP
 If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function turns it into a valid one.
 .PP
@@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function turns it into a
 .PP
 See also isValid().
 .SH "void TQUrlInfo::setSymLink ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Specifies that the URL refers to a symbolic link if \fIb\fR is TRUE and that it does not if \fIb\fR is FALSE.
+Specifies that the URL refers to a symbolic link if \fIb\fR is true and that it does not if \fIb\fR is false.
 .PP
 If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function turns it into a valid one.
 .PP
@@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ See also isValid().
 .PP
 Example: network/networkprotocol/nntp.cpp.
 .SH "void TQUrlInfo::setWritable ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Specifies that the URL is writable if \fIb\fR is TRUE and not writable if \fIb\fR is FALSE.
+Specifies that the URL is writable if \fIb\fR is true and not writable if \fIb\fR is false.
 .PP
 If you call this function for an invalid URL info, this function turns it into a valid one.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqurloperator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqurloperator.3qt
index 0b1ee0a9b..e97d1eab5 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqurloperator.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqurloperator.3qt
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ Inherits TQObject and TQUrl.
 .BI "\fBTQUrlOperator\fR ( const TQUrlOperator & url )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQUrlOperator\fR ( const TQUrlOperator & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE )"
+.BI "\fBTQUrlOperator\fR ( const TQUrlOperator & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual \fB~TQUrlOperator\fR ()"
@@ -49,10 +49,10 @@ Inherits TQObject and TQUrl.
 .BI "virtual const TQNetworkOperation * \fBput\fR ( const TQByteArray & data, const TQString & location = TQString::null )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> \fBcopy\fR ( const TQString & from, const TQString & to, bool move = FALSE, bool toPath = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> \fBcopy\fR ( const TQString & from, const TQString & to, bool move = false, bool toPath = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBcopy\fR ( const TQStringList & files, const TQString & dest, bool move = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBcopy\fR ( const TQStringList & files, const TQString & dest, bool move = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual bool \fBisDir\fR ( bool * ok = 0 )"
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Constructs a TQUrlOperator using \fIurl\fR and parses this string.
 If you pass strings like "/home/qt" the "file" protocol is assumed.
 .SH "TQUrlOperator::TQUrlOperator ( const TQUrlOperator & url )"
 Constructs a copy of \fIurl\fR.
-.SH "TQUrlOperator::TQUrlOperator ( const TQUrlOperator & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = FALSE )"
+.SH "TQUrlOperator::TQUrlOperator ( const TQUrlOperator & url, const TQString & relUrl, bool checkSlash = false )"
 Constructs a TQUrlOperator. The URL on which this TQUrlOperator operates is constructed out of the arguments \fIurl\fR, \fIrelUrl\fR and \fIcheckSlash\fR: see the corresponding TQUrl constructor for an explanation of these arguments.
 .SH "TQUrlOperator::~TQUrlOperator ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Destructor.
@@ -179,18 +179,18 @@ Clears the cache of children.
 This signal is emitted whenever the URL operator's connection state changes. \fIstate\fR describes the new state, which is a TQNetworkProtocol::ConnectionState value.
 .PP
 \fIdata\fR is a string that describes the change of the connection. This can be used to display a message to the user.
-.SH "TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> TQUrlOperator::copy ( const TQString & from, const TQString & to, bool move = FALSE, bool toPath = TRUE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Copies the file \fIfrom\fR to \fIto\fR. If \fImove\fR is TRUE, the file is moved (copied and removed). \fIfrom\fR must point to a file and \fIto\fR must point to a directory (into which \fIfrom\fR is copied) unless \fItoPath\fR is set to FALSE. If \fItoPath\fR is set to FALSE then the \fIto\fR variable is assumed to be the absolute file path (destination file path + file name). The copying is done using the get() and put() operations. If you want to be notified about the progress of the operation, connect to the dataTransferProgress() signal. Bear in mind that the get() and put() operations emit this signal through the TQUrlOperator. The number of transferred bytes and the total bytes that you receive as arguments in this signal do not relate to the the whole copy operation; they relate first to the get() and then to the put() operation. Always check what type of operation the signal comes from; this is given in the signal's last argument.
+.SH "TQPtrList<TQNetworkOperation> TQUrlOperator::copy ( const TQString & from, const TQString & to, bool move = false, bool toPath = true )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+Copies the file \fIfrom\fR to \fIto\fR. If \fImove\fR is true, the file is moved (copied and removed). \fIfrom\fR must point to a file and \fIto\fR must point to a directory (into which \fIfrom\fR is copied) unless \fItoPath\fR is set to false. If \fItoPath\fR is set to false then the \fIto\fR variable is assumed to be the absolute file path (destination file path + file name). The copying is done using the get() and put() operations. If you want to be notified about the progress of the operation, connect to the dataTransferProgress() signal. Bear in mind that the get() and put() operations emit this signal through the TQUrlOperator. The number of transferred bytes and the total bytes that you receive as arguments in this signal do not relate to the the whole copy operation; they relate first to the get() and then to the put() operation. Always check what type of operation the signal comes from; this is given in the signal's last argument.
 .PP
 At the end, finished() (with success or failure) is emitted, so check the state of the network operation object to see whether or not the operation was successful.
 .PP
 Because a move or copy operation consists of multiple operations (get(), put() and maybe remove()), this function doesn't return a single TQNetworkOperation, but rather a list of them. They are in the order: get(), put() and (if applicable) remove().
 .PP
 See also get() and put().
-.SH "void TQUrlOperator::copy ( const TQStringList & files, const TQString & dest, bool move = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQUrlOperator::copy ( const TQStringList & files, const TQString & dest, bool move = false )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Copies the \fIfiles\fR to the directory \fIdest\fR. If \fImove\fR is TRUE the files are moved, not copied. \fIdest\fR must point to a directory.
+Copies the \fIfiles\fR to the directory \fIdest\fR. If \fImove\fR is true the files are moved, not copied. \fIdest\fR must point to a directory.
 .PP
 This function calls copy() for each entry in \fIfiles\fR in turn. You don't get a result from this function; each time a new copy begins, startedNextCopy() is emitted, with a list of TQNetworkOperations that describe the new copy operation.
 .SH "void TQUrlOperator::createdDirectory ( const TQUrlInfo & i, TQNetworkOperation * op )\fC [signal]\fR"
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ Finds a network protocol for the URL and deletes the old network protocol.
 .SH "TQUrlInfo TQUrlOperator::info ( const TQString & entry ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the URL information for the child \fIentry\fR, or returns an empty TQUrlInfo object if there is no information available about \fIentry\fR. Information about \fIentry\fR is only available after a successfully finished listChildren() operation.
 .SH "bool TQUrlOperator::isDir ( bool * ok = 0 )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the URL is a directory; otherwise returns FALSE. This may not always work correctly, if the protocol of the URL is something other than file (local filesystem). If you pass a bool pointer as the \fIok\fR argument, \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE if the result of this function is known to be correct, and to FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the URL is a directory; otherwise returns false. This may not always work correctly, if the protocol of the URL is something other than file (local filesystem). If you pass a bool pointer as the \fIok\fR argument, \fI*ok\fR is set to true if the result of this function is known to be correct, and to false otherwise.
 .SH "void TQUrlOperator::itemChanged ( TQNetworkOperation * op )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted whenever a file which is a child of the URL has been changed, for example by successfully calling rename(). \fIop\fR is a pointer to the operation object which contains all the information about the operation, including the state. \fCop->arg(0)\fR holds the original file name and \fCop->arg(1)\fR holds the new file name (if it was changed).
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tquuid.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tquuid.3qt
index f3c56efc3..c3d80a4db 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tquuid.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tquuid.3qt
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ In Qt, UUIDs are wrapped by the TQUuid struct which provides convenience functio
 .PP
 UUIDs generated by TQUuid, are based on the Random version of the DCE (Distributed Computing Environment) standard.
 .PP
-UUIDs can be constructed from numeric values or from strings, or using the static createUuid() function. They can be converted to a string with toString(). UUIDs have a variant() and a version(), and null UUIDs return TRUE from isNull().
+UUIDs can be constructed from numeric values or from strings, or using the static createUuid() function. They can be converted to a string with toString(). UUIDs have a variant() and a version(), and null UUIDs return true from isNull().
 .SS "Member Type Documentation"
 .SH "TQUuid::Variant"
 This enum defines the variant of the UUID, which is the scheme which defines the layout of the 128-bits value.
@@ -140,23 +140,23 @@ On Windows, the new UUID is extremely likely to be unique on the same or any oth
 .PP
 See also variant() and version().
 .SH "bool TQUuid::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if this is the null UUID {00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000}; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this is the null UUID {00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000}; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQUuid::operator TQString () const"
 Returns the string representation of the uuid.
 .PP
 See also toString().
 .SH "bool TQUuid::operator!= ( const TQUuid & other ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this TQUuid and the \fIother\fR TQUuid are different; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this TQUuid and the \fIother\fR TQUuid are different; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQUuid::operator< ( const TQUuid & other ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this TQUuid is of the same variant, and lexicographically before the \fIother\fR TQUuid; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this TQUuid is of the same variant, and lexicographically before the \fIother\fR TQUuid; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also variant().
 .SH "TQUuid & TQUuid::operator= ( const TQUuid & uuid )"
 Assigns the value of \fIuuid\fR to this TQUuid object.
 .SH "bool TQUuid::operator== ( const TQUuid & other ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this TQUuid and the \fIother\fR TQUuid are identical; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this TQUuid and the \fIother\fR TQUuid are identical; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQUuid::operator> ( const TQUuid & other ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this TQUuid is of the same variant, and lexicographically after the \fIother\fR TQUuid; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this TQUuid is of the same variant, and lexicographically after the \fIother\fR TQUuid; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also variant().
 .SH "TQString TQUuid::toString () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqvaluelist.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqvaluelist.3qt
index 34792bc85..574d94e51 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqvaluelist.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqvaluelist.3qt
@@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Returns an iterator pointing to the item at position \fIi\fR in the list, or an undefined value if the index is out of range.
 .SH "reference TQValueList::back ()"
-Returns a reference to the last item. If the list contains no last item (i.e. empty() returns TRUE), the return value is undefined.
+Returns a reference to the last item. If the list contains no last item (i.e. empty() returns true), the return value is undefined.
 .PP
 This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent to last().
 .PP
@@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ See also isEmpty().
 Examples:
 .)l chart/element.cpp, fileiconview/tqfileiconview.cpp, and table/statistics/statistics.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQValueList::empty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the list contains no items; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the list contains no items; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also size().
 .SH "iterator TQValueList::end ()"
@@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ Returns end() if no item matched.
 .SH "int TQValueList::findIndex ( const T & x ) const"
 Returns the index of the first occurrence of the value \fIx\fR. Returns -1 if no item matched.
 .SH "T & TQValueList::first ()"
-Returns a reference to the first item. If the list contains no first item (i.e. isEmpty() returns TRUE), the return value is undefined.
+Returns a reference to the first item. If the list contains no first item (i.e. isEmpty() returns true), the return value is undefined.
 .PP
 See also last().
 .PP
@@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ Use the end() function instead. For example:
 .br
 .fi
 .SH "reference TQValueList::front ()"
-Returns a reference to the first item. If the list contains no first item (i.e. empty() returns TRUE), the return value is undefined.
+Returns a reference to the first item. If the list contains no first item (i.e. empty() returns true), the return value is undefined.
 .PP
 This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent to first().
 .PP
@@ -631,20 +631,20 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Inserts \fIn\fR copies of \fIx\fR before position \fIpos\fR.
 .SH "bool TQValueList::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the list contains no items; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the list contains no items; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also count().
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l fonts/simple-tqfont-demo/viewer.cpp and network/mail/smtp.cpp.
 .SH "T & TQValueList::last ()"
-Returns a reference to the last item. If the list contains no last item (i.e. empty() returns TRUE), the return value is undefined.
+Returns a reference to the last item. If the list contains no last item (i.e. empty() returns true), the return value is undefined.
 .SH "const T & TQValueList::last () const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .SH "bool TQValueList::operator!= ( const TQValueList<T> & l ) const"
 Compares both lists.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if this list and \fIl\fR are unequal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this list and \fIl\fR are unequal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQValueList<T> TQValueList::operator+ ( const TQValueList<T> & l ) const"
 Creates a new list and fills it with the items of this list. Then the items of \fIl\fR are appended. Returns the new list.
 .SH "TQValueList<T> & TQValueList::operator+= ( const TQValueList<T> & l )"
@@ -670,11 +670,11 @@ All iterators of the current list become invalidated by this operation.
 .SH "bool TQValueList::operator== ( const TQValueList<T> & l ) const"
 Compares both lists.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if this list and \fIl\fR are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this list and \fIl\fR are equal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQValueList::operator== ( const std::list<T> & l ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if this list and \fIl\fR are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this list and \fIl\fR are equal; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 This operator is provided for compatibility with STL containers.
 .SH "const T & TQValueList::operator[] ( size_type i ) const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqvaluelistconstiterator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqvaluelistconstiterator.3qt
index 35c19fcf7..7cae3df73 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqvaluelistconstiterator.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqvaluelistconstiterator.3qt
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Constructs a copy of the iterator \fIit\fR.
 .SH "TQValueListConstIterator::TQValueListConstIterator ( const TQValueListIterator<T> & it )"
 Constructs a copy of the iterator \fIit\fR.
 .SH "bool TQValueListConstIterator::operator!= ( const TQValueListConstIterator<T> & it ) const"
-Compares this iterator with \fIit\fR and returns TRUE if they point to different items; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Compares this iterator with \fIit\fR and returns true if they point to different items; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "const T & TQValueListConstIterator::operator* () const"
 Asterisk operator. Returns a reference to the current iterator item.
 .SH "TQValueListConstIterator<T> & TQValueListConstIterator::operator++ ()"
@@ -98,8 +98,8 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Postfix -- makes the previous item current and returns an iterator pointing to the new current item. The iterator cannot check whether it reached the beginning of the list. Decrementing the iterator returned by begin() causes undefined results.
 .SH "bool TQValueListConstIterator::operator== ( const TQValueListConstIterator<T> & it ) const"
-Compares this iterator with \fIit\fR and returns TRUE if they point
-to the same item; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Compares this iterator with \fIit\fR and returns true if they point
+to the same item; otherwise returns false.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 .BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqvaluelistconstiterator.html
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqvaluelistiterator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqvaluelistiterator.3qt
index 1d9430e2a..ddef5ebe5 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqvaluelistiterator.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqvaluelistiterator.3qt
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Constructs a copy of the iterator \fIit\fR.
 .SH "bool TQValueListIterator::operator!= ( const TQValueListIterator<T> & it ) const"
-Compares this iterator and \fIit\fR and returns TRUE if they point to different items; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Compares this iterator and \fIit\fR and returns true if they point to different items; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "T & TQValueListIterator::operator* ()"
 Asterisk operator. Returns a reference to the current iterator item.
 .SH "const T & TQValueListIterator::operator* () const"
@@ -143,8 +143,8 @@ Postfix -- makes the previous item current and returns an iterator pointing to t
 .SH "TQValueListIterator<T> & TQValueListIterator::operator-= ( int j )"
 Postfix -- jumps \fIj\fR steps backward in the list. The iterator cannot check whether it reached the beginning of the list. Jumping past begin() causes undefined results.
 .SH "bool TQValueListIterator::operator== ( const TQValueListIterator<T> & it ) const"
-Compares this iterator and \fIit\fR and returns TRUE if they point to
-the same item; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Compares this iterator and \fIit\fR and returns true if they point to
+the same item; otherwise returns false.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 .BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqvaluelistiterator.html
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqvaluevector.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqvaluevector.3qt
index 6cda7d8f1..bf37da0c0 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqvaluevector.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqvaluevector.3qt
@@ -471,11 +471,11 @@ Appends a copy of \fIx\fR to the end of the vector.
 .PP
 See also push_back() and insert().
 .SH "reference TQValueVector::at ( size_type i, bool * ok = 0 )"
-Returns a reference to the element with index \fIi\fR. If \fIok\fR is non-null, and the index \fIi\fR is out of range, *\fIok\fR is set to FALSE and the returned reference is undefined. If the index \fIi\fR is within the range of the vector, and \fIok\fR is non-null, *\fIok\fR is set to TRUE and the returned reference is well defined.
+Returns a reference to the element with index \fIi\fR. If \fIok\fR is non-null, and the index \fIi\fR is out of range, *\fIok\fR is set to false and the returned reference is undefined. If the index \fIi\fR is within the range of the vector, and \fIok\fR is non-null, *\fIok\fR is set to true and the returned reference is well defined.
 .SH "const_reference TQValueVector::at ( size_type i, bool * ok = 0 ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns a const reference to the element with index \fIi\fR. If \fIok\fR is non-null, and the index \fIi\fR is out of range, *\fIok\fR is set to FALSE and the returned reference is undefined. If the index \fIi\fR is within the range of the vector, and \fIok\fR is non-null, *\fIok\fR is set to TRUE and the returned reference is well defined.
+Returns a const reference to the element with index \fIi\fR. If \fIok\fR is non-null, and the index \fIi\fR is out of range, *\fIok\fR is set to false and the returned reference is undefined. If the index \fIi\fR is within the range of the vector, and \fIok\fR is non-null, *\fIok\fR is set to true and the returned reference is well defined.
 .SH "reference TQValueVector::back ()"
 Returns a reference to the last element in the vector. If there is no last element, this function has undefined behavior.
 .PP
@@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ Returns the number of items in the vector.
 .PP
 See also isEmpty().
 .SH "bool TQValueVector::empty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the vector is empty; otherwise returns FALSE. Equivalent to size()==0, only faster.
+Returns true if the vector is empty; otherwise returns false. Equivalent to size()==0, only faster.
 .PP
 This function is provided for STL compatibility. It is equivalent to isEmpty().
 .PP
@@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ Inserts \fIn\fR copies of \fIx\fR immediately before position x.
 .PP
 See also push_back().
 .SH "bool TQValueVector::isEmpty () const"
-Returns TRUE if the vector is empty; returns FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the vector is empty; returns false otherwise.
 .PP
 See also count().
 .SH "reference TQValueVector::last ()"
@@ -573,11 +573,11 @@ Assigns \fIv\fR to this vector and returns a reference to this vector.
 .PP
 All iterators of the current vector become invalidated by this operation. The cost of this assignment is O(n) since \fIv\fR is copied.
 .SH "bool TQValueVector::operator== ( const TQValueVector<T> & x ) const"
-Returns TRUE if each element in this vector equals each corresponding element in \fIx\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if each element in this vector equals each corresponding element in \fIx\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "bool TQValueVector::operator== ( const TQValueVector<T> & x )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if each element in this vector equals each corresponding element in \fIx\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if each element in this vector equals each corresponding element in \fIx\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "reference TQValueVector::operator[] ( size_type i )"
 Returns a reference to the element at index \fIi\fR. If \fIi\fR is out of range, this function has undefined behavior.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqvariant.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqvariant.3qt
index b2d2b33d5..b340b00b1 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqvariant.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqvariant.3qt
@@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ TQVariant also supports the notion of NULL values, where you have a defined type
 .br
     x.asInt();
 .br
-    // x.isNull() == TRUE, y.isNull() == TRUE, z.isNull() == FALSE
+    // x.isNull() == true, y.isNull() == true, z.isNull() == false
 .br
 .fi
 .PP
@@ -857,7 +857,7 @@ Returns the variant's value as unsigned int reference.
 .SH "TQ_ULLONG & TQVariant::asULongLong ()"
 Returns the variant's value as unsigned long long reference.
 .SH "bool TQVariant::canCast ( Type t ) const"
-Returns TRUE if the variant's type can be cast to the requested type, \fIt\fR. Such casting is done automatically when calling the toInt(), toBool(), ... or asInt(), asBool(), ... methods.
+Returns true if the variant's type can be cast to the requested type, \fIt\fR. Such casting is done automatically when calling the toInt(), toBool(), ... or asInt(), asBool(), ... methods.
 .PP
 The following casts are done automatically: <center>.nf
 .TS
@@ -866,15 +866,15 @@ l - l. Type Automatically Cast To Bool Double, Int, UInt, LongLong, ULongLong, S
 .fi
 </center>
 .SH "bool TQVariant::cast ( Type t )"
-Casts the variant to the requested type. If the cast cannot be done, the variant is set to the default value of the requested type (e.g. an empty string if the requested type \fIt\fR is TQVariant::String, an empty point array if the requested type \fIt\fR is TQVariant::PointArray, etc). Returns TRUE if the current type of the variant was successfully cast; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Casts the variant to the requested type. If the cast cannot be done, the variant is set to the default value of the requested type (e.g. an empty string if the requested type \fIt\fR is TQVariant::String, an empty point array if the requested type \fIt\fR is TQVariant::PointArray, etc). Returns true if the current type of the variant was successfully cast; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also canCast().
 .SH "void TQVariant::clear ()"
 Convert this variant to type Invalid and free up any resources used.
 .SH "bool TQVariant::isNull () const"
-Returns TRUE if this is a NULL variant, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if this is a NULL variant, false otherwise.
 .SH "bool TQVariant::isValid () const"
-Returns TRUE if the storage type of this variant is not TQVariant::Invalid; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the storage type of this variant is not TQVariant::Invalid; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQValueListConstIterator<TQVariant> TQVariant::listBegin () const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
@@ -900,13 +900,13 @@ Converts the string representation of the storage type given in \fIname\fR, to i
 .PP
 If the string representation cannot be converted to any enum representation, the variant is set to Invalid.
 .SH "bool TQVariant::operator!= ( const TQVariant & v ) const"
-Compares this TQVariant with \fIv\fR and returns TRUE if they are not equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Compares this TQVariant with \fIv\fR and returns true if they are not equal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQVariant & TQVariant::operator= ( const TQVariant & variant )"
 Assigns the value of the variant \fIvariant\fR to this variant.
 .PP
 This is a deep copy of the variant, but note that if the variant holds an explicitly shared type such as TQImage, a shallow copy is performed.
 .SH "bool TQVariant::operator== ( const TQVariant & v ) const"
-Compares this TQVariant with \fIv\fR and returns TRUE if they are equal; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Compares this TQVariant with \fIv\fR and returns true if they are equal; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQValueListConstIterator<TQString> TQVariant::stringListBegin () const"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
@@ -924,9 +924,9 @@ Returns the variant as a TQBitmap if the variant has type() Bitmap; otherwise re
 .PP
 See also asBitmap().
 .SH "bool TQVariant::toBool () const"
-Returns the variant as a bool if the variant can be cast to Bool; otherWise returns FALSE.
+Returns the variant as a bool if the variant can be cast to Bool; otherWise returns false.
 .PP
-Returns TRUE if the variant has a numeric type and its value is non-zero, or if the variant has type String, ByteArray or CString and its lower-case content is not empty, "0" or "false"; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the variant has a numeric type and its value is non-zero, or if the variant has type String, ByteArray or CString and its lower-case content is not empty, "0" or "false"; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also asBool() and canCast().
 .SH "const TQBrush TQVariant::toBrush () const"
@@ -968,7 +968,7 @@ See also asDateTime().
 .SH "double TQVariant::toDouble ( bool * ok = 0 ) const"
 Returns the variant as a double if the variant can be cast to Double; otherwise returns 0.0.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is non-null: \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE if the value could be converted to a double; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE.
+If \fIok\fR is non-null: \fI*ok\fR is set to true if the value could be converted to a double; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to false.
 .PP
 See also asDouble() and canCast().
 .SH "const TQFont TQVariant::toFont () const"
@@ -986,7 +986,7 @@ See also asImage().
 .SH "int TQVariant::toInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const"
 Returns the variant as an int if the variant can be cast to Int; otherwise returns 0.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is non-null: \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE if the value could be converted to an int; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE.
+If \fIok\fR is non-null: \fI*ok\fR is set to true if the value could be converted to an int; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to false.
 .PP
 See also asInt() and canCast().
 .SH "const TQKeySequence TQVariant::toKeySequence () const"
@@ -1018,7 +1018,7 @@ See also asList().
 .SH "TQ_LLONG TQVariant::toLongLong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const"
 Returns the variant as a long long int if the variant can be cast to LongLong; otherwise returns 0.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is non-null: \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE if the value could be converted to an int; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE.
+If \fIok\fR is non-null: \fI*ok\fR is set to true if the value could be converted to an int; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to false.
 .PP
 See also asLongLong() and canCast().
 .SH "const TQMap<TQString, TQVariant> TQVariant::toMap () const"
@@ -1112,13 +1112,13 @@ See also asTime().
 .SH "uint TQVariant::toUInt ( bool * ok = 0 ) const"
 Returns the variant as an unsigned int if the variant can be cast to UInt; otherwise returns 0.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is non-null: \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE if the value could be converted to an unsigned int; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE.
+If \fIok\fR is non-null: \fI*ok\fR is set to true if the value could be converted to an unsigned int; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to false.
 .PP
 See also asUInt() and canCast().
 .SH "TQ_ULLONG TQVariant::toULongLong ( bool * ok = 0 ) const"
 Returns the variant as as an unsigned long long int if the variant can be cast to ULongLong; otherwise returns 0.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is non-null: \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE if the value could be converted to an int; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE.
+If \fIok\fR is non-null: \fI*ok\fR is set to true if the value could be converted to an int; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to false.
 .PP
 See also asULongLong() and canCast().
 .SH "Type TQVariant::type () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqwaitcondition.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqwaitcondition.3qt
index 3dbbc3741..ff0fe207e 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqwaitcondition.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqwaitcondition.3qt
@@ -150,9 +150,9 @@ Deletes the event signalling, i.e. wait condition, object.
 .SH "bool TQWaitCondition::wait ( unsigned long time = ULONG_MAX )"
 Wait on the thread event object. The thread calling this will block until either of these conditions is met:
 .TP
-Another thread signals it using wakeOne() or wakeAll(). This function will return TRUE in this case.
+Another thread signals it using wakeOne() or wakeAll(). This function will return true in this case.
 .TP
-\fItime\fR milliseconds has elapsed. If \fItime\fR is ULONG_MAX (the default), then the wait will never timeout (the event must be signalled). This function will return FALSE if the wait timed out.
+\fItime\fR milliseconds has elapsed. If \fItime\fR is ULONG_MAX (the default), then the wait will never timeout (the event must be signalled). This function will return false if the wait timed out.
 .PP
 See also wakeOne() and wakeAll().
 .SH "bool TQWaitCondition::wait ( TQMutex * mutex, unsigned long time = ULONG_MAX )"
@@ -160,9 +160,9 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .PP
 Release the locked \fImutex\fR and wait on the thread event object. The \fImutex\fR must be initially locked by the calling thread. If \fImutex\fR is not in a locked state, this function returns immediately. If \fImutex\fR is a recursive mutex, this function returns immediately. The \fImutex\fR will be unlocked, and the calling thread will block until either of these conditions is met:
 .TP
-Another thread signals it using wakeOne() or wakeAll(). This function will return TRUE in this case.
+Another thread signals it using wakeOne() or wakeAll(). This function will return true in this case.
 .TP
-\fItime\fR milliseconds has elapsed. If \fItime\fR is ULONG_MAX (the default), then the wait will never timeout (the event must be signalled). This function will return FALSE if the wait timed out.
+\fItime\fR milliseconds has elapsed. If \fItime\fR is ULONG_MAX (the default), then the wait will never timeout (the event must be signalled). This function will return false if the wait timed out.
 .PP
 The mutex will be returned to the same locked state. This function is provided to allow the atomic transition from the locked state to the wait state.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqwhatsthis.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqwhatsthis.3qt
index 0af9e30ca..7f3bd6dd6 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqwhatsthis.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqwhatsthis.3qt
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ Inherits Qt.
 .BI "void \fBremove\fR ( TQWidget * widget )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQString \fBtextFor\fR ( TQWidget * w, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint ( ), bool includeParents = FALSE )"
+.BI "TQString \fBtextFor\fR ( TQWidget * w, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint ( ), bool includeParents = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "TQToolButton * \fBwhatsThisButton\fR ( TQWidget * parent )"
@@ -125,9 +125,9 @@ Examples:
 .SH "bool TQWhatsThis::clicked ( const TQString & href )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This virtual function is called when the user clicks inside the" What's this?" window. \fIhref\fR is the link the user clicked on, or TQString::null if there was no link.
 .PP
-If the function returns TRUE (the default), the "What's this?" window is closed, otherwise it remains visible.
+If the function returns true (the default), the "What's this?" window is closed, otherwise it remains visible.
 .PP
-The default implementation ignores \fIhref\fR and returns TRUE.
+The default implementation ignores \fIhref\fR and returns true.
 .SH "void TQWhatsThis::display ( const TQString & text, const TQPoint & pos = TQCursor::pos ( ), TQWidget * w = 0 )\fC [static]\fR"
 Display \fItext\fR in a help window at the global screen position \fIpos\fR.
 .PP
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ The user can also use the Esc key to leave "What's this?" mode.
 .PP
 See also inWhatsThisMode() and leaveWhatsThisMode().
 .SH "bool TQWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode ()\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the application is in "What's this?" mode; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the application is in "What's this?" mode; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also enterWhatsThisMode() and leaveWhatsThisMode().
 .SH "void TQWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode ( const TQString & text = TQString::null, const TQPoint & pos = TQCursor::pos ( ), TQWidget * w = 0 )\fC [static]\fR"
@@ -164,10 +164,10 @@ Sets the font for all "What's this?" helps to \fIfont\fR.
 This virtual function returns the text for position \fIp\fR in the widget that this "What's this?" object documents. If there is no" What's this?" text for the position, TQString::null is returned.
 .PP
 The default implementation returns TQString::null.
-.SH "TQString TQWhatsThis::textFor ( TQWidget * w, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint ( ), bool includeParents = FALSE )\fC [static]\fR"
+.SH "TQString TQWhatsThis::textFor ( TQWidget * w, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint ( ), bool includeParents = false )\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns the what's this text for widget \fIw\fR or TQString::null if there is no "What's this?" help for the widget. \fIpos\fR contains the mouse position; this is useful, for example, if you've subclassed to make the text that is displayed position dependent.
 .PP
-If \fIincludeParents\fR is TRUE, parent widgets are taken into consideration as well when looking for what's this help text.
+If \fIincludeParents\fR is true, parent widgets are taken into consideration as well when looking for what's this help text.
 .PP
 See also add().
 .SH "TQToolButton * TQWhatsThis::whatsThisButton ( TQWidget * parent )\fC [static]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqwheelevent.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqwheelevent.3qt
index 3521b62af..97499b993 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqwheelevent.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqwheelevent.3qt
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ Clearing the accept parameter indicates that the event receiver does not want th
 .PP
 See also accept().
 .SH "bool QWheelEvent::isAccepted () const"
-Returns TRUE if the receiver of the event handles the wheel event; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the receiver of the event handles the wheel event; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "Orientation QWheelEvent::orientation () const"
 Returns the wheel's orientation.
 .SH "const TQPoint & QWheelEvent::pos () const"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqwidget.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqwidget.3qt
index 418f0de23..cb93bc969 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqwidget.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqwidget.3qt
@@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ Inherited by TQButton, TQFrame, TQDialog, TQComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView,
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetSizePolicy\fR ( TQSizePolicy )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBsetSizePolicy\fR ( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )"
+.BI "void \fBsetSizePolicy\fR ( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual int \fBheightForWidth\fR ( int w ) const"
@@ -429,13 +429,13 @@ Inherited by TQButton, TQFrame, TQDialog, TQComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView,
 .BI "void \fBupdateGeometry\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBreparent\fR ( TQWidget * parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBreparent\fR ( TQWidget * parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBreparent\fR ( TQWidget * parent, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = FALSE )"
+.BI "void \fBreparent\fR ( TQWidget * parent, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = false )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void recreate ( TQWidget * parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = FALSE )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
+.BI "void recreate ( TQWidget * parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = false )  \fI(obsolete)\fR"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBerase\fR ()"
@@ -492,16 +492,16 @@ Inherited by TQButton, TQFrame, TQDialog, TQComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView,
 .BI "virtual bool \fBcustomWhatsThis\fR () const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQWidget * \fBparentWidget\fR ( bool sameWindow = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "TQWidget * \fBparentWidget\fR ( bool sameWindow = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "WFlags \fBtestWFlags\fR ( WFlags f ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQWidget * \fBchildAt\fR ( int x, int y, bool includeThis = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "TQWidget * \fBchildAt\fR ( int x, int y, bool includeThis = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "TQWidget * \fBchildAt\fR ( const TQPoint & p, bool includeThis = FALSE ) const"
+.BI "TQWidget * \fBchildAt\fR ( const TQPoint & p, bool includeThis = false ) const"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "void \fBsetWindowOpacity\fR ( double level )"
@@ -561,13 +561,13 @@ Inherited by TQButton, TQFrame, TQDialog, TQComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView,
 .BI "void \fBrepaint\fR ( bool erase )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBrepaint\fR ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBrepaint\fR ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBrepaint\fR ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBrepaint\fR ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "void \fBrepaint\fR ( const TQRegion & reg, bool erase = TRUE )"
+.BI "void \fBrepaint\fR ( const TQRegion & reg, bool erase = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "virtual void \fBshow\fR ()"
@@ -966,10 +966,10 @@ Inherited by TQButton, TQFrame, TQDialog, TQComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView,
 .BI "void \fBresetInputContext\fR ()"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBcreate\fR ( WId window = 0, bool initializeWindow = TRUE, bool destroyOldWindow = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBcreate\fR ( WId window = 0, bool initializeWindow = true, bool destroyOldWindow = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBdestroy\fR ( bool destroyWindow = TRUE, bool destroySubWindows = TRUE )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBdestroy\fR ( bool destroyWindow = true, bool destroySubWindows = true )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "WFlags \fBgetWFlags\fR () const"
@@ -990,7 +990,7 @@ Inherited by TQButton, TQFrame, TQDialog, TQComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView,
 .BI "virtual void \fBsetKeyCompression\fR ( bool compress )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual void \fBsetMicroFocusHint\fR ( int x, int y, int width, int height, bool text = TRUE, TQFont * f = 0 )"
+.BI "virtual void \fBsetMicroFocusHint\fR ( int x, int y, int width, int height, bool text = true, TQFont * f = 0 )"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -1066,7 +1066,7 @@ focusOutEvent() - called when the widget loses keyboard focus.
 Some widgets will also need to reimplement some of the less common event handlers:
 .IP
 .TP
-mouseMoveEvent() - called whenever the mouse moves while a button is held down. This is useful for, for example, dragging. If you call setMouseTracking(TRUE), you get mouse move events even when no buttons are held down. (Note that applications which make use of mouse tracking are often not very useful on low-bandwidth X connections.) (See also the drag and drop information.)
+mouseMoveEvent() - called whenever the mouse moves while a button is held down. This is useful for, for example, dragging. If you call setMouseTracking(true), you get mouse move events even when no buttons are held down. (Note that applications which make use of mouse tracking are often not very useful on low-bandwidth X connections.) (See also the drag and drop information.)
 .IP
 .TP
 keyReleaseEvent() - called whenever a key is released, and also while it is held down if the key is auto-repeating. In that case the widget receives a key release event and immediately a key press event for every repeat. Note that the Tab and Shift+Tab keys are only passed to the widget if they are not used by the focus-change mechanisms. To force those keys to be processed by your widget, you must reimplement TQWidget::event().
@@ -1156,7 +1156,7 @@ Destroys the widget.
 .PP
 All this widget's children are deleted first. The application exits if this widget is the main widget.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::acceptDrops () const"
-Returns TRUE if drop events are enabled for this widget; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "acceptDrops" property for details.
+Returns true if drop events are enabled for this widget; otherwise returns false. See the "acceptDrops" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWidget::adjustSize ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 Adjusts the size of the widget to fit the contents.
 .PP
@@ -1168,7 +1168,7 @@ Example: xform/xform.cpp.
 .PP
 Reimplemented in TQMessageBox.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::autoMask () const"
-Returns TRUE if the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoMask" property for details.
+Returns true if the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget; otherwise returns false. See the "autoMask" property for details.
 .SH "const TQBrush & TQWidget::backgroundBrush () const"
 Returns the widget's background brush. See the "backgroundBrush" property for details.
 .SH "const TQColor & TQWidget::backgroundColor () const"
@@ -1186,16 +1186,16 @@ Examples:
 Returns the base size of the widget. See the "baseSize" property for details.
 .SH "TQString TQWidget::caption () const"
 Returns the window caption (title). See the "caption" property for details.
-.SH "TQWidget * TQWidget::childAt ( int x, int y, bool includeThis = FALSE ) const"
+.SH "TQWidget * TQWidget::childAt ( int x, int y, bool includeThis = false ) const"
 Returns the visible child widget at pixel position \fI(x, y)\fR in the widget's own coordinate system.
 .PP
-If \fIincludeThis\fR is TRUE, and there is no child visible at \fI(x, y)\fR, the widget itself is returned.
-.SH "TQWidget * TQWidget::childAt ( const TQPoint & p, bool includeThis = FALSE ) const"
+If \fIincludeThis\fR is true, and there is no child visible at \fI(x, y)\fR, the widget itself is returned.
+.SH "TQWidget * TQWidget::childAt ( const TQPoint & p, bool includeThis = false ) const"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Returns the visible child widget at point \fIp\fR in the widget's own coordinate system.
 .PP
-If \fIincludeThis\fR is TRUE, and there is no child visible at \fIp\fR, the widget itself is returned.
+If \fIincludeThis\fR is true, and there is no child visible at \fIp\fR, the widget itself is returned.
 .SH "TQRect TQWidget::childrenRect () const"
 Returns the bounding rectangle of the widget's children. See the "childrenRect" property for details.
 .SH "TQRegion TQWidget::childrenRegion () const"
@@ -1225,7 +1225,7 @@ For visible widgets, this is an approximation of the area not covered by other w
 .PP
 The repaint() function calls this function if necessary, so in general you do not need to call it.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::close ()\fC [slot]\fR"
-Closes this widget. Returns TRUE if the widget was closed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Closes this widget. Returns true if the widget was closed; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 First it sends the widget a TQCloseEvent. The widget is hidden if it accepts the close event. The default implementation of TQWidget::closeEvent() accepts the close event.
 .PP
@@ -1236,9 +1236,9 @@ Examples:
 .SH "bool TQWidget::close ( bool alsoDelete )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
-Closes this widget. Returns TRUE if the widget was closed; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Closes this widget. Returns true if the widget was closed; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-If \fIalsoDelete\fR is TRUE or the widget has the WDestructiveClose widget flag, the widget is also deleted. The widget can prevent itself from being closed by rejecting the TQCloseEvent it gets. A close events is delivered to the widget no matter if the widget is visible or not.
+If \fIalsoDelete\fR is true or the widget has the WDestructiveClose widget flag, the widget is also deleted. The widget can prevent itself from being closed by rejecting the TQCloseEvent it gets. A close events is delivered to the widget no matter if the widget is visible or not.
 .PP
 The TQApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is emitted when the last visible top level widget is closed.
 .PP
@@ -1272,20 +1272,20 @@ The default implementation calls e->ignore(), which rejects the context event. S
 See also event() and TQContextMenuEvent.
 .PP
 Example: menu/menu.cpp.
-.SH "void TQWidget::create ( WId window = 0, bool initializeWindow = TRUE, bool destroyOldWindow = TRUE )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQWidget::create ( WId window = 0, bool initializeWindow = true, bool destroyOldWindow = true )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 Creates a new widget window if \fIwindow\fR is 0, otherwise sets the widget's window to \fIwindow\fR.
 .PP
-Initializes the window (sets the geometry etc.) if \fIinitializeWindow\fR is TRUE. If \fIinitializeWindow\fR is FALSE, no initialization is performed. This parameter only makes sense if \fIwindow\fR is a valid window.
+Initializes the window (sets the geometry etc.) if \fIinitializeWindow\fR is true. If \fIinitializeWindow\fR is false, no initialization is performed. This parameter only makes sense if \fIwindow\fR is a valid window.
 .PP
-Destroys the old window if \fIdestroyOldWindow\fR is TRUE. If \fIdestroyOldWindow\fR is FALSE, you are responsible for destroying the window yourself (using platform native code).
+Destroys the old window if \fIdestroyOldWindow\fR is true. If \fIdestroyOldWindow\fR is false, you are responsible for destroying the window yourself (using platform native code).
 .PP
-The TQWidget constructor calls create(0,TRUE,TRUE) to create a window for this widget.
+The TQWidget constructor calls create(0,true,true) to create a window for this widget.
 .SH "const TQCursor & TQWidget::cursor () const"
 Returns the cursor shape for this widget. See the "cursor" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::customWhatsThis () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the widget wants to handle What's This help manually; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "customWhatsThis" property for details.
-.SH "void TQWidget::destroy ( bool destroyWindow = TRUE, bool destroySubWindows = TRUE )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-Frees up window system resources. Destroys the widget window if \fIdestroyWindow\fR is TRUE.
+Returns true if the widget wants to handle What's This help manually; otherwise returns false. See the "customWhatsThis" property for details.
+.SH "void TQWidget::destroy ( bool destroyWindow = true, bool destroySubWindows = true )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+Frees up window system resources. Destroys the widget window if \fIdestroyWindow\fR is true.
 .PP
 destroy() calls itself recursively for all the child widgets, passing \fIdestroySubWindows\fR for the \fIdestroyWindow\fR parameter. To have more control over destruction of subwidgets, destroy subwidgets selectively first.
 .PP
@@ -1381,7 +1381,7 @@ The main event handler first passes an event through all event filters that have
 .PP
 Key press and release events are treated differently from other events. event() checks for Tab and Shift+Tab and tries to move the focus appropriately. If there is no widget to move the focus to (or the key press is not Tab or Shift+Tab), event() calls keyPressEvent().
 .PP
-This function returns TRUE if it is able to pass the event over to someone (i.e. someone wanted the event); otherwise returns FALSE.
+This function returns true if it is able to pass the event over to someone (i.e. someone wanted the event); otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also closeEvent(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), enterEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), leaveEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(), moveEvent(), paintEvent(), resizeEvent(), TQObject::event(), and TQObject::timerEvent().
 .PP
@@ -1405,9 +1405,9 @@ The default implementation updates the widget (except for toplevel widgets that
 .PP
 See also focusOutEvent(), focusPolicy, keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), event(), and TQFocusEvent.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild ( bool next )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate for Tab and Shift+Tab, and returns TRUE if is can find a new widget and FALSE if it can't,
+Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate for Tab and Shift+Tab, and returns true if is can find a new widget and false if it can't,
 .PP
-If \fInext\fR is TRUE, this function searches "forwards", if \fInext\fR is FALSE, it searches "backwards".
+If \fInext\fR is true, this function searches "forwards", if \fInext\fR is false, it searches "backwards".
 .PP
 Sometimes, you will want to reimplement this function. For example, a web browser might reimplement it to move its "current active link" forwards or backwards, and call TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild() only when it reaches the last or first link on the "page".
 .PP
@@ -1488,7 +1488,7 @@ This widget receives all mouse events until releaseMouse() is called; other widg
 .PP
 It is almost never necessary to grab the mouse when using Qt, as TQt grabs and releases it sensibly. In particular, TQt grabs the mouse when a mouse button is pressed and keeps it until the last button is released.
 .PP
-Note that only visible widgets can grab mouse input. If isVisible() returns FALSE for a widget, that widget cannot call grabMouse().
+Note that only visible widgets can grab mouse input. If isVisible() returns false for a widget, that widget cannot call grabMouse().
 .PP
 See also releaseMouse(), grabKeyboard(), releaseKeyboard(), grabKeyboard(), and focusWidget().
 .SH "void TQWidget::grabMouse ( const TQCursor & cursor )"
@@ -1502,11 +1502,11 @@ The cursor will assume shape \fIcursor\fR (for as long as the mouse focus is gra
 .PP
 See also releaseMouse(), grabKeyboard(), releaseKeyboard(), and cursor.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::hasFocus () const"
-Returns TRUE if this widget (or its focus proxy) has the keyboard input focus; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "focus" property for details.
+Returns true if this widget (or its focus proxy) has the keyboard input focus; otherwise returns false. See the "focus" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::hasMouse () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget is under the mouse cursor; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "underMouse" property for details.
+Returns true if the widget is under the mouse cursor; otherwise returns false. See the "underMouse" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::hasMouseTracking () const"
-Returns TRUE if mouse tracking is enabled for the widget; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "mouseTracking" property for details.
+Returns true if mouse tracking is enabled for the widget; otherwise returns false. See the "mouseTracking" property for details.
 .SH "int TQWidget::height () const"
 Returns the height of the widget excluding any window frame. See the "height" property for details.
 .SH "int TQWidget::heightForWidth ( int w ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -1559,15 +1559,15 @@ The default implementation calls e->ignore(), which rejects the Input Method eve
 .PP
 See also event() and TQIMEvent.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isActiveWindow () const"
-Returns TRUE if this widget is the active window; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "isActiveWindow" property for details.
+Returns true if this widget is the active window; otherwise returns false. See the "isActiveWindow" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isDesktop () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget is a desktop widget, i.e. represents the desktop; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "isDesktop" property for details.
+Returns true if the widget is a desktop widget, i.e. represents the desktop; otherwise returns false. See the "isDesktop" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isDialog () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget is a dialog widget; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "isDialog" property for details.
+Returns true if the widget is a dialog widget; otherwise returns false. See the "isDialog" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "enabled" property for details.
+Returns true if the widget is enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "enabled" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isEnabledTo ( TQWidget * ancestor ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this widget would become enabled if \fIancestor\fR is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this widget would become enabled if \fIancestor\fR is enabled; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 This is the case if neither the widget itself nor every parent up to but excluding \fIancestor\fR has been explicitly disabled.
 .PP
@@ -1579,35 +1579,35 @@ See also enabled and enabled.
 .PP
 This function is deprecated. It is equivalent to isEnabled()
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isFocusEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget accepts keyboard focus; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "focusEnabled" property for details.
+Returns true if the widget accepts keyboard focus; otherwise returns false. See the "focusEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isFullScreen () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget is full screen; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "fullScreen" property for details.
+Returns true if the widget is full screen; otherwise returns false. See the "fullScreen" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isHidden () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget is explicitly hidden; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "hidden" property for details.
+Returns true if the widget is explicitly hidden; otherwise returns false. See the "hidden" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isInputMethodEnabled () const"
 Returns enables or disables the use of input methods for this widget. See the "inputMethodEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isMaximized () const"
-Returns TRUE if this widget is maximized; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "maximized" property for details.
+Returns true if this widget is maximized; otherwise returns false. See the "maximized" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isMinimized () const"
-Returns TRUE if this widget is minimized (iconified); otherwise returns FALSE. See the "minimized" property for details.
+Returns true if this widget is minimized (iconified); otherwise returns false. See the "minimized" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isModal () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget is a modal widget; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "isModal" property for details.
+Returns true if the widget is a modal widget; otherwise returns false. See the "isModal" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isPopup () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget is a popup widget; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "isPopup" property for details.
+Returns true if the widget is a popup widget; otherwise returns false. See the "isPopup" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isShown () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget is shown; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "shown" property for details.
+Returns true if the widget is shown; otherwise returns false. See the "shown" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isTopLevel () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget is a top-level widget; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "isTopLevel" property for details.
+Returns true if the widget is a top-level widget; otherwise returns false. See the "isTopLevel" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isUpdatesEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if updates are enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "updatesEnabled" property for details.
+Returns true if updates are enabled; otherwise returns false. See the "updatesEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isVisible () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget is visible; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "visible" property for details.
+Returns true if the widget is visible; otherwise returns false. See the "visible" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::isVisibleTo ( TQWidget * ancestor ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this widget would become visible if \fIancestor\fR is shown; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this widget would become visible if \fIancestor\fR is shown; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-The TRUE case occurs if neither the widget itself nor any parent up to but excluding \fIancestor\fR has been explicitly hidden.
+The true case occurs if neither the widget itself nor any parent up to but excluding \fIancestor\fR has been explicitly hidden.
 .PP
-This function will still return TRUE if the widget is obscured by other windows on the screen, but could be physically visible if it or they were to be moved.
+This function will still return true if the widget is obscured by other windows on the screen, but could be physically visible if it or they were to be moved.
 .PP
 isVisibleTo(0) is identical to isVisible().
 .PP
@@ -1670,7 +1670,7 @@ See also raise() and stackUnder().
 .SH "bool TQWidget::macEvent ( MSG * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive native Macintosh events.
 .PP
-In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the event being handled by Qt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this native event is passed back to Qt, which translates the event into a TQt event and sends it to the widget.
+In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the event being handled by Qt, return true. If you return false, this native event is passed back to Qt, which translates the event into a TQt event and sends it to the widget.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR This function is not portable.
 .PP
@@ -1789,11 +1789,11 @@ The old position is accessible through TQMoveEvent::oldPos().
 .PP
 See also resizeEvent(), event(), pos, and TQMoveEvent.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::ownCursor () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget uses its own cursor; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "ownCursor" property for details.
+Returns true if the widget uses its own cursor; otherwise returns false. See the "ownCursor" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::ownFont () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget uses its own font; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "ownFont" property for details.
+Returns true if the widget uses its own font; otherwise returns false. See the "ownFont" property for details.
 .SH "bool TQWidget::ownPalette () const"
-Returns TRUE if the widget uses its own palette; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "ownPalette" property for details.
+Returns true if the widget uses its own palette; otherwise returns false. See the "ownPalette" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWidget::paintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive paint events.
 .PP
@@ -1827,8 +1827,8 @@ Reimplement this function if your widget needs to know when its palette changes.
 See also palette and palette.
 .SH "const TQColor & TQWidget::paletteForegroundColor () const"
 Returns the foreground color of the widget. See the "paletteForegroundColor" property for details.
-.SH "TQWidget * TQWidget::parentWidget ( bool sameWindow = FALSE ) const"
-Returns the parent of this widget, or 0 if it does not have any parent widget. If \fIsameWindow\fR is TRUE and the widget is top level returns 0; otherwise returns the widget's parent.
+.SH "TQWidget * TQWidget::parentWidget ( bool sameWindow = false ) const"
+Returns the parent of this widget, or 0 if it does not have any parent widget. If \fIsameWindow\fR is true and the widget is top level returns 0; otherwise returns the widget's parent.
 .PP
 Example: mdi/application.cpp.
 .SH "void TQWidget::polish ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
@@ -1855,7 +1855,7 @@ After this call the widget will be visually in front of any overlapping sibling
 See also lower() and stackUnder().
 .PP
 Example: showimg/showimg.cpp.
-.SH "void TQWidget::recreate ( TQWidget * parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = FALSE )"
+.SH "void TQWidget::recreate ( TQWidget * parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = false )"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 This method is provided to aid porting from TQt 1.0 to 2.0. It has been renamed reparent() in TQt 2.0.
@@ -1869,10 +1869,10 @@ See also grabKeyboard(), grabMouse(), and releaseMouse().
 Releases the mouse grab.
 .PP
 See also grabMouse(), grabKeyboard(), and releaseKeyboard().
-.SH "void TQWidget::repaint ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = TRUE )\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQWidget::repaint ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = true )\fC [slot]\fR"
 Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() immediately, unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.
 .PP
-If \fIerase\fR is TRUE, TQt erases the area \fI(x, y, w, h)\fR before the paintEvent() call.
+If \fIerase\fR is true, TQt erases the area \fI(x, y, w, h)\fR before the paintEvent() call.
 .PP
 If \fIw\fR is negative, it is replaced with \fCwidth() - x\fR, and if \fIh\fR is negative, it is replaced width \fCheight() - y\fR.
 .PP
@@ -1891,28 +1891,28 @@ This version erases and repaints the entire widget.
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 This version repaints the entire widget.
-.SH "void TQWidget::repaint ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = TRUE )\fC [slot]\fR"
+.SH "void TQWidget::repaint ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = true )\fC [slot]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() directly, unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.
 .PP
-Erases the widget region \fIr\fR if \fIerase\fR is TRUE.
-.SH "void TQWidget::repaint ( const TQRegion & reg, bool erase = TRUE )\fC [slot]\fR"
+Erases the widget region \fIr\fR if \fIerase\fR is true.
+.SH "void TQWidget::repaint ( const TQRegion & reg, bool erase = true )\fC [slot]\fR"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() directly, unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.
 .PP
-Erases the widget region \fIreg\fR if \fIerase\fR is TRUE.
+Erases the widget region \fIreg\fR if \fIerase\fR is true.
 .PP
 Only use repaint if your widget needs to be repainted immediately, for example when doing some animation. In all other cases, use update(). Calling update() many times in a row will generate a single paint event.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR If you call repaint() in a function which may itself be called from paintEvent(), you may get infinite recursion. The update() function never causes recursion.
 .PP
 See also update(), paintEvent(), updatesEnabled, and erase().
-.SH "void TQWidget::reparent ( TQWidget * parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = FALSE )\fC [virtual]\fR"
+.SH "void TQWidget::reparent ( TQWidget * parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = false )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Reparents the widget. The widget gets a new \fIparent\fR, new widget flags (\fIf\fR, but as usual, use 0) at a new position in its new parent (\fIp\fR).
 .PP
-If \fIshowIt\fR is TRUE, show() is called once the widget has been reparented.
+If \fIshowIt\fR is true, show() is called once the widget has been reparented.
 .PP
 If the new parent widget is in a different top-level widget, the reparented widget and its children are appended to the end of the tab chain of the new parent widget, in the same internal order as before. If one of the moved widgets had keyboard focus, reparent() calls clearFocus() for that widget.
 .PP
@@ -1923,7 +1923,7 @@ If the new parent widget is in the same top-level widget as the old parent, repa
 See also getWFlags().
 .PP
 Example: toplevel/options.ui.h.
-.SH "void TQWidget::reparent ( TQWidget * parent, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = FALSE )"
+.SH "void TQWidget::reparent ( TQWidget * parent, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt = false )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 A convenience version of reparent that does not take widget flags as argument.
@@ -2010,7 +2010,7 @@ Sets the window caption (title). See the "caption" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setCursor ( const TQCursor & )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the cursor shape for this widget. See the "cursor" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setDisabled ( bool disable )\fC [slot]\fR"
-Disables widget input events if \fIdisable\fR is TRUE; otherwise enables input events.
+Disables widget input events if \fIdisable\fR is true; otherwise enables input events.
 .PP
 See the enabled documentation for more information.
 .PP
@@ -2097,7 +2097,7 @@ Sets the widget's icon text. See the "iconText" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setInputMethodEnabled ( bool b )"
 Sets enables or disables the use of input methods for this widget to \fIb\fR. See the "inputMethodEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setKeyCompression ( bool compress )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
-Enables key event compression, if \fIcompress\fR is TRUE, and disables it if \fIcompress\fR is FALSE.
+Enables key event compression, if \fIcompress\fR is true, and disables it if \fIcompress\fR is false.
 .PP
 Key compression is off by default (except for TQLineEdit and TQTextEdit), so widgets receive one key press event for each key press (or more, since autorepeat is usually on). If you turn it on and your program doesn't keep up with key input, TQt may try to compress key events so that more than one character can be processed in each event.
 .PP
@@ -2138,14 +2138,14 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 This function corresponds to setMaximumSize( TQSize(\fImaxw\fR, \fImaxh\fR) ). Sets the maximum width to \fImaxw\fR and the maximum height to \fImaxh\fR.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setMaximumWidth ( int maxw )"
 Sets the widget's maximum width to \fImaxw\fR. See the "maximumWidth" property for details.
-.SH "void TQWidget::setMicroFocusHint ( int x, int y, int width, int height, bool text = TRUE, TQFont * f = 0 )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "void TQWidget::setMicroFocusHint ( int x, int y, int width, int height, bool text = true, TQFont * f = 0 )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 When a widget gets focus, it should call setMicroFocusHint() with some appropriate position and size, \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR. This has no \fIvisual\fR effect, it just provides hints to any system-specific input handling tools.
 .PP
-The \fItext\fR argument should be TRUE if this is a position for text input.
+The \fItext\fR argument should be true if this is a position for text input.
 .PP
-In the Windows version of Qt, this method sets the system caret, which is used for user Accessibility focus handling. If \fItext\fR is TRUE, it also sets the IME composition window in Far East Asian language input systems.
+In the Windows version of Qt, this method sets the system caret, which is used for user Accessibility focus handling. If \fItext\fR is true, it also sets the IME composition window in Far East Asian language input systems.
 .PP
-In the X11 version of Qt, if \fItext\fR is TRUE, this method sets the XIM "spot" point for complex language input handling.
+In the X11 version of Qt, if \fItext\fR is true, this method sets the XIM "spot" point for complex language input handling.
 .PP
 The font \fIf\fR is a rendering hint to the currently active input method. If \fIf\fR is 0 the widget's font is used.
 .PP
@@ -2186,7 +2186,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 Sets the x (width) size increment to \fIw\fR and the y (height) size increment to \fIh\fR.
 .SH "void TQWidget::setSizePolicy ( TQSizePolicy )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Sets the default layout behavior of the widget. See the "sizePolicy" property for details.
-.SH "void TQWidget::setSizePolicy ( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE )"
+.SH "void TQWidget::setSizePolicy ( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = false )"
 This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function.
 .PP
 Sets the size policy of the widget to \fIhor\fR, \fIver\fR and \fIhfw\fR (height for width).
@@ -2254,7 +2254,7 @@ Sets the level of opacity for the window to \fIlevel\fR. See the "windowOpacity"
 .SH "void TQWidget::setWindowState ( uint windowState )"
 Sets the window state to \fIwindowState\fR. The window state is a OR'ed combination of TQt::WindowState: WindowMinimized, WindowMaximized, WindowFullScreen and WindowActive.
 .PP
-If the window is not visible (i.e. isVisible() returns FALSE), the window state will take effect when show() is called. For visible windows, the change is immediate. For example, to toggle between full-screen and mormal mode, use the following code:
+If the window is not visible (i.e. isVisible() returns false), the window state will take effect when show() is called. For visible windows, the change is immediate. For example, to toggle between full-screen and mormal mode, use the following code:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
@@ -2471,7 +2471,7 @@ Returns the width of the widget excluding any window frame. See the "width" prop
 .SH "bool TQWidget::winEvent ( MSG * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive native Windows events.
 .PP
-In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the event being handled by Qt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this native event is passed back to Qt, which translates the event into a TQt event and sends it to the widget.
+In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the event being handled by Qt, return true. If you return false, this native event is passed back to Qt, which translates the event into a TQt event and sends it to the widget.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR This function is not portable.
 .PP
@@ -2501,7 +2501,7 @@ Returns the x coordinate of the widget relative to its parent including any wind
 .SH "bool TQWidget::x11Event ( XEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive native X11 events.
 .PP
-In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the event being handled by Qt, return TRUE. If you return FALSE, this native event is passed back to Qt, which translates the event into a TQt event and sends it to the widget.
+In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the event being handled by Qt, return true. If you return false, this native event is passed back to Qt, which translates the event into a TQt event and sends it to the widget.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR This function is not portable.
 .PP
@@ -2512,7 +2512,7 @@ Returns the y coordinate of the widget relative to its parent and including any
 .SH "bool acceptDrops"
 This property holds whether drop events are enabled for this widget.
 .PP
-Setting this property to TRUE announces to the system that this widget \fImay\fR be able to accept drop events.
+Setting this property to true announces to the system that this widget \fImay\fR be able to accept drop events.
 .PP
 If the widget is the desktop (TQWidget::isDesktop()), this may fail if another application is using the desktop; you can call acceptDrops() to test if this occurs.
 .PP
@@ -2522,7 +2522,7 @@ Set this property's value with setAcceptDrops() and get this property's value wi
 .SH "bool autoMask"
 This property holds whether the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget.
 .PP
-Transparent widgets use a mask to define their visible region. TQWidget has some built-in support to make the task of recalculating the mask easier. When setting auto mask to TRUE, updateMask() will be called whenever the widget is resized or changes its focus state. Note that you must reimplement updateMask() (which should include a call to setMask()) or nothing will happen.
+Transparent widgets use a mask to define their visible region. TQWidget has some built-in support to make the task of recalculating the mask easier. When setting auto mask to true, updateMask() will be called whenever the widget is resized or changes its focus state. Note that you must reimplement updateMask() (which should include a call to setMask()) or nothing will happen.
 .PP
 Note: when you re-implement resizeEvent(), focusInEvent() or focusOutEvent() in your custom widgets and still want to ensure that the auto mask calculation works, you should add:
 .PP
@@ -2640,7 +2640,7 @@ Set this property's value with setCursor(), get this property's value with curso
 .SH "bool customWhatsThis"
 This property holds whether the widget wants to handle What's This help manually.
 .PP
-The default implementation of customWhatsThis() returns FALSE, which means the widget will not receive any events in Whats This mode.
+The default implementation of customWhatsThis() returns false, which means the widget will not receive any events in Whats This mode.
 .PP
 The widget may leave What's This mode by calling TQWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode(), with or without actually displaying any help text.
 .PP
@@ -2756,7 +2756,7 @@ Get this property's value with height().
 .SH "bool hidden"
 This property holds whether the widget is explicitly hidden.
 .PP
-If FALSE, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its ancestors became visible.
+If false, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its ancestors became visible.
 .PP
 See also hide(), show(), visible, isVisibleTo(), and shown.
 .PP
@@ -2782,7 +2782,7 @@ This property holds enables or disables the use of input methods for this widget
 .PP
 Most Widgets (as eg. buttons) that do not handle text input should have the input method disabled if they have focus. This is the default.
 .PP
-If a widget handles text input it should set this property to TRUE.
+If a widget handles text input it should set this property to true.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setInputMethodEnabled() and get this property's value with isInputMethodEnabled().
 .SH "bool isActiveWindow"
@@ -2790,7 +2790,7 @@ This property holds whether this widget is the active window.
 .PP
 The active window is the window that contains the widget that has keyboard focus.
 .PP
-When popup windows are visible, this property is TRUE for both the active window \fIand\fR for the popup.
+When popup windows are visible, this property is true for both the active window \fIand\fR for the popup.
 .PP
 See also setActiveWindow() and TQApplication::activeWindow().
 .PP
@@ -2938,7 +2938,7 @@ Set this property's value with setMouseTracking() and get this property's value
 .SH "bool ownCursor"
 This property holds whether the widget uses its own cursor.
 .PP
-If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's cursor.
+If false, the widget uses its parent widget's cursor.
 .PP
 See also cursor.
 .PP
@@ -2946,7 +2946,7 @@ Get this property's value with ownCursor().
 .SH "bool ownFont"
 This property holds whether the widget uses its own font.
 .PP
-If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's font.
+If false, the widget uses its parent widget's font.
 .PP
 See also font.
 .PP
@@ -2954,7 +2954,7 @@ Get this property's value with ownFont().
 .SH "bool ownPalette"
 This property holds whether the widget uses its own palette.
 .PP
-If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's palette.
+If false, the widget uses its parent widget's palette.
 .PP
 See also palette.
 .PP
@@ -3026,7 +3026,7 @@ Get this property's value with rect().
 .SH "bool shown"
 This property holds whether the widget is shown.
 .PP
-If TRUE, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its ancestors became visible.
+If true, the widget is visible or would become visible if all its ancestors became visible.
 .PP
 See also hide(), show(), visible, isVisibleTo(), and hidden.
 .PP
@@ -3106,11 +3106,11 @@ Example:
 .PP
 .nf
 .br
-        setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE );
+        setUpdatesEnabled( false );
 .br
         bigVisualChanges();
 .br
-        setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE );
+        setUpdatesEnabled( true );
 .br
         repaint();
 .br
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetfactory.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetfactory.3qt
index 7f6aa4262..bce5849df 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetfactory.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetfactory.3qt
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ where MyWidgetFactory is your TQWidgetFactory subclass.
 .SH "void TQWidgetFactory::loadImages ( const TQString & dir )\fC [static]\fR"
 If you use a pixmap collection (which is the default for new projects) rather than saving the pixmaps within the .ui XML file, you must load the pixmap collection. TQWidgetFactory looks in the default TQMimeSourceFactory for the pixmaps. Either add it there manually, or call this function and specify the directory where the images can be found, as \fIdir\fR. This is normally the directory called \fCimages\fR in the project's directory.
 .SH "bool TQWidgetFactory::supportsWidget ( const TQString & widget )\fC [static]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the widget factory can create the specified \fIwidget\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the widget factory can create the specified \fIwidget\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQStringList TQWidgetFactory::widgets ()\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns the names of the widgets this factory can create. 
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetitem.3qt
index 040c9a427..5947f35f6 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetitem.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetitem.3qt
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Returns whether this item's widget can make use of more space than sizeHint(). A
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
 .SH "bool TQWidgetItem::isEmpty () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the widget has been hidden; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the widget has been hidden; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Reimplemented from TQLayoutItem.
 .SH "TQSize TQWidgetItem::maximumSize () const\fC [virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetplugin.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetplugin.3qt
index e40eea6e4..f56bfe927 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetplugin.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqwidgetplugin.3qt
@@ -80,9 +80,9 @@ Returns the name of the include file that \fIQt Designer\fR and \fCuic\fR should
 .PP
 The default implementation returns TQString::null.
 .SH "bool TQWidgetPlugin::isContainer ( const TQString & key ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the custom widget of class \fIkey\fR can contain other widgets, e.g. like TQFrame; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the custom widget of class \fIkey\fR can contain other widgets, e.g. like TQFrame; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
-The default implementation returns FALSE.
+The default implementation returns false.
 .SH "TQStringList TQWidgetPlugin::keys () const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 Returns the list of widget keys this plugin supports.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqwindowsmime.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqwindowsmime.3qt
index 79f70b600..42c2a9d2f 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqwindowsmime.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqwindowsmime.3qt
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Destroys a conversion object, removing it from the global list of available conv
 .SH "TQPtrList<TQWindowsMime> TQWindowsMime::all ()\fC [static]\fR"
 Returns a list of all currently defined TQWindowsMime objects.
 .SH "bool TQWindowsMime::canConvert ( const char * mime, int cf )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the convertor can convert (both ways) between \fImime\fR and \fIcf\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the convertor can convert (both ways) between \fImime\fR and \fIcf\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 All subclasses must reimplement this pure virtual function.
 .SH "int TQWindowsMime::cf ( int index )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqwizard.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqwizard.3qt
index b5a22c22a..717cc1eef 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqwizard.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqwizard.3qt
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Inherits TQDialog.
 .SS "Public Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "\fBTQWizard\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )"
+.BI "\fBTQWizard\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 )"
 .br
 .ti -1c
 .BI "\fB~TQWizard\fR ()"
@@ -160,14 +160,14 @@ Example code is available here: wizard/wizard.cpp wizard/wizard.h
 .PP
 See also Abstract Widget Classes, Dialog Classes, and Organizers.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
-.SH "TQWizard::TQWizard ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )"
+.SH "TQWizard::TQWizard ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = false, WFlags f = 0 )"
 Constructs an empty wizard dialog. The \fIparent\fR, \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR and \fIf\fR arguments are passed to the TQDialog constructor.
 .SH "TQWizard::~TQWizard ()"
 Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources, including all pages and controllers.
 .SH "void TQWizard::addPage ( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title )\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Adds \fIpage\fR to the end of the page sequence, with the title, \fItitle\fR.
 .SH "bool TQWizard::appropriate ( TQWidget * page ) const\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Called when the Next button is clicked; this virtual function returns TRUE if \fIpage\fR is relevant for display in the current context; otherwise it is ignored by TQWizard and returns FALSE. The default implementation returns the value set using setAppropriate(). The ultimate default is TRUE.
+Called when the Next button is clicked; this virtual function returns true if \fIpage\fR is relevant for display in the current context; otherwise it is ignored by TQWizard and returns false. The default implementation returns the value set using setAppropriate(). The ultimate default is true.
 .PP
 \fBWarning:\fR The last page of the wizard will be displayed if no page is relevant in the current context.
 .SH "void TQWizard::back ()\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR"
@@ -225,21 +225,21 @@ Removes \fIpage\fR from the page sequence but does not delete the page. If \fIpa
 .SH "void TQWizard::selected ( const TQString & )\fC [signal]\fR"
 This signal is emitted when the current page changes. The parameter contains the title of the selected page.
 .SH "void TQWizard::setAppropriate ( TQWidget * page, bool appropriate )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-If \fIappropriate\fR is TRUE then page \fIpage\fR is considered relevant in the current context and should be displayed in the page sequence; otherwise \fIpage\fR should not be displayed in the page sequence.
+If \fIappropriate\fR is true then page \fIpage\fR is considered relevant in the current context and should be displayed in the page sequence; otherwise \fIpage\fR should not be displayed in the page sequence.
 .PP
 See also appropriate().
 .SH "void TQWizard::setBackEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, page \fIpage\fR has a Back button; otherwise \fIpage\fR has no Back button. By default all pages have this button.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, page \fIpage\fR has a Back button; otherwise \fIpage\fR has no Back button. By default all pages have this button.
 .SH "void TQWizard::setFinish ( TQWidget *, bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
 \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code.
 .PP
 Use setFinishEnabled instead
 .SH "void TQWizard::setFinishEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, page \fIpage\fR has a Finish button; otherwise \fIpage\fR has no Finish button. By default \fIno\fR page has this button.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, page \fIpage\fR has a Finish button; otherwise \fIpage\fR has no Finish button. By default \fIno\fR page has this button.
 .SH "void TQWizard::setHelpEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, page \fIpage\fR has a Help button; otherwise \fIpage\fR has no Help button. By default all pages have this button.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, page \fIpage\fR has a Help button; otherwise \fIpage\fR has no Help button. By default all pages have this button.
 .SH "void TQWizard::setNextEnabled ( TQWidget * page, bool enable )\fC [virtual slot]\fR"
-If \fIenable\fR is TRUE, page \fIpage\fR has a Next button; otherwise the Next button on \fIpage\fR is disabled. By default all pages have this button.
+If \fIenable\fR is true, page \fIpage\fR has a Next button; otherwise the Next button on \fIpage\fR is disabled. By default all pages have this button.
 .SH "void TQWizard::setTitle ( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title )"
 Sets the title for page \fIpage\fR to \fItitle\fR.
 .SH "void TQWizard::setTitleFont ( const TQFont & )"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqwmatrix.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqwmatrix.3qt
index b95922d67..254969cbe 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqwmatrix.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqwmatrix.3qt
@@ -283,17 +283,17 @@ Returns the inverted matrix.
 .PP
 If the matrix is singular (not invertible), the identity matrix is returned.
 .PP
-If \fIinvertible\fR is not 0: the value of \fI*invertible\fR is set to TRUE if the matrix is invertible; otherwise \fI*invertible\fR is set to FALSE.
+If \fIinvertible\fR is not 0: the value of \fI*invertible\fR is set to true if the matrix is invertible; otherwise \fI*invertible\fR is set to false.
 .PP
 See also isInvertible().
 .PP
 Example: t14/cannon.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQWMatrix::isIdentity () const"
-Returns TRUE if the matrix is the identity matrix; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the matrix is the identity matrix; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also reset().
 .SH "bool TQWMatrix::isInvertible () const"
-Returns TRUE if the matrix is invertible; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the matrix is invertible; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also invert().
 .SH "double TQWMatrix::m11 () const"
@@ -380,11 +380,11 @@ Calling this method can be expensive, if rotations or shearing are used. If you
 .PP
 See also TQWMatrix::mapRect().
 .SH "bool TQWMatrix::operator!= ( const TQWMatrix & m ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this matrix is not equal to \fIm\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this matrix is not equal to \fIm\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "TQWMatrix & TQWMatrix::operator*= ( const TQWMatrix & m )"
 Returns the result of multiplying this matrix by matrix \fIm\fR.
 .SH "bool TQWMatrix::operator== ( const TQWMatrix & m ) const"
-Returns TRUE if this matrix is equal to \fIm\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if this matrix is equal to \fIm\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .SH "void TQWMatrix::reset ()"
 Resets the matrix to an identity matrix.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqworkspace.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqworkspace.3qt
index 0a5964ab8..5e72824a1 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqworkspace.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqworkspace.3qt
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ The convenience function windowList() returns a list of all document windows. Th
 .PP
 TQWorkspace provides two built-in layout strategies for child windows: cascade() and tile(). Both are slots so you can easily connect menu entries to them.
 .PP
-If you want your users to be able to work with document windows larger than the actual workspace, set the scrollBarsEnabled property to TRUE.
+If you want your users to be able to work with document windows larger than the actual workspace, set the scrollBarsEnabled property to true.
 .PP
 If the top-level window contains a menu bar and a document window is maximised, TQWorkspace moves the document window's minimize, restore and close buttons from the document window's frame to the workspace window's menu bar. It then inserts a window operations menu at the far left of the menu bar.
 .PP
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ The windows are closed in random order. The operation stops if a window does not
 .PP
 See also closeActiveWindow().
 .SH "bool TQWorkspace::scrollBarsEnabled () const"
-Returns TRUE if the workspace provides scrollbars; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "scrollBarsEnabled" property for details.
+Returns true if the workspace provides scrollbars; otherwise returns false. See the "scrollBarsEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWorkspace::setScrollBarsEnabled ( bool enable )"
 Sets whether the workspace provides scrollbars to \fIenable\fR. See the "scrollBarsEnabled" property for details.
 .SH "void TQWorkspace::tile ()\fC [slot]\fR"
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves esse
 .SH "bool scrollBarsEnabled"
 This property holds whether the workspace provides scrollbars.
 .PP
-If this property is set to TRUE, it is possible to resize child windows over the right or the bottom edge out of the visible area of the workspace. The workspace shows scrollbars to make it possible for the user to access those windows. If this property is set to FALSE (the default), resizing windows out of the visible area of the workspace is not permitted.
+If this property is set to true, it is possible to resize child windows over the right or the bottom edge out of the visible area of the workspace. The workspace shows scrollbars to make it possible for the user to access those windows. If this property is set to false (the default), resizing windows out of the visible area of the workspace is not permitted.
 .PP
 Set this property's value with setScrollBarsEnabled() and get this property's value with scrollBarsEnabled().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqxmlcontenthandler.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqxmlcontenthandler.3qt
index f42807693..2aa8b2deb 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqxmlcontenthandler.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqxmlcontenthandler.3qt
@@ -76,17 +76,17 @@ Some readers report whitespace in element content using the ignorableWhitespace(
 .PP
 A reader may report the character data of an element in more than one chunk; e.g. a reader might want to report "a<b" in three characters() events ("a ", "<" and " b").
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .SH "bool TQXmlContentHandler::endDocument ()\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 The reader calls this function after it has finished parsing. It is called just once, and is the last handler function called. It is called after the reader has read all input or has abandoned parsing because of a fatal error.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .PP
 See also startDocument().
 .SH "bool TQXmlContentHandler::endElement ( const TQString & namespaceURI, const TQString & localName, const TQString & qName )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 The reader calls this function when it has parsed an end element tag with the qualified name \fIqName\fR, the local name \fIlocalName\fR and the namespace URI \fInamespaceURI\fR.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .PP
 See also the namespace description.
 .PP
@@ -96,23 +96,23 @@ Example: xml/tagreader/structureparser.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQXmlContentHandler::endPrefixMapping ( const TQString & prefix )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 The reader calls this function to signal the end of a prefix mapping for the prefix \fIprefix\fR.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .PP
 See also the namespace description.
 .PP
 See also startPrefixMapping().
 .SH "TQString TQXmlContentHandler::errorString ()\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-The reader calls this function to get an error string, e.g. if any of the handler functions returns FALSE.
+The reader calls this function to get an error string, e.g. if any of the handler functions returns false.
 .SH "bool TQXmlContentHandler::ignorableWhitespace ( const TQString & ch )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 Some readers may use this function to report each chunk of whitespace in element content. The whitespace is reported in \fIch\fR.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .SH "bool TQXmlContentHandler::processingInstruction ( const TQString & target, const TQString & data )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 The reader calls this function when it has parsed a processing instruction.
 .PP
 \fItarget\fR is the target name of the processing instruction and \fIdata\fR is the data in the processing instruction.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .SH "void TQXmlContentHandler::setDocumentLocator ( TQXmlLocator * locator )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 The reader calls this function before it starts parsing the document. The argument \fIlocator\fR is a pointer to a TQXmlLocator which allows the application to get the parsing position within the document.
 .PP
@@ -120,11 +120,11 @@ Do not destroy the \fIlocator\fR; it is destroyed when the reader is destroyed.
 .SH "bool TQXmlContentHandler::skippedEntity ( const TQString & name )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 Some readers may skip entities if they have not seen the declarations (e.g. because they are in an external DTD). If they do so they report that they skipped the entity called \fIname\fR by calling this function.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .SH "bool TQXmlContentHandler::startDocument ()\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 The reader calls this function when it starts parsing the document. The reader calls this function just once, after the call to setDocumentLocator(), and before any other functions in this class or in the TQXmlDTDHandler class are called.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .PP
 See also endDocument().
 .PP
@@ -134,11 +134,11 @@ The reader calls this function when it has parsed a start element tag.
 .PP
 There is a corresponding endElement() call when the corresponding end element tag is read. The startElement() and endElement() calls are always nested correctly. Empty element tags (e.g. \fC<x/>\fR) cause a startElement() call to be immediately followed by an endElement() call.
 .PP
-The attribute list provided only contains attributes with explicit values. The attribute list contains attributes used for namespace declaration (i.e. attributes starting with xmlns) only if the namespace-prefix property of the reader is TRUE.
+The attribute list provided only contains attributes with explicit values. The attribute list contains attributes used for namespace declaration (i.e. attributes starting with xmlns) only if the namespace-prefix property of the reader is true.
 .PP
 The argument \fInamespaceURI\fR is the namespace URI, or TQString::null if the element has no namespace URI or if no namespace processing is done. \fIlocalName\fR is the local name (without prefix), or TQString::null if no namespace processing is done, \fIqName\fR is the qualified name (with prefix) and \fIatts\fR are the attributes attached to the element. If there are no attributes, \fIatts\fR is an empty attributes object.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .PP
 See also the namespace description.
 .PP
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Note that startPrefixMapping() and endPrefixMapping() calls are not guaranteed t
 .PP
 The argument \fIprefix\fR is the namespace prefix being declared and the argument \fIuri\fR is the namespace URI the prefix is mapped to.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .PP
 See also the namespace description.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqxmldeclhandler.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqxmldeclhandler.3qt
index 719f78fc5..0de4eecf8 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqxmldeclhandler.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqxmldeclhandler.3qt
@@ -48,21 +48,21 @@ The reader calls this function to report an attribute type declaration. Only the
 .PP
 The reader passes the name of the associated element in \fIeName\fR and the name of the attribute in \fIaName\fR. It passes a string that represents the attribute type in \fItype\fR and a string that represents the attribute default in \fIvalueDefault\fR. This string is one of "#IMPLIED", "#REQUIRED", "#FIXED" or TQString::null (if none of the others applies). The reader passes the attribute's default value in \fIvalue\fR. If no default value is specified in the XML file, \fIvalue\fR is TQString::null.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .SH "TQString TQXmlDeclHandler::errorString ()\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of the handler functions returns FALSE.
+The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of the handler functions returns false.
 .SH "bool TQXmlDeclHandler::externalEntityDecl ( const TQString & name, const TQString & publicId, const TQString & systemId )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 The reader calls this function to report a parsed external entity declaration. Only the effective (first) declaration for each entity is reported.
 .PP
 The reader passes the name of the entity in \fIname\fR, the public identifier in \fIpublicId\fR and the system identifier in \fIsystemId\fR. If there is no public identifier specified, it passes TQString::null in \fIpublicId\fR.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .SH "bool TQXmlDeclHandler::internalEntityDecl ( const TQString & name, const TQString & value )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 The reader calls this function to report an internal entity declaration. Only the effective (first) declaration is reported.
 .PP
 The reader passes the name of the entity in \fIname\fR and the value of the entity in \fIvalue\fR.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and
 reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to
 get the error message.
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqxmldtdhandler.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqxmldtdhandler.3qt
index 97c2c34de..852fb50f7 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqxmldtdhandler.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqxmldtdhandler.3qt
@@ -39,19 +39,19 @@ See also the Introduction to SAX2.
 See also TQXmlDeclHandler, TQXmlContentHandler, TQXmlEntityResolver, TQXmlErrorHandler, TQXmlLexicalHandler, and XML.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "TQString TQXmlDTDHandler::errorString ()\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of the handler functions returns FALSE.
+The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of the handler functions returns false.
 .SH "bool TQXmlDTDHandler::notationDecl ( const TQString & name, const TQString & publicId, const TQString & systemId )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 The reader calls this function when it has parsed a notation declaration.
 .PP
 The argument \fIname\fR is the notation name, \fIpublicId\fR is the notation's public identifier and \fIsystemId\fR is the notation's system identifier.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .SH "bool TQXmlDTDHandler::unparsedEntityDecl ( const TQString & name, const TQString & publicId, const TQString & systemId, const TQString & notationName )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 The reader calls this function when it finds an unparsed entity declaration.
 .PP
 The argument \fIname\fR is the unparsed entity's name, \fIpublicId\fR is the entity's public identifier, \fIsystemId\fR is the entity's system identifier and \fInotationName\fR is the name of the associated notation.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and
 reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to
 get the error message.
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqxmlentityresolver.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqxmlentityresolver.3qt
index 6143f0762..a13cd6078 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqxmlentityresolver.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqxmlentityresolver.3qt
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ See also the Introduction to SAX2.
 See also TQXmlDTDHandler, TQXmlDeclHandler, TQXmlContentHandler, TQXmlErrorHandler, TQXmlLexicalHandler, and XML.
 .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION
 .SH "TQString TQXmlEntityResolver::errorString ()\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of the handler functions returns FALSE.
+The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of the handler functions returns false.
 .SH "bool TQXmlEntityResolver::resolveEntity ( const TQString & publicId, const TQString & systemId, TQXmlInputSource *& ret )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 The reader calls this function before it opens any external entity, except the top-level document entity. The application may request the reader to resolve the entity itself (\fIret\fR is 0) or to use an entirely different input source (\fIret\fR points to the input source).
 .PP
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ The reader deletes the input source \fIret\fR when it no longer needs it, so you
 .PP
 The argument \fIpublicId\fR is the public identifier of the external entity, \fIsystemId\fR is the system identifier of the external entity and \fIret\fR is the return value of this function. If \fIret\fR is 0 the reader should resolve the entity itself, if it is non-zero it must point to an input source which the reader uses instead.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and
 reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to
 get the error message.
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqxmlerrorhandler.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqxmlerrorhandler.3qt
index 15f4cc73d..3d4c65f33 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqxmlerrorhandler.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqxmlerrorhandler.3qt
@@ -48,17 +48,17 @@ A reader might use this function to report a recoverable error. A recoverable er
 .PP
 The reader must continue to provide normal parsing events after invoking this function.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .SH "TQString TQXmlErrorHandler::errorString ()\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of the handler functions returns FALSE.
+The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of the handler functions returns false.
 .SH "bool TQXmlErrorHandler::fatalError ( const TQXmlParseException & exception )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 A reader must use this function to report a non-recoverable error. Details of the error are stored in \fIexception\fR.
 .PP
-If this function returns TRUE the reader might try to go on parsing and reporting further errors; but no regular parsing events are reported.
+If this function returns true the reader might try to go on parsing and reporting further errors; but no regular parsing events are reported.
 .SH "bool TQXmlErrorHandler::warning ( const TQXmlParseException & exception )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 A reader might use this function to report a warning. Warnings are conditions that are not errors or fatal errors as defined by the XML 1.0 specification. Details of the warning are stored in \fIexception\fR.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and
 reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to
 get the error message.
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqxmlinputsource.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqxmlinputsource.3qt
index d540ba12d..a64d898ee 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqxmlinputsource.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqxmlinputsource.3qt
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ All the functions in this class are reentrant when TQt is built with thread supp
 .SS "Protected Members"
 .in +1c
 .ti -1c
-.BI "virtual TQString \fBfromRawData\fR ( const TQByteArray & data, bool beginning = FALSE )"
+.BI "virtual TQString \fBfromRawData\fR ( const TQByteArray & data, bool beginning = false )"
 .br
 .in -1c
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -104,10 +104,10 @@ There are two occasions where a fetch is done implicitly by another function cal
 You don't normally need to use this function if you use next().
 .PP
 See also data(), next(), and TQXmlInputSource().
-.SH "TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData ( const TQByteArray & data, bool beginning = FALSE )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
+.SH "TQString TQXmlInputSource::fromRawData ( const TQByteArray & data, bool beginning = false )\fC [virtual protected]\fR"
 This function reads the XML file from \fIdata\fR and tries to recognize the encoding. It converts the raw data \fIdata\fR into a TQString and returns it. It tries its best to get the correct encoding for the XML file.
 .PP
-If \fIbeginning\fR is TRUE, this function assumes that the data starts at the beginning of a new XML document and looks for an encoding declaration. If \fIbeginning\fR is FALSE, it converts the raw data using the encoding determined from prior calls.
+If \fIbeginning\fR is true, this function assumes that the data starts at the beginning of a new XML document and looks for an encoding declaration. If \fIbeginning\fR is false, it converts the raw data using the encoding determined from prior calls.
 .SH "TQChar TQXmlInputSource::next ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Returns the next character of the input source. If this function reaches the end of available data, it returns TQXmlInputSource::EndOfData. If you call next() after that, it tries to fetch more data by calling fetchData(). If the fetchData() call results in new data, this function returns the first character of that data; otherwise it returns TQXmlInputSource::EndOfDocument.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqxmllexicalhandler.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqxmllexicalhandler.3qt
index 888126ff6..cb8330d21 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqxmllexicalhandler.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqxmllexicalhandler.3qt
@@ -60,17 +60,17 @@ See also TQXmlDTDHandler, TQXmlDeclHandler, TQXmlContentHandler, TQXmlEntityReso
 .SH "bool TQXmlLexicalHandler::comment ( const TQString & ch )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 The reader calls this function to report an XML comment anywhere in the document. It reports the text of the comment in \fIch\fR.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .SH "bool TQXmlLexicalHandler::endCDATA ()\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 The reader calls this function to report the end of a CDATA section.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .PP
 See also startCDATA() and TQXmlContentHandler::characters().
 .SH "bool TQXmlLexicalHandler::endDTD ()\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 The reader calls this function to report the end of a DTD declaration, if any.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .PP
 See also startDTD().
 .SH "bool TQXmlLexicalHandler::endEntity ( const TQString & name )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
@@ -78,15 +78,15 @@ The reader calls this function to report the end of an entity called \fIname\fR.
 .PP
 For every startEntity() call, there is a corresponding endEntity() call. The calls to startEntity() and endEntity() are properly nested.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .PP
 See also startEntity(), TQXmlContentHandler::skippedEntity(), and TQXmlSimpleReader::setFeature().
 .SH "TQString TQXmlLexicalHandler::errorString ()\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of the handler functions returns FALSE.
+The reader calls this function to get an error string if any of the handler functions returns false.
 .SH "bool TQXmlLexicalHandler::startCDATA ()\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 The reader calls this function to report the start of a CDATA section. The content of the CDATA section is reported through the TQXmlContentHandler::characters() function. This function is intended only to report the boundary.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .PP
 See also endCDATA().
 .SH "bool TQXmlLexicalHandler::startDTD ( const TQString & name, const TQString & publicId, const TQString & systemId )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ If the public identifier is missing, \fIpublicId\fR is set to TQString::null. If
 .PP
 All declarations reported through TQXmlDTDHandler or TQXmlDeclHandler appear between the startDTD() and endDTD() calls.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .PP
 See also endDTD().
 .SH "bool TQXmlLexicalHandler::startEntity ( const TQString & name )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ The reader calls this function to report the start of an entity called \fIname\f
 .PP
 Note that if the entity is unknown, the reader reports it through TQXmlContentHandler::skippedEntity() and not through this function.
 .PP
-If this function returns FALSE the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
+If this function returns false the reader stops parsing and reports an error. The reader uses the function errorString() to get the error message.
 .PP
 See also endEntity() and TQXmlSimpleReader::setFeature().
 
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqxmlnamespacesupport.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqxmlnamespacesupport.3qt
index de1851389..a3e8da2e1 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqxmlnamespacesupport.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqxmlnamespacesupport.3qt
@@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate over a copy,
 .SH "void TQXmlNamespaceSupport::processName ( const TQString & qname, bool isAttribute, TQString & nsuri, TQString & localname ) const"
 Processes a raw XML 1.0 name in the current context by removing the prefix and looking it up among the prefixes currently declared.
 .PP
-\fIqname\fR is the raw XML 1.0 name to be processed. \fIisAttribute\fR is TRUE if the name is an attribute name.
+\fIqname\fR is the raw XML 1.0 name to be processed. \fIisAttribute\fR is true if the name is an attribute name.
 .PP
 This function stores the namespace URI in \fInsuri\fR (which will be set to TQString::null if the raw name has an undeclared prefix), and stores the local name (without prefix) in \fIlocalname\fR (which will be set to TQString::null if no namespace is in use).
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqxmlreader.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqxmlreader.3qt
index f9978f27e..6cb017dbb 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqxmlreader.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqxmlreader.3qt
@@ -116,15 +116,15 @@ See also setErrorHandler().
 .SH "bool TQXmlReader::feature ( const TQString & name, bool * ok = 0 ) const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 If the reader has the feature called \fIname\fR, the feature's value is returned. If no such feature exists the return value is undefined.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE if the reader has the feature called \fIname\fR; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: \fI*ok\fR is set to true if the reader has the feature called \fIname\fR; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to false.
 .PP
 See also setFeature() and hasFeature().
 .SH "bool TQXmlReader::hasFeature ( const TQString & name ) const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-Returns \fCTRUE\fR if the reader has the feature called \fIname\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns \fCTRUE\fR if the reader has the feature called \fIname\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also feature() and setFeature().
 .SH "bool TQXmlReader::hasProperty ( const TQString & name ) const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-Returns TRUE if the reader has the property \fIname\fR; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Returns true if the reader has the property \fIname\fR; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 See also property() and setProperty().
 .SH "TQXmlLexicalHandler * TQXmlReader::lexicalHandler () const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ Returns the lexical handler or 0 if none was set.
 .PP
 See also setLexicalHandler().
 .SH "bool TQXmlReader::parse ( const TQXmlInputSource * input )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
-Reads an XML document from \fIinput\fR and parses it. Returns TRUE if the parsing was successful; otherwise returns FALSE.
+Reads an XML document from \fIinput\fR and parses it. Returns true if the parsing was successful; otherwise returns false.
 .PP
 Example: xml/tagreader/tagreader.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQXmlReader::parse ( const TQXmlInputSource & input )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
@@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Example: xml/tagreader/tagreader.cpp.
 .SH "void * TQXmlReader::property ( const TQString & name, bool * ok = 0 ) const\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
 If the reader has the property \fIname\fR, this function returns the value of the property; otherwise the return value is undefined.
 .PP
-If \fIok\fR is not 0: if the reader has the \fIname\fR property \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE.
+If \fIok\fR is not 0: if the reader has the \fIname\fR property \fI*ok\fR is set to true; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to false.
 .PP
 See also setProperty() and hasProperty().
 .SH "void TQXmlReader::setContentHandler ( TQXmlContentHandler * handler )\fC [pure virtual]\fR"
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqxmlsimplereader.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqxmlsimplereader.3qt
index 131493a8c..068365d28 100644
--- a/doc/man/man3/tqxmlsimplereader.3qt
+++ b/doc/man/man3/tqxmlsimplereader.3qt
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ See also XML.
 .SH "TQXmlSimpleReader::TQXmlSimpleReader ()"
 Constructs a simple XML reader with the following feature settings: <center>.nf
 .TS
-l - l. Feature Setting \fIhttp://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces\fR TRUE \fIhttp://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes\fR FALSE \fIhttp://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-whitespace-only-CharData\fR TRUE \fIhttp://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-start-end-entity\fR
+l - l. Feature Setting \fIhttp://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces\fR true \fIhttp://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes\fR false \fIhttp://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-whitespace-only-CharData\fR true \fIhttp://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-start-end-entity\fR
 .TE
 .fi
 </center>
@@ -62,26 +62,26 @@ See also setFeature().
 .SH "TQXmlSimpleReader::~TQXmlSimpleReader ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
 Destroys the simple XML reader.
 .SH "bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parse ( const TQXmlInputSource * input, bool incremental )\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Reads an XML document from \fIinput\fR and parses it. Returns FALSE if the parsing detects an error; otherwise returns TRUE.
+Reads an XML document from \fIinput\fR and parses it. Returns false if the parsing detects an error; otherwise returns true.
 .PP
-If \fIincremental\fR is TRUE, the parser does not return FALSE when it reaches the end of the \fIinput\fR without reaching the end of the XML file. Instead it stores the state of the parser so that parsing can be continued at a later stage when more data is available. You can use the function parseContinue() to continue with parsing. This class stores a pointer to the input source \fIinput\fR and the parseContinue() function tries to read from that input souce. This means that you should not delete the input source \fIinput\fR until you've finished your calls to parseContinue(). If you call this function with \fIincremental\fR TRUE whilst an incremental parse is in progress a new parsing session will be started and the previous session lost.
+If \fIincremental\fR is true, the parser does not return false when it reaches the end of the \fIinput\fR without reaching the end of the XML file. Instead it stores the state of the parser so that parsing can be continued at a later stage when more data is available. You can use the function parseContinue() to continue with parsing. This class stores a pointer to the input source \fIinput\fR and the parseContinue() function tries to read from that input souce. This means that you should not delete the input source \fIinput\fR until you've finished your calls to parseContinue(). If you call this function with \fIincremental\fR true whilst an incremental parse is in progress a new parsing session will be started and the previous session lost.
 .PP
-If \fIincremental\fR is FALSE, this function behaves like the normal parse function, i.e. it returns FALSE when the end of input is reached without reaching the end of the XML file and the parsing cannot be continued.
+If \fIincremental\fR is false, this function behaves like the normal parse function, i.e. it returns false when the end of input is reached without reaching the end of the XML file and the parsing cannot be continued.
 .PP
 See also parseContinue() and TQSocket.
 .PP
 Examples:
 .)l xml/tagreader-with-features/tagreader.cpp and xml/tagreader/tagreader.cpp.
 .SH "bool TQXmlSimpleReader::parseContinue ()\fC [virtual]\fR"
-Continues incremental parsing; this function reads the input from the TQXmlInputSource that was specified with the last parse() command. To use this function, you \fImust\fR have called parse() with the incremental argument set to TRUE.
+Continues incremental parsing; this function reads the input from the TQXmlInputSource that was specified with the last parse() command. To use this function, you \fImust\fR have called parse() with the incremental argument set to true.
 .PP
-Returns FALSE if a parsing error occurs; otherwise returns TRUE.
+Returns false if a parsing error occurs; otherwise returns true.
 .PP
 If the input source returns an empty string for the function TQXmlInputSource::data(), then this means that the end of the XML file has been reached; this is quite important, especially if you want to use the reader to parse more than one XML file.
 .PP
 The case of the end of the XML file being reached without having finished parsing is not considered to be an error: you can continue parsing at a later stage by calling this function again when there is more data available to parse.
 .PP
-This function assumes that the end of the XML document is reached if the TQXmlInputSource::next() function returns TQXmlInputSource::EndOfDocument. If the parser has not finished parsing when it encounters this symbol, it is an error and FALSE is returned.
+This function assumes that the end of the XML document is reached if the TQXmlInputSource::next() function returns TQXmlInputSource::EndOfDocument. If the parser has not finished parsing when it encounters this symbol, it is an error and false is returned.
 .PP
 See also parse() and TQXmlInputSource::next().
 .SH "void TQXmlSimpleReader::setFeature ( const TQString & name, bool value )\fC [virtual]\fR"
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ If the feature is not recognized, it is ignored.
 .PP
 The following features are supported: <center>.nf
 .TS
-l - l. Feature Notes \fIhttp://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces\fR If this feature is TRUE, namespace processing is performed. \fIhttp://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes\fR If this feature is TRUE, the the original prefixed names and attributes used for namespace declarations are reported. \fIhttp://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-whitespace-only-CharData\fR If this feature is TRUE, CharData that only contain whitespace are not ignored, but are reported via TQXmlContentHandler::characters(). \fIhttp://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-start-end-entity\fR
+l - l. Feature Notes \fIhttp://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces\fR If this feature is true, namespace processing is performed. \fIhttp://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes\fR If this feature is true, the the original prefixed names and attributes used for namespace declarations are reported. \fIhttp://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-whitespace-only-CharData\fR If this feature is true, CharData that only contain whitespace are not ignored, but are reported via TQXmlContentHandler::characters(). \fIhttp://trolltech.com/xml/features/report-start-end-entity\fR
 .TE
 .fi
 </center>
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ l - l. Feature Notes \fIhttp://xml.org/sax/features/namespaces\fR If this featur
 .br
         reader.setFeature( "http://xml.org/sax/features/namespace-prefixes",
 .br
-                           TRUE );
+                           true );
 .fi
 .PP
 (Code taken from xml/tagreader-with-features/tagreader.cpp)